2020 Standard Specifications

for Highway Construction

Volume 1 of 2
Adopted November 1, 2020
 2020
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION

VOLUME 1

Adopted November 1, 2020

Construction and Maintenance Branch

Cover Photograph provided by TranBC Flickr site

https://www.flickr.com/photos/tranbc/25142726038/in/album-72157689494520851/
Installing rock-fall protection mesh
Hoffman's Bluff on Trans-Canada Hwy #1, east of Kamloops, BC
Contractor: Emil Anderson Construction Co. Ltd.
50° 43' 37.26" N; 119° 45' 55.49" W

BC MoTI SS 2020 Page I of VIII

Vol. 1 Page 3 of 470
Library and Archives Canada Cataloguing in Publication Data
British Columbia. Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure.
Standard specifications for highway construction – 2020 –

Issued by: Construction and Maintenance Branch

Volume 1:
ISBN 978-0-7726-7951-2 (Print)
ISBN 978-0-7726-7953-6 (PDF)

[For reference only: Companion Volume 2.]

ISBN 978-0-7726-7952-9 (Print)
ISBN 978-0-7726-7954-3 (PDF)

Standard specifications for highway construction

(British Columbia, Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure)

1. Roads – Specifications – British Columbia. 1. Title II. British Columbia.

Construction and Maintenance Branch
BC MoTI SS 2020 Page II of VIII
Vol. 1 Page 4 of 470
 NOTICE TO USERS

Generally, text significantly changed or added since the 2016 edition is shown with single underlining and a vertical
bar in the margin; deletions are marked only by the vertical change bars. Not all changes are marked. Minor
corrections such as typos have not been marked.

Extensively modified Sections are watermarked as “Revised Section”; new Sections are watermarked “New Section”,
and neither have updates marked.

To obtain the 2020 Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, Volumes 1 & 2
• Order online at www.crownpub.bc.ca/ , in the “search” field type in 7680003611 [or click on the number to
be hyperlinked to the order page], the Queen’s Printer stock number, select the item and click the “add to
cart” button or enter your customer number and postal code and click the logon button to access government
pricing. You will require a credit card to process this order. (Information is stored on a secure server.)

• Mail in a Company Cheque, Money Order or Certified Cheque payable to the Minister of Finance to:
Crown Publications, Queen’s Printer for BC.
Box 9452, Stn Prov Govt
Victoria BC V8W 9V7

• Phone toll free 1 (800) 663-6105 or locally in Victoria at (250) 387-6409, with your credit card or and we
will place the order for you.

Free PDF versions of the current and historical editions of these specifications are available for downloading at:
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/transportation-infrastructure/engineering-standards-
guidelines/standard-specifications-for-highway-construction

Please contact Construction and Maintenance Branch

for questions related to this document.

Construction and Maintenance Branch

Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure
940 Blanshard Street Level 4C
PO Box 9850 STN PROV GOVT
Victoria BC V8W 9T5
E-mail: TranRehab@gov.bc.ca

BC MoTI SS 2020 Page III of VIII

Vol. 1 Page 5 of 470
 THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

BC MoTI SS 2020 Page IV of VIII

Vol. 1 Page 6 of 470
 SS SECTION TITLES
VOLUME ONE CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS:

SECTION 000 – NOTES

SECTION 101 – QUALITY MANAGEMENT

SECTION 108 – SAMPLE FORMS
SECTION 125 – VALUE ENGINEERING PROPOSALS
SECTION 135 – CONSTRUCTION SITE SAFETY [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 145 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY, BRIDGE AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 165 – PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
SECTION 194 – TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT FOR WORK ZONES
SECTION 200 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 201 – ROADWAY AND DRAINAGE EXCAVATION
SECTION 202 – GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE AND SUB–BASES
SECTION 204 – ROCK CUTS
SECTION 205 – RIPRAP [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 206 – ROCK BOLTS
SECTION 207 – SLOPE MESH FOR ROCK CUTS
SECTION 208 – DRAINS FOR ROCK CUTS
SECTION 209 – SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS
SECTION 211 – PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
SECTION 213 – TIMBER BRIDGES – CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 214 – TIMBER PILING CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 215 – BRIDGES
SECTION 216 – COATING OF STEELWORK
SECTION 218 – CONCRETE FOR MINOR WORKS [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 220 – SHOTCRETE AND SOIL ANCHOR WALLS [In development: Not yet available]
SECTION 232 – METAL BIN–WALL
SECTION 303 – CULVERTS [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 308 – COATING SYSTEMS
SECTION 312 – STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIERS [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 316 – STEEL AND WIRE FENCE MATERIALS
SECTION 317 – P.E. PLASTIC DRAINAGE PIPE
SECTION 318 – PVC PLASTIC DRAINAGE PIPE
SECTION 320 – CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE
SECTION 321 – TRAFFIC MARKING PAINT AND SPECIAL MARKINGS
SECTION 407 – FOUNDATION EXCAVATION
SECTION 412 – CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

BC MoTI SS 2020 Page V of VIII

Vol. 1 Page 7 of 470
 SECTION 413 – BRIDGE DECKS AND CONCRETE OVERLAYS
SECTION 415 – MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST AND PRECAST PRESTRESSED
CONCRETE MEMBERS
SECTION 416 – MANUFACTURE AND INSTALLATION OF POST–TENSIONED CONCRETE MEMBERS
SECTION 418 – SILANE TREATMENT OF NEW CONCRETE BRIDGE SURFACES [retitled]
SECTION 419 – CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM – PREFABRICATED
MEMBRANE
SECTION 420 – HOT APPLIED WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASPHALT OVERLAY
[In development: Not yet available]
SECTION 421 – STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
SECTION 422 – MISCELLANEOUS STEELWORK
SECTION 502 – ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS) [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 503 – BASE PREPARATION AND BASE PROCESSING
SECTION 504 – PAVEMENT DRAINAGE
SECTION 505 – USE OF RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT IN ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 507 – PRODUCTION AND STOCKPILING OF ASPHALT MIX
SECTION 508 – GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)
SECTION 511 – COLD MILLING
SECTION 515 – HOT–IN–PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)
SECTION 521 – ASPHALT STABILIZED BASE COURSE MIXED IN PLACE
SECTION 531 – ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS
SECTION 536 – PAVEMENT CRACK SEALING
SECTION 537 – SPRAY PATCHING [NEW SECTION]
SECTION 541 – STONE PAVING [retitled from “RUBBLE MASONRY”]
SECTION 582 – CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 586 – PLANT MIXED PORTLAND CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSE

BC MoTI SS 2020 Page VI of VIII

Vol. 1 Page 8 of 470
 SS SECTION TITLES
VOLUME TWO CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS:

SECTION 000 – NOTES

SECTION 604 – STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIER CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 635 – ELECTRICAL AND SIGNING
SECTION 700 – WILDLIFE EXCLUSION FENCING
SECTION 741 – FENCE CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 751 – TOPSOIL AND LANDSCAPE GRADING
SECTION 754 – PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS
SECTION 757 – REVEGETATION SEEDING
SECTION 766 – IRRIGATION
SECTION 769 – PROTECTION AND RETENTION OF VEGETATION
SECTION 904 – TIMBER (TREATED AND UNTREATED) [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 905 – TIMBER – GLUED LAMINATED
SECTION 906 – ROUND TIMBER PILES
SECTION 908 – PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT – WOOD PRODUCTS [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 909 – TREATED WOOD PRODUCTS [REVISED SECTION]
SECTION 911 – STEEL AND IRON
SECTION 941 – PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIERS
SECTION 942 – PRECAST CONCRETE INTERLOCKING MODULAR BLOCKS [NEW SECTION]
SECTION 952 – CONTRACTOR SUPPLY ASPHALT AND PAVING MATERIALS FOR HIGHWAY USE
SECTION 991 – CALCIUM CHLORIDE AND SODIUM CHLORIDE

THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS HAVE BEEN DELETED:

SECTION 903 – TIMBER – MATERIALS
SECTION 917 – WIRE ROPE
SECTION 933 – ADMIXTURES FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
SECTION 971 – PLASTIC TRAFFIC CONES

BC MoTI SS 2020 Page VII of VIII

Vol. 1 Page 9 of 470
 THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

BC MoTI SS 2020 Page VIII of VIII

Vol. 1 Page 10 of 470
 SECTION 000

NOTES

000.01 Interpretation – Ministry names may have changed is to the applicable clause of the Ministry’s Major Works
from those identified in the Standard Specifications. A list General Conditions.
of current Ministries may be found at the following link
Where the Work is being performed under a different set of
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/governments/org terms and conditions (e.g the Minor Works General
anizational-structure/ministries- Conditions), the reference shall be read as being to the most
organizations/ministries comparable term and condition of the actual Contract.
Upon request by the Contractor, the Ministry Representative In the event there is uncertainty in determining the
will provide clarification as to which Ministry is currently applicable clause, the Ministry Representative will
responsible for any particular reference. determine how the reference is to be interpreted.
000.02 Hyperlinks – In the PDF version of this document, 000.04 Engineer of Record (EoR) / Professional of
many reference sources have been hyperlinked (such as the Record (PoR) – These two terms are used, essentially
reference in Note 000.01) and will show as blue underlined interchangeably, within these Standard Specifications and
text. are based on the Association of Professional Engineers and
Geoscientists of the Province of British Columbia’s
Clicking on the link will open the resource in your web
(APEGBC) definition and recent terminology change from
browser.
EoR to PoR.
Generally, links to test methods and specification
APEGBC’s definition, as expressed within their “Use of
organizations (like CSA or ASTM) will take you to a site
Seal” (and other) Quality Management Guidelines, is:
where you can purchase and download the associated
specifications; a link to a Ministry document, and some Professional of Record: The Engineering / Geoscience
others, within the text of a Section should take you to a Professional or licensee with the lowest level of direct
website where you can download the referenced document professional responsibility for the engineering or geoscience
free of charge. work and any related engineering or geoscience documents
produced, and whose seal appears on the documents. A test
Note: Due to MS Word® prioritizing “Track Changes” of “direct professional responsibility” is the ability of that
formatting over other formatting, some newly inserted Engineering/Geoscience Professional to alter or revise the
hyperlinks are not shown in blue. If there is underlined engineering or geoscience content in the master documents.
black text that looks like it might warrant a hyperlink, hover Whereas APEGBC is concerned only with Professional
your mouse over it to see if it does have an embedded link. Engineers and Geoscientists, usage in these Standard
000.02.01 Disclaimer – Any information, including statutes Specifications may also capture other registered professions
and regulations, that may be found by accessing URLs or such as Registered Professional Foresters (RPF), Registered
websites (including via hyperlinks) in these Standard Professional Biologists (RPBio), and other disciplines, as
Specifications are not the official versions and may not be appropriate to the circumstances.
accurate, complete, current or reliable. Each EoR/PoR is professionally responsible to the Ministry
000.03 General Condition (GC) References – Where for the works they have designed.
these Standard Specifications make a reference to a General
Condition (e.g. GC 38.00 Changes to Work), that reference

BC MoTI SS 2020 000 (1 of 1)

Vol. 1 Page 11 of 470
 SECTION 101

QUALITY MANAGEMENT

101.01 General – All work on Ministry projects shall be Control documentation, verified by the QC Manager, as
undertaken through a total quality management process, required by the Contract.
utilizing Ministry, Contractor and third-party resources, as
The Contractor shall implement a well-coordinated
necessary.
approach to all operations related to the Work and shall
The Contractor shall have a quality management program organize its team and operations in keeping with the goal of
and staff in place and provide the Ministry with documented doing things right the first time.
assurance that any product meets all applicable
101.02 Quality Control Plan (QC Plan)
requirements of the Contract, at any hold point or witness
point (as defined in SS 145.12) and prior to issuance of the 101.02.01 QC Plan General Requirements – The
Completion Certificate. Contractor shall be responsible for all Quality Control
during the performance of the Work. QC work includes
The Ministry accepts the following definitions associated
monitoring, inspecting and testing the means, methods,
with Quality Management:
materials, workmanship, processes and products of all
• Quality Control (QC): The process of checking aspects of the Work as necessary to ensure conformance
specific product or service results to determine if they with the Contract.
comply with relevant quality standards and identifying
The Contractor shall prepare, and submit to the Ministry
ways to eliminate causes of unsatisfactory product or
Representative, a Quality Control Plan (QC Plan) in
service performance.
accordance with the Contract provisions, including
• Quality Assurance (QA): The process of evaluating SS 101.02.03
overall product or service, by persons or companies The QC Plan shall be structured around the ISO 9001
independent of those doing the Work, on a regular basis program although ISO registration is not required, and
to provide confidence that the product or service clearly demonstrate the Contractor’s understanding and
satisfies the relevant quality standards. commitment to ISO’s principles of quality management:
The quality management program has two key components
• Customer focus
as follows:
• Leadership
• Quality Control – the Contractor’s responsibility
• Engagement of people
• Quality Assurance – the Ministry’s responsibility
• Process approach
Each component of the program must address materials,
processes, products, and documentation, utilizing both • Continual improvement
construction inspection measures and standard test
methodologies where appropriate. • Evidence-based decision-making

The Contractor shall provide unrestricted access to all • Relationship Management.

Quality Control operations and documentation produced by The QC Plan must also include sections detailing the
or on behalf of the Contractor and shall allow the Ministry Contractor’s methodology associated with each of the
full access at any time during working hours. above principles.
The Ministry Representative will review the Contractor’s No Work shall be undertaken on any element of Work
performance of the Work and determine the acceptability of (including payment Items and incidental Work, or
the Work based on the Ministry’s Quality Assurance results submittals for review) for which there are QC Plan
and, where deemed appropriate by the Ministry submission requirements until the Ministry has accepted the
Representative, supplemented by the Contractor’s Quality base portion of the QC Plan and the specific details for that
Control results. element of Work.
Work failing to meet the conditions of the Contract will be Subject to the submission requirements outlined in
considered Unacceptable Work. SS 101.02.03, the QC Plan is required to cover the Work in
The Ministry Representative may consider all Work from its entirety, including without limitation all materials the
the last acceptable Quality Assurance testing as Contractor and Subcontractors are supplying, and all items
Unacceptable Work. The Contractor will not be entitled to and phases of construction on the Project.
payment for Work that lacks the appropriate Quality

BC MoTI SS 2020 101 (1 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 12 of 470
SECTION 101 QUALITY MANAGEMENT

The plan may be operated wholly or in part by a qualified and must demonstrate knowledge, skills and abilities
Subcontractor or an independent agency/organization. acceptable to the Ministry Representative. .
However, the plan’s administration (including conformance
The QC Manager shall be at “arms-length” from the
with the plan and its modifications) and the quality of the
productivity part of the Contractor’s organization and
Work remain the responsibility of the Contractor.
specifically shall not be the Project Manager or the Project
The Contractor’s QC program and the Work shall be Superintendent. On Minor Works contracts, this
undertaken in accordance with the QC Plan and shall be requirement will, upon request by the Contractor and where
well managed, with testing results representative of actual the candidate is deemed acceptable under the foregoing
operations. Results will be reported accurately and in a paragraph, generally be waived by the Ministry
timely manner. Representative.
The Contractor shall also ensure that all workers are The Ministry recognizes the Contractor’s Project Manager
familiar with the Quality Management Plans, its goals, and and Superintendent as the personnel responsible for making
their role under it, as well as with the Contract specifications the product meet the contractual requirements, but the QC
associated with the Work they are to undertake. Manager’s duties include being responsible to measure
conformance and to ensure that quality is not compromised
101.02.02 QC Plan Quality Control Staff and Equipment
by production pressures.
Submission Requirements – The Contractor shall provide
all resources and take all actions necessary to ensure: The QC Manager, or a designated replacement acceptable
to the Ministry Representative empowered and able to
• Provision of sufficient inspection or testing staff, with perform all of the QC Manager’s relevant duties, shall
adequate equipment and technical support to perform remain on Site at all times the Contractor is performing
all Quality Control functions in an accurate and timely Work which must be tested or inspected in-process, and
manner. must be readily accessible and able to return when off-Site.
• That QC staff perform only inspections and tests for The QC Plan will include the following information:
which they are qualified.
• the name of the QC Manager and qualifications
• All testing equipment is calibrated, properly establishing a proven capability to provide the specific
maintained, and in good operating condition. services required for the Project;
• All testing and inspection is performed in accordance • the name of QC testing agencies and their proven
with appropriate standards of the Contract. capability to provide the specific services required for
• Submission to the Ministry Representative, within the Project;
twenty-four (24) hours, of daily reports for all tests and • a listing of QC staff (including names, qualifications
inspections that indicate non-conformance of the and relevant experience) and their assigned roles and
material being tested. work scheduling in performing QC duties;
• Production, within forty-eight (48) hours, of daily • a list of testing equipment to be used for the Work.
reports for all tests and inspections that indicate
conformance of the material being tested and the The QC Plan must include an organizational chart showing
availability of back-up documentation to substantiate details of the flow of information, “hold” points,
test results when required. rectification of deficiencies and other relationships and
responsibilities necessary to assure Project quality
• Organization, compilation and submission of all project requirements are met.
QC documentation within 14 days of the last day on
Site and as a condition precedent to the issuance of the The QC Plan should describe how the QC staff are allocated
Completion Certificate. to Project requirements, the tasks assigned to each, and how
their work will be coordinated.
The Contractor shall designate one person as the Quality
Control Manager (QC Manager) who shall be responsible The QC Plan must include a commitment to have every
for the implementation of the QC Plan. submission to the Ministry seeking review or approval to be
accompanied by a QC Checksheet, showing that:
The QC Manager shall be:
(a) the contents of the submission have been reviewed by
• a qualified Professional Engineer, QC staff and signed off by the QC Manager; and
• a Certified Engineering Technician, (b) the submission, including any associated information,
• an Applied Science Technologist, or is
(i) fully compliant with all requirements of the
• shall have extensive relevant experience in quality
Contract, or
management,

BC MoTI SS 2020 101 (2 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 13 of 470
SECTION 101 QUALITY MANAGEMENT

(ii) identifies any non-conformances and • consult with the Contractor Representative and initiate
corrective action on non-conformance;
(A) provides an internal NCR, complete with
proposed corrective action, or • respond to each Non-Conformance Report (NCR)
(B) requests a variance from the Contract issued by the Ministry Representative within the time
provisions including any proposed revised specified in the NCR;
standards to be applicable to the Work and any • schedule testing and inspection services in coordination
compensation offered to the Ministry should with the Contractor’s superintendent and forepersons;
the variance be approved.
• monitor QC testing and inspection procedures
Without limitation, the Contractor’s QC Manager shall: including those of the Subcontractors;
• implement the Contractor’s QC Plan; • work directly with the Ministry Representative on
matters related to QC;
• be responsible for measuring conformance with all
aspects of the contract quality; • ensure required approvals and permits from the
Ministry Representative and others are obtained as and
• stop work when materials, product, processes or when required;
submittals are deficient;
• verify that all testing equipment is properly maintained
• develop inspection and testing plans for each element and kept in good working order;
of Work;
• keep an organized filing system to ensure that quality
• develop acceptance/non-acceptance reports and quality records are easily accessible so that auditors can obtain
control checklists for each element of Work in necessary information;
sufficient detail to gauge conformance with all
significant contractual requirements; • review issued for construction drawings, calculations,
and shop drawings and ensure that all concerned
• undertake quality review activities on the Work and Contractor staff have current versions of documents
Quality Control activities delegated to any Sub- applicable to their part of the Work;
contractors to ensure that their work is compliant with
all terms of the Contract. • notify the Ministry Representative of any changes in
survey layout, location, line, grade, etc., for approval;
• ensure the requirements for quality management notify the company principles of any issues that
(including an overview of how the QC Plan operates, compromise the integrity or function of the Quality
the worker’s role in it, contractual specifications for the Management System, and
Work, and work procedures) are known to, understood
by, and adhered to by all workers on the Site; • provide an auditable trail for survey computations to
the Ministry Representative.
• ensure that all QC checklists are signed-off by
competent and responsible parties as close to the actual 101.02.03 QC Plan Submission Requirements
work as appropriate to the nature of the Work (e.g. by (Contract–Specific) – Each QC Plan submission to the
the actual worker or a foreperson for most work; by a Ministry shall be accompanied by a QC checklist prepared
Professional Engineer for false work erection; etc.) by the Contractor demonstrating that the submission has
been checked for compliance with contractual requirements.
• review, sign, and be responsible for all reports
(materials and testing results); (a) Full Submission
• consult with field inspectors regarding materials and Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, the
testing issues; Contractor’s QC plan shall provide details of the means,
methods, and frequencies of Quality Control measures for
• receive notification by inspectors regarding all elements of Work (whether payment Items or incidental)
deficiencies and ensure re-testing or rejection; in the Contract.
• provide monthly summary reports on testing and (b) Partial Submission
inspection results. Weekly summary reports may be
required if the Ministry Representative finds the On projects considered by the Ministry to be of low
Contractor’s QC to be lacking. complexity and/or risk, and only where explicitly invoked
by the Special Provisions, the Ministry will accept a partial
• initiate the non-conformance process when materials or QC Plan submission.
product do not meet the required specifications and,
inform the Ministry Representative of such non- Notwithstanding any such reduced submission
conformance; requirements, the Contractor remains responsible for QC for
all aspects of the Work.

BC MoTI SS 2020 101 (3 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 14 of 470
SECTION 101 QUALITY MANAGEMENT

The Contractor’s partial QC Plan submission to the Ministry The type and frequency of QC tests shall be established by
Representative is only required to address the details of the the Contractor and shall be in conformance with the
following types of Work: requirements of the Contract, including the minimum
frequencies specified in the Special Provisions and/or
• Traffic Management Standard Specifications (for those listed items applicable to
• Survey/layout the Work), and the current acceptable practice of the
industry.
• Materials incorporated into the Work (concrete barrier,
culverts, filter cloth, lock-blocks, etc.) When materials or equipment are specified by standard or
performance specifications the Contractor shall obtain from
• Compaction (subgrade, embankments, granular suppliers or manufacturers independent test reports, or test
aggregates, culvert backfill, etc.) certificates stating that the materials or equipment meet or
• Aggregate gradation exceed specified requirements. The Contractor shall
provide back-up documentation of actual testing results
• Plus any other elements identified in the Special upon request by the Ministry Representative.
Provisions as a submission requirement.
101.03 Ministry Quality Assurance – The Ministry may
The Contractor shall initiate such other Quality Control prepare and implement a Quality Assurance Plan, based in
procedures as are necessary for ensuring the production of part on the effectiveness and reliability of the Contractor’s
a quality product and may include them in the Quality Quality Control Plan. The Ministry may also undertake
Control Plan submission. random and systematic inspections of the Work and of the
Contractor’s QC documentation.
(c) For Both Full and Partial Submissions
The purpose of the QA Plan and inspectional activities is to
The initial QC Plan shall be submitted to the Ministry
ensure that payment is made only for acceptable works in
Representative a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of
place and may be based on a limited amount of sampling
the Project pre-construction meeting or fourteen (14) days
and testing.
in advance of undertaking any Work on Site, whichever is
earlier, and must provide details of all elements of Work The Ministry Representative will monitor the Contractor’s
anticipated to be undertaken within the Contractor’s first operations and the Quality Control program to assure that
thirty (30) days on Site. standards are being met and to assess what payments have
been earned under the terms of the Contract.
This initial submission must provide complete detail of the
QC methodology to be employed with respect to the Any instances of Unacceptable Work discovered may result
following elements, regardless of when those tasks are in a Non-Conformance Report being issued to the
anticipated to commence: Contractor.
• All elements listed in SS 101.02.02 The QA program activities will not relieve the Contractor of
Quality Control responsibilities under the terms of the
• Traffic Management Contract.
• Site Safety The frequency of QA inspection and testing will generally
Detailed submissions for the balance of the Work must be be approximately zero to ten percent (0 – 10%) of the
received: frequencies undertaken by the Contractor in its QC Plan and
will initially be set at a level commensurate with the
(i) a minimum of fourteen (14) days prior to the Ministry Representative’s confidence in the anticipated
anticipated first day of Work on each element effectiveness of the Contractor’s QC program.
covered by the submission; and
The Ministry Representative may increase or decrease the
(ii) not later than 60 days after the earlier of the pre- frequency of QA inspection and testing during the course of
construction meeting and the date the Contractor the Work, based in part on the actual effectiveness of the
first occupied the Site. Contractor’s QC Plan.
The initial submission, as well as any subsequent The Ministry’s Quality Assurance may also include random
submission or revision, must be accompanied by the and/or targeted quality audits.
Contractor’s QC checklist for Quality Management,
verifying that the submission meets all relevant contractual 101.04 Independent Quality Audit – The Ministry may
requirements. have one or more independent auditors on the Project,
supplementing the work of the Ministry QA staff. When
Improved procedures may be introduced after the start of utilized, the auditor(s) will report to the Ministry
work as necessary as amendments to the Quality Control Representative and provide a systematic and independent
Plan. All amendments require the written acceptance of the assessment of whether or not the materials and Project
Ministry Representative.

BC MoTI SS 2020 101 (4 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 15 of 470
SECTION 101 QUALITY MANAGEMENT

activities and related results comply with the Contract, the until the Ministry Representative determines that a quality
Contractor’s QC Plan, and the Ministry’s QA Plan. These product has been achieved.
independent auditors may be Ministry employees but will
A portion of the payment for a Quality Management may be
be assigned from resources which have not otherwise been
withheld until the NCR issue is resolved or, in accordance
involved with the Work.
with SS 101.07, may be withheld permanently.
The objective of the independent Quality Auditing is to have
Payment for the Work itself may be withheld until the NCR
an impartial opinion on both QC and QA activities and be
issue is resolved.
proactive in avoiding or reducing quality related issues by
requiring the process of conformance verification to be 101.05.03 Opportunity for Improvement – Should the
systematic. QA review indicate that the Work is not in conformance, but
the variance is deemed minor by the Ministry
The auditor(s) will be allowed unrestricted access to the Site
Representative, the Ministry Representative may issue an
and all activities therein, to all testing and documentation of
Opportunity for Improvement (OFI) report.
the work done by the Ministry, Contractor and their agents
and suppliers. The Contractor is encouraged to review the findings and
undertake such modifications to the QC Plan and the work
101.05 Non-Conformance Reports (NCRs) – The
procedures as necessary to address the issue.
Contractor shall and the Ministry may review the Work to
determine conformance with the contractual requirements. An OFI will not affect payment for Quality Management or
for the Work itself.
Non-conformances found shall be dealt with as follows.
101.05.04 Stop Work Order – Should the Ministry
101.05.01 Contractor’s Internal NCR – Should the
Representative determine that the non-conformance is
Contractor’s QC reporting indicate that the Work is not in
significant, the Ministry Representative may issue a Stop
conformance, the QC Manager shall issue an internal Non-
Work Order.
Conformance Report (NCR) to the Contractor, with a copy
to the Ministry, including a response time. 101.06 Appeal – If the Contractor disputes the validity of
any testing or inspection finding in an NCR, the Contractor
The Contractor shall then respond to the QC Manager, with
may file an appeal with the Ministry Representative. An
a copy to the Ministry Representative, with respect to the
appeal under this SS 101.06 is available only for issues of
NCR, within the specified time, with proposed resolutions
assessing compliance of a material, product or process
and corrective actions. The Contractor and/or the QC
against the requirements of the Contract, and not any
Manager may consult with the Ministry Representative on
decision the Ministry may make regarding rectification of
the resolutions but is not required to do so.
the non-compliance.
Payment for a Quality Management will not be affected by
The Ministry Representative and the Contractor
internal NCRs, as long as the issue is diligently pursued and
Representative will use all reasonable efforts to refine the
resolved.
area of dispute and to resolve the determination of
Payment for the Work itself may be withheld until the NCR conformance with the Contract.
issue is resolved.
If the Ministry Representative and the Contractor
101.05.02 Ministry-Issued NCR – Should the Ministry’s Representative cannot come to a mutually agreeable
QA reporting indicate that the Work is not in conformance, resolution, the Work that is the subject of the Non-
or that the Contractor has failed to address an internal NCR Conformance Report shall be re-evaluated by an
within a reasonable period of time, the Ministry independent third-party, selected by the Ministry
Representative may issue to the Contractor a NCR, Representative in consultation with the Contractor.
including a response time. Where appropriate, the Ministry
If the appeal is of test results, the work in question shall be
may issue two NCR’s related to a single issue – one for the
retested at a test frequency equivalent to twice that specified
product itself, and the other for the Contractor’s failure to
in the Contract or to such other frequency as may be
perform Quality Management.
mutually agreed between the Ministry Representative and
The Contractor shall then respond to that NCR, within the the Contractor.
specified time, with proposed resolutions and corrective
If the appeal relates to an inspection, the work in question
actions.
shall be fully re-evaluated for strict compliance with all
The Ministry Representative will accept or reject the applicable terms of the Contract.
proposed resolution and corrective action proposal.
The specific retest or reinspection locations shall be
Assurance testing and inspection will be performed to determined by the Ministry Representative, in consultation
determine if the corrective action has provided an with the Contractor and the independent third-party.
acceptable product. Acceptance and rejection will continue

BC MoTI SS 2020 101 (5 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 16 of 470
SECTION 101 QUALITY MANAGEMENT

If the appeal confirms the non-conformance determination, The Ministry Representative may also reduce the total
all appeal testing and inspection costs will be borne by the Lump Sum payable by the value of any quality management
Contractor. If the appeal shows that the Work did in fact work required but not satisfactorily undertaken during the
meet the requirements of the Contract, all appeal testing and Term of the Contract. The foregoing determinations will be
inspection costs will be borne by the Ministry. made in the sole discretion of the Ministry Representative.
When the value bid for the Quality Management Item is
101.07 Payment – The Lump Sum Price bid for Quality
insufficient to cover the payment reductions, the Ministry
Management shall be full compensation for all costs
Representative may recover the reductions as a back charge
resulting from the Quality Management requirements set
against a Site Modifications Item or any other Item in the
out in the Contract.
Contract.
Payment will be made on a monthly basis prorated for the
Inspection or testing by the Ministry Representative will be
percentage of the total Work completed as determined by
at the Ministry’s cost. However, re-inspection or re-testing
the Ministry Representative, subject to the Contractor being
by the Ministry for repaired or replaced Work items that
totally compliant with the requirements of this Section and
originally did not meet contract requirements shall be at the
with its own Quality Control Plan.
Contractor’s cost.
The Ministry Representative, in consultation with the
Work that is deemed Unacceptable Work will not be eligible
Ministry construction manager following the issuance of a
for payment.
Ministry-issued NCR pursuant to SS 101.05.02 may deduct
an amount from any monthly payment so computed, for any The Completion Certificate will not be issued if there are
quality management work required but not satisfactorily any unresolved Non-Conformance Reports.
undertaken during that month.

BC MoTI SS 2020 101 (6 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 17 of 470
 SECTION 108

SAMPLE FORMS

GENERAL 108.12 Major Works, Minor Works and Operational

Services – Holdback or Security Release – The form
108.01 General – This Section provides sample copies of
attached as Appendix 108-B (Ministry form H0394F) is
forms which the Contractor may be required to execute and
used to meet the Statutory Declaration requirements of the
submit to the Ministry in accordance with the Contract.
Major Works or Minor Works General Conditions or the
Blank copies of these forms are available from the Ministry
Operational Services Contract where final holdback
Representative.
amounts or security (in a form other than a bond) are to be
released by the Ministry.
STATUTORY DECLARATIONS
108.11 Major Works – Final Progress Payment and MINISTRY FORMS
Interim Holdback Release – The form attached as
108.20 Ministry Forms – Electronic copies of many
Appendix 108-A (Ministry form H0394A) is used to meet
Ministry forms (including the Statutory Declarations noted
the Statutory Declaration requirements of the Major Works
above and most forms with an “H-” prefix) are publicly
General Conditions where the final progress payment or
available on the following website:
interim holdback release is to be paid by the Ministry to the
Contractor. https://www.th.gov.bc.ca/forms/search.aspx

BC MoTI SS 2020 108 (1 of 3)

Vol. 1 Page 18 of 470
SECTION 108 SAMPLE FORMS

APPENDIX 108-A – MAJOR WORKS – FINAL PROGRESS PAYMENT

o 2020 108 2 of 3
Vol. 1 Page 19 of 470
SECTION 108 SAMPLE FORMS

APPENDIX 108-B – HOLDBACK / SECURITY RELEASE

o 2020 108 3 of 3
Vol. 1 Page 20 of 470
 SECTION 125

VALUE ENGINEERING PROPOSALS

125.01 Definitions economy of operation, ease of maintenance, aesthetic

considerations, preliminary engineering commitments,
125.01.01 VEP means a value engineering proposal which
or design and safety standards.
has been set out in writing by the Contractor to the Ministry
in accordance with these guidelines. (b) be similar to a change in the Drawings or specifications
under consideration by the Ministry for the Work at the
125.01.02 Summary VEP means a brief summary of a
time the VEP is submitted to the Ministry.
VEP, including the anticipated cost and timing of
developing the VEP, submitted by the Contractor to the (c) increase the anticipated life cycle costs of the Project.
Ministry.
(d) seek a variance to the Contract for an existing non-
125.01.03 Implemented VEP means a value engineering conforming product. Non-conforming Work cannot be
proposal which has been accepted and implemented by made acceptable using this VEP process.
means of a Supplemental Agreement or Work Order.
125.02.03 To be eligible for a Value Engineering Incentive,
125.01.04 Net Cost Savings means an amount determined a VEP must propose a change to the Work which meets the
by the Ministry on the basis of the Contract Price before same constraints, assumptions and considerations as those
implementation of the VEP minus the adjusted Contract which governed the original design of the Work, as it is
Price determined after the implementation of the VEP less defined in the Agreement. Where Changed Conditions, or
the following costs, which are subject to negotiation: other changes, have occurred and have already created the
need for a Change To Work, a VEP which responds to this
(a) the Contractor's costs of developing the VEP;
need will not normally be eligible for a Value Engineering
(b) the Ministry's costs of evaluating the VEP; and Incentive, and in any case will be eligible only for a reduced
incentive.
(c) the anticipated additional administration, engineering,
quality management, and project management costs to 125.02.04 A VEP may involve:
the Ministry resulting from the implementation of the
(a) a material or product substitution.
VEP.
(b) a change to the Work method.
125.01.05 Value Engineering Incentive means an amount
calculated pursuant to written agreement between the (c) a Work sequencing change, including changes to traffic
Ministry and the Contractor, which will generally be equal routing or detour sequences, changes to structure or
to fifty percent (50%) of the Net Cost Savings realized by roadway construction sequences.
the Ministry due to the implementation of the VEP.
(d) a change to the design or engineering of the Project
125.02 Guiding Principles for VEP Evaluation which provides a marked departure from the product as
defined in the Contract Document Package.
125.02.01 To be considered, a VEP must be perceived by
the Ministry to provide a tangible benefit to the Ministry, 125.02.05 Any request by the Contractor for a design
such as: change, or a substitution of material or method, will only be
considered if submitted as a VEP.
(a) a reduction in the total cost of the Project; or
125.03 Value Engineering Proposal Submissions
(b) an improvement to the product which the Ministry
expects will reduce the life cycle costs; or 125.03.01 Prior to presenting a VEP, the Contractor will
prepare a Summary VEP and submit it to the Ministry for
(c) a change in the Construction Schedule which will be
consideration.
beneficial to the Ministry; or
125.03.02 The Ministry will evaluate the Summary VEP
(d) a reduction or transfer of risk which will benefit the
and will advise the Contractor whether or not the Ministry
Ministry;
would be willing to consider, without obligation, the VEP
and should result in a product which is functionally equal or described in the Summary VEP.
superior to that which would result in the absence of the
125.03.03 A VEP should contain the following information:
VEP.
(a) a statement that the proposal is submitted as a VEP.
125.02.02 A VEP should not:
(b) a detailed description of the VEP and the manner in
(a) impair the functionality and characteristics of the
which the VEP should be implemented (by
Project, including, but not limited to, the service life,
Supplemental Agreement or Work Order).

BC MoTI SS 2020 125 (1 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 21 of 470
SECTION 125 VALUE ENGINEERING - PROPOSAL GUIDELINES

(c) a detailed description of the Items and quantities, including without limitation Professional Liability
Drawings, specifications, designs, Completion Date, Insurance and Wrap-Up CGL insurance, for the Works
Milestone Dates or other elements under the associated with the VEP.
Agreement which would be changed, altered, modified
125.05 Associated Technical Circulars
or replaced by the implementation of the VEP.
125.05.01 The Contractor will, for all engineering works
(d) plans and working drawings needed to analyze the VEP
required for each implemented VEP:
and determine the impact of the VEP on the Project.
(a) cause their engineer(s) or other registered
(e) An assessment of any quality assurance reviews that
professional(s) to be responsible for all engineering and
would be in addition to or of a different nature than
field reviews required for the Work included in, or
those the Ministry would typically perform on the
affected by, the VEP;
original design.
(b) comply with the requirements of Ministry Technical
(f) an itemized cost analysis of the Net Cost Savings.
Circular T-06/09 “Engineer of Record and Field
(g) the date, which must be not less than two weeks after Review Guidelines”, or any update or replacement
the date of the VEP, by which the VEP must be thereof, including, without limitation, identifying
implemented in order to maximize the cost reduction Engineers of Record, Professionals of Record, Field
during the remainder of the Agreement. Reviewers, and, if appropriate, a Coordinating
Professional Engineer or Coordinating Registered
125.04 Implementation of a VEP
Professional, and submitting all related letters of
125.04.01 For those VEPs approved by the Ministry, the assurance to the Ministry Representative;
Ministry Representative will prepare a Supplemental
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/driving-and-
Agreement or a Work Order which will set out the Net Cost
transportation/transportation-
Savings, the Change to Work required realizing the Net
infrastructure/engineering-standards-and-
Cost Savings, and the adjustment to the Contract Price(s)
guidelines/technical-circulars/2009/t06-09.pdf
and payment terms resulting from the VEP, in accordance
with these guidelines. (c) coordinate with the Coordinating Professional
Engineer or Coordinating Registered Professional
125.04.02 The Ministry will retain the right to utilize a VEP,
responsible for the original design as tendered by the
or part thereof that has been accepted for the Project, on any
Ministry to ensure that all aspects of engineering
other or subsequent projects without any obligation to the
between the original design and the VEP are covered
Contractor, unless the Contractor has provided written
by the Contractor’s engineers; and
notice in the Summary VEP and the VEP regarding patented
materials or processes involved in the VEP. (d) provide to the Ministry Representative complete signed
and sealed record drawings, electronically and in
125.04.03 The Contractor shall provide and be responsible
original hard copy, prepared in accordance with
for all investigations and studies required for the
Ministry Technical Circular T-07/09 “Record
development and implementation of the VEP.
Drawings Amended April 2010” or any update or
125.04.04 Unless the parties agree otherwise, all Works replacement thereof.
associated with the VEP shall be executed in accordance
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/driving-and-
with the terms and conditions of the Ministry’s Design
transportation/transportation-
Build Minor General Conditions and the Design Build
infrastructure/engineering-standards-and-
Standard Specifications for Highway Construction
guidelines/technical-circulars/2009/t07-09b.pdf
(inclusive of any amendments). The Contractor shall also
provide additional insurance in accordance with INS-172,

BC MoTI SS 2020 125 (2 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 22 of 470
 SECTION 135

CONSTRUCTION SITE SAFETY

135.01 General – This Section describes the within the Site, which is to be reflected in the Notice of
responsibilities of the Contractor for safety on the Site. Project.
Virtually every Ministry project will occur on a “multiple (c) AoR-Specific Safety Plan is a companion document to
employer worksite”, by virtue of the Contractor retaining a Base Safety Plan which identifies specific hazards or
Subcontractors, by the Ministry having retained other conditions affecting an Area of Responsibility and
independent contractors to work on or near the Site, by the designates protocols for mitigation and response for a
Ministry Representative having forces on-Site, or through specific project, consistent with the requirements of the
utilities, municipalities or other entities performing work on Workers Compensation Act and the Regulation
the Site.
(d) Base Safety Program means the occupational health
Under the Workers Compensation Act and Regulation, each and safety program that the Prime Contractor will
of these parties has responsibilities as an “employer” and initiate and maintain within its assigned Area(s) of
may have responsibilities as a “prime contractor” for other Responsibility, all as described in this Section.
employers working on the Site.
(e) Employer means an employer as defined in the Workers
In any area where the operations of the various parties Compensation Act, and includes the Contractor.
overlap or otherwise affects the others, one of those parties
(f) Incident means an accident, Near Miss, or other
will be designated by the Ministry as the Prime Contractor,
occurrence which resulted in or had the potential for
and, as laid out in this Section and the Workers
causing an injury, occupational disease, or property
Compensation Act and Regulation, will have responsibility
damage;
for the overall co-ordination of safety in assigned Area(s) of
Responsibility. (g) Joint Committee means the joint health and safety
committee that shall be established and maintained by
Where the Contractor takes on the role of Prime Contractor,
the Prime Contractor in compliance with the Workers
it continues to have the responsibilities of the Contractor
Compensation Act and the Regulation (see also “Other
and adds those of the Prime Contractor, each as described
Joint Committees”).
in this Section.
(h) Multiple Employer Workplace means, in accordance
Where the Contractor is not the Prime Contractor, but is
with the Workers Compensation Act and the Regulation,
working on a Site which is under the co-ordination of a
a workplace where workers of 2 (two) or more
Prime Contractor designated by the Ministry, they will be
Employers are working at the same time.
responsible for co-operating with the Prime Contractor as
described in this Section. (i) Near Miss means any event that occurred which had the
potential to cause injury or property damage but did not.
135.02 The distinction between the geographic areas of the
“Site” (where the Contractor is to build something under the (j) Notice of Project means the notice of project described
terms of the Contract) and the “Area of Responsibility” in Part 20 of the Regulation.
(where the Contractor or another party is responsible for
(k) Notice of Unsafe or Harmful Condition or Act means
health and safety issues) is important.
the written notice that the Contractor will deliver to any
135.03 Definitions – In this Section, except as otherwise Employer, or other persons, pursuant to SS 135.07, in
expressly provided herein: the form set out in Appendix 135-A.
(a) Adjacent or Nearby Worksite is a multiple employer (l) Other Authorized Party means any entity, other than
workplace described by another Ministry contract, or in the Prime Contractor or Contractor, who has a direct
a written notice that may be issued by a Ministry agreement with the Ministry and may therefore have
Representative, and/or as described in a Notice of contractual obligations to the Ministry and/or the Prime
Project, for which another party has been engaged as Contractor with respect to health and safety issues on the
prime contractor but which may be entered for the Site or Area of Responsibility. Such Other Authorized
purposes of the Contract by the Workers, Suppliers and Parties may include but not be limited to, another
Subcontractors of the Contractor. construction contractor, a Ministry maintenance
contractor, a utility company, a permittee or a licencee.
(b) Area(s) of Responsibility (“AoR”) means one or more
Multiple Employer Workplaces so designated in writing (m) Other Joint Committees means additional committees
by the Ministry, comprised of the Site including that may be established by the Contractor in compliance
additional area(s) outside the Site or excluding area(s) with the Workers Compensation Act and the Regulation.

o 2020 135 1 of 10
Vol. 1 Page 23 of 470
SECTION 135 CONSTRUCTION SITE SAFETY

(n) Other Persons means any entity, who is not the Prime (w) Workers’ Compensation Board (“WCB” or
Contractor, Contractor or an Other Authorized Party, “WorkSafeBC”) means the Workers’ Compensation
who, for whatever reason or purpose, are on the Site or Board constituted under the Workers Compensation
Area of Responsibility and do not have contractual Act.
responsibilities to the Ministry or the Prime Contractor.
135.04 Ministry
As examples, such Other Persons would include, but not
be limited to, the public, the RCMP, and WorkSafe BC. 135.04.01 The Ministry may designate one or more Areas
of Responsibility, each with a single Prime Contractor.
(o) Prime Contractor means a prime contractor as defined
in Section 13 of the Workers Compensation Act, and 135.04.02 The Ministry may, in its sole discretion, appoint
Part 20 of the Regulation. in writing:
(p) Qualified Coordinator means the person, who meets (a) the Contractor,
the qualifications of a qualified coordinator described in
(b) a party other than the Contractor, or
the Regulation, and who is appointed by the Prime
Contractor to discharge for the Area of Responsibility, (c) the Ministry
the responsibilities of a qualified coordinator as
described in the Workers Compensation Act and the to be the Prime Contractor for one or more Areas of
Regulation. Responsibility and will notify the Contractor in writing of
that appointment.
(q) Qualified Person means the person who meets the
qualifications of a qualified person described in the 135.04.03 The Ministry may at any time, in its sole
Workers Compensation Act and the Regulation, and discretion and in writing, change or revoke any appointment
who is designated by the Contractor to discharge for the of the Prime Contractor or designation of any Area of
Site the responsibilities of a qualified person as Responsibility.
described in the Workers Compensation Act and the 135.04.04 Any designation or appointment made pursuant
Regulation. to SS 135.04.01 to SS 135.04.03 will include:
(r) Regulation means the British Columbia Regulation (a) a description of the geographic Area of Responsibility,
296/97 entitled Occupational Health and Safety and
Regulation prescribed under the Workers Compensation
Act, as amended from time to time. (b) the time and date, or condition, that the designation or
appointment comes into effect.
(s) Safety Requirements means the compendium of all
requirements related to health and safety applicable to 135.04.05 Receipt and retention by the Ministry of the
the Work, including without limitation, the Workers information and documentation listed in this Section in no
Compensation Act, the Occupational Health and Safety way constitutes approval of or authorization of the form,
Regulation, the Mines Act, the Health, Safety and content or adequacy of such information and documentation
Reclamation Code for Mines in British Columbia, the on the part of the Ministry.
Base Safety Program, the AoR-Specific Safety Plan(s), 135.05 Prime Contractor
the Traffic Management Manual, the Contract, and this
SS 135. 135.05.01 Acknowledgement of Assignment as Prime
Contractor – Upon notification of such appointment, the
(t) Traffic Management Manual [“TMM”] means the Contractor shall deliver written confirmation to the
current edition of the Traffic Management Manual for Ministry of its acknowledgement to being the Prime
Work on Roadways, as published by the Ministry and Contractor for the Area of Responsibility.
including all amendments, available for download from
135.05.02 Prime Contractor Responsibilities – The Prime
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/tra Contractor shall, for each assigned Area of Responsibility:
nsportation-infrastructure/engineering-standards-
guidelines/traffic-engineering- (a) ensure that all required Notices of Project have been
safety/trafficmanagementmanual/2020trafficmanagem prepared, accurately reflect the Area of Responsibility
entmanual and Prime Contractor assignment, are submitted to the
Workers’ Compensation Board and are posted within
(u) Workers mean the employees, workers, servants, the Area of Responsibility,
agents or invitees of Employers, including of the
Contractor, at the Site. (b) at the sole cost of the Prime Contractor, provide, post
and maintain 2 (two) signs, in accordance with the
(v) Workers Compensation Act means the Workers specifications, which contain the informational
Compensation Act, R.S.B.C. 2019, c.1 as amended messaging stipulated in Drawing SP135-01 of this
from time to time. Section, at locations satisfactory to the Ministry
Representative,

o 2020 135 2 of 10
Vol. 1 Page 24 of 470
SECTION 135 CONSTRUCTION SITE SAFETY

(c) appoint and maintain a Qualified Coordinator, meeting limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Plan shall
the qualifications of a “qualified coordinator” as provide:
described in the Workers Compensation Act and the
(i) the name of the person(s) designated to supervise
Regulation, and notify the Ministry Representative and
the Works,
all Employers working within the Area of
Responsibility of any changes to the appointment. The (ii) the name of the Qualified Coordinator,
duties of the Qualified Coordinator include:
(iii) the name(s) and certification level(s) of first aid
(i) to perform the functions of the “qualified attendant(s) and a means of summoning an
coordinator” as described in the Regulation, attendant,
(ii) to ensure the coordination of health and safety (iv) a system for identifying foreseeable and known
activities for the Area of Responsibility, including hazards that may affect Workers and Employers,
establishing Joint Committees and holding
(v) a system for communicating hazards to Employers
meetings and maintaining records thereof,
and Workers and ensuring Employers notify the
(iii) ensure all Employers and Workers are informed of Prime Contractor of undertakings likely to create a
hazards created, and hazard,
(iv) ensure that the hazards are addressed throughout (vi) that the quality management systems of all
the duration of the work activities, Employers operating within the Area of
Responsibility include provisions for the review of
(d) ensure all other Employers designate and at all times
the Safety Requirements and the Contractor’s
maintain not less than one Qualified Person to be
compliance with those requirements,
responsible for the Employer’s health and safety
activities connection with the Work, including (vii) a set of construction procedures designed to
administering the Safety Requirements, address hazards and protect the health and safety
of Workers,
(e) ensure periodic crew safety meetings are held, and
minutes kept, to inform the Workers of any known or (viii) emergency response procedures which address
reasonably foreseeable risks on the Area of potential hazards, or impacts to the AoR, during
Responsibility and the actions to be taken to eliminate regular and after hours work activities, including
or minimize those risks, but not limited to:
(f) ensure appropriate first aid resources meeting • first aid response and coordination
Regulatory requirements are always present at the Area
of Responsibility, • the provision of first aid supplies, equipment and
facilities
(g) ensure the availability of first aid attendants and that
they are only assigned duties that allow them to respond • identification of, and directions to, medical aid,
immediately without any resulting risk to the workers including the means of transportation of injured
or the public. workers

(h) ensure safe access for delivery of equipment and • the method of notifying workers, Employers and
material, others the notification methods for evacuating
the AoR and identification of appropriate muster
(i) create, implement and maintain an AoR-Specific stations,
Safety Plan, and submit that Plan to the Ministry
Representative for review and acceptance, a minimum (ix) a drawing showing the project layout, first aid
of seven (7) days prior to Work commencing. The locations, emergency transportation provisions
submission shall include a Quality Control check sheet, and the evacuation marshalling station,
identifying that all items in this SS 135.05.02(i) have (x) measures to ensure:
been addressed and are compliant with all Safety
Requirements • regular inspections are carried out,
The AoR-Specific Safety Plan must be provided to all • all Workers and visitors receive an occupational
contractors and Employers within the Area of health and safety orientation,
Responsibility, and must explain and demonstrate how
safety will be managed within that Area, without • regular site safety and toolbox meetings are held,
including by other Employers,
• any Incidents are reported, investigated, and
reviewed in accordance with SS 135.05.02(j)
and SS 135.05.02(k)

o 2020 135 3 of 10
Vol. 1 Page 25 of 470
SECTION 135 CONSTRUCTION SITE SAFETY

(j) immediately notify the Ministry Representative of any be satisfied, including the establishment and
Incident that the Prime Contractor becomes aware of maintenance of a Joint Committee,
that:
(b) the activities of all Employers, Workers and Other
(i) resulted in serious injury to or the death of a Persons at the Area of Responsibility and relating to
worker, occupational health and safety will be coordinated,
(ii) involved a major structural failure or collapse of a (c) reasonably practicable measures are taken to establish
building, bridge, tower, crane, hoist, temporary and maintain a system or process to ensure compliance
construction support system or excavation, with the Safety Requirements in respect of the Area of
Responsibility, including ensuring regular health and
(iii) involved the major release of a hazardous
safety inspections are carried out by each Employer,
substance, or
(d) the Prime Contractor, all Other Authorized Parties, all
(iv) was an incident required by the Regulation to be
Workers, Employers, and Other Persons
reported. or
(i) are made aware of all known or reasonably
(v) materially impacts the movement of traffic or
foreseeable health and safety hazards to which they
presents a safety concern for the travelling public.
may be exposed on the Area of Responsibility,
(k) ensure any of the above Incidents, and any others
(ii) notify the Prime Contractor of any operations they
resulting in medical aid, property damage in excess of
plan to undertake that may create new hazards, and
five thousand dollars ($5,000.00), or involving
members of the public are reviewed and investigated, (iii) are instructed in the terms of the Safety
and that incident reports are provided to the Ministry Requirements,
Representative within 72 hours from the time of
(e) complete and accurate reports, records and documents
occurrence, and
relating to occupational health and safety activities at
(l) when requested by the Ministry Representative, shall the Area of Responsibility, or related to the Work, will
prepare and provide a statistical summary, on Ministry be established, maintained, reviewed and assessed on
form H-1024 (link below), of all health and safety an ongoing basis,
records applicable to the Area of Responsibility and
(f) safety equipment and apparel are properly used and
covering the period requested by the Ministry
worn by Workers and Other Persons, as required
Representative.
pursuant to the Safety Requirements, and
https://www.th.gov.bc.ca/forms/getForm.aspx?
(g) a first aid program in compliance with the Safety
formId=783
Requirements is established, implemented and
(m) follow the Notice Process specified in SS 135.08 maintained at all times on the Area of Responsibility.
whenever an unsafe or harmful condition or act occurs
135.05.04 The Prime Contractor will determine and control
in the Area of Responsibility or on an Adjacent or
the manner in which the Base Safety Program is established,
Nearby Worksite,
initiated, and maintained and the manner in which the
135.05.03 Base Safety Program – Notwithstanding the instructions, directions, rules, policies and procedures
limitation relating to the requirement for initiating and contained therein are carried out.
maintaining an occupational health and safety program set
135.05.05 Prime Contractor Obligations to Cooperate
out in the Regulation, the Prime Contractor will and submit
with Adjacent or Nearby Sites – If another party is the
to the Ministry Representative, a Base Safety Program a
prime contractor in connection with another Adjacent or
minimum of seven (7) days prior to the commencement of
Nearby Worksite or Area of Responsibility, the Prime
work, or as requested by the Ministry Representative.
Contractor:
The Prime Contractor will initiate and at all times maintain,
(a) will continue to undertake and perform the obligations
at the Area of Responsibility, the Base Safety Program
of a Prime Contractor in the Area of Responsibility at
which will be designed to prevent injuries and occupational
all times in accordance with the terms of the Safety
diseases within the contemplation of the Safety
Requirements,
Requirements, describe how the Prime Contractor will meet
the requirements of SS 135.05.02 and, without limiting the (b) will advise the other party in writing of the name of the
generality of the foregoing, will describe how the Prime Qualified Coordinator, and of any change in the
Contractor will ensure that: Qualified Coordinator, designated to be responsible for
the health and safety activities on or in connection with
(a) the requirements of an occupational health and safety
the Area of Responsibility, and any activities in the
program as stipulated in the Safety Requirements will
Adjacent or Nearby Worksite,

o 2020 135 4 of 10
Vol. 1 Page 26 of 470
SECTION 135 CONSTRUCTION SITE SAFETY

(c) will co-operate with the other party so as to foregoing, administering the Safety Requirements, as
accommodate any requests that may be issued by the they applies to the Contractor,
other party to cooperate the health and safety activities
(j) deliver written notice to the Prime Contractor of any
on the Adjacent or Nearby Worksite, and
change in the appointed Qualified Person referenced in
(d) may request the cooperation and accommodation of SS 135.06.02(a),
prime contractors on Adjacent or Nearby Worksites to
(k) participate in the Joint Committee and ensure that the
ensure the health and safety activities in the Area of
Contractor’s Workers attend periodic safety meetings
Responsibility are compliant with the Safety
established by the Prime Contractor including the
Requirements.
Prime Contractor’s site safety orientation,
135.05.06 When requested, the Prime Contractor shall
(l) establish and participate in Other Joint Committees and
provide to the Ministry Representative copies of any records
periodic crew safety meetings to inform the workers of
mentioned in SS 135.05.
any known or reasonably foreseeable risks on the Site
135.06 Contractor and the actions to be taken to eliminate or minimize
those risks, and maintain minutes of those meetings,
135.06.01 The Contractor, by entering into the Contract,
agrees to, for the purposes of the Workers Compensation (m) establish and maintain at a location on the Site, or at a
Act and the Regulation, the designation of the Prime location off the Site that is satisfactory to the Prime
Contractor and the Area(s) of Responsibility made by the Contractor, accurate records, including supporting
Ministry pursuant to SS 135.01.01 to SS 135.04.03. documents, relating to the Contractor’s
implementation, operation, and maintenance of the
135.06.02 The Contractor will, prior to commencement of
Safety Requirements,
the Work,
(n) make copies of the Safety Requirements readily
(a) deliver to the Prime Contractor, in writing: the name of
available at the Site,
each of the Qualified Persons in connection with the
Site, and (o) provide and maintain the Site in a manner that ensures
the health and safety of persons at or near the Site,
(b) a description of the works the Contractor will be
undertaking in the Prime Contractor’s Area of (p) ensure that the Prime Contractor is given the
Responsibility, information known to the Contractor that is necessary
to identify and eliminate or control hazards to the health
(c) a copy of all Notices of Project.
or safety of Workers and Other Persons at the Site,
(d) the Contractor will, in connection with the Work and
(q) ensure that the Prime Contractor, Workers, Employers
the Site:
and Other Persons are made aware of all known or
(e) observe, abide by and comply with the Safety reasonably foreseeable health and safety hazards to
Requirements, including providing any first aid which they are likely to be exposed by the Work on the
resources, necessary for the Contractor’s operations, Site,
which are beyond those provided through the Prime
(r) do everything that is reasonably practicable to establish
Contractor,
and maintain a system or process that will ensure
(f) ensure all required Notices of Project have been compliance with the Safety Requirements with respect
submitted to the Workers’ Compensation Board in to the Site,
accordance with the Workers Compensation Act and
(s) immediately notify the Prime Contractor, Employers,
the Regulation, and that other agencies are notified as
Workers, Suppliers and Subcontractors of the
specified in the Safety Requirements
Contractor, Other Authorized Parties, and Other
(g) prominently post and at all times maintain on the AoR Persons of any hazard created by virtue of overlapping
all Notices of Project in accordance with the Workers or adjoining work activities of two (2) or more
Compensation Act and the Regulation, Employers and ensure that the hazards are addressed
throughout the duration of such activities,
(h) ensure that the person or persons to be appointed
Qualified Person meet the qualifications of a “qualified (t) immediately notify the Prime Contractor and Ministry
person” as described in the Workers Compensation Act Representative of the occurrence of any Incident that:
and the Regulation,
(i) resulted in serious injury to or the death of a
(i) designate and at all times maintain not less than one worker,
Qualified Person to be responsible for health and safety
(ii) involved a major structural failure or collapse of a
activities of the Contractor in connection with the
building, bridge, tower, crane, hoist, temporary
Work, including, without limiting the generality of the
construction support system or excavation,

o 2020 135 5 of 10
Vol. 1 Page 27 of 470
SECTION 135 CONSTRUCTION SITE SAFETY

(iii) involved the major release of a hazardous (xi) such other information as the Prime Contractor
substance, or may request.
(iv) was an incident required by the Regulation to be 135.06.03 Payment Conditional Upon Documentation –
reported. or The delivery of any payments by the Ministry to the
Contractor under the Contract is conditional on the prior
(v) materially impacts the movement of traffic or
submission to the Prime Contractor by the Contractor, of the
presents a safety concern for the travelling public.
documentation required under this Section.
(u) ensure any of the above Incidents, and any others
135.07 Other Authorized Parties
resulting in medical aid, property damage in excess of
five thousand dollars ($5,000.00), or involving 135.07.01 All Other Authorized Parties shall comply with
members of the public are, reviewed, investigated and the health and safety related terms and conditions of their
that incident reports are provided to the Prime respective agreements with the Ministry, and upon request
Contractor within seventy-two (72) hours from the time shall provide a copy of those terms and conditions to the
of occurrence. Ministry Representative and the Prime Contractor.
(v) comply with any directive related to occupational 135.07.02 Where the terms of their specific agreement
health and safety matters issued by the Prime appear to be inconsistent with the requirements of the Prime
Contractor, and Contractor for any Area of Responsibility, the Other
Authorized Party shall cooperate with the Prime Contractor
(w) provide to the Prime Contractor:
and the Ministry in resolving any such inconsistency.
(i) the name of the person designated to supervise the
135.07.03 Should the Other Authorized Party’s agreement
Contractor’s Workers,
with the Ministry not contain any health and safety
(ii) the name of the Qualified Person(s), coordination responsibilities, the Other Authorized Party
shall be subject to any health and safety requirements
(iii) copies of safety meeting records and toolbox talks,
established by the Prime Contractor.
(iv) copies of worksite inspections,
135.08 Notice Process
(v) any and all notices, directives and inspection 135.08.01 Any Employer who becomes aware of an unsafe
reports which have been delivered to the Workers’ or harmful condition or act shall provide notice to the Prime
Compensation Board by the Contractor or which
Contractor in that Area of Responsibility.
the Contractor has received from the Workers’
Compensation Board, Ministry of Energy, Mines 135.08.02 If the Prime Contractor, in connection with the
and Petroleum Resources, or other regulatory Area of Responsibility, determines, in its reasonable
body, discretion, that:
(vi) a list of known site hazards and of any operations (a) any Employer or its Workers has failed to comply with
the Contractor is planning on undertaking that are the Safety Requirements, and
likely to create a hazard, and updates as hazards
(b) the failure creates or may create an unsafe or harmful
change,
condition in the Area of Responsibility that poses a
(vii) immediate notification of any incidents, including danger of injury or death to Workers,
near misses,
the Prime Contractor, may issue a Notice of Unsafe or
(viii) incident investigation reports, Harmful Condition or Act to the applicable Employer,
stipulating in reasonable detail the basis for the issuance of
(ix) a written summary of the actions taken by the
the Notice of Unsafe or Harmful Condition or Act, and the
Contractor to coordinate, in conjunction with the
Prime Contractor, will deliver a copy of the Notice of
Prime Contractor, the occupational health and
Unsafe or Harmful Condition or Act to the Ministry
safety activities of the Employers, the Workers,
Representative.
and the Other Persons within the Site,
135.08.03 For the purposes of this SS 135.08, the terms
(x) statistical summaries, on Ministry form H-1024
“Employer” and “Workers” will not include the Prime
(link below), as necessary to respond to a request
Contractor’s Subcontractors or Suppliers, or their respective
initiated by the Ministry Representative,
employees, workers, servants, agents or invitees, as the
https://www.th.gov.bc.ca/forms/getForm.aspx? Prime Contractor is directly responsible for the actions of
formId=783 those parties.
and 135.08.04 Upon receipt of the Notice of Unsafe or Harmful
Condition or Act, the Ministry Representative will issue to
the applicable Employer a Stop Work Order at the location

o 2020 135 6 of 10
Vol. 1 Page 28 of 470
SECTION 135 CONSTRUCTION SITE SAFETY

in the Area of Responsibility that is specified in the Notice thereof to the applicable Employer and to the Ministry
of Unsafe or Harmful Condition or Act. Representative.
135.08.05 The Ministry will be deemed to have relied on 135.08.08 The Ministry Representative will issue a Resume
the terms of and reasons for the issuance of the Notice of Work Order on receipt of the endorsed copy cancelling the
Unsafe or Harmful Condition or Act, notwithstanding any Notice of Unsafe or Harmful Condition or Act.
subsequent investigation or inquiry of the matter by the
135.08.09 If the Prime Contractor is delayed in performing
Ministry which the Ministry may but will not be obligated
the Work as a result of being required to issue the Notice of
to undertake.
Unsafe or Harmful Condition or Act and the Work is
135.08.06 If the Prime Contractor and the Employer stopped pursuant to an Stop Work Order under SS 135.07,
referenced in SS 135.08.02 fail to agree on the reasons for then the Completion Date will be extended by the number
the issuance of the Notice of Unsafe or Harmful Condition of days equal to the delay, as determined in the sole
or Act, then within one day of the issuance of the Notice of discretion of the Ministry Representative, and the Prime
Unsafe or Harmful Condition or Act, the directive of the Contractor will not be entitled to any compensation, in
Prime Contractor to rectify the failure to comply with Safety damages or otherwise, including without limiting the
Requirements, will be immediately implemented. generality of the foregoing, any claim for lost profits or
other consequential loss, including business loss, as a result
135.08.07 When the failure to comply with the Safety
of or in connection with the issuance and operation of any
Requirements stipulated in the Notice of Unsafe or Harmful
Notice of Unsafe or Harmful Condition or Act or the
Condition or Act has been rectified, to the reasonable
issuance and operation of any Stop Work Order pursuant to
satisfaction of the Prime Contractor, by the Employer to
this Section.
whom it was given to, the Prime Contractor, will
immediately: 135.08.10 Notwithstanding any other term of this Section or
of the Contract, the Ministry may withhold any payment due
(a) withdraw the Notice of Unsafe or Harmful Condition
to the Contractor under the Contract if the Prime Contractor
or Act by endorsing on a copy thereof confirmation that
has issued, in connection with the Site, a Notice of Unsafe
the failure to comply with the Safety Requirements has
or Harmful Condition or Act in accordance with this
been rectified.
Section, and the Ministry may continue to withhold such
(b) deliver the endorsed copy of the Notice of Unsafe or payment until such time as the Notice of Unsafe or Harmful
Harmful Condition or Act confirming the cancellation Condition or Act has been cancelled and the Resume Work
Order has been issued.

o 2020 135 7 of 10
Vol. 1 Page 29 of 470
SECTION 135 CONSTRUCTION SITE SAFETY

APPENDIX 135-A

PRIME CONTRACTOR’S NOTICE OF UNSAFE OR HARMFUL

CONDITION OR ACT (the “Notice”)

o e a ee e eP e o a o o
a e of o a o
e

e follo g afe o a f l o o o a a o e e a e follo g lo a o a e

e o of afe o a f l o o o a

o a o ae e P

e o a o a e o e e e o o e e a o e efe e e afe o a f l o o o a
o o e fo ga oe o a a e lo a o e f e a o e.

P e o a o

g a e ae e P

e e a o le ge e o a o
g a e ae e P

e e e e a e e e e a o of o eo ae e P

e a of o e e e e e a e ll ea o o e o e o e afe
o a f l o o o a a e fe o o e.

eP e o a o ll f a f e a e afe o a f l o o o a a ee e fe a el a
a o e.

a e of a ella o a al e P
P e o a o g a e

e e e e a e ll ea e e o e e e e fo eP e o a o of
o ee o e o ae a e afe o a f l o o o a a e e fe .

DISTRIBUTION: g al o a o o e e e a e le o P e o a o

o 2020 135 8 of 9
Vol. 1 Page 30 of 470
SECTION 135 CONSTRUCTION SITE SAFETY

o 2020 135 9 of 9
Vol. 1 Page 31 of 470
 SECTION 145

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR

HIGHWAY, BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

145.01 General Requirements – This Section covers the from the Drawings. Actual payment quantities will be
general Work requirements for highway, bridge, and marine measured, calculated, or otherwise determined in
construction. accordance with the Contract.
The standards and materials specifications contained in the 145.06 Unit Prices – Unit Prices in the Schedule of
Standard Specifications for Highway Construction govern Approximate Quantities and Unit Prices shall be complete
the specific requirements for the Work. Special Provisions and contain all the elements of cost involved, provision of
provide additional specific requirements for the Work and all things, superintendence and profits. The price shall stand
supersede the Standard Specifications where there is independent of any other Unit Price Item on the Schedule of
conflict. Approximate Quantities and Unit Prices.
Specifications, standards, regulations and codes of other 145.07 Pre-construction (Post–Award) Meeting – The
authorities named in full or by acknowledged abbreviations Contractor shall prepare the required documentation in
in the Glossary of Terms of the Standard Specifications or accordance with the Contract, then advise the Ministry
the Contract Document Package shall be adopted by Representative, who will determine the pre-construction
reference. meeting's location and time and notify the Contractor. The
meeting shall be held reasonably soon after Award and is
Such reference in whole or in part by the necessary
intended to afford both parties an opportunity to establish
alphanumerical designation from the latest edition or
relationships and to gain an enhanced understanding of the
revision is intended to fully detail the requirements of the
project and each party’s plans and expectations.
Work.
145.08 Mobilization – Mobilization consists of the
145.02 Reference Information – Reference information
necessary Work and operations including, but not limited to,
for the Work, in the form of General Reference Documents
the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and
and Specific Reference Documents, is identified in the
incidentals to the Site, the establishment of offices, camps,
Tender and the Contract, and is made available under the
and other facilities necessary to undertake the Work and all
conditions specified therein.
other Work Items and operations which must be initiated
145.03 Most Recent Metric Edition – Unless otherwise and finished as part of completion of the Work.
specified, any standard, specification, publication or similar
145.08.01 Payment for Mobilization – Where the Contract
document shall be the most recent edition, using metric
includes a payment Item for mobilization, the Lump Sum
units of measure, published on or before the date the Work
Price for mobilization includes any or all of the related
is tendered or otherwise first offered.
expenses incurred for mobilization, demobilization and any
Where an earlier edition is specified in these Standard re-mobilization not covered under the Work Items which
Specifications, the reference will be in a form that includes must be initiated and finished as part of the Work. The
the year of the specific edition that applies. Lump Sum Price for mobilization will be paid in increments
as the Work progresses.
As an example, ASTM C136 would mean the current metric
edition (i.e. as of 2020-11-01: ASTM C136M-19); If the Contract does not contain a payment Item for
ASTM C136-14 would specifically mean the 2014 edition. “Mobilization”, all costs associated with mobilization,
demobilization and re-mobilization will be included in
Unless otherwise specified or implied in the context, where
payment for Items having such costs.
a standard or specification has both metric and imperial
editions, the metric edition shall apply to the Work. Payment for mobilization, if applicable, will be made at the
tendered Lump Sum Price as follows:
145.04 Scope of Work – The scope of Work is described in
the Contract. No warranty is given or implied that any or (a) The Contractor will be paid any portion of the
all of this Work will be required or supplied. mobilization Lump Sum Price exceeding five percent
(5%) of the Tender Price within sixty (60) days after
145.05 Quantities and Dimensions – Quantities, the Actual Completion Date or on the final progress
dimensions, lines and elevations as shown on the plans and
estimate (whichever occurs first).
Drawings are designed neat lines. Approximate quantities
entered in Schedule 7 – Approximate Quantities and Unit (b) That portion of the mobilization Lump Sum Price not
Prices are quantities approximated using the lines and exceeding five percent (5%) of the total Tender Price,
dimensions shown in the Contract Document Package and
other relevant factors, and may vary from quantities derived

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (1 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 32 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

will be paid to the Contractor according to the other utilities from their current to their final design
following breakdown: locations, unless specified as being part of the Work, shall
be performed by third parties at the Ministry's expense.
(i) Seventy-five percent (75%) of this portion when
the Contractor has submitted, in an acceptable If the Contractor's operations require the temporary removal
form, to the Ministry Representative each of the or relocation of lines or poles, such removal or relocation
following that is required under the Contract shall be entirely the responsibility of the Contractor and
costs of any interim utility relocations shall be to the
• Construction Schedule,
Contractor’s account. Utility owner(s) must be contacted
• Cash Flow Projection Schedule, prior to doing any utility work.
• Traffic Management Plan, The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to
poles, lines or utilities caused by the Contractor's
• Quality Control Plan,
construction operations, and shall repair and make good the
• Construction Environmental Management same or bear the expense of making good and repairing the
Plans, same.
• Sediment and Drainage Management Plan, The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to
protect existing utility services during the performance of
• Base Safety Plan and Area of Responsibility the Work and shall be responsible for any losses or damages
Safety Plans, as applicable, caused by the Contractor.
and the value of the Work completed on bid Items Locations of the utilities shown on the Drawings are
other than mobilization exceeds two percent (2%) approximate and may not be complete. The Contractor shall
of the Tender Price. be responsible to ensure the locations of the utilities are
(ii) fifteen percent (15%) of this portion of the complete and shall notify the Ministry Representative of
mobilization Lump Sum Price will be paid any discrepancies between the Drawings and the
prorated on a monthly basis for the percentage of Contractor’s findings.
Work completed as determined by the Ministry 145.11 Permits – The Contractor shall give all requisite
Representative, but contingent upon the Ministry notices in connection with the Work to the proper
Representative receiving acceptable construction authorities and shall procure at the Contractor's expense all
schedule and cash flow updates and all required or permits, licences, etc., of every description necessary for the
requested quality control records or reports, and construction and completion of the Work.
(iii) the final ten percent (10%) of this portion of the The Contractor shall deliver or make available all original
mobilization Lump Sum Price when all completion certificates to the Ministry Representative for all or any part
documentation has been submitted by the of the Work for which such certificates may be required in
Contractor as required by the Ministry, all connection with performing the Work.
equipment has been removed from the Site, and the
Site has been cleaned up to the satisfaction of the 145.12 Ministry Inspection of Work
Ministry Representative.
145.12.01 General – All materials and each part or detail of
The payments from the Lump Sum Price, as set out above, the Work shall be subject to inspection by the Ministry
will be full compensation for mobilization, demobilization Representative or designated inspector.
and re-mobilization, regardless of the number of times the
The Contractor shall be held strictly to the true intent of the
Contractor mobilizes.
Contract in regard to quality of materials, work practice and
145.09 Authority of the Ministry Representative – The the diligent execution of the Contract.
Ministry Representative has the authority to accept or reject The Ministry Representative shall be given access to all or
the Contractor’s Work in accordance with the conditions set any part of the Work, and to the preparation, fabrication or
out in the Contract. Until the Work meets the requirements
manufacture of the materials to be used. The Contractor
of the Contract and has been accepted by the Ministry
shall furnish all information and assistance as is required to
Representative, the Ministry is not obligated to make
make a complete, true and detailed inspection.
payment for Work done by the Contractor. The Ministry
Representative shall take all necessary measurements and The Ministry Representative may reject any part or parts of
calculations to determine the final quantities for final the Work which do not comply with the requirements of the
payment. Contract. The Ministry’s decision will be accepted as final.
145.10 Power, Telephone Lines and Other Utilities – Inspection may extend to all or any part of the Work and to
Moving of existing power and telephone lines, poles and the preparation, fabrication or manufacture of the materials

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (2 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 33 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

to be used. The Ministry may station others on the Site to Additional Hold Points may be added by the Ministry
report on the progress of the Work and the manner in which Representative at any time during the Contract, by
it is being performed. written notice to the Contractor.
The Ministry Representative will report to the Contractor on (c) Witness Points – Witness Points may be specified
materials furnished or Work performed that fails to fulfil the throughout these Special Provisions, the SP
requirements of the Contract. Ministry costs for re- Appendices, the Drawings, and in the Standard
inspection and re-testing for repaired and replaced Work Specifications.
items that originally did not meet Contract requirements
The Ministry Representative will provide the
shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
Contractor with notice of any additional Witness Points
Inspection or its lack shall not relieve the Contractor from as the Contract progresses. The Contractor will provide
any obligations to furnish acceptable materials or to provide the Ministry Representative with one (1) clear days’
completed construction Work that complies with the notice of the commencement of the work requiring
Contract. witnessing.
The Contractor shall furnish for the approval of the Ministry 145.13 “Ministry's Instruction” and “Contractor’s
Representative, at proper times, all shop and installation Declaration”
drawings as requested by the Contract or which the Ministry
145.13.01 “Ministry's Instruction” – "Ministry's
Representative may deem necessary.
Instruction" form (H0202) will be issued by the Ministry
In accepting drawings submitted by the Contractor, the Representative to the Contractor in order to:
Ministry Representative will assume no responsibility as to
(a) describe a portion of the Work which may not be
the correctness of such drawings and the Ministry
covered specifically in the Contract.
Representative's examination is only to ensure general
compliance with the Contract. (b) confirm instructions which may affect the method of
carrying out the Work or payment.
145.12.02 Hold Points and Witness Points – Hold Points
and Witness Points (as defined below) are required at (c) confirm verbal agreements made with the Contractor's
critical times for the Ministry Representative and the representative.
Engineer(s) of Record (EOR)/Professional(s) of Record
(d) respond to the Contractor's representation on
(POR) to review crucial work processes.
"Contractor's Declaration" form (H0203).
(a) Definitions
145.13.02 “Contractor’s Declaration” – The Contractor is
(i) Hold Points are verification points identified by to issue the "Contractor's Declaration" form (H0203) to the
the Ministry Representative beyond which Work Ministry Representative in order to:
may not proceed until:
(a) make a declaration of acceptance or objection to
(A) the Contractor notifies the Ministry contents of the "Ministry Representative's Instruction".
Representative,
(b) formally present the Contractor’s opinions, problems or
(B) the Ministry Representative, or the requirements for clarification.
Professional of Record, performs mandatory
145.14 Protection and Restoration of the Work – The
verification; and
Contractor shall secure and protect the Site, all Work, and
(C) the Ministry Representative gives notice to the surrounding infrastructure from loss, injury or damage
the Contractor to proceed. until the issuance of the Completion Certificate.
(ii) Witness Points are identified points in the process If the Contractor fails to secure and prevent any loss, injury,
where the Ministry Representative may review, or damage to the Work, the Contractor shall rebuild, repair,
witness, inspect methods or processes of Work. replace, and restore at its expense any portion of the Work
The activities however may proceed. so lost, injured or damaged.
(b) Hold Points – Hold Points may be specified throughout The Ministry may reimburse the Contractor for any injury
these Special Provisions, the SP Appendices, the or damage caused by an event not foreseen and not
Drawings, and in the Standard Specifications. reasonably foreseeable by the Contractor and beyond the
control and not resulting from any fault or negligence of the
The Contractor shall provide the Ministry
Contractor including but not restricted to acts of God, acts
Representative seven (7) days’ notice in advance of a
of a Public Enemy, acts of the Ministry, extraordinary action
Hold Point to allow the Ministry Representative to
of the elements and unavoidable slides.
provide adequate notice to the EOR.

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (3 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 34 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

145.15 Materials Supplied by the Contractor – The components which did not meet the requirements of the
Contractor shall provide all materials necessary for the Contract, and
orderly completion of the Work with the exception of the
(c) the Ministry will offset the costs incurred by the
materials supplied by the Ministry as listed in the Special
Ministry from any payments due to the Contractor
Provisions.
145.15.03 Not Used
Further requirements for asphalt materials are contained in
SS 502. 145.15.04 Alternative Materials – Brands, species and
manufacturer's names specified in the Contract are
All materials supplied under the Contract shall:
approved for use in the performance of the Work. No
• be new, alternative materials will be considered unless approved in
advance by the Ministry Representative in writing.
• conform to the requirements of the Contract, and
Savings as a result of using alternate materials will be
• be subject to inspection and approval by the evaluated using SS 125 Value Engineering Proposals.
Ministry prior to incorporation in the Work.
145.15.05 Recognized Products List – The Ministry has
145.15.01 Ministry Inspection of Materials – Includes reviewed a number of products for use in highway
material certificates review, fabrication inspection, applications and publishes a “Recognized Products List”,
sampling and testing of materials. indicating which products are considered generally
The Contractor shall provide to the Ministry, material or acceptable for particular purposes. Contractors are
mill certificates two weeks prior to shipping of the materials encouraged to review the list to aid in determining which
supplied by the Contractor. Such material or mill products they will supply, but are cautioned that the
certificates shall include the material properties that products listed, although generally acceptable, may not
demonstrate the material’s compliance with the meet Contract specifications.
requirements of the Contract. The Categories “Proven, “Tentative” or “Approved” in the
At the request of the Ministry Representative, the Recognized Products List are an indication of the product’s
Contractor shall submit representative samples of materials record of use and purpose. Products in any category are
at no charge to the Ministry. “recognized” and may be used as long as the product meets
Contract specific specifications.
The Contractor shall notify the Ministry Representative of
the sources of materials supplied by the Contractor, and Unless so specified in the Contract, Materials provided are
obtain the right for the Ministry to enter upon the premises not required to be amongst those on the Recognized
of the material supplier or fabricator to carry out such Products List.
inspection. Such notification shall be given sufficiently far The Recognized Products list is available on-line at:
in advance of materials delivery dates to enable the Ministry
Representative to make inspection of the material at the https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/tr
source. Insufficient notice will be cause for the Ministry to ansportation-infrastructure/engineering-standards-
reject the materials without compensation. guidelines/recognized-products-list
The Ministry will not be responsible for any delays to the 145.16 Materials Supplied by the Ministry – Ministry
Contractor’s operations where the Contractor fails to give supplied materials will be procured and paid for by the
sufficient advance notification to the Ministry Ministry by purchase order to the Purchasing Commission,
Representative to enable the Ministry to carry out the who on instruction from the Ministry Representative
inspection before the scheduled shipping dates. notifying of the Contractor’s requirement for the material,
shall arrange for release of the material to the Contractor in
145.15.02 Materials or Components Sourced from accordance with the purchase order.
Outside British Columbia – If materials or components to
be incorporated into the Work are sourced from outside the Separate purchase orders will be issued for each class of
Province then: material.
(a) the Contractor will be charged for all travel time, Materials ordered for a specific Site shall not be transferred
transportation, and board and lodging costs incurred by to any other Site without the written consent of the Ministry
the Ministry or its designate for out-of-province quality Representative.
assurance and inspection of such materials and Ministry supplied and owned materials will be used only for
components, Ministry Work.
(b) the Contractor will be charged for the costs incurred by 145.16.01 Delivery Points – Each purchase order will
the Ministry in inspecting replacement materials and specify points of delivery. The Contractor shall be
components or re-inspecting reworked materials and

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (4 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 35 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

responsible for all costs that may arise such as unloading except for incorporation in the Work, without authorization
from truck or rail car, hauling to the Site, stockpiling, from the Ministry Representative.
dunnage, and reloading.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for replacement
The costs to transport all materials to the Site will be of any materials due to loss, damage, or improper use prior
incurred by the Contractor at its own cost and will be to acceptance into the final Works.
considered incidental and no separate payment will be made
If asphalt materials are hauled directly from the delivery
for this portion of the Works.
point for immediate application to the roadway, the material
Should the Contractor request delivery be made to an will be measured by mass or volumetrically by the Ministry
alternative point other than the nearest specified point of Representative at the time of delivery. The Contractor shall
delivery or in any manner of delivery other than specified ensure that an acceptable means of measurement is
by the Purchasing Commission, the additional cost for this available.
delivery shall be charged to the Contractor's account.
145.16.03 Distribution of Materials – To control
145.16.02 Delivery and Storage of Materials – When the distribution of Ministry supplied materials and to facilitate
Ministry Representative advises the Contractor of the name accounting:
of the supplier(s), the Contractor shall be responsible at no
(a) the Contractor shall arrange for delivery of the
cost to the Ministry for:
materials only after applying for and receiving
(a) determining requirements and ordering far enough in authority to do so on "Authority to Arrange for
advance that work is not delayed. Delivery of Construction Materials" form (H0313)
which will be provided by the Ministry Representative.
(b) acceptance of all materials; careful unloading and
The requirements of the Contractor shall be indicated
handling; hauling and delivery from delivery point to
on Part "A" of the form. Approval from the Ministry
an interim storage facility and to the Site; storage and
Representative shall be indicated on Part "B" of the
security; prompt turn-around of tank or shipping cars,
form. The Contractor may then arrange for delivery
trucks or delivery containers.
from the supplier. As delivery will be made only on
(c) prompt payment of all demurrage or rental charges on receipt of the purchase order number and the serial
cars, freight, handling, delivery, storage or any other number of the “Authority” form, the Contractor shall
charges arising after the initial receipt of material at the arrange with the Ministry Representative to
delivery point. immediately distribute appropriate copies of the
"Authority" form.
(d) ensuring that proper accounting is kept of all materials
received. Material suppliers will be required to notify both the
Ministry Representative and the Contractor when
The Contractor shall notify the Ministry Representative of
materials are shipped, giving sufficient information to
the materials delivery schedule and allow sufficient time for
identify each and every shipment against an appropriate
the Ministry Representative to check quantity and quality
“Authority” form serial number and purchase order
before the Contractor takes delivery. The Contractor shall
number.
not take delivery of any material without the presence of the
Ministry Representative. (b) The use of the “Authority” form shall not in any way
relieve the Contractor of any responsibility imposed
The Contractor shall report to the Ministry Representative
under SS 145.16.02.
any materials damage or discrepancies between the
quantities received and the quantities shown on the bills of (c) If the Ministry Representative refuses to authorize the
lading immediately upon materials arriving at the delivery delivery of materials to the job, the Ministry
point. If damage or deficiencies are not so reported, it will Representative will send the refusal, with reasons in
be assumed that the materials arrived in good order. writing, to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide a secure storage acceptable to (d) The Ministry may, at the completion of the Work, if
the Ministry Representative for all materials supplied by the materials are delivered in excess of job requirements
Ministry. The Contractor shall, in advance of receipt of the through conditions beyond the control of the
shipment of the Materials, notify the Ministry Contractor, take over the surplus material or grant the
Representative of the storage facilities locations for their Contractor the option of purchasing the material on
inspection and acceptance. Site. The transaction will be completed only after the
Contractor obtains for the Ministry Representative, a
The materials shall be kept in the designated storage
supplier's credit note for the total cost to the Ministry of
immediately upon receipt of the materials. The Contractor
the excess material purchased f.o.b. at the delivery
shall not remove any materials from the storage locations,
point.

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (5 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 36 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor will (b) 40% paid monthly, prorated to the percentage complete
deliver all unused materials, which have been of the Work, and
purchased by the Ministry, to a location as specified by
(c) the remaining balance after the office has been removed
the Ministry Representative and shall dispose of all
and the Site cleaned up to the satisfaction of the
empty materials packaging that are not required for
Ministry Representative.
their original purpose at the disposal site. No payment
will be made for this portion of the Work. 145.18.02 Testing Facility – When specifically required by
the Contract, the Contractor shall provide the Ministry with
145.17 Operation of Pavement Brooms on Highway – No
a material testing facility with a minimum of 12 m2 floor
mechanical pavement broom shall be operated on any
space either in the form of a small trailer or the portion of a
highway without a rotating amber flashing light in
large trailer. The testing facility shall include power, light,
operation. The light shall be mounted on self-propelled
heat, ventilation, plus basic furniture to permit testing and
brooms and upon the towing vehicle of trailer type brooms.
preparation of test records. The facility shall be stable,
Traffic Control is to be in accordance with the Traffic reasonably quiet and lockable.
Control manual for Work on Roadways. In addition, on
Payment for the Ministry’s Material Testing facility (when
extremely winding narrow roads an additional shadow
required) will be made at the Lump Sum price in the
vehicle shall be used ahead of the broom with a C-076
Contract
“Sweeper Working” sign on the front of the vehicle and a
flashing arrow in bar mode. Payment will include the provision of the facility,
furnishings, maintenance throughout the construction
145.18 Supply and Maintain Facilities
period, and removal in its entirety.
145.18.01 Working Office – When specifically required
Payment of 50% of the Lump Sum will be made when the
under the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall provide a
facility is ready for occupancy and the remaining 50% after
suitable working office with lock-up for the sole use of the
it has been removed and the Site cleaned up to the
Ministry. The office shall meet the requirements of
satisfaction of the Ministry Representative.
Appendix A and be weatherproof, reasonably soundproof,
and have ample window area and ventilation. Location of 145.18.03 Service for Ministry Facilities – Where the
the office shall be determined by the Ministry Ministry provides its own facilities on Site, the Contractor
Representative. shall, for the duration of the Contract, provide light and heat
and any other services requested by the Ministry
The Contractor shall regularly collect refuse and keep the
Representative for same, and the Contractor will be
office clean and properly maintained with heat and light.
compensated on a Force Account Basis.
The office and contents shall be for the use of the Ministry
145.18.04 Weigh Scale
for the duration of the Work and may if necessary be used
concurrently with the other inspection agencies. (a) Except as provided in SS 145.18.04(b), the Contractor
shall provide a truck weigh scale wherever
Where service is available on-Site, through land-line or by
measurement of materials by mass is required.
satellite, the Contractor shall provide high-speed wireless
internet for the Ministry office. If cellular coverage is not The weigh scale shall be an approved electronic weigh
available or is poor at the office site, but land-line services scale or platform type with remote balancing beam.
are available nearby, the Contractor shall supply a private The scale shall be of sufficient size and capacity to
telephone line for the sole use of the Ministry weigh, at a single pass, the largest, rigid-framed
Representative. Ministry’s long distance calls will be paid haulage vehicle to be used on the job and in any case
for by the Ministry. Where cell coverage is poor, the shall be of not less than 13 t (tonne) capacity. The scale
Contractor may provide a cell signal booster, instead of a shall be capable of weighing all loads to within 20 kg
land-line, if it provides a reliable signal. of the true mass.
Payment for the Ministry’s Site Office (when required) will At the start of the Work, and as frequently as the
be made at the Lump Sum price in the Contract. Ministry Representative may deem necessary in order
to ensure the accuracy, the scale shall be calibrated and
Payment will include the provision of the office,
checked at the Contractor's expense by an Inspector of
furnishings, communications systems, maintenance
Weights and Measures.
throughout the construction period, and removal in its
entirety. The remote balancing beam shall be enclosed in a
sound, watertight, dust-free scale house, properly
Payment of the Lump Sum will be made as follows:
ventilated and insulated. Adequate heating must be
(a) 50% when the office is ready for occupancy; provided when the shade temperature is below 16oC.

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (6 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 37 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

The scale house shall be provided with full length (d) The scale platform is maintained by the Contractor to
windows facing the scale platform, and windows shall be clean and free from loose material at all times.
also be provided at either end, so that both the
(e) All vehicles being scaled must be tared at least once a
Contractor's scaleperson and the Ministry
day.
Representative's scale checker can at all times see
vehicles to be weighed, not only on the scale but also In the event that any of the above conditions are not being
approaching and leaving. met, in the opinion of the Ministry Representative, then the
Contractor shall supply a qualified scaleperson as detailed
The front window shall be sufficiently large and low
in the first paragraph to carry out the necessary weighting
that the whole scale platform is readily visible from the
and issuing of a weighing certificate, prepared in triplicate,
scale house. Immediately behind the balancing beam,
for each load.
a bench or table of sufficient length shall be provided
to permit both scaleperson and checker to sit abreast in The Contractor will be paid only for such material as having
a position in which they can both write on the table and been received at the point of delivery designated by the
view the electronic scale or weigh beam and scale Ministry Representative.
platform. SS Drawing SP145-01 shows these
The delivery receipts will bear the signature, initials or other
requirements.
approved marking of the issuing scaleperson and receiving
The Contractor shall supply and maintain, at no checker and shall be submitted to the Ministry
additional expense to the Ministry, portable washroom Representative within forty-eight (48) working hours from
facilities at the weigh scale site. each load delivery for approval.
Payment for the weigh scale and ancillary facilities In the event the Ministry Representative determines a
shall be incidental to the Unit Prices of the materials scaleperson is not required, all weighed vehicles must be
being weighed. tared by both the Ministry Representative and the
Contractor together once a day. The Contractor must
(b) Where any aggregate is being paid by weight (i.e. per
provide certified automated scales that will generate weigh
tonne) and the required quantity for the Item is less than
tickets. The Contractor’s scaleperson will be required to
5,000 t, the Contractor will be permitted to use any
scale and record the weights of the material required for the
scale that is certified and able to provide a printed ticket
project according to the requirements of the SS 502.04.04.
(e.g. loader bucket scale) in lieu of a stationary weigh
The Contractor shall supply the Ministry Representative
scale.
with the calibration record of the balance. The calibration
Such alternative scales shall not be used to weigh record shall be done once a year or when needed.
aggregates into either concrete or asphalt mixes.
At any time the Ministry Representative may direct that any
145.19 Weighing Materials – The Contractor shall supply, loaded truck return to the scale and be reweighed in the
at no additional expense to the Ministry, a qualified presence of the Ministry Representative.
scaleperson to carry out the necessary weighing which may
145.20 Not Used
be monitored by the Ministry. A weighing certificate
prepared in triplicate, certified by the scaleperson, will be 145.21 Survey/Layout and Calculation of Quantities –.
issued for each load. The Contractor will be paid only for In general and as detailed below, the Ministry will establish
such material as has been received at the point of delivery control line points for the Site, survey the original and
designated by the Ministry Representative. excavated ground lines, and calculate quantities for
payment. The Contractor shall lay out the Work, and
The delivery receipts will bear the signature, initials or other
assume full responsibility for the alignment, dimensions and
approved marking of the issuing scaleperson and receiving
elevations of each and every part of the work and their
checker.
mutual agreement.
If the Contractor has an automated scale and the following
145.21.01 Ministry Responsibilities – The Ministry will
conditions are being met, the Contractor shall not be
provide a listing of any existing survey control line
required to supply a scaleperson:
(primary) reference points to the Contractor.
(a) All weighed material is being delivered to a single job
The Ministry will survey the original ground line, and any
site. If the Contractor is delivering to two or more job
subsequent material horizons, for determination of
sites at the same time, the Contractor shall supply a
appropriate pay item quantities.
scaleperson as detailed in the first paragraph.
Where the Ministry has a pre-existing survey of the Site, the
(b) Truck operators do not require instruction.
Ministry may use that survey as the original ground. If the
(c) There are no overloads, tarp covering, spillage Ministry elects to use such a survey, the Ministry
difficulties, or any safety problems. Representative will notify the Contractor of such intent and

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (7 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 38 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

give the Contractor an opportunity to view the cross- aggregate layers, layout by line and grade of all
sections, contours, or Digital Terrain Model. Any areas of structures, culverts, and underground utilities, and shall
the survey or model that do not adequately reflect the Site perform all other layout and measurement necessary for
at the start of construction will be identified by the the proper execution of the Contract. Such layout shall
Contractor or the Ministry and will be resurveyed by the include making incidental field adjustments, such as
Ministry prior to the Contractor starting work in any staking of embankments and culverts to match post-
affected area of the Site. stripping ground lines and actual field drainage
patterns.
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, calculation of
quantities will be on a neat line basis, as calculated from the The Contractor's survey layout shall conform, as a
design lines shown on the Drawings, adjusted to incorporate minimum, to the requirements outlined in
design changes and field-fits authorized by the Ministry Appendix 145-B – Survey Layout Services and
Representative. Any material placed or excavated beyond Products.
the design lines is considered Unauthorized Work.
(b) Machine Controlled Grading – The Contractor may
For items such as Type D excavation where the upper utilize machine- controlled grading as a substitute for
boundary of a cut cannot be determined until the completion conventional grade staking under the following
of stripping, the design line will be revised to reflect the conditions:
actual bottom of stripping line as determined by the
(i) The equipment utilized shall be capable of meeting
Ministry's survey.
the Design vertical and horizontal tolerances.
Quantities calculated from digital terrain models will be
(ii) The Ministry Representative may require the
done using average-end-areas based on cross-sections
Contractor to revert to conventional staking
extracted from the model or, at the Ministry
methods at any point during construction if the
Representative’s option, by using prismoidal volumes
machine-controlled grading is producing
between surfaces in the model.
Unacceptable Work.
Where agreed in writing between the Ministry and the
(iii) The Ministry will provide the Contractor the
Contractor, alternate methods of determining payment
available electronic files of Design information in
quantities may be employed.
accordance with the terms specified in the Special
The Contractor may be required to adjust its construction Provisions without warranty with respect to the
activities from time to time to allow the Ministry's suitability for the purposes intended by the
measurement work to proceed unencumbered. The Contractor.
Contractor shall not proceed with the next stage of any
(iv) As a minimum the Contractor shall provide an
construction until the Ministry has completed
orientation stake every 100 metres showing
measurements of the previous work.
station, offset and grade.
Quality Assurance and checking of layout may be
(c) Calculations – All calculations necessary shall be
performed by the Ministry Representative.
performed by the Contractor and provided to the
145.21.02 Contractor’s Responsibilities – The Contractor Ministry Representative at any time upon request.
shall perform all layout of the work and all other survey Upon request of the Ministry Representative the
work required to execute the Contract and construct the Contractor shall provide the Ministry Representative a
works in accordance with the Contract. copy of calculations prior to the start of earthwork
operations.
The Contractor shall be satisfied, before commencing any
Work, as to the meaning, intent and accuracy of any control (d) Accuracy of Layout and Construction – The staking
points, control lines and benchmarks established by the of all works shall be of a sufficient accuracy and
Ministry. frequency for the Ministry to carry out its quantity
measurements and quality assurance program.
Should the Contractor discover or suspect any errors in any
control points, control lines, benchmarks, and data provided On request of the Ministry Representative, the
by the Ministry, the Contractor shall at once discontinue the Contractor shall submit documentation to verify the
affected work until such errors are investigated by the accuracy of the layout work and the construction of the
Ministry Representative and, if necessary, rectified. Work.
(a) Conventional Survey Layout – The Contractor shall Unless tighter tolerance are required for the satisfactory
be responsible for establishing all secondary control performance of the Work, the Work shall be so laid out
points and/or lines, all slope stakes, the establishment and constructed that the as-built locations of the Work
of line and grades for subgrade and the various granular

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (8 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 39 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

shall not differ from the design positions by more than necessary, in the opinion of the Ministry Representative, for
the following amounts: the safety of both workers and public traffic.
• Elements and their tolerances as specified in All barricades, traffic signs, lights and other control devices
Appendix 145-B shall be provided at the Contractor's expense, and shall be
erected in accordance with, and otherwise conform to the
• Substructure elements – 12 mm horizontally and standards as set out in the Ministry's Traffic Management
vertically Manual for Work on Roadways, Special Provisions, and
• Anchor groups – 6 mm in plan . Standard Specifications.

• The elevation of bearing seats shall not differ from 145.23.01 Maintenance of Traffic – The Contractor shall
true elevations by more than 3 mm. comply with the requirements of the Transportation Act and
amendments thereto and such other Acts, By-Laws, or
Any deviation beyond the above-mentioned tolerances Regulations as are in force for the governing and regulating
shall be satisfactorily corrected by the Contractor at the of traffic or use of any road upon or over which it is
Contractor's expense. necessary to do work or transport materials. The Contractor
145.21.03 Payment for Survey/Layout – Except as noted must arrange to keep roads open to traffic at all times and
below, survey layout is incidental to the Work and no must cause as little inconvenience as possible to the
separate payment will be made. travelling public.

The Contractor shall provide any additional or revised 145.23.02 Road Closure Notification – Road Closures will
survey layout for any design change directed by the be in accordance with SS 194 and the Special Provisions.
Ministry Representative and will be paid for such additional All costs related to the above shall be for the Contractor’s
survey layout. Compensation will be determined in account.
accordance with GC 38.00 and any approved payments will
be made from the Provisional Sum for Site Modifications. 145.24 Alterations to Drawings and Plans – It shall be
understood that the Drawings and Plans represent the nature
145.22 Access to Site – The Contractor shall provide access and general layout of the work to be executed and not
to the Site as may be necessary, unless otherwise specified necessarily the works exactly as they will be carried out.
in the Special Provisions. No separate payment will be The Ministry Representative will, without invalidating the
made for the provision of any access roads or incidental Contract, be at liberty to make any reasonable alteration or
works in connection therewith. to furnish any additional or amended Drawings which do
The Contractor shall make arrangements with the property not change the type of construction.
owners adjacent to and around the terminal site for the use Payment for any such altered Work will be at the rates set
of access and for the use of any storage areas the Contractor forth in the Schedule 7 Approximate Quantities and Unit
may require. The Contractor shall acquire such access and Prices.
storage rights at the Contractor’s expense.
145.24.01 Adherence to Drawings – The various parts of
In the event of roads being temporarily closed to the the Work shall be built in strict accordance with the
travelling public, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor's furnished Drawings and with any supplementary Drawings
expense, provide, erect and maintain all requisite barriers, which may be furnished during the progress of the Work as
fences or other proper protection and must provide, keep occasion requires.
and maintain such patrollers, lights and danger signals as
may be necessary, or as may be required by the Ministry Special Provisions, special specifications, Standard
Representative to ensure safety to the public and to the Specifications and the Drawings/Plans are to be considered
workers. as explanatory of each other, but should anything appear in
one that is not described in the other, or should any
The Contractor, during the Contractor's operations, must discrepancy appear, no advantage shall be taken of such
also provide and maintain reasonable road access and egress omission or discrepancy and the decision of the Ministry
to property fronting along or in the vicinity of the work Representative as to the true intent and meaning of the
under contract, unless other means of road access exists. Special Provisions, special specifications, Standard
The Ministry Representative will be the sole judge as to Specifications and the Drawings in such instances shall be
what may be deemed reasonable road access. final and binding, it being clearly understood that the
145.23 Accommodation of Traffic – The Contractor shall Contractor is to execute all the works requisite for the
cause as little inconvenience as possible to the travelling perfect completion of each and all of the several parts of the
public during the Contractor's operations and shall erect and Work according to the true intent and meaning of the
maintain proper and adequate barricades, traffic signs, lights Contract.
and other traffic control devices as may be considered

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (9 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 40 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

On all Drawings, in case of any discrepancy between the When the role of Pit Manager is not the responsibility of the
figured dimensions and the scaled dimensions, the figured Contractor, the Contractor will co-operate with, and follow
dimensions shall govern. the direction of the acting or appointed Pit Manager.
145.25 Use of Explosives – In using explosives the 145.26.03 Pit Supervisor – The Contractor shall appoint a
Contractor shall exercise the utmost care so as not to properly qualified supervisor or shift boss in any Ministry
endanger life or property and, whenever directed, the pit or quarry where work is undertaken, in compliance with
number and size of the charges shall be reduced. Before Section 26 of the Mines Act, and ensure that the supervisor
doing any blasting the Contractor shall ascertain if there are or shift boss is certified in accordance with Section 1.13 of
in the neighbourhood any railway, power or other lines, the Health, Safety and Reclamation Code for Mines in
water or other pipes, etc., which are likely to be in danger of British Columbia.
being damaged. The Contractor shall give to the owner of
145.26.04 Notice of Unsafe Condition – If the Contractor,
such lines, pipes or other works timely notice of the
in connection with the pit or quarry, determines, in its
intention to blast.
reasonable discretion, that any person, employer or worker
Whenever possible electric batteries shall be employed for has failed to comply with any safety regulation, Act, or
simultaneous blasting. code, or any applicable site practice or procedure that
creates or may create an unsafe or harmful condition that
The storage of explosives shall be in accordance with the
poses a danger of injury or death, the Contractor will deliver
Explosives Regulations of the Canada Explosives Act and
a written notification of this failure to the Ministry
with any requirements of the representative of the
Representative.
Explosives Regulatory Division within the Mineral
Technology Branch of the Minerals and Metals Sector of 145.26.05 Use of the Pit or Quarry – When the Contractor
the Federal Department of the Natural Resources Canada. is operating in a Ministry pit or quarry, the Contractor shall
utilize the pit or quarry in accordance with the Ministry Pit
145.26 Work in Pits or Quarries – The Contractor shall be
Development Plan or obtain written approval from the
responsible for compliance with appropriate safety,
Ministry Representative prior to deviating from the plan.
environmental, forestry, agricultural and other applicable
Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall re-grade
regulatory agencies for all work related to development,
all faces in the pit in accordance with the Ministry Pit
operation and reclamation of pit or quarry.
Development Plan and/or an approved Pit Reclamation
145.26.01 Ministry Pit or Quarry – When operating in a Plan.
Ministry pit or quarry the Contractor shall comply with all
Ministry pits or quarries may be used without charge,
provisions of the Mines Act, the Health, Safety and
provided they are utilized, worked and maintained in
Reclamation Code for Mines in British Columbia, and/or
accordance with the Standard Specifications and the
the WCB Occupational Health & Safety Regulation which
Ministry’s development plans. No warranty is given or
are applicable to the work undertaken.
implied that the source of aggregate material from the
Prior to entering any Ministry Pit or Quarry the Contractor Ministry pits or quarries will meet requirements or requisite
shall provide a completed Sand and Gravel/Quarry Notice quantities.
of Work (Form H1258) to the Ministry Representative for
The Contractor shall contact the Road and Bridge
each Ministry Pit or Quarry the Contractor intends to enter
Maintenance Contractor a minimum of two (2) weeks
in, at, or about to mine fourteen (14) days before, including
before the date the Contractor anticipates the use of any
any seasonal activation.
Ministry pits or quarries.
145.26.02 Contractor Pit Manager – The Ministry may, at
The Contractor and the Road and Bridge Maintenance
its sole discretion, require that the Contractor, or a party
Contractor shall co-ordinate their activities and schedule
other than the Contractor, take responsibility to ensure that
usage of the pit among themselves and any other affected
the work in the pit or quarry is done in compliance with the
parties.
requirements of the Mines Act (RSBC 1996) and the Health,
Safety and Reclamation Code for Mines in British Columbia The Contractor, by entering an available source, will be
(B.C. Reg. 126/94). When the Contractor is so required, the deemed to have accepted all obligations, risks and costs
Contractor must provide the name of a person, or persons, associated with its use and security, just as if the pit or
who will act as the Pit Manager to the Ministry quarry was private.
Representative prior to the commencement of work. This
No warranty is given that the source will meet the quality
person must possess the qualifications established by the
and quantity requirements. The Contractor, without any
regulations or code, and attend daily at the pit or quarry
additional compensation, shall provide whatever selection,
when it is in operation.
screening, crushing, mixing, blending or other processing of
any kind may be required to produce aggregate meeting all

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (10 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 41 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

requirements for its intended use, including but not limited (i) be returned by the Contractor to the Ministry
to: source and stockpiled at a location determined by
the Ministry Representative, all at the Contractor’s
• specified aggregate gradation,
expense; or
• fracture count,
(ii) upon request by the Contractor and at the Ministry
• aggregate quality requirements such as but not limited Representative’s sole discretion, the Contractor
to those set out in SS 202.04 and Table 501-D of may be offered the options of:
SS 501 as applicable, and
(A) of leaving the materials on the private land and
• the specified properties of any products into which the providing a written agreement with the owner
aggregate is to be incorporated. of the property which shall state that the
Ministry will have free access to and exclusive
The Contractor shall comply with the Ministry pit
use of the remaining materials for a period of
development plan and the Ministry Representative’s twenty-four (24) months after the completion
directions regarding the location of material extraction of the Contract; or
within the pit by the Contractor.
(B) purchasing the remaining material at a
The Contractor’s use of Ministry pits is limited to the
negotiated amount to be back-charged to the
extraction of previously unexcavated material from the
Contractor.
bank, for the supply of materials for use on this Contract.
(iii) Where the volume of material remaining is less
The Ministry’s Road and Bridge Maintenance Contractor than the additional contingency amount
has certain rights and obligations with respect to some
determined pursuant to SS 145.26.06(a), the
Ministry pits, and the Contractor shall coordinate its
Ministry Representative will make the offers in
activities with those of that contractor, where applicable,
SS 145.26.06(c)(ii). If agreement is not reached,
and with any other users, to the satisfaction of the Ministry
SS 145.26.06(c)(i) will apply.
Representative and the Ministry’s District Manager,
Transportation. 145.26.07 Private Pit or Quarry – Prior to supply of any
material to the Site, the Contractor shall obtain and provide
No separate payment will be made for clearing, grubbing,
to the Ministry Representative written approval from the
disposal or relocation of stockpiles, debris or contaminated
titled land owner, for the right to occupy and operate private
materials, or for any other costs of site preparation, pit
pit or quarry, including appropriate permits.
development, or access, or for any delay or other cost arising
from the use of Ministry pits by others, and all costs thereof Availability and use of the listed reserves or any other
shall be covered in the prices for the Items under which private aggregate source must be arranged by the
payment is provided for the applicable materials. Contractor. Prior to the removal of any aggregate material
from an aggregate source, the Contractor shall provide a
145.26.06 Materials Sourced from Ministry Lands but
written notice from the owner authorizing the Contractor to
Processed Elsewhere – Where the Contractor elects to
remove aggregate material for use in the work.
source raw materials from a Ministry pit or quarry, but
process those materials on private lands: 145.27 Highway Right-of-Way – The Contractor shall
confine its operations to those portions of the highway right-
(a) The Contractor shall extract only as much raw material of-way and Licences to Construct indicated in the Contract
from the Ministry source as is necessary to produce the
as being available to the Contractor. Any land, property or
quantity of product required to be incorporated in the
water lot outside these boundaries required for construction
final Project, inclusive of staging and maintenance
yards, access roads, disposal or storage areas, or other
requirements, with a small additional contingency operations of the Contractor, shall be acquired by the
amount as approved by the Ministry Representative. Contractor at no additional expense to the Ministry. The
(b) Ministry-sourced materials shall not be used in any way Contractor shall make arrangements for the use and
to improve the private lands, including without compensation of such land with the titled land owner.
limitation for such purposes as access development,
Work within the Site shall be confined to that necessary to
maintenance, or stockpile site preparation, unless
construct the Project to the lines and grades specified.
approved in advance by the Ministry Representative Excavation outside the design lines and grades to extract
under any conditions the Ministry Representative may aggregates or for other purposes is prohibited unless
require. authorized in advance by the Ministry Representative.
(c) Any surplus raw or processed material remaining on the
145.27.01 Not Used
private lands at the end of construction shall:

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (11 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 42 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

145.27.02 Disposal Site Outside the Right-of-Way – and from, the Site does not damage or deposit material onto
Waste, or other materials specified or designated by the any part of an existing roadway. Materials spilled onto the
Ministry's Representative to be disposed of, such as, but not public roadways or driveways opened to public traffic shall
limited to clearing and grubbing materials, fences, old be cleaned up immediately. The Contractor has the full
culverts, old concrete and asphalt, etc., shall be removed responsibility to repair any damage to existing highways,
from the Site to a disposal site provided by the Contractor. local roads and driveways caused by its construction
All disposal sites shall be the responsibility of the equipment and/or operations.
Contractor.
The Ministry manages a Province-wide seasonal strength
The Contractor shall ensure that the disposal site complies loss program that, in conjunction with engineering
with all Federal, Provincial, Municipal and Regional by- assessments, determines the timing and degree of axle load
laws and regulations prior to disposing of the material. Any restrictions which will apply to Ministry roads outside the
fees incurred shall be paid by the Contractor. The Limits of Construction. Such restrictions do not apply
Contractor must provide documented proof to the Ministry within the Limits of Construction, but the Contractor is
Representative for the use of the selected disposal site. responsible for any damage caused by its operations within
that area.
In addition, the Contractor shall ensure that the disposal site
complies with all municipal and regional government 145.28.04 Protection of Railway Property – The
by-laws and regulations and, when relying upon any Contractor shall be wholly responsible for any damage to
exemption permitted under section 2(2)(d) of the railway trackage or property on the railway company's
Agricultural Land Reserve Use, Subdivision and Procedure right-of-way resulting from highway construction
Regulation, shall provide a written confirmation from the operations. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility that all
Regional District of their agreement that no permit is workers and persons employed by the Contractor or the
required. Contractor's agents, or under the Contractor's control, shall
use due care that no person or property is injured, and that
145.27.03 Access Roads to Private and Public Lands –
no rights are infringed in performing the work. The
The Contractor shall not block or impede the use of any
Contractor shall compensate injured parties.
private access roads or driveways during the Work of this
Contract without the consent of the Ministry The Contractor shall be responsible for traffic control
Representative. persons or other personnel, equipment or procedures
required for the protection of the railway trackage or
The Contractor shall schedule any anticipated closure of an
property. Where it is found necessary to divert, relocate or
access with the property owner to minimize impact on the
re-route utilities or other facilities and infrastructure during
owner.
the course of operations, or where it is found necessary to
145.28 Protection of Land Subdivision Monuments, make repairs to such installations as a result of contract
Roads and Property operations, such re-routing or repair work shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor, and shall be for the
145.28.01 Protection of Subdivision Monuments – The
Contractor's account.
Contractor shall protect, preserve, and keep uncovered all
land subdivision monuments or property marks during its Any costs borne directly by or billed directly to the Ministry
construction activities which may cause disturbance to which relate to the above responsibilities will be charged to
them. At points where construction activities will cover or the Contractor without any surcharge.
destroy any land subdivision monuments or property marks,
The Contractor shall restore and clean all slopes between
the Contractor shall restore them afterwards to the
the highway and the railway track together with any fences,
satisfaction of the Ministry Representative.
ditches and drains disturbed by the work to the satisfaction
145.28.02 Protection of Survey Monuments – The of the Ministry Representative.
Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation during
The Contractor shall give a minimum of thirty (30) days
construction of all geodetic benchmarks, survey monuments
advance notice to the railway company, or other timelines
and property markers on the right-of-way. The Contractor
specified by the railway, for any work being done adjacent
shall use, at no additional expense to the Ministry, a British
to, on or above the rail right-of-way. Notice will include
Columbia Land Surveyor to replace any survey monuments
submission of detailed plans and procedures, as specified in
destroyed or damaged as a result of the Contractor's
the Contract, for review and approval, as required, by the
negligence. At locations where construction work will
railway company. No Work will be done (construction or
cover or destroy such markers, the Contractor shall not
demolition) without approval from the railway and consent
move or remove them until written direction is received
from the Ministry Representative.
from the Ministry Representative.
145.28.05 Construction Stakes, Monuments,
145.28.03 Protection of Roads – The Contractor shall
Benchmarks and Tide Gauge – The Contractor shall set,
ensure all equipment working within, or hauling material to

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (12 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 43 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

as the Ministry Representative may direct and as is access of vehicles and pedestrians to the unfinished bridge
necessary for the proper layout of the Work, monuments and other dangerous areas.
and bench marks of concrete or other material sufficiently
145.30.03 Equipment – All trucks and other equipment
permanent and rigid to remain intact during the duration of
used by the Contractor whether owned or rented for use on
the Work. The Contractor shall particularly avoid
the Project shall meet manufacture's specifications for its
destroying or disturbing such monuments or construction
purpose.
stakes and, should such destruction be unavoidable, shall
notify the Ministry Representative in advance so that the All trucks used on public roads shall have Motor Carrier
points may be properly referenced and re-established. approval.
145.28.06 Protection and Restoration of Property and Hire of trucks and other equipment paid on a production rate
Environment – The Contractor shall not enter upon private basis constitutes a Subcontract.
property for any purpose without first obtaining permission
of the owner of that property and shall be responsible for the 145.30.04 Audible Back Up Warning Device – All haul
preservation of public property along and adjacent to the vehicles shall be equipped with an automatic audible
warning device which will activate whenever the vehicle is
Work, and shall use every reasonable precaution necessary
backing up. The warning device shall be clearly audible
to prevent damage or injury thereto.
above the ambient noise level at a minimum distance of 6 m
The Contractor shall be liable for all damages caused by fire from the back of the vehicle
started by the Contractor and shall, under no circumstances
start fires without first securing the required permits and 145.31 Unacceptable Work – The Contractor shall correct
promptly any Unacceptable Work to the satisfaction of the
approval of authorities having jurisdiction even though it
Ministry Representative.
may be ordered or required to do such burning.
145.32 Temporary Excavation – Where temporary
145.29 Haul Routes and Overloads – The Contractor shall
excavations are undertaken in the course of the Work, the
be responsible for ascertaining that the Contractor's haul
routes are acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction for Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the stability
highway loading. of adjacent ground and all structures and other works
thereon, and for the cost of any temporary works which it
Overweight or oversize vehicles are not permitted to use provides for this purpose for which payment is not expressly
existing highway as a haul road for the hauling of provided in the Contract.
construction materials, notwithstanding Section 7.04 of the
145.33 General Sign Requirements
Commercial Transport Regulation, as amended from time
to time. Where a portion of the existing highway is to be 145.33.01 Contractor Identification Signs – The
later reconstructed as part of the Work, the Ministry Contractor may supply and install contractor identification
Representative may authorize overweight or oversize haul signs from the time of occupying the Site until the Actual
on that portion of the highway, under such conditions as the Completion Date. The Contractor shall maintain and
Contract or the Ministry Representative may establish. remove such signs and all costs of supply, installation,
maintenance and removal shall be the responsibility of the
Off-highway equipment may be permitted to cross the
existing highway only at specific locations as approved by Contractor.
the Ministry Representative. The contractor identification sign shall display only the
Contractor's company name and beneath it the word
Once the crushed granular base, surfacing or pavement
"Information" followed by a telephone number which
work has commenced on any portion of the new,
directly connects any caller to the Contractor's personnel
reconstructed or relocated highway, no overloads will be
permitted on that portion unless written approval is given by who are familiar with, and are currently active on the
the Ministry Representative. Project.
The sign will not be reflectorized, and the background
145.30 Health and Safety – See also SS 135 Construction
colour will not be either red, yellow or orange. The sign
Site Safety.
dimensions will not exceed 2,400 mm horizontal and
145.30.01 Occupational Health and Safety Program – 1,200 mm vertical, and the text size (height) will not be less
The Contractor shall provide an Occupational Health and than 150 mm.
Safety Program in accordance with SS 135.
The contractor identification sign will be erected only in
145.30.02 Worksite Hazards – The Contractor shall erect conjunction with the C-35 project identification sign, and
and maintain signs, fences and barricades at the ends of the will not be in advance of or at the same location as the C-35
bridges before they are opened to traffic and at other sign. Where there is no C-35 sign, no contractor
dangerous areas of the Project, as necessary to prevent identification sign will be permitted.

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (13 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 44 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

No contractor identification sign may be installed without agencies (such as environmental Ministries and utilities),
prior approval of both the sign and the intended installation plus a short confirmatory review of a revised submission to
and location by the Ministry Representative who, in ensure all issues raised have been adequately addressed.
determining whether or not to grant such approval, will not
However, actual time required for the Ministry and agencies
necessarily be limited to the requirements set out above.
to complete the review can vary significantly based on any
145.33.02 Prime Contractor Sign – When designated as number of factors, including without limitation:
the Prime Contractor, the Contractor shall provide “Prime
(a) the quality of the original submission;
Contractor” signs as specified in SS 135 Construction Site
Safety. (b) the number of times a document must be resubmitted
before it is judged compliant;
145.33.03 Traffic Control Signs – See SS 194 Traffic
Management for Work Zones. (c) the time taken by the Contractor while revising a
submission;
145.34 Timelines for Review of Contractor Submissions
– Timelines specified in the Contract for the Ministry to (d) the number of working days within the review period;
review Contractor submissions (for example: Quality and
Management Plans, Construction Environmental
(e) the effect of any reduced staff availability during
Management Plans, Bridge Erection and Demolition Plans)
holiday and vacation periods.
are, unless explicitly specified otherwise, target times.
The timelines specified are considered by the Ministry to be The Contractor is encouraged to consult with the Ministry
reasonable under most circumstances, and typically allow Representative, based on the anticipated schedule of the
Contractor’s submissions, and plan its actual submission
for one full review by the Ministry and third-party approval
times accordingly.

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (14 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 45 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

APPENDIX 145-A
Ministry Office Requirements

OFFICE TYPE
ELEMENT
A B C
Lockable desk/chair 1 2 3
Typist desk/chair - - 1
Drafting table 1.2 m x 2.4 m /stool 1 1 1
Reference table 1.2 m2 - 1 3
Conference table 1.2 m x 2.4 m - - 1
Additional chairs 2 2 9
Plan case or drawing storage unit 1 1 2
Filing cabinet (# drawers) 1 – 2 drawers 1 – 4 drawers 3 – 4 drawers
Shelving bookcase m2 2 5 20
Fire Extinguisher for Class A, B and C fires 1 – 5 kg 1 – 5 kg 2 – 5 kg
Three (3) on two (2)
Supply Activated Telephones and Lines
One (1) One (1) lines with external bell
(if cellular cover is unavailable or poor)
and switch
Wireless covering entire office
High Speed Internet
or one drop at each desk and drafting table
In washroom, hot and
Toilet On site On site cold running potable
water and wash basin
First Aid Kit On site #1 Unit Kit #1 Unit Kit
HVAC As needed to maintain an indoor temperature of 20°C to 27°C year-round.
Floor Areas – m 2

a) Entrance - - 5
b) Ministry Representative's office 12 12 12
c) Additional Staff office - 8 20
d) Wash room - - As required
e) Store room - - 5

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (15 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 46 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (16 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 47 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

Appendix 145-B
Survey Layout Services and Products1

Survey Layout Maximum Interval Product Tolerances2

Right-of-way3 At each point of deflection and at Stake showing station and offset, Sufficient accuracy to prohibit
sufficient points between as to be or flagging. encroachment into adjoining
continuously visible. properties.

Clearing and Same as Right-of-Way. Same as Right-of-Way. Sufficient accuracy to prohibit

Grubbing encroachment into adjoining
properties.

Grading - Slope 10 m in rock cuts; One slope stake each side, at top Up or down chainage: ±0.30 m
Stakes of cut or bottom of fill, showing
20 m in all other cases. C
station, offset, vertical dimension Offset from L : ±30 mm
For Machine Controlled Grading to subgrade, and slope, plus Vertical: ±25 mm
Projects – only an orientation cut/fill transition stake. Non-
stake is required every 100 m standard ditches will be staked
separately.
An additional slope stake, where
applicable, at the top of a rock
cut after the removal of
overburden.

Grading – 20 m. One stake at each side of the Up or down chainage: ±0.30 m

Subgrade subgrade,
For Machine Controlled Grading Offset from CL : ±30 mm
Projects – only an orientation showing station, offset and grade
stake is required every 100 m at the stake location, one at each Vertical accuracy per SS 201.47
break point, and one at
centreline.

Top of Sub-base 20 m. One stake at each side of the sub- Up or down chainage: ±0.30 m
base
For Machine Controlled Grading Offset from CL : ±30 mm
Projects – only an orientation course, showing station, offset
stake is required every 100 m and grade at the stake location, Vertical accuracy SS 202.25.04
one at each break point, and one
at centreline.

Each Base Course 20 m. One stake at each side of the base Up or down chainage: ±0.30 m
course,
For Machine Controlled Grading Offset from CL : ±30 mm
Projects – only an orientation showing station, offset and grade
stake is required every 100 m at the stake location, one at each Vertical accuracy per SS
break point, and one at 202.26.04
centreline.

1
This table shows layout details for general situations; particular circumstances may require more or less staking.
2
Staking tolerances also represent the tolerances for construction of the Work. Any Work constructed outside of these
tolerances constitute a “change” and must be approved by the Ministry Representative and shown on the Record Drawings.
See Special Provision clause titled “Marked Up Drawings”.
3
The right-of-way limit will be laid out only where there is work, including utility relocation, to be performed within three
metres of it.

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (17 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 48 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

Survey Layout Maximum Interval Product Tolerances2

Final Base 10 m. "Blue tops"4 at each break point Up or down chainage: ±0.30 m
Course only across the base course surface, or
final grade stakes. Offset from CL : ±30 mm
For Machine Controlled Grading Vertical accuracy per
Projects – only an orientation SS 202.26.04
stake is required every 100 m

Culverts Inlet and outlet. One stake at each end of the Up or down chainage: ±0.30 m
culvert, plus an offset line,
showing invert elevation. Offset from CL : ±30 mm
Vertical: ±20 mm

Storm Drainage, Stakes showing locations of Up or down chainage: ±0.30 m

Subdrain, manholes, catch basins and other
C
Watermain or structures, and invert locations of Offset from L : ±30 mm
Sanitary Sewer pipe inlets and outlets. Vertical: ±20 mm

Retaining Walls Not more than 10 m, and at One stake showing control line As defined in the Special
alignment changes. location and either the elevation Provisions.
at the top of wall or the elevation
at the bottom of footing
excavation.

Paving 100 m on tangent, 20 m on Reference points. N/A

curves, and at each deflection
point.

Concrete Barriers Same as paving. Same as paving. Offset from CL : ±30 mm

Signs Stake at each sign location. Up or down chainage: ±0.30 m

Offset from CL : ±30 mm

Curb and Gutter 10 m and at alignment changes. Offset hub and nail with cut/fill Up or down chainage: ±0.30 m
to gutter grade.
Curb returns: 5 m or at quarter Offset from CL : ±30 mm
points, whichever is less.
Vertical: ±10 mm

Median/Island Continuous. Paint line at face/edge of curb. Up or down chainage: ±0.30 m

Curb
Offset from CL : ±30 mm

Sidewalk or Path 5 m and at alignment changes. Offset stake or nail with cut/fill Up or down chainage: ±0.30 m
to grade.
No layout required if parallel to Offset from CL : ±30 mm
curb.
Vertical: ±15 mm

4
"Blue top" - a stake driven so that its top surface is at the required elevation for the finished surface of the work.

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (18 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 49 of 470
SECTION 145 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGHWAY,
BRIDGE, AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

Survey Layout Maximum Interval Product Tolerances2

Electrical Per installation. Offset stake or nail with cut/fill Up or down chainage: ±0.30 m
Pedestal, Junction to top of pedestal, or junction
Box, Sign box; with additional stake to Offset from CL : ±30 mm
Structure, and show orientation. Vertical: ±15 mm
Detection Loops
Survey crew will lay out
locations of cross walks, lane
lines and stop bars; Contractor to
derive location of loop.

Irrigation Per installation One stake at each end of the duct,

Preducting and offset line showing lowest
elevation.

Pavement At all alignment break points; Reference points. Up or down chainage: ±0.30 m
Marking
100 m maximum on tangent; Offset from CL : ±30 mm
(temporary and
permanent) 20 m maximum on curves;
10 m maximum on gores.

BC MoTI SS 2020 145 (19 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 50 of 470
 SECTION 165
PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

165.01 General – This Section covers the general and commitments that the Contractor will adhere to, with
specific provisions for the protection of the environment respect to environmental protection, throughout the
under the direction of the Ministry Representative, in duration of the Work. It encompasses all the elements
cooperation with any Federal and/or Provincial that may be addressed separately in mitigation,
Environmental Agency representative, Ministry monitoring and action plans.
environmental staff, or an Environmental Monitor, as
(c) “Deleterious Substance or Material” means the same
designated in the Special Provisions.
as ‘deleterious substance’ as defined in Section 34(1)
165.01.01 Intent of Specifications – These Specifications of the Canada Fisheries Act. In brief, it means any
give the Ministry or its Agent the right to exercise control substance harmful to fish or fish habitat and/or
over environmental aspects of the Work. The Contractor Environmentally Sensitive Areas, and includes
shall adhere to specific instructions if the work may result sediment and other toxic substances.
in an adverse impact on the environment.
(d) "Designated" shall mean designated in the Special
The Ministry will determine the significance of Provisions or by the Ministry Representative.
environmental impacts in consultation with Environmental
(e) “Environment” refers to the physical, biological,
Agencies and Appropriately Qualified Professionals. The
social, spiritual and cultural components that are
Ministry reserves the right of approval over the general
interrelated and affect the growth and development of
methods employed by the Contractor in the performance of
living organisms. The term “environment” in these
the Work, but only insofar as they may affect compliance
specifications shall include socio-community issues
with Environmental Approvals and the Special Provisions,
and resources.
and the protection of aquatic and terrestrial resources, the
health and safety of public, and protection of socio- (f) "Environmental Agencies" shall mean the current,
community resources and features. seceding or successional appropriate regulating
branches of the Federal and Provincial government
These specifications are for the protection of the
agencies responsible for the management and
environment and shall be given such interpretation as will
protection of the Environment and human resources
secure this intent.
and any issuance of environmental permits, approvals
165.01.02 Definitions – For the purposes of this Section, or licences.
the following general terms are defined as follows:
(g) “Environmental Approval” is defined as the written
(a) “Appropriately Qualified Professional” (AQP) authority issued by a government agency that allows
means an applied scientist or technologist specializing Work that otherwise may not be permitted by law or
in a relevant applied science or technology including, which is not defined in law. An Environmental
but not necessarily limited to, archaeology, agrology, Approval is a broad, generic term referring to informal
forestry, biology, engineering, erosion and sediment or formal authorization for actions that may have an
control, geomorphology, geology, hydrology, adverse effect on the environment,
hydrogeology or landscape architecture. An
The term “approval” can include related forms of
appropriately qualified professional must be
authorization such as permits and licenses.
recognized in British Columbia with the appropriate
professional organization, registered and in good (h) "Environmental Monitor" shall mean an
standing, and acting under that organization’s Code of Appropriately Qualified Professional hired by the
Ethics and subject to disciplinary action by that Contractor to ensure the Contractor's compliance with
organization. He or she must also be someone who, the environmental protection aspects of Standard
through demonstrated suitable education, experience, Specifications, Special Provisions, legislation, permits
accreditation and knowledge directly related and and approvals, and to advise the Contractor and
relevant to the level and responsibilities of the Ministry Representative on environmental issues or
particular matter, may be reasonably relied on to concerns.
provide advice within his or her area of expertise and
experience. (i) “Environmental Procedures” are Work specific
written procedures documenting environmental
(b) “Construction Environmental Management Plan” protection measures to be used to mitigate potential
(CEMP) means a plan, written by an AQP, that environmental impacts from activities in
describes the environmental requirements of the Work Environmentally Sensitive Areas.
and outlines the approach the Contractor will undertake
to mitigate impacts. The CEMP describes the specific

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (1 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 51 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

(j) “Environmentally Sensitive Areas” (ESAs) shall include, a natural line or "mark" impressed on the bank
mean area(s) requiring special management and or shore, indicated by erosion, shelving, changes in soil
attention to protect resources, habitat or species (which characteristics, destruction of terrestrial vegetation, or
includes and is not limited to watercourses, Designated other distinctive physical characteristics. The area
sensitive areas and rare and endangered ecosystems, below the high water mark includes the active
fish and fish habitat, vegetated areas containing rare floodplain.
and endangered flora/fauna, vulnerable aquifers and
(p) “Impact” is defined as an alteration, either positive or
archaeological, heritage and cultural resources). ESAs
negative, to the environment brought about as a direct
are Designated in the Special Provisions,
or indirect result of a highway project, including
Environmental Approvals, legislation, and/or by the
construction, operation and maintenance work (e.g., the
Ministry Representative.
consequence of a highway-related activity interacting
(k) “Environmental Timing Window” shall mean the with its surroundings).
period that the natural or human environment is likely
(q) “Invasive Plant(s)” are defined as a non-native plant
less susceptible to adverse impacts. Works may be
species that has the potential to pose undesireable or
restricted outside of these timing windows.
detrimental impacts on people, animals, infrastructure,
Environmental Timing Window is synonymous with
or the ecosystem. All Noxious Weeds are invasive
least risk timing window. Environmental Timing
plants, but not all invasive plants are Noxious Weeds.
Windows are recommended by the Contractor’s AQP
based on professional experience, federal, provincial, (r) “Instream Work Window” See “Fishery Timing
and regional guidelines, legislation, and input from Window”.
Environmental Agencies, unless otherwise specified in
(s) “Noxious Weed(s)” refers to plants as listed in the BC
the Special Provisions.
Weed Control Act and Regulation.
(l) "Fisheries Sensitive Zone" is defined as the instream
(t) “Mitigation” refers to a procedure or an action
aquatic habitats, as well as out-of-stream supporting
habitat features such as side channels, wetlands, and designed to avoid, reduce or control the severity,
vegetated riparian areas adjacent to these features, that magnitude, duration and/or frequency of environmental
impacts of a project through design alternatives,
support fish.
scheduling or other means.
(m) “Fishery Timing Window” refers to the time period(s)
(u) “Riparian Area” is defined as the land adjacent to the
of reduced risk for important commercial, sport, and
normal High Water Mark in a stream, river, lake or
resident fish species, based on their life histories. The
Fishery Timing Window is the time of year during pond and extending to the portion of land that is directly
which there are no fish eggs or alevins present in the influenced by the presence of adjacent ponded or
channeled water, or a groundwater zone fed by surface
substrates of local Watercourses, and the period when
water bodies (e.g., zone in which rooted vegetation is
fish migration (juvenile out-migration and adult
influenced). Riparian areas typically contain important
spawning in-migration) is not occurring. This is
vegetation resources which provide several critical
generally the preferred period for (i) instream work or
(ii) work adjacent to or over top of fish-bearing streams functions for the survival of fish (e.g., protection from
with the potential to create adverse impacts on fish or predators, shade for temperature regulation of the
fish habitat. The Fishery Timing Window is that period Watercourse, and sources of food)
of any given year as identified by the Environmental (v) “Stream” is defined by the Water Sustainability Act
Agencies or as Designated in the Special Provisions. and may be designated in the Special Provisions,
“Fishery Timing Window” and “Instream Work Environmental Approvals, legislation, and/or by
Window” are synonymous. Ministry Representative. Stream is synonymous with
(n) "Habitats" are defined as those parts of the Watercourse.
environment on which terrestrial and/or aquatic species (w) "Watercourses" shall apply to all bodies of water
depend, directly or indirectly, in order to carry out their including streams, rivers, canals, ditches, lakes, ponds,
life processes. and wetlands. Watercourses may be ESAs.
(o) “High Water Mark” is defined as the visible high Watercourse is synonymous with Stream.
water mark of any lake, stream, wetland or other body 165.01.03 General Constraints for Protection of the
of water where the presence and action of the water are Environment – The following general constraints in regard
so common and usual and so long continued in all to the protection of any Watercourse shall apply and are
ordinary years as to mark upon the soil of the bed of the
lake, river stream, or other body of water a character
distinct from that of the banks, both in vegetation and
in the nature of the soil itself. Typical features may

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (2 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 52 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

considered incidental to the price bid for work under attend all key meetings at which environmental protection
Contract and no other compensation will be made: measures are to be discussed.
(a) The Contractor shall place and/or dispose of all organic The Environmental Monitor and the Contractor shall work
material, refuse, ash, petroleum products and other together on the development and implementation of the
Deleterious Materials so as not to directly or indirectly Construction Environmental Management Plan, including
pollute. The placement and disposal of all such Environmental Procedures, as well as any applications for
products and materials shall be done in an Environmental Approvals.
environmentally acceptable manner.
Unless otherwise approved by the Ministry Representative,
(b) Except as required by the Contract Documents, all the Environmental Monitor shall be on-site during work in
inorganic material shall be placed and/or disposed of in Environmentally Sensitive Areas including, but not limited
a manner that does not obstruct or unduly disturb any to the following activities:
permanent or seasonal Watercourse. Any such
• installation and decommission of temporary stream
obstruction or disturbance shall be restored to the
crossings, bridge works, construction accesses, and in-
original drainage pattern as reasonably required by the
stream sediment control and isolation measures;
Ministry Representative. Any removal of inorganic
material from a Watercourse shall be done in a manner • fish and wildlife salvage operations;
that minimizes adverse impacts and shall be carried out
• excavations, or placement of riprap, below the High
as directed by the Ministry Representative.
Water Mark of streams;
(c) All activities below the High Water Mark of any
Watercourse shall be kept to an absolute minimum. • construction activities in and around listed species or
Machinery and equipment shall not be operated below ecosystems; and
the High Water Mark of any Watercourse other than the • concrete pours and grouting operations in and around
terms of the Authorisation and permits issued by the Designated Watercourses.
Environmental Agencies. An Environmental Monitor
shall be present at the direction of the Ministry At a minimum, the Environmental Monitor shall attend at
Representative during any work below the High Water the Site on a monthly basis to perform a general compliance
Mark of any Watercourse during the Works. review of all the Contractor’s environmental
responsibilities, and provide a report of the observations and
165.01.04 Designated Streams and Designated findings within seven (7) days of that review to the
Environmentally Sensitive Areas – Any Watercourse or Contractor and the Ministry Representative.
Environmentally Sensitive Area Designated in the Special
Provisions or by the Ministry Representative is subject to all 165.02.01 Planning and Scheduling – The Contractor shall
of the constraints of this Section. carefully plan and schedule construction activities in a
manner that ensures the avoidance or absolute minimization
165.02 Environmental Monitor – The Contractor shall of environmental damage. The Contractor shall be familiar
retain the services of an Environmental Monitor. with and be able to identify those areas and times which
present environmental problems and shall prepare schedules
The Environmental Monitor shall be suitably experienced
and work methods accordingly. The Contractor shall
in, and responsible for:
forward a copy of each of the schedules to the Ministry
• The preparation and implementation of environmental Representative at least one week in advance of
protection plans, including the CEMP; commencement of each of these operations, unless
otherwise specified in the contract.
• Preparing environmental monitoring reports;
165.02.02 Construction Environmental Management
• Compliance reporting to Environmental Agencies, if
Plan
required by Environmental Approval(s),
The Contractor shall provide to the Ministry a Construction
• liaising with Environmental Agencies;
Environmental Management Plan (CEMP), prepared and/or
• applying for Environmental Approvals; signed and accepted by an Appropriately Qualified
Professional.
• fish and wildlife salvage operations, including
obtaining necessary permits; The following time periods are required for plan review and
acceptance unless otherwise specified in the Special
• proactive sediment and erosion control; and
Provisions or by the Ministry Representative. No review or
• sampling, analysis and monitoring of water quality. change requested by the Ministry Representative in any way
relieves the Contractor of any of its responsibilities for
The Environmental Monitor shall be available throughout
protection of the environment.
the duration of the Work to represent the Contractor in all
matters related to the protection of the environment and will

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (3 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 53 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

• CEMP shall be submitted to the Ministry • Archaeology Management Plan

Representative for review at least fifteen (15) work
• Clearing and Grubbing Plan;
days prior to mobilization to the site. The
following conditions shall apply: • Concrete Waste Management Plan
o Any plan modifications shall be submitted to • Construction and Waste Management Plan;
the Ministry Representative for review at least
• Environmental Incident Reporting Plan;
ten (10) working days prior to any changes
being made in the field . • Environmental Monitoring Plan identifying the
o A staged plan shall be submitted to the Work activities during which the Environmental
Ministry Representative for review at least ten Monitor will be on-site;
(10) working days prior to implementation of • Erosion and Sediment Control Plan;
a new stage.
• Invasive Plant Management Plan
o Where a plan modification or staged plan
requires environmental agency review, the • Reclamation Plan; and
changes must be approved by the agency prior • Spill Contingency Plan.
to implementation.
The CEMP shall clearly indicate how the Works will be
Following review, the CEMP shall be revised as necessary undertaken to avoid negative impacts pertaining to, but not
and a final version provided to the Ministry Representative. limited to, the following resources:
The Contractor shall make copies of the CEMP accessible • air quality;
to personnel on-site.
• archaeological, heritage, and cultural resources;
The CEMP must be inclusive of all elements relevant to the
complete scope and duration of the work being undertaken • fish and fish habitat; including Fisheries Sensitive
and, including, but not limited to, the following: Zones, and designated streams;

• a clear description of how the work will comply • identified sensitive areas, including designated
with the environmental protection requirements of Environmentally Sensitive Areas;
the Contract, including, but not limited to, the • landscaping and visual aesthetics;
Standard Specifications, Special Provisions, and
Environmental Approvals; • noise during construction;

• a summary that clearly demonstrates the • rare and endangered flora/fauna;

Contractor’s understanding of the specific • soil conservation (including site stability, dust
environmental issues involved with the Work, control);
including Environmental Approvals;
• vegetation (including riparian plant communities);
• a description that demonstrates the Contractor’s
understanding of Ministry/Contractor • water quantity and quality (including all surface
responsibilities with regards to protection of the and sub-surface sources); and
environment; • wildlife.
• clear identification of the process, including The Contractor, in consultation with the Ministry
duration and sequence of each task, leading to the Representative, Environmental Monitor and the
receipt of agency approvals, and the linkage Environmental Agencies, shall be responsible for
between the process and the project schedule; determining the conditions under which the work must be
• Linkage between project schedule and carried out in Environmentally Sensitive Areas, and for
Environmental Timing Windows making all required on-site examinations and examinations
of documents supplied and referenced by the Ministry in
• Environmental Procedures; order to fully comprehend the environmental aspects of the
• Contact names, positions and telephone numbers work required.
of individuals responsible for elements of the plan 165.02.03 Environmental Procedures – The Ministry
and Environmental Agency contacts. Representative or the Environmental Agencies may require
And some or all of the following plans that are relevant to one or more detailed, task specific, Environmental
the Works: Procedures for any work in and around Environmentally
Sensitive Areas, or for works outside of Environmental
• Air Quality and Dust Control Plan Timing Windows that have the potential to impact the
Environment. When an Environmental Procedure is

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (4 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 54 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

required, the Contractor and the Environmental Monitor (vii) Demolition of existing structures; and
shall work together to prepare and submit the procedures for
(viii) Other activities as directed by the Ministry
acceptance by the Ministry Representative and the
Representative or Environmental Agencies.
Environmental Agencies prior to undertaking work in these
areas. These detailed procedures shall be an element of the 165.02.04 Project Orientation and Meetings – The
CEMP. The Contractor shall forward a copy of the final Contractor and Environmental Monitor shall meet regularly
approved set of procedures to the Environmental Agencies with the Ministry Representative. The purpose of such
and Ministry Representative, prior to undertaking the work. regular meetings will be to outline the schedule of upcoming
The Environmental Procedures shall contain the following construction and proposed activities, and to review the
items: activities of the previous week. Such regular meetings do
not relieve the Contractor from attending or arranging other
(a) Existing environmental conditions. Identification of
types of meetings as required due to the nature or extent of
the environmental resources in the area of the proposed
the work being done.
work. This includes baseline conditions to monitor
against (e.g. water quality). The Contractor shall arrange and conduct such regular
meetings during construction, subject to the following
(b) Description of work proposed in the Environmentally
conditions:
Sensitive Area. Details of the proposed work, staging,
equipment to be used, schedule of activities, and (a) Meetings shall be held on a weekly basis when
location. construction activities are to proceed during an
Environmental Timing Window, during a period when
(c) Environmental protection measures. Detailed
work is to proceed in an Environmentally Sensitive
description of the protective measures that will be used
Area, or during a period when the proposed
to protect environmental resources from each
construction activity elsewhere on a project is to
anticipated adverse impact. This includes scheduling
proceed for a duration greater than two weeks and has
works to coincide with Environmental Timing
the potential to cause adverse environmental impacts.
Windows. If works cannot occur within the
Environmental Timing Window the Environmental (b) During periods other than that specified above, regular
Procedure will include detailed site-specific mitigation environmental meetings shall be held every two weeks,
measures to address working outside the least risk or as otherwise agreed to by the Ministry
timing window(s). Representative.
(d) Contingency plan. Description of alternative or backup (c) In the event that the Environmental Monitor or the
plan in the event of an environmental emergency or Ministry Representative deem the Contractor’s
failure of any of the mitigation or protective measures. compliance regarding environmental requirements to
be inadequate at any time during the project, the
(e) Environmental monitoring requirements. Indication of
frequency of the weekly or biweekly regular meetings
any specific or unique environmental monitoring
shall be increased accordingly until the Environmental
requirements to ensure compliance with environmental
Monitor and the Ministry Representative are satisfied
specifications and proper implementation of the
with the Contractor’s compliance rate.
procedure.
(d) The Environmental Monitor shall record highlights
(f) Environmental Procedures will be required for, but not
from the meetings (e.g., summary of major discussion
limited to, any of the following activities taking place
items and key action items) and forward a copy to the
within Environmentally Sensitive Areas;
Contractor, as well as include this material in the
(i) Clearing or grubbing; monitoring report
(ii) Streambed or streambank excavation, or riprap The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the
placement in a Watercourse; forepersons, operators, and work crews (including any
subcontractors) understand the specific environmental
(iii) Installation or decommissioning of temporary
issues on the work site and their responsibilities under this
features such as work bridges, cofferdams,
Section. The Environmental Monitor shall give all
instream shoring, tote roads, or construction
construction personnel a brief environmental orientation
accesses;
prior to such personnel commencing work in any
(iv) Fish and wildlife salvage operations; Environmentally Sensitive Area. The Environmental
Monitor shall ensure that construction personnel are
(v) Works below the High Water Mark of a
familiar with the environmental requirements and
Watercourse;
acceptable construction practices during the Works. The
(vi) Concrete pours and grouting in and around Contractor shall support the Environmental Monitor’s role
watercourses; in this regard.

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (5 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 55 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

165.02.05 Activity Within Designated Watercourses and 165.03 Compliance, Enforcement and Payment
Environmentally Sensitive Areas – All activities that are
165.03.01 Compliance with Specifications – The
conducted below the High Water Mark of any Designated
Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all subcontractors
Watercourse or within other Designated Environmentally
and employees are in compliance with these Specifications
Sensitive Areas must conform to the timing restrictions and
and all applicable environmental legislation and regulatory
Environmental Timing Windows stated in the Special
requirements at all times, and shall take immediate action to
Provisions, Environmental Approvals, or Best Management
rectify problems in this regard. The Contractor shall initiate
Practices. Construction work must be scheduled so that all
action to rectify environmental problems within the time
operations affecting the Fisheries Sensitive Zone or other
period as specified by the Ministry Representative. The
Designated Environmentally Sensitive Areas can be
Contractor shall have available such additional safeguards,
completed within these time periods. Prior to the
safety devices and protective equipment as are necessary to
commencement of any construction activities, all work in
protect the environment. The Contractor shall be
these areas must be approved by the Environmental
responsible for ensuring sufficient safety devices and
Agencies and the Ministry Representative.
protective equipment (e.g., pumps, silt fence, armouring,
The Contractor must give at least 48 hours notice to the tarps, fuel spill cleanup kits, etc.) are readily available at all
Ministry Representative in advance of any construction- times during construction of the Project. The location and
related activity in Designated areas and ESAs. Construction inventory of safety devices and protective equipment shall
activities within Designated Watercourses or other ESAs be documented and placed in a prominent location in the
shall not commence without the approval and attendance of Contractor’s field office. A copy of this information shall
the Environmental Monitor. be updated as necessary and provided to the Ministry
Representative.
165.02.06 Inclement Weather – The Contractor shall cease
operations, modify construction methods, or relocate to an The Environmental Monitor shall inspect and monitor
alternative site within the project area during periods of conditions at, and in the vicinity of, the Works to ensure
inclement weather to avoid siltation of Designated compliance with the environmental specifications contained
Watercourses. If the Ministry Representative judges that herein and in the Special Provisions.
the Contractor is not complying with the intent of this
The frequency of such inspection and monitoring efforts
Section, the Ministry Representative may direct the
shall correspond to the sensitivity and location of
Contractor as to measures required without additional
construction activities, as well as to the environmental
compensation for delays or alterations in the Contractor's
conditions (e.g., increased monitoring and inspection will
work.
be conducted during periods of inclement weather). In the
165.02.07 Work Stoppage – Prior to initiating work event that the Ministry Representative is not satisfied with
stoppages, the Contractor shall initiate and complete any the frequency and duration of such inspection and
mitigative and environmental protection measures required monitoring, the Contractor and/or the Environmental
to safeguard the environment and the Project during work Monitor will be required to increase their efforts in this
stoppages. regard to a level satisfactory to the Ministry.
The Contractor shall give the Ministry Representative 165.03.02 Compliance with Environmental Legislation
sufficient notice of impending shutdowns to enable the and Regulatory Requirements – The Contractor shall
Ministry Representative, Contractor, and, if employed, the observe and comply with all federal, provincial, municipal
Environmental Monitor to examine the project. This notice and local laws and regulations which seek to ensure that
shall be sufficient to permit the Contractor adequate time to construction work does not adversely affect the
install all necessary additional environmental mitigation environment or social-community resources.
measures as may be directed by the Ministry
Environmental legislation relevant to most Works includes,
Representative.
but is not limited to:
The Contractor shall ensure the Environmental Monitor and
Federal Legislation;
construction personnel inspect Environmentally Sensitive
Areas on the Project on a regular basis during any extended o Fisheries Act
work stoppages (e.g., weekends, statutory holidays,
Christmas vacation periods) to prevent environmental o Migratory Bird Convention Act
problems. If potential adverse environmental impacts are o Canadian Navigable Water Act
observed during work stoppage periods, the Contractor shall
initiate and undertake any required environmental measures o Seeds Act
to avoid or minimize impacts in a timely manner to the o Species at Risk Act
satisfaction of the Ministry Representative.

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (6 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 56 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Provincial Legislation: • A joint publication between the Ministry and the

Invasive Plant Council of BC “Best Practices for
o Environmental Management Act
Managing Invasive Plants on Roadsides” (2010).
o Heritage Conservation Act
In the event of conflict between the requirements set out in
o Integrated Pest Management Act these Specifications and quality control laws, statutes,
regulations and ordinances of federal, provincial, municipal
o Water Sustainability Act
or local agencies, the more restrictive requirements or
o Weed Control Act and Regulation regulations shall apply. A violation of the environmental
laws and regulations reported to the Ministry by the
o Wildlife Act responsible agencies may result in the issuance of a non-
A non-inclusive listing of Best Management Practices and conformance report. Should the situation warrant more
Environmental Agencies’ areas of concern are provided in stringent measures, it may also result in the issuance of a
the current versions of the following: stop-work order until the violation is corrected. The
Contractor shall have no recourse for reimbursement due to
• The joint publication “Land Development Guidelines delays or alterations to construction activities arising from
for the Protection of Aquatic Habitat”, Fisheries and such violations or the correction of such violations.
Oceans Canada and the Ministry of Environment,
Lands and Parks (1992), hereafter referred to as the The Contractor shall observe and comply with all terms and
“Land Development Guidelines”; conditions of Environmental Approvals. Unless otherwise
indicated, the Contractor is responsible for all work needed
• Standards and codes of practice, Fisheries and Oceans to comply with the terms and conditions of Environmental
Canada https://www.dfo-mpo.gc.ca/pnw-ppe/practice- Approvals. The Contractor shall make copies of all
practique-eng.html Environmental Approvals accessible to personnel on-site.
• “Develop with Care 2014: Environmental Guidelines 165.03.03 Temporary Pollution Control – The Contractor
for Urban and Rural Land Development”, Ministry of shall be responsible for implementation of any temporary
Environment (2014) environmental protection measures, such as pollution
• The “Standards and Best Practices for Instream control measures. If the Contractor fails to respond to this
Works”, Ministry of Water, Land and Air Protection requirement or to the instructions in this regard from the
(2004); Ministry Representative or the Environmental Monitor
within directed time span, the Ministry Representative may
• “A User’s Guide to Working In and Around Water” take whatever action is necessary to provide the proper
Ministry of Environment (2009 update); corrective measures. In the event the Contractor fails to take
• “National Guide to Erosion and Sediment Control on reasonable action to implement temporary environmental
Roadway Projects”, available for purchase from the control measures, the Ministry's Representative and/or the
Transportation Association of Canada (2005); Environmental Agencies shall determine the need for
additional corrective action. The Ministry's Representative
• Ministry publication “Reclamation and Environmental may deduct incurred costs from any money due or to
Protection Handbook for Sand, Gravel and Quarry become due to the Contractor for any corrective action taken
Operations in British Columbia” (1995); in this regard.
• Ministry publication “Manual of Control of Erosion 165.03.04 Responsibility for Damage to Environment –
and Shallow Slope Movement” (1997) (being updated The Contractor shall bear sole responsibility for any direct
as the “Erosion and Sediment Control Manual” (2020)) or indirect damage to the environment which occurs as a
• Federal “Transport of Dangerous Goods Regulations”; result of failure to comply with environmental legislation,
Environmental Approvals, these Specifications, the Special
• “A field guide to Fuel Handling, Transportation and Provisions, and/or the directions of the Ministry
Storage” Ministry of Water, Land and Air Protection Representative or recommendations of the Environmental
(2002); Monitor.
• Confirmed Pest Management Plans 165.03.05 Stop Work Orders – In the event that the
• “Freshwater Intake End-of-Pipe Fish Screen Ministry Representative or the Environmental Monitor
Guideline” Fisheries and Oceans Canada (1995) determines that some aspect of the construction is creating
or will result in a substantial adverse effect on
• “Measures to Avoid Causing Harm to Fish and Fish environmental values or resources on or adjacent to the
Habitat” Fisheries and Oceans Canada, Available project site, the Ministry Representative or the
Online; and Environmental Monitor may issue a "stop work order" on
behalf of the Ministry for that aspect of work potentially
having an adverse effect. The Contractor shall subsequently

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (7 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 57 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

be responsible for advising the Ministry Representative of Representative shall be notified immediately and the
the intended remedial action. The Ministry Representative Contractor shall remove the material immediately, using
or the Environmental Monitor may direct the Contractor to environmentally acceptable construction procedures and
cease construction work on an unaffected portion of the site under the direction of the Environmental Monitor.
so that any necessary equipment can be immediately
165.04.01 Erosion and Sediment Control Plan (ESCP) –
diverted to address the environmental emergency. In such
The Contractor is responsible for preparing and
an event the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for
implementing an ESCP for the project in accordance with
compensation from the Ministry.
the methodology of the “National Guide to Erosion and
In the event that the Ministry Representative cannot be Sediment Control on Roadway Projects”, Transportation
contacted, the Environmental Monitor shall assume the Association of Canada 2005. The ESCP shall be updated to
Ministry Representative's role regarding Stop Work Orders, reflect changing conditions on Site, at the direction of the
as detailed above, until such time as the Ministry Environmental Monitor or the Ministry Representative.
Representative can be contacted. The Environmental The Contractor shall incorporate all temporary and
Monitor shall fully document all such instances. In such an permanent soil erosion and sediment control features into
event, the Contractor will not be entitled to any legal the Works, as outlined in the accepted work schedule and
recourse or claim for compensation from the Ministry. ESCP, and shall be responsible for daily inspection of the
integrity of such measures during adverse weather
The Contractor shall be required to modify or halt any
conditions or when construction operations are proceeding
aspect of construction or maintenance that the
in Environmentally Sensitive Areas. Erosion and sediment
Environmental Agencies determine poses or will pose an
control measures shall be capable of continuous operation
environmental concern. The Environmental Agencies may
during working and non-working hours, and are subject to
verbally direct the Contractor to modify or halt any such
acceptance by the Ministry Representative. Any
activity or submit formal written instructions to that effect.
deficiencies which are observed in erosion control measures
In either case, the Contractor’s immediate compliance with
shall be immediately corrected.
their instructions will be mandatory. The Contractor shall
document any such requests by the Environmental Agencies ESC measures include, but are not limited to:
and forward a copy of this documentation to the Ministry
• interceptor ditches or berms to direct runoff away from
Representative within five working days of the initial
erodible areas;
notification by the Agencies.
• slope protection measures such as mulches,
165.03.06 Payment – All requirements for compliance with
hydroseeding, erosion mats, geotextiles, filter fabric,
these environmental specifications shall be considered
polyethylene covers, or riprap;
incidental to the price bid for the Project under contract and
no other compensation shall be made to the Contractor. • silt fences;
However, the Contractor may be eligible for reimbursement
• ditch blocks to reduce flow velocities;
for the installation of any additional environmental works
(e.g., enhancement measures) where directed and approved • sediment control measures, such as settling ponds, and
in writing by the Ministry Representative and not covered
in this Section or elsewhere in the Special Provisions or • check dams.
Schedule of Quantities and Unit Prices. The Ministry The Contractor shall have sufficient materials, such as clean
Representative will be responsible for determining the rock, granular material, and filter fabric available on-site for
Contractor’s eligibility in this regard and for identifying emergency protection measures when required.
what environmental work is beyond the scope of the
Contract and these specifications. The Contractor shall regularly maintain sediment and
drainage control measures, such that they function as
165.04 Erosion, Sediment, and Drainage Control – All designed. Immediate action shall be taken by the Contractor
works shall be undertaken in a manner that avoids or to correct any deficiency observed in the operation of
absolutely minimizes erosion problems and the discharge of erosion and sediment control measures. In the event that a
siltation or other deleterious substances into any deficiency in any sediment or drainage control measures is
Watercourse. The Contractor shall not disturb Designated directly or indirectly creating an adverse environmental
Watercourses, unless the express written consent of the impact, the Contractor shall initiate the necessary action to
Environmental Agencies is obtained prior to initiating correct the problem within one hour of observing or being
construction activities in such areas. No obstruction or informed of the situation. In the event that a deficiency in
debris shall be placed in any Watercourse during any any sediment or drainage control measures poses the
operations, unless specified in the Special Provisions or by potential to create an adverse environmental impact, the
the Ministry Representative, or for Designated Contractor shall take action within two days of observing or
Watercourses approved by the Environmental Agencies. being informed of the situation. In the event that
Should any material be inadvertently placed below the environmental conditions or the status of the situation
normal High Water Mark of a Watercourse, the Ministry

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (8 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 58 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

changes in regards to a potential deficiency, the Contractor activities will be conducted, including but not limited
shall accelerate any proposed correction measure(s) by to haul or access roads, temporary structures, borrow
taking immediate action (i.e., within one hour). The and granular excavations, staging/laydown areas,
judgment of the need and timing for corrective action in material storage sites and disposal sites.
regard to sediment or drainage control measures shall be at
(c) The Contractor shall not commence work in any area
the discretion of the Ministry Representative,
so identified until an Erosion and Sediment Control
Environmental Monitor, and the Environmental Agencies.
Plan has been submitted and accepted by the Ministry
Sediment and debris accumulations which compromise the Representative and involved Environmental Agencies.
functioning of the erosion and sediment control measures
(d) The acceptance of the Contractor’s Erosion and
shall be removed by the Contractor and disposed of in an
Sediment Control Plan or updated Plan shall be valid
environmentally acceptable location and manner. At a
only so long as the conditions and anticipated
minimum, silt fence structures shall be cleaned when
conditions upon which the Plan and its acceptance were
sediment accumulation heights exceed 30 cm along any
based continue to be applicable.
portion of the structure.
(e) The Contractor shall at all times be responsible for
In the absence of site-specific requirements from Fisheries
ensuring that work is carried out in accordance with a
and Oceans Canada or the British Columbia Ministry of
Erosion and Sediment Control Plan or updated Plan,
Environment, the Contractor shall comply with criteria for
which has been accepted by the Ministry
suspended solids in runoff water from the site as agreed
Representative and Environmental Agencies.
upon prior to construction by the Ministry Representative
and Environmental Agencies. (f) The Ministry Representative or the Environmental
Agencies may request the Contractor to update and
Erosion, sediment and drainage control methods are
resubmit its plan(s) at any time, and may require the
detailed in the “National Guide to Erosion and Sediment
Contractor to cease work until the update(s) has been
Control on Roadway Projects” and the "Land Development
submitted and accepted. Whether or not the Ministry
Guidelines", the “Standards and Best Practices for Instream
Representative or the Environmental Agencies so
Works” and the Ministry publication "Control of Erosion
request, the responsibility for carrying out the work in
and Shallow Slope Movement" (to be updated in 2020 as
accordance with a validly accepted Plan lies entirely
the “Erosion and Sediment Control Manual”). Compliance
with the Contractor.
with the spirit and intent of these guidelines is mandatory.
The determination of the Contractor's compliance with (g) The Ministry Representative or the Environmental
these guidelines shall be at the discretion of the Ministry Agencies may order the Contractor to stop work or to
Representative and Environmental Agencies. take other precautionary or remedial measures
whenever the Contractor is carrying out any work that
The Contractor, in consultation with the Environmental
is not in accordance with an Erosion and Sediment
Monitor, shall be responsible for the preparation and
Control Plan or updated Plan which has been accepted
implementation of the ESCP, which forms part of the
by the Ministry Representative or the Environmental
CEMP, required for the Project. The ESCP(s) will be
Agencies, and for which that acceptance is still valid.
subject to, but not limited to the following requirements:
All costs of any resulting delay shall be borne entirely
(a) Prior to commencement of construction activities on by the Contractor.
the Project and thereafter when deemed necessary, the
(h) At a minimum, an Erosion and Sediment Control Plan
Contractor and the Environmental Monitor shall
shall include the following information and shall be
identify areas and major construction activities for
prepared in a format satisfactory to the Ministry
which the Contractor will be required to prepare one or
Representative and the Ministry:
more Erosion and Sediment Control Plans. Designation
of these areas and activities will be done in consultation (i) A schedule for the proposed activities, as they
with the Environmental Agencies and the Ministry pertain to the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan
Representative. and construction staging, including anticipated
duration of construction.
(b) In addition to activities within the Project area, a
Erosion and Sediment Control Plan shall be submitted (ii) A description of the construction procedures that
for activities related to the Contractor’s work in areas will be used to limit the potential for erosion and
away from the project that have the potential to create sediment production, including estimates of work
adverse environmental impacts, which shall be areas where applicable (e.g., volume of material in
determined by the Contractor in consultation with the a proposed stockpile site), description of
Environmental Monitor, the Environmental Agencies construction equipment to be used, and staging of
and the Ministry. These activities are not confined to operations.
the areas immediately adjacent to the right-of-way, but
also in other locations in which the work or associated

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (9 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 59 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

(iii) A detailed description of the site-specific measures developed conditions with a minimum 0.60 metre
for runoff and drainage management. freeboard to the top of the berm.
(iv) A detailed description of the site-specific The Contractor is referred to Section 3 of the “Land
mitigation measures and design information for Development Guidelines” for other pond design criteria and
erosion prevention and control (e.g., sizing of Section 8 of that publication, for sample calculations for
culverts, ditches or sediment/detention ponds, silt water flows and pond sizes.
fence specifications, and description of ditching
If during construction the settlement pond is filled to
and berming).
capacity and is still required for sediment control,
(v) A schedule that identifies the various sloped areas accumulated settled sediments shall be removed from
by station and the dates in which they will be sediment control ponds and stormwater detention ponds.
protected using temporary and permanent Such sediments shall be disposed of in an environmentally
revegetation measures, such as hydroseeding. acceptable location and manner.
(vi) A detailed description of mitigative measures for 165.04.04 Maintenance of Drainage Patterns – Except
ensuring acceptable water quality and quantity at where interceptor ditches or berms are required to divert
points of discharge to Watercourses, including sediment laden runoff from the site to a sediment control
sizes and specifications for any proposed water pond or filtration area, original drainage patterns shall be
treatment facilities. maintained throughout construction operations. Interceptor
ditches or berms shall be constructed to divert water
(vii) A key plan and drawings, in suitable scale and
entering the site away from erosion prone areas. The
detail, of the site and proposed mitigative measures
Contractor shall not rely on drainage courses or conduits
and applicable construction procedures.
being shown on the Drawings, and shall make whatever
(viii) A written commitment and list of on-site investigation is necessary. Where a natural Watercourse
equipment (e.g., water pumps) and materials (e.g., traversing the construction site crosses this interceptor ditch
silt fence, hay bales, rock armouring, and ditch or berm, an armoured or lined ditch or a culvert shall be
breakers) for erosion, sediment and drainage installed in order to pass accumulated flows through or
control to deal with emergency situations that may around the construction site in a manner that maintains the
arise. natural runoff pattern, unless otherwise directed by the
Ministry Representative or Environmental Agencies.
(ix) A written commitment of on-site equipment and
staff to handle any fish salvage and transfer All ditches constructed for interception of clean water
operations, if required. outside the work site(s) to divert it around the work site(s)
and for collection of treated water from the work site(s) shall
(x) A description of the specific monitoring be designed and constructed to accommodate the 10-year
procedures and inspection frequencies prior to,
return period storm with a 0.3 m freeboard under developed
during and after completion of construction
conditions. Temporary and/or permanent drainage ditches,
activities at this site. This shall include a
including those constructed for erosion and sediment
description of water quality testing locations and
control shall be designed to prevent high water velocities
testing frequencies. and erosion by including measures such as check dams,
165.04.02 Not used. drop structures or erosion-resistant liners or armouring.
165.04.03 Sediment Control Ponds – The Contractor shall 165.04.05 Storm Drainage Systems – In order to minimize
construct sediment control ponds where necessary to siltation, the Contractor may be required to block storm
prevent the release of unavoidably entrained sediments in drain inlets, or to activate inlets by means of sandbags,
runoff from the construction site, and shall construct berms or swales, as circumstances require, or at the
stormwater detention ponds for the temporary and/or direction of the Ministry Representative. Berms shall be
permanent control and discharge of stormwater runoff. The constructed of clean, non-erodible granular material. The
Contractor shall provide designs for and construct sediment Contractor shall maintain, on a regular basis, any inlets
control ponds, as well as stormwater detention ponds, on a activated during the course of construction. Any
site-specific basis in a manner that conforms to the deficiencies noted in these works shall be corrected
“National Guide to Erosion and Sediment Control on immediately in the event that the inlet is plugged and within
Roadway Projects” or "Land Development Guidelines", the same day if the site is relatively dry.
other than for the following exception(s): The Contractor shall ensure adequate inspection and
• Sediment control ponds and dry or wet stormwater correction of any storm drainage system deficiencies for
detention ponds shall be designed and constructed to sites within the influence of the Project. During periods of
accommodate the 10-year return period storm under inclement weather, the Contractor shall ensure project staff
inspect storm drainage systems throughout the day, and if
necessary, make arrangements for inspection and

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (10 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 60 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

maintenance during regular work stoppage periods, such as materials are sensitive to erosion, the Ministry
evenings or weekends. At a minimum, such inspections Representative may confine grubbing to an area where
shall be carried out at the start of the regular workday, at excavation and earthwork is to be actively conducted within
mid-day in the workday, and one hour prior to end of the approximately 30 days following the completion of
regular workday. Furthermore, in the event of flooding grubbing operations. In the event that a highway project
problems, the Contractor shall be responsible for any consists only of clearing and grubbing operations, the
damages or compensation resulting from impacts on cleared ground shall be protected and able to withstand
residences or businesses caused by a failure or deficiency in specified periods of inclement weather.
the Contractor’s design and maintenance of the storm
165.05.02 Protection of Vegetation – The Contractor shall
drainage system.
protect all vegetation growing outside of the Designated and
During concrete curb and gutter construction, road surface marked areas for clearing and grubbing, as specified in
runoff shall be directed by berms or swales away from SS 769 "Protection and Retention of Vegetation", with the
concrete which has been poured within the previous 48 exception of danger trees, which must be hand-felled and
hours. removed with minimum disturbance to retained vegetation.
165.05 Clearing and Grubbing Plan (CGP) – The 165.05.03 Clearing Activities – Any trees or large pieces
Contractor shall obtain acceptance for this plan from the of woody debris that accidentally fall into a Watercourse
Ministry Representative. The Contractor shall also obtain and require removal shall be removed in a manner that
any necessary tree removal permits from the Ministry of minimizes the disturbance of the Watercourse and adjacent
Forests, Lands and Natural Resource Operations prior to banks, and is approved by the Ministry Representative.
initiating any clearing. Skidding of logs across Watercourses will not be permitted.
The Environmental Monitor must be present during removal
If clearing and grubbing is scheduled to occur outside of an
of any large woody debris or trees from Watercourses.
Environmental Timing Window, the Contractor’s AQP
shall develop a site-specific mitigation plan for acceptance Riparian trees that require falling or full or partial removal
by the Ministry Representative. along a fish-bearing Watercourse shall have first right-of-
refusal for use as woody debris habitat complexing as
165.05.01 Limits for Clearing and Grubbing – Clearing
approved by the Ministry Representative.
and/or grubbing shall extend only to the Designated limits,
as defined in the Contract Drawings and marked on site. 165.05.04 Disposal of Combustible Materials – The
Prior to clearing or grubbing, marked limits will be Contractor shall comply with the Forest Act and the Open
inspected by the Ministry Representative, who may amend Burning Smoke Control Regulation under the British
them. The Contractor may be required to use close-cut, no Columbia Environmental Management Act. For additional
grub practices (i.e., cutting trees at ground level and not information regarding the regulation, the Contractor should
removing root system) or undertake hand clearing at contact regional staff in the British Columbia Ministry of
environmentally sensitive sites, as Designated in the Special Environment office and the Fire Centre staff in the British
Provisions or by the Ministry Representative, or Columbia Ministry of Forests, Lands and Natural Resource
Environmental Agencies. Operations. The Contractor is responsible for submitting
any necessary notifications, or obtaining any necessary
The Contractor shall not proceed with clearing and grubbing
permits, for burning from the Ministry of Forests, Lands and
closer than 50 m from a Designated Watercourse or
Natural Resource Operations.
Environmentally Sensitive Area prior to marking the limits
of the Environmentally Sensitive Area. The width of the The Contractor shall prevent heat or smoke damage to all
ESA, if not specified in the Special Provisions, will be vegetation that has been Designated for preservation. The
determined by the Ministry Representative in consultation use of waste oil and/or tires as fire accelerators shall not be
with the Environmental Agencies and shall be visibly permitted. The Contractor may be required to use a forced
marked in the field. air method of burning. Burning piles shall not be located
within 50 m of any Watercourse, wetland or other
All clearing and grubbing activities in the ESA must be
Environmentally Sensitive Area, or in areas where ditches
granted prior approval by the Environmental Agencies. The
are to be constructed without written approval of the
Contractor shall not conduct approved grubbing operations
Ministry Representative.
within the ESA until ready to proceed with earthwork and
stabilization. In situations in which the material generated as a result of
clearing and/or grubbing may not be burned on site, the
In areas near Designated Watercourses or other ESAs
Contractor shall dispose of it in a manner approved by the
determined by the Ministry Representative or
Ministry Representative and/or the Environmental
Environmental Agencies to be of high erosion or siltation
Agencies.
potential, the surface area of erodible soil exposed at one
time may be limited by the Ministry Representative. This
will supersede SS 200.03 and SS 200.04. Where exposed

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (11 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 61 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

165.06 Stripping Operations procedures for any required land clearing activity. The
proposal will be reviewed by the Ministry Representative
165.06.01 Exposure of Erodible Earth – In areas where
who may consult with Environmental Agencies. No waste
erosion or siltation is anticipated, the duration of exposure
or surplus material shall be disposed of until the proposal
of erodible earth material shall be minimized. In such cases
has been approved. All work shall be done in accordance
the surface area of erodible earth material exposed at one
with the approved proposal.
time shall be determined and approved in writing by the
Ministry Representative. (See SS 165.05.01 Limits for All waste disposal sites shall be selected such that spoil is
Clearing and Grubbing) prevented from entering any Watercourse. The excavated
material shall be properly drained, spread and trimmed to a
165.06.02 Placement of Stripped Material – The
stable slope not exceeding 1.5 to 1, in a manner which
Contractor shall avoid placement of stripped materials on
minimizes disturbance of Watercourses and vegetated areas.
lands within the Agricultural Land Reserve and in areas
All waste sites shall be revegetated immediately after
adjacent to Watercourses or other Environmentally
creation of the waste disposal site, or else suitable
Sensitive Areas. Erosion and sediment control measures
temporary erosion control measures, such as application of
must be taken prior to and after placement of stockpiles of
tarps or mulch, shall be used until revegetation is
stripped material in areas where natural drainage or storm
undertaken. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that
water could erode the stockpile and thereby transport
revegetation is successfully accomplished unless otherwise
pollutants to surface waters. The location of stockpiles and
specified in the Special Provisions.
erosion control measures must be approved by the Ministry
Representative prior to placement of stripped materials and 165.07.02 Work in Areas of High Water Table – Work in
may be specified in the Special Provisions. The Contractor areas of high water table shall be scheduled to proceed
shall ensure that all stockpiles are stable. during dry weather periods unless otherwise specified in the
Special Provisions. The Contractor shall adopt all necessary
Polyethylene sheeting, other suitable tarp material or mulch
mitigation measures to avoid or minimize adverse impacts
covering shall be used to cover temporarily exposed steep
in such areas.
surfaces or stockpiles of erodible materials, such as topsoil,
sand, gravel or roadbase fill. The Contractor shall ensure 165.07.03 Drilling and Blasting – Blasting operations shall
such erodible materials are properly covered with sheeting, be conducted in a manner that minimizes the disturbance of
suitable tarp materials or mulch covering immediately after residences, businesses and public infrastructure (e.g.,
creation of any temporary stockpiles. Such sheeting, tarp schools, churches, libraries and hospitals) and to aquatic and
materials or mulch covering shall be examined and terrestrial habitats and organisms due to shock waves, noise
maintained on a regular basis. The sheeting, tarp materials and vibration.
or mulch covering shall be sufficiently anchored or applied
The Contractor shall not conduct blasting without the
to prevent displacement by winds or runoff.
acceptance of a blasting plan by the Ministry
See also SS 751.31.01 Stripping of Topsoil. Representative. The Contractor is responsible for preparing
the blasting plan.
165.06.03 Slope Protection – Not used.
Use of explosives in or near water produces shock waves
165.07 Earthwork Operations (Subgrade Construction)
that can damage a fish bladder and rupture internal organs.
165.07.01 Excavation and Disposal of Waste or Surplus Blasting vibrations may also kill or damage fish eggs or
Material – The creation and use of any site on Crown or larvae. For the most current Fisheries and Oceans
private lands for the placement and disposal of waste or requirements for blasting in fish waters please refer to their
surplus material requires prior approval from the Ministry main website under “Projects Near Water, Fish Protection”
Representative and may require the approval of the (available online).
Agricultural Land Commission or representatives of other
Blasting operations shall be controlled to minimize the entry
provincial Environmental Agencies. Unless another time
of fly rock into Watercourses or adjacent to the right-of-
period is specified in the Special Provisions or by the
way, particularly in an urban setting. If required by the
Ministry Representative, not less than fifteen days prior to
Environmental Agencies, the Contractor shall comply with
disposing of any waste or surplus material, the Contractor
the Agencies' directions in removal of fly rock from
shall submit to the Ministry Representative for approval, a
Watercourses and Environmentally Sensitive Areas at no
proposal delineating the locations and extent of the areas in
cost to the Ministry.
which the Contractor intends to dispose of such material.
The proposal shall describe the nature of the material and When blasting is to be conducted adjacent to or in a
the methods to be employed in material placement, Designated Environmentally Sensitive Area, the Contractor
stabilizing and site revegetation. If the Contractor is aware shall provide at least 24 hours notice of each blast to
that the material contains any noxious weeds, the Contractor appropriate Agencies and the Ministry Representative. The
shall note this in the proposal. If a disposal site is required Contractor shall provide at least 24 hours written notice to
off the right-of-way, the proposal shall also indicate the

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (12 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 62 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

those individuals or groups potentially affected by shock necessary for efficient pit operation. Material shall be
waves, noise and vibration from blasting operations. exhausted at one location in a pit prior to the opening of a
new face to remove a similar type and grade of material.
165.07.04 Pile Driving – Pile Driving operations shall be
conducted in a manner that minimizes the disturbance of The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the
residences, businesses and public infrastructure (e.g., functionality of erosion, sediment and drainage control
schools and churches) and to aquatic and terrestrial habitats measures within and around borrow and sand/gravel pits
and organisms due to shock waves, noise and vibration. throughout all phases of overburden and material removal,
as well as during periods of work stoppages. Borrow and/or
The Contractor shall not conduct pile driving within or near
sand/gravel pits shall be rehabilitated and decommissioned
fish habitat without the acceptance of the pile driving
in an environmentally acceptable manner and to the
procedure by Fisheries and Oceans Canada and/or
satisfaction of the Ministry Representative and the
provincial Environmental Agencies, and the Ministry
Environmental Agencies.
Representative. Vibrations and shock waves in fisheries
habitat resulting from pile driving shall comply with the To minimize the spread of noxious weed seeds or
Fisheries and Oceans Canada and BC Marine and Pile reproductive plant parts between construction sites and
Driving Contractor’s Association "Best Management gravel pits/quarries, all crushing equipment and mining
Practices for Pile Driving ". vehicles must be cleaned with a power/high pressure washer
(manually cleaned in freezing temperatures), before
The Contractor shall provide at least 24 hours notice of pile
entering any MoT pit or quarry. If the pit contains noxious
driving activities to the Ministry Representative. The
weeds the crushing equipment and mining vehicles must
Contractor shall provide at least 24 hours written notice to
also be cleaned with a power/high pressure washer
those individuals or groups potentially affected by shock
(manually cleaned in freezing temperatures) before leaving
waves, noise and vibration from pile driving operations.
the pit/quarry. Prior to the production of aggregates the pit
165.08 Borrow and Sand / Gravel Pits – All Borrow and floor, crusher/plant location, equipment-parking area,
Sand/Gravel pit locations, operations, reclamation and stockpile site(s), pit face(s) and area to be mined shall be
revegetation shall comply with the Ministry of Energy and inspected by an Appropriately Qualified Professional for the
Mines / the Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure / presence of noxious weeds. If noxious weeds are present
Natural Resources Canada joint publication "Reclamation they must be removed mechanically or treated chemically
and Environmental Protection Handbook for Sand, Gravel under the relevant confirmed Pest Management Plan by the
and Quarry Operations in British Columbia". Contractor prior to conducting work in the pit/quarry, and
shall be disposed of as directed by the Ministry
165.08.01 Control of Drainage – Prior to borrow Representative or the Environmental Monitor. All noxious
excavation, or quarry, sand or gravel pit development, the weeds found must be reported to the Ministry
Contractor shall prepare an Erosion and Sediment Control
Representative. Noxious weeds are defined as non-native
Plan (see SS 165.04.01) prior to the creation and/or
plants species listed in the Weed Control Act. All treatment
operation of any borrow excavations or quarry, sand or
and disposal of Noxious Weeds shall be as per the
gravel pit development sites. The Contractor shall also
Contractor’s accepted Invasive Plant Management Plan, a
prepare a Reclamation Plan. component of the CEMP, which shall be consistent with the
165.08.02 Location and Development of Borrow and requirements of the confirmed Pest Management Plan.
Sand/Gravel Pits – Clearing for borrow and sand/gravel
165.08.03 Washing Operations – In locations where
pits shall comply with SS 165.05 – Clearing and Grubbing.
siltation of a fish-bearing Watercourse may occur, approval
All organic strippings topsoil shall be stockpiled for future
shall be obtained from the Environmental Agencies prior to
reclamation. the establishment of aggregate washing operations, and all
Borrow excavations shall not be located below the High wash water shall be subject to SS 165.04. Where possible
Water Mark of a Watercourse or on a stream floodplain at a the Contractor may be directed by the Ministry
location likely to create a new channel to the stream at a Representative to use water from pit dewatering or clarified
time of flooding, without the approval of the Environmental water from the sediment pond(s) in the wash plant.
Agencies. Borrow sources located within 100 metres of the
Waste or surplus material shall be disposed of at a waste
High Water Mark of a Watercourse or at distances less than disposal site approved by the Ministry Representative and
100 m from any water-impounding dyke or dam Environmental Agencies. The Contractor shall create and
embankment will require the design of a Professional
designate, with appropriate signing, suitable sites and
Engineer or Professional Geoscientist. Final floor
facilities for disposal of waste or surplus material. In
elevations shall be sufficiently high that they will not be
particular, the disposal of deleterious materials, such as
subject to fluctuations in the groundwater table.
surplus concrete or concrete wash water in sites other than
In erosion-prone areas, overburden removal shall be those approved by the Ministry Representative and the
restricted to an area that will be excavated within one year. Environmental Agencies is prohibited. The Contractor and
The open face(s) of the borrow pit shall be no larger than the Environmental Monitor shall be responsible for ensuring

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (13 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 63 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

all construction personnel, including subcontractors, are When no longer required by the Contractor or the Ministry,
made aware of this requirement. In the event that it is not construction roads shall be properly decommissioned,
feasible to install a suitable concrete waste disposal site including measures such as blocking such roads off from
immediately adjacent to the work site, such as during a vehicular traffic, scarifying the compacted surfaces and
concrete pour on a long bridge deck, then the Contractor revegetating the area as stipulated in Environmental
shall take the necessary precautions to isolate the work site Approvals.. All drainage and crossing structures shall be
from any Watercourse or other Environmentally Sensitive removed, and sufficient cross ditches and ditch blocks
Area and to temporarily collect the concrete waste or wash constructed and stabilized to restore the original drainage
water and transport it to a nearby suitable disposal facility. patterns and prevent erosion. The Ministry Representative
The Contractor shall notify and seek approval from the may require that windrows along the side of the road be
Ministry and the Environmental Agencies for any changes removed, and the road surface sloped to drain in the
in the location of waste disposal sites during construction direction of the surrounding contours. Fill may be required
operations. to be pulled back onto the road if it is judged to be unstable.
Remaining cut slopes shall not exceed the natural angle of
165.09 Detour, Access and Haul Roads
repose. Reclamation works required by the Ministry
165.09.01 Design, Construction and Operation of Access Representative may include, but may not be limited to
Roads – Any temporary access, detour and/or haul roads, decompaction of the road surface, revegetation of exposed
including associated lay-down or staging areas, associated soil surfaces, and reforestation.
with the project shall be constructed to accommodate all
165.10 Instream Works – Instream works shall occur
required uses and maintained throughout the course of
during the Fishery Timing Window as outlined by the
construction operations in a safe, environmentally sound
Ministry of Environment. The Contractor, in consultation
manner.
with the Environmental Monitor, shall prepare a detailed set
The location, alignment, design and construction of all of Environmental Procedures for any work within a
detour, access and haul roads shall be subject to the approval Fisheries Sensitive Zone, below the High Water Mark of
of the Ministry Representative, and the appropriate any fish-bearing Watercourse (or any Watercourse that
Environmental Agencies. The Contractor shall be flows directly into a fish-bearing stream), or for any work
responsible for applying for and acquiring Environmental with the potential to cause major adverse impacts on a fish-
Approvals for access roads not previously identified in bearing Watercourse (e.g., concrete pour for a bridge deck
Environmental Approvals acquired by the Ministry for over a fish-bearing Watercourse, hydro-blasting of bridge
access. substructures over a fish-bearing Watercourse, etc.).
Environmental Procedures shall be prepared by the
Clearing shall extend no further than safe operation Environmental Monitor, for acceptance by the Ministry
requires, or to the edge of cut or toe of fill. Root systems of
Representative, for the following works including, but not
cleared vegetation shall not be removed except in the area
limited to:
of cuts or actual road surface.
• Bridge Construction
The Contractor shall employ suitable measures to maintain
air quality, visibility, and safe conditions in the use of • Bridge Maintenance
access, detour and/or haul roads associated with the Project.
• Ditch construction or maintenance
165.09.02 Drainage and Erosion Control – Drainage
• Instream equipment crossing
structures shall be incorporated into and maintained for the
duration of the project along all detour, access and haul • Watercourse diversions
roads to minimize erosion and maintain drainage patterns.
• Culvert installations, and
165.09.03 Abandonment – The Contractor shall winterize
• Temporary instream crossings.
haul and access roads at the end of the construction season
and shall ensure proper drainage control measures are in Waste material generated during instream works shall not
place. Culvert inlets and outlets shall be flagged. During be stored or dumped within the floodplain unless otherwise
periods of work stoppages, the Contractor shall ensure approved by the Ministry Representative.
sufficient inspection and maintenance of the access, detour
Drainage of waterbodies, such as wetlands, swamps or
and/or haul roads such that adverse environmental impacts
are avoided or minimized. In the event that potential or beaver ponds, shall be subject to the approval of the
existing environmental problems are identified by the Ministry Representative who will consult the
Environmental Agencies, unless drainage of these areas is
Contractor, its staff, the Ministry, the Environmental
specifically required as part of the Contract and has been
Agencies or the public, the Contractor shall take immediate
approved by Fisheries and Oceans Canada and any
steps to rectify the problem and ensure corrective action is
provincial Environmental Agencies.
taken to prevent future recurrence of similar problems.

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (14 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 64 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

165.10.01 Fish Passage and Fish Salvage – Unless the Special Provisions or Environmental Approvals, shall
Contractor has written approval from the Ministry require the Contractor to receive written approval of the
Representative and the Environmental Agencies, any Ministry Representative and to submit applications or
instream works in fish bearing streams shall provide for fish notifications to the Environmental Agencies, as needed.
passage. The Contractor shall notify the Ministry Representative 48
hours prior to allowing equipment to cross or enter
The Contractor and the Environmental Monitor shall be
Designated Watercourses.
responsible for fish salvage operations, including the timely
acquisition of fish collection permits from Fisheries and Upon completion, the banks shall be restored, stabilized and
Oceans Canada and any provincial Environmental revegetated to prevent erosion. This work shall be
Agencies. completed to the satisfaction of the Ministry Representative
and Environmental Agencies.
165.10.02 Management of Water Discharges – During
preparation of stream diversions, culvert installations and 165.10.06 Culvert Installations – Unless otherwise
other operations involving dewatering where drainage could approved by the Ministry Representative, culvert
readily reach a Designated Watercourse, all effluent and installation in Watercourses shall involve an appropriate
silt-laden water shall be discharged to a sediment control method of isolating the work site from the stream, such as
pond or a vegetated area acceptable to the Ministry the diversion of the stream around the culvert site, and the
Representative and the Environmental Monitor for removal placement of the culvert in the "dry".
of silt prior to its release into that Watercourse. The direct
Installation of riprap and other protective works shall be
discharge or discharge via seepage of untreated, silt-laden
carried out at the earliest possible time following culvert
water or other deleterious substance into any Watercourse
installation in order to prevent erosion and siltation.
is prohibited.
165.10.07 Culvert Obstructions – Unless the Watercourse
165.10.03 Encroachment of Fill into Watercourses –
is dry, an obstructed culvert shall be cleared by mechanical
Embankments which encroach on areas below the High
means. Any variance to using mechanical means to clear
Water Mark of fish-bearing Watercourses shall either be
wet obstructed culverts must have the prior approval of the
isolated and dewatered, by means of a cofferdam, until
WorkSafeBC.
surfaced with riprap, or constructed of clean granular
material and riprap or shot rock which is free of fine-grained 165.10.08 Channel Diversions – Channel diversions shall
material or other potential contaminants. Riprap be performed in accordance with the Special Provisions. If
composition and placement may be further detailed in the not specified in the Special Provisions, methods shall be
Special Provisions. The method of placement of this approved by the Ministry Representative, and shall comply
material shall be such that disturbance and/or alteration of with the “Standards and Best Practices for Instream Works”,
aquatic habitats is absolutely minimized. Fill material must “A Users’ Guide to Working in and Around Water”, and the
be entirely contained within the proposed fill cross section. "Land Development Guidelines".
165.10.04 Temporary Stream Crossings – Prior to 165.10.09 Bridge Construction – Bridge End-fills shall be
construction, the Contractor shall provide the Ministry constructed implementing fully the applicable subsections
Representative with an Environmental Procedure for of SS 165, and SS 769, Protection and Retention of
acceptance, describing the proposed locations and types of Vegetation. The Fisheries Sensitive Zone shall not be
stream crossings, complete with construction procedures disturbed until construction of the end-fill or crossing
and timing of construction. The Contractor shall forward a structure is ready to proceed. The Contractor may be
copy of the final Environmental Procedure to the Ministry required to hand fall trees and leave the root systems in
Representative and obtain Environmental Approvals as place using close-cut no-grub techniques.
needed, unless Environmental Approvals are already in
place. Temporary stream crossings shall be subject to the 165.10.10 Watercourse Clean-up – Final Watercourse
clean-up shall consist of, but not be restricted to, the
same environmental constraints as permanent crossings,
removal of temporary haul roads and temporary crossings,
and shall be built to pass, at least, the 10 year return period
the reshaping of the stream to its original configuration,
flood for the time of year during which the structure will be
width and depth, the protection of stream banks,
in place. Temporary stream crossings that have been
constructed during periods of low precipitation (i.e. summer revegetation, and the removal of all construction related
and late winter) shall be completely removed prior to material and debris, including any material and debris
deposited upstream or downstream of the site as a result of
periods of increased precipitation (i.e. fall and spring
operations, under the direction of the Environmental
freshet), unless otherwise approved by the Ministry
Monitor and to the satisfaction of the Ministry
Representative and Environmental Agencies.
Representative. All abandoned temporary diversions shall
165.10.05 Instream Equipment Operation or Crossings be plugged and stabilized. In the event that erosion has
– The entering or crossing of any Designated Watercourse occurred during the course of construction, the Contractor
by construction equipment, when not specified in the

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (15 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 65 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

will be required to recontour, stabilize and revegetate the activities, including removal of dirt and mud deposited from
affected area. truck tires on municipal roadways.
165.11 Ditch Maintenance – To reduce the risk of damage 165.13.02 Location and Installation of Fuel Storage
to aquatic habitat and sensitive life stages of fish and other Facilities – The siting and installation of all fuel storage
aquatic organisms, the Contractor shall ensure that the facilities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Fuel
excavation and maintenance of ditches is conducted in an storage shall not be located within 30 m of a Watercourse,
environmentally sound manner. within a Watercourses flood plain, or where there is a
potential for any spilled fuel to enter a Watercourse or
Excavation for ditch cleaning of any ditch that contains or
groundwater. Fuel storage facilities shall be located on flat
directly drains into fish-bearing waters shall be performed
or gently sloping ground and shall be dyked to contain at
only within Timing Windows as detailed in the "Land
least 125% of the total capacity of the storage containers.
Development Guidelines, Appendix III", Ministry of
Dykes shall be constructed of impermeable material or lined
Environment reduced risk timing windows documents, or as
to ensure that petroleum products cannot escape. If these
specified in the Special Provisions.
specifications cannot be met due to site specific constraints,
The Contractor shall consult local Environmental Agencies the Contractor shall submit a proposal for construction and
for the locations of sensitive areas and local Timing operation of a fuel storage facility to the Ministry
Windows prior to commencement of ditch maintenance. Representative for acceptance prior to construction of the
Areas identified as Fisheries Sensitive Zones shall be facility.
revegetated by the Contractor prior to the close of the timing
All large fuel storage tanks must be locked and secured
window.
when not in use. Automatic shut-off nozzles shall be
165.12 Bridge Maintenance – In performing any bridge installed on all dispensing units over 250 L capacity. Fuel
rehabilitation or maintenance, the Contractor shall follow storage tanks must be drained within one week of
best management practices and shall prepare Environmental completion of construction or within one month of a
Procedures for acceptance by the Ministry Representative. prolonged shutdown period.
The Contractor shall take measures to ensure absolute All small fuel storage containers, such as 45 gallon
minimal loss of paint and abrasive material into (200 litre) drums, used as a fuel cache shall be installed on
Watercourses during bridge cleaning. Mitigation measures a stable storage rack, within an impermeable containment
may include placement of ground covers, lined nets or device capable of capturing at least 125% of the total
tarpaulins to capture falling debris, blast enclosures to capacity of the storage container(s). A cover, such as a tarp,
encase the section of the bridge to be abrasively blasted, use must be placed over the top of the fuel cache to prevent
of vacuum-shrouded power tools, and use of floating booms accumulation of precipitation in the containment device.
and barges to trap floating debris. Similar measures shall The small fuel storage container(s) shall contain a metal
also be employed to assist in mitigating paint spray drift. spigot with a padlock placed on the container when not in
use.
165.13 Servicing and Operation of Equipment
In the transport, storage and/or dispensing of fuel and other
165.13.01 Transport of Materials – The Contractor shall
petroleum-based products, the Contractor shall comply with
use equipment and containers that are capable of safely the requirements outlined in the Ministry of Land and Air
transporting petroleum products and/or hazardous materials Protection /Ministry of Forests publication: “A field guide
in compliance with Section 7.33.1 of the Federal "Transport
to Fuel Handling, Transportation and Storage” (Feb, 2002).
of Dangerous Goods Regulations" for bulk containers, and
Sections 7.21 and 7.23 of the same regulations for materials The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated
in packages or small containers. These regulations shall with clean-up and disposal of any escaped toxic and
apply to both on-road and on-site transport. In addition to hazardous substances.
compliance with the Federal Transport of Dangerous Goods
165.13.03 Servicing of Equipment – The fuelling,
Regulations, the transportation of fuel trailers, fuel tanks on
refuelling, servicing or washing of machines or equipment
skids, and non-commercial fuel trucks shall comply with all
shall not be undertaken within 30m of any Watercourse or
the requirements of the Motor Vehicle Act and the British
surface water drainage. On-site fuelling and lubrication of
Columbia Fire Code.
equipment shall also be conducted as far as possible from
The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to detention and sediment control facilities. The Ministry
prevent the loss of materials during transport on public Representative may require that servicing be conducted at
highways, roads, access roads, and haul routes. Trucks Designated sites.
carrying loose materials shall be covered and restraints shall
Refuse generated during the servicing of equipment (e.g.,
be used to prevent materials from blowing or falling from
air and oil filters, hydraulic fluids, petroleum products) shall
vehicles. The Contractor shall be responsible for collection
be collected and disposed of in an environmentally
and removal of any and all litter deposited by vehicles or
acceptable location and manner. Where possible, the
equipment along access routes during construction-related

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (16 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 66 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Contractor is encouraged to recycle lubricants and other and stored in suitable animal-proof containers and disposed
waste materials generated during the servicing of equipment of at an approved waste disposal site.
and machinery, or alternatively dispose of such materials
165.14.02 Spill Contingency Plans – Contingency plans
and refuse at nearby recycling depots. The dumping of oil
for the clean-up of toxic or hazardous spills shall be
or other deleterious materials on the ground or in any
prepared prior to construction and submitted, together with
Watercourse is strictly prohibited. The Contractor shall
a list of spill abatement equipment to be stored on the job
provide a means of catching and retaining drained oil or
site, to the Ministry Representative for review. Spill
other deleterious materials and shall properly dispose of
contingency plans may be a sub-plan to the CEMP. The
these materials in a location approved by the Ministry
Ministry Representative may require the Contractor to have
Representative.
on site any additional equipment or materials deemed
165.13.04 Equipment Operation in Environmentally necessary to deal with a potential spill. The Contractor shall
Sensitive Areas – Construction equipment shall be operated promptly replace any used spill abatement and clean-up
only within the Designated construction site and access materials and maintain a sufficient inventory of materials
roads. Equipment operators shall not be allowed to damage throughout construction operations. For operations being
or destroy vegetation or streambanks outside of this area. conducted adjacent to or below the High Water Mark of a
Watercourse or other Environmentally Sensitive Area, the
The operation of equipment and machinery in a Fisheries
Contractor shall have an approved spill kit ready for use
Sensitive Zone must be:
nearby.
(a) authorized by the Ministry Representative;
The Contractor shall immediately report any spill of any
(b) kept to an absolute minimum; and toxic or hazardous material verbally to the Ministry
Representative and Emergency Management BC (24 hour
(c) undertaken only during the period(s) specified in the
phone line: 1-800-663-3456). Written notification of the
Special Provisions.
spill must follow within two weeks of this verbal report.
When working in any Designated Watercourse, equipment The Contractor shall immediately take the necessary steps
shall be in good working condition free of leaks, use to abate the discharge and provide the necessary labour,
biodegradable hydraulic fluid and shall be steam cleaned of equipment, materials and absorbents to contain and remove
oil, grease and other contaminants deleterious to aquatic the spill, clean up the affected area, dispose of waste
species, prior to commencing work. When working in or materials at an approved disposal site, and restore the area
near any Watercourse, the Contractor shall ensure that all to the satisfaction of the Environmental Agencies, at the
hydraulic systems, fuel systems and lubricating systems are Contractor's expense. Any soil contaminated by spills shall
in good repair. Equipment with fuel or fluid leaks shall not be removed and replaced by comparable substitutes at the
be permitted to enter areas below the High Water Mark of expense of the Contractor. Contaminated soil and
any Watercourse. Equipment developing such leaks shall vegetation removed shall be disposed of in an approved
be removed immediately and repaired. waste disposal site. If the Contractor fails to respond to the
Ministry Representative's requirements for cleanup, the
165.14 Waste Disposal and Toxic/Hazardous Materials Ministry reserves the right to take whatever action is
165.14.01 General – All non-toxic or non-hazardous wastes necessary to clean up the spill and deduct incurred costs
shall be either recycled or disposed of in an approved from any money due or to become due to the Contractor.
sanitary landfill or other specialized area as indicated in the The Environmental Monitor shall document any spills
Special Provisions or as directed by the Ministry observed in the vicinity of the Project that are not the result
Representative. Any waste material that is inadvertently of Project-related activities, and notify the Environmental
dumped in or adjacent to Watercourses or other ESAs shall Agencies of such incidents.
be removed by the Contractor and disposed of in an
approved manner at the Contractor's expense. 165.14.03 Contaminated Sites – If an area within or
adjacent to the project site has been identified as a possible
The Contractor shall be responsible for the regular source of contaminated or hazardous material and the
collection, storage, and disposal of all waste material defined contaminated or hazardous material has not been
generated by employees and subcontractors. The removed prior to the start of the project, the Contractor shall
Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to prevent notify the Ministry Representative at least two weeks prior
loss of these materials during transport on public highways to the time work is scheduled in or adjacent to that area.
and roads, and shall be responsible for cleanup of all of these
materials and all litter deposited by employees and In the event that the Contractor locates material on the
subcontractors along access routes during construction- project site believed to be contaminated or hazardous, and
related activities, at no expense to the Ministry. which has not been previously identified, the Contractor
Construction debris shall not be allowed to accumulate on shall immediately cease work in that area and notify the
the construction site but shall be collected promptly, placed Ministry Representative. The material is to be left in-situ or
be segregated and stockpiled, and handled in accordance

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (17 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 67 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

with the Ministry’s “Management of Suspect Contaminated cases, it may be necessary to use other methods, such as acid
Materials”, in SS165 Appendix 165-A. buffers.
In general, the Guidelines require segregating, testing by a Aged, broken concrete shall only be used as riprap with the
AQP retained by the Contractor, handling, hauling, and approval of the Ministry Representative and the
disposal of the excavated material at a legally acceptable Environmental Agencies. The Contractor shall remove
disposal site or at a licensed disposal facility. broken concrete or concrete wastes that have been
inadvertently placed in non-approved sites on the Project
Prior to any disposal, the Contractor shall identify the
and dispose of them at an approved waste disposal site.
disposal site(s) to the Ministry Representative.
165.14.05 Petroleum Wastes – Solids, sludges and other
Contaminated material hauled to off-Site disposal will be
pollutants generated as a result of construction or removed
paid at applicable Unit Price for Contaminated Soil
during the course of treatment or control of wastewaters
Disposal or, where there is no such bid Item, as a Change to
shall be disposed of in a manner that prevents their direct or
Work per GC 38.00.
indirect discharge to any Watercourse or groundwaters.
The cost of other work associated with the suspect Effluent generated by the water scrubber of an asphalt
contaminated materials, such as testing, AQP time, and mixing plant must be given retention time in suitably sized,
additional handling, each as approved by the Ministry impermeable settling ponds prior to release into an adjacent
Representative, will be paid as a Change to Work. Watercourse. The required retention time will be
determined by the Ministry Representative in consultation
165.14.04 Concrete Wastes – The Contractor shall isolate
with representatives from the Environmental Agencies.
fresh concrete or cement from any Watercourse for 48 hours
after placement. Containers or trucks carrying cement or Asphalt pavement shall be stockpiled for recycling in a
fresh concrete shall be washed at a site approved by the specified location, or disposed of in a location approved by
Ministry Representative. Concrete wastes, including the provincial Environmental Agencies, as directed by the
wastewater from batching or cleaning, or cutting cured Ministry Representative.
concrete shall only be disposed of at approved and
165.15 Noxious Weeds and Herbicides – The use of all
Designated disposal sites (i.e., location identified with
herbicides is subject to pre-approval by the Ministry
proper signing). All cement-contaminated wastewater from
Representative. The use of herbicides for vegetation
cleaning or mixing is to be considered toxic, and must be
control, other than invasive plants, is not permitted. The
prevented from entering any Watercourse for at least 48
Contractor shall comply with all Federal, Provincial and
hours to allow the water to reach pH 6.5-8.0. Any cement
local regulations relative to the storage, use, and proper
or concrete-contaminated wastewater shall be tested prior to
disposal of herbicides, and must follow all requirements in
release into a Watercourse. In the event that such
the confirmed Integrated Pest Management Plan or
wastewater pH levels are greater than 8.0 or unacceptable in
Pesticide Use Licence for the area. Relevant legislation
terms of water quality for fish or other aquatic species, the
includes the Federal Pest Control Products Act and the
Contractor shall take the necessary measures to contain and
British Columbia Integrated Pest Management Act and
treat such wastewater until acceptable pH levels are
associated Regulations. All herbicide wastes, washwaters,
achieved (i.e., pH levels are the same as the receiving waters
solvents, and containers shall be disposed of in compliance
or 6.5 to 8.0). If the Contractor is not able to adhere to these
with the British Columbia Environmental Management Act
specifications due to project-specific constraints, a proposal
and Hazardous Waste Regulation.
for alternate specifications must be reviewed and accepted
by the Ministry Representative. The Contractor is responsible for undertaking invasive plant
management for invasive plants and noxious weeds that will
The Contractor shall securely store on-site and use suitable
be disturbed by the Works. Management methods, disposal
equipment and materials for the mitigation of concrete spills
sites and options, as well as best management practices, will
into or in areas adjacent to Watercourses. For example,
be outlined in the Contractor’s Invasive Plant Management
cylinders of gaseous carbon dioxide shall be kept on the
Plan, a component of the CEMP.
Project site, which shall be used in the event of concrete or
concrete leachate discharges into any Watercourse. During 165.16 Air and Noise Pollution
any concrete pour within 15 m of, or in work areas above
165.16.01 Noise and Emissions – All activities, equipment,
the High Water Mark of any Watercourse, the Contractor
processes and work operated or performed by the
shall ensure that carbon dioxide cylinders and suitable
Contractor in accomplishing the specified construction shall
application devices (e.g., weighted soaker hoses) are
be in strict accordance with Federal, Provincial and local
available on-site and ready for use in the carbonation of
regulations governing noise levels and air emission
water columns to neutralize any concrete leachate that is
standards. The Ministry Representative may require the
inadvertently discharged into the Watercourse. Where
Contractor to have maintenance performed on equipment or
concrete leachate is allowed to enter settling ponds, such
alter practices which are judged to produce excessive noise
that pH levels become very high, bubbling with carbon
or emissions.
dioxide may not be an effective buffering agent. In such

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (18 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 68 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

165.16.02 Idle Reduction – The Ministry is taking to use uncontaminated wastewater, such as that pumped
initiatives to reduce greenhouse gas emissions from road from the surface of sedimentation basins.
building activities and has identified reduced idling of
165.17.02 Screened Intake Requirements – The intakes of
construction vehicles and equipment as a reduction
all pumps or diversions used to withdraw water from fish-
strategy. Further to SS 165.02.02 the Construction
bearing Watercourses shall be screened in accordance with
Environmental Management Plan, Air Quality and Dust
the Fisheries and Oceans Canada "Freshwater Intake End-
Control Plan shall include procedures outlining how drivers
of-Pipe Fish Screen Guideline".
and equipment operators will be engaged in idle reduction
practices. The Contractor shall provide and maintain stable access
routes to all water withdrawal sites. The location of all such
The Contractor is encouraged to develop innovative and
routes shall be subject to the approval of the Ministry
practical methods for potential idle reduction opportunities
Representative and the Environmental Agencies.
applicable to the Project.
165.18 Support Facilities
Specific areas of opportunity could include:
165.18.01 Location and Operation of Support Facilities
(a) Locating vehicle staging areas to minimize impact of
– The preservation of trees, shrubs, ground cover, fish and
emissions
wildlife must be considered in site selection and
(b) Implementing vehicle idling time restrictions construction of all temporary support facilities. During site
preparation, vegetation shall be removed using selective
(c) Use of appropriate and practical idle reduction
hand clearing (close-cut with no grubbing) in preference to
technologies
blanket clearing with heavy machinery, retaining vegetative
(d) Effective communication and reinforcement of idle cover wherever possible. The Contractor shall locate
reduction opportunities that are undertaken temporary field offices, storage, plant and other facilities on
pre-existing cleared portions of the job-site or on areas to be
165.16.03 Dust Control – Application and handling of the
cleared during the course of routine construction unless
any dust palliative, with the exception of water, shall be in
otherwise authorized by the Ministry Representative.
compliance with the Ministry documents as given in “Dust
Management Environmental Best Practice for Highway Where possible, for aesthetic purposes, work camps and
Maintenance Activities” and "Maintenance Guidelines for parking areas shall be located behind a vegetative screen
Dust Palliatives and Gravel Road Stabilization". buffer. The Ministry Representative may require that work
vehicles and heavy equipment shall be parked in Designated
Dust control techniques may also be required by the
locations only.
Ministry Representative during other construction
operations, including but not limited to demolition, drilling, The Contractor shall abide by all pollution control practices,
sand blasting and concrete cutting. laws, ordinances and regulations applicable to the
construction of work camps and support facilities. The
165.17 Use of Water Contractor shall obtain the approval of the British Columbia
165.17.01 Authorization for Use – For any source of water Ministry of Health, the British Columbia Ministry of
not specified in the Special Provisions, the Contractor is Environment, and any applicable local authority prior to the
required to contact British Columbia Ministry of Forests, installation and/or operation of sewage disposal and potable
Lands and Natural Resource Operations Water Stewardship water distribution systems.
Division office before any water is diverted, impounded, Work camps, field office facilities and work sites shall be
pumped or used for any purpose, including dust control,
kept clear of litter and garbage. The Contractor shall be
compaction, or operation of a work camp. Authorization in
responsible for providing and regularly servicing animal-
the form of an approval for short term use of water may be
proof refuse containers and for instructing all employees to
required and may be obtained through an application to dispose of food wastes accordingly. Sanitary landfill
FrontCounter BC. The Contractor shall be aware that, if operations shall be located well away from the main camp
required, a water application approval may take at least
in order to minimize conflicts with wildlife.
140 days to process.
Solid wastes shall be recycled or disposed at an approved
Prior to commencing any work which may affect potable
landfill facility where possible. Burning of combustible
water supplies downstream of the construction area, the
solid wastes shall be subject to all applicable emission
Contractor shall ensure that all owners of licensed water guidelines. Solid waste containers shall be large enough to
intakes have been notified. contain all of the wastes generated between collection
Water sources must be approved by the Ministry periods. The containers shall be constructed such that
Representative. In order to reduce the impact on local water spilled liquids are contained and access by insects and
supplies and Watercourses, the Contractor may be required wildlife is prevented. Storage areas and containers shall be
maintained in a sanitary condition and shall be covered to
prevent spreading of wastes by water, wind or animals.

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (19 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 69 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Transportation of solid waste shall be performed in a 165.19.02 Disturbance of Fish and Wildlife – Rules
manner which prevents littering during transit to the regarding hunting, fishing and the discharge of firearms by
disposal site. the Contractor, employees and subcontractors, within the
project area during the period of construction, shall be made
Sanitary landfill sites shall be located a minimum of 450 m
in consultation with the Ministry Representative and
from Watercourses or campsites, and shall be situated such
provincial Environmental Agencies. The Contractor shall
that contamination of any stream, lake or groundwater
be responsible for ensuring compliance with these rules.
system is avoided. The location of all sanitary landfill sites
must be approved by British Columbia Ministry of 165.20 Archaeological and Paleontological Discoveries –
Environment, Municipal or local officials and the Ministry In the event that any item of archaeological, heritage,
Representative. The bottom of the landfill site shall be historical, cultural or scientific interest is found on the
located at least 2 m above the water table. Trees and other project site, the following Chance Find Procedure shall
vegetation shall be removed progressively as the size of the apply:
landfill increases in order to minimize erosion by wind and
Such item(s) shall remain the property of the Province and
water.
the Contractor shall, on making or being advised of such a
Sanitary wastes shall not be discharged into Watercourses find, immediately cease operations in the affected area,
or on the soil surface. All temporary toilets shall be minimize activities which create ground disturbance in and
equipped with approved septic tanks having safe drainage adjacent to the affected area, and notify the Ministry
or with closed holding tanks which are emptied only into Representative. The Archaeology Branch of the British
approved treatment plants or sewage tanker trucks. All Columbia Ministry of Forests, Lands and Natural Resource
temporary toilets used on-site shall be placed in Operations will be notified as per the Heritage Conservation
environmentally acceptable areas, and shall be secured to Act. Work shall not resume within 30 m of the discovery
avoid or minimize damage from vandalism. site until an appropriate directive has been received from
that agency.
165.18.02 Decommissioning of Sites – Upon completion of
construction, all temporary support facilities and camp To protect archaeological and paleontological sites that are
infrastructure, including buildings, equipment, lumber, situated within or adjacent to a project site, the Contractor
refuse, surplus materials, fencing and other such items shall may be required to use a variety of mitigative measures,
be removed. The original drainage pattern shall be re- including but not limited to drainage or erosion control,
established, and all disturbed areas shall be revegetated. All slope stabilization measures, or erecting fences or other
decommissioned temporary diversions shall be plugged and suitable barriers to protect archaeological or paleontological
stabilised. In the event that erosion has occurred during the sites that are situated within or adjacent to a project site.
course of construction, the Contractor will be required to re- These measures, with any negotiated extensions of time for
contour, stabilise, and revegetate the affected areas. completion of the contract they require, will be determined
and adopted at the discretion of the Ministry Representative.
The Contractor shall ensure that all project-related sites are
The costs associated with such mitigative measures will be
left in an environmentally acceptable manner, subject to the
borne by the Ministry, unless otherwise specified in the
approval of the Ministry Representative and the
Special Provisions.
Environmental Agencies. Decommissioned construction
areas, material sources and access roads shall be reclaimed A buffer zone, in which no land alteration or other activity
by the Contractor such that as much of the original forest, is permitted, may be required to ensure adequate site
wildlife, agricultural productivity, recreational use, etc. as protection. The width of this buffer zone shall be
possible is restored or enhanced. determined by the Ministry Representative in consultation
with a representative of the Archaeology Branch of the
165.19 Protection of Livestock and Wildlife
British Columbia Ministry of Forests, Lands and Natural
165.19.01 Protection of Livestock and Wildlife – Resource Operations. The Contractor shall be responsible
Harassment of livestock or wildlife in and adjacent to the for the actions of employees and subcontractors with respect
project site is prohibited. The presence of livestock or to site vandalism and the unlicensed collection of artifacts
wildlife in or adjacent to the project site, field office trailers from Designated archaeological sites in and around the
or construction camp shall not be encouraged by feeding. construction area.
The Contractor is required to inform work crews of the
165.21 Resolution of Disputes – In the event that a dispute
location of wildlife and livestock crossing sites situated
arises between the Contractor and the Ministry, or the
within the boundaries of the construction area.
Environmental Monitor and the Ministry regarding
If it is necessary to arrange the removal or transfer of environmental matters related to the project, the Ministry,
beavers, bears or other wildlife from the work-site or camp or where appropriate, the Environmental Agencies, will
the Contractor shall contact the appropriate Environmental have the final decision.
Agencies and acquire any permits required prior to taking
action, and follow the approved course of action.

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (20 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 70 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Appendix 165-A
Managing Suspect Contaminated Material
165-A.01 Suspect Contaminated Material – If material is https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/environment/air-
identified within the Site which is believed to be land-water/site-remediation/docs/technical-
contaminated or hazardous and has not been previously guidance/tg02.pdf
identified, the Contractor shall immediately cease work in
Laboratory analysis of potential contaminants of concern
that area, notify the Ministry Representative, engage the
(PCOCs) from soil samples shall be determined by the AQP
Contractor’s AQP, and follow the process below.
and depend on the nature of the suspect material
165-A.02 Field Screening and Managing the Sampling of encountered during construction, including visual and
‘Suspect Material’ – Areas of soil contamination or other olfactory observations and CHRs subject to review and
material may be encountered during construction activities. acceptance by the Ministry Representative in conjunction
with the Ministry Geoscientist. Analytical results shall be
If suspect contaminated material is encountered, field
compared to Schedule 3.1 and Schedule 3.3 of the
screening of suspect soil or material shall be completed.
Contaminated Sites Regulation.
Field screening may include visual and olfactory
observations for evidence of contamination during all 165-A.04 Excavation of Suspected or Actual
excavation activities. Examples of evidence of Contaminated Material – If contamination in soil is
contamination may include the presence of free product, suspected or identified in situ and a remedial excavation is
sheen, staining, debris and/or hydrocarbon odours. required, the AQP shall be on-site and direct the remedial
activities in accordance with TG1 and TG2. The excavation
If field observations of contamination are identified, the
areas shall be clearly marked in the field, prior to
AQP shall be on-Site to further classify the material and
excavation. Care shall be taken to avoid mixing of clean
direct appropriate activities, subject to review and approval
and contaminated soils both vertically and laterally.
by the Ministry Representative in conjunction with the
Ministry Geoscientist. The AQP shall complete additional 165-A.05 Confirmatory Soil Sampling – If a remedial
field screening which shall be based on the AQP’s excavation is required, confirmatory soil samples from the
professional judgement of actions needed to comply with walls and base of the excavation shall be collected by the
the Environmental Management Act, the Contaminated AQP upon completion of the excavation to confirm that
Sites Regulation and the Hazardous Waste Regulation. contaminated soils have been removed.
These actions may include, but not be limited to:
Discrete confirmatory soil samples shall be collected from
• collection of Combustible Headspace Readings the walls and the floor of the excavation, at a sampling
(CHRs), frequency in general accordance to guidelines established in
TG1. The number of in-situ samples to be collected depends
• field screening for volatile petroleum hydrocarbons and on the final extents and depth of the excavation. Samples
volatile organic compounds (for potential laboratory submission) shall be collected at
• directing segregating and stockpiling activities and regular intervals, for example, within the initial 0.5 m, and
every 1.0 m, on vertical faces, to the maximum depth of
• completing soil sampling for characterization and excavation. Soil samples from each wall and floor shall
disposal purposes. then be selected for analysis based on field observations,
165-A.03 Characterization of Suspect Contaminated combustible headspace screening and/or initial sampling
Material – The suspect contaminated material shall be results and be submitted by the AQP to a laboratory for the
tested in situ or stockpiled under the supervision of the analysis of identified contaminants of concern.
AQP. It is preferred that suspect contaminated soil is left in The AQP shall evaluate the laboratory analytical data from
situ until material is confirmed contaminated or, if all confirmatory samples submitted against the applicable
immediate excavation is required, the soil may be stockpiled regulatory standards and guidelines. If any confirmatory
and segregated until laboratory results are received. sample have contaminant concentrations above the
Soil samples shall be collected by the AQP in accordance applicable standards, additional excavation activities may
with the Ministry of Environment’s Technical Guidance 1 be required, subject to approval by the Ministry
and 2 (TG1 and TG2). Representative. If the AQP suspects that contamination
may originate from the project site and be migrating offsite,
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/environment/air- they shall immediately notify the Ministry Representative,
land-water/site-remediation/docs/technical- who will contact the Ministry Geoscientist.
guidance/tg01.pdf
165-A.06 Dewatering of Contaminated Area – If an
excavation in a contaminated area requires dewatering, the
water shall be sampled and analyzed for the PCOCs

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (21 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 71 of 470
SECTION 165 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

identified by AQP prior to dewatering. The water may be 165-A.09 Disposal and Tracking of Contaminated Soil –
sampled with a vacuum truck with sufficient capability to If material is confirmed to be contaminated, it shall be
reach the excavation area. The laboratory results shall be disposed of at an off-Site disposal facility that is licensed to
compared to Schedule 3.2 of the Contaminated Sites receive the material in question, based on comparisons of
Regulation. analytical data to the applicable guidelines.
If the infiltrating water is confirmed to be contaminated or If Hazardous Waste is identified at the Site, it shall be
is required to be dewatered prior to receiving analytical segregated and shipped separately from other contaminated
results, the water shall be removed and stored in drums or soil, under hazardous waste manifest, as outlined below.
an on-site storage tank or transported directly to an off-site
If debris is encountered during excavation activities and
approved facility for disposal. If the water is confirmed to
appears contaminated, it shall be segregated and stockpiled
be contaminated a waste approval authorization shall be
for characterization (if required) and off-Site disposal.
initiated with the receiving facility prior to off-Site disposal.
Copies of shipping documents and receipts of delivery shall The Contractor shall provide the Ministry Representative a
be kept as part of a contaminated groundwater tracking and letter from the AQP that certifies that the contaminated
record keeping system and supplied to the Ministry material has been disposed appropriately to legally
Representative. Any discharged water shall be managed in acceptable lands. If the material is disposed at a licensed
accordance with SS 165.03.03 and SS 165.10.02. facility the Contractor shall provide the manifest forms
issued by the disposal site to the Ministry Representative. If
165-A.07 Stockpiling of Suspect or Actual
any hazardous waste soils be identified at the Site, a
Contaminated Material – If suspect contaminated soils are
hazardous waste generator number shall be issued to the
excavated prior to final placement or disposal, they shall be
Ministry, in accordance with procedures available at:
segregated and stockpiled according to direction given from
the AQP and the following guidelines: https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/environment/wast
e-management/hazardous-waste/registration-of-
(a) The stockpile area shall be selected to prevent
hazardous-waste-generators-and-facilities
potentially contaminated soil or water runoff, or
particulates in air from the stockpile(s) coming in 165-A.10 Regulatory Requirements – If the material is
contact with the surface water, or public walkways and determined to be contaminated and will be disposed offsite,
recreation areas. The stockpile(s) shall be managed in the AQP shall complete a Notification of Independent
accordance with SS 165.03.03 and SS 165.04. Remediation Form (NIR) to notify the Ministry of
Environment Director of Waste Management promptly
(b) Durable polyethylene or vinyl tarp material shall be and
upon initiating remediation and within ninety (90) days of
laid out underneath and overtop of any stockpiles
completion.
established, with sandbags or other heavy items to
sufficiently weigh down the tarps and prevent blow- The Ministry of Environment’s Administrative Guidance 9
away. provides information on the process:
(c) If free product or hydrocarbon sheen is observed in the https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/environment/air-
stockpiled soils or intercepted water, absorbent pads land-water/site-remediation/docs/administrative-
and/or booms shall be placed in the down-gradient guidance/ag09.pdf
containment swales and disposed of accordingly.
Protocol 17 outlines the administrative requirements for the
(d) The Contractor shall plan to maintain and monitor any NIR:
stockpiles until laboratory analytical results from
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/environment/air-
stockpile samples are available and a stockpile disposal
land-water/site-
strategy is prepared by the AQP. Once analytical
results from the stockpile samples are available, this remediation/docs/protocols/protocol_17.pdf
soil would either be transported off-Site for disposal, or If more than five cubic metres of material is remediated, a
re-used on-Site, if suitable for construction activities Site Risk Classification Report (SRCR) shall also be
and subject to review and approval by the Ministry completed and submitted to the Director of Waste
Representative in conjunction with the Ministry Management, as outlined in Protocol 12.
Geoscientist.
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/environment/air-
165-A.08 Excavation Backfilling – As remedial soil land-water/site-
excavations may be within planned construction areas, the remediation/docs/protocols/protocol_12.pdf
Ministry Representative will determine if immediate
backfilling is required following remedial excavation. A copy of the NIR and SRCR (if applicable) shall be
Requirements for analytical testing, if any, will be submitted to the Ministry Representative.
determined by the Ministry Representative in conjunction
with a Ministry Geoscientist.

BC MoTI SS 2020 165 (22 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 72 of 470
 SECTION 194

TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT FOR WORK ZONES

PART A – GENERAL • Work Activity Area

194.01 General – Traffic management requirements shall • Work Zone
be as specified herein and as specified in the Special
194.03 Standard Documents – Traffic strategies and plans
Provisions or by the Ministry Representative.
shall be developed in accordance with standards defined in
The Contractor’s Traffic Management Plan, Construction the latest version of the following documents:
Schedule and its provisions for traffic control and safety
• The Traffic Management Manual
shall be based on providing safe passage through the Work
Zone for all road users (i.e. cyclists, pedestrians and • The Ministry’s Electrical and Traffic Engineering
motorists). The Contractor shall at all times make Manual
provisions for traffic through the Site to a sufficiently high
• All current Ministry Technical Circulars and Technical
standard to ensure the safety of the workers on the Project,
Bulletins
the safety and the convenience of the travelling public,
driver expectancy, and the protection of the Work Area. • TAC Geometric Design Guide for Canadian Roads
The Contractor shall supply and maintain all traffic control
devices and personnel necessary to provide all traffic • The Ministry’s B.C. Supplement to TAC Geometric
control. Design Guide

The Contractor’s accommodation for pedestrian, bicycle • Workers’ Compensation Board (WCB) Occupational
and vehicular traffic, and proposed traffic control Health and Safety Regulation
procedures for each work operation will require acceptance All Ministry publications listed above may be found, free
by the Ministry Representative prior to the start of that of charge, on-line through:
operation.
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/tran
Any one or more of the advance warning area, transition sportation-infrastructure/engineering-standards-
area, buffer space and termination area of the work zone guidelines
may be outside the Limits of Construction, but this will in
no way diminish the Contractor’s responsibility to meet the or can be purchased from:
requirements of the Traffic Management Plan. CROWN PUBLICATIONS
194.02 Definitions – The following definition applies (Queen’s Printer for British Columbia)
within this Section: PO BOX 9452 STN PROV GOVT
VICTORIA B.C. V8W 9V7
• “Traffic Management Manual” or “TMM” means the https://www.crownpub.bc.ca/Home/About
Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure’s 2020
Email: crownpub@gov.bc.ca
Traffic Management Manual for Work on Roadways, as
it may be amended or replaced from time to time. PHONE: 1-800-663-6105
FAX: (250) 387-1120
The TMM is available on-line at:
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/tra
nsportation-infrastructure/engineering-standards- 194.04 Traffic Control Supervisor – The Contractor shall
guidelines/traffic-engineering- designate a Traffic Control Supervisor who has the
safety/trafficmanagementmanual Contractor's authority to respond to traffic control
requirements and who shall provide surveillance of traffic
Other general terms used within this Section are defined in conditions through the Work Zone. This person, or
TMM Appendix A.1, including without limitation,: qualified designate, shall be available at all times, both
• Construction speed zone when the Contractor is working and during weekends or
other periods when the Contractor's forces are not active on
• Traffic Management Plan the Project, to respond to calls from the police and from
• Traffic Control Plan representatives of the Ministry concerning damage or
deficiencies in the traffic control devices and the passage for
• Incident Management Plan traffic through the Work Zone.
• Public Information Plan
• Implementation Plan

BC MoTI SS 2020 194 (1 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 73 of 470
SECTION 194 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT FOR WORK ZONES

The traffic control supervisor shall meet the requirements of working days prior to implementation of a new
the TMM and WCB Regulation and shall not be the stage.
Contractor’s site superintendent.
(b) The Implementation Plan, if required, shall be
194.05 Compliance with Acts and Regulations – The submitted to the Ministry Representative for review at
Contractor shall comply with the requirements of any least twenty-one (21) days prior to the start of any
legislation, Regulations and by-laws as are in force for the Works effecting traffic flows.
regulation of traffic or use of any road upon or over which
(c) The Public Information Plan, if required, shall be
it is necessary to carry out work or to haul materials or
submitted to the Ministry Representative for review at
things.
least twenty-one (21) days prior to the start of any
PART B – PLANNING AND SCHEDULING Works effecting traffic flows.
194.11 Provide Traffic Management Plan – The (d) The Incident Management Plan, if required, shall be
Contractor shall prepare a Traffic Management Plan (TMP) submitted to the Ministry Representative for review at
in accordance with the Ministry definitions and guidelines least twenty-one (21) days prior to the start of any
specified in the Traffic Management Manual. Works effecting traffic flows.
The Special Provisions or the Ministry Representative will
specify any required traffic management conditions,
PART C – TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
strategies, and required documentation for the Traffic
OPERATIONAL DETAILS
Management Plan.
194.21 Speed Zones – Reduction in speed limits may take
The Traffic Management Plan shall be fully integrated with
several forms as defined in the TMM 2.4 Management of
the Contractor’s plan and schedule for carrying out the
Speed. Construction speed zones within the Project will be
work, comply with the requirements of the TMM, the
determined at the discretion of the Road Authority or as
conditions and strategies listed below, and with the
specified in the Special Provisions.
provisions of the Contract.
The Contractor's work plan, Construction Schedule and its
194.12 Traffic Management Plan Review – The Ministry
provisions for traffic control and safety shall include
Representative may review the Contractor’s Traffic
references to any reduced posted speed limits.
Management Plan for general conformance with the
requirements of the Special Provisions and the Contract for The location and length of posted construction speed zones
sufficiency of detail to provide a complete and shall be evaluated daily, or more frequently as appropriate
unambiguous traffic control layout. No review or change to the Work, to provide the shortest construction speed zone
requested by the Ministry Representative in any way practical. For example, on a resurfacing project, the reduced
relieves the Contractor of any of its responsibilities for speed limit would usually be invoked around active
ensuring safe and adequate traffic management. No work operations such as milling, priming, paving, and, if
that affects traffic will be permitted until the Ministry necessary, at access points to pits and the plant, but will not
Representative accepts the Traffic Management Plan. generally be acceptable for areas of the Site used only for
haul.
Where the TMM shows a choice of traffic control layouts
for a given specific situation, the Ministry Representative 194.22 Use of Channelizing Devices and Taper Rates –
may request the Contractor to use an alternative layout Traffic cones, tubular markers, barrels/drums, barricades or
which is acceptable. other channelizing devices shall be used in the following
circumstances for guiding and directing road users:
194.12.01 Review Time Periods – The following time
periods, subject to SS 145.34, are required for plan review (a) from one lane to another or for merging traffic because
and acceptance unless otherwise specified in the Special of a reduction in the number of lanes
Provisions or by the Ministry Representative:
(b) around a hazard on the travelled way
(a) A Traffic Control Plan shall be submitted to the
(c) through an area of unfinished construction where the
Ministry Representative for review at least fourteen
intended traffic lanes are not self-evident
(14) days prior to the start of any Works effecting
traffic flows. The following conditions shall apply: (d) at any other location where, in the Ministry
Representative's opinion, channelizing will ensure the
(i) Any plan modifications shall be submitted to the
Ministry Representative for review at least safe passage of public traffic.
fourteen (14) days prior to any changes being made Minimum taper rates and spacing between devices shall be
in the field. as shown in TMM.
(ii) A staged plan shall be submitted to the Ministry 194.23 Equipment on the Travelled Way – When working
Representative for review at least fifteen (15) on the travelled way, equipment shall be positioned to

BC MoTI SS 2020 194 (2 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 74 of 470
SECTION 194 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT FOR WORK ZONES

present a minimum of interference and hazard to the All detours shall be adequately signed such that the detour
travelling public. Equipment units shall be kept as close route is clear and unambiguous to all road users.
together as working conditions will permit and preferably
The minimum design requirements for any detours will be
on the same side of the travelled way. Equipment shall not
specified in the Special Provisions or by the Ministry
be left overnight on the travelled way but shall be located so
Representative.
as to avoid the possibility of collision.
Where the anticipated detour or diversion extends beyond
194.24 Roadway Configuration – The Contractor shall
the existing road surface, the Contractor shall submit an
arrange to keep interconnected lanes of the highway open to
engineering design to the Ministry Representative for
traffic at all times with the least amount of inconvenience to
review, a minimum of fourteen (14) days in advance of
the travelling public unless otherwise authorized by the
building the detour. The engineering design shall include
Ministry Representative.
the design speed, the horizontal and vertical geometry, plus
194.25 Roadway Condition – The Contractor shall keep evidence that the design vehicle is accommodated for all
the travelled way well-graded, free of potholes and of movements and that all the requirements of this Contract are
sufficient width that the required number of lanes of traffic satisfied.
may pass. The subgrade shall be completed progressively
Where the anticipated deviation is minor, the Contractor
in order that gravel surfacing may follow in an orderly
may apply to the Ministry Representative, in writing, for
manner. Prior to tearing up a portion of the existing
approval to proceed without a formal design. Such approval
travelled way the Contractor shall obtain Ministry
does not relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities
Representative approval and shall also have available a
for provision of a safe site.
sufficient supply of crushed gravel, or another approved
product, to ensure a smooth riding surface during the work. 194.28 Access to Property – During operations the
Contractor shall provide and maintain reasonable road
194.26 Closures – Road closures shall be in accordance
access and egress to property fronting along, or in the
with the Special Provisions.
vicinity of, the work unless other reasonable means of road
Road closures will not be permitted until the Contractor access exists. The Ministry Representative will be the sole
requests and receives written permission from the Ministry judge of what may be deemed reasonable road access.
Representative. This request shall be submitted in writing
194.29 Seasonal Lay-Up – In the event that the Work is
not less than fourteen (14) days in advance of the closure.
stopped due to seasonal lay-up conditions (typically winter
Upon receiving written permission for the closure, the conditions or high traffic periods), the Site is to be left in a
Contractor must notify the local police, fire, ambulance, condition as specified in the Special Provisions or as
municipality, school board, and public transit at least seven deemed acceptable by the Ministry Representative.
(7) days in advance of the closure.
194.30 Delays – All acceptable major and minor delays to
The public must be notified by local radio and newspaper at the travelling public will be determined by the Ministry
least seven (7) days in advance of the closure. The Representative.
Contractor shall arrange any public announcement relating
The Contractor shall monitor the queue lengths created by
to the Contract and incorporate the Ministry logo through
any delay to the flow of traffic. Traffic must be cleared prior
the Ministry Representative and Corporate Writing
to starting another delay unless authorized by the Ministry
Services. Such advertisements will be made at the
Representative. If the Ministry Representative determines
Ministry’s expense. Notices or other advertisements of the
that the traffic delays are excessive, the Contractor shall
Contractor unrelated to the Contract, or where the
immediately cease construction activities and make all the
Ministry’s logo or name is not incorporated, may be made
travel lanes available to traffic as quickly as possible.
by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense.
Resumption of roadway operations shall be permitted as
194.27 Detours – Where detours or diversions are required traffic levels dictate and upon approval by the Ministry
for the execution of the work or deemed necessary by the Representative.
Ministry Representative, the Contractor shall provide
detours or temporary roads to facilitate the passage of traffic
around the restricted construction area in accordance with PART D – TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
Special Provisions or as otherwise directed by the Ministry
Representative. The Contractor shall be responsible for all 194.41 Portable Traffic Signals – Portable traffic signals,
signs and their maintenance, and maintenance of the detour in accordance with TMM 4.8, may be used to provide bi-
directional traffic control. Portable traffic signals are used
or temporary road. The Contractor shall consider the
primarily on longer term work zones. Typically, a pair of
condition of the pavement used for detours and its impact
signals is set up at the perimeter of a roadway construction
on the safety and function of the detour. Milled surfaces
site.
upon which traffic is to run shall be clean and allow
adequate drainage.

BC MoTI SS 2020 194 (3 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 75 of 470
SECTION 194 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT FOR WORK ZONES

Each signal unit shall have at least two signal heads for each 194.42 Vehicles as Traffic Control Devices – The use of
approach and shall be positioned so that at least one signal shadow vehicles, buffer vehicles, vehicle-mounted crash
head is overhead and one is side-mounted. Each signal head attenuators, and/or pilot cars may be specified or warranted,
shall have a 3 lamp (red, yellow, green) signal display. and shall be supplied and operated in accordance with the
TMM.
The use of portable traffic signals falls into two categories:
When required, the Contractor shall provide sufficient pilot
Category 1 is a fixed time signal used for short
cars, as required, to keep a steady and controlled flow of
duration work in low speed environments of
traffic moving around or through the construction area.
≤60 km/h, and where advance warning flashers are
not required. A traffic engineer is not required to 194.43 Use of Traffic Control Persons (TCP) – It is
prepare the timing sheet for the signal. generally expected that TCP and/or Portable Traffic Signals
will be required in the following situations:
Category 2 is an actuated or fixed time signal used for
long duration work, and/or in high speed (a) when public traffic is required to pass working vehicles
environments ≥70 km/h, and/or where advance or equipment which may block all or part of the
warning flashers are required. A Traffic Engineer travelled roadway.
is required to prepare the timing sheet for the
(b) when it is necessary to institute a one-way traffic
signal.
system through a construction area or other blockage
The Contractor shall submit a request for the use of portable where traffic volumes are heavy, approach speeds are
traffic signals to the Ministry Representative that includes: high, and a traffic signal system is not in use.
• The site layout (c) in high volume areas where temporary protection is
required while other traffic control devices (barricades,
• Anticipated volumes
cones, signs, etc.) are being erected or taken down.
• Requirements for advance warning signs
(d) for emergency protection when other traffic control
• The category of portable traffic signal proposed devices are not readily available.
• Proposed signal timing plan(s) (e) in all situations, where adequate protection for workers,
working equipment and public traffic is not provided
The acceptance of the signal installation will be determined by other traffic control devices.
by the Ministry Representative.
(f) Initiate traffic stoppages and reinstate flow of traffic to
If the proposed traffic signal installation is accepted by the
facilitate construction activities.
Ministry Representative, the Contractor shall:
194.44 Traffic Signs – All standard signs, new and
• Implement any portable traffic signals in accordance
replacement, shall meet current Ministry specifications.
with the Traffic Management Manual The Ministry Specifications for Standard Highway Sign
• For category 2 signals, prepare a traffic signal timing Materials, Fabrication and Supply are located on our
plan, signed and sealed by a Traffic Engineer registered Ministry web page at:
with the APEGBC
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/driving-and-
• Supply and install all traffic controller equipment transportation/transportation-
infrastructure/engineering-standards-and-
• Supply power guidelines/traffic-engineering-and-safety/traffic-
• Operate and maintain the signals engineering/traffic-signs-and-pavement-
markings/standard-traffic-
Traffic controller technology used shall comply with signs/specifications/sign_fabrication_specs.pdf
industry standard practice and shall have:
The Contractor shall supply and maintain all necessary
• Manual override to hold the signal in green signs and traffic control devices required by the Contract,
• A conflict monitoring mechanism that will ensure both this specification, and the TMM or as ordered by the
signals in a pair cannot show green simultaneously Ministry Representative. All signs and devices used must
conform to the standards detailed in the TMM.
• Ability to revert to flashing red mode if a fault is
detected 194.45 Barricades, Lights, Delineators, Temporary
Pavement Markings – The Contractor shall provide, erect
Where the work activity impacts the operation of an existing and maintain all types of temporary traffic control devices
signal, the Contractor must submit a written notification to including temporary pavement markings, barricades,
the Ministry Representative a minimum of ten (10) days in fences, delineators, amber flashing lights, in order to ensure
advance of the disruption to the signal. safety to the workers and the general public. These devices

BC MoTI SS 2020 194 (4 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 76 of 470
SECTION 194 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT FOR WORK ZONES

shall be as required by the Contract and the TMM, or as source. These glare screens shall be metal or an opaque
directed by the Ministry Representative. plastic material and be designed to shield the lighting from
the eyes of the driver.
Flashing amber lights, if deemed necessary by the Traffic
Control Plan, are used for extra night time effectiveness and The Contractor shall be responsible for the application and
the batteries of the flashing lights shall be checked each day. removal of all temporary pavement marking and traffic
control devices. When traffic lanes have to be redefined for
Flashing lights, if two-faced, and if used to mark the right-
Long Duration Work, the Contractor shall eradicate all
hand edge of a travelled lane, must have one face covered
redundant temporary or pavement markings that are not
so that the light is not visible to traffic travelling in the other
required for the intended traffic patterns.
direction. Flashing lights having two faces showing in
opposite directions may be used only if it is necessary that Class I and Class II standard barricades are illustrated in the
the obstruction or lane edge being marked be seen from both TMM. Temporary delineator posts shall be as shown on SS
directions of travel. They should not be used in a line of Drawing SP194.02. In speed zones of 50 km/h or less, the
delineators through an area of incomplete construction minimum height of traffic cones shall be 450 mm. Where
except where traffic must be diverted and a specific hazard the maximum speed limit is over 50 km/h, the minimum
exists. height of cones shall be 700 mm.
Temporary road construction lighting installations shall be 194.46 Dynamic Message Signs –The use of dynamic
positioned as shown in Figure 194-1. message signs (DMS) may be specified in the Contract or
by the Ministry Representative. Each sign must be portable.
Figure 194-1: Positioning of Temporary Lighting When in operation, the DMS shall be a minimum of two (2)
Adjacent to a Highway metres from the bottom of the sign display to the road
surface and shall be level and capable of pivoting for
sighting purposes. The specifications of the sign are as
follows:
Sign unit: Yellow/Orange LED display
Sign display: 3 lines with 8 characters per line
Character size: 450mm (18 inches)
Character matrix: 5x7
Remote dial-up access: By cellular phone or equivalent
A full matrix sign may be used given that it has the display
parameters noted above.
The Contractor is responsible for the DMS including but not
limited to bringing the signs to the Project, moving and
setting-up, providing storage as required including moving
the signs into and out of storage, maintaining the signs in
full operating condition, ensuring the correct message is
being displayed, damage to or loss of the signs and returning
the signs to the supplier. The Contractor shall provide the
Ministry Representative with a description of the messages
displayed and procedures for changing DMS messages
when the Contractor is on and off site.

PART E – GENERAL MAINTENANCE

194.51 Maintenance – The Contractor shall be responsible
for the continuing maintenance of all traffic control devices
in use as follows:
(a) Signs, etc., not applying to existing conditions shall be
To minimize glare and resulting impaired driver vision,
removed or covered. If covered, such as after sundown
lights shall be aimed away from any approaching traffic and
or during periods when work is suspended, the covering
at an angle of less than 45 degrees above vertical. Where
shall be placed over the sign so as to completely
lights cannot be located as shown then temporary glare
obscure the message thereon. Where operations are
screens shall be used to shield the traffic from the light

BC MoTI SS 2020 194 (5 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 77 of 470
SECTION 194 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT FOR WORK ZONES

carried out in stages, only those devices or signs, which • be of reasonable scope, in the opinion of the
apply to the current stage, are to be left in place or Ministry Representative, and
uncovered.
• be approved by the Ministry Representative.
(b) Signs shall be checked daily for legibility, damage,
suitability and location. Dirty, damaged, unsuitable or (ii) Lump Sum – If payment is specified as a Lump
misplaced signs shall be cleaned, repaired or replaced. Sum, the Lump Sum price bid shall be full
Signs and delineators with a reflective surface shall be compensation for costs to construct, stage, and
cleaned as frequently as necessary to ensure full demolish all detours. Progress payments shall be
reflectivity. As considerable damage may be inflicted determined by the Ministry Representative, in
on signs and devices during a weekend, the Contractor consultation with the Contractor.
shall conduct a check for replacement or repairs before (iii) Unit Prices – If payment is specified as being at
the rush hour on Monday morning. Similarly, high the Unit Prices, quantities of Work required will be
traffic volume and recreational routes, and any site that paid under the applicable Unit Price Items bid,
suffers repeated damage, shall be checked during the measured and paid for each movement of material
weekend or at any other time that works is not in for construction, staging, and demolition of the
progress. detour. Where Work is required that is outside the
(c) During hours when headlights are required, signs that scope of the existing Unit Prices, those costs shall
are not retroreflective shall be illuminated. After be incidental to the Work and will not be paid
sundown all signs shall be checked for visibility and separately.
those that cannot be seen clearly shall be adjusted or (iv) Full Costs – In all cases, the payments made under
replaced. SS 194.91(a)(ii) and (iii) inclusive shall be full
(d) Channelizing devices critical to the guidance of road compensation for any and all Work necessary to
users through the work zone shall be checked daily, or complete the construction of the detour, stage any
more frequently as specified by the Contract or changes required to the detour configurations, and
Ministry Representative, for proper placement. to demolish the detour.
(v) Detour Maintenance – Payment for maintenance
of any detour, whether detour construction is paid
PART F – PAYMENT or incidental, will be included within the Lump
194.91 Payment – The cost of all Traffic Management Sum paid for Traffic Management.
requirements, including the construction, staging, (b) Payment for Pilot Cars and Traffic Control Persons
maintenance, and demolition of detours, and provision of – Where pilot cars and traffic control persons are
pilot cars, all flagging and traffic control equipment, and included as bid items in the Contract Documents, a
personnel covered in this Section and the Contract record of the days and hours that each pilot car and/or
Documents, or as ordered by the Ministry Representative, traffic control person was employed shall be submitted
shall be considered to be included within the Lump Sum bid daily by the Contractor for verification and approval of
for Traffic Management, unless otherwise specified in the the Ministry Representative. In such event the
Special Provisions. overtime “hours worked” by traffic control persons in
(a) Payment for Detour Construction – Where the accordance with the current union shall be expressed in
Contract specifies that detour construction will be paid, equivalent straight time “hours earned” for payment at
such payment shall be as follows, based on the detour the rate bid. Pilot cars will be paid for at the all found
Design (whether prepared by the Ministry or by the rate bid in the Schedule for the actual number of hours
Contractor), staging plan, and demolition plan, all as operated as such.
approved by the Ministry Representative:
(i) Contractor-Designed Detour: Any detour
designed by the Contractor will be paid only as a
Lump Sum and must:
• be compliant with the Contract,

BC MoTI SS 2020 194 (6 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 78 of 470
 SECTION 200
CLEARING AND GRUBBING

200.01 Clearing – Except for trees and shrubs to be the Site to avoid contravention of environmental legislation
preserved as indicated on the Drawings or designated by the (including without limitation: the Migratory Birds
Ministry Representative, "Clearing" shall mean the Convention Act, the Migratory Birds Regulations, Section
complete removal and disposal of all standing and fallen 34 of the Wildlife Act), unless an appropriately qualified
trees, stumps, logs, upturned roots, rotten wood and all other professional conducts a survey to determine there are no
vegetation growth, and accumulations of rubbish of occupied bird nests. The survey shall be the responsibility
whatsoever nature, and any other objectionable material of the Contractor and shall be performed to the satisfaction
from the area shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the of the Ministry Representative. If required, the survey shall
Ministry Representative. Protective measures for the be considered incidental to the Work and no additional
protection and retention of vegetation are specified in payment will be made.
SS 769.
Clearing must be carried out and completed in a timely
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, Clearing shall fashion, to a distance and width as necessary to facilitate
also include the removal of existing cribwork, guard rail, utility relocation and grading operations.
fences, siphon structures built of timber and/or metal,
200.01.03 Merchantable Timber
culvert pipes of all types and timber box culverts within the
limits of the work. (a) License to Cut
Clearing shall not include the removal of concrete buildings (i) Ministry Obtained – Unless the Contract states
or their foundations, concrete bridge piers or abutments and otherwise, authorization from the Ministry of
their footings, concrete siphon boxes or concrete box Forests, Lands and Natural Resource Operations
culverts. These items shall be classified as Type A (Solid (Forestry) to cut and remove trees from the Project
Rock) and will be paid for as such in accordance with the limits will be obtained by the Ministry. Once this
measurements established by the Ministry Representative, authorization is approved, Forestry will then issue
and, where applicable, at the unit price bid in the Schedule the License to Cut to the Contractor prior to the
of Approximate Quantities, and Unit Prices for Type A commencement of the Clearing and Grubbing
(Solid Rock). If the Contract does not have a Type A Item, operation.
the associated work will be paid as a Change to Work under
(ii) Contractor Obtained – When specified in the
GC 38.00.
Contract, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility
200.01.01 Area – The area(s) to be cleared and/or grubbed to obtain a License to Cut and Remove Timber
shall include those areas required for the highway from the Ministry of Forests, Lands and Natural
right-of-way, Ministry provided borrow pits, and quarry Resource Operations prior to the removal of
sites, Ministry or Crown gravel pits and access roads merchantable timber from within the Project
thereto, if ordered by the Ministry Representative; off-take limits. The Contractor shall submit a copy of the
ditches or other drainage ditches and channels for stream License to Cut and Remove Timber to the Ministry
diversions either within or without the right-of-way; Representative prior to commencing any clearing
clearing of debris in streams as indicated on the Drawings, operations.
or as directed by the Ministry Representative within the
(iii) Compliance – The Contractor shall fully comply
Site; foundations for structures and the right-of-way as
with all Ministry of Forests, Lands and Natural
shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Ministry
Resource Operations regulations and the License
Representative, for intersecting public and private road
approaches or diversions of same outside the main highway to Cut.
right-of-way. All such areas are hereinafter referred to as (b) Merchantable Species – Merchantable timber shall be
the "Area." as defined by the Ministry of Forests, Lands and
Natural Resource Operations. It shall be the
The Contractor shall stake the limits of clearing and
Contractor’s responsibility to determine which species
grubbing as defined on the Drawings. Prior to commencing
the Ministry of Forests, Lands and Natural Resource
the clearing and grubbing operation the Contractor shall
notify the Ministry Representative of the areas to be Operations will class as merchantable.
worked. The Ministry Representative may adjust the limits (c) Ownership – Merchantable timber in areas of the
of clearing and grubbing and adjust the payment highway right-of-way will become the property of the
accordingly. Contractor and shall be removed by the Contractor in
accordance with the Forest Act.
200.01.02 Timing – Clearing and Grubbing shall only be
undertaken outside the bird nesting window identified for

o 2020 200 1 of 3
Vol. 1 Page 79 of 470
SECTION 200 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

(d) Processing – All merchantable timber shall be Where burning is permitted, associated slash and debris
processed according to industry standards. The shall be piled and burned at points located centrally in the
Contractor can be charged by the Ministry of Forests, Area.
Lands and Natural Resource Operations for any
The number of fires to be started at any one time shall be
merchantable timber willfully damaged or destroyed
limited to the capacity of the Contractor's equipment and
during construction operations. Any fines resulting
organization to provide adequate protection against the
from non-compliance of the license requirements by
spreading of the fires to adjacent timber or property.
the Ministry of Forests, Lands and Natural Resource
Operations shall be the responsibility of the Contractor In the event of Forestry regulations prohibiting burning, the
and as such, will be deducted from the Contractor’s slash, debris, etc., may be piled along the sides of the Area
progress payments until proof of payment has been and burned at a later time when permitted by the regulations.
presented to the Ministry Representative. Where the regulations do not allow burning prior to the
Completion Date, the material shall be disposed of off-Site
200.01.04 Vegetation Retention – All trees shall be felled
prior to the Completion date.
within the Area but, in the event of any trees falling outside
the Area, such trees shall be cut up and together with all 200.02.03 Off-Site Disposal – Any debris from clearing
debris and slash therefrom, disposed of in accordance with and grubbing destined for off-Site disposal shall be disposed
the Contract. of at an-off-Site disposal site provided by the Contractor, in
accordance with SS 145.27.02, or at other locations as
The Ministry Representative may designate certain trees or
permitted under the Contract.
shrubbery to be left standing, in which case the Contractor
shall take every precaution not to damage or injure such 200.03 Grubbing – Grubbing means the entire removal and
trees or shrubbery in felling adjacent timber, burning or any disposal by burning as described in SS 200.01 "Clearing"
other clearing operations as specified in SS 769. and SS 200.02 "Disposal of Material" of all stumps, roots
and embedded logs to a depth of 0.6 m below the ground
Such trees or shrubbery are to be limbed or thinned to such
line.
height and extent as may be directed by the Ministry
Representative. No deduction will be made in the total Grubbing shall be carried out over the entire Area as defined
quantity of clearing for any trees or shrubbery ordered to be in SS 200.01 "Clearing." Grubbing shall be fully completed
left standing; no additional payment will be made for any at least 300 m in advance of grading operations.
limbing or thinning of such trees or shrubbery as may be
directed by the Ministry Representative. 200.04 Danger Trees – This item shall consist of removing,
on written order of the Ministry Representative, any leaning
200.02 Disposal of Material or dangerous trees or snags outside the clearing Area.
200.02.01 General – Unmerchantable timber, stumps, etc., Such trees shall be felled and disposed of in accordance with
shall not be disposed of by pushing outside the clearing and SS 200.01 "Clearing" and SS 200.02 "Disposal of
grubbing right-of-way. Material."
200.02.01 Chipping – Organic debris from clearing and The Contractor will not be required to grub the stumps of
grubbing, including stumps, may be reduced by chipping, any danger trees.
grinding or other means, mixed with the organic stripping,
and disposed of in accordance with the following 200.06 Mailboxes – Where it becomes necessary to remove
conditions: or otherwise disturb existing mail boxes within the limits of
any project, the Contractor will be required to install the
(a) The organic debris has no dimension exceeding 75 mm, boxes temporarily in such a position that their usefulness
will not be impaired. After construction work has been
(b) The organic debris is uniformly mixed with the
completed, the boxes shall be re-installed at positions
unsuitable material at a rate not exceeding 30 parts total
designated by the Ministry Representative. No new posts
organic debris to 100 parts organic stripping material
or materials will be required, except that any damage caused
by volume,
by the Contractor to either boxes or supports, due to the
(c) Material shall either be disposed of in the designated Contractor's negligence, shall be repaired by the Contractor
disposal area or stockpiled for future use at the direction at the Contractor's expense.
of the Ministry Representative, and
All costs in connection with the removal and replacement of
(d) The resulting mixture is spread only in locations and to the mailboxes, as specified above, shall be considered as
depths approved by the Ministry Representative. incidental to the construction of any improvement and shall
be included in the unit prices for the various pay items of
200.02.02 Burning – Where permitted, any burning shall be
work involved in the Contract. No additional compensation
carried out subject to the Provisions of the Open Burning
will be made.
Regulations and the Forest Act and regulations thereto.

o 2020 200 2 of 3
Vol. 1 Page 80 of 470
SECTION 200 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

200.07 Removal of Existing Signs and Symbols – The timber in the cold-decking sites, until such time as it may be
Contractor shall remove all existing signs and their removed, including but not limited to, the cost of property,
associated structures as shown on the Drawings and, where of scheduling the Work, of performing additional Work, and
applicable, in accordance with SS 635. of delay in the Work.
The Contractor must obtain approval from the Ministry 200.93 Grubbing – GRUBBING will be paid for at the unit
Representative prior to removing any signing equipment price bid per hectare of grubbing and will, unless otherwise
and, if so directed by the Ministry Representative, existing specified, comprise the full length and breadth of the
signs shall not be removed until new signs or temporary right-of-way as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
signs have been installed. Ministry Representative. The price shall be accepted as
full compensation for everything furnished and done in
The Contractor shall remove and stockpile all existing sign
connection therewith, regardless of the nature or condition
faces, boards, redundant posts and bases at the Ministry
of the Area.
Maintenance Contractor’s closest yard, or as otherwise
directed by the Contract or the Ministry Representative. 200.94 Danger Trees – DANGER TREES will be
measured in three sizes according to the diameter of the tree
Voids remaining after the removal of sign bases shall be
trunk measured at a point 1.25 m above the ground line at
backfilled and compacted with suitable native materials.
the base of the tree, with compensation for removal paid in
Existing Ministry signs, which are not marked for removal accordance with Table 200-A..
or relocation but are in conflict with the progress of the
Project, shall be removed and temporarily relocated as
Table 200-A: Danger Tree Removal Compensation
approved by the Ministry Representative. No separate
payment will be made for these temporary relocations Size (m)
which shall be considered incidental to the Works and no Compensation
@ 1.25 m above ground
additional payment will be made.
< 0.75 $140.00

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 0.75 to 1.5 $330.00

200.91 Clearing – CLEARING will be paid for at the unit >1.5 $550.00
price bid per hectare of clearing and will, unless otherwise
specified, comprise the full length and breadth of the
right-of-way as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the 200.95 Remove Existing Signs – Payment for REMOVE
Ministry Representative. The price shall be accepted as full EXISTING SIGNS including, but not limited to,
compensation for everything furnished and done in excavation, removal, hauling, disposal of sign faces,
connection therewith, regardless of the nature or condition removal, and stockpiling or disposal of existing posts and
of the Area. bases, and backfilling the excavation will be made at the
Unit Price bid per sign removal and shall be considered full
200.92 Merchantable Timber – All costs associated with compensation for everything furnished and done in
sorting, loading hauling and cold-decking, and disposal of connection therewith. Signs without posts (pole-mounted,
merchantable timber, including but not limited to, the etc.) shall be considered the same as signs with posts for
provision of the maintenance of the cold-deck sites and the payment purposes.
construction and maintenance of haul routes and other roads
shall be considered incidental to the Work and no additional No separate payment will be made for the removal and
payment will be made. No separate payment will be made disposal of delineator posts which shall be considered
in respect to the time taken to remove the timber from the incidental to the Works and no additional payment will be
cold-deck sites, and all costs resulting from the presence of made.

o 2020 200 3 of 3
Vol. 1 Page 81 of 470
 SECTION 201

ROADWAY AND DRAINAGE EXCAVATION

DESCRIPTION (b) Type D, with potential sub-classes

201.01 General – Roadway and Drainage Excavation shall • Common
include:
• Topsoil
(a) all excavation and the construction of all
• Stripping
embankments required for the formation of the
roadbed, pullouts, parking areas and look-outs; • Suitable
(b) excavation for any drainage ditch, off-take ditch or • Unsuitable
channel for stream diversion within or outside the
The material encountered in any project excavation shall be
right-of-way;
classified as one of the two types listed above.
(c) removal of surcharge material, topsoil and organic
waste material from the roadway, and of topsoil and In no case shall a material be classified using percentages
unsuitable overburden from any Ministry provided of two or more types.
borrow pit or any available Ministry or Crown gravel 201.11.01 Type A - Solid Rock – Type A shall, without
pit; limitation, include all forms of “solid rock in place”
including solid formations, masses, ledges, seams or
(d) excavation of materials below grade; excavation of
borrow pits; the grading necessary to construct any layers of dense sedimentary, igneous or metamorphic
frontage road, gravel pit access road, borrow pit material of sufficient hardness generally requiring drilling
and blasting methods, very heavy ripping, or equivalent
access road or any other access road, public or private,
methods, before excavation and removal.
either within or outside the right-of-way, only to
Ministry provided sources as may be ordered by the Type A shall also include detached masses of rock or
Ministry Representative; boulders individually containing a volume of 2.0 m3 or
(e) the grading of connections to intersecting roads, more.
public or private, either within or outside the The breaking and removal of frozen materials shall not be
right-of-way; considered Type A excavation.
(f) the hauling and disposal of all excavated material, and 201.11.02 Type D – Common – Common material is all
the trimming and shaping of all excavations and other excavation materials of a nature not included in the
embankments. foregoing description of Type A, regardless of the nature
All Works shall be confined to the right-of-way except or condition of the material, or the method used to
excavate or remove. Type D may be broken down into
where agreements for access rights are in place for other
further sub-classes for payment, generally depending on
lands, public or private.
handling requirements and intended use:
201.02 Extent of Work – The dimensions of the
(a) Topsoil – typically the upper organic soil layer
excavations and embankments shall be as shown on the
Contract Drawings but the Ministry Representative may consisting of intermixed humus, minerals and
increase or decrease roadbed dimensions and slope angles. composted materials, well suited as a growth medium
for plants and unsuitable for embankment
Construction Grade is defined as the grade upon which the construction. Used only where planting beds require
Asphaltic Pavement is laid. higher quality growth medium.
Subgrade is defined as the grade upon which the first layer (b) Stripping – Stripping is a sub-class of Type D that is
of select granular subbase or base material is laid. material typically near or at the surface and contains
organics, root mass, or vegetation., which is typically
MATERIALS
unsuitable for embankment construction but may be
201.11 Description of Material Types – Excavation shall be suitable for slope dressing. Mulched materials,
classified by the Ministry Representative, under the depending on the size of the chips and proportion of
following material types: soil to chips, may be considered as Stripping. Where
a Contract has no specific use for Topsoil, Topsoil
(a) Type A
may be included within Stripping
(c) Suitable – material suitable for embankment
construction.

BC MoTI SS 2020 201 (1 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 82 of 470
SECTION 201 ROADWAY AND DRAINAGE EXCAVATION

(d) Unsuitable – material which is unsuitable for traction and effectively deliver a minimum force of 700kN
embankment construction but is not Stripping or per lineal metre of ripper shank embedded in the material
Topsoil. May include mulching, where chip sizes are by a single shank static ripper as determined by the
large or soil to chip proportion is low. manufacturer’s Drawbar Pull versus Ground Speed Charts.
201.12 Material Classification Changes – It is possible If, under the above specified ripping force, the material can
that the material in a cut may change at some level in the be broken or loosened into pieces with an individual
excavation and may change more than once in a single volume of 2.0 m3 or smaller, the material will be classified
cut. as Type D. If the material cannot be broken or loosened
within the time limit as directed by the Ministry
Where such a change occurs, the Contractor shall
Representative, the material will be classified Type A.
immediately, and in any event within twenty-four (24)
hours of attempting to excavate the changed material, The test will be conducted at the Contractor’s expense
notify the Ministry Representative and clean off any unless the test determines, in the sole determination of the
material falling within the currently approved material Ministry Representative, that a material classification
classification of the excavation, in order to expose the change is warranted. In that case, the cost of the equipment
horizon where the material change is thought to occur. (including mobilization and demobilization if the
equipment is brought in solely for the purpose of the
The Ministry Representative will review the exposed
ripping test) and the operator will be paid as Extra Work.
material, determine whether a classification change is
warranted, and notify the Contractor if a classification 201.14 Unsuitable Material – Only material acceptable to
change is warranted or not. the Ministry Representative shall be used in the construction
of embankments.
If a classification change is approved, sufficient field
measurements will be taken to establish boundaries and Where Topsoil is a payment Item in the Contract, Topsoil
the material horizon for volume calculations. within the excavation and embankment area, and meeting
the requirements of SS 751.13 and SS 751.16, shall be
If the Contractor disagrees with the Ministry’s assessment
excavated and stockpiled at a location acceptable to the
of the material classification, the Contractor may appeal
Ministry Representative. Where the Contract has no Item
only in accordance with SS 201.13.
for Topsoil or the available volume of Topsoil exceeds that
201.13 Material Classification Appeal required for the Contract, only the required volume shall be
stockpiled and the balance dealt with as Stripping.
201.13.01 Type A and Type D Material Classification –
The Contractor may appeal the material classification Stripping and surplus Topsoil shall be removed over the
between Type A and Type D as determined by the Ministry entire excavation and embankment area. Topsoil shall be
Representative. There shall be no appeal for any stockpiled separately from Stripping.
distinction between the Type D sub-classes.
All material above or below subgrade in an excavation or in
201.13.02 Notice and Time Limit of Appeal – The the foundation of an embankment, which in the opinion of
Contractor shall serve written Notice of appeal to the the Ministry Representative is unsuitable for embankment
Ministry Representative within: construction, shall be removed and paid as classified by the
Ministry Representative. Soft clays and peats are typical
(a) twenty-four (24) hours of the Contractor attempting to
examples of unsuitable materials.
excavate any potentially changed classification
material; or Material deemed unsuitable for the construction may be
wasted between the toe of the embankment and the right-of-
(b) three (3) working days of the material classification
way boundary or in other areas, all as designated by the
designation by the Ministry Representative; or
Ministry Representative. If no waste areas are designated
(c) in no event less than two (2) working days prior to the in the Contract then the unsuitable material shall be
completion of the excavation. removed and disposed offsite at the Contractor’s expense.
Any such material subsequently placed in an embankment,
201.13.03 Ripping Test – Where the Contractor appeals without the approval of the Ministry Representative, shall
the material classification, a ripping test will be conducted be removed and disposed of, as directed by the Ministry
under the direction and control of the Ministry Representative, and no payment will be made for the
Representative, including the determination of the location, removal or haul of such unsuitable material from the
time, and suitability of weather, ground, equipment and embankment.
other conditions for the ripping test to occur.
Where removal of unsuitable material requires backfilling
The ripping test will be conducted using a Class 7 or more this work shall be carried out with approved fill materials,
powerful bulldozer (as identified in the “Equipment Rental as directed by the Ministry Representative. Payment for
Rate Guide” published by the BC Road Builders and Heavy such backfilling and haul will be made at the Unit Price bid
Equipment Association), that will develop sufficient for "Roadway and Drainage Excavation”.

BC MoTI SS 2020 201 (2 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 83 of 470
SECTION 201 ROADWAY AND DRAINAGE EXCAVATION

Topsoil shall be placed in designated planting areas, in CONSTRUCTION

accordance with the Contract.
201.31 Rock Cuts – See SS 204.
Upon completion of the road grade, all Stripping, and
201.32 Overhanging Rock and Boulders – The Contractor
Surplus Topsoil and material suitable for growth of ground
shall remove overhanging rock or boulders within the
cover shall be spread as slope dressing to a nominal depth
excavation limits, as ordered by the Ministry
of 150 mm on the cleared right-of-way and up the fill slopes
Representative, and shall backfill and compact all resulting
to generally blend in with the cross section. Care shall be
cavities to allow the safe passage of construction and
taken that proper drainage is maintained. This material shall
support vehicles generally in accordance with the
be placed, compacted and trimmed to a neat appearance in
requirements of SS 135. Such work will be paid at the Unit
a manner to facilitate growth of revegetation. No additional
Price bid for the class of excavation involved.."
payment will be made for placing and trimming material
used for slope dressing.. 201.33 Overbreak in Solid Rock - Overbreak in solid rock
excavation encountered in the contract is that portion of any
201.15 Surplus Material – All suitable excavation material
such material which is excavated, displaced or loosened
shall, if required, be taken or hauled into the nearest
outside and beyond the slopes or grades as staked or re-
embankment and to any embankment on the project to be
established (with the exception of slides as described in
constructed out to the extreme distance required by the
SS 201.42).
Ministry Representative.
Any overbreak that occurs due to the inherent character of
The surplus beyond what is necessary to form the nearest
any formation encountered, as determined by the Ministry
embankment shall be:
Representative in consultation with the Qualified
• disposed of by widening embankments uniformly Professional will be classified as allowable overbreak as
within the limits of right of way; described in SS 201.33.01.
• hauled to form or widen any embankment on the road All other overbreak, as so defined, shall be removed by the
to be constructed; Contractor at the Contractor’s expense, and shall be
disposed of by the Contractor, in the same manner as
• stockpiled on-site or in Ministry pits; or provided for “Surplus Material”, but at the Contractor’s
• lastly removed from Site for disposal by the Contractor, expense.

all subject to the approval by the Ministry Representative, The Qualified Professional is defined as the Ministry’s
where hauling and placing shall be performed in the most Geotechnical Engineer, Rockwork Engineer, or consultant
efficient manner. engineer working for the Ministry whose discipline is in
geotechnical engineering.
No material shall be wasted without the approval of the
Ministry Representative. All surplus material shall be used 201.33.01 Allowable Overbreak – If, and only where
as much as possible. directed by the Ministry Representative, use is made of the
overbreak to replace material which would otherwise have
201.16 Contaminated Soils – If any contaminated soils, to be excavated outside the design cut line on-Site or
suspected or actual, are encountered during construction, borrowed for the construction of the roadway, then such
the material is to be left in-situ or be segregated and overbreak will be classed as allowable overbreak. Any
stockpiled, and handled in accordance with SS 165 overbreak that is not incorporated within the approved
Appendix 165-A – Managing Suspect Contaminated design lines and grades of the embankments shall not be
Materials. considered “allowable overbreak”.
In general, the Appendix requires segregating, testing by a 201.33.02 Contractor’s Negligence – Overbreak resulting
Qualified Environmental Professional retained by the from fault or negligence of the Contractor shall be removed
Contractor, handling, and disposal of the excavated material and disposed of, as directed by the Ministry Representative,
at an approved disposal site or at a licensed disposal facility. at no cost to the Ministry, subject to SS 201.33.01.
Prior to any disposal, the Contractor shall identify the Definition of negligence will be deemed to be lack of the
disposal site(s) to the Ministry Representative, in following: the sequence of operations, lack of a blast design,
accordance with SS 145.27.02. lack of preblast survey, lack of as-built blast design as
Contaminated material hauled to off-Site disposal will be described in SS 204.04.06, SS 204.04.07, and SS 204.04.08
paid at applicable Unit Price for Contaminated Soil Disposal and SS 204.04.09. Also, definition of negligence will be
or, where there is no such bid Item, as Extra Work. deemed to mean lack of cut-off drill holes on the backslope,
excessive spacing of drill holes and overloading of the same.
201.34 Sealing of Grade – To prevent standing water in the
cuts and fills, the Contractor shall at the end of each working

BC MoTI SS 2020 201 (3 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 84 of 470
SECTION 201 ROADWAY AND DRAINAGE EXCAVATION

day, grade, roll and seal the materials with a smooth wheel dumping shall be incorporated in the fill and compacted
roller weighing not less than 5,400 kg, such that the water according to these standards.
will not pond on the grade.
When embankments are made on hillsides or where a new
201.35 Enlargement of Excavation – In cases where the fill is to be applied upon an existing embankment, the slopes
quantity of material taken from a regular excavation will not of the embankment or original ground (except rock) shall be
be sufficient to form the required embankment, the terraced in a continuous series of steps a minimum of 1.5 m
deficiency shall be supplied by taking material from the wide as the embankment rises.
excavation within or outside the right-of-way, at such places
The material from step excavation shall be spread and
as the Ministry Representative may direct, or from
compacted into the adjoining embankment. No additional
enlargement of the regular excavations made uniformly on
payment will be made for excavation or for placing step
one or both sides.
material in the adjoining fill.
The sides of the excavation in all cases shall be dressed to
201.37 Earth Embankments – This section applies to
such slopes as the Ministry Representative may require.
embankments constructed from material containing less
When the sides of the excavation had previously been final-
than 15% by volume of rock larger than 150 mm.
dressed payment for sloping or scaling the second time will
Embankments shall be constructed in such a manner that
be as Extra Work.
they shall be completely stable with reference to designated
201.36 Rock Embankments – This section applies to traffic loading.
embankments constructed from material containing more
The natural surface shall be excavated to remove organic
than 15% by volume of rock larger than 150 mm.
soils or other unsuitable material, as directed by the Ministry
Embankments shall be constructed in layers equal in Representative, and the removal of such material will be
thickness to the largest size of the material but not exceeding paid at the Unit Prices bid for the class of excavation
0.7 m. Greater lift thicknesses will be permitted by the involved.
Ministry Representative under special conditions provided
When the foundation of the embankment consists of
the Contractor can spread the larger material satisfactorily
sensitive soils the Contractor shall, with the Ministry
and attain a degree of compaction no less than attained for
Representative’s approval, place the initial lift of
layers less than 0.7 m in thickness.
embankment to a minimum depth required as stated in the
Regardless of layer thickness and material particle size all design to carry the Contractor's hauling equipment. Static
material shall be well compacted to achieve the design compaction shall be used in areas of sensitive soil.
density and stability of the embankment and to the
The earth embankment shall then be constructed in
satisfaction of the Ministry Representative.
successive horizontal layers and thicknesses and compacted
The material shall be deposited and spread so that the larger to the required percentage of Standard Proctor Maximum
rocks are well distributed and the intervening spaces are Dry Density obtained by ASTM D698, all as specified in
filled with smaller sizes as may be available to form a stable Table 201-A.
embankment. The finer portion of excavated rock shall be
retained for the top transition layer. Each layer shall be Table 201-A: Lift Thickness and Required Density by Depth
compacted by routing the loading construction equipment Below Subgrade
over the entire width supplemented with additional
compaction equipment, as necessary to ensure compaction Depth Below Maximum Minimum
is uniform, a stable embankment is achieved and to the Subgrade Uncompacted Lift Density
satisfaction of the Ministry Representative. (mm) Thickness (mm) (% SPD)
When a rock embankment is overlain by an earth 0 to 300 100 100%
embankment or by subbase or base course materials, the top
0.5 m of the rock fill shall be sealed with smaller rock 300 to 500 100 95%
particles and suitable soil materials, if necessary, to prevent Below 500 200 95%
the uppermost layers penetrating into voids in this rock
embankment.
Where permitted by the Ministry Representative, and where The above maximum lift thickness requirements may be
the width is too narrow to accommodate equipment, waived by the Ministry Representative, where the
material for the toe of the side hill rock fills may be placed Contractor can demonstrate that:
by end dumping until sufficient width of the embankment
• the proposed compaction equipment can uniformly
has been formed to carry equipment, after which the
compact a thicker layer;
remainder shall be placed in layers and compacted as
specified. Any loose material left on the slopes by end

BC MoTI SS 2020 201 (4 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 85 of 470
SECTION 201 ROADWAY AND DRAINAGE EXCAVATION

• the equipment and compaction procedures attain the No compensation will be allowed for the storing and re-
required degree of compaction at all levels within the handling of this material.
lift;
No material is to be placed on a frozen surface unless
• they have compaction testing equipment and services approved by the Ministry Representative.
for Quality Control and Quality Assurance that will 201.39 Snow Removal – Snow overlying the surface of a
reliably test to the full depth of the proposed lift cut, or the site or surface of an embankment shall be
thickness. The supply of all testing equipment for removed and deposited beyond the slope stakes at the
Quality Control and Quality Assurance shall be the Contractor's own expense.
Contractors responsibility.
201.40 Bridge End Fill – Material for bridge end fill shall
Where the embankment material is highly variable or of be in accordance with SS 202.04 and SS 202.05.
such character that conventional laboratory density Construction of bridge end fill shall be in accordance with
determination or conventional compaction testing are likely SS 202.23.
to be inappropriate, the Contractor may prepare a proposed
compaction plan based on the “Target Density” provisions 201.41 Transition Sections – Subgrade, other than solid
of SS 202.22, roll patterns or other methodology, for review rock, shall be subcut 1 m deep at the line of transition from
and sign-off by the Quality Manager, and submission to the cut to embankment. The subcut shall taper to zero depth
Ministry Representative. The Ministry Representative, in 8 m within the cut. The embankment construction shall be
consultation with the Geotechnical Engineer of Record, may carried back over the subcut only after the embankment has
approve or reject the proposal. reached the level of the bottom of the subcut, as measured
by the Ministry Representative. Payment for the subcut will
No organic soils shall be placed in the embankment. Soils be made at the Unit Price bid for the class of excavation
with high moisture content that cannot be compacted to the involved
required density shall not be employed without prior
aeration and drying. 201.42 Slopes and Slides – The slopes of all excavations
and embankments shall be trimmed neatly and evenly to the
When embankments are made on hillsides or where a new line and slope indicated on the Drawings, including special
fill is to be applied upon an existing embankment, the slopes slope treatment in accordance with SS Drawing SP201-01,
of the embankment or original ground (except rock) shall be or as directed by the Ministry Representative.
terraced in a continuous series of steps a minimum of 1.5 m
wide as the embankment rises. No undercutting of slopes in excavation by power shovels
or other excavation equipment will be permitted.
If suitable, the material from step excavation shall be spread
and compacted into the adjoining embankment. No In case slopes, finished to the lines as shown on the
additional payment will be made for excavation or for Drawings, slide into the roadway or out of embankments
placing step material in the adjoining fill. before final acceptance of the work, such slide material shall
be removed by the Contractor from the roadway or replaced
The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting equipment by the Contractor in the embankment, as the case may be, at
and methods of attaining the specified degree of the Unit Price bid for the class of excavation involved. The
compaction. In general, the roller mass shall be sufficient classification of material in slips and slides shall be in
to compress the soil vertically after each pass but not accordance with its condition at the time of removal
sufficient to unduly rut or shear the soil. regardless of its prior condition. The slopes shall be
Water shall be added and incorporated into the soil using refinished by the Contractor, as directed by the Ministry
suitable equipment such as rotary mixers, cultivators, etc., Representative. Such refinishing will be paid for by Order
to increase the natural moisture content to the optimum for Extra Work. Materials to replace embankment slides
moisture percentage as determined by the current ASTM shall be obtained from sources designated by the Ministry
D698. Representative.
In the event that the natural moisture content is greater than Slopes undercut at the base or destroyed in any manner by
the optimum, the soil shall be aerated and dried employing act of the Contractor shall be resloped by the Contractor at
suitable mixing equipment. the Contractor's expense to the slope, as directed by the
Ministry Representative. All materials resulting from such
201.38 Frozen Material – The use of frozen material in resloping shall be removed and deposited, as directed by the
embankments will not be permitted; the only exception is, Ministry Representative. No payment will be made to the
with Ministry Representative approval, broken rock Contractor for the removal of such material.
containing less than 15% passing a 4.75 mm sieve. Frozen
excavated material which will be suitable when dry shall be 201.43 Ditches – Ditches which may be considered
stored and allowed to thaw and dry, and then placed in the necessary for the proper drainage of the work shall be
embankment, as directed by the Ministry Representative. constructed at such points and to such cross section,
alignment and grade as the Ministry Representative may

BC MoTI SS 2020 201 (5 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 86 of 470
SECTION 201 ROADWAY AND DRAINAGE EXCAVATION

direct. This shall include inlets and outlets to culverts and 201.48 Surcharging – Pre-consolidation by surcharging
ditching of all kinds. Ditching quantities will be considered shall be carried out where indicated on Drawings and/or
as ordinary excavation quantities and will be measured, Special Provisions, or as directed by the Ministry
classified and paid for as such. Representative. Embankments on these areas shall be
placed directly on the natural ground without removal of the
201.44 Borrow – Borrow refers only to materials sourced
organic materials, unless otherwise directed by the Ministry
outside of the Site; Material sourced on-Site, within or
Representative, and shall be constructed to a surcharged
outside of the design lines, is Type A or Type D excavation.
height above construction grade as shown or specified.
Borrow shall consist of rut resistant material, with less than
The Contractor shall place the initial lift of embankment to
20% passing the 0.075 mm sieve and free of organics, high
a minimum depth required to carry the Contractor's hauling
plasticity clays and other unsuitable materials, obtained
equipment with the approval of the Ministry Representative.
from an approved source of supply (e.g. pit or quarry)
Static compaction shall be used in areas of sensitive soils.
outside the highway right-of-way, developed and used in
The remainder of the embankments shall be constructed in
accordance with SS 202.
accordance with procedures set forth in this Section; except
The Special Provisions may identify potential sources, that compaction will not be required on the surcharge
additional or different material qualities, or require material above construction grade.
representative sampling and testing of the material.
To avoid shear failures, the rate of construction shall be
201.45 Haul – “Haul” includes all work necessary to move rigidly controlled by instrumentation installed by the
excavation materials from their in-situ source to any Ministry.
destination, on or off-Site.
The surcharge shall remain on the embankments for a period
201.46 Watering – Water for compacting embankments, of time as outlined in the Contract Special Provisions, or as
constructing subgrades and surfacing, and for laying dust may be indicated by the instrumentation, or as determined
caused by grading operations and traffic, shall be applied as and adjusted by the Ministry Representative.
required. Water shall be applied by sprinkling with tank
All instrumentation shall be kept in working, continuous,
trucks equipped with spray bars and suitable control
and operable order according to manufacturer’s
apparatus.
requirements.
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for
Should any of the instrumentation become damaged or
obtaining and applying water, including acquiring all
rendered unusable by the construction operations, the same
required permits.
will be replaced by the Ministry at the Contractor's expense.
Watering shall be incidental to the Work.
201.49 Backslope Stabilization – Drain holes, rock bolts,
201.47 Finishing of Roadway – Before acceptance and mesh and/or shotcrete may be required where rock is being
final payment is made, the entire roadway, including the excavated.
roadbed, shoulders and ditches shall be neatly finished and
The backslope stabilization requirements will be assessed
trimmed to the lines, grades and cross sections shown on the
by the Ministry Representative during construction and the
Drawings, or as directed by the Ministry Representative, to
amount and location of the drain holes, rock bolts, mesh and
reproduce smooth surfaces, slopes and a uniform cross
shotcrete may be changed or deleted according to the
section. Subgrade shall be finished within a tolerance of
condition of the rock encountered in the field.
± 15 mm except for rock cut fills where the tolerance shall
be ± 50 mm.
All drainage ditches, waterways and culverts shall be MEASUREMENT
opened up and cleaned out to restore them to their full
201.81 Borrow – Borrow quantities will be measured in-
effectiveness.
bank at the off-Site source and computed in accordance with
All loose rock and boulders within the right-of-way SS 145.21.01. The volume of boulders and unsuitable
resulting from grading and grubbing operations shall be material removed from borrow pits that is not used in
gathered up and buried, or otherwise disposed of as the embankments shall be deducted.
Ministry Representative may direct.
201.82 Excavation – All "Roadway and Drainage
The Contractor shall grade all portions of the right-of-way Excavation" will be measured in-bank at the source, after
outside the Excavation and Embankment areas to conform Clearing and Grubbing operations have been completed, as
to the general ground line. This work will be considered as specified in SS 200.01 through SS 200.03, and volumes
subsidiary work pertaining to the item of "Roadway and computed in accordance with SS 145.21.01.
Drainage Excavation," and no extra payment will be made.
Pay quantities will be computed, in accordance with
SS 145.21.01, in CUBIC METRE to the neat lines staked.

BC MoTI SS 2020 201 (6 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 87 of 470
SECTION 201 ROADWAY AND DRAINAGE EXCAVATION

Adjustments for curvature will be made in any cut where hauling, and placing and compacting into embankment,
deemed equitable by the Ministry Representative. stockpile or disposal site and shall be accepted as full
compensation for everything furnished and done in
201.83 Haul and Overhaul – Haul and Overhaul are
connection therewith.
incidental to the Work.
Material will be paid only once as a class or sub-class of
material. For clarity, if a Contract includes Items for both
PAYMENT Type D and its subclass Topsoil, Topsoil will only be paid
under the Topsoil Item and not also as Type D.
201.91 Borrow – Payment for BORROW materials,
imported from outside the Site, shall be at the Unit Price per 201.93 Allowable Overbreak – Allowable overbreak will
cubic metre bid for the various types of material borrowed, be paid at 75% of the Unit Price bid for TYPE A
classified in accordance with SS 201.11. All specifications MATERIAL. The quantity at the Unit Price for overbreak
in this Section relating to excavation shall apply to borrow. in any one cut shall not exceed 10% of the original
Payment shall be full compensation for everything theoretical cut, as shown on the Drawings or as directed by
furnished and done, including without limitation costs for the Ministry Representative. Material in excess of the above
acquisition, development, and payment of royalties for 10%, if used in lieu of borrow and only on the advice of the
private pits or quarries, purchase price of borrow material, Ministry Representative, will be paid at the Unit Price bid
access road construction and maintenance, excavation, for TYPE D MATERIAL.
screening, crushing, stockpiling, loading, hauling,
201.94 Embankment – Except where otherwise explicitly
spreading, compaction and moisture adjustment (watering
provided in the Contract, the work of embankment
or drying) in place as specified.
construction will not be paid for directly as a pay item, but
201.92 Excavation – Payment for EXCAVATION, within shall be considered as incidental to the classes of
the Site, shall be at the Unit Price bid per cubic metre for the EXCAVATION or BORROW.
various types of materials excavated, classified in
201.95 Surcharge Removal – Payment for surcharge
accordance with SS 201.11. The Unit Price for such
removal shall be at the Unit Prices bid for EXCAVATION.
excavation shall include excavation, slope trimming,

BC MoTI SS 2020 201 (7 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 88 of 470
SECTION 201 ROADWAY AND DRAINAGE EXCAVATION

BC MoTI SS 2020 201 (8 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 89 of 470
 SECTION 202

GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE, AND SUB-BASES

SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION 202.03 General Description of Work – The aggregates for

granular surfacing, base and subbase may be supplied either
202.01 Preliminary and General – This specification
by the Contractor or produced from a Ministry provided
describes the classification, the materials and the
source. Production of granular surfacing and granular base
professional standards required for the production of
requires crushing and placing in stockpile. Production of
granular aggregates and the construction of granular
select granular subbase and bridge end fill may be by
surfacing, granular base and select granular subbase.
crushing, screening or direct excavation.
Granular aggregate shall be loaded from the stockpile,
MATERIALS crushing and screening plant, or pit face, as may be
applicable; hauled out to the site, placed accurately without
202.02 Aggregate Classification
segregation and thoroughly compacted to established line
202.02.01 Crushed Surfacing Aggregates: and grade.
(a) High Fines Granular Surfacing Aggregate (HFSA): The Contractor shall maintain the prepared surface of the
HFSA is used for surfacing of gravel roads. Cohesion base course aggregate until it has been paved or until
for this aggregate is achieved by plastic fines. completion of the contract, whichever is applicable.
202.02.02 Crushed Base Course Aggregates – These are 202.04 Aggregate Quality
high strength, high load bearing, high quality, crushed
202.04.01 General – Granular aggregate shall be composed
granular base materials. As these materially are not well
of inert, clean, tough, durable particles of crushed rock,
suited for long-term traffic, they are usually overlaid by gravel, sand and fines capable of withstanding the
surface course materials (HFSA or asphalt/concrete deleterious effects of exposure to water, freeze/thaw,
pavement). handling, spreading and compacting and design traffic
(a) Well-Graded Base (WGB): WGB is the standard base loading. The aggregate particles shall be uniform in quality
course material used for pavement structures. It is well- and free from clay lumps, and wood.
graded with moderate permeability.
Aggregates for surfacing, base, subbase and bridge end fill
(b) Intermediate-Graded Base (IGB): IGB is shall be tested in accordance with the tests listed in
intermediate in gradation and permeability between Table 202-A.
well-graded aggregate and open-graded aggregate. 202.04.02 Primary Quality Tests – All aggregates for
(c) Open-Graded Base (OGB): OGB contains a small surfacing, base, subbase, and bridge end fill shall meet the
percentage of fine-grained material and is highly requirements of Table 202-B.
permeable, gap-graded aggregate.
Where the Ministry has pre-existing test results, the
202.02.03 Subbase Aggregates – A granular material Ministry will make this information available to the
placed between the sub-grade and the base course Contractor and the Contractor will be able to rely on the
aggregates, providing strength and drainage to the pavement factual data and not have to perform the corresponding
structure. primary quality tests on materials extracted from the
investigated portions of the pit or quarry.
(a) Select Granular Sub-base (SGSB): SGSB is the
standard aggregate, crushed or screened, placed In circumstances where historic performance of material
directly above subgrade, with moderate permeability from a source has proven satisfactory, the Ministry may, by
and a wide gradation. Special Provision, waive any or all of the testing required in
SS 202.04.
(b) Intermediate Graded Sub-base (IGSB): IGSB is a
higher permeability, crushed sub-base aggregate. 202.04.03 Secondary Quality Tests – All aggregates for
surfacing, base, subbase, and bridge end fill failing any
(c) Open Graded Subbase (OGSB): OGSB is a highly primary quality test indicated in SS 202.04.02 shall further
permeable, crushed subbase aggregate. be tested as follows to determine acceptability or, at the
202.02.04 Bridge End Fill (BEF) – BEF is quality granular Contractor’s option and at the Contractor’s expense, a new
fill primarily used behind and below a bridge abutment to source shall be found.
provide good drainage, a smooth transition from the bridge (a) If the Micro Deval test results show that the material
approaches to the bridge structure, and a suitable material fails, then the soundness shall be reassessed by use of
through which to drive piles.

BC MoTI SS 2020 202 (1 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 90 of 470
SECTION 202 GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE AND SUB-BASES

Magnesium Sulphate (ASTM C88). The material will Contractor, by entering the pit or quarry, will be deemed to
be considered acceptable if the loss after 5 cycles is less have accepted all obligations, risks and costs for the
than: production of aggregate meeting the requirements of
SS 202.03, SS 202.04, and SS 202.05 . The Ministry gives
(i) 20% for coarse aggregate, and(the material
no warranty that its pit or quarry will meet the quality and
retained on or above the 4.75 mm sieve).
quantity requirements.
(ii) 25% for fine aggregate (the material passing the
Where a pit or quarry is designated as a mandatory source,
4.75 mm sieve)
the Ministry waives the aggregate quality requirements of
(b) If the aggregate fails any of the Sand Equivalent, SS 202.04.02 except for the Fractured Faces requirement
Micro-Deval or Magnesium Sulphate tests, then the for aggregates required by the Ministry to be produced from
Contractor shall perform the Ministry’s petrographic that source.
test (Appendix 202-B) to determine the cause of failure.
Table 202-A: Aggregate Quality Tests
The Ministry Representative may review the test results
and determine whether the material is acceptable or not.
Title of Test
ASTM
202.05 Aggregate Gradation – Gradation shall be Standard Test Method for…
determined in accordance with ASTM C117 (Wash Test).
Soundness of Aggregate by Use of
202.05.01 Gradation Curve Slope – Aggregate shall have C88
Magnesium Sulphate.
a gradation that defines a curve (% passing versus log sieve
size) with a slope between adjacent sieves, equal or Materials Finer than 75-μm (No. 200)
intermediate to the corresponding slopes of the boundary C117 Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by
curves defined by the specification. Gradations shall fall Washing
within the limits, for the specified classification, shown in
Table 202-C. Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
C136
202.05.02 Rut Resistance – Any aggregate supplied must, Aggregates
in addition to meeting the gradation requirements specified
above, not rut when proof rolled with a truck having a Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and
D2419
9 tonne single axle dual tire or 17 tonne tandem axle group Fine Aggregate
with dual tires with a tire pressure of 600 kPa. Any Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and
aggregate which does rut shall be removed and replaced, or D4318
Plasticity Index of Soils
blended with suitable aggregates, to meet both the gradation
requirement and the rut resistance requirement. Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or
D4791 Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse
USE OF MINISTRY-PROVIDED PITS OR
Aggregate
QUARRIES
202.06 General – Ministry-provided pits and quarries are Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to
those identified in the Special Provisions which the Ministry D6928 Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-
is offering to the Contractor as potential aggregate sources. Deval Apparatus

They may include pits and quarries:

MoTI Title of Test
(a) owned by the Ministry
(b) leased by the Ministry, or
Appendix
(c) established as Map Reserve on Crown Land. Fracture Count on Coarse Aggregate
202-A
Use of such pits and quarries will be at the Contractor’s
option unless the Special Provisions clearly state that the Appendix
source must be used for specific purposes. Petrographic Analysis Test
202-B
When a Ministry pit or quarry is provided for the
Contractor’s optional use under the Contract, the

BC MoTI SS 2020 202 (2 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 91 of 470
SECTION 202 GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE AND SUB-BASES

Table 202-B: Aggregate Properties

Test Result
Surfacing Bridge
TEST Base Course Subbase Aggregates
Aggregates End Fill
HFSA 25mm 50mm 75mm SGSB IGSB OGSB BEF
Sand
≥ 20 ≥ 40 ≥ 40 ≥ 40 ≥ 20 ≥ 20 ≥ 20 ≥ 20
Equivalent
Micro-Deval
≤ 25% ≤ 25% ≤ 25% ≤ 17% ≤ 30% ≤ 25% ≤ 25% ≤ 30%
loss factor
Fractured
Faces ≥ 501 ≥ 501 ≥ 501 ≥ 501 n/a ≥ 501 ≥ 501 n/a
Method “A” 1
Flat and
Elongated
Particles n/a ≤ 10 ≤ 10 ≤ 10 n/a n/a n/a n/a
using 4:1 ratio
(%)
Plasticity ≤6 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
1
Values are for total sample.

202.07 Source of Supply – The Contract documents may future use. The Contractor shall follow the Ministry pit
identify one or more pits or quarries, for use as aggregate development plan, where provided. Stockpile areas in
sources at the Contractor’s discretion. Ministry-provided sources shall be per the pit development
plan. If the Ministry pit development plan conflicts with the
The Ministry will provide those gravel pits or quarries and
Health, Safety, and Reclamation Code for Mines in British
the right-of-way to those pits or quarries and will pay the
Columbia, then the code shall prevail.
cost of royalties. The cost of constructing and maintaining
access roads shall be considered as part of the cost of 202.09 Use of All Materials – Any Ministry provided pit or
producing the construction aggregates and shall be payable quarry, once entered and developed, shall be used to its full
by the Contractor. The Ministry will exercise its best potential. Normally, the Contractor shall produce select
judgement in the selection of the pit or quarry sites; granular subbase by selection or screening, provided that
however, the failure of the pit or quarry to yield materials of oversize reject aggregate is removed and properly placed in
uniform quality shall not constitute grounds for a claim by a stockpile for later crushing and use. However, if excessive
the Contractor against the Ministry. (5% or greater) oversize occurs, the Ministry Representative
may order that pit run aggregate be crushed to produce
The Contractor shall be satisfied as to the gradation and
75 mm crushed granular base for use in place of select
other characteristics of the raw material in the Ministry
granular subbase.
provided pit or quarry and as to the nature and amount of
work required to produce materials which will meet all For the production of crushed surfacing and base
gradation requirements, and the Contractor shall, at the aggregates, as well as IGSB and OGSB, the Contractor shall
Contractor's expense, remove any objectionable materials provide crushing equipment such that all aggregate which
from the aggregate. will pass through 375 mm x 450 mm slotted openings shall
be used for the production of crushed aggregate; rocks
202.08 Development of Pit or Quarry – Before any
which will not pass through these openings shall be
material for aggregate is excavated from the pit or quarry,
stockpiled as shown on the pit development plan or disposed
the approved development area shall be cleared and
of to the satisfaction of the Ministry Representative.
grubbed, and all debris disposed of as ordered by the
Crushing and screening equipment shall be provided with
Ministry Representative. If topsoil or undesirable
adequate facilities and capacity to bleed off reject aggregate
overburden exists, these materials shall be stripped and
in usable condition, or otherwise remove any excess of fine
placed in separate stockpiles as shown on the Ministry pit
aggregate, dust or objectionable aggregate coatings that
development plan or as directed by the Ministry
may be present in or on the aggregate, so as to make it
Representative.
generally acceptable for use. No portion of the products of
The Contractor shall not operate the pit or quarry in a crushers or screening plants that can be used shall be
manner which will contaminate remaining granular material wasted, but shall be stockpiled or used as directed by the
nor leave the pit or quarry in a condition which will limit its Ministry Representative.

BC MoTI SS 2020 202 (3 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 92 of 470
 BC MoTI
Percent Passing (%) Sieve Size
Surfacing Bridge
Sieve
SECTION 202

Base Course Aggregates Sub-Base Aggregates

Aggregate End Fill
Size
(mm) WGB IGB OGB
HFSA SGSB IGSB OGSB BEF
25mm 50mm 75mm 25mm 50mm 75mm 25mm 50mm 75mm

75 — — — 100 — — 100 — — 100 100 100 100 100

Table 202-C: Aggregate Gradation

50 — — 100 — — 100 55 - 100 — 100 70 - 100 — 55 - 100 70 - 100 30 - 100

37.5 — — 80 - 100 60 - 100 — 60 - 100 40 - 80 — 75 - 100 50 - 85 — 40 - 80 50 - 85 —

25 100 100 — — 100 40 - 75 — 100 — — — — — —

19 85 - 100 80 - 100 50 - 100 35 - 80 65 - 100 — 17 - 40 75 - 100 35 - 65 15 - 55 15 - 100 17 - 40 15 - 55 20 - 100

12.5 — — — — — 15 - 40 — — — — — — — —

SS 2020
9.5 60 - 85 50 - 85 35 - 75 25 - 60 30 - 70 — — 30 - 65 5 - 35 — 0 - 100 — — —

6.3 — — — — — — — — — 0 - 20 — — 0 - 20 —

4.75 40 - 70 35 - 70 25 - 55 20 - 40 15 - 40 — — 5 - 30 0 - 15 — — — — 10 - 60

2.36 — 25 - 50 20 - 40 15 - 30 10 - 30 10 - 25 10 - 25 0 - 10 0 - 10 0 - 10 — 10 - 25 0 - 10 —

1.18 20 - 40 15 - 35 15 - 30 10 - 20 — — — — — — — — — 6 - 32

0.600 — — — — — — — — — — 0 - 100 — — —

0.300 10-25 5-20 5-15 3-10 5-15 5-15 4-15 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-15 4-15 0-8 4-15

0.075 7-12 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5
GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE AND SUB-BASES

Vol. 1 Page 93 of 470

202 (4 of 13)
SECTION 202 GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE AND SUB-BASES

202.10 Modification of Materials – The rejection or in accordance with local and Provincial regulatory agency
addition of any particular size material necessary to produce requirements.
aggregate conforming to specification requirements shall be
202.16 Contractor to Pay All Costs – The Contractor shall
the responsibility of the Contractor, and no additional
bear and pay all costs including, applicable royalties,
compensation will be paid therefore.
construction and maintenance of access roads to borrow
202.11 Change of Ministry Provided Pit or Quarry – No sites, mobilization/demobilization of weigh scales, and any
payment will be made to the Contractor for moving the plant move of the equipment that may be ordered or required
from one Ministry provided pit or quarry to another because a pit or quarry of the Contractor’s choosing proves
Ministry provided pit or quarry. unsuitable for production of the contracted quantity of
granular aggregates meeting the requirements of SS 202.
However, if the Ministry Representative requires a move to
a new Ministry provided pit or quarry, the Contractor will
be given notice in writing and upon completion of the move,
PRODUCTION OF CRUSHED AGGREGATE
the Contractor will be paid a lump sum of $7,500 for moving
the existing crushing operation and any additional 202.17 Equipment and Plant – The Contractor shall
equipment that may be required for material processing at provide and maintain in good operating condition, all plant
the new pit. The payment will be deemed to be full and equipment necessary to comply with the requirements
compensation for all costs and expenses of the move and of this specification. Such plant and equipment shall be of
set-up of the crusher. If the Contractor moves the crushing a type and capacity to ensure proper construction and
plant without first securing a written order to do so from the maintenance of access roads, development of the pit or
Ministry Representative it will be considered sufficient quarry, maximum use of the pit or quarry, production of
proof that the move was unnecessary, and no allowance or granular aggregates to the standard of uniformity required,
compensation will be made to cover such a move. and adherence to the construction schedule.
202.12 Pit Cleanup – When the Contractor discontinues Adequate sampling facilities shall be installed by the
operations in any pit or quarry, the Contractor shall trim the Contractor at the discharge end of the production conveyor.
face of pit excavations, waste piles and stockpiles to a 1.5H
to 1V slope, or such other slope as the Ministry The Contractor shall ensure that the plant and equipment
Representative may direct, open up such drains or ditches meet the requirements of SS 145.26.
as may be required to prevent water standing therein, and 202.18 Working of Pit – A pit shall be worked in such a
leave the site in a neat condition, all to the satisfaction of the manner as to ensure that granular material excavated and fed
Ministry Representative. The sloping of pit excavations to the crushers, screening plants or loaders shall be as
shall be with in-place materials and shall not be uniform as possible. This may require the use of equipment
contaminated with topsoil, overburden or any reject capable of deep excavating through horizontal gravel layers
aggregates. The trimming, sloping, ditching and draining of or carrying out selective digging or cross blending over a
the pit or quarry, as well as maintenance of the access roads, large area of the pit. Before commencing production, the
shall be considered part of the cost of producing the granular Contractor’s quality control plan shall describe the proposed
aggregate and no additional payment will be allowed. method of production for the Ministry Representative and
If a pit has been fully depleted and is to be abandoned, the obtain the Ministry Representative's general acceptance.
Contractor may be requested to reshape the pit faces to a 202.19 Crushing Operations – The Contractor shall adjust
slope not steeper than 2H to 1V using the stockpiled the crushers and/or screening plants and provide such
overburden if necessary, and cover same with any topsoil screens as may be necessary to produce and maintain
previously removed and stockpiled, all as directed by the acceptable gradations of granular aggregates.
Ministry Representative. In such cases, the replacing of
stockpiled overburden and topsoil will be paid for in 202.20 Crusher Gradation Control
accordance with SS 202.32. 202.20.01 Design Aggregate Gradation - For each
202.13 Work in Ministry Pits or Quarries – All work in a aggregate gradation classification specified for production,
Ministry pit or quarry shall be in accordance with field and/or laboratory tests shall be performed by the
SS 145.26. Contractor to select a single gradation curve within the
“banana” specification (Table 202-C), the “Design
Aggregate Gradation” (DAG), which will be the target for
CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED AGGREGATES crusher control. The Contractor shall declare the DAG, in
writing to the Quality Manager and the Ministry
202.14 Preliminary and General – Aggregates shall meet Representative, within production of the first 10% of the
the requirements of SS 202.02 to SS 202.05 inclusive.. Approximate Quantity of a given aggregate classification.
202.15 Development and Clean Up of Private Pits or As part of the Ministry’s quality assurance program and for
Quarries – Pit or quarry development and cleanup shall be payment purposes, the Ministry may sample the stockpile to

BC MoTI SS 2020 202 (5 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 94 of 470
SECTION 202 GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE AND SUB-BASES

assess aggregate gradation compliance to contractual No field adjustment will be acceptable if it results in a
requirements. change from the current Design Aggregate Gradation to fall
outside the limits defined in Table 202-C. The variation
202.20.02 Variation Limits - The running average of four
limits specified in SS 202.20.02 will apply to the adjusted
(4) consecutive tests, on each applicable individual sieve
DAG.
size specified in Table 202-C, must be maintained at all
times within the limits specified in that Table. Also, each The Contractor shall have the moisture/density relationship
individual test must be within the specifications of established per ASTM D698 for Standard Proctor
Table 202-C. Maximum Dry Density for each original DAG, and one
after each field adjustment thereto.
The maximum permissible variation from the DAG curve,
on each applicable individual sieve size specified in 202.20.04 Declaration of a New Design Aggregate
Table 202-C of the mean of any four (4) consecutive tests Gradation (DAG) - Should there be a substantial change in
shall also be within the limits specified in Table 202-D. the character of aggregate exposed in the pit face as the
work proceeds, the Ministry Representative may authorize
202.20.03 Field Adjustment of Design Aggregate a change in the declared Design Aggregate Gradation,
Gradation - The Contractor may make a maximum of two which would then also be eligible for field adjustment in
(2) field adjustments to the Design Aggregate Gradation, to accordance with SS 202.20.
accommodate minor changes in pit characteristics or to
enhance production efficiency. A maximum of one change to the declared DAG will be
permitted.
A field adjustment to the Design Aggregate Gradation is
defined as a change in declared target gradation of the 202.21 Stockpiling
various aggregate sizes within the specified limits shown in 202.21.01 Unless it is specified in the Special Provisions or
Table 202-C which does not require a supplementary formal ordered otherwise in writing by the Ministry
review. The maximum adjustment for individual sieve sizes Representative, all crushed aggregates shall be stockpiled
for each adjustment are as permitted in the Table 202-E. prior to use on the Highway.
A proposed Design Aggregate Gradation field adjustment 202.21.02 Stockpile sites shall be cleared of all vegetation,
shall be submitted in writing with supporting documentation trees, brush, rocks or other debris and a uniform gravel
(showing original DAG, current stockpile average surface prepared before the stockpile material is deposited
gradation, and proposed field adjustment and the new DAG) on the stockpile site.
to the Ministry Representative. Upon receipt of the
proposed field adjustments, the Ministry Representative 202.21.03 Stockpiles shall be constructed on the designated
will assess the adjustment for conformance with the contract site and when completed shall be neat and regular in shape,
requirements and notify the Contractor whether or not it is occupying as small an area as is practicable. Spilling of
acceptable in a timely fashion. material over the edges of the piles will not be permitted.
Table 202-D: Aggregate Gradation Variation Limits 202.21.04 The Contractor shall ensure that stockpiles shall
be built up in layers not to exceed 1 m in thickness.
Variation Limits
Sieve Size (mm) 202.21.05 The Contractor shall ensure that plank or
(% Passing)
4.75and larger 5 protected runways shall be provided for operating trucks on
stockpiles when the Ministry Representative deems them
1.18 to 2.36  3.5
necessary to prevent dirt being tracked onto the crushed
0.300 and 0.600 2 aggregate.
0.075 1
202.21.06 The Ministry Representative may, on receipt of a
written request from the Contractor, permit the Contractor
Table 202-E: Field Adjustment of Design Aggregate to build the final stockpile by bulldozing the aggregate from
Gradation a feed pile at the end of a production belt provided that the
following are maintained:
Sieve Size Maximum Field Adjustment
(mm) (% Passing) (a) The bulldozer(s) to be used shall be equipped with
19 and larger  3.0 U-shaped pushing blades.
9.5  2.5 (b) The aggregate does not become contaminated with
2.36 and 4.75  2.0 oversize material, mud or other objectionable material
0.600 and 1.18  1.5 picked up from the pit floor or general working areas.
0.150 and 0.300  1.5 (c) The crushed granular aggregate is distributed evenly
0.075  1.0 over the final stockpile area in lifts not greater than
150 mm in depth.

BC MoTI SS 2020 202 (6 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 95 of 470
SECTION 202 GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE AND SUB-BASES

(d) The cone of the feeder pile at the end of the production written permission for the substitution of new or
belt shall not, without express permission, be allowed alternative compaction equipment if the Ministry
to build up to a height greater than 2 m. Representative is satisfied that such equipment will
provide equal or superior compaction performance.
(e) No appreciable segregation or degradation shall occur
in the main stockpile as a result of using this method. (c) Proof Rolling - The Ministry Representative may
require a proof rolling, in accordance with SS 202.29,
201.21.07 Radial stackers may be utilized only with the
at any time to assess the performance of the grade at the
approval of the Ministry Representative and under
Target Density.
Contractor-developed written work and quality
management procedures governing the stockpiling 202.23 Bridge End Fill – Construction of the bridge end fill
operation that ensures that: shall not commence until the Ministry Representative has
assessed the pertinent foundation conditions that may affect
(a) the stockpile is large enough to accommodate all
the future stability of both the bridge and embankments and
required material, or that separate stockpiles are
has authorized continuation of construction. Unless the
developed;
procedure for construction is stated in the Special
(b) segregation does not occur; and Provisions, the Contractor's proposed method must be
submitted to the Ministry Representative for approval
(c) lift thicknesses, drop heights, and wind-driven fines
before commencing work.
migration are minimized.
Bridge end fill shall be constructed to the specified
thickness and dimensions as shown on the Drawings or as
CONSTRUCTION METHOD described in the Special Provisions, unless otherwise
directed by the Ministry Representative. The bridge end fill
202.22 Target Density for Compaction – For each shall be constructed to the subgrade elevation.
material produced and placed under SS 202, the Contractor
shall determine a Target Density in accordance with the The material shall consist of mineral soil with properties and
following. gradation in accordance with SS 202.04 and SS 202.05.
(a) Laboratory Density – Where the material gradation is The bridge end fill shall be constructed in successive
within the applicable range, the Target Density shall be horizontal layers not exceeding 150 mm in loose thickness,
the Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density obtained compacted to meet or exceed the applicable Target Density
under the current ASTM D698, with oversize determined in accordance with SS 201.22.
correction in accordance with ASTM D4718; or
202.24 Thickness of Granular Courses – Crushed
(b) Field Density – Where the material falls outside the surfacing course, crushed base courses and subbase courses
applicable range of ASTM D698 and ASTM D4718, shall be constructed to the specified thickness and
the Target Density shall be 98% of the maximum dry dimensions as shown on the Drawings or as described in the
density achieved through field compaction at varying Special Provisions, unless otherwise directed by the
moisture content and varying number of compaction Ministry Representative.
passes. The methodology employed in determining the
Normally, on new construction, crushed bases shall be
field density shall be developed by the Contractor and
constructed 300 mm thick (in individual lifts with
its Quality Manager, and be subject to the approval of compacted thickness of 150 mm) unless otherwise approved
the Ministry Representative by the Ministry Representative. Additional base or subbase
If the Contractor’s methodology is not approved by the granular materials will be of such thickness as may be
Ministry Representative, then the Contractor may considered necessary to provide supporting strength for the
propose an alternative method or the Ministry flexible pavement structure.
Representative may order that each lift or course of
202.25 Construction of Subbase
aggregate shall be continuously and thoroughly rolled
until successive passes of a vibratory roller results in an 202.25.01 Aggregates for subbase shall be delivered to the
increase in density of less than 10 kg/m3. roadbed as uniform mixtures and shall be spread in layers
without segregation, preferably through an approved
The vibrating roller shall have a minimum steel drum
aggregate spreader. Granular aggregate shall not be end-
diameter of 1.15 m, a minimum drum width of 1.5 m,
dumped from trucks in piles on the grade. The Ministry
and shall be capable of being loaded so as to have a Representative may permit spreading from the tailgate of
gross mass of 20 kg per lineal centimeter of drum trucks or from centre dump units, provided the Ministry
width. Representative is satisfied that the work will be well
However, if the Contractor elects to use alternate controlled and segregation will not occur.
compaction equipment, then upon written request by
the Contractor, the Ministry Representative may give

BC MoTI SS 2020 202 (7 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 96 of 470
SECTION 202 GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE AND SUB-BASES

When the subgrade below granular aggregate subbases not be less than the nominal thickness shown on the
consists of material susceptible to damage from wheeled Drawings or ordered by the Ministry Representative. If the
equipment, and written permission is granted by the Contractor is unable to provide adequate manually operated
Ministry Representative, a portion of the granular aggregate equipment or workers of sufficient skill to lay the crushed
subbase or base may be dumped in piles upon the subgrade base course aggregate within the tolerances specified, the
and spread ahead in sufficient quantity to stabilize the Ministry Representative may require that the Contractor lay
subgrade. Segregation of aggregates shall be avoided and the aggregate through an approved electronically controlled
the material as spread shall be free from pockets of large or spreading machine.
fine material. Segregated materials shall be remixed until
202.26.02 Compaction – Immediately following spreading,
uniform. Static compaction shall be used in areas of
the crushed base course aggregate shall be compacted to
sensitive soil subgrades.
meet or exceed the applicable Target Density.
Where the required thickness is 150 mm or less, the granular
The method of compaction to be employed may be selected
base or subbase may be spread and compacted in one layer.
by the Contractor, but shall be subject to approval by the
Where the required thickness is more than 150 mm, the
Quality Manager and the Ministry Representative
aggregate shall be spread and compacted in two or more
layers of approximately equal thickness; the maximum 202.26.03 Watering – Subject to the agreement of the
compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed Ministry Representative, the Contractor may water the base
150 mm. Each layer shall be spread and compacted in a course aggregates as required to aid in attaining the
similar manner. At locations where the granular base or specified density.
subbase is to be placed over areas susceptible to damage by
202.26.04 Tolerance of Completed Surface – The
the spreading equipment, the granular subbase or base may
completed surface of the granular base course shall conform
be spread by any means acceptable to the Quality Manager
to the required line, grade and cross section as shown on the
and the Ministry Representative to obtain the specified
results. Drawings to an accuracy of  10 mm, neither uniformly
high nor low.
202.25.02 Immediately following spreading, the material
shall be compacted to meet or exceed the applicable Target 202.27 Equipment for Watering – Water shall be applied
Density. from a pressure type distributor, equipped with spray bar
mounting nozzles similar to those used on asphalt
202.25.03 The Contractor may water the subbase aggregates distributors and capable of applying the water accurately
as required to aid in attaining the specified density, but shall and uniformly. Splash plate type distributors or those
not ensure that overwatering does not occur.. equipped with spray bars that eject fine streams of water will
202.25.04 The completed surface of the subbase course not be permitted. The distributor must be provided with a
shall conform to the required line, grade and cross section satisfactory means for accurately measuring the quantity of
water sprayed. If the Ministry Representative so requires,
as shown on the Drawings to an accuracy of  15 mm,
measuring equipment shall be calibrated under the Ministry
neither uniformly high nor low.
Representative's inspection. All necessary arrangements
202.26 Construction of Crushed Base Course and permits for obtaining water shall be performed by the
Contractor and at the Contractor's expense.
202.26.01 Crushed base course aggregate shall be placed on
a properly prepared subbase surface to such depth or at such 202.28 Weather and Job Conditions
rates as may be specified. If the Ministry Representative is
202.28.01 No construction shall be undertaken during snow,
of the opinion that the finished surface of the subbase does
heavy rain, freezing or other unsuitable conditions.
not meet the requirements of SS 202.25.04 but has been
Aggregate shall not be placed upon a frozen, wet, muddy,
thoroughly and densely compacted and should not be
rutted or undulating or rutted subgrade, subbase, base or
disturbed, the Ministry Representative may order that the
surface unless otherwise directed by the Ministry
surface of the subbase be corrected to the true cross section,
Representative.
line and grade, and within the tolerances specified by use of
a levelling course of crushed 25 mm base course aggregate. 202.28.02 When the subgrade is soft due to excessive
In such event, the crushed 25 mm base course aggregate so moisture, the placing of granular sub-base shall be stopped
used will be paid for only at the rates bid for subbase, until rutting or displacement of the initial subbase layers can
provided the same Contractor is responsible for the be prevented by reduced loading or by other means
construction of both the crushed base, and subbase. approved by the Ministry Representative.
The crushed base course shall be constructed in such a 202.29 Proof Rolling and Stabilizing Crushed Base
manner that the aggregate is neither segregated, Course – Before acceptance, each compacted course of
contaminated nor degraded. End dumping will not be base course aggregate shall receive one complete coverage
permitted. The thickness of the crushed base course shall by the tires of a truck having a 9 tonne single axle dual tire
be substantially uniform and the minimum thickness shall or 17 tonne tandem axle group with dual tires with a tire

BC MoTI SS 2020 202 (8 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 97 of 470
SECTION 202 GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE AND SUB-BASES

pressure of 600 kPa. The truck shall be loaded to its gross (b) Rejected at the crusher in order that the product meets
vehicle weight and driven at a speed of 1 to 2 m/s. the requirements of SS 202.05,
There shall be no deflection, reaction (noticeable movement shall be stockpiled separately according to size in
in a localized area directly under the vehicle tire) or accordance with SS 202. Stockpiles of reject aggregate
pumping of the ground surface (vertical displacement of top shall not be contaminated by organic or other deleterious
surface not directly under vehicle tires) observed under the materials.
moving vehicle’s tires. This testing shall be performed
202.33.02 No payment will be made for any reject
under the observation of the Ministry Representative.
aggregate.
Any areas where rutting or displacement occurs shall be
202.34 Blending Materials for Stabilizing Aggregates on
either excavated or replaced and proof rolled or stabilized
the Highway – Blending materials, supplied, loaded,
by the addition of suitable blending material incorporated
hauled, placed and mixed into the granular aggregate on the
uniformly into the base to the satisfaction of the Ministry
highway to correct deficiencies in aggregate stability, will
Representative.
be paid for at the same rate as the granular aggregate which
The supply, load, haul, placing, proof rolling, and mixing of has to be stabilized. The final blended gradation must still
such stabilizing aggregates as necessary to correct meet the design aggregate gradation.
deficiencies in aggregate stability shall be incidental to the
Normally, no additional payment will be made to cover the
Work for Base aggregates. Blending may be performed at
costs of work required to correct stability failure in the
the pit or quarry or on the highway in a manner acceptable
aggregate unless the Ministry Representative is satisfied
to the Ministry Representative.
that such instability is inherent in the type of aggregate
202.30 Benkelman Beam Testing – At any time during the available to the Contractor from a mandatory use Ministry-
course of the work, when considered necessary by the provided pit or quarry, and that the lack of stability has not
Ministry Representative, Benkelman Beam testing may be arisen because of unsatisfactory production methods or
undertaken at the Ministry’s expense. improper construction practices. In these circumstances, the
Ministry Representative will issue an Order for Extra Work
to the Contractor to cover the additional cost of mixing
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT blending material into the granular aggregate to correct the
stability deficiency.
202.31 Water Applied to the Highway – Water for
compaction or dust control shall be incidental to the bid 202.35 Aggregate Supplied in Stockpile Only –
price for the granular material. Aggregate, supplied in stockpile only, will be paid for at the
Unit Price bid per CUBIC METRE, measured in stockpile
202.32 Development and Cleanup of Ministry-Provided and computed by surface to surface or, at the Ministry
Pits and Quarries – Authorized clearing and grubbing of Representative’s option, average end areas.
Ministry provided pits and quarries and construction of the
access road is the responsibility of the Contractor. Removal Payment at the unit price bid price shall be accepted as full
and stockpiling of overburden/topsoil during development compensation for everything furnished and done to supply
of the proposed work areas, and spreading overburden on a (where applicable), produce and stockpile the crushed
depleted pit or quarry shall be the responsibility of the aggregate.
Contractor and the work shall be completed to the
202.36 Aggregates Supplied in Place
satisfaction of the Ministry Representative.
202.36.01 Unit Price Payment – Crushed or screened
Unless explicitly stated otherwise in the Special Provisions,
aggregates (surfacing, base, subbase and bridge end fill)
no separate payment will be made for clearing, grubbing,
supplied and constructed in place will be paid on a neat line
disposal or relocation of stockpiles, debris or contaminated
basis for at the applicable Unit Price bid per CUBIC
materials, or for any other costs of site preparation, pit
METRE. Payment shall be full compensation for
development, remediation, or access, or for any delay or
everything furnished and done, including without limitation
other cost arising from the use of Ministry-provided pits or
costs for acquisition, development, and payment of royalties
quarries by the Contractor, and all costs thereof shall be
for private pits or quarries, purchase price of aggregate,
covered in the prices for the Items under which payment is
access road maintenance, screening, crushing, stockpiling,
provided for the applicable materials.
loading, hauling, spreading, compaction and moisture
202.33 Stockpile Reject Aggregate adjustment (watering or drying) in place as specified.
202.33.01 Aggregate from screening or crushing operations 202.36.02 Advance Payment: Crushed or Screened
in a Ministry-provided pit or quarry, whether: Aggregates Supplied in Place – An advanced payment of
the greater of 70% of the demonstrated production costs or
(a) Oversize under SS 202.09, or
30% of the extended amount for the Item will be made for
crushed or screened aggregates (surfacing, base or subbase)

BC MoTI SS 2020 202 (9 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 98 of 470
SECTION 202 GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE AND SUB-BASES

in stockpile. No advance payment will be made for pit run requirements, with a small additional contingency
aggregates. Recovery of the advance payment will be made amount determined by the Contractor and the Quality
on each progress estimate as the respective aggregate is Manager and approved by the Ministry Representative.
subsequently withdrawn from the stockpile, with an
(b) Ministry-sourced materials shall not be used in any way
additional adjustment on the final progress estimate for any
to improve the private lands, including without
material remaining in stockpile such that the entire advance
limitation for such purposes as access development,
payment is recovered.
maintenance, or stockpile site preparation, unless
202.36.03 Surplus Aggregate – Where actual aggregate approved in advance by the Ministry Representative
needs on the Contract fall below the Approximate Quantity under any conditions the Ministry Representative may
indicated on Schedule 7, the Ministry will compensate the require.
Contractor at the rates indicated in Error! Reference
(c) Any surplus raw or processed material remaining on the
source not found. for a portion of surplus aggregates
private lands at the end of construction shall:
produced by the Contractor which meet all the applicable
quality and gradation specifications of the contract. (i) be returned by the Contractor to the Ministry
source and stockpiled at a location determined by
For each classification of aggregate, the maximum quantity
the Ministry Representative, all at the Contractor’s
of surplus aggregate eligible for compensation shall be the
expense; or
Approximate Quantity of that aggregate on Schedule 7
minus the quantity of that aggregate paid on the final (ii) upon request by the Contractor and at the Ministry
progress estimate. Representative’s sole discretion, the Contractor
may be offered the options of:
There will be no compensation for surplus aggregate for pit
run aggregates or for any portion of the production on other (A) of leaving the materials on the private land and
aggregates which are beyond the Approximate Quantity. providing a written agreement with the owner
Where aggregates are purchased from a pre-existing of the property which shall state that the
commercial pit or quarry operation, there will be no Ministry will have free access to and exclusive
compensation for any aggregate beyond that actually used use of the remaining materials for a period of
in the Contract. twenty-four (24) months after the completion
of the Contract, after which time the Ministry
Surplus aggregates, originating from private land, in
relinquishes all claims to the material; or
stockpile on Ministry lands are the property of the Ministry
and no additional compensation will be paid. Surplus (B) purchasing the remaining material at a
aggregate stockpiles on private lands will be the property of negotiated amount to be back-charged to the
the Contractor and there will be no compensation for any Contractor.
aggregate beyond that actually used in the contract.
(d) Where the volume of material remaining is less than the
Table 202-F: Compensation for Surplus Aggregate additional contingency amount determined pursuant to
SS 202.30.04(a), the Ministry Representative will
Compensation for make the offers in SS 202.30.04(c)(ii). If agreement is
Surplus Aggregates not reached, SS 202.30.04(c)(i) will apply
Stockpile Location ($/m3)
202.37 Stockpile Volume Determination
Crushed Screened The Ministry will determine the volume of aggregate by
Ministry land $7.50 $3.75 surveying the stockpile(s) using string-line techniques,
determine volume using prismoidal volumes between
Private land $5.00 $2.50 surfaces, and deducting 10% for stockpile loss.
Alternatively, the Ministry Representative may elect to
survey using cross section techniques and/or determine
202.36.04 Ministry Materials Processed on Private volumes using end-area volumes. The base of the pile will
Lands – Where the Contractor elects to source raw be determined from a pre-stockpile survey or, where such a
materials from a Ministry pit or quarry, but process those survey is not available, from a surface determined by the
materials on private lands: Ministry Representative as being a reasonable interpolation
(a) The Contractor shall extract only as much raw material from the intersection of the pile sides with the adjacent
from the Ministry source as is necessary to produce the ground level. Where there are two or more stockpiles of
quantity of product required to be incorporated in the aggregate meeting the same gradation classification, the
final Project, inclusive of staging and maintenance compensation will be based on the cumulative quantity of
those stockpiles.

BC MoTI SS 2020 202 (10 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 99 of 470
SECTION 202 GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE AND SUB-BASES

APPENDIX 202-A
FRACTURE COUNT FOR COARSE AGGREGATE
(BCH 1-13)
Purpose: 2. Separate each sieve size into two groups, fractured
and unfractured. Each rock in the fractured group
This test determines the amount of fractured material in the
shall have at least one fractured face or shall be
coarse part of an aggregate sample.
naturally angular with sharp edges. (See Discussion
i) Method "A" is used for crushed granular surfacing and 1).
base aggregates.
3. For each sieve size, count the number of fractured
ii) Method "B" is used for paving aggregates. rocks and the total number of rocks (fractured and
unfractured).
Apparatus:
4. Calculate and record the % fracture for each sieve
1. Drying oven, preferably forced draft, capable of
size and report the total % fracture for the sample
maintaining a uniform temperature of 110 + 5 o C.
using Equation 202-A-1 and Equation 202-A-2.
2. A nest of sieves of the following sizes:
b) Method “B”
• Method "A": 37.5 mm, 25.0 mm, 19.0 mm, 1. Separate the coarse aggregate to be tested from the
12.5 mm, 9.5 mm, 4.75 mm fine aggregate by sieving it over the 4.75 mm
• Method "B": 19.0 mm, 13.2 mm, 9.5 mm screen.
3. Balance with sufficient capacity and accurate within 2. Separate the coarse aggregate for each sieve size
0.1 percent of the mass of sample. into two groups, fractured and unfractured. Each
rock in the fractured group shall have two or more
Test Sample: fractured faces produced by a crusher or shall be
The sample of aggregate to be tested shall be representative, naturally angular with sharp edges. Each rock in the
oven-dry, and reduced to an amount suitable for testing. The unfractured group shall be unfractured or fractured
mass of the sample shall conform to the following: only in one dimension.
3. Obtain the mass of the fractured group, also the
Maximum Nominal Size Minimum Dry Mass
mass of the total coarse aggregate (fractured +
(mm) (kg)
unfractured groups).
37.5 4.0
25.0 2.5 4. Calculate and report the total % fracture for the
12.5 1.5 sample using Equation 202-A-3.
9.5 1.0 Discussion:
1. Fractured face shall be defined as a fracture in any
Procedure:
plane whose area is 15% or more of the largest cross
a) Method "A" section area in a parallel plane.
1. Sieve the coarse aggregate to be tested on the 37.5 2. The required sample can be conveniently obtained
mm, 25.0 mm, 19.0 mm, 12.5 mm, 9.5 mm 4.75 mm from the separated fractions of the Dry or Wash
sieves. Sieve Test.
Equation 202-A-1: Percent Fracture for Each Sieve Size (e.g. 19 mm)
Number of Fractured Rocks (19 mm)
% Fracture (19 mm) = x 100%
Total No. of Rocks (19 mm)

Equation 202-A-2: Percent Fracture for the Total Sample (by Number of Rocks)
𝑁𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝐹𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑒𝑑 𝑅𝑜𝑐𝑘𝑠 (𝐴𝑙𝑙 𝑆𝑖𝑒𝑣𝑒 𝑆𝑖𝑧𝑒𝑠)
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 % 𝐹𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑒 = 𝑥 100%
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑁𝑜. 𝑜𝑓 𝑅𝑜𝑐𝑘𝑠 (𝐴𝑙𝑙 𝑆𝑖𝑧𝑒𝑠)

Equation 202-A-3: Percent Fracture for the Total Sample (by Mass)
𝑀𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑜𝑓 𝐹𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑒𝑑 𝑅𝑜𝑐𝑘
% 𝐹𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑒 = 𝑥 100%
𝑀𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑜𝑓 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑅𝑜𝑐𝑘𝑠

BC MoTI SS 2020 202 (11 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 100 of 470
SECTION 202 GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE AND SUB-BASES

APPENDIX 202-B
PETROGRAPHIC ANALYSIS TEST
Purpose: Sample Preparation
The purpose of the Petrographic Analysis Test is to identify A 1500 gram sample of representative aggregate passing
the various rock types and rock characteristics in the 19 mm and retained on 9.5 mm screen is required.
aggregate fraction of material retained on the 9.5 mm sieve
1. For pit run materials, a minimum of 18 kg, or one full
of a gravel deposit. The test is performed after a Micro
gravel bag of representative aggregate is required.
Deval soundness test or a magnesium sulphate soundness
test indicates that the granular materials are weak, non 2. This material is oven-dried at 110°C  5°C overnight, or
durable or suspect. The petrographic analysis test is to for 16 hours.
prove or determine the cause of the poor performance of the
aggregate and to determine the extent or contributing factors 3. After drying, the sample is quartered in the sample
of specific rock types or the extent of deleterious materials splitter.
or clay particles. This information will be used to determine 4. A one-quarter sample is sieved to obtain passing 19 mm
the possible use of the materials. aggregate. Additional quarters are sieved if the initial
Scope: quarter provides less than 1500 grams of the required
sizes.
The test shall be performed by a qualified professional with
experience in rock type identification, rock classification and 5. The passing 19 mm retained on 9.5 mm aggregate is
gravel/aggregate sources and use; and shall be presented in a mixed and 1500 grams separated by splitter.
signed report that details findings. Recognized procedures 6. Fractured materials are separated from non-fractured
for rock identification shall be used. The procedures involve materials and a fracture count test shall be performed
simple physical and chemical tests, such as the hardness using Method A (Appendix 202-A).
scratch test, hydrochloric acid reaction and visual surface
examination assisted by magnifying lens. The predominance 7. Following removal (by hand) of clay balls and very soft
of easily distinguishable types in petrographic samples will weak material, the non-fractured rocks are washed to
permit reasonably accurate testing. Important accessories are assist visual identification of mineral characteristics.
a sample kit, the rock and mineral descriptions and a good The soft fractured rocks shall be washed with great care
text. as their degradation may prevent correct identification.
The clay balls and lumps shall be weighed and the
Rock types are to be listed by percentage weight under the percent of sample noted.
broad categories of origin (sedimentary-metamorphic-
igneous) with condition descriptions (i.e. hardness, Rock Type Classification:
weathering and cementation). Note that the descriptions of Assignment of each particle to rock type and character is
quality regarding durability or soundness (good, fair, poor, required.
deleterious) are vital to the test results.
Identification of specific rock type may be preceded by
Additional information on general condition including general identification under the major rock categories of:
weathering, shape, porosity, coatings etc. shall also be igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic. Following simple
recorded. physical, chemical and visual tests, each particle is then
Apparatus: identified with a specific rock type and description.
Rock types are weighed to the nearest 0.1 gram. Weights
1. Balance – 20,000 gram capacity, accuracy  0.1 gram.
are recorded on the test sheet and the percentage of each is
2. Oven capable of maintaining 110oC. calculated from the total sample weight.
3. Sieves 19 mm (3/4 inch) and 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) and Comments on each rock type include descriptions of physical
shaker. and chemical qualities such as:
4. Sample splitter with pans. • Hardness: hard, medium, soft.
5. Hand-lens (10X magnification). • Weathering: non weathered, slightly or intensely
6. A ten percent solution of hydrochloric acid. weathered.

7. Aluminum pans. • Porosity

8. A stereoscopic microscope. • Cementation: firmly cemented to friable.

• Coatings

BC MoTI SS 2020 202 (12 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 101 of 470
SECTION 202 GRANULAR SURFACING, BASE AND SUB-BASES

Quality Characterization (good, fair, poor, deleterious) The report shall contain an executive summary of rock types
and conditions as shown in the example below.
Basis of Quality System:
“e.g. Igneous granodiorite 90% hard, non-weathered.
The following quality distinctions are relative estimates of a
volcanics 10% hard and fresh, with some volcanics (30%
rock's physical and chemical condition and of probable
of volcanics) slightly weathered and some volcanics (5%
engineering quality.
of volcanics) are vesicular, soft and intensely weathered.
• Good: Particles are hard, durable, free from fracture No clay lumps, some particles (less than 5% of sample)
potential, little or no capillary absorption. contained coatings of clay.”
• Fair: Particles are soft but sound and tough, medium Sample Petrographic Number:
hard, slightly to moderately weathered, have The Petrographic Number (PN) for the sample is calculated
small to moderate capillary absorption, are by multiplying the percentage of each of the four quality
relatively smooth and impermeable. classification by the following multipliers:
• Poor: Particles are soft to very soft, friable, potential • Good 1
slaking when wetted and dried, highly fractured
potential, capillary absorption moderate to high. • Fair 3
• Deleterious: Particles react chemically with alkali in • Poor 6
Portland Cement causing expansion in concrete,
• Deleterious 10
although they may be suitable in base course.
and then summing the results.
Report Submission Requirements:
The report shall describe the tests performed, present the test Sample
results, including descriptions of weathering, shape, porosity, Overall Sample Rating
Petrographic Number
coatings, angularity and provide a petrographic number.
100 to 125 Good
A description of suitability shall be stated by the individual
>125 to 140 Fair
performing the test.
>140 to 155 Poor
> 155 Deleterious

BC MoTI SS 2020 202 (13 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 102 of 470
 SECTION 204

ROCK CUTS

DESCRIPTION 204.02.11 Delay –A blast initiator with a specific delay time

period before detonation.
204.01 Scope – This Section describes the controlled
blasting techniques required to produce rock cut slopes at 204.02.12 Excavation Backslope or Smooth Wall – This
the locations shown on the Drawings or as authorized by the is the location of the free surface or shear plane in the rock
Ministry Representative. Rock shall be excavated to produced by blasting along the backline holes.
subgrade elevation as shown on the Drawings. The work
204.02.13 Excavation Limits – This is the boundary within
shall be conducted, whether by blasting or other methods,
which rock is removed.
in a manner that complies with SS 165, minimizes blast
damage to the excavation backslope, and minimizes the 204.02.14 Explosive Decoupling – The separation of an
requirement for stabilization. The responsibility for the explosive charge from the wall of the blast hole.
results of every blast lies with the Contractor. Nothing
204.02.15 Flyrock – The throw of fragmented material
within this specification shall be interpreted to mean the
during blasting.
Ministry accepts responsibility for the results of any blast.
204.02.16 Free Face – The rock face that provides relief for
204.02 Definitions
a blast.
204.02.01 Backline Holes – A line of holes detonated or
intermittently detonated along the specified excavation 204.02.17 Guide Holes – Those holes along the backline
backslope. that are not loaded with explosive and are not stemmed.
204.02.18 Hole Deviation – Borehole misalignment
204.02.02 Bench – A near-horizontal or shallow slope
distance measured in two directions, within and
surface at the top of a near-vertical rock face where blast
perpendicular to the excavation backslope. Within the plane
holes are collared.
of the excavation backslope, hole deviation is borehole
204.02.03 Bench Width – The horizontal distance on the misalignment as measured by the horizontal offset distance
bench between the excavation backslope and the crest of the between any point in the design hole location and the point
existing rock face. Generally, this dimension defines the at a corresponding depth in the actual hole. Perpendicular
width of the rock to be removed and is perpendicular to the to the plane of the excavation backslope, hole deviation is
highway alignment. the horizontal offset distance between the plane of the
design excavation backslope and the centreline of the
204.02.04 Blast Crater – A local depression in rock formed
borehole being measured.
by blasting.
204.02.19 Lift – The vertical distance between the top and
204.02.05 Buffer Holes – The line of production holes
bottom of an area to be blasted.
located closest to and parallel to the backline holes.
204.02.20 Overbreak in Rock – Overbreak in rock is any
204.02.06 Burden – The distance between the blast hole
rock outside of the specified excavation limits (except slide
and the nearest free face.
material described in SS 201.42) that is excavated,
204.02.07 Charge – A specific quantity of explosive such displaced or loose due to the inherent character of any
as a cartridge. formation encountered or due to any other cause.
204.02.08 Controlled Blasting – Controlled blasting is the 204.02.21 Overburden – This is Type D material (as
controlled use of explosives and accessories in carefully described in SS 201.11) overlying rock.
spaced and aligned production and backline drill holes to
204.02.22 Presplit (or Pre-Shear) Blasting – A blasting
produce the specified excavation backslope within the
method whereby backline holes are detonated before
specified excavation limits. The purpose of controlled
production holes are detonated.
blasting is to minimize damage to the rock backslope, to
help ensure long-term stability and to minimize flyrock. 204.02.23 Production Blasting – Blasting of production
holes detonated in a controlled delay sequence.
204.02.09 Controlled Delay Sequence – The delay
sequence required for controlled blasting. 204.02.24 Production Holes – All holes within the
specified excavation limits that are not backline holes.
204.02.10 Cushion Blasting – A blasting method whereby
Production holes are often more widely spaced than
the production holes are detonated before the backline
backline holes.
holes.
204.02.25 Rock Excavation – Rock excavation includes
drilling holes, loading holes with explosives, detonation by

BC MoTI SS 2020 204 (1 of 11)

Vol. 1 Page 103 of 470
SECTION 204 ROCK CUTS

controlled blasting, mucking to subgrade and ditch level, (c) Intermittently viewing the site during drilling for each
and removal of material to a designated area. Rock blast area.
excavation also includes secondary breakage of oversize
(d) Intermittently observing the loading of holes with
rock.
explosives and tying in to the delay system.
204.02.26 Rock – Rock is Type A material as defined in
(e) Observing the blasts and reviewing the excavated areas.
SS 201.11.01.
(f) Attending on site to view the excavation backslope
204.02.27 Scaling – The removal of all loose material using
after each lift and reviewing excavation backslope for
scaling bars, portable hydraulic jacks, other hand tools, wire
quality control purposes.
rope cables, compressed air blow pipes, blasting without the
need for drilled holes and other methods authorized by the (g) Viewing the site while reviewing proposed changes to
Ministry Representative. the blast design and preparing new designs.
204.02.28 Setback Distance – The setback distance is the (h) Attending on site at other times as are appropriate to
horizontal distance between the top of the excavation assist the Contractor in the setting up, assessment and
backslope and the toe of the overburden material. Setback adjustment of the various procedures to be employed
is created by removing overburden. for blasting.
204.02.29 Spacing – The distance between blast holes (i) Preparing a field report for each site visit, including
perpendicular to the burden. details of the progress of blasting operations, a
statement whether the blast design is being complied
204.02.30 Stemming – Material placed on top of the
with, any changes to the blast design, any
explosive to provide confinement of the explosive gases.
recommendations made to the Contractor and any
204.02.31 Subdrill – The distance drilled below subgrade problems encountered by the Contractor.
level.
204.04 Submittals
204.02.32 Trimming – The removal by drilling and
204.04.01 General – The Ministry may perform Quality
controlled blasting of potentially unstable rock remaining at
Audits. The receipt of submittals by the Ministry shall not
the exposed excavation backslope. Trimming may not
relieve responsibility from the Contractor for the accuracy
require backline holes.
and adequacy of the submittals. Submittals are for quality
204.03 Quality Control assurance and record keeping purposes. Inadequate or
incorrect submittals will be returned for revisions prior to
204.03.01 General – Quality control shall be conducted for
acceptance. The Contractor shall submit to the Ministry
all blasting operations.
Representative the following documentation for review.
204.03.02 Blasting Consultant – The Contractor shall
204.04.02 Qualifications and Experience of Contractor –
retain a blasting consultant specialist, acceptable to the
The Contractor shall provide a statement of the
Ministry Representative, to provide quality control. The
qualifications, experience and work function of all
consultant shall not be an employee of the Contractor,
personnel assigned to drilling and blasting duties. A
explosives manufacturer or explosives distributor.
statement of previous work experience on similar projects
204.03.03 Vibration Specialist – The Contractor shall shall also be provided. This statement shall include the
provide a blast vibration monitor if required. The blast project name, location, volume of rock, year constructed
vibration monitoring shall be under the direction of the and the owner/client contact name. The company, the
Vibration Specialist. driller and the blaster shall each have a minimum of 5
consecutive years demonstrated experience in drilling and
204.03.04 Quality Control Activities For Blasting
controlled blasting work on at least 3 projects involving
Operations – Quality control for blasting operations shall
rock cuts over 8 m height along transportation corridors.
be performed for test sections, full scale blasting operations
and trimming. A field report generated by the Consultant 204.04.03 Qualifications and Experience of Proposed
shall be provided to the Ministry Representative within one Blasting Consultant – The Contractor shall provide the
day of each site visit by the Consultant. Quality control for name of the consulting firm, and the name and
blasting includes, but is not limited to the following qualifications of the blasting consultant’s on-site
activities by the blasting consultant: representative who will be providing the quality control for
rock excavation. The blasting consultant shall have a
(a) Viewing the proposed blast area at least one (1) week minimum of 5 consecutive years demonstrated experience
before drilling operations commence. in preparing successful blast designs along transportation
(b) Preparing and submitting blast designs for production corridors for at least 3 projects. The following information
and backline holes. shall be included in the qualifications submitted:
(a) Project name, location and experience.

BC MoTI SS 2020 204 (2 of 11)

Vol. 1 Page 104 of 470
SECTION 204 ROCK CUTS

(b) Name and phone number of owner/client contact who 204.04.07 Blast Design – The Contractor shall provide and
can verify the experience of the blasting consultant’s follow a blast design, approved and signed by the blasting
site representative. consultant, not less than one week prior to commencing
drilling and blasting operations and a minimum of one day
204.04.04 Qualifications and Experience of Proposed
before the Contractor proposes to implement any changes to
Vibration Specialist – The Contractor shall provide the
the previously utilized drilling or blasting methods. The
name and qualifications of the vibration specialist who will
design may be prepared by the blaster, but shall be reviewed
be providing the quality control for rock excavation. The
by the Contractor and forwarded to the blasting consultant
vibration specialist shall have a minimum of 5 consecutive
for signing. The design shall contain full details of the
years demonstrated experience in the field of vibration
drilling and blasting patterns and controls that the
monitoring for at least 3 projects. The following
Contractor proposes to use for controlled blasting. The blast
information shall be included in the qualifications
design shall contain the following minimum information:
submitted:
(a) Date the design was prepared and proposed date of
(a) Project name, location and experience.
blast.
(b) Name and phone number of owner/client contact who
(b) Station limits of proposed blast.
can verify the experience of the vibration specialist.
(c) Plan and section views of proposed drill pattern
204.04.05 Proposed General Construction Plan – The
including free face, burden, blasthole spacing, blast
Contractor shall submit a general construction plan to the
hole diameters, blast hole angles, lift height, drill offset,
Ministry Representative showing proposed blasting
hole depth, and subdrill depth.
sequence numbers defining the order of blasts for the
contract. The plan shall also show the following (d) The location of production (including buffer) and
information for each blast: backline holes.
(a) Blast sequence number. (e) Loading diagram showing type and amount of
explosives, primers, initiators, and location and depth
(b) The location of the blast in relation to the remaining of stemming.
rock on the site.
(f) Initiation sequence of blast holes including delay times
(c) Approximate dimension of the rock to be removed. and delay system.
(d) Estimated volume of rock to be removed. (g) Manufacturer's data sheets for all explosives, primers,
delays, and initiators to be used.
(e) Location of the disposal site.
(h) Blasting consultant’s signature, printed name, and
204.04.06 Sequence of Operations – The Contractor shall
company name.
adopt a logical, systematic sequence of operations to ensure
blasting is conducted safely and effectively. The following (i) Blaster’s signature, printed name, company name, and
general sequence of blasting operations outlines minimum blaster’s certificate number.
requirements of the Contractor to maximize the stability of
the excavation backslope and does not limit or supersede 204.04.08 Pre-blast Survey – The Contractor shall conduct
any other requirements in this specification: a pre-blast survey a minimum of one day before blasting
operations commence. The pre-blast survey shall include a
(a) Retain a blasting consultant to perform quality control. complete description of the existing condition of any nearby
buildings, structures, wells and utilities that potentially may
(b) Submit blast designs for review and authorization by be damaged by blasting operations. The survey method
the Ministry. used shall be acceptable to the Contractor's insurance
(c) Accurately survey locations of proposed blast holes. company.

(d) Drill holes, load explosives, detonate blast and remove 204.04.09 As-Built Blast Design – Within one day after
muck pile. each blast, the Contractor shall submit, unless otherwise
authorized by the Ministry Representative, an as-built blast
(e) Check the excavation backslope to determine hole design showing all actual blast details in a format that
offsets, hole angles, hole alignment and compliance permits direct comparison with the proposed blast design.
with allowable tolerances.
204.04.10 Blasting Consultant’s Field Report – The
(f) Review blast results and make changes to blasting Contractor shall provide the blasting consultant’s field
operations as necessary. report to the Ministry Representative within one day after
each visit by the blasting consultant.
(g) Perform backslope stabilization to the satisfaction of
the Ministry Representative before subsequent lifts are 204.04.11 Vibration Control Records – As required, the
detonated. Contractor shall provide all seismograph records of

BC MoTI SS 2020 204 (3 of 11)

Vol. 1 Page 105 of 470
SECTION 204 ROCK CUTS

vibration monitoring and interpretation of results within one mats, soil or other equally serviceable material to prevent
day after each blast to the Ministry Representative. flyrock.
204.04.12 Peak Overpressure Records – As required, the 204.36 Other Damage – The Contractor shall be
Contractor shall provide a permanent signed and dated responsible for any damage resulting from blasting.
record of the peak overpressure measurements within one Occupants of local buildings shall be notified by the
day after each blast to the Ministry Representative. Contractor, prior to the commencement of the blasting, as
to the timing, size of blasts, types of warning and other
signals.
MATERIALS
204.37 Subgrade and Ditch Areas
204.11 Explosives and Related Products
204.37.01 General – The subgrade shall be constructed to
204.11.01 Manufacturer – All products and materials used 50 mm of the specified line and grade before the placement
for any blasting operations shall be products of a company of Select Granular Subbase Material. Any pinnacles of
regularly engaged in the manufacture of explosives and intact rock protruding above the design subgrade elevation
related products. shall be removed.
204.11.02 Expired Explosives – Explosives with an 204.37.02 Supporting Rock – The Contractor shall
expired shelf life shall not be used. exercise care and use appropriate methods to prevent
breaking, loosening or otherwise damaging supporting rock
204.11.03 Water Resistance – Water resistant explosives
below subgrade level and ditch bottom. The Contractor
may be required for the work.
shall be responsible for the methods used and for any
damage to the rock structure resulting from the operations.
CONSTRUCTION 204.37.03 Drainage – Excavated rock shall be free draining
unless otherwise authorized by the Ministry Representative.
204.31 Permits and Regulations – The Contractor shall
If craters formed in rock by blasting below subgrade
obtain all necessary permits and shall comply fully with the
elevation are not free draining, then the Contractor shall
laws, rules and regulations of Municipal, Provincial and
provide drainage by trenching to a free outlet. These blast
Federal agencies in connection with the use, transportation,
craters and drainage trenches shall be backfilled to subgrade
storage and safe handling of all explosives, including those
elevation.
regulations contained in the WCB Occupational Health and
Safety Regulation. 204.37.04 Shatter Zone for Drainage – Unless otherwise
authorized by the Ministry Representative, drainage shall
204.32 Supervision – The Contractor shall provide at least
also be provided by shattering the upper portion of rock
one person thoroughly trained and experienced in the use of
below subgrade and ditches within the entire excavation
explosives who shall be present at all times during the
limits. The shatter zone shall be 300 mm thick. A shatter
execution of all blasting operations and who shall direct
zone thickness of 900 mm may be required near cut to fill
such work.
transition zones for 10 m beyond the transition, or as
204.33 Personnel – The Contractor shall ensure that all requested by the Ministry Representative.
persons conducting blasting operations have a valid
204.37.05 Backfill Material – Backfill shall be free
blaster’s certificate issued by the WCB or is under the direct
draining material such as clean broken rock or coarse clean
supervision of a certificate holder.
granular material from a source authorized by the Ministry
204.34 Safety – The Contractor shall meet all WCB Representative. All backfill shall be placed and compacted
regulations. All work shall be performed in a manner that as specified.
prevents injury or harm to any personnel employed in the
204.37.06 Ditches – The ditches shall be formed and
rock excavation area. Warning signs shall be posted and
cleaned before any base material is placed on the subgrade.
readily recognizable audible warning signals shall be used.
The perimeter of the area affected by blasting operations 204.38 Blasting Test Section(s)
shall be patrolled and controlled by direct voice
204.38.01 General – All requirements for full scale blasting
communication. The Ministry Representative shall stop the
shall also apply to test sections unless otherwise authorized
work if the safety of the public is being jeopardized by the
by the Ministry Representative. Prior to commencing full-
Contractor's blasting operations.
scale blasting operations, the Ministry Representative may
204.35 Flyrock Control – Before the detonation of any require the Contractor to demonstrate the adequacy of the
blast in areas where flying rock or other debris may result proposed blast design by drilling, blasting, and excavating
in personal injury or damage to property, the area within the short test sections, up to 30 m in length, to determine which
excavation limits shall be covered with suitable blasting combination of method, hole spacing, timing, and charge

BC MoTI SS 2020 204 (4 of 11)

Vol. 1 Page 106 of 470
SECTION 204 ROCK CUTS

yields acceptable results. The length of the blast test section pioneering routes excavated to provide access for backline
shall be as specified in the blast design. hole drilling, unless authorized by the Ministry
Representative.
204.38.02 Reduced Section Length – Where requested by
the Ministry Representative, the Contractor shall use test 204.40.04 Insertion of Explosive – Explosive materials
section lengths of less than 30 m. shall not be inserted into the holes until the blast design has
been reviewed by the Ministry Representative.
204.38.03 Backline Hole Spacing – The Contractor shall
begin the tests by drilling backline holes 750 mm apart 204.41 Backline Holes
along the specified excavation backslope, then adjust if
204.41.01 General – The Contractor shall control the hole
needed, until the Ministry Representative authorizes the
layout and drilling operations using proper equipment and
spacing to be used for full-scale blasting operations.
techniques to ensure that backline holes are located and
204.38.04 Review of Test Section Results – The oriented correctly. The proposed location of each backline
Contractor shall not drill beyond the test section until it has hole shall be accurately surveyed and staked.
been excavated and the results reviewed by the blasting
204.41.02 Hole Location – For each blast, the line of
consultant and continuation authorized by the Ministry
backline holes shall extend 10 m to 20 m beyond the limits
Representative.
of the production holes to be detonated or to the end of the
204.38.05 Revision of Methods – If either the blasting specified excavation backslope, as applicable.
consultant or the Ministry Representative determines that
204.41.03 Hole Location Tolerance – Backline holes shall
the results of the test section are unsatisfactory, then
be drilled within 75 mm of the staked collar location.
notwithstanding the Ministry Representative's prior review
of such methods, the Contractor shall adopt such revised 204.41.04 Hole Deviation – Backline holes shall not
methods as are necessary to achieve the required results. deviate from the plane of the specified excavation backslope
by more than 150 mm as measured perpendicular to the
204.38.06 Additional Test Sections – If at any time during
slope. Backline holes shall not deviate more than 150 mm
the progress of the work the methods of drilling and blasting
as measured within the plane of the excavation backslope.
do not produce the required excavation backslope geometry
within the tolerances specified for backline holes, then the 204.41.05 Hole Diameter – The backline holes shall be
Contractor will be required to drill, blast and excavate short 50 mm to 75 mm in diameter, or as recommended by the
sections, not exceeding 30 m in length, until a technique is blasting consultant and authorized by the Ministry
achieved that will produce the desired results. Representative. Trim blast holes may be as small as 25 mm
diameter.
204.39 Overburden Removal and Setback – The setback
distance shall be 3.0 m. Unless otherwise authorized by the 204.41.06 Hole Length – The length of backline holes for
Ministry Representative, the Contractor shall, before any individual lift shall not exceed 8 m unless the
drilling the backline holes, remove all overburden within the Contractor can demonstrate to the Ministry Representative
excavation limits or 10 m beyond the limits of the that the Contractor can stay within the tolerances and
production holes in a direction parallel to the backline. The produce the required excavation backslope geometry.
overburden surface shall be sloped at 1.5:1 unless otherwise
204.41.07 Guide Holes – Guide Holes shall be of the same
authorized by the Ministry Representative.
diameter and drilled in the same plane and to the same
204.40 Backline and Production Holes tolerance as the remaining backline holes.
204.40.01 Stemming – The upper portion of all holes 204.41.08 Hole Length Increase – Upon satisfactory
between the topmost charge and the hole collar shall be demonstration, the length of holes may be increased to a
stemmed. Stemming materials shall be sand or other inert maximum of 12 m with written authorization of the
angular granular material with similar specific gravity, Ministry Representative. If more than 5% of the backline
passing a 9.5 mm sieve. holes are misaligned in any one lift, then the Contractor
shall reduce the height of the lifts until the 150 mm
204.40.02 Hole Obstructions – Before placing charges, the
alignment tolerance is met.
Contractor shall determine that the hole is free of
obstructions for its entire depth. All necessary precautions 204.41.09 Control of Drilling Orientation – All drilling
shall be exercised so that the placing of the charges will not equipment used to drill the backline holes shall have
cause spalling of material from the walls of the holes. mechanical devices attached to that equipment to accurately
determine the orientation of the drill steel entering the rock.
204.40.03 General Orientation – All holes shall be drilled
Backline hole drilling will not be permitted if these devices
downward unless otherwise specified in the blast design and
are either missing or inoperative.
authorized by the Ministry Representative. In general, slash
holes (horizontal, near horizontal or fanned out holes) shall 204.41.10 Offset Between Lifts – When the cut height
not be drilled along the excavation backslope or on requires more than one lift, a maximum 0.5 m offset

BC MoTI SS 2020 204 (5 of 11)

Vol. 1 Page 107 of 470
SECTION 204 ROCK CUTS

between lifts is permitted to allow for drill equipment Should any blast result in a non-compliant backwall, the
clearances. The Contractor shall begin the backline hole blast design shall be modified, prior to any subsequent
drilling on the deign backline for the top lift, and shall adjust blasting, to prevent future non-conformance.
the start of lower lifts to compensate for drill offset and any
In no case shall any portion of the slope encroach on the
drift which may have occurred in the upper lifts. The
ditch.
excavation angle required to compensate for drill offset can
be determined as shown in Appendix 204-A, 204.43 Cushion Blasting
Figure 204-A-1.
204.43.01 General – Where the horizontal distance from
204.41.11 Length for Toe Berm Removal – Drilling 0.5 m the specified excavation backslope to the existing free face
below ditch bottom is permitted to facilitate removal of the is less than 5 m, the Contractor may use cushion blasting
toe berm. instead of presplit blasting.
204.42 Presplit Blasting 204.43.02 Delay Time – The difference in delay time
between the backline holes detonated after the buffer holes
204.42.01 General – Unless otherwise specified in the blast
shall be between 25 ms and 75 ms. With the exception of
design and authorized by the Ministry Representative,
these criteria, requirements for presplit blasting shall also
presplit blasting shall be conducted for all blasting to the
apply to cushion blasting.
excavation backslope. In general, cushion blasting may
proceed when the bench width is less than three times the 204.44 Production Blasting
lift height.
204.44.01 Hole Diameter – Production holes shall not
204.42.02 Explosive Type and Accessories – Drill hole exceed 150 mm in diameter, unless otherwise specified in
conditions may vary from dry to filled with water. The the blast design and authorized by the Ministry
Contractor shall use explosives and blasting accessories Representative.
appropriate for the drill hole conditions encountered to
204.44.02 Hole Location – Production blast holes (not
accomplish the specified results. Only standard explosives
including buffer holes) shall not be drilled closer than 2.0 m
manufactured for presplit blasting shall be used in backline
holes, unless otherwise specified in the blast design and to the backline holes, unless otherwise specified in the blast
authorized by the Ministry Representative. Bulk design and authorized by the Ministry Representative. The
bottom of the production holes (including buffer holes) shall
ammonium nitrate and fuel oil (ANFO) shall not be loaded
not be lower than the bottom of the backline holes.
into the backline holes.
204.44.03 Delay Sequence – All sequences shall be delayed
204.42.03 Explosive Decoupling – Explosives shall be
in such a manner that successive delays promote the
evenly distributed and decoupled to the maximum extent
movement of rock in the direction of a free face at all times.
possible.
204.42.04 Explosive Charges – The bottom charge of 204.44.04 Damage to Backslope – It is the Contractor's
responsibility to take all necessary precautions during
backline holes may be larger than the remaining charges but
production blasting to minimize blast damage to the
shall not be large enough to cause overbreak. The top
excavation backslope.
charge of backline holes shall be placed far enough below
the collar and be sufficiently small to avoid overbreak and 204.44.05 Buffer Holes – A line of buffer holes shall be
heaving of rock beyond the excavation backslope. drilled along a plane parallel to the backline holes. Buffer
204.42.05 Modified Blasting Sequence – The Contractor hole diameters shall be between 50 mm and 75 mm unless
otherwise specified in the blast design. Unless otherwise
may detonate the backline holes before drilling production
specified in the blast design, the line of buffer holes shall be
holes, provided satisfactory excavation backslopes are
drilled approximately 1 m away from the backline holes and
obtained.
spaced 1.0 to 1.5 m centre to centre.
204.42.06 Backline Hole Delays – If required to reduce
ground vibrations or noise, backline holes may be delayed, 204.44.06 Buffer Hole Charge and Detonation – The
explosive charge in buffer holes shall not exceed 50% of the
provided the effective hole-to-hole delay time is not more
full explosive load that could be placed in a 75 mm diameter
than 25 ms.
production hole. Detonation of the buffer holes shall be on
204.42.07 Excavation Backslope Geometry – The a delay sequence toward a free face. Ammonium nitrate and
excavation backslope shall not deviate more than 150 mm fuel oil shall not be used for buffer holes unless otherwise
from a plane passing through adjacent drill holes except specified in the blast design and authorized by the Ministry
where the character of the rock is such that, as determined Representative.
by the Ministry Representative, irregularities are
204.45 Vibration Control and Monitoring
unavoidable. The 150 mm tolerance shall be measured
perpendicular to the plane of the slope. 204.45.01 Vibration Control – The Contractor shall use
blasting methods designed to limit the intensity of ground

BC MoTI SS 2020 204 (6 of 11)

Vol. 1 Page 108 of 470
SECTION 204 ROCK CUTS

vibrations originating within the excavation limits. When 204.47 Excavation Backslope Stabilization
blasting near buildings, structures, wells, utilities or other
204.47.01 Stabilization – The excavation backslope shall
works that may be subject to damage from blast induced
be stabilized as recommended by the Ministry’s
ground vibrations, the ground vibrations shall be controlled
geotechnical engineer and to the Ministry Representative’s
using properly designed delay sequences and allowable
satisfaction, during or upon completion of the excavation of
charge weights per delay.
each lift. Unless otherwise authorized by the Ministry
204.45.02 Charge Weight Per Delay – Allowable charge Representative, drilling of the next lift shall not proceed
weights per delay shall be based on vibration levels that will until stabilization has been completed. Drilling of the next
not cause damage. The Ministry Representative may lift shall not proceed until all concerns about stability raised
monitor vibration levels at the blast site by requesting trial by the Ministry’s geotechnical engineer and the Ministry
blasts to determine actual vibration levels reached during Representative are addressed by the stabilization work.
blasting. Stabilization shall be completed before any base material is
placed upon the subgrade. Stabilization shall be at the
204.45.03 Monitoring – Monitoring shall meet the
Contractor’s expense.
International Society of Rock Mechanics (ISRM) standards.
Whenever vibration damage to adjacent structures is 204.47.02 Stabilization Methods – Stabilization methods
possible, the Contractor shall monitor each blast with include scaling, trimming, the application of rock bolts,
approved seismograph(s) located between the blast area and shotcrete, slope mesh, drains or other stabilization
the closest structure(s) subject to potential blast damage. techniques recommended by the Ministry’s geotechnical
The geophone shall be placed as close as possible to the engineer and authorized by the Ministry Representative.
structure(s) but not directly above the structure(s). The
204.48 Special Use of Excavated Rock – Excavated rock
seismograph(s) shall be set to record particle velocity,
of suitable quality required for walls, riprap, paving, or
accelerations, and frequency in the range generally found
other special use shall be sorted and deposited in stockpiles
with controlled blasting. The peak particle velocity shall be
if so requested by the Ministry Representative.
calculated as the maximum vector sum of three mutually
perpendicular components of vibration. All components
and peak particle velocity shall be recorded.
MEASUREMENT
204.45.03 Vibration Limits – Peak particle velocity,
204.81 Type A Excavation – Type A excavation will be
accelerations and frequency shall not be allowed to exceed
measured by the CUBIC METRE.
the safe limits of the nearest structure subject to potential
vibration damage. The Contractor shall employ a qualified 204.82 Excavation Backslope (Smooth Wall) – The
vibration specialist to establish the safe vibration limits. excavation backslope will be measured by the SQUARE
204.45.04 Interpretation – The vibration specialist shall METRE only where the height of the cut exceeds 2 m, and
shall be measured over the entire height of such cuts.
interpret the seismograph records to ensure that the
Measurement will apply to the condition of the slope prior
seismograph data is effectively used in the control of the
to scaling. Measurement for payment, including
blasting operations with respect to the existing structures.
measurement of smooth wall surface area, hole deviation
204.46 Air Concussion and Noise Control and slope deviation, will be conducted by the Ministry.
204.46.01 General – When requested by the Ministry
Representative, an air concussion monitoring system shall
be installed in a representative location between the blasting PAYMENT
area and the nearest structure subject to potential blast 204.91 Type A Excavation – Payment for TYPE A
damage or annoyance. The equipment used to make the air EXCAVATION will be at the Contract Unit Price per cubic
concussion measurements shall be the type specifically metre and will be authorized by the Ministry Representative
manufactured for that purpose. after submittal of all documentation required in this Section.
The Unit Price will be considered full compensation for the
204.46.02 Monitoring – The air concussion monitoring
requirements of this Section.
system shall be set to record air overpressure on the linear
setting. When requested by the Ministry Representative, Design slope lines including approved offsets, subgrade and
human annoyance (A weight setting) and human ear ditch lines shall represent the pay lines of Type A
response (C weight setting) shall also be recorded. excavation.
204.46.03 Overpressure – Peak overpressure shall be If so determined by the Ministry Representative,
controlled using appropriate blast hole patterns, detonation stabilization necessitated by improper blasting operations
systems and stemming to prevent venting of blasts, and to shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
minimize air concussion and noise levels produced by the
blasting operations. The contractor shall use a qualified Trimming will be paid at the Contract Unit Price per cubic
vibration specialist to establish safe overpressure limits. metre for TYPE A EXCAVATION.

BC MoTI SS 2020 204 (7 of 11)

Vol. 1 Page 109 of 470
SECTION 204 ROCK CUTS

All costs associated with blasting test sections and any Unit Price per square metre for only that part of the exposed
revised methods necessary to produce acceptable results cut face meeting the geometric tolerances for excavation
shall be incidental to Type A excavation. backslope in this Section. Geometric tolerances to be met
include hole location tolerance, hole deviation, offset
Additional drilling, blasting and excavation required to
between lifts and deviation of excavation backslope
construct subgrade to the required tolerances and
geometry.
excavating, loading, hauling, placing and compacting
backfill material for blast craters and drainage trenches to Scaling of loose material disturbed by blasting including
subgrade level shall be incidental to Type A excavation. removal and disposal of overbreak shall be considered
incidental to payment for excavation backslope.
All costs associated with vibration control, air concussion
and noise control, and all monitoring shall be considered Where there is no Excavation Backslope (Smooth wall)
incidental to Type A excavation. Item in Schedule 7, the Excavation Backslope (Smooth
wall) Work shall be performed incidental to Type A
204.92 Excavation Backslope (Smooth Wall) – Payment
Excavation.
for EXCAVATION BACKSLOPE will be at the Contract

BC MoTI SS 2020 204 (8 of 11)

Vol. 1 Page 110 of 470
SECTION 204 ROCK CUTS

PROPOSED BLAST DESIGN

File #: _____________________
PROJECT NO. ___________________
(TO BE SUBMITTED NOT LESS THAN 1 DAY BEFORE DRILLING)
GENERAL:
DATE PREPARED__________________
CONTRACTOR'S NAME _____________________________________ PROPOSED BLAST DATE ___________
BLASTER'S NAME __________________________________________ BLAST # __________________________
BLASTER'S CERTIFICATE NUMBER __________________________

HIGHWAY#_________________
BLAST LOCATION AT: ____________________________________________________

UTILITY PROTECTION OR STANDBY REQUIRED: (CIRCLE) YES NO

SITE DETAILS:

HEIGHT ABOVE HWY ________ (m) SLOPE ANGLE ________ (°) SLOPE LENGTH ________________________ (m)
ROCK TYPE ________________________________
DISTANCE TO NEAREST STRUCTURE (UTILITY)____________ (m)

ANTICIPATED DRILLING DETAILS:

PROPOSED NO. OF BACKLINE HOLES___________ PROPOSED APPROX. NO. OF HOLES ________

PROPOSED AVG. DEPTH __________ (m) HOLE DIA. ______ (mm)
PROPOSED NO. OF ROWS ____________ APPROX. HOLE SPACING ___________ (m) BURDEN ____________ (m)
PROPOSED MAXIMUM DEPTH ___________ (m) PROPOSED HOLE INCL.: (CIRCLE) VERTICAL HORIZ. VARIABLE
PROPOSED TOTAL DEPTH ____________ (m)

PROPOSED BLAST DETAILS:

EXPLOSIVE TYPE _____________________________ EXPLOSIVE SIZE _________mm by ____________mm

APPROX. NUMBER OF CARTRIDGES ___________ APPROX. TOTAL WEIGHT ________________________ (kg)
PROPOSED NUMBER OF DELAYS ______________ DELAY TYPE AND LENGTH _________________ (ms)

INITIATION DEVICE: (CIRCLE) E.B. CAPS SAFETY FUSE OTHER (SPECIFY) _________________________________
BLASTING MACHINE: TYPE ______________ CAPACITY _______________

APPROX. VOLUME OF ROCK TO BE BLASTED ______________________ (m3)

PROPOSED BLAST SKETCH:

SHOW THE FOLLOWING: PLAN VIEW: CROSS SECTION VIEW:

SCALE
PLAN VIEW
CROSS SECTION
ROCK GEOMETRY
APPROX. HOLE LOCATIONS
APPROX. HOLE DEPTH
PROPOSED TIE-IN PATTERN
ROW BY ROW DELAYS
DETONATION DIRECTION
HIGHWAY LOCATION
UTILITY LOCATION
NORTH ARROW

BLASTING CONSULTANT NAME ________________________ SIGNATURE_________________________ COMPANY_________________

BLASTER'S SIGNATURE _______________________________________________ COMPANY______________________________________

RECEIVED BY MINISTRY REPRESENTATIVE (SIGNATURE) ________________________________________________________________

(Use Additional Sheets if Necessary)

BC MoTI SS 2020 204 (9 of 11)

Vol. 1 Page 111 of 470
SECTION 204 ROCK CUTS

AS-BUILT BLASTING RECORD

File #: _____________________
PROJECT NO. ___________________
(TO BE SUBMITTED NOT MORE THAN 1 DAY AFTER EACH BLAST)
GENERAL:
DATE PREPARED__________________
CONTRACTOR'S NAME _____________________________________ ACTUAL BLAST DATE _____________
BLASTER'S NAME __________________________________________ BLAST # __________________________
BLASTER'S CERTIFICATE NUMBER __________________________

HIGHWAY#_________________
BLAST LOCATION AT: ____________________________________________________

UTILITY PROTECTION OR STANDBY USED: (CIRCLE) YES NO TYPE OF UTILITY PROTECTION _________________________

SITE DETAILS:

HEIGHT ABOVE HWY ________ (m) SLOPE ANGLE ________ (°) SLOPE LENGTH ________________________ (m)
ROCK TYPE ________________________________
DISTANCE TO NEAREST STRUCTURE (UTILITY)____________ (m)

DRILLING DETAILS:

NUMBER OF BACKLINE HOLES___________ TOTAL NUMBER OF HOLES ________

AVERAGE DEPTH __________ (m) HOLE DIAMETER ______ (mm)
NUMBER OF ROWS ____________ HOLE SPACING ___________ (m) BURDEN ____________ (m)
MAXIMUM DEPTH ___________ (m) HOLE INCLINATION: (CIRCLE) VERTICAL HORIZ. VARIABLE
TOTAL DEPTH ____________ (m)

BLAST DETAILS:

EXPLOSIVE TYPE _____________________________ EXPLOSIVE SIZE ___________mm by ______________mm

TOTAL NUMBER OF CARTRIDGES ___________ TOTAL WEIGHT __________________________ (kg)
TOTAL NUMBER OF DELAYS ______________ DELAY TYPE AND LENGTH __________________ (ms)

INITIATION DEVICE: (CIRCLE) E.B. CAPS SAFETY FUSE OTHER (SPECIFY) _________________________________
BLASTING MACHINE: TYPE ______________ CAPACITY _______________

VOLUME OF ROCK BLASTED ______________________ (m3)

BLAST SKETCH:

SHOW THE FOLLOWING: PLAN VIEW: CROSS SECTION VIEW:

SCALE
PLAN VIEW
CROSS SECTION
ROCK GEOMETRY
HOLE LOCATIONS
HOLE DEPTH
TIE-IN PATTERN
ROW BY ROW DELAYS
DETONATION DIRECTION
HIGHWAY LOCATION
UTILITY LOCATION
NORTH ARROW

BLASTER'S SIGNATURE _______________________________________________ COMPANY______________________________________

RECEIVED BY MINISTRY REPRESENTATIVE (SIGNATURE) ________________________________________________________________

(Use Additional Sheets if Necessary)

BC MoTI SS 2020 204 (10 of 11)

Vol. 1 Page 112 of 470
SECTION 204 ROCK CUTS

Appendix 204-A
Figure 204-A-1: Calculation of Excavation Angle (β) for Drill Offset

BC MoTI SS 2020 204 (11 of 11)

Vol. 1 Page 113 of 470
 SECTION 205

RIPRAP

205.01 General – This Section covers the protection of Table 205-A: Tests for Riprap Material Properties
embankments and channels, by using the Class of riprap, at
the designated locations, specified in the Drawings and ASTM Test Allowable
Property
Special Provisions. Designation Value
Work within any watercourse shall be carried out in Specific Gravity D6473 >2.50
conformity with the environmental protection provisions in
the Contract and SS 165, all to the satisfaction of the
Absorption D6473 <2%
Ministry Representative.
205.02 Quality Control <10%
Soundness by use of
D5240 (following
205.02.01 General – The Contractor shall be fully Magnesium Sulphate
5 cycles)
responsible for all quality control testing, inspection and
documentation to achieve compliance with the Contract. Micro–Deval Abrasion
D6928 <20%
Loss Factor
205.02.02 Material Testing
(a) Initial Testing and Gradation – The Contractor shall
provide documented test results for the riprap material (c) Heavy Riprap by Dimension – The quality control for
properties, per Table 205-A, and the gradation of the the gradation of Class 100 and larger riprap by size
riprap to the Ministry Representative for review at least shall:
one week prior to starting riprap delivery to the Site. (i) Conform to the gradation specified in Table 205-C
(b) Gradation Sampling Areas – For riprap gradation, with a tolerance of -5% to +15 % of the values
quality control shall continue to occur throughout the listed; and
project and include, but not be limited to the following: (ii) be done using ASTM D5519 Method B, the
(i) gradation of representative samples of riprap at the FHWA FLH T 521 Wolman count method, or
source while production is underway; and other method approved in advance by the Ministry
Representative.
(ii) gradation of the placed riprap at the Site while
placement is underway and at completion of the (d) Documentation – Documentation of the gradation
placement. testing and inspection shall be provided to the Ministry
Representative within 24 hours from its completion.
(c) Gradation Sampling Frequency – Gradation quality
control shall occur at a frequency of not less than once 205.02.04 Hold Points – The following hold points, as
per week, or once per 1000 tonnes or 500 m3 of riprap defined in SS 145.12, will apply for Class 100 kg riprap and
produced or placed, whichever is more frequent, at each larger unless otherwise directed by the Ministry
source and placement site that is active at any time Representative:
during the week. • Gradation QC and material property test results for
205.02.03 Gradation Control – The Contractor may elect riprap are provided to the Ministry Representative
to perform gradation quality control using either mass or prior to starting delivery to Site
dimensional assessment in accordance with the following. • Completion of Toe/Terminal end key excavations
(a) Light Riprap – For riprap of Class 50 or less, quality • Preparation of back slope/surface
control may be done visually, supplemented with
measuring dimensions or masses as necessary to • Application of filter(s)
confirm the accuracy of the visual assessment.
• Completion of toe construction
(b) Heavy Riprap by Mass – The quality control for the
205.03 Quality Assurance – The Ministry may carry out
gradation of the Class 100 and heavier riprap by mass
quality assurance by auditing the Contractor's quality
shall:
control program and by testing and inspection at its
(i) Conform to the gradation specified in using discretion. Ministry quality testing shall not relieve the
Table 205-B ; and Contractor of responsibility for providing quality control.
(ii) be done in accordance with the ASTM D5519
Method A or Method C.

o 2020 205 1 of 4
Vol. 1 Page 114 of 470
SECTION 205 RIPRAP

205.04 Riprap Properties Table 205-B: Gradation of Rock by Class of Riprap

205.04.01 General - Rock shall be hard, durable, and
angular quarry rock of a quality that will not disintegrate on Rock Mass (kg)
Class
exposure to water or the atmosphere.
of Percentage Smaller Than
205.04.02 Size and Gradation – The size and gradation of Riprap Given Rock Mass Max.
rocks shall be in accordance with the following: (kg) Size
15% 50% 85%
• well-graded;
10 1 10 30 50
• Table 205-B for mass or Table 205-C for
dimensions; and 25 2.5 25 75 125
• the minimum dimension of each individual rock 50 5 50 150 250
shall be greater than one-third of its maximum
dimension; 100 10 100 300 500

205.04.03 Material Properties – Rocks used for riprap 250 25 250 750 1 250
shall only break with difficulty, have no earthy odour, no 500 50 500 1 500 2 500
closely spaced discontinuities, and should not absorb water
easily. Rocks composed of appreciable amounts of clay or 1000 100 1 000 3 000 5 000
silt shall not be accepted for use as riprap.
2000 200 2 000 6 000 10 000
Any riprap source shall be tested by the Contractor for
conformance to the requirements of Table 205-A, prior to 4000 400 4 000 12 000 20 000
use on the Site.
Where the Ministry has provided a riprap source and has
previously tested its material properties, the Contract will Table 205-C: Gradation and Intermediate Dimension
indicate that, and the Contractor will not be required to of Rock by Class of Riprap
undertake further material property testing.
Intermediate Dimension
Where the Contractor elects to use another source, or the (mm)
Ministry does not have test results for an available Ministry Class
source, the Contractor will be responsible to test to, and of Riprap Percentage Smaller Than Max.
ensure compliance with, the allowable values for the tests (kg) Intermediate Dimension Size
given in Table 205-A.
15% 50% 85%
Representative samples may be broken off representative
riprap rocks and crushed to allow performance of the tests. 10 90 200 285 350

Rocks shall be tested for Acid Rock Drainage and Metal 25 125 270 385 450
Leaching as required by the Ministry Representative. 50 155 340 485 600
Testing shall meet the Ministry requirements outlined in the
Ministry’s Technical Circular T–04/13, available at the link 100 200 425 610 750
below. 250 270 575 830 1 000
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/driving–and– 500 340 725 1 050 1 250
transportation/transportation–
infrastructure/engineering–standards–and– 1000 425 915 1 325 1 600
guidelines/technical–circulars/2013/t04–13.pdf 2000 535 1 150 1 650 2 000
205.05 Preparation – Areas to receive riprap shall be 4000 675 1 450 2 100 2 500
trimmed to a uniform surface and to the slope(s) indicated
on the Drawings or as directed by the Ministry Note: Table 205-C shows the intermediate dimension as
Representative. defined in the Wolman method as per FHWA
FLH T 521 corresponding to the rock mass shown in
Before rock placement commences, loose material shall be Table 205-B, based on spherical volume, using Specific
removed and minor hollows filled with surrounding native Gravity = 2.50. Regardless of actual source Specific
materials well tamped–in to the approval of the Ministry Gravity, the dimensions indicated remain applicable
Representative. (subject to the limits specified in Table 205-A).

o 2020 205 2 of 4
Vol. 1 Page 115 of 470
SECTION 205 RIPRAP

205.06 Filter Layers – Filter layers and placement, where Table 205-D: Placement Dimensions by Class of Riprap
required, shall be as per the Drawings and Special
Provisions or as directed by the Ministry Representative. Surface Width, W*
Nominal
205.07 Foundations and Placement – The nominal Class of (mm)
Thickness of
thickness and the surface width for each Class of riprap shall Riprap
Riprap*
(kg) 2H:1V 1.5H:1V
conform with the requirements specified in Table 205-D. (mm)
Slope Slope
Each truckload of rock brought to the site shall provide a
complete range of the rock sizes in the gradation. 10 350 783 631
Work shall be carried out to prevent cracking or breaking of 25 450 1006 811
rock riprap by crushing under machine tracks. Work shall 50 550 1230 992
be carried out to avoid disturbing the filter layer(s). Damage
shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense. 100 700 1566 1262
Placement shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as 250 1000 2236 1803
directed by the Ministry Representative. 500 1200 2684 2163
Layout and installation details for riprap at bridge 1000 1500 3355 2704
embankments and for embankment protection works
parallel to waterway flow shall be in accordance with 2000 2000 4473 3606
SS Drawing SP205–1, unless otherwise specified. 4000 2500 5591 4507
SS Drawing SP205–1 shall not apply for riprap for culvert
end treatment or around in-stream piers. * See SS Drawing SP205-1 for the description of the
Nominal Thickness and Surface Width dimension “W”.
At the toe of sloped riprap, a sufficient number of the larger
rocks shall be placed to form a firm foundation. The
remaining larger rocks shall be distributed evenly MEASUREMENT
throughout the mass. 205.11 Measurement – Measurements will be made by
Rocks shall be placed to the required thickness, providing a multiplying the facial area by the average thickness
reasonably well–graded mass with the minimum of voids. dimensions as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Clusters of small or large stones shall be avoided. Ministry Representative. No allowance will be made for the
quantity of rock placed in excess of these dimensions.
205.08 Machine Placed Riprap – The controlled
placement of rock of the Class specified shall produce a
well–graded rock mass of the nominal or required thickness PAYMENT
over the area indicated. Placement of riprap shall not be by 205.12 Payment – Payment shall be made at the Unit Price
end–dumping. The rock shall be machine manipulated as bid per cubic metre for the Class of riprap specified or
necessary to provide mass stability and a regular surface required. The Unit Price bid shall be accepted as full
with a minimum of voids. compensation for everything completely furnished and done
205.09 Hand–Laid Riprap – Hand–laid riprap, normally in connection therewith, including supply, haul, placing,
Class 10 or 25, shall conform to the size, gradation and and quality control.
requirements set out in SS 205.04. Individual rocks too Payment for the excavation work at the placement site shall
large to handle shall be machine manipulated for be paid for under “Roadway Drainage and Excavation” or
satisfactory setting and spacing. "Foundation Excavation", whichever is specified in the
205.10 Grouted Riprap – Where grouted riprap is shown Contract.
or required, the surfaces of the rocks shall be cleaned and Where the source of supply for the riprap is off–Site or
wetted and the interstices filled with cement mortar, well outside the design excavation limits as shown on the
rodded and pounded in for a minimum mortar depth of Drawings, the Unit Price for Riprap shall also include all
300 mm or as otherwise detailed or required by the Ministry costs to develop the source and produce the riprap.
Representative. The mortar shall consist of one-part
Portland cement to three parts well–graded clean fine Where the source of supply is on–Site and within the design
aggregate (1:3) mixed to a proper consistency. excavation limits as shown on the Drawings, or within any
slip, payment to excavate and haul the rock for riprap will
be included within the Contract Unit Price for Type A, as
defined in SS 201.

o 2020 205 3 of 4
Vol. 1 Page 116 of 470
SECTION 205 RIPRAP

o 2020 205 4 of 4
Vol. 1 Page 117 of 470
 SECTION 206

ROCK BOLTS

DESCRIPTION (d) Data Sheets – Upon request by the Ministry

Representative, supply the manufacturer’s product data
206.01 General – Unless otherwise specified, the Post
sheets.
Tensioning Institute (PTI) D35.1-14 Recommendations for
Prestressed Rock and Soil Anchors shall apply to rock bolts (e) Properties of Steel – Upon request by the Ministry
and other rock anchoring systems. Rock bolting operations Representative, supply the physical and chemical
shall include, but not be limited to, pre-construction and properties for each lot or heat number of the steel.
construction work including quality control, site preparation,
(f) Test Results – Upon request by the Ministry
selection of appropriate installation method, drilling, sealing,
Representative, submit a certified statement from an
bar insertion, grouting and testing of rock bolts.
independent testing laboratory of the physical
Rock bolts shall be installed in the areas designated by the dimensions and mechanical properties of the rock bolt
Ministry Representative. Unless otherwise stated below, all bar proposed for use. This statement shall include:
rock bolts shall be installed and tensioned to the rock bolt
(i) Minimum cross sectional area of the threaded
manufacturer's specifications.
portion of the bar.
206.02 Codes and Standards
(ii) Minimum cross sectional area of the unthreaded
CSA G30.18 Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete portion of the bar.
Reinforcement
(iii) Yield strength of the bar.
CSA G40.21 Structural Quality Steels
(iv) Ultimate tensile strength of the bar.
CSA A23.2-9C Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
(v) Percent elongation of the bar at yield and ultimate
Concrete Specimens.
strength.
ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip
(g) Quick Setting Mortar – Name of material,
Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
manufacturer, 7 day and 28 day unconfined compressive
Products
strength, and composition.
ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating
(h) Sealing – Proposed method of sealing fractures and voids
(Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
in drill holes to prevent loss of grout.
206.03 Quality Control – The Contractor shall provide
206.04.02 Calibration Certificates – Provide tensioning jack
quality control for rock bolt operations.
calibration certificates 5 working days before commencing
206.04 Submittals – The Contractor shall supply the rock bolt installation. Calibration of jacks shall have been
following to the Ministry Representative: performed by an authorized testing agency not more than
30 days prior to rock bolt testing. The certificate shall show
206.04.01 Proposed Rock Bolt System – Provide
the relationship between gauge pressure and applied load.
documentation as follows for the proposed rock bolt system
Pumps and jacks shall be paired for calibration.
for review at least 5 working days before commencing rock
bolt installation. 206.04.03 Contractor’s Rock Bolt Records – Provide daily
rock bolt tensioning records within one day of each day of
(a) Rock Bolts – Type, dimensions and manufacturer of the
rock bolt operations. Records shall include contractor name,
bar, centralizers, face plate, washer (where applicable),
date of tensioning, weather, temperature, test jack
and nut.
identification number, pump identification number, name of
(b) Resin – Published specifications showing name of person who tested the rock bolt, rock bolt location, rock bolt
material, manufacturer, graph of unconfined compressive number, rock bolt length, resin or grout details, test start time,
strength development versus time, gel time, viscosity, test end time, gauge reading for each minute of the creep test,
shelf life, storage and handling requirements. and lock off load. For resin systems, records shall also
include the start and end times of spinning the bar through the
(c) Grout – Published specifications showing name of
resin in the hole.
material, manufacturer, 7 day and 28 day unconfined
compressive strength, composition, shelf life, storage and 206.05 Definitions – The following definitions refer to words
handling requirements. and terms used in this Section. For definitions not covered
here, refer to definitions provided by the Post Tensioning
Institute.

BC MoTI SS 2020 206 (1 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 118 of 470
SECTION 206 ROCK BOLTS

206.05.01 Bonding Agent – Material such as grout or resin (ii) A minimum unconfined compressive strength when
used to bond the rock bolt bar to the rock in the bond zone or fully mixed and cured of 90 MPa, tested in
free stressing length. accordance with CSA A23.2.
206.05.02 Bond Zone – The distal or lower portion of the (iii) Encased in a plastic film that provides optimum
hole where the bonding agent transmits the applied tensile resistance to moisture, and is easily ruptured to
load to the surrounding rock. enable complete mixing during installation.
206.05.03 Free Stressing Length – The proximal or upper (iv) Suitable thixotropic and viscous properties to permit
portion of the hole not within the bond zone. adequate mixing of the resin components by rotation
of the rock bolt bar and to contain the resin within
206.05.04 Grout Sock – A geotextile encasement within all
the drill hole.
or part of the drill hole, used to control grout loss in highly
permeable rock conditions. (v) Easily identifiable gel time and as recommended by
the resin manufacturer.
206.05.05 Sealing Grout – Portland cement based grout that
is pumped or gravity fed into the hole or used as drilling fluid (vi) Reach 80% of its ultimate strength within a time
to reduce the permeability of the rock immediately interval equal to five times the gel time.
surrounding the hole.
(vii) Non-shrink after the gel time.
(viii) Unaffected by mild acids or mild alkalis.
MATERIALS
(ix) Cartridge boxes labelled with the resin expiry date.
206.11 Materials – Steel materials shall be hot dip galvanized
(d) Grout
to ASTM A123 or ASTM A153, as appropriate. All resin,
grout and galvanized steel materials shall be the products of (i) Pre-mixed, unsanded, non-metallic, and non-shrink
established manufacturers regularly engaged in the cementitious grout containing silica fume.
manufacture of rock bolt materials for at least five years.
(ii) Can be mixed to a flowable consistency, typically
Materials shall meet the following additional requirements: with a water to cement ratio of 0.35 or as specified
by the grout manufacturer to achieve or exceed the
(a) Rock Bolt Bars
required strength.
(i) Steel hot-rolled Grade 517 MPa meeting
(iii) Minimum 7 day compressive strength of 30 MPa
CSA G30.18.
and a minimum 28 day compressive strength of
(ii) Nominal solid bar diameter 22 mm unless otherwise 40 MPa, tested in accordance with CSA A23.2.
specified.
(iv) Admixtures to be used according to the
(iii) Threadlike surface deformations for full length of manufacturer's specifications and as authorized by
bar and suitable for mechanical coupling. the Ministry Representative.
(iv) Cut-thread reinforcing bar not permitted. (v) Calcium chloride accelerator is not permitted.
(b) Miscellaneous Hardware (e) Mortar Pads
(i) Steel hardware to be compatible in size and strength (i) Portland cement based.
with rock bolt bars.
(ii) Quick setting.
(ii) Face plates to be square and suitable for dome
shaped nuts.
CONSTRUCTION
(iii) Face plate size to be matched to bar size.
206.31 Execution
(iv) Face plates to meet CSA G40.21 Grade 300W.
206.31.01 General – The entire rock bolt system shall be
(v) Face plate dimensions 10 mm by 150 mm by
stored under cover away from deleterious materials. All
150 mm unless otherwise specified.
grease and other deleterious material shall be removed from
(vi) Face plates date stamped after galvanizing on the the steel prior to rock bolt installation.
side visible when installed with the current year (in
206.31.02 Site Preparation – Where rock bolts may be
the format YYYY) in numbers 10 mm high.
adversely impacted, rock removal above and around proposed
(vii) Face plates slotted for grout tube if grout is used. rock bolt locations shall be completed before installation of
rock bolts commence. Any minor rock scaling performed in
(c) Resin
conjunction with rock bolting shall be considered incidental
(i) Fast-set and slow-set resin in cartridge form. to rock bolting.

BC MoTI SS 2020 206 (2 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 119 of 470
SECTION 206 ROCK BOLTS

206.31.03 Drill Holes (d) Centralizers – If grout is used, centralizers on 3.0 m

centres shall centralize the rock bolt in the drill hole
(a) Location, Orientation and Depth – The location,
before grout is placed. Centralizers shall be suitable for
direction, angle and depth of the holes will be dependent
holes in rock and shall be specifically manufactured for
on field conditions encountered and will be detailed by
rock bolt application.
the Ministry Representative prior to and if necessary
during construction. (e) Resin – Resin cartridges shall be installed as follows or
as specified by the resin manufacturer:
(b) Hole Diameter – The diameter of the holes shall be
suitable for the rock bolt system chosen. Where grout is (i) Fast Set Resin – A sufficient number of fast-setting
used, the hole size shall be according to the rock bolt cartridges shall be placed in the bond zone at the
manufacturer's recommendations. Where resin is used, bottom of the hole for the anchorage.
the hole size shall be according to the resin
(ii) Slow Set Resin – A sufficient number of slow-
manufacturer's recommendations.
setting cartridges shall be placed in the free stressing
206.31.04 Cleaning – All water, grease, oil, cuttings and length between the bond zone and the collar of the
other deleterious materials shall be removed from finished hole.
holes by a water and/or air jet as required.
(f) Grout – Grout shall be prepared and placed as follows
206.31.05 Sealing – The Contractor shall take measures unless otherwise specified by the grout manufacturer:
incidental to rock bolting to maintain open drill holes, seal
(i) Mixing – Grout shall be mixed in a colloidal or high
holes and prevent anchor grout loss as follows:
shear grout mixer according to the grout
(a) Fill fractures and small voids; manufacturer's published instructions. Mixing
paddles shall be slotted and perforated. Mixing time
(b) Bridge large voids;
shall be not less than two minutes.
(c) Consolidate around the hole.
(ii) Batching – All ingredients for the grout mix shall be
including but not limited to using the following measures: batched by mass. Water shall be added to the drum
first and dry ingredients afterwards. Grout shall not
(d) Sealing grouting; be re-tempered after initial mixing. Grout shall be
(e) Lining the hole with steel or pvc casing; placed immediately after mixing.
(f) Grouting and re-drilling; (iii) Grout Placement – Grout shall be pumped or
gravity fed through a grout tube extending to the
(g) Using grout sock to contain anchor grout bottom of the hole. The inserted end of the tube shall
Alternative sealing methods shall be as authorized by the remain below the level of the grout in the hole to
Ministry Representative. affect a continuous air free column as the grout level
rises. Grout shall be placed quickly and
206.31.06 Installation continuously to avoid overworking, segregation,
(a) Installation Methods – Rock bolt bars shall be bleeding and disturbance of initial set. Grout that has
surrounded and secured in the hole using one of two stiffened due to delay in placing shall not be used in
possible methods (See SS Drawing SP206-01): the work and shall be disposed of at an authorized
location.
(i) Grout in bond zone, grout in free stressing length.
(g) Rock Face Preparation – The bearing surface shall be
(ii) Resin in bond zone, grout in free stressing length. prepared to allow the face plate to be oriented within the
A third method may be used as follows, if authorized by limits recommended by the anchor manufacturer. If
the Ministry Representative, due to field conditions: necessary, rock shall be chipped from around the face
plate contact area.
(iii) Resin in bond zone, resin in free stressing length.
(h) Mortar Pad Construction – Mortar pads shall be
(b) General – Rock bolts shall be inserted (or rotated) into constructed as required to ensure the bar alignment is
the drill holes and fully encapsulated in resin or grout to within twenty degrees (20) of a line perpendicular to the
the drill hole collar. When resin is used, the bolt shall be face plate. Mortar pads shall be installed where face
advanced and rotated at a rate recommended by the resin plates deform excessively under load. The pad shall not
manufacturer. crack or deform when loaded. Sufficient time shall be
(c) Anchorage Length – The anchorage length or bond zone provided to allow pads to achieve sufficient bearing
shall be the last 1000 mm of the inserted end of the bar, capacity prior to test-tensioning.
unless otherwise specified.

BC MoTI SS 2020 206 (3 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 120 of 470
SECTION 206 ROCK BOLTS

(i) End Hardware Installation 206.31.08 Rock Bolt Evaluation – The Ministry
Representative will implement a program of evaluation of
(i) Nuts shall bear uniformly against the face plate.
rock bolts installed. The Contractor shall perform the
(ii) The bolt extension beyond the nut shall be 100 mm following test procedure on randomly selected bolts. After
 10 mm. locking off the anchor, the load shall be re-applied to
determine the lift-off load. The lift-off load shall be the
206.31.07 Tensioning – All rock bolts shall be test-tensioned tension level at which the anchor nut can be loosened by hand.
and locked off following set-up (or curing) of the bond zone Lift-off tests shall be performed on rock bolts chosen by the
and before set-up of the free stressing length. Prior to testing, Ministry Representative to a minimum of 5% of the total
the bond zone grout and/or resin shall meet the strength number of rock bolts. One additional lift-off test on a
specified by the anchor manufacturer. The following different bolt shall be performed for each bolt whose lift-off
procedure applies to 22 mm diameter Grade 517 MPa steel load is not within 10% of the specified lock-off load.
bars. An alternative procedure may be specified for different Following lift-off testing, all bolts shall be locked off as
bar sizes. specified.
(a) Equipment – Equipment required for tensioning shall be
supplied by the Contractor and shall be of a size adequate
to provide the required tension. A torque wrench shall MEASUREMENT
not be used for tensioning. 206.81 Rock Bolts – Rock bolts will be measured by the
(b) Test-Tensioning and Creep Test – Rock bolts shall be METRE installed. The measurement length shall be the
test-tensioned to 186 kN (42,000 lb). The test load shall length of bar in the rock.
be held for 10 minutes for the creep test.
(c) Lock-Off Tension – Rock bolts shall be locked-off to a PAYMENT
design tension of 140 kN (31,500 lb) after testing.
206.91 Rock Bolts – Payment for ROCK BOLTS will be at
(d) Acceptance Criteria – During the creep test a load loss the Contract Unit Price per metre. Payment for rock bolts will
of greater than 10% of the load applied shall be indicative be authorized after installation to the contract specifications
of anchorage failure. Creep movement at the anchor head and after submittal of the completed Contractor’s Daily Rock
shall not exceed 2 mm during the creep test. A
Bolt Testing and Tensioning Record. The Unit Price will be
replacement rock bolt shall be installed at the
considered full compensation for all work and materials
Contractor's expense where these criteria are not met.
supplied according to the requirements of this Section.

BC MoTI SS 2020 206 (4 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 121 of 470
SECTION 206 ROCK BOLTS

BC MoTI SS 2020 206 (5 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 122 of 470
SECTION 206 ROCK BOLTS

BC MoTI SS 2020 206 (6 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 123 of 470
 SECTION 207

SLOPE MESH FOR ROCK CUTS

DESCRIPTION as appropriate. Damaged galvanizing shall be re-

galvanized at the Contractor's expense.
207.01 Scope – This Section applies to slope mesh
structures which are installed to provide rockfall protection. 207.11.01 Mesh – Mesh shall be 11 gauge (2.95 mm dia.)
hexagonal double-twist (i.e. three one-half turns) gabion
207.01.01 Scaling – Rock slope scaling, tree removal and
type mesh. Mesh wire shall meet ASTM A975 style 1
overburden excavation performed in conjunction with slope
consisting of carbon steel with a class 3 zinc coating of not
mesh installation shall be considered incidental to slope
less than 244 g/m² meeting ASTM A641. The weight of
meshing. Rock slope scaling, tree removal and overburden
zinc coating shall be determined by ASTM A90. The
excavation shall be completed before the mesh support
coating shall withstand four one-minute dips by the Preece
system is installed unless otherwise authorized by the
test, ASTM A239. Mesh opening shall be hexagonal in
Ministry Representative. Trees to be removed will be
shape and uniform in size measuring 80 mm by 100 mm.
detailed by the Ministry Representative.
207.11.02 Threadbar – Threadbar shall be steel hot-rolled
207.01.02 Materials Disposal – Discarded mesh
Grade 517 MPa, conforming to CSA G30.18.
components, scaled rock, trees and debris generated by the
slope meshing work shall be removed from the Site and 207.11.03 Eye nuts – Eye nuts shall be cast or
disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with manufactured eye nuts supplied by the threadbar
SS 145.27.02. Temporary storage of felled trees in ditches manufacturer.
will not be permitted.
207.11.04 Cables – All cables shall be fibre core
207.01.03 General Layout – The Contractor shall layout conforming to CSA G4. Cables shall be unspliced.
in the field all anchor and suspension cable locations for
207.11.05 Thimbles – Thimbles shall meet US Federal
each section for review by the Ministry Representative
Specification FF-T-276 Type III.
prior to installation.
207.11.06 Clips – Clips shall meet US Federal
207.01.04 Layout Variations – Field conditions may
Specification FF-C-450 Type 1, Class 1.
require final anchor, cable and mesh configurations to vary
from the Ministry's Drawings. All variations shall be 207.12 Grout
authorized by the Ministry Representative.
207.12.01 Anchors – Main anchors shall be secured in the
207.01.05 Mesh Sections – The area to be provided with drill hole using grout. Auxiliary anchors shall be secured
slope mesh protection shall be divided into sections with a in the drill hole using grout or resin.
maximum width of 24 m. Each section shall have a
separate suspension cable, end main anchors and end 207.12.02 Grout – Grout shall have the following
anchors. End main anchors of adjacent sections shall be properties:
positioned 200 mm apart. The gap between sections shall (a) be pre-mixed, unsanded, non-metallic, and non-shrink
be closed with mesh. cementitious grout containing silica fume.
207.01.06 Mesh Height – The maximum mesh height shall (b) may be mixed to a flowable consistency, typically with
be 80 m. a water to cement ratio of 0.35 or as specified by the
207.01.07 Impact Energy – The maximum rock impact grout manufacturer to achieve or exceed the required
energies shall be as follows: strength.
(c) minimum 7 day compressive strength of 30 MPa and a
• 3 kJ above cut crest
minimum 28 day compressive strength of 40 MPa,
• 30 kJ below cut crest tested in accordance with CSA A23.2-09.
(d) admixtures to be used according to the manufacturer's
specifications and as authorized by the Ministry
MATERIALS Representative.
207.11 Slope Meshing Materials – Unless otherwise (e) calcium chloride-based accelerators are not permitted.
specified, preparation and installation of materials shall be
according to manufacturer's recommendations. 207.12.03 Resin – Resin shall have the following
properties:
All components shall be hot dip galvanized by the
manufacturer conforming to ASTM A123 or ASTM A153, (a) be supplied in cartridge form.

BC MoTI SS 2020 207 (1 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 124 of 470
SECTION 207 SLOPE MESH FOR ROCK CUTS

(b) a minimum unconfined compressive strength of 207.31.05 Auxiliary Anchors – Auxiliary anchors shall be
90 MPa when fully mixed and cured and tested in located to minimize potential for main anchor bending.
accordance with CSA A23.2-09.
207.31.06 Guy Anchors and Cables – Main anchors may
(c) be encased in a plastic film that provides optimum be substituted, where authorized by the Ministry
resistance to moisture and is easily ruptured to enable Representative, with a limited number of guy cables
complete mixing during installation. directly connected to the suspension cable where no
suitable main anchor locations can be found. Guy cable
(d) suitable thixotropic and viscous properties to permit
anchors shall be located to maximize suspension cable
adequate mixing of the resin components by rotation of
elevation. See Section Y-Y, on SS Drawing SP207-02 and
the rock bolt bar and to contain the resin within the drill
Detail B on SS Drawing SP207-03.
hole.
207.31.07 Embedded Length – Auxiliary or guy anchor
(e) an easily identifiable gel time recommended by the
embedded length may require extension if weak rock
resin manufacturer.
conditions are encountered.
(f) reach 80% of its ultimate strength within a time
207.32 Soil Anchors – Soil anchors are incidental to slope
interval equal to five times the gel time.
meshing and may be required in place of end main, main,
(g) be non-shrink after the gel time. guy and/or auxiliary anchors where:
(h) be unaffected by mild acids or mild alkalis. • Bedrock is not at ground surface.
(i) be in cartridge boxes labelled with the resin expiry • Overburden thickness is greater than 0.6 m.
date.
• Required at any other locations or as ordered by
207.13 Conformance Documents – Prior to installation the Ministry Representative.
the contractor shall supply documents of conformance to
project specifications of all materials upon request. For soil anchor details see SS Drawings SP207-04 and
SP207-05.
Concrete requirements for soil anchors:
CONSTRUCTION
• Minimum compressive strength at 28 days =
207.31 Anchor Installation 30 MPa
207.31.01 Overburden – Overburden shall be excavated to • Maximum nominal size of aggregate = 28 mm
rock at anchor locations unless specified otherwise. The
Contractor shall minimize disturbance of surrounding soil • Air content = 5  1%
and rock when excavating. Overburden shall be removed
• Slump = 55  20 mm
as necessary so that cables do not contact ground surface.
• Maximum w/c ratio by mass = 0.45
207.31.02 Ground Clearance – The minimum ground
clearance for the suspension cable shall be 0.6 m between Upon request by the Ministry Representative, the
anchors, or up to 1.5 m if so specified. A maximum of one Contractor shall load test 10% of the overburden soil
connector may be used above the ground to extend any anchors to 10 kN to verify capacity or as authorized by the
main anchor as necessary to achieve the required clearance. Ministry Representative.
Suspension cable clearance shall be maximized where
207.33 Cable and Mesh Installation – Suspension,
possible by appropriate selection of anchor locations.
auxiliary, end, and guy cables shall be installed to nominal
207.31.03 All Anchors – Anchor holes shall be a minimum tension to remove slack before and after installing mesh.
of 1.5 times anchor diameter and in strong, competent rock. Terminate lacing cable ends with a loop through the end
Anchors shall be centered in the hole and grouted. Anchors main anchor eye nut, secured to the suspension cable or the
shall not be loaded within 3 days of grouting. lacing cable itself using two clips, 19 mm or 6 mm
respectively.
207.31.04 Main Anchors – Main anchors shall be located
at local high points where practicable to maximize A maximum of two horizontal mesh seams (200 mm
clearance between suspension cable and ground surface. overlap) shall be permitted along the entire mesh height.
Main anchors shall be vertical and centered in the hole The upper mesh portion shall be between the slope and
unless otherwise authorized by the Ministry lower mesh at the overlap. The horizontal seam
Representative. Main anchor height above ground surface connections shall be similar to the vertical seams.
may be reduced where authorized by the Ministry
Unless otherwise specified on the Contract Drawings or by
Representative for field conditions.
the Ministry Representative, the mesh shall terminate
1500 mm above the highway edge of pavement elevation.

BC MoTI SS 2020 207 (2 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 125 of 470
SECTION 207 SLOPE MESH FOR ROCK CUTS

The bottom of the mesh shall be evenly trimmed parallel PAYMENT

with the highway elevation. The bottom of the mesh shall
207.91 Slope Mesh – Payment for SLOPE MESH will be
be bent to remove the curl.
at the Contract Unit Price per square metre installed. The
Unit Price will be full compensation for all requirements in
this specification. Partial payment may be authorized
MEASUREMENT
where all components have been installed in a portion of the
207.81 Slope Mesh – Slope mesh shall be measured by the designated slope meshing area. No separate payment will
SQUARE METRE of slope meshed area. be made for mesh overlap.

BC MoTI SS 2020 207 (3 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 126 of 470
SECTION 207 SLOPE MESH FOR ROCK CUTS

BC MoTI SS 2020 207 (4 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 127 of 470
SECTION 207 SLOPE MESH FOR ROCK CUTS

BC MoTI SS 2020 207 (5 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 128 of 470
SECTION 207 SLOPE MESH FOR ROCK CUTS

BC MoTI SS 2020 207 (6 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 129 of 470
SECTION 207 SLOPE MESH FOR ROCK CUTS

BC MoTI SS 2020 207 (7 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 130 of 470
SECTION 207 SLOPE MESH FOR ROCK CUTS

BC MoTI SS 2020 207 (8 of 8)

Vol. 1 Page 131 of 470
 SECTION 208

DRAINS FOR ROCK CUTS

DESCRIPTION Ministry Representative. Finished holes shall be flushed

with air to remove deleterious materials.
208.01 Scope – This Section covers the installation of lined
drains in the designated areas to the specified depth. The 208.32 PVC Pipe Installation – PVC pipes shall be
exact locations of drain holes will be dependent on field installed into the finished holes immediately after flushing.
conditions and will be detailed by the Ministry Pipes shall be coupled according to the manufacturer's
Representative. specifications. The pipe shall be installed along the entire
length of the holes and shall protrude 0.30 m out of the rock
face. The slots shall be on top when the pipe is installed.
MATERIALS The pipe shall be secured in the hole, using plastic or
wooden wedges driven into the hole collar if necessary, so
208.11 PVC Pipe Materials – Drain hole lining shall
that the pipe cannot be pulled out by hand.
consist of Schedule 40 slotted PVC pipe. The outside
diameter of the pipe shall not be less than 67% of the
borehole diameter, and the internal diameter of the pipe
MEASUREMENT
shall be a minimum of 19 mm. The slots shall be along the
entire length of the pipe in one row. Unless otherwise 208.81 Lined Drains – Lined drains will be measured by
specified, the slots shall be 0.5 mm wide, spaced 6 mm apart the METRE of drain hole drilled.
and have a minimum length of 30% of the outside
circumference of the pipe.
PAYMENT
208.91 Lined Drains – Payment for LINED DRAINS will
CONSTRUCTION
be at the Contract Unit Price per metre. Payment for lined
208.31 Drilling – Advancement of drilling for drain holes drains will be authorized after installation to the Contract
shall be in an upslope direction. The dip angle for drain specifications. The Unit Price will be considered full
holes shall be five degrees (5), or as specified by the compensation for all work and materials necessary to
complete the installation prescribed in this Section.

BC MoTI SS 2020 208 (1 of 1)

Vol. 1 Page 132 of 470
 SECTION 209

SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS

DESCRIPTION 209.03 Submittals

209.01 General – Unless otherwise specified, the shotcrete 209.03.01 The Contractor shall submit for review the
standards of American Concrete Institute (ACI) 506.2 following documentation by the pre-construction meeting:
Specification for Shotcrete and the standards of good
(a) Qualifications and Experience of the Contractor –
practice in ACI 506R Guide to Shotcrete shall apply.
Provide a statement of the qualifications, experience
SS 211, Portland Cement Concrete, shall also apply for
and work function of all personnel assigned to shotcrete
shotcrete, unless otherwise specified.
duties. A statement of previous work experience on
Shotcrete operations shall include, but not be limited to pre- similar projects shall also be provided. This statement
construction and construction work including preparation of shall include the project name, location, type of
the mix design(s), quality control, surface preparation; shotcrete, volume of shotcrete, year constructed and the
installation of wick drains, weep holes and pipes; supply owner contact name. The company, the nozzle operator
and installation of the shotcrete; preconstruction and and the predampener/pot operator shall each have a
construction testing, and curing; the supply, transportation minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience on
and testing of shotcrete panels; any core extraction of the in- shotcrete work.
place shotcrete, and any other testing to determine curing or
(b) Qualifications and Experience of the Contractor’s
protection requirements.
Consultant – The qualifications shall include the name
209.02 Quality Control of the consulting firm, and the name and qualifications
of the Consultant’s on-site representative who will be
209.02.01 General – The Contractor shall engage at its own
providing the quality control. The following
expense, a specialist firm (the Contractor’s Consultant) to
information shall be included in the qualifications
provide on-site quality control for shotcrete operations. The
submitted:
Contractor’s Consultant shall not be an employee of the
Contractor. • Project name, location and experience.
209.02.02 Qualifications – The Contractor's Consultant • Contact name and phone number of the owner who
shall have designed shotcrete for at least three (3) projects can verify the experience of the Contractor’s
over the last five (5) years. The Contractor's Consultant's Consultant’s site representative.
representative conducting on-site shotcrete tests shall be an
ACI or Canadian Council of Independent Laboratories (c) Proposed Laboratory Testing Agency – Provide a
(CCIL) certified concrete technician. statement of the testing agency's experience in
performing laboratory tests on shotcrete. The agency
209.02.03 Specific Requirements – For wet and dry shall be an independent, qualified laboratory with a
process shotcrete, quality control shall include, but not be proven record of performing tests on shotcrete on at
limited to the following: least five (5) previous projects. The testing agency
shall be certified by CCIL to CSA A283 Qualification
• Observation of surface preparation before
Code for Concrete Testing Laboratories.
shotcrete application.
(d) Certification of the Concrete Technician – Provide
• Observation and testing during shotcrete
evidence of ACI or CCIL Certification for the concrete
application.
technician who will be providing on-site shotcrete tests.
• Observation of curing operations. 209.03.02 Documentation – The Contractor shall submit
209.02.04 Other Requirements – The Contractor’s the following documentation at least ten (10) days prior to
Consultant shall be present at other times as are appropriate commencing shotcrete operations to the Ministry
to assist the Contractor in the preparation, assessment and Representative:
adjustment of the various procedures to be used for (a) Proposed Shotcrete Operations – Provide a
shotcrete operations. description of the proposed shotcrete operations
209.02.05 Field Report – The Contractor shall ensure that including slope preparation method, shotcrete
the Contractor’s Consultant prepares a field report for each application method, and shotcrete curing and protection
site visit, signed by the Contractor’s Consultant. The report methods.
shall include details of the progress of shotcrete operations,
any recommendations made to the Contractor and any
problems encountered by the Contractor.

BC MoTI SS 2020 209 (1 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 133 of 470
SECTION 209 SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS

(b) Materials Records – Provide records showing source (ii) Nozzleman Name
and proof of conformance to project specifications of
(iii) Helper Name
the following materials:
(iv) Contractor’s Consultant’s Name (for wet process
(i) Portland Cement (provide mill certificates)
shotcrete)
(ii) Silica Fume (provide mill certificates)
(v) Contractor’s Consultant’s Representatives Name
(iii) Mix Water (for wet process shotcrete)
(iv) Aggregates (vi) Date
(v) Admixtures (provide supplier data sheets) (vii) Weather
(vi) Fibre Reinforcement (if specified), include (viii) Contractor’s start and end time
load/deflection curves to ASTM C1609 for the
(ix) Shotcrete equipment type
proposed mix design
(x) Temperature
(vii) Mesh Reinforcement (if specified, provide mill
certificates) (xi) Type of shotcrete (wet or dry process)
(c) Previous Performance Data – Provide previous (xii) When slump is measured (before or after
performance data for the proposed shotcrete mix admixture and fibres)
design, if available.
(c) Shotcrete Batch Records – Submit the following
(d) Proposed Shotcrete Mix Design (Proportions) – information for each batch of shotcrete:
Provide documentation for the proposed shotcrete mix
design. Include such back-up data as requested. The (i) Batch number
proposed mix design submittal shall include: (ii) Location of shotcrete
(i) Mix design number. (iii) Mix design number
(ii) Batch quantities in kg/m³ based on aggregates in (iv) Batch time at plant (wet process)
an SSD (Saturated Surface Dry) moisture state for
wet process shotcrete and ready mix supplied dry (v) Batch arrival time on-site
process shotcrete. Batch quantities for dry bagged (vi) Truck departure time (wet process)
supply shall be based on mass of aggregates in a
dry state. (vii) Placement start time

(iii) A total cementitious content of not less than 20% (viii) Placement end time
by mass of the total ingredients. (ix) Quantity used
(iv) Aggregate source, bulk density, absorption, (x) Water/cementitious materials ratio (wet process)
combined gradation data and a grain size
distribution graph scaled between 0.075 mm and (xi) As-shot air content (wet process)
20 mm showing the percent passing curve for the (xii) Slump (wet process) – indicate when measurement
combined aggregate. is made (e.g.: after air entrainment is added, before
(e) Proposed Shotcrete Imprint – Provide a drawing of superplasticizer is added and before fibre
the proposed shotcrete imprint including content, reinforcement is added)
imprinting method and materials that will be used to (xiii) Percent rebound (visual estimate)
produce the imprint.
(xiv) Average thickness of shotcrete
209.03.03 The Contractor shall submit for review the
following documentation within 1 day following each day (xv) Test panel number
of shotcrete application: (xvi) Shotcrete delivery tickets from batch plant (wet
(a) Field Report – Provide original field reports signed by process)
the Contractor’s Consultant. (xvii) Comments on the quality of the shotcrete and any
(b) Daily General Records – Provide daily shotcrete problems that arise
records with the following information (certified by the (xviii) Proposed revised mix design
Contractor's Consultant in the case of wet process
shotcrete): 209.03.04 The Contractor shall submit the laboratory test
results within two (2) working days after testing to the
(i) Contractor Name Ministry Representative. These test results shall compare

BC MoTI SS 2020 209 (2 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 134 of 470
SECTION 209 SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS

the shotcrete performance with the requirements given in 209.04.08 Sloughing (also called sagging) – Subsidence of
Table 209-A. shotcrete, due generally to excessive water in the mix or
placing too great a thickness of shotcrete in a single pass.
Records shall include all reporting requirements outlined for
construction testing. Records shall also include an original 209.04.09 Weep Pipes – Plastic pipes inserted in water
summary report of all test results, showing the sample bearing fissures to relieve water pressure from behind the
number, sample origin, panel number, panel origin, date the shotcrete.
panel was sprayed, panel shipping date, date panel received
209.04.10 Wet Process Shotcrete – Shotcrete in which all
at the laboratory, photos of prepared test samples, test date,
of the ingredients are mixed before introduction into the
sample age at testing, test results for each sample, average
delivery hose. Compressed air is introduced to the material
test results of each set of three samples taken pursuant to
flow at the nozzle. If an accelerator is used, it is normally
SS 209.39 for each test at a given age, and acceptability of
added at the nozzle.
the results.
209.04 Definitions – The following definitions refer to
words and terms used in this specification. For definitions MATERIALS
not covered in this document, refer to ACI 506R and
ACI 506.2. 209.11 Materials
209.11.01 Cement – Cement shall be Type GU or HE, or
209.04.01 Blow pipe – Air / water jet operated by nozzle
where approved by the Ministry Representative, Type GUL.
operator's helper during shotcrete placement to assist in
GUL cement may be used only if:
keeping rebound and overspray out of the work.
209.04.02 Dry Process Shotcrete – A process where most (a) Shotcrete is not subject to very severe sulphate
exposure conditions on Site (CSA A23.1 exposure
of the water added to the shotcrete mixture is added at the
condition S-1); and
nozzle.
(b) GUL cement, silica fume, and any other supplementary
209.04.03 Overspray – Shotcrete material deposited away
cementitious materials and additives proposed to be use
from the intended receiving surface.
are assessed for compatibility, and collectively will not
209.04.04 Pot (Sometimes called Gun) – Machine used to produce any deleterious effects on the long-term
meter the shotcrete into the hose. properties of the shotcrete or its bond to the substrate.
209.04.05 Predampener – Device used to mix a portion of 209.11.02 Silica Fume – Silica fume shall meet the
the mixing water with the shotcrete. Can also be used to requirements of CSA-A23.5 [See CSA A3000],
mix accelerator with shotcrete. Supplementary Cementing Materials, Type U Silica Fume,
with the following additional requirements:
209.04.06 Saturated Surface Dry – The state of a material
in which it will neither add nor subtract moisture from other • Minimum Si02 content – 90 percent (90%) by mass
material placed in contact with it.
• Maximum carbon content: 5 percent (5%) by mass
209.04.07 Slake – A process of deterioration of freshly
The Contractor may propose alternatives to silica fume,
exposed rock due to exposure to the atmosphere and/or
which shall be subject to approval by the Ministry
water.
Representative.
209.11.03 Pozzolan – Pozzolan shall be Type F flyash.

Table 209-A: Shotcrete Performance Requirements

Age Specified
Test Description Test Method
(Days) Requirement
*Maximum Water / Cementitious Materials Ratio - 0.45
Air Content – As Shot, % CSA A23.2-4C - 4  1½
*Slump at discharge into shotcrete pump, mm CSA A23.2-5C - 80  30
7 30
Minimum Compressive Strength, MPa CSA A23.2-14C
28 40
Minimum Flexural Strength, MPa ASTM C1609 7 4
Minimum Toughness Performance Level (TPL) ASTM C1609 and this specification 7 III
Maximum Boiled Absorption, % CSA A23.2 – 11C 7 8
Maximum Volume of Permeable Voids, % ASTM C642 7 17
Notes: *Properties apply to wet process shotcrete only.

BC MoTI SS 2020 209 (3 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 135 of 470
SECTION 209 SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS

209.11.04 Water – Surface or ground water may be used (v) dry process shotcrete shall be liquid, dispensed at
for cleaning the slope and curing provided it is free of the nozzle in closely controlled quantities; or be
deleterious substances. Verification that the water intended powdered and either:
for use is acceptable is at the discretion of the Ministry
• Integrally mixed in the case of dry bagged
Representative and at the expense of the Contractor.
material or;
209.11.05 Aggregates – Aggregate shall be normal density.
• Mechanically proportioned through the
The combined aggregate gradation limits shall meet the
predampener in the case of ready mix supply;
limits shown in Table 209-B.
metering of accelerators directly into the pot
will not be permitted.
Table 209-B: Combined Gradation Limits for
209.11.07 Fibre Reinforcement – Unless otherwise
Shotcrete Aggregate
specified, shotcrete reinforcement shall consist of steel or
Metric Sieve Total Passing polyolefin fibres. The fibres shall be capable of meeting the
U.S. STD performance criteria specified in Table 209-A and the
Size Each Sieve Size
Square Mesh following requirements:
(mm) (% By Mass)
(a) Steel Fibres – Fibres shall meet the requirements of
1/2 14 100
ASTM C1116 Type I.
3/8 10 90 – 100
(b) Polyolefin Fibres – Fibres shall only be used in wet
#4 5 70 – 85 process shotcrete and shall meet the requirements of
#8 2.5 50 – 70 ASTM C1116 Type III.
#16 1.25 35 – 55 209.11.08 Mesh Reinforcement – Where specified instead
of or in addition to fibre reinforcement, shotcrete shall be
#30 0.630 20 – 35 reinforced with mesh anchored to the surface before
#50 0.315 8 – 20 shotcrete application. For fibre reinforced shotcrete,
additional reinforcement may be required by placing mesh
#100 0.160 2 – 10
panels up to 0.60 m by 0.60 m without anchors between
successive shotcrete lifts where final shotcrete thicknesses
209.11.06 Admixtures are expected to exceed 300 mm in local areas.

(a) General – Chemical admixtures shall include air- (a) Mesh Materials – Mesh shall consist of welded wire
entraining, water reducing and set retarding admixtures fabric 102 mm by 102 mm opening (4 by 4 inch) by
where appropriate. MW13.3 / MW13.3 (8 gauge) wire meeting ASTM
A1064 and hot dip galvanized meeting ASTM A123.
(b) Superplasticizers – Superplasticizers shall meet the
requirements of ASTM C1141. (b) Mesh Anchors – Anchors shall consist of
Grade 517 MPa steel, conforming to CSA G30.18,
(c) Accelerating Admixtures in General – Accelerating minimum 19 mm nominal diameter.
admixtures shall only be used with the written consent
of the Ministry Representative. Face plates shall be 150 mm by 150 mm by 6 mm.
Face plates, nuts and washers shall be capable of
(d) Accelerating Admixture Requirements – developing full anchor pullout capacity.
Accelerating admixtures:
(c) Mesh Anchorage – Mesh anchors shall be secured by
(i) shall be non-chloride based accelerating resin or grout.
admixtures meeting the requirements of CSA
A23.1M Clause 15.1.7.1; (i) Grout – Grout shall have the following properties:

(ii) shall be compatible with the cement being used (A) be pre-mixed, unsanded, non-metallic, and
when tested in accordance with ASTM C1141; non-shrink cementitious grout containing
silica fume.
(iii) shall have a demonstrated ability, when used at the
required proportions, to produce accelerated (B) may be mixed to a flowable consistency,
shotcrete meeting the performance criteria typically with a water to cement ratio of 0.35
specified in Table 209-A; or as specified by the grout manufacturer to
achieve or exceed the required strength.
(iv) wet process shotcrete shall be liquid, dispensed at
the nozzle in closely controlled quantities; (C) minimum 7-day compressive strength of
30 MPa and a minimum 28 day compressive

BC MoTI SS 2020 209 (4 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 136 of 470
SECTION 209 SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS

strength of 40 MPa, tested in accordance with tested to 186 kN. This load shall be held for 10
CSA A23.2-09. minutes. A load loss of greater than 10% of the applied
load shall be indicative of anchorage failure. Any
(D) admixtures to be used according to the
failed anchors shall be replaced at the Contractor's
manufacturer's specifications and as
expense.
authorized by the Ministry Representative.
209.11.09 Anchor Reinforcement – Where specified,
(E) calcium chloride-based accelerators are not
anchor reinforcement shall be installed. Anchor materials,
permitted.
installation and testing shall meet the requirements for mesh
(ii) Resin – Resin shall have the following properties: anchors unless otherwise specified. Face plates for these
anchors shall be “Spider Plates”. These anchors and plates
(A) be supplied in cartridge form.
shall be fully embedded in the shotcrete.
(B) a minimum unconfined compressive strength
209.11.10 Materials Handling and Storage
of 90 MPa when fully mixed and cured and
tested in accordance with CSA A23.2-09. (a) General – All materials shall be stored and handled in
a manner that will prevent damage, deterioration or
(C) be encased in a plastic film that provides contamination.
optimum resistance to moisture and is easily
ruptured to enable complete mixing during (b) Hot Weather Storage – During hot weather prebagged
installation. material shall be stored in a manner that will allow
maximum cooling of the material.
(D) suitable thixotropic and viscous properties to
permit adequate mixing of the resin (c) Cold Weather Storage – During cold weather
components by rotation of the rock bolt bar prebagged material shall be stored in a manner that will
and to contain the resin within the drill hole. provide maximum heat retention of the material.
(E) an easily identifiable gel time recommended 209.12 Performance Requirements
by the resin manufacturer.
209.12.01 General – Shotcrete shall meet the performance
(F) reach 80% of its ultimate strength within a requirements in Table 209-A.
time interval equal to five times the gel time.
209.12.02 Air Content – The air content shall be
(G) be non-shrink after the gel time. determined on wet process shotcrete sprayed into a CSA-
A23.2-4C air pressure meter base or freshly applied material
(H) be unaffected by mild acids or mild alkalis.
removed from in-place and consolidated into the air meter
(I) be supplied in cartridge boxes labelled with base by rodding.
the resin expiry date.
(d) Mesh Coverage and Overlap – Mesh shall be installed
CONSTRUCTION
over the entire area to be shotcreted, unless otherwise
specified. Mesh joints shall be lapped 1.5 mesh 209.31 Batching, Mixing and Conveyance
openings in each direction (horizontally and vertically)
209.31.01 General – Shotcrete shall be batched, mixed and
and tied at minimum 100 mm intervals with 16 gauge
supplied using (one of) the following system(s):
tie wire to achieve full contact between mesh layers.
(a) dry bagged pre mix supply to ASTM C928 or:
(e) Mesh Anchor Spacing – Mesh shall be anchored on
minimum 1.2 m centres in each direction or closer (b) ready mix supply
where required to form the mesh to within 50 mm of
209.31.02 Mixing – Shotcrete supplied shall be uniformly
the slope surface. The mesh shall be in full contact with
mixed with no evidence of segregation or improper mixing.
the surface where practicable. The mesh may also be
anchored to any previously installed rock bolts 209.31.03 Batching and Conveyance – Ready mix
provided the spacing is consistent with the spacing supplied shotcrete shall be batched and conveyed at a rate
required for the above anchors. that allows a consistent application of shotcrete.
Irregularities of conveyance that result in delays or a surplus
(f) Anchor Installation – Anchors shall be installed as
of aged material on-site shall be avoided. Shotcrete that is
recommended by the anchor manufacturer. The
more than 90 minutes old from the time of batching will not
minimum anchor embedment length shall be 1.0 m or
be accepted, unless hydration controlling admixtures are
as specified. Resin or grout shall be applied to full
used to maintain suitable slump. Shotcrete that has stiffened
anchor embedment.
excessively shall not be used.
(g) Mesh Anchor Testing – A total of 5% of the anchors,
209.32 Pre-construction Testing
selected by the Ministry Representative, shall be load

BC MoTI SS 2020 209 (5 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 137 of 470
SECTION 209 SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS

209.32.01 General – The Contractor shall perform pre- weather unless protective measures can be practicably
construction shotcrete tests (prior to full-scale shotcrete taken.
operations), at a shotcrete test site chosen by the Ministry
209.33.02 Hot Weather – During periods of hot weather,
Representative, to demonstrate the competence of the crew,
when ambient temperatures are expected to rise over 30°C,
the adequacy of the equipment and the adequacy of the
the following requirements shall be met
shotcrete mix design. The requirement for pre-construction
testing may be waived by the Ministry Representative if (a) Curing – The Contractor shall implement curing
sufficient documentation of previous satisfactory immediately after the shotcrete has been placed.
performance on similar work is provided.
(b) Temperature at Placement – The Contractor shall
209.32.02 Previous Performance – Documentation for take any steps necessary to ensure that the temperature
previous satisfactory performance shall meet the following of the shotcrete supplied to the site is less than 25°C at
requirements: the time of placement.
(a) Company – The company shall have applied more than 209.33.03 Cold Weather – During periods of cold weather,
100 m³ of shotcrete on a minimum of 3 projects in the where the minimum ambient air temperature falls below
last 5 years. 5°C, the following requirements shall be met:
(b) Nozzle Operator – The nozzle operator shall have (a) Temperature at Placement – The Contractor shall
applied more than 100 m³ of shotcrete on a minimum take whatever steps are necessary to ensure that the in-
of 3 projects in the last 5 years. place shotcrete temperature is between 10°C and 25°C
at the time of placement.
(c) Predampener/Pot Operator – The predampener/pot
operator shall have mixed more than 100 m³ of (b) Initial Curing Temperature – The Contractor shall
shotcrete on a minimum of 3 projects in the last 5 years. ensure that, during the initial curing period (4 days), the
in-place shotcrete temperature will not fall below 5°C.
(d) Contacts – The contact name and number for each
Shotcrete shall not be placed unless measures can be
project above shall be supplied upon request.
practicably taken to ensure these requirements are met.
209.32.03 Application – Shotcrete applied at the shotcrete
(c) Temperature at the Pot – The Contractor shall not
test site shall be applied in accordance with the general
allow the temperature of the dampened dry process
shotcrete provisions in these specifications.
shotcrete at the pot to exceed 30°C.
209.32.04 Test Panel – One test panel shall be shot and
(d) Ice, Snow or Frozen Surfaces – Shotcrete shall not be
tested for the pre-construction shotcrete testing as described
applied to frozen surfaces, or surfaces covered with
for construction testing.
frost, ice or snow.
209.32.05 Test Results – The Contractor shall not apply
209.34 Surface Preparation – Surfaces to which shotcrete
shotcrete outside of the shotcrete test site area until the pre-
is applied shall be cleaned of loose rock, dirt and debris
construction shotcrete test results have been evaluated by
which if left in place could impair the bond of shotcrete to
the Ministry Representative and authorization is given to
rock, concrete or existing shotcrete. Water or air and water
proceed with the work.
jets shall be used to clean rock surfaces. Compressed air
209.32.06 Revised Methods – If the results of the shotcrete only shall be used to clean rock surfaces that have a
tests are unsatisfactory in the opinion of the Ministry tendency to slake from contact with water.
Representative, then, notwithstanding the Ministry
209.35 Drainage – Unless otherwise controlled, water
Representative's prior review of the Contractor's pre-
seepage from slopes shall be controlled by installing weep
construction submittals, the Contractor shall adopt such
holes, weep pipes, and wick drains. Surface runoff shall be
revised methods as are necessary to achieve the required
controlled using suitable water diversion systems.
results.
209.35.01 Weep Holes – Weep holes (and weep pipes as
209.32.07 Additional Tests – The Contractor shall
required) shall be installed before shotcrete is applied.
perform, at any time during the progress of the work,
These weep holes shall be on 1 m to 1.5 m centres in the
additional shotcrete tests at designated test sites if the
areas to be shotcreted in joints, fractures and faults, or at a
shotcrete applied in the areas specified in the Contract are
closer spacing where required by the Ministry
unsatisfactory in the opinion of the Ministry Representative.
Representative. Holes and pipes shall be inclined to permit
209.33 Weather Conditions free drainage.
209.33.01 Heavy Rain or High Wind – During periods of 209.35.02 Weep Pipes – To prevent blockage of weep holes
heavy rain or high wind, the Contractor shall ensure that the due to entry of shotcrete or rebound materials, weep pipes
quality of the finished shotcrete product is not shall be secured in weep holes and temporarily plugged at
compromised. Shotcrete shall not be applied during such the outer end of the pipe. The plugs shall be removed when

BC MoTI SS 2020 209 (6 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 138 of 470
SECTION 209 SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS

shotcreting is completed. Weep pipes shall consist of through the shotcrete as described in the following
25 mm minimum outside diameter Schedule 40 plastic pipe. subsections.
209.35.03 Active Seepage Areas – Where active seepage 209.36.01 Extension of Rock Bolts – Unless otherwise
occurs, weep holes shall be drilled approximately 150 mm specified, where rock is fractured within 0.5 m of the
or more to intercept fractures or openings wherever existing rock bolts, the face plates and nuts shall be removed
practicable and weep pipes shall be installed prior to the before shotcrete is applied. The bar shall be extended,
application of shotcrete. Where drilling is not practicable, where necessary, using a short piece of bar and a coupler.
the weep pipes shall be secured in the fractures by other The shotcrete shall be applied up to and against the existing
appropriate means. bar. The face plates and nuts shall then be reinstalled over
the shotcrete after the shotcrete has cured. Each face plate
209.35.04 No Active Seepage Areas – Where no active
shall be replaced to the same bar from which it was
seepage occurs, weep holes shall be installed in joints,
removed. The exposed bar length shall be 100 mm
fractures and faults by one of the following methods:
following reinstallation of the face plate. The bar shall be
(a) by securing the weep pipes by appropriate means nominally tensioned (using a wrench to the nut).
before shotcreting;
209.36.02 Protection of Rock Bolts – All other rock bolts
(b) by marking locations using sticks or other appropriate shall be protected from overspray. Where overspray was
means before or during shotcreting and drilling at the not anticipated, the affected rock bolts shall be cleaned off
marked locations after shotcreting. Weep holes shall by appropriate means.
be 25 mm diameter and shall be drilled to intersect the
209.37 Application
joints, fractures and faults under the shotcrete at the
marked locations. Weep pipes are not required for such 209.37.01 General – Prior to application of any shotcrete,
holes. the Contractor shall obtain authorization to proceed after the
areas prepared for shotcrete have been reviewed by the
209.35.05 Weep Pipe Removal or Cutting – Weep pipes
Ministry Representative. Review by the Ministry
shall be removed or cut level with the shotcrete surface after
Representative shall not relieve the Contractor from the
the shotcrete has reached initial set, within one day after
responsibility for ensuring that the shotcrete operations are
application.
conducted in a satisfactory manner in accordance with these
209.35.06 Additional Weep Holes – Additional weep holes specifications.
shall be drilled after shotcreting where there are visible
209.37.02 Wetted Surface – Not more than one hour prior
signs of water pressure, such as seepage and damp spots in
to application of shotcrete, all surfaces (except slaking
the hardened shotcrete.
ground) to be shotcreted shall be sprayed with water.
209.35.07 Wick Drains – In areas of active seepage, wick Wetted surfaces shall be allowed to dry back to a saturated-
drains shall be installed before shotcreting in addition to surface-dry condition prior to application of shotcrete. If
weep holes if requested by the Ministry Representative. necessary, a blow-pipe shall be used to facilitate removal of
Wick drains shall consist of a flexible polypropylene core surface water. Compressed air used in the blow pipe shall
drain wrapped with a proven durable geotextile filter fabric. be oil-free.
Wick drains shall be 3 mm by 100 mm size (variable
209.37.03 Shotcrete Layers – Wherever possible, shotcrete
length), with #120 sieve filter, 0.17 mm/s filter
shall be applied to the full thickness in a single layer,
permeability, and 0.8 kN core grab tensile strength. They
provided it does not slough or become delaminated. If
shall be able to withstand all handling, abrasion and
multiple lifts are required, the previous shotcrete lifts shall
distortion that occur during installation. Wick drains shall
be scraped or broomed prior to the time of set to remove any
be secured to the surface on maximum 0.5 m centres with
loose material, rebound, overspray, laitance or any other
pneumatically driven nails, or authorized substitute
material that may impair bond of subsequent layers.
fasteners. Fastener spacing shall be reduced where required
Previous lifts shall be prevented from drying out by moist
to ensure wick drains are in full contact with the surface.
curing. Construction joints shall be to a 45 edge.
Wick drains shall be installed and covered with shotcrete in
a manner that allows gravity drainage to the toe of the slope. 209.37.04 Rebound and Overspray – A blow pipe shall be
used during the course of the work to remove accumulations
209.35.08 Surface Runoff – Where the bond of shotcrete
of rebound and overspray from areas to be shotcreted.
to rock may be impaired by surface water runoff, this water
Rebound and overspray shall not be incorporated in the
shall be controlled and directed away from the area to be
completed work.
shotcreted.
209.37.05 Thickness and Area Covered – In general, an
209.36 Existing Rock Bolts – Within or near areas
average thickness of 100 mm of shotcrete shall be applied
designated for shotcrete where rock bolts were installed (not
over fractures, joints and faults in the areas designated for
for the sole purpose of securing mesh) prior to shotcrete
shotcrete, unless otherwise specified by the Ministry
application, the rock bolts shall be protected or extended

BC MoTI SS 2020 209 (7 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 139 of 470
SECTION 209 SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS

Representative. In general, shotcrete shall cover laterally to 209.38.04 Sampling and Testing – If compressive strength
a maximum of 0.50 m beyond fractures, joints and faults samples are used to determine curing or protection
over solid rock or concrete areas. requirements, the cost for obtaining the samples, shipping
the samples and performing the tests shall be the
209.37.06 Access – Suitable devices shall be employed to
responsibility of the Contractor. Extraction of cores shall
allow access to the work for shotcreting. Access shall be
be in accordance with CSA A23.2-14C. Compressive
such that fresh shotcrete is not damaged by hoses,
strength testing shall be performed according to
equipment or personnel.
requirements for construction testing.
209.37.07 Surface Finish – The shotcrete surface shall be
209.39 Construction Testing
left in a natural gun state unless otherwise specified.
209.39.01 On-Site Tests – For wet process shotcrete, the
209.37.08 Embedments – A cover of 50 mm of shotcrete
following on-site tests shall be conducted for each truck:
shall be applied over any reinforcing steel or other
embedments. If greater total thicknesses of shotcrete are • As-placed air content; and
applied to encapsulate the embedments this work shall be
• Slump at discharge into pump.
performed at no cost to the Ministry.
209.39.02 Thickness Monitoring – The Contractor shall
209.37.09 Imprint – The plastic shotcrete surface shall be
monitor the thickness of shotcrete applied using depth
neatly imprinted with capitalized lettering 75 mm high with
gauges or probes. Thickness shall be measured on 1.0 m
the following information arranged in the order listed
centres or closer as required to provide thickness control.
below:
209.39.03 Test Panels in General – The Contractor shall
• MoTI
produce test panels in accordance with the requirements of
• The shotcrete completion date, in the format ASTM C1140, but panels shall have minimum base
MMM, YYYY dimensions of 500 mm x 500 mm and a minimum depth of
125 mm. The form base shall be made from 19 mm thick
• The name of the Contractor sealed plywood, and side pieces shall be made from two by
The imprint shall be located in a small area in the bottom six timbers. The test panel molds shall have 45° sloped
right corner of each continuous shotcrete area, unless sides to permit escape of rebound.
otherwise authorized by the Ministry Representative. 209.39.04 Test Panel Frequency – One construction test
Where practicable, the information shall be readable panel shall be shot on each day of shotcrete placement or for
unaided from highway level following shotcrete curing. every 50 m³ of shotcrete being placed, whichever results in
Imprints produced by scraping letters into the plastic more panels. The time of shooting the panels may be chosen
shotcrete will not be acceptable. by the Ministry Representative.
209.38 Curing and Protection 209.39.05 Test Panel Shooting and Marking – Test panels
209.38.01 Curing Compounds – Membrane curing shall be shot using the same nozzle and length of hose as the
compounds shall meet ASTM C309 and shall be applied if production shotcrete. The Ministry may request test panels
necessary and generally in accordance with the to be shot at the location of the in-situ shotcrete.
manufacturer’s recommendations. The application rate of a Construction test panels shall contain no reinforcement or
curing compound on the rough shotcrete surface shall embedments (other than fibre reinforcement). For each test
generally be twice the rate used for smooth concrete panel the Contractor shall provide a record of the test panel
surfaces. Curing compounds shall not be used on the number, date cast, date shipped and date received by the
substrate or in areas where additional shotcrete will be laboratory.
applied. If a membrane curing compound is not used, then 209.39.06 Test Panel Curing and Transportation – Test
moist curing shall be implemented. panels shall be field cured, in the forms, in the same manner
209.38.02 Moist Curing – The surface of the shotcrete shall as the specified shotcrete work, for a minimum period of
be maintained in a moist condition for a minimum period of 48 hours, prior to transport to the test laboratory. Panels
4 days following shotcrete application or until an in-place shall be covered with wet burlap and plastic sheet to prevent
compressive strength of 20 MPa has been reached. Wet drying. In cold weather, panels shall be protected from
burlap and polyethylene sheet or water sprays shall be used temperatures below 5C by covering with thermal
to provide moist curing. insulation blankets or by placing panels in a suitably heated
enclosure. Test panels shall be transported in their forms
209.38.03 Protection from Freezing – The shotcrete shall and kept moist, with care being taken not to crack or damage
be protected from freezing for a minimum period of 7 days the shotcrete.
after placing or until an in-place compressive strength of
20 MPa has been reached, whichever occurs first. 209.39.07 Test Panels in Laboratory – The test panels
inside the forms shall be placed in a moist room in the

BC MoTI SS 2020 209 (8 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 140 of 470
SECTION 209 SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS

laboratory, maintained at temperature of 23  2°C and E = modulus of elasticity (for convenience usually
relative humidity of 98  2%. After age 3 days the test based on an estimated compression modulus of
panels shall be removed from the forms and returned to the elasticity) in GPa
moist room until the time of testing.
I = moment of inertia in mm4
209.39.08 Test Specimen Extraction and Storing – At
H = height of specimen in mm
specified test ages, test specimens shall be extracted from
the panels using either diamond sawing or coring. Test µ = Poisson's Ratio (for convenience usually based
specimens shall be maintained in a moist state in the moist on an assumed compression Poisson's Ratio of
room in the laboratory or in a lime-saturated water bath 0.2)
maintained at 23  2°C until the time of testing.
For a 100 mm x100 mm x 350 mm beam tested on a
209.39.09 Compressive Strength Test Specimens – 300 mm span the first crack deflection for typical fibre
Compressive strength test specimens shall preferably be reinforced shotcrete will have first crack deflection in
75 mm diameter cores. Length/diameter ratios shall not the range of about 0.03 mm to 0.05 mm. Extraneous
exceed 2:1 and shall not be less than 1:1. deflections have been eliminated if first crack
deflections are within this range.
209.39.10 Compressive Strength Testing – For each
panel, three specimens shall be tested for compressive (c) Recording of Deflections – An LVDT connected to an
strength at each specified age. Compressive strength tests x-y plotter or digital recording shall be used to capture
shall be conducted in accordance with CSA A23.2-14C. load vs. deflection response. Dial gauges shall not be
Measured compressive strengths shall be corrected to used for recording deflections. Bending Load shall be
equivalent 2:1 length:diameter cores, using the core plotted against Net Midspan Deflection.
correction factors given in CSA A23.2-14C (Table 1).
(d) Testing Machine – A deflection-control testing
Reporting of results shall be according to Section 5
machine shall be used, but shall not be of the closed-
(Reporting) in CSA A23.2-14C.
loop or soft testing type.
209.39.11 Flexural Strength and Toughness Test
(e) Total Deflection – Deflection measurements shall
Specimens – Flexural strength test specimens shall have
continue until a total deflection of 2 mm is reached.
dimensions of 100 mm x 100 mm x 350 mm. Reporting of
results shall be according to "11. Report" in ASTM C1609 209.39.13 Toughness Performance Level Data Analysis
and shall include all load – deflection graphs. – Toughness Performance Level of flexural strength
specimens shall be obtained by the following analysis:
209.39.12 Flexural Strength and Toughness Testing –
For each panel, three specimens shall be tested for flexural (a) Template – A template shall be created using the
strength and toughness at the specified age. Flexural percent of design flexural strength shown in
strength and toughness tests shall be conducted in Table 209-C, but expressed in load equivalent units.
accordance with ASTM C1609 with the following
additional requirements: The following formula shall be used to determine load
equivalent units;
(a) Measuring System – A "Japanese Yoke" or other
measuring system that precludes any extraneous  BH2 1
deflection measurements shall be used. An automatic Pd = 
data acquisition system or equivalent shall also be used
L 1000
during the tests. where:
(b) Accuracy of Measurement – The accuracy of the first Pd = design flexural load in kN
crack deflection shall be verified by comparing the
measured value with the theoretically calculated value  = design flexural strength in MPa
by using the formula:
B = beam width in mm
23PL 3
216H (1 +  )  2
H = beam depth in mm
 =  1 + 
1296EI  115L2  L = load span in mm
(b) Master Template – A master template shall be
Where: produced to the same scale as the load vs. deflection
data recorded from the toughness test. The master
 = mid-span deflection in mm template shall be superimposed over the actual load
P = load at first crack in kN deflection curves and compared with the recorded data.
L = load span in mm

BC MoTI SS 2020 209 (9 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 141 of 470
SECTION 209 SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS

(c) Acceptability Criterion – To conform to a given (c) Excessive shotcrete or fibre rebound;
Toughness Performance Level the recorded data shall
(d) Any evidence of excessive plastic or drying shrinkage
meet the specified flexural strength and fall above the
cracking;
line representing the given Toughness Performance
Level at both the 0.5 mm and 2 mm net midspan (e) Segregation, incorporation of sand lenses, excessive
deflection. voids, tears, sags, sloughs or delaminations in the work;
and
Table 209-C: Toughness Performance Level
Residual Flexural Strength By % (f) Inadequate thickness.
Toughness of Design Flexural Strength 209.40.03 Shotcrete Repair – At the discretion of the
Performance
1/600 Span 1/150 Span Ministry Representative, shotcrete with deficiencies as
Level
(0.5 mm) (2.0 mm) defined above shall be removed and replaced to these
specifications.
III 50% 30%
209.41 Shotcrete Evaluation – The Ministry
Representative will implement a program of evaluation of
209.39.14 Boiled Absorption and Permeable Voids Test the in-place shotcrete.
Specimens – Specimens for boiled absorption and
209.41.01 Core Extraction – When shotcrete is considered
permeable voids testing shall be 75 mm cubes cut from the
defective or deficient based on test results of test panels, the
broken ends of flexural test prisms, or extracted 75 mm
Ministry Representative may require cores to be extracted
diameter cores at least 100 mm long.
from the production shotcrete. Cores shall be extracted
209.39.15 Boiled Absorption and Permeable Voids from the in-place shotcrete in accordance with CSA
Testing – For each panel, three specimens shall be tested A23.2-14C, at locations detailed by the Ministry
for boiled absorption and permeable voids at the specified Representative, and tested for compliance to the project
age. Boiled absorption and permeable voids tests shall be specifications. Generally, up to 6 cores shall be extracted
conducted in accordance with ASTM C642. The report of from every 200 m² of shotcreted surface. Core extraction
results shall include all information recorded for “6.1 shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
Calculation” in ASTM C642.
209.41.02 Non-Destructive Testing – The shotcrete will be
209.39.16 Laboratory Test Results – For each type of test, checked for delaminations, voids or other deficiencies using
test results shall be considered acceptable if the average of appropriate non-destructive testing procedures.
three (3) specimens tested at a given age meets or exceeds
the criteria specified in Table 209-A. The test results for an
individual specimen shall not be less than 80% of the MEASUREMENT
criteria specified for compressive strength, and not more
209.81 Shotcrete – Shotcrete will be measured by the
than 120% of the criteria specified for boiled absorption and
CUBIC METRE supplied and installed in-place on the slope
permeable voids.
in the designated areas.
209.40 Shotcrete Deficiencies and Repair
209.40.01 General – The Contractor shall, whenever
PAYMENT
possible, correct deficiencies while the shotcrete is still
plastic. For any proposed changes to the initial mix design, 209.91 Shotcrete – Payment for SHOTCRETE will be at
a solid volume calculation shall be performed and submitted the Contract Unit Price per cubic metre. Payment for up to
upon request. The calculation shall include the mass, 75% of the shotcrete installed will be authorized after the
density and volume of each constituent material, the total Ministry Representative has received 7 day test results for
yield, and a comparison between measured (ASTM C138) this shotcrete. Payment for the remaining 25% will be
and the calculated plastic density. authorized after 28 day test results and complete
documentation have been received. The Ministry may
209.40.02 Deficiency Types – Shotcrete deficiencies other
consider reduced payment for defective or deficient
than failure to meet the performance requirements include,
shotcrete based on test results on test panels and/or in-situ
but are not limited to, the following:
shotcrete. The Contract Unit Price for shotcrete shall be
(a) Improper consolidation of the shotcrete because of considered full compensation for all requirements in this
incorrect spraying angles or improper distance of the specification. The Ministry will not pay for volume losses
nozzle from the receiving surface; to rebound, sloughing, rejected or otherwise discarded
shotcrete.
(b) Improper control and removal of overspray and
rebound material;

BC MoTI SS 2020 209 (10 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 142 of 470
SECTION 209 SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS

DAILY SHOTCRETE RECORD

File #: _________________
PROJECT NAME______________________________

PROJECT NO._____________________

(TO BE SUBMITTED WITHIN 1 DAY AFTER EACH DAY'S OPERATION)

Contractor Name ____________________________________ Date _______________________________

Nozzleman Name ___________________________________ Weather ____________________________
Helper Name _______________________________________ Temperature________________________°C
Contractor’s Consultant’s Name ________________________ Contractor's Start _______End ______Time
Contractor’s Consultant’s Representative __________________ Shotcrete Equipment Type______________

Shotcrete Type: (circle) WET DRY Process

For wet process, when is slump measured (circle)

BEFORE AFTER Air entrainment added
BEFORE AFTER Superplasticizer added
BEFORE AFTER Fibre Reinforcement added

On-Site Details and Tests for Shotcrete:

Sample Average
Batch Times
Location Mix Spray Time Water/ (As-Shot) Thickness of Test
Batch
Design On-Site Quantity Cement Air Slump Re-bound In-Place Panel
# From
# Used Ratio Content (wet mix) est. Shotcrete No.
Zone Area Plant From To Start End (m3) (%) (mm) (%) (mm)

Comments: ___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________

Certified Correct: __________________________________ ____________________________

(Contractor’s Consultant’s Representative) (Title)

(Use Additional Sheets if Necessary)

BC MoTI SS 2020 209 (11 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 143 of 470
SECTION 209 SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS

BC MoTI SS 2020 209 (12 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 144 of 470
SECTION 209 SHOTCRETE FOR ROCK CUTS

BC MoTI SS 2020 209 (13 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 145 of 470
 SECTION 211

PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

211.01 General – This Section describes the requirements for The Ministry Representative reserves the right to alter
Portland Cement Concrete. Requirements include quality this limit or to redefine the concrete mix design
control and quality assurance, constituent materials, mix design parameters based on the review of the mix design
proportioning, sampling and testing of the materials and submittal.
concrete, batching, mixing, transporting, placement, finishing
Unless otherwise specified the required service life of
and curing. The Contractor shall supply all necessary materials.
the concrete structure or element shall be 75 years.
211.02 Applicable Standards – The standards listed in
Table 211-A shall apply unless specified otherwise herein or in 211.03.04 Mix Design Submittals – The Contractor
the Special Provisions or Drawings. All referenced standards shall submit a report outlining the proposed mix design
shall be to the current editions at time of Award. for each classification of concrete to the Ministry
Representative for review and acceptance at least 2
weeks in advance of when concrete production is
Table 211-A: Applicable Standards scheduled to commence. Acceptance of the mix design
by the Ministry does not constitute acceptance of the
CSA A23.1 Concrete materials and methods of concrete. Acceptance of the concrete will be based on
concrete construction the test results and the performance and quality of the
concrete and concrete components placed in the Work.
Test methods and standard practices for No concrete shall be placed prior to receiving Ministry
CSA A23.2
concrete acceptance of the mix design.
CSA A3000 Cementitious Materials Compendium Each mix design submittal shall include all of the
following (Incomplete submittals by the Contractor
CAN/CSA- Falsework and formwork may result in rejection of the mix design submittal):
S269.1
(a) Project Specifics
CSA A283 Qualification Code for Concrete Testing (i) Name and location of the proposed supplier.
Laboratories
(ii) Distance and expected travel time from batch
plant location to project Site.
211.03 Concrete Mix Designs and Submission Requirements (iii) Expected method of batching, transporting
and placing concrete.
211.03.01 General – The Contractor shall be responsible for
quality control of all components of the concrete operation, (iv) Specified mix parameter requirements as
including but not limited to, aggregate and component quality, listed or referenced in the project’s Special
proportioning, test batching, batching, mixing, transporting, Provisions or Drawings.
placing, consolidating, finishing, curing, and all necessary (v) Name and contact information of certified
quality control and verification testing of the components and quality control testing laboratory and certified
the fresh and hardened concrete. testing personnel. Certification shall be in
211.03.02 Proportioning – The Contractor shall be responsible accordance with the requirements of CSA
for proportioning and designing all concrete in full compliance A23.1.
with the required concrete mix parameters as listed in the project (b) Materials – All materials shall comply with the
Special Provisions or Drawings. All mix designs shall use the requirements as listed in SS 211.04 of this
“Absolute-Volume Method” for mix proportioning. Standard Specification.
211.03.03 Alkali-Aggregate Reactivity (AAR) Preventative (i) Cementitious Materials – Types and source
Requirements – Contrary to CSA A23.2-27A, the total alkali of each material including mill test reports and
content (Na2O equivalent) contributed by the Portland cement to manufacturer’s certificates of compliance.
the concrete mix shall not exceed;
(ii) Aggregates – Type and source of all
• 2.4 kg/m3 for aggregates classed as moderately reactive. individual aggregate products including
• 1.8 kg/m for aggregates classed as highly reactive.
3 individual gradations and all other aggregate
quality testing as described in Table 211-B for
• Aggregates classed as extremely reactive shall not be used. each product and each aggregate source.

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (1 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 146 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

Table 211-B: Required Aggregate Testing for Normal Density Coarse and Fine Aggregate
(Per Individual Product & Aggregate Source)

Test Method Test Description Test Data Validity (5)

CSA A23.2-2A(1) Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate Within 90 days (6)
CSA A23.2-5A(1) Amount of Material finer than 80 µm in Aggregate Within 90 days (6)
CSA A23.2-3A Clay Lumps in Natural Aggregate Within 3 years
CSA A23.2-3B Determination of total or water-soluble sulphate ion content of soil Within 3 years
CSA A23.2-4A Low Density Granular Material in Aggregate Within 3 years
CSA A23.2-4B( ) 10
Sampling and determination of water-soluble chloride ion content in Within 3 years
hardened grout or concrete
CSA A23.2-6A, 12A Relative Density and Absorption of Fine and Coarse Aggregate Within 1 year
CSA A23.2-7A Test for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete Within 2 years
CSA A23.2-8A(3) Measuring Mortar-Strength Properties of Fine Aggregate Within 2 years
CSA A23.2-9A (2)
Soundness of Fine and Coarse Aggregate by Use of Magnesium Sulphate Within 3 years
CSA A23.2-13A Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate - Procedure A (Length to Within 3 years
Width Ratio 4:1)
CSA A23.2-14A(9) Potential Expansivity of Aggregates (Procedure for Length Change Due to Within 3 years
Alkali-Aggregate Reaction in Concrete Prisms at 38°C)
CSA A23.2-15A(4) Petrographic examination of aggregates Within 3 years
CSA A23.2-16A (7)
Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion Within 3 years
and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
CSA A23.2-23A(2) Test Method for the Resistance of Fine Aggregate to Degradation by Within 3 years
Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
CSA A23.2-24A(8) Test Method for the Resistance of Unconfined Coarse Aggregate to Within 3 years
Freezing and Thawing
CSA A23.2-25A(11) Test Method for Detection of Alkali-Silica Reactive Aggregates by Within 3 years
Accelerated Expansion of Mortar Bars
CSA A23.2-29A(2) Test Method for the Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by Within 3 years
Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus

1. Each aggregate product that may be used as a component of the performed on coarse and fine aggregates. The petrographic analysis
proposed mix must have a washed sieved analysis performed showing shall not be used to forfeit the requirement of performing other
the cumulative percent passing for each of the following sieve sizes; necessary aggregate quality testing.
56, 40, 28, 20, 14, 10, 5, 2.5, 1.25, 0.630, 0.315, 0.160 and 0.080 mm. 5. Test data validity requirements are based on time periods prior to the
Sieve analysis reports are to include all relevant sampling expected initial date of concrete production. The Ministry
information (date/sampled by/location/field sample size) and include Representative, based on submitted test data and/or visual
the actual test specimen sample mass. observations, may waive or alter the above listed time periods. For
2. Subject to approval by the Ministry Representative, Test Method multiyear projects, test data validity shall be maintained relative to
A23.2-9A can be performed as an alternative to performing Test the date of concrete placement.
Method A23.2-23A and A23.2-29A. Refer to CSA A23.1, Section 4.2, 6. Quality control during aggregate production shall include the
Table 12 for further information. following test methods at the specified test frequencies: CSA A23.2-
3. Test Method A23.2-8A is required only if the aggregate fails to meet 2A & A23.2-5A (1 per 300 tonnes). Testing shall be completed on a
the requirements of Test Method A23.2-7A as described in CSA A23.1 blend of aggregate reflecting the mix design.
Section 4.2.3.3.3.2 7. Subject to approval by the Ministry Representative, Test Method CSA
4. Petrographic Examination of Aggregates: The Contractor shall A23.2-16A can be waived if CSA A23.2-29A test results meet the
submit the results of the Petrographic Analysis, certified by a specified criteria.
qualified professional registered with the Association of Professional 8. This test shall be required should any of Test Methods 4A, 9A, 16A or
Engineers and Geoscientists of the Province of B.C. and indicating 29A fail to satisfy the allowable limits. Test shall be performed on
the aggregate’s suitability for its intended use. Test shall be

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (2 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 147 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

both coarse and fine aggregates or a blend of aggregates 10. ASTM C1218 may be used in place of A23.2-4B
representative of the proposed mix.
11. Test shall be performed on both coarse and fine aggregates or a blend
9. Testing is waived if CSA A23.2-25A test results classify the of aggregates representative of the proposed mix
aggregates as non-reactive.

(iii) Admixtures – Type and source of all admixtures, incremental units (sacks, bags, or pails, etc.)
including expected dosage rates, point of addition to the and kilograms per cubic metre (kg/m3).
mix, compatibility documentation, and individual
(xi) The absolute volume of each material, air
technical data sheets.
content and the total sum of the absolute
(iv) Water – The source of mixing water. (depending on volumes of all materials shall be provided in
the source, the Ministry Representative may request cubic metres (m3).
additional test documentation).
(xii) Slump, unit weight, air content, strength
(v) Miscellaneous – Documentation for all other materials characteristics, and any other specified
proposed for the mix, showing conformance with characteristic shall be reported for each set of
applicable Ministry requirements and mixture proportions intended for use.
manufacturer/industry guidelines and standards.
211.03.05 Trial Mixes – The Contractor shall produce
(c) Proportioning test batches of 4.0 m3 volumes on all proposed bridge
deck mix designs. The Contractor shall produce test
(i) The concrete proportions expressed in terms of quantity
batches of 4.0 m3 volumes on other mix designs where
of each component.
deemed necessary by the Ministry Representative.
(ii) Fresh and hardened concrete properties.
Point of discharge sampling and testing shall be carried
(iii) The mass of materials in kilograms (kg) and the out by the Contractor to verify the pertinent parameters
absolute volume in cubic metre (m3) contributed by of the proposed mix design. If placement is by pump,
each material in the mixture. concrete shall be sampled and fully tested at both the
truck chute discharge and at the pump discharge
(iv) The quantity of each individual cementitious material
locations. Sampling and testing shall be in accordance
added in a powder state shall be expressed as kilograms
with SS 211.09 and Table 211-C.
per cubic metre (kg/m3).
For concretes containing superplasticizers or high
(v) Materials added in slurry shall have their respective
range water reducing admixtures or supplementary
solid and water contents expressed as kilograms per
cementious materials then sampling and testing in
cubic metre (kg/m3).
accordance with Table 211-D shall also apply.
(vi) The quantity of each separately batched size of coarse
Test parameters include all required properties of the
aggregate and fine aggregate shall be expressed as
fresh and hardened concrete, workability and
kilograms per cubic metre (kg/m3) in a saturated- finishability of the mix, strength gain characteristics,
surface-dry (SSD) condition. including 7 and 28-day compressive strengths, and any
(vii) The quantity of water shall be the maximum amount other additional testing of the hardened concrete that
allowed based on the maximum specified water-to- may be required by the Ministry Representative.
cementitious material ratio (W/Cm), corrected to Batching, haul times and conveyance procedures used
account for any additional water that may be for the test batch must emulate the procedures expected
contributed by other materials used in the proposed during the actual concrete placement.
mix. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs
(viii) The quantity of water shall be expressed as kilograms associated with the test batches. Test batch trials that
(or Litres) per cubic metre (kg/m3 or L/m3). If ice is do not meet requirements shall be repeated.
used for temperature control, it shall be expressed in
211.03.06 Adjustments to Mix Designs – If, during
incremental units (sacks, bags, or pails, etc.) and the progress of the work, the mix design is found to be
kilograms per cubic metre (kg/m3) and shall be unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall make the necessary
included in the maximum allowable water quantity. adjustments. Adjustments shall be accepted by the
(ix) Admixtures dispensed as liquids shall be expressed as Ministry Representative prior to subsequent concrete
Litres per cubic metre (L/m3) and where applicable, placement. Notwithstanding the Ministry
expected dosage range stated. Representative’s review and acceptance of the
proposed mix design, it remains the Contractor’s
(x) The quantity of any pre-measured, pre-packaged responsibility to ensure that the concrete meets all
additives, such as fibres, shall be expressed in Contract requirements.

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (3 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 148 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

Table 211-C: Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing

Test
Test Description Minimum Test Frequency
Methodology

CSA A23.2-1C Sampling Plastic Concrete As stated below

Making and Curing Concrete One set for every 35 m3 or portion thereafter for each
CSA A23.2-3C
Compression and Flexural Test classification of concrete placed within an individual structural
Specimens element or component, and placed on any one calendar day from a
Compressive Strength of Cylindrical single supplier. The Ministry Representative may request
CSA A23.2-9C additional sets.
Concrete Specimens

CSA A23.2-4C Air Content of Plastic Concrete by the

Pressure Method Every individual load unless approved otherwise by the Ministry
CSA A23.2-5C Representative
Slump and Slump flow of Concrete
and 19C
Retests shall be performed following any load adjustments.
Temperature of Fresh Concrete
ASTM C1064

Density and Yield tests shall be performed with every air test and
CSA A23.2-6C Density and Yield of Plastic Concrete
strength test.

Table 211-D: Additional Test Methods

Test
Test Description Minimum Test Frequency
Methodology
One test per individual test batch for deck concrete.
Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with CSA A23.1
Microscopic Determination of Parameters
Section 4.3.3.2 and 4.3.3.3. The procedure used shall be
ASTM C457 (1) of the Air-Void System in Hardened
reported.
Concrete
Further testing, during scheduled concrete pours may be
required, as directed by the Ministry Representative.
One test per individual test batch for deck concrete.
Electrical Indication of Concrete’s Acceptance criteria shall be a coulomb rating not exceeding
ASTM C1202 (1) Ability to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration 1500 coulombs.
(Test age at 91 days)
Further testing, during scheduled concrete pours may be
required, as directed by the Ministry Representative.
Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-
Cement Mortar and Concrete (Drying
One test per individual test batch for deck concrete. Sampling
ASTM C157 (1) shall commence after 7 days of curing
to be at final point of discharge.
and shrinkage determined after 28 days of
drying)
(1) Testing Requirement may be waived at the discretion of the Ministry Representative.

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (4 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 149 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

MATERIALS Contractor shall not use water from shallow, stagnant

or marshy sources.
211.04 Materials
211.04.04 Admixtures – All admixtures shall conform
211.04.01 General – All material properties used in concrete
to CSA A23.1.
production shall conform to CSA A23.1, unless otherwise
specified in these specifications. Laboratory testing shall be Admixtures shall not be incorporated into the mix
carried out by a testing laboratory certified in accordance with design and/or added to the concrete without the
the requirements of CSA A283. Field test procedures shall be acceptance of the Ministry Representative.
undertaken by experienced personnel certified in accordance
Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall contain
with CSA A23.1.
Air-Entraining Admixtures.
211.04.02 Cementitious Material – The Contractor shall
Air-Entraining Admixtures shall conform to
obtain, from the supplier, a mill test report and a manufacturer's
ASTM C260.
certificate of compliance representing each type of cementitious
material for each month period representing the delivered Chemical admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494.
shipment.
Type F High Range Water Reducer (superplasticizer)
(a) Portland Cement – Unless otherwise specified, the shall be used when concrete contains silica fume.
Contractor shall use Type GU (General Use) or Type GUL
All accepted admixtures shall be compatible with all
(General Use Limestone) Cement in all concrete. Cement
other admixtures and constituents used in the mix.
shall conform to the requirements of CSA A3000. Cement
shall have a C3A content greater than 4.0% (by standard Type B, Retarding or Type D, Water-Reducing and
Bogue calculation) or 5% by mill certificate, and GUL Retarding (Hydration Stabilizing) Admixtures shall not
cement shall have a Blaine Fineness of less than 480 m2/kg. be incorporated into the mix design and/or added to the
concrete without the acceptance of the Ministry
The total alkali content [Na2O equivalent, (Na2O + (0.658 x
Representative. When accepted by the Ministry
K2O))] of the Type GU Portland Cement shall not exceed
Representative, the guidelines given in SS 211.08.02
0.60% by mass.
shall apply.
(b) Silica Fume – Condensed silica fume shall conform to the
requirements of CSA A3000 for Type SF silica fume. Silica Calcium chloride or any admixture containing chloride
ions shall not be used. If requested, a written statement
Fume application rates shall be 5% to 8% by mass of
from the manufacturer stating that the admixture
cementiuos materials.
contains no intentionally added calcium chloride shall
(c) Fly Ash – All fly ash shall conform to the requirements of be provided to the Ministry Representative.
CSA A3000 for Type F fly ash. Fly ash application rates
shall not exceed 25% by mass of cementing materials in 211.04.05 Aggregates – All aggregates are to be
substructure concrete. Unless specified, fly ash shall not be natural, processed or manufactured granular material
composed of hard, sound and durable particles, free of
used in bridge deck concrete without the acceptance of the
adherent coatings, shale, clay, organic materials and
Ministry Representative. Upon such acceptance the
other soft or disintegrated pieces.
application rate shall not exceed 15% by mass of
cementitious material. (a) Coarse Aggregate – All coarse aggregate
For mixes containing both Type F fly ash and silica fume materials shall conform to the following
the combined mass of cementitious materials shall be 15% requirements:
to 20%, with each type within; (i) Sampling shall be according to CSA Test
Method A23.2-1A.
• Type F fly ash by mass of cementitious material between
10% to 15%, (ii) Gradation shall be determined in accordance
with CSA Test Method A23.2-2A and -5A.
• Silica fume by mass of cementitious material between (All gradations shall be based on a washed
5% to 8%, sieve analysis, see Table 211-B Footnote 1).
(d) Blended Hydraulic Cement – Blended Hydraulic Cement (iii) Gradation of the coarse aggregate shall be
shall not be used without the acceptance of the Ministry within the limits shown in Table 211-E for the
Representative. particular size range or nominal maximum
211.04.03 Water – Water to be used for mixing concrete or size of coarse aggregate specified.
mortar and for curing shall conform to the requirements of CSA
A23.1 and shall be free from contamination by oil, acid, alkali,
organic matter, sediment or other deleterious substances. The

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (5 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 150 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

Table 211-E: Coarse Aggregate Gradations

Total Passing Each Sieve

Product (Percentage by Mass)
NMSA (1)
Size
mm 56 40 28 20 14 10 5 2.5 1.25
mm
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
40 40 – 5 (2) 100 95-100 – 35 - 70 – 10 - 30 0-5 – –
28 28 – 5 (2) – 100 95 - 100 63 - 83 30 - 65 – 0 - 10 0-5 –
20 20 – 5 – – 100 90 - 100 50 - 90 25 - 60 0 - 10 0-5 –
14 14 – 5 – – – 100 90 - 100 45 - 75 0 - 15 0-5 –
10 10 – 2.5 – – – – 100 85 - 100 10 - 30 0 - 10 0-5
(1) NMSA – nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate. Definition: The standard sieve size opening immediately smaller than
the smallest through which all of the aggregate must pass.
(2) To prevent segregation, aggregates that make up the above gradings shall be stockpiled and batched in two or more separate
sizes as per CSA A23.1

Table 211-F: Limits for Deleterious Substances In and Physical Properties of Aggregates

Test Method Substance or Property Maximum Percentage

by Mass of Total Sample
Coarse Aggregate Fine Aggregate
CSA A23.2-3A Clay Lumps 0.30 1.0
CSA A23.2-4A Low-Density Granular Materials 0.5 0.5
Material Finer than 0.08 mm for Concrete Subject
CSA A23.2-5A 1.0 3.0
to Wear
Material Finer than 0.08 mm for Other Concrete 1.0 5.0
CSA A23.2-9A Magnesium Sulphate Soundness Loss 12 16
50
Los Angeles Abrasion Loss for Concrete Subject
CSA A23.2-16A (35 for all deck N/A
to Wear
concrete)
CSA A23.2-23A
Micro-Deval Abrasion Loss 17 20
and -29A
CSA A23.2-12A Absorption Percentage 1.75 N/A
Standard colour
CSA A23.2-7A Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate N/A
or lighter
Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate
CSA A23.2-13A 20 N/A
- Procedure A (Length to Width Ratio 4:1)
Test Method for the Resistance of Unconfined
CSA A23.2-24A 6 N/A
Coarse Aggregate to Freezing and Thawing

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (6 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 151 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

(iv) The gradation of coarse aggregates used shall be Table 211-G: Fine Aggregate Gradation
such that the percentage passing any one sieve does
not vary more than 5% from the initially approved Total Cumulative
Sieve Size
coarse aggregates used in the mix design. Passing Each Sieve
(mm)
(Percentage by Mass)
(v) The maximum Petrographic Number (PN) of coarse
aggregate shall be determined in accordance with 10 100
CSA A23.2-15A and shall not exceed 125.
5 95 - 100
(vi) The amount of deleterious substances in coarse
aggregate shall not exceed the limits prescribed in 2.5 80 - 100
Table 211-F. 1.25 50 - 90
(vii) Other specified physical properties measuring
0.630 25 - 65
aggregate quality referenced in Table 211-B shall
not exceed the limits prescribed in Table 211-F. 0.315 10 - 35
(b) Fine Aggregate – Fine aggregate shall conform to the 0.160 2 - 10
following requirements:
(i) Sampling shall be according to CSA Test Method 211.05.01 Cementitious Material – All cementitious
A23.2-1A. materials shall be stored in a suitable weather-tight structure
(ii) Gradation shall be within the limits given in capable of protecting the materials from dampness, hydration
Table 211-G when tested in accordance with CSA and contamination, otherwise they shall be rejected.
Test Method A23.2-2A and 5A. (All gradations Materials shall be free of lumps at all times during their use
shall be based on a washed sieve analysis). in the work.

(iii) Fineness modulus shall be between 2.3 and 3.1. 211.05.02 Tanks – Tanks used for storing and/or hauling,
concrete mixing and curing water shall be free from
(iv) Fineness modulus tolerance shall be ±0.2 (except contamination by oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, sediment,
that the above sentence shall apply) from the rust or other deleterious substances.
fineness modulus of the initially approved fine
aggregate used in the design mix. 211.05.03 Admixtures – All admixtures shall be stored in
manufacturers’ original labelled containers with clearly
(v) A maximum 45% shall be retained between any two legible labels and be kept above freezing at all times and in
consecutive sieves. accordance with the manufacturers’ technical data sheets.
(vi) The amount of deleterious substances in fine
Admixtures damaged by any cause shall be rejected.
aggregate shall not exceed the limits prescribed in 211.05.04 Other Materials – Other materials, such as steel
Table 211-F. fibres, etc. shall be stored and handled in accordance with the
(vii) Other specified physical properties measuring
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
aggregate quality referenced in Table 211-B shall 211.05.05 Aggregates – Each nominal size of aggregate,
not exceed the limits prescribed in Table 211-F including coarse and fine shall be stockpiled separately,
211.04.06 Steel Fibres – Steel fibres shall meet the stored and handled in a manner that will prevent
requirements of ASTM Standard A820 Type 1 Cold Drawn contamination, intermixing and segregation. A minimum of
High Tensile Deformed Steel Fibres. A mill certificate 10 m³ of each aggregate size, in excess of the requirements of
showing compliance with ASTM Standard A820 shall the daily concrete, shall be maintained in identifiable
accompany each delivered lot. stockpiles at the batch site in order to ensure proper
continuity of the work with approved aggregates.
211.05 Storage and Handling of Materials - General – The
storage and handling of all materials used in the production Stockpiled aggregate, which is segregated, contaminated or
of concrete shall conform to CSA A23.1, unless otherwise intermixed with foreign matter of any kind, shall be rejected.
specified herein. All materials shall be stored and handled in Separate batch plant storage bins shall be provided for each
a manner that will prevent contamination or deterioration, size of aggregate to be batched.
otherwise they shall be rejected. Access shall be provided to Precautions shall be taken when moving, handling and
the storage facilities to allow for inspection and sampling. transferring aggregates to prevent contamination, segregation
Where applicable, materials shall be identified by MSD or degradation in accordance with the following
sheets. recommendations:
(a) Aggregate blanket 150 mm thick should be left on the
ground as stockpiles are depleted.

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (7 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 152 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

(b) Aggregate transfer over stockpiles or storage bins of (v) all fulcrums, clevises and similar working parts
other sized aggregates should be avoided. maintained in clean condition.
(c) Storage bins should be filled only to 150 mm from the (vi) provision made, in remote control plants and/or
top unless a suitable extension rim is provided to prevent where batch cycles are timed, for the complete
contamination. filling and discharge of the measuring unit for each
(d) Front-end loader buckets should be filled by raising them batch.
vertically up the face of the stockpile, not by thrusting (b) Batch Charging Mechanism – Batch Charging
into the stockpile in one place. Mechanism requirements to be as follows:
(e) Depositing aggregates into the batch plant storage bins (i) material flow control within the specified
should be made directly over the bins' outlet. tolerances.
(f) Storage bins should be kept as full as possible during (ii) hopper construction to eliminate material
batching to minimize segregation as the aggregates are accumulation and to permit the complete discharge
withdrawn from the bins. of every batch.
(g) Acceptable and uniform aggregate moisture content shall (iii) cement weighing hopper:
be obtained and maintained by necessary means to
include the following: • self-cleaning and properly ventilated to allow
air to escape.
(i) Washed or wetted aggregates should remain in
stockpiles for a minimum of 12 hours to permit a • accessible for inspection.
uniform moisture content throughout the stockpile • dust sealed between the charging mechanism
to be reached before aggregate transfer to batch and the hopper to maintain weighing accuracy.
plant storage bins.
(c) Scales and Dispensing Mechanism – Scales and
(ii) After each day's concrete production during wet Dispensing Mechanisms to conform to the following
weather, fine aggregate bins should be either requirements:
emptied or covered with a suitable waterproof
covering. (i) beam type or springless dial type.
(ii) other methods of weighing (electric, hydraulic, load
cells, etc.) are acceptable provided the specified
CONSTRUCTION weighing tolerances and accuracy requirements are
211.06 Batching met.
211.06.01 Batching Equipment – Batching equipment shall (iii) all accurate to 0.4% of the total capacity of the
comply with the requirements of CSA A23.1. scale when static load tested.
(a) General – Batching equipment, such as weighing (iv) zero balance adjustment capability.
mechanisms, gates, water lines and dispensing systems, (v) unaffected by binding or vibration due to vibrators
to be maintained in good working order. Batching bins or other appurtenances.
to be completely emptied of all material before the first
and succeeding batches are measured. (vi) working range between 10% and 90% of the scale
reading.
Batching equipment to have the following capabilities
and facilities: (vii) equipped with prominent markers with individual
batch weight setting capabilities for dial scales.
(i) bins or silos for storage of aggregates, silos for
(viii) calibration facilities including an adequate number
storage of cement and pozzolan.
of standard test masses.
(ii) free movement of each type or size of material to
(ix) beam type scales with provision for indicating to the
discharge openings without contamination.
operator that the required load in the hopper is being
(iii) design of storage and hauling facilities to prevent: approached; the device shall indicate at least the last
• loss or intermingling of different sizes and 100 kg of the load.
types of materials. (x) all weighing and indicating devices to be in full view
• contamination by deleterious substances. of the operator while charging the hopper, and the
operator shall have convenient access to all controls.
• harmful segregation and breakage.
(iv) covers to stockpiles of fine aggregates to ensure
constant moisture content.

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (8 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 153 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

(d) Volumetric Devices for Water Measurement – excess. Intermediate bulk cement shall be weighed to an
Volumetric devices for water measurement to be: accuracy of 1%.
(i) fitted with such valves and connections as are When aggregates are measured by mass, batch masses shall
necessary to divert the water measured for a batch be based on the required mass of saturated surface dry
to easily verify the accuracy of measurement. aggregate corrected for the moisture conditions of the
aggregate at the time of batching.
(ii) arranged so that measurements will be unaffected by
variable pressures in the water supply line. Field determination of free moisture in the aggregates shall
be made by any proven method such as CSA A23.2-11A or
(iii) calibrated to an accuracy of 2% of the batch volume. by the use of a device such as the "Speedy Moisture" gauge.
(e) Dispensing Systems for Liquid Admixtures - When doubt exists as to the accuracy of such methods, total
Dispensing systems for liquid admixtures, other than moisture in the aggregate shall be determined in accordance
weigh systems, to have the following capabilities: with ASTM C566.
(i) visual, volumetric measuring or readout units When individual aggregate weigh batchers are used, the scale
located as close as possible to eye level for easy reading for each material shall be within 2% of the specified
reading by the operator. mass.

(ii) positioned in such a manner that discharge into the In a cumulative aggregate weigh batcher, the cumulative
batch is observed by the operator from a normal mass after each measurement shall be within 1% of the
working position. required cumulative amount when the scale is used in excess
of 30% of its capacity. For cumulative measurement less than
(iii) volumetric measuring unit for periodic check of 30% of scale capacity, the allowable variation shall be 0.3%
dispenser accuracy where a positive displacement of scale capacity or 3.0% of the required cumulative mass,
system is used. whichever is less.
(iv) visual measuring unit for an accurate visual check Mixing water shall be measured by mass or volume to an
of increments of 30 mL of air entraining agent or of accuracy of 1%. Adjustments for free water contained in
chemical required to treat a maximum of 25 kg of batched materials, such as free water in the aggregates, water
cement. contained in admixture solutions, shall be made to the
(f) Certificate or Report of Inspection – A certificate or quantity of water to be batched. The total amount of mixing
report of inspection, from a Weights and Measures water in the batch obtained from all sources shall be within
approved, independent testing authority, and which is 3% of the specified quantity and shall not vary the designed
not more than one year old for the plant in its present water-to- cementitious material ratio of the mix by more than
position, shall be on display in the plant at all times. The 0.02. Mixers shall be completely emptied of all water prior
certificate or report will be accepted as proof of accuracy to the loading of a concrete batch.
of the scales or weighing devices. Where there is Admixtures shall be batched in liquid form by either mass or
reasonable doubt concerning the accuracy of the scales volume; in powdered form by mass or bag. Volumetric
or weighing devices the Ministry Representative may measurements of admixtures or air entraining agents shall be
require their recalibration and recertification at the to an accuracy of 3% of the required amount or 30 mL,
Contractor's expense, during progress of the work. Plant whichever is greater. Measurement by mass shall be to an
relocation or major alterations shall require such accuracy of 3% of the required amount.
recalibration and recertification.
The addition of cement to a fully-batched load of aggregates
211.06.02 Batching of Materials – Material may be
will not be accepted.
weigh-batched separately or cumulatively.
211.07 Mixing
Aggregates shall be batched by mass, cement and mineral
admixtures in the powder form by mass or bag. 211.07.01 General – Sufficient plant capacity and
transporting equipment shall be provided by the Contractor
The mass of any ingredient to be batched shall not be less
to ensure continuous delivery of concrete at the rate required
than 10% nor greater than 90% of the scale capacity.
with the necessary intervals between batches, for the proper
When batched by 40 kg bags, only full and sealed bags of placing and finishing of the concrete without the formation
cement shall be used with no fractional bags permitted. of cold joints in the finished concrete.
Cement batched by mass shall be to an accuracy of 1% for 211.07.02 Concrete Mixers
batch quantities between 30% and 90% of the scale capacity.
When the mass of cement being batched is between 10% and (a) General – Concrete mixers shall conform to the
30% of the scale capacity, the mass of cement batched shall following requirements:
not be less than the required mass nor more than 4% in (i) manufacturer's rating plate carried in a prominent
position, indicating rated mixing capacity, and

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (9 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 154 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

recommended speed of mixing which must be in the 211.08 Delivery

range of not less than 4 nor more than 18 rpm. 211.08.01 General – Off-site mixed concrete shall, after
(ii) demonstrated capability of operating satisfactorily being mixed, be transported to the Site in either truck
at the recommended mixing speed. agitators or truck mixers operating at the speed designated by
(iii) number of revolutions of the drum or blades
the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed.
registered with a counter in working condition. When concrete is being mixed in mixer trucks while in
transit, the speed of the mixing drum shall be reduced to
(iv) charge and discharge openings and chute free from
appreciable accumulations of cement or concrete, agitating speed once the mixing time has elapsed. Delivery
and hopper and chute surfaces clean and smooth. of mixed concrete in non-agitating equipment will not be
permitted.
(v) batch water measuring equipment in good operating
211.08.02 Time of Placement –Time of placement
condition.
guidelines for bridge decks including diaphragms, bridge
(b) Volumetric Mobile Mixers – Volumetric mobile parapets, bridge medians, bridge sidewalks and approach
mixers shall conform to the following requirements: slabs are given in SS 413, Bridge Decks and Concrete
(i) shall be auger type mixers. Overlays.

(ii) the mobile mixers shall be calibrated with the actual All other concrete shall be fully discharged and placed within
cement and aggregate products used in the concrete 90 minutes after water and cement have been combined.
mix. Calibration tables and curves shall be Under conditions contributing to rapid stiffening of concrete
submitted to the Ministry Representative. The the Ministry Representative may require a time of less than
volume of the concrete produced shall be confirmed those stated above.
and shall be within 2%. Modifications to the time of placement will be considered on
(iii) mobile mixers shall have separate flow controlled a case by case basis and may require the use of Hydration
supply hoppers for each individual aggregate Stabilizing Admixtures (HSA’s).
gradation and cementitious constituent material to (a) Hydration Stabilizing Admixtures (HSAs) – HSAs
be added volumetrically. shall only be used if approved in advance by the Ministry
(iv) may be used provided that the accuracy of batching Representative.
and uniformity of concrete is as required by CSA If accepted by the Ministry Representative, the use of
A23.1. HSA’s shall be as follows:
(v) cement flow rates shall be checked before (during if (i) HSAs shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
required) each placing operation. C494:
(vi) the scale being used to calibrate the mobiles shall
• Type B, Retarding; or
have a minimum capacity of 50 kg.
(vii) the water tank shall have a stand pipe showing the
• Type D, Water-Reducing and Retarding
amount of water in the tank. Admixtures.

(viii) the mobiles shall have individual flow meters and (ii) Concrete shall be fully discharged and placed within
admixture tanks for each admixture to be used as 3 hours after water and cement have been combined.
part of an admixture injection system. (iii) When HSA’s are used, these time extensions are
(ix) the mobiles shall be able to advance backwards and subject to preconstruction trials being conducted by
forwards from controls located at the back of the the Contractor to establish the appropriate HSA
mobile. dosage to provide suitable extended slump life of
concrete without increasing the water/cementitious
(x) the mixer auger shall be maintained at minimum of materials ratio of the concrete above that which
a 25 angle from horizontal when mixing and would be required if HSA’s were not used.
discharging, unless otherwise indicated by the
manufacturer. (iv) The use of HSA’s shall in no instance modify the
maximum concrete temperature required at time of
211.07.03 Mixing Concrete – Mixing drums shall be clean placement.
and empty before being charged. The drum shall be rotated
at the manufacturers' recommended mixing speed during (v) A one-time only addition of HSA will be allowed;
charging and mixing. Concrete shall be mixed to the during initial batching of the concrete or
uniformity requirements of CSA A23.1, Section 5.2.4.5. immediately at completion of batching as
When a satisfactory mixing time is established it shall be recommended by the admixture manufacturer.
maintained for all batches of the same design and mixed with Addition of HSA at any other time will be cause for
the same equipment. rejection of the concrete.

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (10 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 155 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

211.08.03 Temperature Control – Temperature control on the delivery ticket. The Contractor assumes full
guidelines for bridge decks including diaphragms, bridge responsibility for the on-site addition of the air entraining
parapets, bridge medians, bridge sidewalks and approach agent and its subsequent effect on the quality of the concrete.
slabs are given in SS 413, Bridge Decks and Concrete
211.08.07 Delivery Ticket – Concrete delivered to the Site
Overlays.
shall be accompanied by a ticket providing the Contractor and
The temperature of all other concrete, from the time of Ministry Representative with legible information, as follows:
batching to complete discharge shall remain between 10C • serial number of ticket
and 25C. Any concrete containing silica fume shall not have
a maximum temperature in excess of 20C at time of • date, name and location of concrete supplier.
placement. Concrete used in elements having a minimum • name of the Contractor.
section thickness greater than 1000 mm shall have
• specific job designation (name and location).
temperature controls as per CSA A23.1. Methods used for
maintaining temperature controls shall not diminish the • specific designation of concrete mix design.
quality of the concrete, and shall not alter nor exceed the • truck number and volume of concrete in cubic metres.
specified maximum W/Cm ratio.
• addition of any materials added at the Site, at the request
When the atmospheric temperature is 25C or higher, of the Contractor including but not limited to water and
SS 211.18 – Hot Weather Concreting shall apply. all chemical admixtures.
211.08.04 Addition of Water – No water shall be added after • time concrete was batched, arrived at Site, and
the initial introduction of the mixing water for the mix, except completely discharged.
at the start of discharge within the initial 10% of the total load
211.09 Quality Control Inspection, Testing and
volume, and when:
Acceptance
• the specified water-to-cementitious materials ratio is not
211.09.01 General –The Contractor shall be fully
exceeded. responsible for hiring, scheduling, overseeing, performing
• the measured slump is less than that specified. and documenting all quality control testing and inspection in
full compliance with the Contract.
• no more than 60 minutes have elapsed after water and
cement have been combined. The Ministry may perform on-site sampling and testing as a
function of the Ministry’s quality assurance and/or audit.
• the concrete is in a mixer or truck mixer.
Any Ministry quality testing shall not relieve the Contractor
An amount not exceeding 16 L of water per cubic metre of of responsibility for providing quality control.
concrete or 10% of the mix design water whichever is less
211.09.02 Sampling and Testing – Laboratory testing shall
may be added. After addition of water, the drum or blades
be carried out by a testing laboratory certified in accordance
shall be turned an additional 30 revolutions or more if
with the requirements of CSA Standard A283. Field test
necessary at mixing speed. The amount of water added shall
be recorded on the delivery ticket. Water shall not be added procedures shall be undertaken by experienced personnel.
to the batch at any later time. The Contractor assumes full All testing personnel shall be certified under CSA Standard
A283 or certified as an ACI Concrete Field Testing
responsibility for the on-site addition of water and its
Technician – Grade 1 (Minimum). Field inspectors shall
subsequent effect on the quality of the concrete.
have extensive experience in on-site quality control testing of
211.08.05 Addition of Superplasticizer (High Range concrete, with the applicable admixtures being used, and with
Water Reducer - HRWR) – When superplasticized concrete on-site batch adjustments. Testing personnel shall be on-site
falls below the designated slump, it shall be re-tempered with and available to test concrete for the complete duration of any
superplasticizing admixtures only, not water, and shall only concrete placement operation. Sampling and testing shall be
receive a maximum of one re-tempering. The amount of in accordance with the test methods and minimum frequency
superplasticizer added shall be recorded on the delivery levels as listed in Table 211-C and Table 211-D (if
ticket. The Contractor assumes full responsibility for the on- applicable). Any test outside the specified range shall be
site addition of superplasticizer and its subsequent effect on immediately reported to the Contractor and Ministry
the quality of the concrete. The use of superplasticizers shall Representative. Copies of all test results shall be received by
not be used for extending the time of placement requirements the Ministry Representative and the concrete supplier within
described in SS 211.08.02. one (1) day of the test date.
211.08.06 Control of Air Content on the Site – The air 211.09.03 Sampling – Point of Acceptance – Determination
content of the concrete shall, if necessary, be brought up to of concrete properties for acceptance will be made based on
the specified range by the addition of an air-entraining agent samples taken at the final discharge end of the placement
in the field. Mixing shall follow to ensure proper dispersion system. The Ministry Representative may accept sampling at
and upon completion of mixing, the air content shall be the truck discharge end provided that testing during the test
retested. The amount of admixture added shall be recorded

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (11 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 156 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

batches confirm that the concrete mix parameters are within Storage facilities shall be provided, installed, and accepted
the stated specification requirements at the actual placement before any concrete is placed.
point. The Ministry Representative may require additional
The Contractor shall deliver the test cylinders to a CSA
testing to be performed at the point of placement at a
certified testing laboratory. Handling and transporting of the
predetermined frequency throughout the placement period.
cylinders shall be in accordance with CSA A23.2-3C. No
Such additional testing, including all costs shall be deemed to
extra laboratory curing time will be allowed for cylinders that
be part of the Contractor’s quality control program.
are delivered late to the laboratory. A copy of the test results
211.09.04 Strength Tests – Unless otherwise specified in the shall be forwarded to the Ministry Representative within 2
Contract, a strength test shall be the average 28-day strength days of each individual strength test date. Test results shall
of three standard 100 mm x 200 mm test cylinders, sampled, include all information as described in CSA A23.2, Annex B,
cast, cured, transported, and tested in accordance with CSA Form for Reporting Compressive Strength of Concrete Test
A23.2-3C and -9C. The cylinder size shall however, meet the Cylinders.
aggregate size limitations specified in Clause 8.2 of CSA
211.09.06 Field Cured Test Cylinders – The Ministry
A23.2-3C.
Representative may require field cured test cylinders to be
For each strength test, a fourth cylinder shall be cast for a 7- cast to check the adequacy of the Contractor’s curing or cold
day strength determination, and if requested by the Ministry weather protection. The Contractor may also cast field cured
Representative, a fifth cylinder shall be cast for a 56-day test cylinders for determining interim strengths that may be
strength determination. required for further work progress approval such as opening
to traffic, formwork removal and/or erection, etc.
If one specimen in a strength test, in the opinion of the testing
agency shows evidence of improper sampling, casting, or Casting, handling, transporting and testing shall be in
testing, including damage from improper handling and accordance with CSA A23.2-3C and -9C.
transporting (and if agreed to by the Ministry
Test cylinders shall be stored as near as possible to the point
Representative), it shall be discarded and the remaining two
in the structure that the test cylinders represent, and shall be
specimen strengths averaged.
afforded the same temperature protection and moisture
Additional cylinders may be cast, at the discretion of the environment as the structure.
Ministry Representative or Contractor.
At the end of the curing period the test cylinders shall be left
The strength of each classification of concrete shall be in place, exposed to the weather in the same manner as the
considered satisfactory if: structure.
• the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength tests Test results on field cured test cylinders shall not be used as
equal or exceed the specified strength. a basis for acceptance or rejection of the concrete.
• no individual test shows strengths less than 90% of the 211.09.07 Failure to Meet Minimum Strength
specified strength. Specifications
Each "classification of concrete" will be taken as all of the (a) Understrength Concrete – When the strength of
concrete in one pay item in the Schedule 7. Where fewer than concrete is not satisfactory as specified in SS 211.09.04,
three strength tests are taken, the results of one test or the the Contractor shall prepare a plan for remedial measures
average of two will be used. and the plan shall be submitted to the Ministry
Representative for review and acceptance. If the
211.09.05 Test Cylinders – Making and curing concrete test proposed plan is not acceptable to the Ministry
cylinders shall be carried out in accordance with CSA A23.2- Representative then the Ministry Representative may
3C. The test cylinders shall be cast by the Contractor using order replacement, supplemental reinforcing, or other
standard CSA approved moulds. The Contractor shall remedial measures, at the Contractor's expense, for
provide properly designed temperature-controlled storage portions of the structure. Alternatively, at the sole
boxes for test cylinder storage, for a period of at least discretion of the Ministry Representative, the
20 hours, and further protection from adverse weather and understrength concrete may be accepted at a reduced
mishandling before and during delivery to the testing price.
laboratory for curing and testing.
(b) Coring – the coring of concrete, to verify its strength,
The Contractor shall provide a maximum-minimum will be allowed only for concrete, which is otherwise to
thermometer for each storage box and record site curing be replaced or reinforced. Coring will not be allowed for
temperatures for all test cylinders. concrete for which reduced payment is to be made for
Storage in a portable building which will be used by the understrength. When coring is allowed, cores shall be
Contractor’s personnel or the concrete testing personnel taken at locations as directed by the Ministry
during the first 24 hour storage period will not be permitted. Representative, who shall be present during the coring.

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (12 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 157 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

Where coring is allowed, it shall be carried out at the partially hardened or hardened concrete before and during
Contractor’s expense by an independent qualified testing concrete placement. Gate control mechanisms shall be
firm. Three cores shall be obtained and tested in cleaned and lubricated before being used.
accordance with CSA A23.2-14C "Obtaining and
In the use of crane and bucket, segregation of concrete from
Testing Drilled Cores for Compressive Strength Testing"
jarring or shaking shall be prevented. Side-dump buckets
at each test location. shall be used whenever necessary to avoid conflict with
Concrete in the area represented by the core tests may be extended reinforcing steel or formwork.
considered structurally adequate if:
211.10.04 Chutes – Chutes shall be of rounded cross section
(i) the average strength test result of each set of three to avoid the accumulation of concrete in corners; be capable
cores from the portion of the structure in question is of slope adjustment sufficiently steep to permit flow without
equal to at least 100% of the specified strength requiring a slump greater than that specified or required for
placement (slope normally required is 1 vertical to 2 or 2½
(ii) the strength test result of any single core is not less
horizontal).
than 80% of the specified strength
Baffles and changes in direction may be used to control flow,
Notwithstanding the final result, the Contractor will be
but not vibration, paddling or water spray.
responsible for all costs associated with the coring
operation and testing, and shall not be reimbursed for Chutes or belts shall be rigidly supported but sufficiently
inconvenience or other associated costs. mobile to permit discharge as close as possible to the
placement location as it progresses. Any long line of chutes
211.09.08 Failure to Meet Slump or Air Content
or belts shall be covered during hot, dry or windy weather to
Specifications – In the event that the slump and/or air content
prevent drying of concrete and excessive slump loss.
are outside the specified limits, the Ministry Representative
may accept adjustments to correct the deficient condition as 211.10.05 Conveyor Operation Rate – Conveyor operation
an alternative to rejection. In such cases, adjustments must rate shall be dependent on the proper placement and
be completed within the maximum time allowed as specified consolidation of the concrete with the belt inclination such
in SS 211.08.02 and additional testing shall be required to that no segregation occurs from any sliding or roll-back of
verify specification compliance. If compliance is not the concrete.
achieved, the concrete shall be rejected. 211.10.06 Hoppers – Hoppers, set approximately level, shall
211.10 Placing of Concrete be supported on specially framed bearers transmitting only
vertical loads to the top of the formwork.
211.10.01 General – Equipment for conveying concrete at
the Site, such as buggies, buckets, hoppers, chutes, belts and 211.10.07 Pumps – Pumps shall be of sufficient capacity to
pumps, shall be of such design, size and condition to deposit supply un-segregated concrete, using the design mix
a continuous and adequate supply of concrete of the specified proportions at the design slump, to meet the required
mix and consistency without segregation at the required placement volume at the forms. Satisfactory operation and
locations. performance of the proposed pumping equipment with the
concrete materials and mixes otherwise suitable and
Placing of concrete shall comply with CSA A23.1. The appropriate for the job, along with the line layout and grate
equipment specifications in SS 211.10.02 to SS 211.10.07 size opening, shall be demonstrated to the Ministry
inclusive shall apply unless the use of alternative equipment Representative's satisfaction and acceptance.
is accepted by the Ministry Representative.
Any necessary priming of the concrete pump shall be done
211.10.02 Buggies – Buggies shall have inflatable rubber with a water/cement or water/cement/sand slurry. The prime
tires. Inner surfaces of the bucket shall be smooth with slurry followed by approximately 0.25 m3 of concrete shall
filleted corners, mortar-tight and free of any excessive not be included in the concrete placement. No other pump
accumulation of hardened concrete, obstructions or aid type admixtures will be permitted.
deterioration interfering with the proper discharge of
concrete. Grade and ramp-way surfaces shall be sufficiently 211.11 Falsework and Formwork
smooth to prevent segregation of concrete being carried in 211.11.01 General – Formwork and falsework shall be
buggies. designed, supplied, installed and removed in accordance with
211.10.03 Bottom-dump Buckets and Hoppers – CSA-S269.1 and shall also meet all the requirements for
Bottom-dump buckets and hoppers shall have side slopes not concrete formwork and falsework given in the Occupational
less than 60o from the horizontal and shall be equipped with Health and Safety Regulation Clauses 20.17 to 20.26
wide free-working and tight-closing discharge gates. The inclusive.
discharge gates shall be constructed to regulate the concrete Formwork and falsework support accessories shall not be
flow, spring loaded to ensure complete closure and be welded or otherwise attached to the permanent structural
capable of immediate closure at any time during discharge. steelwork or precast concrete structural members.
Buckets and hoppers shall be cleaned of any accumulation of

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (13 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 158 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

Where required, formwork and associated temporary exterior surfaces of decks and curbs shall be an acceptable
falsework design and drawings shall be prepared and sealed break-back type with surface cone, or removable threaded
by a professional engineer registered with the Association of type. Cavities shall be filled with cement mortar and the
Professional Engineers and Geoscientists of the Province of surface left sound, smooth, even and uniform in color. See
British Columbia and experienced in the design and SS 211.17 for details on finishes, mortar mixes and other
construction of falsework and formwork structures similar to relevant information.
those required to construct the Work. No load shall be placed
on the formwork or falsework until the professional engineer 211.11.04 Deck Formwork – Formwork for decks, curbs,
responsible for the design has inspected and certified, in sidewalks and parapets shall be fabricated so that the lines
writing, that the work has been carried out in accordance with and grades shown on the drawings are achieved. For
the formwork drawings and specifications and a copy of the suspended slab bridge decks the formwork shall be designed
formwork design engineers’ certification has been received to allow for an adjustable haunch to facilitate the casting of a
by the Ministry Representative. constant depth deck slab as shown on the Drawings. Girders
will be erected to normally accepted standards of tolerance;
Bridge deck formwork design shall include a check for the
it shall be necessary to adjust the formwork to compensate
lateral stability of the girders during the placement of deck
for camber, variances in girder dimensions, positioning, and
concrete. Stringers shall be temporarily braced, if necessary,
sweep.
to facilitate deck concreting operations.
Prior to commencing deck formwork and subsequent to the
Detailed falsework and formwork drawings shall be completion of the erection of girders, with the girders in a
submitted to the Ministry Representative for review. The
thermally neutral condition and with no dead load other than
drawings shall be submitted a minimum of two weeks before
the dead load of the girders and necessary fall protection, the
the start of installation.
Contractor shall profile all the girders. Camber elevations are
211.11.02 Design –All forms shall be designed and built to be taken at 1000 mm centres maximum (or as indicated on
mortar-tight and of sufficient rigidity to prevent distortion the Drawings or Special Provisions), centrelines of all
due to the pressure of vibrated concrete and other loads bearings and ends of girders. The camber elevation locations
incidental to the construction operation. The forms shall be are to be laid out to an accuracy of 25 mm horizontally and
substantial and unyielding, and shall be designed so that the camber elevations taken to the nearest 1 mm vertically.
finished concrete will conform to the design dimensions and Within 14 days of the Contractor supplying the camber
contours. The shape, strength, rigidity, water tightness and elevation to the Ministry Representative, the Contractor will
surface smoothness of re-used forms shall be maintained at receive haunch heights for setting the deck slab soffit, and the
all times. Forms which are unsatisfactory in any respect shall design finished grade elevations for the deck, complete with
not be used. anticipated dead load deflections at 1000 mm stations along
the centreline of roadway.
All formwork and falsework shall be designed to be
completely removable, no stay in place formwork will be In the event that actual girder camber values vary
permitted. significantly from the design values, the Contractor will be
required to modify the original design finished grade as
No dry ties shall be permitted; form tie rods shall remain directed by the Ministry Representative.
embedded and terminate not less than 50 mm from the
formed face of the concrete. Removable embedded fasteners 211.11.05 Removal of Falsework and Formwork – Where
on the ends of the rods shall be such as to leave holes of a formwork and associated falsework have been engineered by
regular shape for reaming and filling. a professional engineer, forms and their supports shall not be
For narrow walls and columns, where the bottom of the form removed without the approval of the professional engineer
is inaccessible, removable panels shall be provided in the responsible for the formwork and falsework design and
bottom form panel to enable cleaning out of extraneous without the acceptance of the Ministry Representative. In
material immediately before placing the concrete. determining the time for the removal of falsework and
formwork, consideration shall be given to the location and
211.11.03 Forms for Exposed Surfaces – All forms for character of the structure, the weather and other conditions
exposed surfaces shall be mortar-tight. All exposed edges influencing the curing of the concrete, and the materials used
shall be chamfered by use of a chamfer strip and return in the mix.
corners filleted. Metal bolts or anchorages within the forms
shall be so constructed as to permit their removal to a depth Supports shall be removed in such a manner as to permit the
of at least 50 mm from the concrete surface. Break-back type concrete to uniformly and gradually take the stresses due to
form ties shall have all spacing washers removed and the tie its own weight together with any construction loads likely to
shall be broken back a distance of at least 50 mm from the be imposed. All formwork must be removed from the
concrete surface. All fittings for metal ties shall be of such completed structure.
design that, upon their removal, the cavities which are left
will be of the smallest possible size. Torch cutting of steel
hangers and ties will not be permitted. Formwork hangers for

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (14 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 159 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

211.12 Construction Joints 211.13.01 Vibrators – General – The number, type, design
and operation of vibrators will be subject to the acceptance of
211.12.01 General – Definition – Joints between adjacent or
the Ministry Representative.
successive lifts of concrete where the previously cast
concrete cannot be plasticized with a vibrator, or any joint Vibrators shall have the following capabilities and
required by the Contractor’s method of construction. requirements:
Construction joints generally shall be in accordance with the
• diameter and frequency of vibrators shall conform to
following requirements:
Table 211-H.
• kept to a minimum.
• vibration transmission to the concrete at frequencies not
• concealed by a natural break or line in the structure. less than 130 Hz.
• provided for by the formwork design and placing • vibration intensity sufficient to be visually observed on
techniques. concrete with not more than 25 mm slump over a radius
Emergency construction joints shall conform as nearly as of at least 450 mm.
possible to planned joints. In any case, concrete must be • sufficient number of vibrators available to properly
levelled as well as possible and, if lifts are partial, a vertical compact each 8 m³ batch within 15 minutes after it is
bulkhead shall be installed. Permission from the Ministry placed in forms, with at least two vibrators provided for
Representative shall be required to complete the cast each concrete placing unit.
following any emergency joint installation.
• stand-by vibrator and generator available on the job at all
211.12.02 Joint Edges – Joint edges shall be preformed times in case of breakdown.
whenever possible for a true line upon form removal.
211.13.02 Mechanical Vibrators – Mechanical vibrators
Pour-strip shall be positioned relative to form ties so as to
shall thoroughly consolidate concrete immediately after
minimize form bulge at the bottom of the subsequent cast, but
placing.
concrete may be cast to the top of a form instead of the
pour-strip. Concrete surfaces outside of the reinforcing steel Vibrator usage shall be as follows:
shall be steel trowelled to a true line. • not inserted between reinforcing steel and formwork nor
211.12.03 Surfaces Preparation – Joint surfaces of the directly on to the reinforcing steel.
hardened concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign • inserted vertically at a rate of 75 mm per second and
matter and laitance to present clean, sound surfaces with the penetrating into the preceding layer at least 50 mm.
coarse aggregate partially exposed and achieved by:
• withdrawn at a rate of 150 mm per second.
• brushing immediately following initial set.
• grid pattern movement starting 100 mm from a formed
• treatment with a surface set retardant, followed by green surface and at a maximum spacing of 300 mm thereafter.
cutting.
211.13.03 Form Vibrators – Form vibrators may be
• sand blasting. permitted at the discretion of the Ministry Representative
• water blasting. where rebar configuration would prohibit the use of internal
vibrators.
Where roughening of the hardened concrete is specified, the
surface shall be roughened to a full amplitude of at least
5mm. Table 211-H: Requirements for Diameter and
211.12.04 Bonding of Joints – Bonding of joints shall be Frequency of Vibrators
achieved through the use of a water-cement slurry or, if
Rate of
specified, an epoxy-type bonding agent conforming with
ASTM C 881M applied in strict accordance with the Placement
Diameter Frequency
manufacturer’s specifications. Slurry, when used, shall have of Concrete Application
(mm) (Hz)
a water-cement ratio equal to that of the concrete being per Vibrator
placed and be brush applied to a 3 to 5 mm thickness for (m3/h)
100% coverage on to the cleaned existing concrete surface 170 – very thin
within five minutes of placing concrete. 20 – 40 1–4
250 members
211.13 Consolidation 150 – walls and slabs
30 – 60 2–8
Consolidation shall meet the requirements of CSA A23.1. 225 200 – 300 mm
The equipment specifications in SS 211.13.01 to 130 – larger
SS 211.13.02 inclusive shall apply unless the use of 50 – 90 5 – 15
200 members
alternative equipment is accepted by the Ministry
Representative.

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (15 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 160 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

211.14 Finishing 211.15.02 Acceptable Methods and Procedures –

Acceptable curing methods and procedures shall include the
211.14.01 Finishing Top Surfaces – Plastic concrete, struck
following:
off immediately following casting and before the
accumulation of bleed water, shall be finished by hand or (a) concrete surfaces shall be cured for a period of seven
mechanical floating with the least possible disturbance. consecutive uninterrupted twenty-four hour periods,
Water, cement or proprietary topping material shall not be however, if the Ministry Representative has accepted the
added to the surface during finishing. use of high-early strength cement (HE), this period may
be reduced as permitted by the Ministry Representative.
No steel floats or trowels shall be used on exposed surfaces.
(b) surface temperature maintained between 10oC and 35oC,
211.14.02 Strike-off and Finishing Machines – Strike-off
unless high-temperature curing (i.e., by hot blankets or
and finishing machines for surfacing concrete such as slabs
steam) is acceptable to the Ministry Representative.
on grade, pavements, etc. shall conform to the following:
(c) hot weather and cold weather special requirements are
• capable of accurately finishing concrete surfaces to the covered by SS 211.18 and SS 211.19. The
grade and elevation as shown on the Drawings or as determination and recording of air and concrete
directed by the Ministry Representative. temperatures to verify compliance with the requirements
• surface finish production free of open texturing, plucked for hot and cold weather concreting shall be the
aggregates or projections. responsibility of the Contractor. The location and
• maintained in good mechanical repair and free of methodology for the determination and recording of
hydraulic fluid leaks, oil leaks, excessive grease and temperatures shall be acceptable to the Ministry
other contaminants. Representative.

211.14.03 Trowel Finishing – Trowel finishing where (d) formed concrete protection, with formwork left in place
required: during the curing period (usually seven days), is
generally not necessary except during extremes of hot or
• by the Drawings or specifications, cold weather temperatures. Where formwork is removed
• for unformed surfaces exposed to view from a close before the end of the curing period, the concrete shall be
distance, protected in the manner specified below for unformed
surfaces during the remainder of the curing period.
• by close tolerance requirements (such as bearing
(e) Unformed surface protection using burlap and water or
surfaces),
where permitted, other moisture-retaining method
shall be commenced after bleed waters have disappeared to considered adequate to promote curing, shall include the
reduce the texture of the concrete surface and produce a following common methods and requirements:
smooth blemish-free surface.
(i) Burlap – Soaking wet burlap of acceptable quality
211.14.04 Other Textured Finishes – Other textured shall be carefully laid on the surface of the concrete
finishes shall be applied as and where specified. as soon as the concrete has set sufficiently to support
211.14.05 Damage or Scaling – Any damage to or scaling of the burlap without marring the surface. Strips shall
surfaces shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Ministry be overlapped 150 mm, adequately held down and
Representative. maintained in place in a thoroughly wet condition
throughout the curing period (usually seven days).
211.15 Curing Wetness of burlap shall be maintained at all times.
211.15.01 General – Freshly deposited concrete shall be (ii) Vapour Barrier – Vapour barrier of acceptable
protected from freezing, abnormally high temperatures or quality of opaque white-pigmental 0.10 mm thick
temperature differentials, premature drying, excessive ("4 mil") polyethylene sheet, white upper surfaced
moisture, moisture loss, heavy shocks, excessive vibrations paper or other permitted material shall be of such
and high stresses, for the period of time necessary to develop size and placement to minimize the number of laps.
the desired properties of the concrete. The material shall be laid, lapped and held down
around the edges and at the laps:
The curing period will begin following the placement of the
concrete in the section cast. It shall be the responsibility of • to prevent displacement.
the Contractor to ensure that the system of curing and
protection is properly planned, constructed and maintained • to provide and maintain an effective vapour
throughout the entire curing period. barrier.
• prevent any flow of air between the vapour
barrier material and the concrete.

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (16 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 161 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

• kept in place throughout the curing period • trowel the surface of the patch flush with the surface of
(usually seven days). the surrounding concrete.
However, the barrier material shall not be pulled
tight against the fresh concrete surface so as to Table 211-I: Dimensional Tolerances
smooth the required surface texture.
ELEMENT TOLERANCE
211.15.03 Removal of Protective Materials – Protective
materials shall be removed entirely from all concrete surfaces
at the end of the curing period and the surfaces left clean. such that there is no gap
Trueness of bearing
over 1 mm under a 1 m
211.16 Dimensional Tolerances – Dimensional tolerances surfaces
straight edge
shall be as shown in Table 211-I.
211.17 Finishing Formed Surfaces such that there is no gap
Trueness of bridge deck
over 3 mm under a 3 m
211.17.01 Class 1 Finish – Class 1 Finish is the basic finish surfaces
straight edge
to be produced on all formed surfaces not exposed to view
unless a better finish is specified or required by the Drawings such that there is no gap
or Special Provisions. Trueness of slope
over 12 mm under a 3 m
pavement surfaces
In order to produce a Class 1 finish, the formwork shall be straight edge
mortar tight. Panel marks and texture are of no importance.
such that there is no gap
All ties, bolts, nails and other metal specifically required for Trueness of other surfaces
over 12 mm under a 3 m
construction purposes shall be removed or cut back to a depth exposed to view
straight edge
of 50 mm from the surfaces of the concrete and the resulting
holes filled. such that there is no gap
Form tie rods shall remain embedded and terminate not less Curbs and parapets over 3 mm under a 3 m
than 50 mm from the formed face of the concrete. Removable straight edge
embedded fasteners on the ends of the rods shall be such as
to leave holes of a regular shape for reaming and filling. Horizontal distance to
50 mm
Removable form tie rods inside of sleeves shall not be concrete surfaces
permitted.
Elevations of concrete
Honeycombs and voids over 500 mm² in area shall be filled. surfaces except bearings 25 mm
Honeycombs and voids shall not be repaired until inspected and decks
by the Ministry Representative as special methods of repair
may be required where occurring in structural elements. Elevations of bridge deck
Otherwise, concrete surfaces shall be repaired as follows: 15 mm
surfaces
• remove all porous concrete by cutting 20 mm into sound
Elevations of bearing
concrete. 5 mm
surfaces
• thoroughly clean reinforcing steel without damaging
same. 1:400,
Variation from plumb
but not more than 30 mm
• cut edges of cavities as nearly perpendicular to the
concrete surface as possible and deep enough to hold the Dimensions of members
patching mortar. 25 mm
over 10 m
• keep surrounding concrete saturated for 30minutes
before patching. Dimensions of members -6 mm,
under 10 m +15 mm
• after the sheet of free water has disappeared from the
concrete surfaces, apply a latex bonding agent, in strict Location of anchor bolts  6 mm
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
• patch with mortar, proportioned as specified in Projections of anchor
13 mm
SS 211.17.05 and mixed with the minimum amount of bolts, other embedments
water necessary to make a workable paste: for voids
deeper than 10 mm, multiple layers of mortar each with Note: The tolerances listed in Table 211-I are acceptable
a maximum thickness of 10 mm shall be used with only in so far as they do not prevent the proper fit of structural
30 minute intervals allowed between layers. members.

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (17 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 162 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

211.17.02 Class 2 Finish – Class 2 Finish is to be produced 211.17.03 Class 3 Finish - Class 3 Finish is to be produced
on all formed surfaces exposed to view from a moderate on all formed surfaces exposed to view from close distances,
distance, such as surfaces of abutments and piers, and to any such as surfaces of curbs and parapets, and to any surface for
surfaces for which a Class 2 finish is specified or required by which a Class 3 finish is specified. A Class 3 finish shall
the Drawings or the Special Provisions. A Class 2 finish shall provide surfaces of uniform colour and texture when viewed
provide surfaces of uniform colour and texture as viewed from less than 15 m.
from 25 m. In order to produce a Class 3 finish, the formwork shall
In order to produce a Class 2 finish, formwork shall be mortar render a true smooth surface, free from fins and projections.
tight and shall render a true surface. Fins 3 mm wide New plywood or steel is necessary to produce the required
(maximum) shall be allowed at the panel joints; however, finish. Re-use of plywood forms will be permitted only if in
sheathing joints must be mortar tight. Irregularities of 3 mm an "as new" condition. Repairs to the forms shall be with full
in height with areas of 50 mm x 75 mm shall be allowed to a panels of sheathing only.
maximum of four such areas per 3 m² of formwork. Patches All ties, bolts, nails and other metal specifically required for
of dissimilar material will not be permitted. Horizontal and construction purposes shall be removed or cut back to a depth
vertical joints shall be aligned. of 50 mm from the surfaces of the concrete and the resulting
All ties, bolts, nails and other metal specifically required for holes filled.
construction purposes shall be removed or cut back to a depth Form tie rods shall remain embedded and terminate not less
of 50 mm from the surfaces of the concrete and the resulting than 50 mm from the formed face of the concrete. Removable
holes filled. embedded fasteners on the ends of the rods shall be such as
Form tie rods shall remain embedded in the concrete and to leave holes of a regular shape for reaming and filling.
terminate not less than 50 mm from the formed face. Removable form tie rods inside of sleeves shall not be
Removable embedded fasteners on the ends of the rods shall permitted.
be such as to leave holes of a regular shape for reaming and Patching shall be:
filling. Removable form tie rods inside of sleeves shall not be
permitted. • patch installation projecting slightly from the
surrounding concrete surface.
Honeycombs and voids over 25 mm diameter shall be filled,
and all bugholes over 5 mm diameter shall be pointed. All • after 24 hours, saturated and carefully finished to render
fins and projections shall be removed with a hand stone or the surfaces of the patch true to the surrounding concrete,
power grinder. The use of a power grinder shall be kept to a but any grinding using a hand carborundum stone kept to
minimum and confined to the areas required. a minimum.

When a rubbed finish is not called for, patches shall be When a rubbed finish is required, the applied mortar shall be
textured with a mortar float or lightly brushed after trowelling carefully worked into the surface area being finished and,
smooth. using a hand carborundum stone manipulated in a circular
motion, the entire surface rendered true and smooth with all
Where more than 50 voids or bugholes over 5 mm diameter excess mortar removed.
occur per square metre, or if the surfaces are not acceptably
uniform in colour or texture, the entire area affected shall be 211.17.04 Class 3 Finish Alternative Procedures – Class 3
given a rubbed finish, as follows: Finish alternative procedures when, in the opinion of the
Ministry Representative, the formwork may safely be
• allow patches to attain an initial set. removed at an early age and the concrete finished while still
• keep surfaces saturated with water for 60 minutes before partly plastic. Procedures shall include the following:
applying mortar. • careful removal of the formwork when the concrete has
• remove free water from surfaces. sufficiently hardened so as to hold its shape.
• apply mortar, proportioned as specified in SS 211.17.05 • finishing the surfaces immediately (within 4 to 8 hours
and mixed at least 60 minutes before application, to the of casting, depending upon weather).
concrete surfaces with a sponge, float or a hand • careful rubbing of the concrete surfaces with a
carborundum stone, and work mortar well into the carborundum stone, occasionally wetting same to
surfaces. produce a paste from the surface of the concrete.
• allow mortar to dry 30 - 60 minutes. • rubbing continued, adding necessary sand-cement mortar
• remove residues from the surfaces by rubbing with clean in small quantities to fill voids, until all voids and form
dry burlap but with no addition of neat cement to the marks are removed.
surface during the "sacking" operation and finally cure • surface curing as specified.
the surfaces as specified in SS 211.15.
Modifications to the surface texture shall be achieved by
grinding or other means.

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (18 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 163 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

211.17.05 Patching Mortar – Patching mortar where If deemed necessary, the Contractor shall employ the
specified above shall be selected from the Ministry following hot weather concreting procedures to reduce the
Recognized Products List, subject to the acceptance of the concrete temperature:
Ministry Representative, or constituted as follows:
(a) Mixing Water
Cement: 60% Normal Portland (i) Shading of storage tanks and water supply lines;
40% White Normal Portland
(ii) Refrigeration of mixing water; and/or
Liquid: 70% Water
30% Latex Bonding Agent (iii) Adding cubed, shaved or chipped ice directly to the
concrete mixer drum, and ensuring ice is of a
Sand: Passing a 1.25 mm sieve
particle size to be completely melted before the
NOTE: Cement blend above shall be adjusted to provide concrete is discharged from the mixer drum for
close match to the concrete colour. placement.
211.18 Hot Weather Concreting (b) Cement
When ambient air temperature is 25°C or higher or there is a (i) Maintain all cementitious material to below a
probability of it rising to 25°C during the placing period (as maximum temperature of 50°C
forecast by the nearest official meteorological office), hot (c) Aggregate
weather concreting procedures as outlined below, shall be
(i) Shading of coarse and fine aggregate stockpiles;
used, for all concrete other than deck concrete. Additional
and/or
requirements for hot weather concreting for bridge decks
including diaphragms, bridge parapets, bridge medians, (ii) Wetting of coarse aggregate and allowing time for
bridge sidewalks and approach slabs are given in SS 413, drainage of free water.
Bridge Decks and Concrete Overlays. (iii) Wetting down of stockpiles of fine aggregate is not
Prior to the placement of concrete, the Contractor shall permitted.
submit to the Ministry Representative for acceptance, the (d) Mixing – Mixing time should be kept to a minimum,
proposed placing operations complying with the allowing adequate time for complete mixing of the
requirements for hot weather concreting. concrete. The external surface of the mixing drum
Curing shall be accomplished by water spray or by using should be frequently wetted down.
saturated absorptive material, such as burlap. (e) Placing – Production of concrete during hot weather
Formwork, reinforcement and concreting equipment shall be shall be scheduled for a continuous supply of concrete at
protected from the direct rays of the sun or cooled by fogging the Site.
and evaporation. Adequate manpower, equipment and standby provisions
Concrete for piers, abutments and footings of bridges shall shall be provided in order to place and consolidate the
not have a temperature greater than 25°C at any time prior to delivered concrete within 45 minutes after initial mixing.
placement and curing. Further, the time interval between placing batches shall
not exceed 30 minutes.
The initial temperature of concrete prior to placement may be
estimated from the temperatures of its ingredients by using Time of placement extensions during hot weather
the following equation: concreting may be considered by the Ministry
Representative and may require the use of Hydration
0.22(Ta M a + Tc M c ) + TwM w + Twa M wa Stabilizing Admixtures (HSA’s) conforming to the
T=
0.22(M a + M c ) + M w + M wa requirements of ASTM C494 Type B, Retarding or Type
D, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixtures. Use of
where HSA’s shall be in accordance with SS 211.08.02.
Ta, Tc, Tw and Twa For large unformed surfaces, the quantity and rate of
= temperature in °C of aggregates, cementitious placing of concrete shall be dependent upon the rate of
materials, added mixing water, and free water on finishing and climatic condition.
aggregates, respectively When the rate of evaporation from unformed surfaces as
Ma, Mc, Mw and Mwa estimated from SS Drawing SP211-01 "Surface
Evaporation Rate" exceeds 1.0 kg/m²/hr, either concrete
= mass in kilograms of aggregates, cementitious operations shall cease or, upon acceptance of the
materials, added mixing water, and free water on Ministry Representative, necessary precautions taken to
aggregates, respectively prevent plastic shrinkage as detailed in CSA A23.1
Section 7.6.

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (19 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 164 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

(f) Curing – Curing during hot weather shall be surfaces raised to a minimum of 5°C, with such
commenced as soon as possible. minimum established and maintained for at least one
hour prior to placement.
Forms shall be kept moist and loosened as soon as this
can be done without structural damage, with a flow of Heat shall be applied uniformly and at a rate which will
water introduced and allowed to run down inside. not induce excessive thermal stresses in the section being
heated. Ambient air temperatures shall not exceed
Newly exposed concrete surfaces shall be protected from
concrete temperatures by more than 13°C and shall be
premature drying by the application of pre-wetted curing
raised at a maximum rate of 2°C/hr.
materials or a continuous water spray as the forms are
removed. Projecting reinforcing steel shall be insulated when
temperatures are between 0°C and -10°C for a minimum
Large exposures of concrete require special precautions
of 300 mm away from the fresh concrete and for a
as follows:
minimum of 600 mm when temperatures are below -
(i) burlap application commenced as soon as the 10°C.
surface will support the mass without excessive
(d) Other Contact Surfaces – Concrete shall not be placed
deformation, with this surface kept continuously
on frozen surfaces except in pile founded footings where
wet by fog spraying until a waterproof barrier is
a minimum layer of 25 mm rigid insulation shall be
securely in place.
installed. Rock surfaces shall be heated by forced air.
(ii) concrete under the curing blanket is not allowed to Heating shall continue until all standing frost crystals are
dry out for a minimum of seven days from the time dissolved. Frozen embankment shall be thawed and re-
of initial covering, necessitating frequent checking compacted prior to placing concrete thereon. The
and soaking by the addition of water under the top temperature of existing concrete work shall be raised to a
evaporation barrier. minimum of 5°C and maintained at this temperature for a
(iii) wet curing followed by the removal of the evap- time sufficient to raise the entire mass of concrete to this
oration barrier only under such conditions that the temperature.
wetted burlap is permitted to dry slowly before (e) Curing and Protection – Curing and protection
removal and the surface is exposed to prevent necessary to maintain a minimum concrete temperature
excessive thermal shock. (10°C) shall be provided throughout the curing period.
211.19 Cold Weather Concreting – Cold weather Heated enclosures shall be kept at 95% minimum
concreting procedures shall be used when the ambient relative humidity. Concrete surfaces shall be protected
temperature is, or is forecast to be, below 5°C during by formwork or impermeable membranes from direct
placement, and/or is forecast to fall below 5°C during the first exposure to the combustion gases of heating. The use of
seven days after placing. The Contractor shall be fully salamanders, coke stoves, oil or gas burners and similar
responsible for the protection of concrete during cold and spot heaters which have an open flame and intense local
adverse weather conditions and shall maintain a minimum heat is prohibited without the Ministry Representative’s
concrete temperature of 10°C for a minimum of seven acceptance. The enclosed air temperature shall not be
continuous days. Prior to the placement of concrete, the less than 10°C nor more than 26°C.
Contractor shall submit to the Ministry Representative for
Where practical, insulated forms, capable of maintaining
acceptance, the proposed placing operations complying with
the surface of the concrete at not less than 10°C for a
the requirements for cold weather concreting.
period of seven days, may be used instead of enclosures
211.19.01 Provisions – The following provisions for cold and heating. If forms are insulated, exposed horizontal
weather concreting shall apply: surfaces shall be protected with a similar layer of the
(a) Material Temperatures – The temperature of the insulating material securely fastened in place. If the
combined water and aggregates shall not exceed 40°C insulated forms do not maintain the proper temperature
when combined with the cement. The temperature of the at the concrete surface, auxiliary protection shall be used
concrete shall be between 10°C and 25°C at the time of to provide additional heat as described above.
placement. The determination and recording of air and concrete
(b) Aggregates – Aggregates shall be heated to eliminate temperatures to verify compliance with the requirements
frozen lumps, ice and snow without overheating or for cold weather concreting shall be the responsibility of
excessive drying. Aggregates shall not be heated above the Contractor.
65°C, and all lumps of frozen aggregate shall be The Contractor is responsible for furnishing and using a
excluded from the mix. 24-hour minimum/maximum or continuous temperature
(c) Formwork, Reinforcing Steel – Before any concrete is recording thermometer to record the air temperature
placed, all ice, snow or frost shall be completely within the enclosure and/or insulated forms. Daily
removed from the forms and the temperature of contact

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (20 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 165 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

records shall be submitted to the Ministry Representative minute. Dewatering will not be permitted until at least
upon request. 24 hours after concreting has been completed.
At the end of the curing period, heating and protection (f) Pumping and tremie pipe requirements shall be as
shall be withdrawn in such a manner so as not to induce follows:
thermal shock stresses in the concrete. The temperature (i) length sufficient to reach the lowest point of deposit
of the concrete shall be gradually reduced at a rate not
but held 150 mm to 250 mm above the bottom of the
exceeding 10°C per day to that of the surrounding air.
placement.
To achieve this, in a heated housing, the heat shall be
slowly reduced and then shut off, and the whole housing (ii) submerged into the placed concrete and held in a
allowed to cool to air temperature before the housing near vertical position at all times.
itself is removed. However, the protection shall not be (iii) supported in such a manner to allow vertical
removed until the temperature of the concrete has fallen movement.
to within 10oC of the temperature of the outside air.
(iv) discharge at locations not farther apart than 7 m.
211.20 Underwater Concreting – Underwater concreting
procedures shall be used when structures, or parts of (v) discharge end fitted with a 3 m section of steel pipe.
structures, are to be constructed under water. This section is (vi) fed by either chutes or pumps with a continuous
also applicable to tremie placement in the dry, unless flow of concrete.
specified otherwise.
(g) Priming of tremie pipes shall be by inserting a plug of
211.20.01 Requirements – The concrete, methods of burlap, 25 mm less in diameter than the tremie pipe, in
placement either by pumping or tremie pipes, and equipment the top of the pipe and carefully controlling concrete
shall be in accordance with the following, or as otherwise flow as the plug passes through the pipe. Where priming
directed by the Ministry Representative: is lost, the priming procedure shall be repeated.
(a) Proposals outlining procedures shall be submitted for (h) Concrete flow, once begun, shall be continuous through
review to the Ministry Representative 3 weeks prior to the pipe, at a minimum of 15 m³ of concrete supplied to
placement of concrete. Placement shall comply with the each tremie or pump per hour, but controlled so as not to
provisions of the proposal. overflow the feed hopper. The flow of concrete shall be
(b) Materials shall conform to the requirements of continuous to the end of the batch and the pipe lowered
SS 211.04, except that coarse aggregates shall contain in the placed concrete to maintain its prime.
not more than 25% angular particles by mass. (i) Placement of concrete underwater shall be either to the
(c) Mix proportions shall be as specified in SS 211.03, full depth of placement or in lifts and shall conform to
except: the following requirements:
(i) cement content not less than 400 kg/m³. (i) seals shall be placed by beginning at one end and
continuing until final grade is achieved.
(ii) water/cement ratio no greater than 0.40.
(ii) point of placement shall be relocated by
(iii) plasticized slump of 180 mm 20 mm. approximately 3 m, either laterally or longitudinally
(iv) admixtures used to achieve plastic, cohesive and and placement continued to grade.
flowable concrete if acceptable to the Ministry (iii) above procedures repeated to the completion of the
Representative. seal or when the lift method of placement is used.
(v) suspension type admixtures should be considered (iv) flow of concrete shall be regulated to produce
(vi) retarding type admixture if accepted by the Ministry approximately horizontal surfaces.
Representative shall be used to prevent the (v) each lift placed before the preceding lift has taken
formation of cold joints with the lift method of initial set.
placement or where the concrete surface area is
large. (vi) depth and area of each lift dependent upon the rate
of placement.
(d) Heating of water or aggregates or both, to obtain a
suitable placing temperature, shall be done in accordance (j) Concrete in its plastic state shall not be disturbed either
with SS 211.19. Concrete, when mixed, shall have a directly or indirectly by puddling or vibration.
temperature of between 15°C and 25°C and shall not be (k) Should interrupted placement be sufficient for the
placed in water having a temperature less than 2°C. concrete to take initial set, the laitance shall be removed
(e) Cofferdams or forms into which concrete is to be placed from the concrete surface before concreting is resumed,
shall be sufficiently tight to prevent the loss of mortar but with the resumption of concreting delayed
and, if in running water, reduce the velocity of flow indefinitely, laitance shall be removed not later than
within the cofferdam or forms to not more than 3 m per 36 hours after the interruption.

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (21 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 166 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

211.21 Measurement and Payment placing, and finishing (except the finishing of formed
surfaces) of concrete, and for everything supplied and done
211.21.01 Formwork – Payment for formwork will be made
in connection therewith, except formwork and reinforcing
at the Unit Prices bid per square metre. Payment shall be for
steel.
the supply, construction and removal of formwork, and for
the finishing, as required, of formed surfaces. Areas shall be Payment for curing, prorated at 10% will be made pending
measured of the faces of forms in contact with the concrete. satisfactory completion of the specified curing process. No
payment will be made for partial curing. Failure to comply
Payment will be made for forming one face of vertical
strictly with the specified curing process will result in
construction joints which are shown on the Drawings or
forfeiture of payment for curing. The Ministry
ordered by the Ministry Representative. No payment will be
Representative shall take measures as required to provide the
made for forming construction joints not so required.
specified curing. Should the cost of these measures exceed
Payment will be made for forming both faces of joints formed
the monies recovered from the forfeiture of curing payment,
by casting in sheets of styrofoam or other material, where
the balance will be deducted from the remaining payment for
such joints are required by the Contract Documents.
concrete.
Payment will not be made for forming surfaces which are cast
Payment for concrete shall include cement.
against permanent embedded items which are paid for
separately. Payment shall also include all costs associated with quality
control.
Upper surfaces which form an angle of 45° or less with the
horizontal, will not usually be considered to be formed Measurement of volume will be made to the surfaces shown
surfaces. on the drawings or ordered by the Ministry Representative.
Deductions will be made of the volumes of embedded ducts,
The undersides of members which are shown on the
timbers, etc., but not of the volume of reinforcing steel. No
Drawings to rest on ground or fill will not be considered
payment will be made for concrete placed outside the
formed surfaces. The undersides of members which are not
surfaces shown or ordered, as to fill spaces left by over
shown on the Drawings to rest on ground or fill will be
excavation or irregularities in excavation.
considered formed surfaces.
The reduced price to be paid for understrength concrete shall
Where sides of footings or faces of walls are cast against
be calculated by the following formula:
ground or fill (if permitted by the Ministry Representative)
the surfaces so formed will be considered formed surfaces.
Only the areas of the surfaces shown on the Drawings will be S AV x
paid for. PR = PU
S SP
Progress payments will be made according to Table 211-J.
Where
Table 211-J: Progress Payments PR = reduced price

Progress PU = bid price

Application
Payments SSP = specified strength
60% For formwork in place SAV = the lowest average of three consecutive strength
20% For Formwork removed tests for one classification of concrete within the
same structural element. Where less than three
20% For surface finishing completed
strength tests are taken, the results shall be the
average of all the actual strength tests taken.
211.21.02 Concrete – Payment for concrete will be made at See SS 211.09.07 for circumstances under which a reduced
the Unit Prices bid per cubic metre (or at a reduced price for price will be paid. Where a reduced price is paid, it will be
understrength concrete - see fourth paragraph of this applied to all of the concrete in the applicable pay item.
subsection) prorated at 90% for the supply, transportation,

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (22 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 167 of 470
SECTION 211 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

BC MoTI SS 2020 211 (23 of 23)

Vol. 1 Page 168 of 470
 SECTION 213

TIMBER BRIDGES – CONSTRUCTION

213.01 General – Timber materials may be used in the Spikes that are likely to crack or unnecessarily damage the
completed Work only when explicitly identified in the timber shall have holes bored 1/16" small.
Contract as an acceptable product.
Hardware and metalwork in contact with treated wood shall
213.02 Materials, Handling, Storage and Construction – be galvanized or stainless steel and shall be in accordance
All materials, handling, storage and construction shall be as with the requirements of SS 908.08.
specified and shall conform to the relevant requirements of
213.06 Field Treatment – Cutting, framing and boring of
SS 214, SS 904, SS 905, SS 906, and SS 908.
timbers to receive preservative treatment shall be done
All materials shall be handled and stored with reasonable before treatment insofar as possible.
care to prevent damage such as puncture, cutting or crushing
In the event that cutting or drilling becomes necessary after
of fibre.
treatment, a field treatment preservative specified in
213.03 Logs for Cribs and Log Stringers – Logs for cribs CSA O80.3 or the American Wood Protection Associated
shall be cut from live trees and shall be peeled before use. (AWPA) Standard M4 shall be used and applied in
accordance to its label. At least two coats shall be applied
Log stringers shall be cut from live trees not less than
and where possible, the colour of the preservative treatment
30 days before use and shall be seasoned with the bark on.
used for protecting field cuts shall match the original
Immediately before use, all bark shall be peeled and the log
preservative treatment colour.
trimmed smooth of all knots and projections.
For bridge components, creosote and copper naphthenate
213.04 Work Practice – The standard of work shall be first-
shall be the only permitted field preservatives.
class throughout and in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Construction Specifications. For untreated timber, all surfaces in contact with any other
surface and all bolt holes shall be swabbed with a
Details for construction of log stringer bridges and log cribs
water-borne preservative.
shall be in accordance with “Log Bridge Construction
Handbook 1980” published by Forest Engineering Research Preservative chemicals shall not be permitted to spill onto
Institute of Canada (FERIC), except as otherwise specified the ground or into any waterway during field treatment.
in the Contract.
213.06 Preparation of Laminated Decks for Wearing
213.05 Framing – All the cutting, boring, framing, match Surface
marking, etc. required on all timber shall be done by
213.06.01 For Asphalt Plank – Depressions in laminated
competent bridge framers in a thorough manner, in
decks shall be levelled by placing and compacting a fine
accordance with good work practice. It shall be done such
sand levelling course.
that surfaces in contact shall bear evenly and fully; no shims
or open joints are permitted. All measurements shall be The levelling course shall consist of a mixture of fine
accurate. Gains and daps shall have plane, smooth surfaces. durable sand conforming to the gradation shown in
Holes shall be bored with an auger to the sizes shown in Table 213-B.
Table 213-A. The sand shall be thoroughly mixed with asphalt emulsion,
Type SS-1 which shall conform to the requirements of
Table 213-A: Hole Sizes SS 952.08. The asphalt emulsion content shall be such that
an air void content of 5% to 8% in the compacted mixture
FIR AND CEDAR AND is obtained. This will normally require an asphalt emulsion
COMPONENT HARD- SOFT- of 15% to 25% by weight of the total mixture.
WOODS WOODS
Before laying and nailing asphalt plank, laminated decks
Same size as
BOLTS 1/16” Large shall be swabbed with oxidized mopping asphalt Type 2
bolt
conforming to the requirements of Table 213-C.
DRIFT
Same size as bolt 1/16" Small 213.06.02 For Asphalt – Prior to placing asphalt wearing
BOLTS
surface, creosote-treated laminated decks shall be
1/16" Large for 1/16" Large for lime-scrubbed where creosote oil has "bled" to the surface.
ends of posts, ends of posts,
DOWELS but in sills make but in sills make To prevent "bleeding" of the creosote oil, the mix
same size as same size as temperature of hot-mix asphalt placed on these decks shall
dowel dowel be as low as is practicable.

BC MoTI SS 2020 213 (1 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 169 of 470
SECTION 213 TIMBER BRIDGES – CONSTRUCTION

Table 213-B: Consistency of the Levelling Course 213.07 Basis of Payment – Payment will be made at the
unit prices bid, for the various items in the Schedule of
STANDARD SIEVE PERCENTAGE Approximate Quantities and Unit Prices, for material
SIZES PASSING BY remaining in and forming a part of the finished structure.
ASTM METRIC WEIGHT (%) Such payment shall be accepted as full compensation for all
labour, equipment, tools, materials, including hardware and
#8 2.36 mm 100 furnishing and placing all other items required to complete
#16 1.18 mm 60 – 100 the work.

#30 0.600 mm 46 – 80
#50 0.300 mm 35 – 62
#100 0.150 mm 25 – 46
#200 0.075 mm 18 – 35

Table 213-C: Requirements for Oxidized Mopping Asphalt Type 2

ASTM TEST TYPE 2 ASPHALT

TEST DESCRIPTION
METHOD MINIMUM MAXIMUM
Softening Point (R & B), °C D36 74 79
Flash Point, C.O.C., °C D96 232 ---
Penetration @ 0°C D5 12 20
Penetration @ 25°C D5 20 35
Penetration @ 46°C D5 --- 70
A.P.I. Gravity @ 15°C D71 4.6 5.8
Ductility @ 25°C, 5 cm minimum D113 3 ---
Loss on Heating to 163°C (325°F), 5 hr., % D6 --- 0.3
Penetration of Residue, % of original D5 80 0
Total Bitumen (soluble in CS2) %: Mineral Stabilized Asphalt D4 80 ---
Total Bitumen (soluble in CS2) %: Asphalt Without Mineral
D4 99 ---
Stabilizer

BC MoTI SS 2020 213 (2 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 170 of 470
 SECTION 214

TIMBER PILING CONSTRUCTION

Note: Timber piles may be used only when explicitly Where soil conditions, in the opinion of the Ministry
identified in the Contract as an acceptable material. Representative, require the pointing of piles, the Contractor
shall supply and install the piles with steel points fabricated
214.01 Materials – All piling shall conform to requirements
in accordance with SS Drawing SP214-01 Pile Shoe
of SS 906 and preservative treated piles shall meet the
Type A.
requirements of SS 908.
214.06.03 Excavation – Footing excavation and seal
Hardware, fasteners and metalwork for timber piling
excavation, where applicable, shall be completed with any
construction shall be galvanized or stainless steel and shall
necessary allowance made for upheaval before the driving
also meet the requirements of SS 908.08.
of footing piles. Should too great an allowance be made,
214.02 Pile Lengths – Piling shall be supplied to the backfilling with gravel will, in general, be permitted to raise
minimum lengths specified. At the Contractor's expense, the bottom of the excavation to the correct elevation. Any
allowances will be made for such additional lengths of pile material forced up between the piles to above the footing
as may be required to provide fresh heading and to suit the level shall be removed to the correct elevation. No extra
Contractor’s methods of operation. payment will be made for the supply and placing of gravel
or any additional excavation to obtain the correct elevation.
Pile lengths determined by the Ministry, are those expected
to remain in the completed structure plus 600 mm for 214.07 Driving – Unless otherwise specified, all piles shall
cut-off, except for end bearing piles where the allowance for be driven with the small end downward. The fall of a drop
cut-off and bearing depth irregularity is 3.5 m or as hammer shall be regulated to avoid damage to the piles and
otherwise specified on the Drawings or the Special under no circumstances shall the drop exceed 3 m.
Provisions.
Each pile shall be square-headed at the top, properly pointed
214.03 Handling of Piles – Handling of piles shall be in at the tip, and set properly in the leads; if any pile becomes
accordance with SS 906.08 and SS 908. split or broomed on the top it shall be fresh headed.
214.04 Hammer – Piles may be driven with a drop hammer Piles shall be driven to the minimum depth (maximum tip
or a mechanical hammer. Drop hammers shall weigh not elevation) indicated on the Drawings or as otherwise
less than 1,400 kg for piles less than 15 m long and not less specified and unless ordered otherwise by the Ministry
than 1,600 kg for piles 15 m and over in length, and in no Representative, to practical refusal, which shall be to the
case shall the weight of the hammer be less than the depth at which the piles have an allowable load resistance
combined weight of driving head and pile. Mechanical of 20 tonnes and an average penetration per blow
hammers shall develop a total energy not less than determined by the following Engineering News Record
3,900 kg m per blow. (ENR) formulae:
214.05 Leads – Pile drivers with fixed leads or with hanging
or swinging leads that can be held in a fixed position during Equation 214-1: For Drop Hammers
driving shall be used to drive all piles.
Battered piles shall be driven using leads adaptable to their s = wh − 0.03
6p
driving.
When driving treated timber piles, the use of spuds and Equation 214-2: For Mechanical Hammers
chocks in the leads shall be kept to a minimum in order that
the treated surface is not damaged. s = wh − 0.003
6p
214.06 Preparation for Driving
214.06.01 Driving Caps and Bands – The heads of timber Where:
piles, shall be protected by suitable driving caps of approved s = average penetration per blow in metres under
design, preferably having a rope or other suitable cushion last 10 blows
next to the pile head and fitted into a casting which in turn w = weight of moving part of hammer in newtons
supports a timber shock block. Alternatively, the pile head h = effective fall of hammer in metres
may be banded with a pile ring and covered with a steel wire p = allowable load of pile in newtons
mat. When driving treated piles, a driving cap shall be used.
214.06.02 Pointing – Steel points shall be supplied and Where it is required by the Ministry Representative to
installed as shown on the Drawings or Special Provisions. penetrate a thin stratum (which may show practical refusal

BC MoTI SS 2020 214 (1 of 3)

Vol. 1 Page 171 of 470
SECTION 214 TIMBER PILING CONSTRUCTION

in driving) to obtain greater depth in a less resistant 214.10.01 Treated Piles – After cut-off, the pile heads shall
formation, driving shall be continued through the stratum be covered with alternate layers of hot roofing asphalt and
regardless of the definition laid down for practical refusal. loosely woven glass fabric, using four applications of
asphalt and three layers of fabric.
Any pile which, in the opinion of the Ministry
Representative, is damaged by driving so as to be deemed The fabric shall measure at least 150 mm more in dimension
unfit for the use for which it is intended, or is so far out of than the diameter of the pile and shall be neatly folded down
position, or off vertical or designated batter, as to require and secured by large headed galvanized roofing nails or by
excessive force or manipulation to restore it to its proper binding with not less than seven complete turns of
position, shall be withdrawn and replaced by a new pile. If galvanized wire securely held in place by large-headed
this is not possible, a new pile shall be driven adjacent to the galvanized roofing nails or staples. The edges of the fabric
defective pile. The damaged, out-of-position or misaligned projecting below the fastening shall be neatly trimmed.
piles shall be for the Contractor's account.
214.10.02 Untreated Piles – After cut-off, the pile head
Where boulders or other large obstructions make it shall be thoroughly swabbed with three coats of hot creosote
impossible to drive piles in the locations shown on the oil and if they are to be capped, they shall also be coated
Drawings, the Ministry Representative may direct the with hot roofing asphalt.
Contractor to drive an additional pile, or piles, for which the
214.11 Payment – Payment for timber piling construction
Contractor will be paid in accordance with the various Items
will be made under the following Items.
of SS 214.11 – Payment.
214.11.01 Mobilization and Fixed Costs for Pile
214.08 Additional Equipment – Where, in the opinion of
Installation – Payment will be made at the Lump Sum price
the Ministry Representative, the bounce of the hammer is
bid for providing, setting up and removing the plant and
excessive or where the required depth or resistance is not
equipment for driving the piles, and shall be accepted as full
obtained by the use of a hammer complying with the above
compensation for everything furnished and done in
minimum requirements the Contractor shall provide a
connection therewith.
heavier hammer at the Contractor's expense.
214.11.02 Supply – Payment will be made at the Unit Price
214.09 Accuracy of Driving – All piles shall be driven in
bid per metre for the total number of metres of piling as
such a manner that any variation from the vertical, or batter
shown on the Drawings or as specified by the Ministry
as shown on the Drawings, shall not exceed 20 mm/m. Piles
Representative. Such payment shall be accepted as full
in trestle bents shall be driven so that the cap may be placed
compensation for everything furnished and done in
in its proper location without incurring excessive stresses in
connection with the supply and delivery of the piles.
the piles. Cutting, springing, dapping or facing-off for
placing bracings and planking on piles will not be permitted. 214.11.03 Installation – Payment shall be accepted as full
compensation for all costs in connection with supply and
After driving, footing piles shall not be more than 75 mm
installation of pile points and installation of piles.
out of the horizontal position shown on the Drawings.
If the length of piling is more than anticipated, the Ministry
214.10 Pile Heads – The tops of all piling shall be cut off
will pay documented costs of delivery of less than full loads
to a true plane as shown on the Drawings or as established
of additional piling, without markup.
by the Ministry Representative. Piles shall show a solid
head at the plane of cutoff. If pile points are not specified on the Drawings or Special
Provisions, but are ordered by the Ministry Representative,
Pile heads not encased in concrete shall be protected as
payment will be as Extra Work.
follows.

BC MoTI SS 2020 214 (2 of 3)

Vol. 1 Page 172 of 470
SECTION 214 TIMBER PILING CONSTRUCTION

BC MoTI SS 2020 214 (3 of 3)

Vol. 1 Page 173 of 470
 SECTION 215

BRIDGES

215.01 General - Bridges shall be designed in accordance Construction shall be in accordance with the current
with the Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code Ministry standards, practices and the Contract documents
(CHBDC), CSA S6 and the Ministry’s Bridge Standards prepared for the particular structure.
and Procedures Manual, including the Ministry’s
Supplement to CHBDC S6.

BC MoTI SS 2020 215 (1 of 1)

Vol. 1 Page 174 of 470
 SECTION 216

COATING OF STEELWORK

216.01 Scope – This Section covers the operations required repairs, sufficient coats are added to bring the new
for shop, field and/or maintenance coating of structural and coating up to the level of the existing coating
miscellaneous steel surfaces. The coating process includes surrounding the repairs. It may also be used as an
pre-cleaning, surface preparation, coating, and curing of interim maintenance strategy to extend the lifetime of a
coatings. coating system overall.
216.02 Definitions (b) Zone Coating – Zone coating is the coating process
where specific whole parts of a structure are coated and
216.02.01 Good Painting Practice – The application of
others are deliberately left. This deals with larger
generally accepted methods and equipment to clean, contain
portions of a structure than touchup coating. For
and coat industrial structures in a safe, practical,
example, an above deck arch portion of a bridge would
environmentally sensitive manner resulting in a long-lasting
be zone coated, but the edges of the flanges would be
quality protective coating system. These principals are laid
touched up. Zone coating may use touchup, overcoat,
out in this Section. Many of the points are drawn from the
or recoat strategies to meet its objectives. Zone coating
SSPC (Society for Protective Coatings) publication Steel
also includes coating new steel added to old structures
Structures Painting Manual Volume 1, Good Painting
for example steel added for seismic upgrades.
Practice. References are to the current edition unless
otherwise stated. These practices are based on experience (c) Overcoating – Overcoating is the coating of portions
in the United States and where they conflict with Canadian of a structure where the structure is touched up, then
or British Columbia laws, regulations or guidelines, the coated with a topcoat overall. It may include top
local regulations shall prevail. coating part or all of the structure.
216.02.02 Shop, Field and Maintenance Coating – This (d) Recoating – Recoating is the coating process where
consists of the series of operations that include the surface larger portions of old coating on a structure are
preparation, pre-treatment (if required) and application of removed to bare metal and a completely new coating
coatings to structural steel surfaces either in the shop or in system is applied over the entire area.
field. It also includes the supplying of all labour, equipment
216.02.07 Anchor Profile – The anchor profile is a measure
and materials. In addition, it encompasses the protection of
of the roughness of the prepared surface. The profile is
newly coated surfaces during curing, transport and erection
normally measured from surface peak to surface valley and
as well as the protection of traffic, property and the
expressed as a range (for example 50 to 75 µm or 2 to
environment. Additionally, it also includes the disposal of
3 mils). Besides the depth, the surface profile is dependent
waste material in accordance with all applicable
on the grit type used to create it. Mineral abrasives such as
environmental, fisheries and local regulations and bylaws.
sand, slag, garnet, etc. produce a ‘sharp’ profile. Steel shot
216.02.03 Painting / Coating – The terms painting and produces a rounded profile unless mixed with 15% steel
coating are considered synonymous for the purposes of this grit. Normally the anchor profile is specified for both depth
document. Techniques such as metallizing or galvanizing, and sharpness.
while not typically thought of as painting, are considered
216.02.08 Containment / Hoarding – The process of
here to be painting or coating since they form part or all of
encapsulating the work site so that hazardous or nuisance
a protective system.
materials cannot escape to the surrounding environment.
216.02.04 Shop Coating – Shop coating is the coating of SSPC Guide 6 Guide for Containing Debris Generated
steel or other components in a shop or plant before shipment During Paint Removal Operations specifies types and levels
to the site of erection. This may include part of a coating of containment necessary for various cleaning operations.
system or the whole system including the topcoat.
216.02.09 Ambient Conditions – Ambient conditions refer
216.02.05 Field Coating – Field coating is the coating of to such things as wind, relative humidity, dew point, air
steel or components at the place of erection. temperature, substrate temperature etc. that affect the
cleaning, application, and curing of coatings. They are very
216.02.06 Maintenance Coating – Maintenance coating is
important in obtaining a properly adhered, long life coating.
the coating of structures in service that have previously been
All coating works shall be within the specified parameters
partially or completely coated. The maintenance coating
as given in SS 216.08.04, SS 216.08.05 and SS 216.08.09.
may be one of four general types:
Where ambient environmental conditions do not fall within
(a) Touchup – Touchup is the cleaning and coating of these conditions, coating work may continue if the
small selected areas on a structure. Typically, this is conditions are being met within the containment. This may
used to repair damaged or failed areas of coating. For mean extra hoarding, dehumidification, ventilation and/or

BC MoTI SS 2020 216 (1 of 14)

Vol. 1 Page 175 of 470
SECTION 216 COATING OF STEELWORK

temperature control for the duration of cleaning, application • SSPC-VIS 5/NACE VIS 9 Guide and
and curing of the coating system. Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces
Prepared by Wet Abrasive Blast Cleaning
It is worthy of note that some coatings are designed to be
applied in conditions outside those mentioned above. These (iii) Surface Preparation Standards:
coatings and their conditions of use will be subject to the
approval of the Ministry Representative prior to use. • SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning
216.03 Reference Standards – It is recognized that • SSPC-SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning
standards are changed or amended from time to time. All
specifications mentioned shall be the current editions at the • SSPC-SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning
date and time of tendering unless a specific edition of a
reference or standard is stated here or in the Contract • SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 White Metal Blast
Drawings and Special Provisions. Cleaning

216.03.01 Recognized Products List (RPL) – The • SSPC-SP 5 (WAB)/NACE WAB-1, White
Ministry publishes a Recognized Products List indicating Metal Wet Blast Cleaning
products that are considered generally acceptable for
particular purposes. This is available on the Ministry • SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 Commercial Blast
website at: Cleaning

https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/driving-and- • SSPC-SP 6 (WAB)/NACE WAB-3

transportation/transportation-infrastructure/engineering- Commercial Wet Blast Cleaning
standards-and-guidelines/recognized-products-
list/recognized_products_list.pdf?forcedownload=true • SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4 Brush-off Blast
Cleaning
Only those coating systems and products listed under the
heading of “Coating Systems” in the RPL or as otherwise • SSPC-SP 7 (WAB)/NACE WAB-4 Brush-Off
specified in the Special Provisions or on the Drawings shall Wet Blast Cleaning
be used on Ministry Projects. The Ministry may, at its sole
discretion, designate alternative materials to fit a unique • SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2 Near-White Blast
situation. Cleaning

216.03.02 SSPC – Society for Protective Coatings – The • SSPC-SP 10 (WAB)/NACE WAB-2 Near
SSPC publishes two volumes: SSPC Painting Manual White Wet Blast Cleaning
Volume 1, Good Painting Practice and SSPC Painting
Manual Volume 2, Systems and Specifications, which lay
• SSPC-SP 11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare
Metal
out the basics for painting steel structures.
The following SSPC standards and guidelines shall apply • SSPC-SP 13/NACE No. 6 Surface Preparation
unless noted otherwise. of Concrete
(a) Surface Preparation Standards • SSPC-SP 14/ NACE No. 8 Industrial Blast
Cleaning
(i) General – SSPC-SP COM Surface Preparation
Commentary for Steel and Concrete Substrates. • SSPC-SP 14 (WAB)/NACE WAB-8
(ii) Visual Standards: Industrial Wet Blast Cleaning

• SSPC-VIS 1, Guide and Reference • SSPC-SP 15 Commercial Grade Power Tool

Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Cleaning
Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning
• SSPC–SP 16 Brush-off Blast Cleaning of
• SSPC-VIS 2 Standard Method of Evaluating Non-Ferrous Metals
Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel Surfaces
• SSPC-SP WJ-1/NACE WJ-1 Waterjet
• SSPC-VIS 3,Guide and Reference Cleaning of metals Clean to Bare Substrate
Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by
Hand and Power Tool Cleaning • SSPC-SP WJ-2/NACE WJ-2 Waterjet
Cleaning of metals Very Thorough Cleaning
• SSPC-VIS 4/NACE No. 7 Guide and
Reference Photographs for Steel Prepared by • SSPC-SP WJ-3/NACE WJ-3 Waterjet
Water Jetting Cleaning of metals Thorough Cleaning

BC MoTI SS 2020 216 (2 of 14)

Vol. 1 Page 176 of 470
SECTION 216 COATING OF STEELWORK

• SSPC-SP WJ-4/NACE WJ-4 Waterjet more of the following levels to perform Ministry work
Cleaning of metals Light Cleaning as called for in the particular tender.

(b) Abrasive Specifications: • SSPC-QP COM Commentary on Qualification

Procedures
• SSPC-AB 1 Mineral and Slag Abrasives
• SSPC-QP 1 Certification (Field Application to
• SSPC-AB 2 Cleanliness of Recycled Ferrous Complex Industrial and Marine Structures)
Metallic Abrasives
• SSPC-QP 2 Certification (Field Removal of
• SSPC-AB 3 Ferrous Metallic Abrasive Hazardous Coatings)
• SSPC-AB 4 Recyclable Encapsulated Abrasive • SSPC-QP 3 Certification (Shop Painting
Media (in a compressible cellular matrix) Certification Program)
(c) Application Standards, Guides and Specifications: • SSPC-QP 6 Thermal Spray Contractor
• SSPC-PA COM Commentary on Paint Qualification
Application • SSPC QP 7 Certification (Painting Contractor
• SSPC-PA 1 Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting Introductory Program)
of Steel • NACE Coating Inspection Program Level 2
• SSPC-PA 2 Procedure for Determining • SSPC Bridge Coatings Inspection Program (BCI)
Compliance to Required DFT, Restriction Level 2 Level 2
• SSPC-PA 17, Procedure for Determining 216.03.03 Hot Dip Galvanizing – ASTM A123 Standard
Conformance to Steel Profile/Surface Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
(d) Guides: Iron and Steel Products.

• SSPC – Guide 6 Guide for Containing Surface 216.03.04 Metallizing – SSPC-CS23.00 / AWS C2.23M /
Preparation Debris NACE No. 12, Specification for the Application of Thermal
Spray Coatings (Metallizing) of Aluminum, Zinc, and Their
• SSPC – PA Guide 11 Protecting Edges, Crevices, Alloys and Composites for the Corrosion Protection of
and Irregular Steel Surfaced by Stripe Coating Steel.
• SSPC – Guide 12 Guide for Illumination of 216.03.05 Colour Standards – Refer to AMS-STD-595A:
Industrial Painting Colors Used In Government Procurement. Topcoat colours
shall be in accordance with the Special Provisions and/or
• SSPC – Guide 14 Guide for the Repair of the Drawings or as determined by the Ministry
Imperfections in Galvanized, Organic or Inorganic Representative. For weathering steel, unless noted
Zinc-Coated Steel Using Organic Zinc-Rich otherwise, the topcoat colour shall match the expected
Coatings colour of the oxidized surfaces (Federal Color 30045 unless
• SSPC – Guide 15 Field Methods for Extraction and noted otherwise). The proposed colour shall be subject to
Analysis of Soluble Salts on Steel and Other the acceptance of the Ministry Representative.
Nonporous Substrates 216.04 Environmental Considerations – All coating
(e) Technical Updates: works including preparation shall comply with SS 165,
Protection of the Environment.
• SSPC-TU 3 Overcoating
216.05 Containment of Coating Operations
• SSPC-TU 6 Chemical Stripping of Organic
Coatings from Steel Surfaces 216.05.01 General – Full containment shall be provided to
prevent contamination of the environment. This enables
• SSPC-TU 7 Conducting Ambient Air, Soil, and work to be accomplished by physically limiting the spread
Water Sampling During Surface Preparation and of debris and facilitates cleanup. Current containment
Paint Disturbance Activities technology is able to contain virtually all debris generated
(f) Qualification Procedures – These requirements will by washing, water jetting, hand, power tool, or abrasive
be laid out specifically in the Contract for each project blasting, and coating operations.
and will depend primarily on the work to be done. 216.05.02 SSPC Guide 6 – Containment shall be provided
Contractors may require current certification in one or in accordance with SSPC Guide 6, Guide for Containing
Debris Generated During Paint Removal Operations. In
general, the Ministry wishes to minimize the environmental

BC MoTI SS 2020 216 (3 of 14)

Vol. 1 Page 177 of 470
SECTION 216 COATING OF STEELWORK

impact of all Ministry coating work. To this end, all coating the specified surface preparation differs from the coating
works shall be fully enclosed to prevent contamination of manufacturer’s recommended surface preparation, the more
the environment. The coating specification will contain stringent surface preparation, shall apply, unless approved
specific language to exactly determine the desired otherwise by the Ministry Representative.
containment end performance requirements. Containment
Where surface preparation is not defined herein in SS216,
shall be in accordance with the pertinent requirements of
the Drawings and the Special Provisions, the
the Workers Compensation Act, the Occupational Health
manufacturer’s specifications shall be used.
and Safety Regulation, and Environment and Fisheries
Authorities. 216.07.02 Washing
216.05.03 Containment of Debris and Disposal of Debris (a) General – Washing is a procedure for removing
– All debris from cleaning and coating operations must be surface contaminants including oil, grease, drawing and
contained in such a way as not to contaminate the cutting compounds, soil, salts, etc. from either steel or
environment. All debris shall be contained, tested and coated surfaces. Removal of the contaminants shall be
disposed of in accordance with current environmental, accomplished using any one or a combination of the
fisheries and local regulations. The Contractor shall provide following: potable water, alkaline cleaners, solvents,
written proof of disposal of all materials including way-bills emulsion cleaners, steam cleaning (with detergents),
and transport logs. high pressure water, scrubbing (with detergent) or other
approved method.
216.06 Construction Site Safety
Alkaline cleaners, detergents, solvents, etc. shall not be
216.06.01 General – General site safety shall comply with
used over streams, lakes, rivers, etc. or agricultural land
SS 135 Construction Site Safety, the Workers
without first ensuring compliance with all applicable
Compensation Act and the Occupational Health and Safety
environmental legislation (federal, provincial and
Regulation
local).
216.06.02 Specific Safety Issues Relating to Bridges and
The washing procedure shall be conducted so that any
Coating Work
part of the structure which has already been cleaned, or
(a) Working at Height – All work occurring at height newly coated, shall not be contaminated with the
shall conform to all Workers Compensation Act and cleaning chemicals or solvents.
Occupational Health and Safety Regulation
Immediately after treatment with cleaning chemicals,
requirements.
the surfaces shall be thoroughly washed with clean
(b) Lead Coatings – Many of the Ministry structures have water to remove detrimental residues.
coatings containing lead. While the Ministry will
(b) Residual Non-Visible Contaminants (NVC) –
attempt to indicate the presence of lead coatings, it is
Immediately prior to abrasive blast cleaning and
the responsibility of the Contractor to ascertain the
immediately prior to the application of any coating,
presence and extent of lead coatings if any; and to
surfaces shall be checked for residual non-visible
conform to all regulations for work undertaken. This
contaminants in accordance with SSPC Guide 15
includes but is not necessarily limited to the Workers
swabbing extraction method 5.2.5 Latex Sleeve
Compensation Act, the Occupational Health and Safety
Methodology. Surfaces that exceed any of the
Regulation and the Ministry of Environment regulation
following “designated NVC levels” shall be cleaned in
requirements for working with, storing, transporting,
accordance with SSPC-SP WJ-4/NACE WJ-4 to
disposing of and documenting any work process
achieve these levels:
involving lead coatings.
(c) Enclosed Spaces – Many of the Ministry structures • 7 µg/cm2 chloride ion,
contain enclosed spaces or spaces that the Workers • 10 µg/cm2 soluble ferrous ion, and
Compensation Act and the Occupational Health and
Safety Regulation define as enclosed spaces. In some • 17 µg/cm2 sulfate
instances, the hoarding or containment is considered an 216.07.03 Water Cleaning/Jetting – Waterjet cleaning is
enclosed space. It is the responsibility of the Contractor the use of clean, pressurized water for removing coatings
to ascertain whether a space is defined as an enclosed and other materials, including hazardous materials, from a
space and to adjust their work procedures to meet all substrate to achieve a defined degree of surface cleanliness.
regulation requirements. Waterjet cleaning includes various methods such as low-
216.07 Surface Preparation pressure water cleaning (LP WC), high-pressure water
cleaning (HP WC), high-pressure water jetting (HP WJ),
216.07.01 General – Surface preparation of areas to be and ultra high-pressure water jetting (UHP WJ). Four levels
coated shall be in accordance with the specifications herein of surface cleanliness are each addressed in separate
in SS216, the Drawings and the Special Provisions. Where standards (SSPC-SP WJ-1, to SSPC-SP WJ-4)

BC MoTI SS 2020 216 (4 of 14)

Vol. 1 Page 178 of 470
SECTION 216 COATING OF STEELWORK

Water jetting is inherently dangerous and safety precautions The standard of cleaning obtained by this method shall be
as listed in SSPC Steel Structures Painting Manual, SSPC SP 5, SP 6, SP 7, SP 10, or SP 14 as specified in the
Volume 1, Good Painting Practice, shall be followed. Drawings and Special Provisions. Where the standard of
Where the current Workers Compensation Act and the cleaning is not defined in the Drawings and Special
Occupational Health and Safety Regulation conflict with Provisions, the manufacturer’s specifications shall be used.
any of the SSPC-SP WJ specifications, the Workers
Prior to abrasive blast cleaning, the surface shall be cleaned
Compensation Act and the Occupational Health and Safety
of dirt, oil, grease and residual ions in accordance with
Regulation shall prevail. Water used in water jetting units
SS 216.07.02. If necessary, heavier layers of rust shall be
shall be clean and free of contaminants that may leave
removed by chipping before the blast cleaning operation
deposits on the surface being cleaned or affect the adhesion
commences.
of subsequent coatings applied. Water supply to the water
jetting units must meet current Federal and Provincial A cleaned and blasted surface shall be coated within a
regulations for water taken from streams if on-site water maximum of 8 hours of cleaning or less depending on
from streams is used. humidity, temperature or other factors. The surface
immediately prior to coating shall meet the specification in
All waste water and coating debris shall be contained and
its entirety. The Ministry shall be the sole arbitrator on
disposed of in accordance with Environmental and Fisheries
determining the minimum time between surface preparation
Agencies or other applicable regulations.
and coating. If the surface preparation criteria are not met
Wastewater must meet regulations for disposal on-site if it immediately prior to coating, the surface shall be rejected
is to be disposed of on-site. These regulations are typically and re-prepared in accordance with the specification.
those of Fisheries and Oceans Canada and the Ministry of
Finally, all traces of dust and sand, etc. shall be removed
Environment, but may not be limited to those governmental
prior to coating.
agencies. As well, SS 165 Protection of the Environment
lays out Contractor responsibilities. 216.07.06 Abrasive Materials – Abrasive materials, unless
specified, must be accepted by the Ministry Representative.
216.07.04 Manual and Power Tool Cleaning – Manual
Silica Sand shall only be used in accordance with the
cleaning is a procedure for removing loose mill scale, loose
Workers Compensation Act and the Occupational Health
rust, loose coating and other detrimental foreign matter by
and Safety Regulation.
chipping, scraping, grinding, and wire brushing, etc. The
tools used for this method of cleaning may be either hand or 216.07.07 Recycled Steel Abrasive – Recycled steel
power tools; they shall be of high quality and maintained in abrasives are permitted, however the working material must
good repair. meet SSPC-AB 2 requirements and must contain a
minimum 15% steel grit to produce an angular/sharp profile.
The standard of cleaning obtained by this method shall be
SSPC-SP 2, SP 3, SP 11, or SP 15 as specified in the 216.07.08 Containment of Debris and Disposal of Debris
Contract. Where surface preparation is not defined in the – All debris from cleaning, blasting and coating operations
Contract, the manufacturer’s product data sheet must be contained in such a way as to not contaminate the
specifications shall be used. environment. All debris shall be contained, tested and
disposed of in accordance with current environmental,
In specific circumstances the methods available may be
fisheries and local regulations. The Contractor shall provide
limited by the Drawings and Special Provisions.
written proof of compliant disposal of all materials
In all four preparation methods listed above, the surface including way-bills and transport logs.
shall be cleaned of dirt, grease, and soluble salts prior to
216.08 Application of Coating Materials
treatment. Heavier layers of rust shall be removed by
chipping, before any of the other cleaning tools are used. 216.08.01 Pretreatment – Newly cleaned surfaces may
require pretreatment other than washing or abrasive blasting
Finally, all traces of dust shall be removed prior to coating.
prior to the application of the prime coat of paint. The
216.07.05 Abrasive Blast Cleaning – Abrasive blast application of the pretreatment shall be strictly in
cleaning is a procedure for removing mill scale, rust, rust accordance with the manufacturer's directions. When
scale, coating or other foreign matter by use of abrasives pretreatments are used, particular care shall be taken to
propelled through nozzles or by centrifugal wheels. It is also prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces.
used to roughen the surface of the substrate to enhance
216.08.02 General – In general, the Contractor shall follow
adhesion.
SSPC-PA 1 Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel
If compressed air blasting is employed, proper line filters when applying coatings. Where SS 216 and SSPC-PA 1
and dryers, which remove all oil and water from the air, disagree, SS 216 shall be taken as applicable.
shall be used. Compressed air shall be periodically tested
216.08.03 Materials Storage and Handling – Materials
for presence of these contaminants.
handling and use shall be as per SSPC-PA 1. Coatings shall

BC MoTI SS 2020 216 (5 of 14)

Vol. 1 Page 179 of 470
SECTION 216 COATING OF STEELWORK

be stored in a secure building on-site, but not on the thoroughly mixed until the paint is again of uniform
structure itself. Coatings taken onto the structure in cans, consistency.
pails or totes shall be contained so that should they spill, no
216.08.07 Induction Time – Manufacturers’ induction
coating will escape to contaminate the adjacent area or
times shall be strictly observed before the coating is applied.
environment.
Since induction times are a function of temperature,
216.08.04 Temperature – Coatings shall only be applied temperatures outside the normal range may necessitate
when the ambient, surface and coating temperature are changing the induction period. Revised induction times
within the range indicated by the manufacturer’s written may be accepted by the Ministry Representative, subject to
instructions. Coating shall not be applied when the the coating manufacturer providing the revised induction
substrate temperature is less than 3°C above the Dew point. times in writing.
Winter or quick dry catalysts or coating formulations shall
216.08.08 Pot Life – Manufacturer’s estimates of pot life
not be used. Some coatings are designed for use in marginal
shall be adhered to and no coating shall be used after the
conditions. Their use is at the sole discretion of the Ministry
recommended pot life has expired. Since pot life is a
Representative. In unique situations where coatings must
function of temperature, in hot or cold conditions the pot life
be used outside these limits, they shall only be used at the
shall be revised to reflect the ambient temperature. Written
sole discretion of the Ministry Representative. Lack of
revised pot life recommendations from the coating
permission may necessitate removal, re-cleaning and
manufacturer must be reviewed and accepted by the
reapplication at the Contractor’s expense.
Ministry Representative prior to their use.
216.08.05 Humidity – Coatings shall not be applied in wet
216.08.09 Wind – Paint shall not be sprayed when the wind
weather, fog, mist, rain, snow and/or relative humidity in
speed or wind gusts are over 15 km per hour. Wind speed
excess of 85%. Coatings shall not be applied to wet, damp
shall be measured where the work is taking place, for
or icy surfaces and care shall be taken to ensure that any
example within the containment.
overnight dew has completely evaporated before coating
commences in the morning. 216.08.10 Curing Conditions – Coating lifetime may be
affected by curing conditions. Coatings shall be protected
216.08.06 Mixing and Thinning – All ingredients in any
from rain during their curing. Coatings shall be cured under
container of paint shall be thoroughly mixed before use and
the coating manufacturer’s stated conditions. This may
shall be agitated often enough during application to keep the
require heating, cooling, humidity or ventilation
paint in a uniform condition. In all cases of heavily
adjustments to bring the ambient conditions into line with
pigmented paints (e.g. "Zinc Rich" paints) the material shall
the coating manufacturer’s recommended conditions for
be continuously agitated during application.
curing. In enclosed spaces, ventilation must be provided to
Mixing shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s remove evaporation from the coating.
instructions and in accordance with good painting practice
Failure to achieve proper curing or curing conditions may
as outlined in SSPC Steel Structures Painting Manual,
necessitate removal, re-cleaning, reapplication or repair of
Volume 1, Good Painting Practice and SSPC-PA 1. No
the coating at the Contractor’s expense.
coating system shall be applied beyond one year from the
manufacturing date. 216.09 Inspection
Thinner shall only be added with the written consent of the 216.09.01 General – The Contractor shall provide the
manufacturer and only after it is shown that satisfactory quality control functions on the Contract work. Quality
application cannot be obtained with proper adjustment of assurance will be done by the Ministry. The Contractor
the spray equipment and air pressures. In no case shall more shall produce a quality plan for all work to be done and
than 12.5% of thinner by volume be added to a paint. submit this plan for the Ministry’s review and acceptance.
The Ministry will audit the quality process via the Ministry
Only thinner specified and supplied by the manufacturer for
Representative.
that product shall be added to a product. Thinners used for
cleanup shall not be recycled as thinning agents. Paint shall 216.09.02 Quality Control Inspection – Quality Control
be mixed by mechanical methods. Paint shall be mixed in a inspectors shall be a third-party qualified NACE CIP
manner that will ensure breaking up of all lumps, complete Level 2, or SSPC BCI Level 2 (i.e. Certified Coating
dispersion of settled pigment and a uniform composition. Inspectors independent from the applicator). Inspection
After mixing, all paint shall be strained to remove skins and records produced shall be forwarded to the Ministry
other undesirable matter; the strainer shall not be so fine as Representative daily. The records shall be electronic files,
to remove any pigment. preferably Microsoft Excel files, and shall be forwarded to
the Ministry Representative in that format to speed
Thinner, when approved by the Ministry Representative,
dissemination and aid any data manipulation required for
shall be added after initial mixing is completed. The
the quality audit. Where this is not possible due to lack of
quantity of thinner added shall be measured in and
communication technology, the records may be hard copy
or hand delivered electronic files. The Quality Control

BC MoTI SS 2020 216 (6 of 14)

Vol. 1 Page 180 of 470
SECTION 216 COATING OF STEELWORK

inspector(s) shall follow the quality plan as accepted by the 216.09.03 Thickness Measurement – Large areas
Ministry. amenable to the application of SSPC-PA 2 shall be
measured by this method. The use of PA 2 is not considered
All washing and cleaning work shall be inspected by the
to limit the number of measurements should additional
Contractor before any coating is applied. Each coat of paint
readings be needed for any reason.
shall be inspected by the Contractor and passed by the
Quality Control Inspector before the succeeding coat is The Contractor shall set aside a suitable area of steel on the
applied. structure to be coated and dry abrasive blast clean the area
with the Contractor's equipment and blast abrasive to the
Coated surfaces rejected shall be made to comply with all
standard required by the coating specification. This area
requirements of this specification at the sole expense of the
shall be protected from moisture and shall be used as a
Contractor.
standard for acceptable surface cleanliness and anchor
(a) Hold Points – Hold points (as defined in SS 145.12) profile. A portion of the area shall also be used as an area
for inspection shall include, but may not be limited to: to verify the calibration of dry film thickness (DFT) gauges.
It is recognized that the magnetic plane on the blast cleaned
• Post installation of scaffolding and other accesses surface is above the bottom of the profile. The Contractor
• Post installation of containment shall fill that difference with coating. If requested by the
Ministry Representative, the Contractor shall produce and
• On site coating systems review (manufacturing calibrate a secondary, portable calibration standard for dry
dates/batch numbers, etc.) film thickness gauges. The dry film thickness of small
• Surface after washing and/or more complex areas shall be measured as agreed
upon by the Contractor’s Inspector and the Ministry
• Surface after cleaning prior to coating application Representative. Gauges are to be calibrated according to
• Coating product mixing/thinning SSPC-PA 2 at the beginning and end of each work shift.
• Surface after Prime coat 216.09.04 Tinting Multilayer Systems – Each separate
coat, penetrant, stripe, midcoat(s) and topcoat shall be
• Surface after Penetrating Sealer if any coloured or tinted to differentiate it visually from the coats
• Surface after Stripe Coat above and below. This is an aid to application and
inspection and also serves as an indicator of wear for the life
• Surface after each midcoat of the coating.
• Surface after caulking if any 216.09.05 Coating Systems – SS 308 lists coating systems
• Surface after topcoat used or identified by the Ministry and suggests situations
where the systems are best applied. Coating systems
• Post removal of containment meeting SS 308 requirements are listed in the Recognized
• Post removal of scaffolding and other accesses and Products List. Only specified coating systems from the
repair of any coating damage Recognized Products List shall be used.

(b) Accessibility for Inspection – The Contractor shall Occasionally, special requirements mandate the use of
provide the Ministry Representative safe access to the coating materials not already listed in SS 308. These
specific areas of the jobsite under inspection. In order requirements will normally be specified in the Contract
to limit the work disruption, the Contractor shall notify Special Provisions section or will be shown on the Contract
the Ministry Representative of upcoming hold points at Drawings.
least 24 hours prior to the hold point. The Ministry may Unless otherwise specified, surface preparation, application
perform quality assurance/audit inspections in and curing for individual coatings shall be in accordance
conjunction with or subsequent to the Contractor’s with the manufacturer’s Product Data Sheet. Coating
quality control inspections. The Ministry thickness shall be within the range recommended by the
Representative will attempt to limit delays to the manufacturer’s Product Data Sheet as judged by SSPC
Contractor as much as possible, but retains the right to PA-2 Level 3 inspection unless otherwise specified.
obtain as much information from the quality
assurance/audit inspections as needed to justify 216.09.06 Coatings from Different Manufacturers – The
acceptance or rejection of the Work. Contractor shall not mix or interchange coatings or solvents
from different manufacturers.
The Contractor shall maintain a minimum 200 foot-
candles illumination at all areas of the work to be 216.09.07 Coating Flaws – A coat of paint will only be
inspected. This may include adding lighting to accepted if none of the following faults are apparent:
augment natural light. Lighting if added shall be
according to SSPC Guide 12, Guide for Illumination of
Industrial Painting Projects.

BC MoTI SS 2020 216 (7 of 14)

Vol. 1 Page 181 of 470
SECTION 216 COATING OF STEELWORK

• Coatings showing sags, runs, holidays, pinholes, All runs and sags shall be brushed out immediately, or the
orange peel, dry spray, shadowing or other paint shall be removed and the surface repainted.
application defects.
Areas inaccessible by spray such as cracks and crevices and
• Poor coverage at rivet heads, bolts, threads, plate the blind sides of rivets and bolts shall be painted by brush.
edges, crevices, pockets, corners or re-entrant Stripe coat material may be applied by spray to speed up the
angles. transfer of material to the surface, but all stripe coating must
be brushed in to ensure complete wetting and coverage.
• Surfaces damaged mechanically by moving
scaffolding, equipment, etc. or damage by rain, The air caps, nozzles and needles shall be those
flying dust, etc. or damage from any other cause. recommended by the manufacturers of both the material
being sprayed and the equipment being used.
Sags and runs may be repaired or treated as per SSPC-PA 1.
Proper air line filters and dryers shall be provided to remove
Coatings shall be applied as per SSPC-PA 1, except where oil and condensed water from the air. The air from the spray
directed otherwise by this specification. gun impinging against the surface and into a clean rag or
216.09.08 Rejection – Areas not meeting this specification blotter paper shall show no condensed water or oils.
shall be repaired at the sole expense of the Contractor. At The pressure on the material in the pot and of the atomizing
the sole discretion of the Ministry Representative, small air shall be adjusted for optimum spraying effectiveness.
areas may be spot repaired. Larger areas shall be re-cleaned Both material and atomization pressures shall be controlled
to specification and the coating built up again to by suitable pressure regulators with gauges. The atomizing
specification. air pressure shall be high enough to properly atomize the
216.10 Application Methods (Excluding metallizing and paint, but not so high as to cause excessive fogging of paint,
Hot Dip Galvanizing) excessive evaporation of solvent or loss by overspray.

216.10.01 General – Coatings are designed to be applied by The air compressor used shall be of sufficient size to
specific application techniques. These techniques are maintain the regulated air pressures constant at all times,
specified by the manufacturer to ensure that the risk of irrespective of the amount of equipment that is being
failure is minimized. Manufacturer’s product application operated from the compressor.
sheets shall be followed when applying coatings. 216.10.04 Airless Spray Application – The equipment
Where an application method is not possible due to shall be capable of properly atomizing the paint to be
circumstances at a particular structure, the Contractor shall applied. The equipment shall be kept clean and maintained
obtain written instructions from the manufacturer for a new in good working condition. Equipment that has dirty or
application method. Contractor use of the new application malfunctioning parts shall not be used until the parts are
method is subject to approval by the Ministry cleaned, repaired or replaced as necessary.
Representative. Paint shall be applied in a uniform layer, with overlapping
216.10.02 Brush or Roller Application – Brushes or at the edge of the spray pattern. The spray pattern shall be
rollers shall be of high quality and of a style and material adjusted so that the paint is deposited uniformly. During
that will enable proper coating application. The paint shall application, the gun shall be held perpendicular to the
be brushed or rolled so that there are no runs or sags, surface and at a distance that will ensure that a wet layer of
minimum brush marks and a uniform thickness. Achieving paint is deposited on the surface. The trigger of the gun
the specified thickness for a coating may require more than shall be released at the end of each stroke.
one coat with brush or roller. The Contractor is responsible All runs and sags shall be brushed out immediately, or the
for achieving the specified thickness. paint shall be removed and the surface repainted.
216.10.03 Air Spray Application – The equipment shall be Areas inaccessible by spray such as cracks and crevices and
capable of properly atomizing the paint to be applied. The the blind sides of rivets and bolts shall be painted by brush.
equipment shall be kept clean and maintained in excellent Stripe coat material may be applied by spray, to speed up
condition. Equipment that has dirty or malfunctioning parts the transfer of material to the surface, but all stripe coating
shall not be used until the parts are cleaned, repaired or must be brushed in to ensure complete coverage.
replaced as necessary.
Fluid tips shall be of proper orifice size and fan angle, and
Paint shall be applied in a uniform layer, with overlapping fluid control gun of proper construction as recommended by
at the edge of the spray pattern. The spray pattern shall be the manufacturers of both the material being sprayed and
adjusted so that the paint is deposited uniformly. During the equipment being used.
application, the gun shall be held perpendicular to the
surface and at a distance that will ensure that a wet layer of The air pressure to the paint pump shall be adjusted so that
paint is deposited on the surface. The trigger of the gun the paint pressure to the gun is proper for optimum spraying
shall be released at the end of each stroke.

BC MoTI SS 2020 216 (8 of 14)

Vol. 1 Page 182 of 470
SECTION 216 COATING OF STEELWORK

effectiveness. The pump pressure shall be controlled by a Metallizing includes the thermal spraying of zinc,
suitable regulator with working gauges. aluminum or their alloys onto a properly prepared metal
substrate.
Pressures higher than that necessary to properly atomize the
paint shall not be used. The method of heating the spray metal is either by flame or
by plasma arc. Spray metal may be in wire or powder form
The air compressor used shall be of sufficient size to
to fit the apparatus used to spray the metal. The application
maintain the regulated air pressure to the pump constant at
method shall ensure that a uniform, clean, well adhered,
all times irrespective of the amount of equipment being
film of metal is applied to the steel surface.
operated from the compressor.
Surface preparation shall be SSPC SP5/NACE No. 1.
Proper air line filters and dryers shall be provided to remove
Profile shall be sharp, 50 to 75 µm. Cut metal edges may
oil and condensed water from the air. The air from the spray
be harder and consequently have less profile. If that is the
gun impinging against the surface and into a clean rag or
case, they shall be ground back to softer metal and reblasted
blotter paper shall show no condensed water or oils.
to achieve the specified profile.
The trigger of the gun shall be pulled fully open and held
Metallizing shall be applied by qualified personnel with
fully open during all spraying to ensure proper application
documented field experience metallizing steel structures
of paint. The trigger shall be released at the end of each
such as bridges.
stroke.
Metallizing shall be applied in a uniform layer at a thickness
216.10.05 Mitt and Dauber Application – Mitt and dauber
of 150 to 200 μm thickness. For special applications, the
application shall be limited to situations where other coating
thickness may be specified outside this range.
application methods are poorly suited. Their use shall be at
the sole discretion of the Ministry Representative. When the metallizing is to be overcoated to form a duplex
system, the newly metallized surface shall be protected from
Coating thickness shall be uniform over the entire surface
contamination until coated. If the metallized surface
of the object coated. Coating shall be free of pinholes or
becomes contaminated, the steel substrate shall be re-
other holidays, sags, etc.
cleaned to SSPC SP5/NACE No. 1 as above and re-
216.10.06 Powder Coatings – Powder coatings are finely metallized.
ground coatings that are electrostatically sprayed onto the
Metallizing is porous, and application of a coating over the
substrate, then melted into a consolidated layer by heat.
surface may require a mist coat or other special procedures
Coatings may be thermoplastic or thermosetting. Cleaning
to avoid bubbling and subsequent problems caused by the
is typically in a series of chemical baths.
interaction of the porous coat with the coating being
Substrates contaminated with soluble salts shall be washed applied. This cost, if any, shall be borne by the Contractor.
to remove those salts before being cleaned to meet
Metallizing may be applied over a much wider range of
specification. Acceptable levels of soluble salts shall be at
ambient conditions than normal paint. When application
the “designated NVC levels” as stated in SS 216.07.02(b).
conditions deviate outside normal coating conditions, the
The substrate to be coated shall be cleaned to the coating Contractor shall consult the Ministry Representative for
manufacturer’s specifications. The water test shall show a acceptance before proceeding.
clean surface.
216.11.02 Hot Dip Galvanizing – Hot dip galvanizing shall
If required for adhesion, a conversion coating shall be be applied in accordance with ASTM A123 or ASTM A153,
applied to the substrate before powder coating. as applicable.
Fresh and reclaimed powder shall be dry, free flowing, and 216.12 Application of Coatings
free of lumps and contaminants.
216.12.01 General – Application of coatings on steelwork
Soaking oven temperatures and residence times shall be specified to be painted as part of a Contract shall meet the
sufficient to completely melt the powder, but not enough to following requirements.
oxidize or discolour the coating.
(a) Welding Requirements – Areas to be field welded
Coating thickness and gloss shall be uniform over the entire shall have no paint applied for a distance of at least
surface of the object being coated. Coating shall be free of 100 mm back from the weld area.
pinholes or other holidays.
If inorganic zinc primer is used, the set-back shall be a
216.11 Application Methods (Metallizing and Hot Dip minimum 25 mm.
Galvanizing)
All welds shall be cleaned of weld residue including
216.11.01 Metallizing – Metallizing shall be applied in weld spatter and roughness on the welds. All porosity
accordance with SSPC-CS 23.00/AWS C2.23M/NACE and pin holes in welds shall be repaired by welding.
No. 12.

BC MoTI SS 2020 216 (9 of 14)

Vol. 1 Page 183 of 470
SECTION 216 COATING OF STEELWORK

Sharp edges shall be rounded to a minimum radius of of inorganic zinc primer. No mid or top coat
1 mm. Burrs around drilled holes shall be removed. shall be applied.
All welds shall receive a stripe coat of midcoat material (B) Primers shall be applied and cured in
over the primer prior to the midcoat application. accordance with SS 216.
Welding done on existing coated surfaces shall have the (c) Surfaces Inaccessible After Erection – Surfaces
coating removed, past the heat affected zone or 100 mm inaccessible after erection shall receive the field
from the weld whichever is more, down to bare metal. coating in the shop, before shipment to the erection site.
Surface profile of the cleaned area shall be 50-75 µm Prior to erection, handling damage shall be repaired to
(2-3 mils). the satisfaction of the Ministry Representative.
(b) Faying Surfaces – Slip-critical bolted connection (d) Application and Curing of Successive Layers of
locations shall be as identified on the Drawings, Special Coating – Each layer of coating shall be in a proper
Provisions or as directed by the Ministry state of cure or dryness before the application of the
Representative. succeeding coat. Unless otherwise specified a
minimum of overnight drying shall be required. Under
In the parts of a structure where steelwork is specified
poor drying and curing conditions, this period will be
to be painted, the following shall apply:
extended.
(i) General – Over thickness will not be accepted. If
Curing conditions shall be those given by the coating
over thickness occurs, then the surface will be
manufacturer in the product application instructions.
cleaned and recoated at the Contractor’s expense.
Curing time will vary according to temperature and in
Touch up coating and partial repairs of faying some cases humidity. The required curing time is
surfaces shall not be permitted. estimated at the ambient conditions during curing. This
will normally be done from data supplied by the coating
(ii) For slip-critical connections:
manufacturer.
(A) Faying surfaces shall be blast cleaned and
Coatings that have a maximum overcoating window
shall receive one coat of inorganic zinc shall not be overcoated after that time without
primer. No midcoat or topcoat shall be appropriate surface preparation as provided in writing
applied. by the coating manufacturer. The overcoat window
(B) Primer coatings shall meet the Class B coating will be calculated from data supplied by the coating
requirements as specified in CSA-S6. manufacturer using the ambient conditions at the Site.
(C) The class of the coating shall be determined (e) Primer – Primer shall not be applied until the cleaned
based on the results from testing done in steel surface meets specification requirements. Once
accordance with the “Specifications for specification requirements are met for a substrate, the
Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts” primer must be applied within 8 hours. The substrate if
issued by the Research Council on Structural protected will be assumed to continue to meet the
Connections. specification for 8 hours unless obvious contamination
has occurred. Determination of this will be at the sole
(D) A copy of the certificate of testing, the test discretion of the Ministry Representative.
procedures and results, and the test specimen
preparation procedures for the Class B coating Primer shall be applied to specification requirements.
shall be supplied to the Ministry Should the specification requirements be different than
Representative for each coating used on the coating manufacturer’s application instructions
faying surfaces. then the more stringent specification shall apply unless
otherwise approved by the Ministry Representative.
(E) Faying surfaces shall have the same blast
cleaning and coating application as was used (f) Penetrating Sealers – Penetrating sealers or low
in the tests to determine the mean slip viscosity products designed to wick into seams and seal
coefficient. Coated joints shall not be them shall be applied according to the coating
assembled before the coating has cured for the manufacturer’s product data sheets unless the Contract
minimum time used in the tests to determine calls for specific application parameters. Should that
the mean slip coefficient. be the case, the sealer shall be applied to the Contract
requirements.
(iii) For connections that are not slip-critical:
Current industry thinking has these products applied on
(A) Faying surfaces shall be blast cleaned to top of a single primer coat and under stripe and
SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 and receive one coat midcoats.

BC MoTI SS 2020 216 (10 of 14)

Vol. 1 Page 184 of 470
SECTION 216 COATING OF STEELWORK

Under certain circumstances it may be necessary to use 216.12.02 Shop Coating – Unless otherwise specified, the
a penetrating sealer as a primer or as a first coat. This following procedure shall apply to all new steel prior to
will be at the sole discretion of the Ministry shipment to the site of erection:
Representative.
Before blast cleaning, the steel shall be checked for
(g) Stripe Coat – All areas such as crevices, corners, contamination and if necessary the surface cleaned in
rivets, bolts, nuts, welds, edges and other protrusions accordance with SS 216.07.02.
shall be given a stripe coat to ensure that there is
Before coating, the steel shall be blast cleaned to SSPC-
sufficient coating dry film thickness. Unless it is
SP 10/NACE No. 2 Near white blast. Abrasive blast
specifically excluded, it is the intent of the Ministry that
cleaning will be permitted prior to fabrication provided that
all such areas shall receive a stripe coat. Coating may
any contamination incurred during fabrication is removed
be applied by spray to save time, but it shall be brushed
prior to coating, leaving an SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2
into all areas to be striped.
surface. Small areas of contamination occurring during
The stripe coat is a separate coat and shall be applied at fabrication shall be cleaned by manual cleaning to SSPC-
the thicknesses given for the midcoat coating. SP 3 Power tool cleaning and/or SSPC SP WJ-4/NACE
WJ-4 as necessary to remove contamination. Large areas of
The stripe coat shall be applied to the area and at least
contamination occurring during fabrication shall be dry
25 mm out from the area to be striped.
abrasive blast cleaned again to SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2
The stripe coat shall be a contrasting colour to the coats Near-white blast.
above and below it.
Surface profile for primers shall be 50 to 75 μm and sharp.
The stripe coat shall be cured before being overcoated.
Prior to dry abrasive blasting, all welding slag, spatter and
(h) Midcoat – Midcoat shall be applied as a full coat onto alkaline deposits in the vicinity of the welds shall be
clean, cured, primer, sealer, and stripe coats. The stripe removed. Surfaces shall then be blast cleaned to SSPC-
coat and or sealer shall be cured before being coated SP 10/NACE No. 2 Near-white blast.
with a subsequent coat.
When fabrication is completed and the surfaces cleaned as
(i) Caulking – Caulking shall be applied after the midcoat required, they shall be inspected for radius of corners, weld
and prior to the topcoat. spatter, unwelded interfaces, porosity or pin holes in
welding and burrs around drilled holes prior to the
Caulking shall be compatible with the coating system
application of paint.
used.
After passing inspection and before any contamination has
Silicone Caulking shall not be used.
occurred, the Contactor shall prime all steel surfaces with
Suitable caulking materials shall be in accordance with one coat of the selected shop coat primer from SS 308.
SS 308 and as listed in the RPL under the sub heading Primer shall be applied to specification requirements. A dry
System PCM Paint Caulking Materials. abrasive blast cleaned surface shall be coated within 8 hours
of cleaning and before rust blooming becomes apparent. If
Caulking shall be applied as specified in the Contract. either condition is exceeded then the area must be re-blasted
Caulking shall not be top coated until it cures according to specification.
to the manufacturer’s product data sheets. Lower Clean or partially coated steel shall be protected from
temperatures may increase this time. contamination including, but not limited to dirt, oil, water,
If there is a time window for top coating, the caulking grease, soluble salts and overspray, while in the shop.
shall be top coated before the window expires. Contaminated surfaces shall be re-cleaned at the
Contractor’s expense.
(j) Topcoat – Once the undercoats and caulking if any
have cured, the topcoat shall be applied. Surfaces that will be in contact with concrete shall be coated
with the full system prior to erection. Coatings with known
(k) Lapping Existing Coatings – Primer if applied shall incompatibilities with high pH shall not be used in contact
not overlap existing coatings by more than 10-20 mm. with the concrete.
Ministry preference is that it overlaps very slightly to
seal the interface joint. Surfaces inaccessible after erection shall receive the field
coats of paint in the shop, before shipment to the erection
Midcoat shall overlap existing coatings by a minimum site.
50 mm.
Faying surfaces shall meet the requirements of
Topcoat shall overlap existing coatings by a minimum SS 216.12.01(b).
50 mm and shall hide all newly added midcoat material.

BC MoTI SS 2020 216 (11 of 14)

Vol. 1 Page 185 of 470
SECTION 216 COATING OF STEELWORK

If more than one coat is to be shop applied, the the discretion of the Ministry Representative. Low pressure
manufacturer’s recommended recoat times for the ambient water cleaning shall be used as necessary to remove dirt,
temperatures shall be followed. salts and other deleterious contamination.
Generally, a minimum of 16 hours drying/curing time shall All areas that have been cleaned to bare metal as required
be required between the application of any paint in the shop shall be coated with an organic zinc field primer, applied by
and the moving or handling of any piece so painted. This brush to ensure full coverage. If the area is too large to coat
period may be increased in cases where poor drying practically with a brush, then spray may be used, providing
conditions exist, such as shop areas open to the weather in overspray does not contaminate the surrounding finished
winter months. Since curing times vary with different coating.
coating products, variations from this time may occur with
Lapping of new and existing coatings shall be as specified
specific products. Blocking used to support structures
in SS 216.12.01(k).
during the coating applications will be moved after the
curing of applied paint is complete and the surface area of If a partial system was applied in the shop, then the primed
the original blocking locations shall be prepared and painted areas shall be coated with successive coats to the level of
as required by this specification. the surrounding coating and then the entire structure shall
be top coated. This treatment shall include a brushed-in
Quick Dry/Cure products or products with “winter”
stripe coat.
catalysts shall not be substituted for SS 308 products unless
accepted by the Ministry Representative. If a coating system was completely applied in the shop and
on erection some damage has occurred or there are still
216.12.03 Transport of Coated Items – Transport of
uncoated areas, then these areas shall be cleaned in
coated items shall be done in a manner that imparts
accordance with this section and successively coated with
minimum damage to the coating system.
each coat of the paint system up to the topcoat including a
The coatings shall be cured before handling and shipment. brushed-in stripe coat. Manufacturer’s recoat times for the
ambient temperatures shall be followed.
Canvas or Fabric slings shall be used to move the items.
Chains or other methods that are known to damage coatings 216.12.05 Field Coating – Remaining coats shall be
shall not be used. applied as specified.
Coated items to be transported shall have sufficient dunnage Faying surfaces shall meet the requirements of
to prevent coating damage. Transport tie-downs shall be SS 216.12.01(b).
padded to protect the coated surfaces and edges.
(a) Touch-up coating- This section deals with the repair
Transport damage shall be repaired at the Contractor’s of small areas of coating. The definition of small areas,
expense. will vary depending on the situation, but in general, will
apply to areas that can be economically treated using
216.12.04 Field Repair of Damaged Shop Coating and
the touch-up technique.
Field Weld Areas – After the complete erection of shop
coated steel members the following procedure shall apply: The coating used for touch up and repair shall be one
of the SS 308 Field Overcoat (FO) systems unless
Before coating, field weld areas shall be ground off to
otherwise specified.
remove all welding slag, spatter and alkaline deposits in the
vicinity of the welds. Washing will be required when the The area to be repaired and coated shall be washed in
shop coat or steel has been contaminated with air borne dirt, accordance with SSPC SP WJ-4/NACE WJ-4, to
dust, salt, chemicals, etc., unless the steel shows no visible achieve a surface cleanliness as per SS 216.07.02(b)
contamination, and meets the “designated NVC levels” as before attempting further cleaning. If the area meets the
stated in SS 216.07.02(b) for non-visible contaminants. “designated NVC levels” as per SS 216.07.02(b) and is
Surfaces shall then be cleaned to SSPC-SP 11 . The existing free of dirt and detritus, washing may be omitted. Areas
coating shall be feathered back 25 mm from damaged areas of the coating that have failed or rusted shall be cleaned
into good coating. Feathering shall continue until the to SSPC-SP 3 or SSPC-SP 11 using the appropriate
existing coating is well adhered. This may be considerably tools.
more than the 25 mm feather back.
The old coating shall be feathered back 25 mm from
Care shall be taken not to damage surrounding areas. damaged areas into good coating. Feathering back
shall continue until the coating remaining is well
Note: This cleaning shall include the 100 mm welding set
adhered. This may be considerably more than the
back.
25 mm feather back.
All field connections and all areas of the shop applied
Pack rusted crevices will require more thorough
coating system damaged during handling, shipping and
cleaning. The degree of cleaning required will be
erection shall be cleaned to SSPC-SP 3 or SSPC SP 11 at
detailed in the Contract Documents for each specific

BC MoTI SS 2020 216 (12 of 14)

Vol. 1 Page 186 of 470
SECTION 216 COATING OF STEELWORK

structure. After cleaning, they shall be coated with the coating cannot be removed with a dull putty knife, it is
prime coat and then a brush coat of penetrating sealer considered tightly adhered.
shall be applied to the crevice and allowed to soak in.
Pack rusted crevices shall be cleaned in accordance
Repeated applications of the penetrating primer may be
with SS 216.12.05(a).
necessary until the inside of the crevice is saturated.
Where the coating system used does not include a Once all the existing damaged areas are built up to the
specific primer coat, the penetrating sealer shall be level of the existing coating, the topcoat is applied over
applied as a first coat. the entire area to seal the existing coating and all the
repairs.
In general, coating used for touch up and repair shall be
of the same type as those used initially. For example if In general, coating used for overcoating shall be of the
the coating system to be touched up is an alkyd system, same type as those used initially. For example if the
then alkyds are the coatings of choice. The coating to coating system to be touched up is an alkyd system,
be used shall be subject to acceptance by the Ministry then alkyds are the coatings of choice. Use of an over
Representative or as specified in the Contract. wintered test patch is recommended to test
compatibility. The coating to be used shall be subject
The selected primer shall be applied in the damaged
to acceptance by the Ministry Representative or as
areas. The primer shall be cured for the time
specified in the Contract.
recommended by the manufacturer prior to additional
coating being applied (c) Recoating – The area to be recoated shall be washed to
the requirements of SSPC-SP WJ-4/NACE WJ-4, to
After the primer is cured, the midcoat(s) shall be
achieve a surface cleanliness meeting the “designated
applied to bring the surface of the coating to the same
NVC levels” as per SS 216.07.02(b) before attempting
level as the surrounding sound coating. The midcoat
further cleaning. The entire area shall be blast cleaned
shall be applied within the manufacturer’s suggested
to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. Note that some specialty
range of thickness. The midcoat(s) shall be cured for
coatings or coatings in some difficult applications such
the time(s) recommended by the manufacturer.
as immersion may require SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2 or
After the midcoat material is cured, the area shall be even SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1.
given a topcoat. Where practical, the topcoat shall be
Surface profile should be 50 – 75 µm and sharp.
extended to a logical edge such as the edge of the beam
or plate, to present a less patchy appearance. The Contractor shall provide full containment of debris
generated by the cleaning, coating and curing
Lapping of new and existing coatings shall be done in
operations.
accordance with SS 216.12.01(k).
Debris contaminating the rest of the structure or the
(b) Overcoating – The object is to clean the surface, repair
immediate environment due to cleaning operations
spot or area damage with coatings and to overcoat the
shall be removed by the Contractor.
entire area with a topcoat.
Sharp edges shall be radiused to 2 mm.
The coating used for touch up and repair shall be one
of the SS 308 Field Overcoat (FO) systems. (d) Zone Coating – Zone coating may use any one of or a
combination of touch-up, overcoating or recoating on
The area to be repaired and coated shall be washed to
limited areas of a structure.
the requirements of SSPC-SP, WJ-4/NACE WJ-4, with
a surface cleanliness meeting the “designated NVC (e) Field Curing of Coatings – Each coating application
levels” as per SS 216.07.02(b) before attempting shall be cured before it is coated over or exposed to
further cleaning. If the area meets the “designated weather or traffic.
NVC levels” as per SS 216.07.02(b) and is free of dirt
and detritus, washing may be omitted. Areas of the Coatings inside enclosed spaces shall continue to be
coating that have failed or rusted shall be cleaned to ventilated until dry or cured to ensure that they cure
SSPC-SP 3 or SSPC-SP 11. Larger failed areas shall correctly.
be cleaned to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. In this case, Uncured coating shall be protected against damage
surface profile should be 50-75 µm and sharp. from dust or other detrimental foreign matter. If
necessary, coating shall be delayed until the cause of
Debris contaminating the rest of the structure or the
immediate environment due to cleaning operations the dust, etc. has abated. Uncured coating shall be
shall be removed by the Contractor. protected from the weather until cured. In some cases,
this may include hoarding, heating, ventilation or
The old coating shall be feathered back 25 mm from dehumidification. Direct propane heaters shall not be
damaged areas into tightly adhered coating. If the used for heating during the painting or curing process.
Coating contaminated or damaged by any of the above

BC MoTI SS 2020 216 (13 of 14)

Vol. 1 Page 187 of 470
SECTION 216 COATING OF STEELWORK

conditions shall be repaired at the Contractor’s 216.14 Cleanup – All construction and painting debris must
expense. be removed from the site and the site environs. The site and
surroundings shall be left in the same condition as prior to
216.13 Damage to Adjacent Property – It is the intention
work being commenced.
of the Ministry that the coating work shall have no adverse
effect on adjacent property. Repair of damage to adjacent 216.15 Measurement and Payment – Measurement and
property, vehicles, pedestrians and other portions of the Payment shall be as set out in the Contract Documents.
structure due to the Contractor’s coating operations is the
sole responsibility of the Contractor.

BC MoTI SS 2020 216 (14 of 14)

Vol. 1 Page 188 of 470
 SECTION 218

CONCRETE FOR MINOR WORKS

SCOPE meet the specified requirements and providing the details of

the quality control work plan. The documentation shall be
218.01 General – SS 218 shall be used only where
submitted to the Ministry Representative at least two (2)
explicitly specified by the Ministry in the Contract.
weeks in advance of the when concrete production is
Concrete produced under SS 218 is intended to be used only scheduled to commence.
for minor concrete works for Ministry infrastructure such
No concrete shall be placed prior to the completion of the
as:
Ministry review and acceptance of the documentation.
• non-structural reinforced and non-reinforced cast-
in-place concrete, in applications such as fence post and
Table 218-A: Classification of Concrete Mixtures:
guardrail embedment, and thrust blocks
• Minor structures such as small culvert endwalls. Required CSA A23.1
Class of Strength at Class of
For infrastructure that will be owned by a third-party, such Concrete 28 Days (MPa) Exposure
as a municipality, the specifications of that owner will
normally apply (such as MMCD). A 32 C-2*
B 32 C-2*
MATERIALS C 25 C-4
218.10 Cement – Cement shall conform to the requirements X 32 C-2*
of CSA A3000 and CSA A23.1.
Y 32 C-2*
218.11 Aggregate – Concrete aggregate shall be tested for
*Class of exposure shall also be compatible with the
sulphate content in accordance with CSA A23.2-3B.
sulphate exposure category identified. If no exposure
218.12 Concrete – Concrete for minor works shall be in category is identified the class of exposure shall also
accordance with CSA A23.1 – Concrete materials and meet the requirements of S-2.
methods of concrete construction.
Unless otherwise specified, concrete shall meet the
PAYMENT
requirements of Table 218-A, Class A concrete, and the
requirements of the sulphate exposure category identified in 218.90 Basis of Payment – Payment for Concrete for Minor
the contract. Works is usually incidental to another pay Item.
218.13 Mix Design and Performance – The Contractor Accordingly, no direct payment shall be made for Concrete
shall be responsible for the performance of the concrete, for Minor Works unless the "Schedule of Approximate
carrying out all testing to verify performance, quality Quantities and Unit Prices" includes a specific pay Item for
control of all aspects of the concrete operations and for Concrete for Minor Works.
proportioning all concrete mix designs.
When there is a specific pay Item, payment shall be made at
The mix shall be designed to be compatible with the the price bid per cubic metre of concrete, measured in-place
concrete aggregate, as well as to meet the sulphate exposure in and forming part of the finished Work. Payment shall be
identified in the Contract. accepted as full compensation for everything furnished and
done in connection therewith.
The Contractor shall submit documentation demonstrating
that the concrete mix design and constituent components

o 2020 218 1 of 1
Vol. 1 Page 189 of 470
 SECTION 220

SHOTCRETE AND SOIL ANCHOR WALLS

o 2020 220 1 of 1
Vol. 1 Page 190 of 470
 SECTION 232

METAL BIN-WALL

232.01 Scope – This Section covers the construction of carefully and any which are damaged shall be removed and
metal bin type retaining walls (Metal Bin-Wall) in replaced with new components at the Contractor's expense.
accordance with the general layout and details indicated on
Minor damage, in the opinion of the Ministry
SS Drawings 1-SP232 through 3-SP232.
Representative, to the galvanized coating shall be repaired
232.02 Provision of Metal Bin-Wall – Metal Bin-Walls of by coating with two heavy coats of zinc rich paint selected
the design (depth to height ratio) called for shall be from the Ministry’s Recognized Products List under the
constructed at the locations and as shown on the Drawings category of “Additional Paint Coatings – Zinc-Rich Touch-
with the materials, accessories, and necessary ancillary up Paints and Primers”.
work all in accordance with the details indicated on the
Before the assembly bolts are tightened, columns shall be
Drawings, Specifications, Special Provisions, the SS
checked for line and batter or plumbness, where applicable.
Drawings or as directed by the Ministry Representative.
Any additional installation requirements specified by the 232.04.04 Backfill – Structure backfill material shall be in
Metal Bin-Wall supplier shall also be adhered to by the accordance with the material requirements for Bridge End
Contractor. Fill (BEF) as specified in SS 202.
The Contractor shall provide the manufacturer’s drawings Structure backfill material shall be placed as wall
(shop drawings) to the Ministry Representative for review foundation, backfill inside the bins, and for 0.6 m outside
at least two (2) weeks prior to components being delivered the wall. The material shall be spread in layers not
to Site. The shop drawings shall clearly show the following: exceeding 150 mm in thickness and shall be compacted to a
minimum 95% Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density
• height and depth of all bins;
obtained by the current ASTM test method D698.
• thickness of all stringers, spacers, verticals and
other components; Backfill inside each bin shall progress simultaneously but
• material specifications; not in advance of that outside the wall.
• assembly instructions; and Note: Bin-wall may be backfilled as it is erected provided
• any special details. that the columns are held in correct position while the
232.03 Materials – Metal Bin-Wall materials will be backfill is being placed.
supplied by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract. 232.05 Measurement and Payment – Metal Bin-Wall
Galvanized steel sheet and galvanized fasteners shall be in shall be paid for at the Unit Price bid per square metre of
accordance with CSA G401. Vertical connectors and base facial area of wall, measured on the batter and including the
plates shall be in accordance with CSA G40.21 Grade 260W toe burial. Payment shall be full compensation for work
minimum and shall be galvanized in accordance with required to supply and install the Metal Bin-Wall, including
ASTM A123. but not limited to, supply, hauling to the Site, and erection
of all steel components and also supply, hauling, placement
232.04 Construction and compaction of the structure backfill.
232.04.01 Construction – Construction shall be carried out Excavation for foundation shall be measured and paid for in
with all labour, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary accordance with and at the rate bid for either "Foundation
to complete all Metal Bin-Wall construction in accordance Excavation" in accordance with SS 407 or for “Roadway
with good work practice. Drainage and Excavation” in accordance with SS 201, as
232.04.02 Foundation – Foundation excavation shall be specified in the Contract Documents.
carried down to the depths shown on the Drawings or to Backfill placed beyond 0.6 m from the face of the Metal
such greater depths as the Ministry Representative may Bin-Wall shall be incidental to "Foundation Excavation" in
direct. In the case where rock, hardpan or other unyielding accordance with SS 407 or “Roadway Drainage and
material is encountered, it shall be removed to a depth Excavation” in accordance with SS 201.
300 mm below the design grade of the bin-wall footing and
backfilled in accordance with SS 232.04.04.
232.04.03 Erection – The units shall be assembled as
shown on the drawings. Components shall be handled

BC MoTI SS 2020 232 (1 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 191 of 470
SECTION 232 METAL BIN WALL

o 2020 232 2 of 4
Vol. 1 Page 192 of 470
SECTION 232 METAL BIN WALL

BC MoTI SS 2020 232 (3 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 193 of 470
SECTION 232 METAL BIN WALL

o 2020 232 4 of 4
Vol. 1 Page 194 of 470
 SECTION 303

CULVERTS

SCOPE (b) End Treatment Components:

303.01 Scope – This section covers the construction of pipe (i) Apron means a horizontal slab in the channel
and box culverts and their associated end treatment. immediately upstream or downstream of an
Culverts installed using trenchless techniques are not endwall.
covered in these Standard Specifications.
(ii) Cut-off Wall means a buried vertical wall below
303.01.01 Definitions – For the purposes of this Section, the springline of a pipe to prevent water flow along
the following definitions apply: the exterior of the pipe.
(a) Backfill Zones: (See also Figure 303-1) (iii) Endwall means a vertical or sub-vertical wall
surrounding the inlet or outlet end of a culvert.
(i) Backfilling means the operation of filling the
Also known as a “headwall”.
embedment and backfill material.
(iv) Low-Permeability End Seal means installing a
(ii) Backfill Material means fill material used above
piping-resistant material near the end of a pipe to
the embedment material and below the subgrade.
limit inflow of water.
(iii) Bedding Material means the material used to
(v) Wingwall means a wall extending to the side of an
support the culvert.
endwall.
(iv) Embedment Material means material supporting
the culvert, from the top of the bedding to the
bottom of the backfill. MATERIALS
(v) Internal Streambed Material means granular 303.10 Materials – The Contractor shall supply all material
material laid inside a culvert to mimic a natural in accordance with SS 145.15 and the following:
stream bed and aid in fish passage.
303.10.01 Concrete Products – supplied in accordance
(vi) Subgrade means the grade upon which the first with the Design and the following, as appropriate to the
layer of granular pavement structure is laid. application:
(a) Concrete Pipe (CP) – In accordance with CSA A257,
Figure 303-1: Culvert Backfill in Trench Installation ASTM C14, ASTM C76, ASTM C506, ASTM C507,
or ASTM C655.
(b) Concrete Boxes (CBX) – In accordance with ASTM
C1433 or ASTM C1577.
(c) Gaskets – Rubber gaskets in accordance with
CSA A257.3, ASTM C443, or ASTM C1677.
(d) Flexible Joint Sealants – Flexible joint sealants shall
be in accordance with ASTM C990.
Note: Flexible joint sealants shall be used only where
explicitly specified by the Designer and only for
structures which do not convey water, such as for
pedestrian/cyclist tunnels, farm access tunnels or
wildlife tunnels.
(e) Concrete Sulphate Resistance – Concrete shall meet
Notes: the sulphate resistance requirements as stated in the
• “POR” means “Professional of Record”; typically Special Provisions or on the Drawings.
a geotechnical engineer in this case; 303.10.02 Corrugated Steel Pipe (CSP) – supplied in
• “Rigid” culverts are concrete; all other material accordance with SS 320.
types are considered “flexible”. 303.10.03 Structural Plate Corrugated Steel Pipe
(SPCSP) – supplied in accordance with SS 320.

o 2020 303 1 of 14
Vol. 1 Page 195 of 470
SECTION 303 CULVERTS

303.10.04 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Plastic (PP) – strength, durability, and performance
supplied in accordance with SS 317. requirements.
303.10.05 PVC Pipe – supplied in accordance with 303.12.03 SCC Mix Requirements – The self-
SS 318.03. consolidating concrete mix shall conform to the
requirements of CSA A23.1, including Clause 8.6 and
303.11 Design Live Load - Culvert products shall be
Table 22, and the appropriate CSA and ASTM standards
designed for the highway Design live load as follows:
listed above. The SCC shall meet the following
• The Design live load in accordance with the requirements:
Ministry Supplement to the Canadian Highway (a) Minimum specified compressive strength of 35 MPa at
Bridge Design Code (CHBDC) S6; 28 days
• AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (b) S1 class of exposure with the addition of chloride
HL-93 live load; or exposure
• AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway (c) Exposed to cycles of freeze/thaw
Bridges H-20 or HS-20 live load.
(d) Maximum water-to-cementitious materials ratio
303.12 Self-Consolidating Concrete – Self-Consolidating (W/Cm) of 0.40
Concrete (SCC) may be used in the manufacture of concrete
pipe (reinforced or plain) and box culverts, only under the (e) Rapid chloride permeability test result (ASTM C1202)
following conditions. of less than 1000 coulombs within 91 days
303.12.01 Products – Only for products limited to the 303.13 – Manufacture of Precast Concrete Products
following sizes and specifications: 303.13.01 Certified Plants – For Contracts tendered after
(a) pipes and barrels smaller than 3.0 m in any internal December 31, 2021, all concrete pipe, boxes, precast
cross-sectional dimension manufactured in accordance concrete endwalls and other precast concrete products shall
with CSA A257, ASTM C14, C76, C478, C506, C507, be supplied from a manufacturer that is certified by an
or C655. independent third-party certification agency to produce
these products according to applicable CSA and ASTM
(b) boxes with both internal spans and rise less than 3.0 m manufacturing standards.
manufactured in accordance with ASTM C1433 or
C1577. The quality assurance programs recognized specifically for
certification of the manufacturer are as follows:
303.12.02 Documentation – the Contractor shall provide
the following documentation for review upon request by the (a) The Canadian Precast Concrete Quality Assurance
Ministry Representative: (CPCQA) Certification Program.
(a) a full copy of the applicable concrete mix design (b) The CSA Group Testing & Certification Inc. (CSA)
utilized in the manufacture of any product(s) intended Certification Program.
to be incorporated into Ministry works, and (c) QCAST Certification Program by the American
(b) Documentation in accordance with either of the Concrete Pipe Association for Precast Products.
following: (d) National Precast Concrete Association (NPCA) Plant
(i) Details in accordance with CSA A23.2-24C Certification.
documenting the proven history of successful (e) Other certification organizations acceptable to the
performance for the required strength, durability, Ministry Representative that are accredited by the
and other performance requirements of the Standards Council of Canada for the certification of
proposed mix design for the manufacture of any manufacturers for these products.
product(s) intended to be incorporated into
Ministry works, or 303.15.02 Product Marking – All products shall be
marked with the certification body’s logo confirming that
(ii) A full-scale test shall be used to verify the self- the production of the product is in accordance with the
consolidating characteristics for placement and for quality and requirements of the specified standards for the
the hardened concrete properties of the mix design products.
for the manufacture of any product(s) intended to
be incorporated into Ministry works.
Documentation in accordance with CSA A23.2-
24C shall be submitted demonstrating that the
proposed mix design will achieve the required

o 2020 303 2 of 14
Vol. 1 Page 196 of 470
SECTION 303 CULVERTS

CONSTRUCTION Figure 303-2: Low Permeability End Seal

303.20 Construction
303.20.01 Backfill Material – Construction of backfill
material shall conform to SS 201 Roadway and Drainage
Excavation.
303.20.02 Freezing Temperatures – When the air
temperature is below 0°C, no backfilling is allowed unless
otherwise accepted by the Ministry Representative. If
acceptance is granted, all backfill materials shall be in a
thawed state when placed and compacted. Frozen granular
backfill materials will not be permitted. No backfill
material will be permitted to be placed directly on frozen Figure 303-3: Clay End Seal Plasticity Chart
substrate.
303.20.03 Distortion – During construction of bedding,
embedment, and backfilling, the culvert distortion shall be
monitored and controlled so that:
(a) the vertical distortion never exceeds 2% of the rise; and
(b) the lateral distortion never exceeds 2% of the span.
303.20.04 Low-Permeability End Seal – Where a culvert
has no endwall or cut-off wall, and bedding or embedment
is 25 mm IGB or other permeable material, the upstream
end of the embankment shall be sealed to minimize the
potential for piping failure. Any such seal shall be
considered as an End Treatment.
The seal shall be constructed by replacing the
IGB/permeable material with 25 mm WGB, a clay seal, or
other low permeability, erosion resistant material approved
by the Ministry Representative, in the upstream end of the Culverts are to be field fit by the Contractor, to reflect actual
bedding and embedment to a horizontal distance of 1 m into conditions encountered on-Site, at a desirable grade of
the embankment (see Figure 303-2) and, where shown on approximately 2% and minimum grade of 0.5%, all to be
the Drawings, may also extend upstream of the inlet. approved by the Ministry Representative prior to
installation.
If used for an end seal, clay shall have plasticity properties
lying within the shaded area of Figure 303-3 or be approved Such field fits will normally involve minor changes in
by the Ministry Representative. location, elevation, grade, skew, depth and/or length
resulting from actual local drainage course locations, post-
303.20.05 End Bevels – Any culvert 1000 mm or less in
stripping surface elevations, final ditch depths, and other
diameter that ends within the “clear zone”, as shown on the
factors. Where specified in the Contract or by the Ministry
Drawings, and which is not protected by roadside barrier
Representative, the field fit may also include adding camber
shall be beveled (mitered) to match the embankment slope,
to accommodate any anticipated post-construction
as approved by the Ministry Representative.
consolidation of the embankment.
303.21 Concrete, Corrugated Steel, Polyethylene and
Some culverts may be designed to control drainage and are
PVC Pipes and Concrete Boxes (this subsection does not
not to be field fit without the approval of the Ministry
cover SPCSP).
Representative. Any such culverts will be identified in
303.21.01 Layout – All culverts shall be laid out and advance for the Contractor, through a note on the Drawings,
constructed in general accordance with the lines, grades, in the Special Provisions, or by the Ministry Representative.
and locations specified in the Drawings, or as directed by
303.21.02 Flow Obstructions – Any obstacles to flow, such
the Ministry Representative.
as filter cloth used for siltation control, shall not be place
directly on the end of any culvert. Where practicable, there
shall be a minimum spacing of 1 m between the end of the
culvert and any obstacles to flow.

o 2020 303 3 of 14
Vol. 1 Page 197 of 470
SECTION 303 CULVERTS

Any obstructed culvert shall be cleaned out in accordance depth of 300 mm below the culvert, a minimum of
with SS 165.10.07. 300 mm each side of the culvert, and shall:
303.21.03 Inlet and Outlet Ditches – Inlet and outlet (i) have its top surface shaped so that at least 25% of
ditches to culverts shall be constructed to the lines and the circumference of the culvert is in contact with
grades as shown in the Design and field fit as approved by the prepared bedding for the whole of its length, or
the Ministry Representative.
(ii) be left uncompacted below the middle 1/3 of the
303.21.04 Trenching – The trench and other preparatory pipe, for a depth equal to
work shall be approved by the Ministry Representative
(A) for CSP and PP, twice the corrugation depth,
before actual placing starts.
or
(a) A full trench condition shall be provided wherever
(B) for PE, PVC, and concrete culverts, 75 mm or
possible; a minimum trench depth shall be 50% of the
1/24th of the pipe diameter, whichever is
culvert diameter.
greater.
(b) The trench width shall be as required to accommodate
Bedding for Concrete Boxes shall be a minimum of
the Contractor’s compaction method and equipment,
50 mm in depth (minimum 100 mm over a rock
but not less than 0.3 m on each side of the culvert.
foundation), laid true to grade, and be compacted to a
(c) If, in the opinion of the Ministry Representative, the minimum of 95% Standard Proctor maximum dry
material in the bottom of the excavation is of such a density as determined in accordance with ASTM D698.
character as to cause unequal settlement along the
For any gasketed or joint sealed culvert, a transverse
length of the culvert, the trench shall be dug below the
trench shall be dug across the bedding at each joint to
grade to such depth as ordered, backfilled with crushed
prevent any granular material from contaminating the
base course (IGB or WGB) as per SS 202 or other
joint or impeding the joining process.
suitable material approved by the Ministry
Representative, and compacted as per SS 202 to ensure 303.21.06 Placing – Concrete culvert (CP and CBX) shall
a firm and uniform foundation. be laid beginning at the downstream end with the spigot end
pointing downstream. Culvert with elliptical reinforcement
(d) Where a culvert trench is to be excavated through an
shall be laid with the minor axis of the reinforcement as
existing pavement structure:
marked by the manufacturer in a vertical position.
(i) the cut slope through the sub-base and base gravels
Concrete culvert joints shall be sealed using a rubber gasket,
shall be 6H:1V, or as directed by the Ministry
installed in accordance with the culvert manufacturer’s
Representative, to minimize differential
recommendations.
settlement. See Figure 303-1; and
CSP shall be laid beginning at the downstream end, with
(ii) the road base shall be reconstructed to match the
separate sections shall be firmly jointed together by a
pre-existing pavement structure in material types
culvert collar.
and thicknesses.
Where practicable, the first length of culvert at the inlet and
303.21.05 Bedding
outlet shall be full length, to minimize the likelihood of
(a) Bedding Material – The bedding of all culverts shall uplift failure.
consist of:
Corrugated Polyethylene Plastic Pipe with bell and spigot
(i) 25 mm intermediate or well graded base course connections shall be laid in the direction with the bell end
(IGB or WGB) as per SS 202; or of the plastic pipe pointing in the opposite direction of water
flow, or facing upstream.
(ii) other suitable material approved by the Ministry
Representative, Any cuts in CSP shall be coated with two heavy coats of
zinc rich paint selected from the Ministry’s Recognized
and, except as noted in SS 303.21.05(b)(ii), shall be
Products List under the category of “Additional Paint
compacted as per SS 202 to 95% Standard Proctor
Coatings – Zinc-Rich Touch-up Paints and Primers”.
maximum dry density as determined in accordance
with ASTM D698, to ensure a firm and uniform 303.21.07 Embedment – Embedment Material shall consist
foundation. of 25 mm intermediate or well graded base course (IGB or
WGB) as per SS 202, or other mineral aggregate acceptable
Where IGB is used, a low permeability end seal shall
to the Ministry Representative.
be installed per SS 303.20.04.
Where IGB is used, a low permeability end seal shall be
(b) Bedding Construction – Bedding for round or other
installed per SS 303.20.04.
curved shaped culverts shall be installed to a minimum

o 2020 303 4 of 14
Vol. 1 Page 198 of 470
SECTION 303 CULVERTS

Embedment material for embankment installation shall 303.22.03 Bedding, Embedment and Backfilling –
extend a minimum of two-thirds of the span or 0.9 m beyond Bedding, embedment and backfilling shall be in accordance
the culvert span on each side, whichever is greater. with SS 303.21 and SS 202 unless otherwise specified in the
Embedment material for trench installation shall extend a Drawings or the Contract.
minimum of 0.3 m on either side.
For multiple SPCSP structures, structural backfill shall be
Embedment material shall be placed, in layers not provided between adjacent SPCSP structures. The
exceeding 150 mm in depth when compacted, to an minimum clear spacing between adjacent buried structures
elevation of: shall not be less than 1000 mm or one-tenth of the largest
span, which ever is greatest, unless approved otherwise by
(a) for CSP, PP, PE or PVC culvert, 300 mm or the1/6th of
the Designer and the Ministry Representative.
the pipe diameter, whichever is greater, above the
culvert crown, Backfilling shall be done symmetrically. The differential
height of backfilling material on either side of the SPCSP at
(b) for CP culvert, the springline of the culvert (i.e. up to
any transverse section shall not exceed 400 mm.
the widest point of the culvert), and
Only hand held compaction equipment is allowed within
(c) for CBX culvert, the crown of the culvert.
1 m behind any endwall or wing wall.
Embedment material shall be compacted to a minimum 95%
End dumped or loose pushed material shall not be piled
(100% within 300 mm of subgrade elevation) of the
closer than 3 m from the culvert. Hauling equipment shall
Standard Proctor maximum dry density as determined in
not be operated over the culvert until backfilling operations
accordance with ASTM D698.
have completed a suitable cover approved by the Ministry
303.21.08 Backfilling – Backfilling material shall be placed Representative.
and compacted outside and above the Embedment Material,
303.23 Culvert End Treatment – Such treatments may
up to subgrade elevation, and shall consist of material
include endwalls, wingwalls, cut-off walls, aprons,
suitable for embankment construction in accordance with
traversable grates, up-lift prevention measures, or any
SS 201.
combination thereof, and shall be constructed in accordance
Backfilling shall be done symmetrically. The differential with the details shown on the applicable Drawings or SP
height of backfilling material on either side of the culvert Drawings.
shall not exceed 300 mm.
Construction and materials for concrete and reinforcement
The material within 450 mm directly above the crown of the shall conform to SS 211 and SS 412 and excavation shall
culvert shall be laid and compacted as one lift. For a culvert conform to the requirements of SS 407.
with crown within 300 mm of subgrade, installation
Rip-rap end treatment is covered under SS 205 and is not
methods shall be approved by the Ministry Representative.
included within the Work under this SS 303.
303.22 Structural Plate Corrugated Steel Pipe/Pipe-
If specified on the Drawings or in the Contract, the
Arch Culverts (SPCSP)
Contractor may provide an alternative End Treatment
303.22.01 Excavation – Excavation shall conform to product, as a Value Engineering Proposal in accordance
SS 407 Foundation Excavation. If a coarse boulder material with SS 125. Alternate products shall be designed by a
or solid rock is encountered when preparing the bed of the professional engineer registered with Engineers and
SPCSP, the material shall be excavated to a minimum depth Geoscientists BC. Sealed engineered drawings of the
of 300 mm below the SPCSP invert and backfilled with alternate products shall be provided to the Ministry
granular material having a maximum size of 75 mm. Representative for review and approval at least two (2)
weeks prior to the start of the fabrication of the product.
303.22.02 Assembling – All bolted plates shall be in contact
for the full width and length of the seam lap. The bolts in
the valley of each longitudinal seam shall be nearer to the
MEASUREMENT
visible edge of the plate than the bolts in the crest. The
torque on the bolts prior to backfilling shall be in accordance 303.80 Culverts – Culverts will be measured by the
with CSA S6 or as recommended by the manufacturer in the METRE along their invert length as installed for each size
specific plate assembly drawings. A minimum of 5% and type of culvert.
randomly selected bolts shall be tested in each longitudinal
303.81 End Treatments – End Treatments will be
and circumferential connection. The installation shall not
measured by EACH for each culvert End Treatment
be accepted if 10% or more of tested bolts do not meet the
location. Each stand-alone endwall, cut-off wall, wing wall,
specified torque requirements.
apron, traversable grate, up-lift prevention measures, or any
Rotation of the pipe culvert and/or spiralling of the combination of those components at a single location, will
longitudinal seams shall not be permitted. be counted as a single unit.

o 2020 303 5 of 14
Vol. 1 Page 199 of 470
SECTION 303 CULVERTS

PAYMENT End Seal; formwork, reinforcement, air entrained concrete,

placing and tamping, stripping and cleaning, curing,
303.90 Culverts – Payment for excavation, culvert supply,
engineering design for alternate End Treatment products,
assembling, placing, beveling within the clear zone, and
and any other work necessary in connection therewith,
backfilling shall be at the Contract Unit or Lump Sum Price
including excavation of Type D material and backfilling,
bid for each of these items of work, or at the Contract Unit
but excluding riprap and Type A excavation.
Price bid per metre of culvert.
303.92 Full Compensation – The price(s) bid shall be full
303.91 Culvert End Treatment – Payment for CULVERT
compensation for the cost of furnishing all labour, materials,
END TREATMENT will be at the Contract Unit or Lump
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
Sum Price bid per size and scope of Culvert End Treatment
work as specified in the Contract.
required.
303.93 Type A Excavation – Excavation of Type A
The Contract Unit Price shall include provision of
material encountered in the trench or Culvert End Treatment
everything necessary; endwall, (complete with cut-off-
excavation will be paid at the Contract Unit Price for
wall, wing wall, apron, traversable grate), or up-lift
Type A, or where such an Item is not included in the
prevention measures, or any combination thereof;
Contract, as a Change to Work.
incremental costs of materials used as a Low Permeability

o 2020 303 6 of 14
Vol. 1 Page 200 of 470
SECTION 303 CULVERTS

o 2020 303 7 of 14
Vol. 1 Page 201 of 470
SECTION 303 CULVERTS

o 2020 303 8 of 14
Vol. 1 Page 202 of 470
SECTION 303 CULVERTS

o 2020 303 9 of 14
Vol. 1 Page 203 of 470
SECTION 303 CULVERTS

o 2020 303 10 of 14
Vol. 1 Page 204 of 470
SECTION 303 CULVERTS

o 2020 303 11 of 14
Vol. 1 Page 205 of 470
SECTION 303 CULVERTS

o 2020 303 12 of 14
Vol. 1 Page 206 of 470
SECTION 303 CULVERTS

o 2020 303 13 of 14
Vol. 1 Page 207 of 470
SECTION 303 CULVERTS

o 2020 303 14 of 14
Vol. 1 Page 208 of 470
 SECTION 308

COATING SYSTEMS

308.01 Scope – This Section defines the coating systems 308.04 System Selection Criteria – The selection of a
required for shop and field coating of structural steel or coating system is dictated by the location and environment
wood/concrete surfaces which may be exposed to exterior of the structure to be coated. The coating system may be
corrosive conditions. applied in a shop or in the field. The field location may
necessitate a specific maintenance regimen, for example, a
308.02 Standards and Specifications
complete recoat or a single overcoat. The environment may
a) Specifying Bodies: be moderately or severely corrosive. In addition, there may
be concerns with limiting overspray.
• SSPC – The Society for Protective Coatings, has a
large number of coating and cleaning specifications. The following general comments apply to all coatings.
• ASTM – The American Society for Testing and • Coatings shall not be mixed and matched between
Materials, produces test procedures for a wide range suppliers, or within a supplier's product line.
of products and processes.
• All coatings shall bear the manufacturer's name and
• NACE – The National Association of Corrosion address, batch number, paint type, date of manufacture,
Engineers, also produces specifications and test DOH or SAE AMS-STD 595A color code1, and mixing
procedures for coatings and corrosion engineering. and application instructions. All labels shall contain
the requisite WHMIS label information and be
All these bodies have a web presence available by accompanied by a valid MSDS. All coatings are
searching the name above. subject to inspection and testing before acceptance or
b) Colour Specifications using a five-digit number refer at the time of application.
to SAE AMS-STD 595A colour numbers.
308.05 Coating Products – The Ministry Recognized
c) Measuring Units – The metric unit (m) or imperial Products List (RPL) lists coating products that have been
unit (mil) can be used interchangeably, at the reviewed and accepted for use on Ministry projects. The
conversion factor of: RPL can be reviewed at the following Ministry web site:

1 mil = 25 m (1 mil = 1 thousandth of an inch) https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/tra

nsportation-infrastructure/engineering-standards-
308.03 System Selection Table – The System Selection guidelines/recognized-products-list
Table contained in the Coating Systems section of the
Ministry Recognized Products List (RPL) summarizes the Products not listed on the Ministry Recognized Products
coating systems currently in use. The table lists application List shall not be used.
areas where specified coating systems may be used. It is Products on the RPL shall be used in accordance with the
intended to assist in the choice of a coating system for introduction/definitions, descriptions, notes qualifiers and
specific applications. Some systems may find use in more all other information given in the RPL.
than one specific application or in applications not
mentioned. The use of any product from the RPL by the Contractor shall
in no way relieve the Contractor from its contractual
Where a system is specified in a Contract, only those obligations.
coating products listed for that coating system may be used.

1
Note: The Recognized Product List may still refer to these as “US Federal Specification 595B” colours. The colour numbers
have not changed between the US Federal Specification 595B and the SAE-AMS-STD 595A specifications.

BC MoTI SS 2020 308 (1 of 1)

Vol. 1 Page 209 of 470
 SECTION 312

STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIERS

312.01 Scope – This Section covers the quality and SP312-1 SP312-2, SP312-3, SP312-4, SP312-6, SP312-7,
manufacture of steel beam guardrails, wood posts, steel SP312-8, and SP312-11. Design and part numbers are taken
posts, and accessory material for use as traffic barriers. from the Task Force 13 “Guide to Standardized Roadside
Hardware” and are reproduced on these drawings.
The layout and installation of materials shall be in
accordance the Contract and the SS Drawings of the SP312 Task Force 13 information is available on-line at:
series unless otherwise specified. http://www.tf13.org/Guides/index.php
SS 604 covers the installation of the material described by
The name and/or trademark of the manufacturer and the
this Section together with the construction of ancillary
metal thickness shall be clearly and permanently marked on
work. each component clear of the splicing overlap and on the
Note: SS Drawings numbers SP312-5, SP312-9, and opposite face to the traffic side.
SP312-10 are not used.
312.04 Steel Beam Guardrail – Guardrail shall be
312.02 Standards of Reference – Standards of various manufactured in accordance with AASHTO M 180
authorities are referred to herein generally in sufficient “Standard Specification for Corrugated Sheet Steel Beams
detail for the purpose of this Section. For detailed testing for Highway Guardrail” and shall conform to the following
and other requirements, copies of the Standards are detail requirements.
obtainable as follows:
312.04.01 Beam Classification (According to the
CSA: Canadian Standards Association: AASHTO Standard) – The shape, class and type, together
Standards Sales with the Task Force 13 design and part numbers, shall be as
13799 Commerce Parkway in accordance with the Special Provisions, Contract
Richmond, BC V6V 2N9 Drawings and/or SS Drawings of the SP312 series.
https://www.csagroup.org/codes-standards/ (a) Shape – W-Beam are for SGR38 installations, and
Thrie-Beam for SGR09 and SGM09 installations and
ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials,
both shall be accurately formed to profile, dimensions
1916 Race Street,
and tolerances of AASHTO M 180 with overall cross
Philadelphia, PA 19103
sections of 312 mm x 85 mm and 508 mm x 85 mm
https://www.astm.org/Standard/standards-and- respectively (TF13 Designation RWM01a to RWM22a
publications.html and RTM02a to RTM06a).
TF13: Task Force 13 (b) Class and Type – Unless otherwise, beams shall be
http://www.tf13.org/Publications.php Class A, Type II.
(c) Length – Normally 3.81 m (12’ 6”) nominal length
AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and beams (4.19 m, +0 mm/-75 mm overall) will be
Transportation Officials required.
444 North Capitol Street N.W., Suite 225
Washington, DC 20001 (d) Punchings – In addition to joining bolt holes,
https://store.transportation.org/ punchings may be designed as 7.62 m, 3.81 m, 1.905 m
or 0.953 m (25’ 0”, 12’ 6”, 6’ 3”, 3’ 1½” respectively),
312.03 General – Steel traffic barriers shall consist of rail see SS Drawings, SP312-1 and SP312-2 for
sections fabricated for installation to develop continuous requirements.
beam strength with the necessary safety end assemblies. (e) Curved Rails – For curved rail data see SS Drawing
End assemblies shall be “Manual for Assessing Safety SP312-11.
Hardware (MASH)” certified. 312.04.02 Metal
All rail sections and other components shall match the (a) Properties – Properties of the base metal for beams and
design profiles, specifications and dimensions of the Task any transition section shall conform to the following
Force 13 requirements cited below, in part to ensure full requirements:
interchangeability of similar components regardless of the
source of manufacture. • Yield point minimum: 345 MPa

Unless otherwise specified, guardrails and posts and • Tensile strength minimum: 483 MPa
accessories shall be in accordance with SS Drawings • Elongation minimum in 50 mm: 12%

o 2020 312 1 of 12
Vol. 1 Page 210 of 470
SECTION 312 STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIERS

Note: End and buffer sections shall have a minimum (b) Coating generally shall be smooth, free of beading or
yield point of 227 MPa and a minimum tensile strength sharp projections at edges. Coating adherence shall
of 310 MPa. prevent the peeling of any portion of the zinc coating
so as to expose the base metal by cutting or prying with
(b) Sheet Thickness – Nominal and finished thicknesses
a stout knife under considerable pressure.
shall be in accordance with Table 312-A.
(c) Sheet Widths – Sheet Widths shall be minimum Table 312-A: Beam Thickness by Class – Base Metal
483 mm for W-Beams and 749 mm for Thrie-Beams and Finished Galvanized
both with a permissible tolerance of minus 3.2 mm.
Finished
312.04.03 Zinc Coating – The zinc used for the coating of
Galvanized
Type I and II sections shall be as prescribed in ASTM B6, Base Metal Beam
and shall be at least equal to the grade designated as “Prime Nominal Tolerance
Class Thickness
Western.” Thickness (mm)
(mm)
Steel galvanized before beam fabrication shall be coated in (mm)
Type Type
accordance with ASTM A653. Beams galvanized after
I II
fabrication shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
A123. In either case, the coating shall be firmly bonded to A 2.67 2.74 2.82 minus 0.23
the base metal after fabrication is complete. B 3.43 3.51 3.58 minus 0.25
The average mass of zinc coating Type I (AASHTO M 180) Note: Tolerance given is for under specified thickness;
shall be 610 g/m² for three specimens but the minimum is there is no limit for over thickness.
550 g/m² for any individual specimen. The average mass of
zinc coating Type II (AASHTO M 180) shall be 1220 g/m²
for three specimens but the minimum is 1100 g/m² for any 312.04.06 Testing – When required by the Ministry
individual specimen. The mass of coating is the total Representative, galvanizing testing shall be carried out
amount on both sides of the sheet or beam. according to ASTM A90 or AASHTO T 65 to determine the
312.04.04 Quality of Work – Beams shall be punched for mass of galvanizing in conformity with the requirements of
splice and post bolts in strict conformity with AASHTO SS 312.04.03. Alternatively, magnetic gauge determination
M 180 to the designated number, and centre to centre in accordance with ASTM E376 may be permitted by the
spacing, of posts. Ministry Representative.
Upon delivery the beams shall be ready for assembly and The testing of the mechanical properties of the base metal
installation. may be carried out by the Ministry Representative for
compliance with the requirements of SS 312.04.02.
Field cutting shall be avoided where practicable. Where
necessary, field cutting shall be performed with a cut-off or 312.04.07 Rejection and Retests – Should the beam tested
hack saw; field hole cutting shall be performed with a drill fail to meet the testing requirements specified above, two
and/or reamer. Flame or plasma cutting, or welding, shall additional beams as selected at random by the Ministry
not be permitted. Representative shall both meet the test requirements in
every respect, otherwise the complete lot represented by the
All field cuts or holes shall be deburred and treated with two samples will be subject to rejection.
heavy coats of zinc rich paint selected from the Ministry’s
Recognized Products List under the category of “Additional In the event of complete lot rejection and prior to any further
Paint Coatings – Zinc-Rich Touch-up Paints and Primers”. testing by the Ministry, the intended replacement lot shall
be satisfactorily tested by a mutually acceptable
Warped or otherwise deformed beams, and those with independent testing agency at no expense to the Ministry.
injurious defects or excessive roughness of the zinc coating
will be rejected. Rejected material shall be replaced at the Supplier’s or
Contractor’s expense, including shipping charges and
Beams for concave and/or convex curved installations with removal of rejected material at the construction site, if
a radius of 45 m or less shall be accurately and smoothly applicable.
bent in the shop with minimum deformity. The radius of
curvature shall be clearly stencilled on the back of each 312.05 Guardrail Accessories
curved rail section. 312.05.01 Transition Section – Transition sections for
312.04.05 Examination – Examination may include the W-Beam to Thrie-Beam shall be of matching metal
following: thickness and finish and be fabricated to the Task Force 13
design profile (TF13 Designation RWT01a-b or
(a) Dimension measurements for size and thickness all of RWT02a-b) to provide a smooth and uniform transition of
which shall be within the tolerances specified by beam widths and corrugations.
SS 312.04 and Table 312-A.

o 2020 312 2 of 12
Vol. 1 Page 211 of 470
SECTION 312 STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIERS

312.05.02 Terminal Connectors – For connections to • ASTM A36; or

bridge parapets, abutments and the like, TF13 Designation
RWE02b or RTE01b terminal connectors shall be used and • ASTM A992.
the finish shall be Type II. After the section is cut-to-length and all holes are
312.05.03 Back-up Plates – Back-up Plates are required drilled or punched, each guardrail post shall be hot dip
where steel beams between splices are to be installed to any galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
steel posts (standard 305 mm lengths) and shall be Any areas where the galvanizing is damaged during
fabricated of the stipulated lengths from the standard beam installation shall be touched up with two heavy coats of
section (as per TF13 Designation RWB01a or RTB01a). zinc rich paint selected from the Ministry’s Recognized
312.05.04 Fasteners and fittings – All fasteners and Products List under the category of “Additional Paint
fittings shall be in accordance with TF13 and shall be Coatings – Zinc-Rich Touch-up Paints and Primers”.
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 or ASTM A123 312.05.09 Steel Blockouts – Steel blockouts for modified
as appropriate. Thrie-beam guardrail shall be manufactured to any of the
312.05.05 Cable Assembly – Cable Assembly for following standards:
Breakaway Cable Terminal (BCT) installation shall consist
• AASHTO M 270 (ASTM A709), Grade 36 [250] or
of a swaged fitting, 25 mm diameter threaded stud, locking
Grade 50S [345S] without the supplementary
pin, nut and washer at each end of a cable of 19 mm nominal
requirements;
diameter, 6 x 19 wire strand core independent wire rope
core, galvanized, right regular lay wire rope with a • ASTM A36; or,
minimum breaking strength of 200 000 N (45,000 lb) and
conforming to AASHTO M 30 with the overall assembly • ASTM A992
length of 1980 mm developing a similar breaking strength After the section is cut and all holes are drilled or punched,
(TF13 Designation FCA01, FWC24a, and complete with the components shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance
plate washers, FPB01). with ASTM A123.
312.05.06 Anchor Plate – Anchor Plates for the breakaway Any areas where the galvanizing is damaged during
cable attachment to the steel beam for BCT assemblies shall installation shall be touched up with two heavy coats of zinc
be fabricated to the TF13 design profile (TF13 Designation rich paint selected from the Ministry’s Recognized Products
FPA01) from steel plate conforming to ASTM A36 and List under the category of “Additional Paint Coatings –
galvanized according to ASTM A123 after forming and Zinc-Rich Touch-up Paints and Primers”.
drilling for and including eight 16 mm diameter hexagonal-
head bolts 38 mm long each with nut and 3.0 mm thick plain Unless otherwise specified, the blockout type, size and
washer 44 mm outside diameter (TF13 Designation length shall be in accordance with TF13 Designation
FBX16a and FWC16a) complying with SS 312.05.04. PWB03, complete with connecting bolts and nuts
(FBX16a).
312.05.07 Anchor Inserts – Anchor inserts for fixing
terminal connector end sections to existing concrete shall be 312.06 Treated Wood Posts and Offset Blocks
as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Ministry 312.06.01 Rectangular Posts – Unless otherwise specified,
Representative. details shall be in accordance with SS Drawings SP 312-1,
312.05.08 Steel Posts SP 312-2 and SP 312-3. Rectangular posts and offset blocks
shall be Douglas Fir/Hemlock “No. 1”, Structural Posts and
(a) Concrete Installation – Installation of steel posts on
Timber, graded in conformity with the requirements of
concrete components and the transitions of the barrier
SS 909.
system to the concrete components shall be as shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Ministry Wanes on any face shall not exceed the following width,
Representative. being the minimum permissible post width less the portion
(b) Soil Embedment Installation – Unless otherwise entirely free of wane:
specified, details shall be in accordance with SS • Above grade (including blocks): 25 mm
Drawings SP 312-2, SP 312-3 and SP 312-4. Steel
posts shall be fabricated from standard structural steel • Below grade: 60 mm
H-beam that conforms to the latest version of any of the Posts and blocks shall be supplied in the exact lengths
following standards: specified and shall be rough-sawn or S4S dressed, nominal
• AASHTO M 270 (ASTM A709), Grade 36 [250] 200 mm x 150 mm, with dressed minimum dimension of
or Grade 50S [345S] without the supplementary 189 mm x 138 mm and a tolerance of plus 3 mm.
requirements;

o 2020 312 3 of 12
Vol. 1 Page 212 of 470
SECTION 312 STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIERS

312.06.02 Preservation Treatment – All required wood 312.08 Quality Assurance – The Ministry may implement
components shall be pressure treated in accordance with a Quality Assurance program to confirm compliance with
SS 908. the Contract. Without limitation, the QA activities may
include auditing the Contractor’s and fabricator’s Quality
The preservatives and retention of preservatives for all posts
Control program, inspection, and testing, all at the
and blocks shall conform to SS 908 from the classification
Ministry’s discretion.
use table under the heading of “Roadside guardrail posts and
other guardrail components”. All materials may be inspected by the Ministry before
shipment to the construction site, or at the construction site,
Treated wood shall also meet the requirements of SS 604 -
or both. The supplier or manufacturer shall provide the
Steel Traffic Barrier Construction.
necessary facilities to enable the Ministry Representative to
Ideally, all posts and blocks shall be pressure treated after expeditiously examine selected pieces or take specimen
being cut to the specified length. However, the buried end samples for testing from the material lot(s) clearly identified
of any post must be pressure treated in a treatment facility, for intended supply to the Ministry. Identification shall be
but the rest of the cuts may be field treated in accordance such that after inspection and testing the lot may be
with SS 908.07. subsequently identified for acceptance or rejection.
312.07 Quality Control – The Contractor shall be fully Inspection of material before shipment shall not preclude its
responsible for all Quality Control testing, inspection and subsequent rejection at the construction site if found to fail
documentation to achieve compliance with the Contract. any requirements of this specification.
The Contractor shall provide documented test results for the
materials to the Ministry Representative for review in
accordance with the Contract, and upon request.

o 2020 312 4 of 12
Vol. 1 Page 213 of 470
SECTION 312 STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIERS

o 2020 312 5 of 12
Vol. 1 Page 214 of 470
SECTION 312 STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIERS

o 2020 312 6 of 12
Vol. 1 Page 215 of 470
SECTION 312 STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIERS

o 2020 312 7 of 12
Vol. 1 Page 216 of 470
SECTION 312 STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIERS

o 2020 312 8 of 12
Vol. 1 Page 217 of 470
SECTION 312 STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIERS

o 2020 312 9 of 12
Vol. 1 Page 218 of 470
SECTION 312 STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIERS

o 2020 312 10 of 12
Vol. 1 Page 219 of 470
SECTION 312 STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIERS

o 2020 312 11 of 12
Vol. 1 Page 220 of 470
SECTION 312 STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIERS

o 2020 312 12 of 12
Vol. 1 Page 221 of 470
 SECTION 316

STEEL AND WIRE FENCE MATERIALS

316.01 Scope – This Section covers the quality and • Type B Standard Wire Fabric Fence
manufacture of wire fencing material, steel posts, gates and
hardware, and various accessory materials and the • Type C Standard Barbed Wire Fence
fabrication of steel tubular fencing for pedestrian and • Type D Chain Link Fence.
bicyclist applications.
Chain link fence protection on rock slopes and tentative
Treated wood fence posts are specified by SS 909. requirements for High-tensile Smooth-wire Fences are also
For convenience, chain link fabric necessary for protection included.
on rock slopes is included in this Section. 316.02 Applicable Documents – See Table 316-A.
The uses of materials specified in this Section are generally Note: Standards referred to in this Section are obtainable
indicated on Drawings of the SP741 series for construction from:
of fences and SS 207 for rock protection.
CGSB: Publishing and Depository Services
The types of Standard Wire fencing and Chain Link fabric Public Works and Government Services
for fencing and protection on rock slopes covered by this Canada
Section are designated as follows: Ottawa ON K1A 0S5
• Type A Special Wire Fabric Fence for use only on https://www.tpsgc-pwgsc.gc.ca/ongc-
railway rights-of-way cgsb/boutique-store-eng.html

Table 316-A: Documents Applicable for Reference

ASTM STANDARD
Specification title
(unless otherwise noted)
CAN/CGSB138.1-M Fabric for Chain Link Fence
CSA C83 Communication and Power Line Hardware [for Strain Age Embrittlement test]
Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and
A53
Seamless
Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron or Steel Articles with Zinc or
A90
Zinc-Alloy Coatings
A116 Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric
A121 Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed Wire
Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
A123
Products
A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
A370 Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
A1011 Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High
Strength
B6 Standard Specification for Zinc (Slab Zinc)
B117 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
B211 Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire
D2247 Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100 % Relative Humidity
E4 Standard Practices for Force Verification of Testing Machines
Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Fence
F1043
Framework
Standard Practice for Operating Open Flame Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of
G152
Nonmetallic Materials
Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Non-Metallic
G155
Materials

BC MoTI SS 2020 316 (1 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 222 of 470
SECTION 316 STEEL AND WIRE FENCE MATERIALS

316.03.05 Testing
ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
(a) Samples: Sufficient length of fabric to include at least
100 Barr Harbor Drive
three vertical stay wires shall be cut from each roll to
West Conshohocken, PA
be tested as required by SS 316.15 from which line wire
19428-2959
and stay wire specimens shall be taken for testing.
USA
http://www.astm.org/ (b) Diameter of coated wire: The average of two readings
taken at right angles to each other at random on
316.03 Type A & B Fence Fabrics – Fence fabric for
uniformly coated areas shall all be within the tolerance
railway and highway rights-of-way shall be manufactured
measurements specified in SS 316.03.02.
from good commercial quality galvanized steel wire in
general accordance with ASTM A116, but shall conform to (c) Strength: The tensile strength of three line wire
the requirements following and those listed in Table 316-B. specimens shall be tested in accordance with ASTM
A370 on a machine calibrated to ASTM E4 standards.
316.03.01 Styles – See Table 316-B. Length of fabric rolls
The tensile strengths shall meet the requirements of
shall be 101 m unless otherwise ordered.
SS 316.03.02.
Note: Other standard and specialty fabrics when specified
(d) Coating adhesion: Three line wire specimens shall be
shall meet the following general specifications.
wrapped in a close helix at least twice around a
316.03.02 Wire Size and Strength – All wire used in the cylindrical mandrel having a diameter four times the
fabric shall have a minimum galvanized coated nominal nominal diameter of the wire: wrapping speed shall not
diameter of 2.50 mm (12 1/2 ga.). The variation permitted exceed four seconds per turn. The coating shall adhere
from the measured nominal diameter shall be  0.1 mm. to the wire without flaking or being removed by
The minimum breaking force shall be 4250 N. rubbing with bare fingers.
316.03.03 Zinc Coating – The zinc used for coating shall (e) Coating mass: Three line wire specimens (from each
be any grade of zinc conforming to ASTM B6. All wire roll), each more than 400 mm in length, and three stay
shall have a uniform coating of zinc which shall adhere wire specimens of short lengths between knots, etc., but
firmly to the base metal. The average mass of zinc coating each specimen totalling more than 400 mm shall be
shall be 90 g/m2 of uncoated wire surface for three tested in accordance with ASTM A90 for conformity
specimens but minimum 80 g/m2 for any individual with the requirements of SS 316.03.03.
specimen. (f) Rejection and Retest: Refer to SS 316.16.
316.03.04 Quality of Work – Splicing of individual line 316.04 Type D Fence Chain Link Fabric – Chain link
wires by means of a wrap joint, electric butt weld or fence fabric shall be manufactured from good commercial
galvanized sleeve is permitted. quality galvanized steel wire (or other specified finish) in
The maximum number of line wire joints shall not exceed general accordance with CAN/CGSB-138.1M and shall
half of the number of line wires in any roll of fencing. conform to the requirements listed in SS 316.04.01 through
SS 316.04.04.
All joints shall be made in accordance with good work
practice. 316.04.01 Fabric Classification (according to CGSB
Standard) – The type, class, style and grade of chain link
All stay wires shall be properly spaced and substantially fence fabric shall be as specified on the Purchase Order,
perpendicular to the line wires. Work Order or Special Provisions in accordance with the
The locks or fastenings at the intersections of the Drawings and/or SS Drawings SP741-05.01 and
longitudinal and vertical wires of the woven wire fencing SP741-05.02, selected from the following or as may be
shall be of such construction as will prevent them from otherwise specified or approved.
slipping, either longitudinally or vertically. All locks and (a) Type/Class 1A – Zinc coated (galvanized) steel wire
fastenings shall be effectively galvanized. fabric normally will be specified for all heights of chain
Horizontal wires of all woven wire fencing shall be link fences as indicated on Drawing SP741-05.01,
provided with tension curves to accommodate temperature unless Type/Class 1B Vinyl coated steel is required for
changes after erection. authorized special installations.

Table 316-B: Styles of Fence

Fence Number of Fabric Height Stay Wire Wire Diameter

Fabric Style No.
Types Horizontal Wires (mm) Spacing (mm) (mm)
A 1047-6 10 1195 150 2.50 min.
B 939-6 9 990 150 2.50 min.

BC MoTI SS 2020 316 (2 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 223 of 470
 SECTION 316 STEEL AND WIRE FENCE MATERIALS

(b) Style – nominal diameter of zinc coated wire: Note: Typical (normal) ordering designation from above:
Type 1, Class A, Grade 1, Medium Style with roll width
• Heavy, for highway protection fence from rolling
(height), length, mesh size and quantity.
rock
316.04.03 Quality of Work – Fabric shall be of uniform
• Medium, for Standard and Security height fences
quality and condition, free from all defects and
• Light, for Residential height fences (see SS imperfections affecting serviceability and appearance.
Drawing SP741-05.01)
316.04.04 Testing
• See TABLE 316-C and Table 316-D.
(a) Samples: Three full height pickets shall be provided
(c) Grade – mass of zinc coating per unit area of uncoated from each roll as required by SS 316.15.
wire: Grade 1, average 490 g/m2 for three specimens,
(b) Diameter of coated wire: The average of two readings
minimum 440 g/m2 for any individual specimen. The
taken at right angles to each other at random on
zinc used for coating shall be any grade of zinc
uniformly coated portions of each pair of pickets
conforming to ASTM B6. All wire shall have a
between bends shall be within the tolerance
uniform coating of zinc which shall adhere firmly to the
measurement specified in SS 316.04.01(b).
base material.
(c) Strength: The tensile strength of three line wire
Note: When specified, Grade 2 heavy coating (average
specimens shall be tested in accordance to ASTM A370
610 g/m2, individual 550 g/m2 minimums) for corrosive
on a machine calibrated to ASTM E4 standards. The
environments and the zinc coating (average 90 g/m2,
tension applied to the undeformed portion between two
individual 80 g/m2 minimums) for vinyl coated wire and the
adjacent bends shall meet the requirements of
vinyl coating requirements shall be in accordance with
SS 316.04.01(b).
CAN/CGSB-138.1M.
(d) Coating adhesion: Three specimens of undeformed
316.04.02 Fabric Height, Length and Mesh – Wire shall
portions between two adjacent bends shall be wrapped
be woven throughout to a uniform diamond mesh 50 mm
in a close helix once around a cylindrical mandrel
 3.0 mm clear between parallel mesh wires: fabric height having a diameter four times the nominal diameter of
as specified  25 mm with both selvage edges twisted the wire: wrapping speed shall not exceed four seconds
and/or knuckled: per turn The coating shall adhere to the wire without
• fabric 1.5 m high and under: knuckled both edges flaking or being removed by rubbing with bare fingers.
• fabric 1.8 m high and over: knuckled one edge, (e) Coating mass: Three specimens (from each roll) each
and twisted the other more than 400 mm long excluding knuckled or twisted
ends shall be tested in accordance with ASTM A90 for
• Residential height fence light style fabric 1.0 m conformity with the requirements of SS 316.04.01(c).
and 1.2 m high: knuckled both edges.
(f) Rejection and Retest: Refer to SS 316.16.
Length of rolls with slack removed by nominal tensioning
shall be 100 m unless otherwise ordered. 316.05 Chain Link Fabric and Accessories on Rock
Slopes – Chain link fabric for protection on rock slopes shall

Table 316-C: Zinc Coated Wire

Zinc Coated Wire Breaking Force Minimum

Type 1A Style
Nominal Diameter (N)
Heavy 5.0 mm ± 0.1 mm 10 000
Medium 3.5 mm ± 0.1 mm 5 000
Light 3.0 mm ± 0.1 mm 3 600

Table 316-D: Vinyl Coated Zinc-Coated Wire (When Permitted)

Vinyl Coated Zinc-Coated Wire Breaking Force Minimum

Type 1B Style
Nominal Diameter (N)
Heavy 5.0 mm ± 0.1 mm 6 000
Medium 3.5 mm ± 0.1 mm 3 000
Light 3.0 mm ± 0.1 mm 2 600

BC MoTI SS 2020 316 (3 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 224 of 470
 SECTION 316 STEEL AND WIRE FENCE MATERIALS

be manufactured and tested in general conformity with (ii) Class 3 for use with Security height Type D Chain
SS 316.04 and to the following requirements: Link fences (see Drawing SP741-05.01); coating
shall be average 240 g/m2 and 215 g/m2 individual
• Fabric shall be to CAN/CGSB-138.1M designation of minimums.
wire woven to 75 mm diamond mesh in rolls 3.0 m
wide, knuckled on both selvage edges, and 15 m long. (d) Length: Spools shall be 400 m unless otherwise
See Table 316-E ordered.
Note: For corrosive conditions and environment Grade 2 – (e) Quality of Work: Splicing of individual strand wires
heavy galvanizing may be specified as a special order with by means of a wrap joint or an electric butt weld is
possible extended lead time required for delivery. permitted. Not more than three splices or joints shall
exist in any 400 m spool of barbed wire. Such splices
Table 316-E: Fabric Designation or joints shall be made in accordance with good work
Class A Nominal practice.
Type 1 Style
Grade 1 Diameter The twist in the double strand barbed wire shall be
uniform and continuous in one direction to lock the
zinc coated Light 3.0 mm
Steel barbs in place. The barbs shall be sharp and well
(galvanized) Medium 3.5 mm formed.
Wire strands showing nicks or indentures likely to
cause the wire to break under flexure are not
316.06 Barbed Wire – Barbed wire for Type B & C fences acceptable.
and for security height Type D fences shall be manufactured
from good quality galvanized steel wire in general (f) Testing
accordance with ASTM A121 but shall conform to the (i) Samples: Sufficient length of barbed wire shall be
following detail requirements: cut from each spool to be tested as required by
(a) Wire Size and Strength: The wire shall be SS 316.15.
continuously twisted double strand of 2.5 mm nominal (ii) Strength: The tensile strength of three line wire
diameter (12 1/2 ga.) and to have a minimum breaking specimens shall be tested in accordance to ASTM
force of 4000 N. A370 on a machine calibrated to ASTM E4
(b) Barbs: Four point barbs shall be of not less than standards. The tensile strength shall meet the
2.0 mm nominal diameter (14 ga.) and regular 150 mm requirements of SS 316.06(a).
maximum spacings.
(iii) Coating Mass: Three single wire specimens
(c) Zinc Coating Class (according to ASTM A121): The (from each spool), each aggregating more than
zinc used for coating shall be any grade of zinc 400 mm in length shall be tested in accordance
conforming to ASTM B6. All wire, including barbs, with ASTM A90 for conformity with the
shall have a uniform coating of zinc which shall adhere requirements of SS 316.06(c).
firmly to the base metal.
(iv) Rejection and Retest: Refer to SS 316.16.
The average mass of zinc coating per unit area of
Note: Smooth (barbless) galvanized wire, not specified
uncoated wire for three specimens and the minimum
to be "high-tensile," shall be double strand meeting all
for any individual specimens shall be in accordance
the above requirements except those for barbs.
with the class of coating as follows:
316.07 High-tensile Wire – Requirements for galvanized
(i) Class 1 for use in the construction of Type C
wire for high-tensile smooth-wire (no barbs) fencing are
fences and for the top strand of Type B fences (see
shown in Table 316-F.
Drawings SP741-01.01 and SP741-02.01); the
coating shall be average 90 g/m2 and 80 g/m2
individual minimums.

Table 316-F: Requirements for Galvanized Wire for High Tensile Smooth-Wire (No Barbs) Fencing

Diameter: 2.5 mm nominal diameter (12 ½ ga.)

Tensile Strength: between 1170 MPa and 1590 MPa (170,000 to 230,000 psi)
Breaking Force: in excess of 5800 N (1300 lbf)
Zinc Coating (Class 3): minimum 240 g/m2
Coil Length: in excess of 1200 m (approx. 100 lb.)

BC MoTI SS 2020 316 (4 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 225 of 470
 SECTION 316 STEEL AND WIRE FENCE MATERIALS

316.08 Brace, Tension and Tie Wire • Line post mass shall be not less than 1.9 kg/m and
angles 4.75 kg/m minimum, both drilled for
316.08.01 Brace Wires – Brace wire shall be manufactured
attaching barbed wire or a substantial number of
of good commercial quality soft temper steel wire 3.5 mm
fence fabric line wires with wire ties or clips.
nominal diameter gauge and zinc coated (galvanized)
normally minimum 80 g/m2 (Class 1 according to • Channel braces shall be 1.5 kg/m minimum.
ASTM A641) or as otherwise specified or approved.
316.10 Steel Pipe Posts, Rails and Braces – Chain Link
Brace wire for high-tensile smooth-wire fencing may be Fencing
fence wire specified in SS 316.07.
316.10.01 Category and Sizes – All posts, rails and braces
316.08.02 Tension Wire – Tension wire to secure bottom shall be of Category 1 or Category 2 at the discretion of the
of chain link fencing and at top where specified shall be supplier and shall be supplied in the nominal outside
manufactured of good commercial quality coil spring diameter as specified on the Purchase Order, Work Order or
crimped steel wire 5.0 mm nominal diameter gauge and Special Provisions in accordance with the Drawings and/or
zinc-coated (galvanized) normally 400 g/m2 (Class B Drawing SP741-05.02 and selected from Table 316-G or
according to ASTM A641) for Standard and Security height Table 316-H or as may be otherwise specified or approved.
fences, or as otherwise specified or approved. Residential
Note: Specifications or Purchase Order may permit thin
height fences tension wire shall be 3.5 mm nominal
wall tubing and consequent lower zinc coating for
diameter.
proprietary galvanized and vinyl coated residential fence
316.08.03 Tie Wire and Wire Hog Ring Clips – Tie wire posts and gates.
and wire hog ring clips shall be of steel of the nominal
Bolts and nuts for fastening braces to posts shall be
diameter gauge specified and zinc coated equivalent to that
galvanized Class D (305 g/m2 individual pipe posts, rails
specified for the relevant fencing fabric: Aluminum tie wire
and braces for chain link Type D fences shall be
shall be of specified gauge and according to ASTM B211.
manufactured in general accordance with ASTM A53.
316.09 Steel Fence Posts on Rock (Excluding Chain Link
(a) Category A – Category A posts, braces and rails shall
Fence) – Steel fence posts and braces for Type A, B and C
be steel butt weld pipe, Schedule 40, as specified by
fences where specified or required on exposed rock or rock
ASTM A53, except that the hydrostatic testing
with minimum over-burden shall be of good commercial
requirement is waived, and the minimum weight shall
quality steel conforming to either Category A or Category B
be no less than 95% of the nominal weight. Pipe shall
as specified in SS 316.10 with the following exceptions:
be zinc-coated in accordance with ASTM A53. This

Table 316-G: Requirements for Pipe Components

Actual Outside Post Diameter (mm) 26.7 33.4 42.1 48.3 60.3 73.0 88.9
Wall Thickness (mm) 2.87 3.38 3.56 3.68 3.91 5.16 5.49
Mass (kg/m) 1.7 2.5 3.4 4.0 5.4 8.6 11.3
Tolerances: Diameter ± 1% Mass ± 5%

Table 316-H: Requirements for Pipe Components for Chain Link Fencing – Category A

Pipe Sizes Nominal Outside Diameter (mm)

Residential Standard Security
Line Posts 42 48 60
End, Corner & Straining Posts 48 60 73
Gate Posts, gates 2.5 m and less 48 60 73
Gate Posts, gates over 2.5 m 48 73 89
Top Rails 33 33 42
Brace Rails -- 33 42

BC MoTI SS 2020 316 (5 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 226 of 470
SECTION 316 STEEL AND WIRE FENCE MATERIALS

ASTM Standard requires, among other things, an 316.10.02 Quality of Work – The finished pipes shall be
average zinc coating of 550 g/m2 and a minimum zinc reasonably free from injurious defects. All burrs at ends of
coating of 490 g/m2. pipes shall be removed.
(b) Category B – Category B posts, braces and rails shall The zinc or zinc/chromate/acrylic coating shall be free from
be made from steel pipes. The pipe shall be formed injurious defects and excessive roughness.
from steel strip conforming to ASTM A1011. The steel
316.10.03 Testing
in the formed pipe shall have a minimum yield strength
of 350 MPa (50,000 psi). The product of the yield (a) Samples: A 100 mm specimen shall be cut from each
strength and section modulus of the pipe shall be not end of one pipe in every lot of 500 or fraction thereof.
less than that of pipe meeting the requirements for
Note: Specimens may be taken from the extreme ends
Category A posts and rails.
of pipe that has been cut to length after galvanizing;
The outer surface of Category B posts, braces and rails otherwise, specimens shall be taken at least 200 mm
shall have all of the following protective coatings, clear of each galvanized end build-up.
applied in the following order:
(b) Dimensions: Specimens shall be measured for
(i) Hot dip zinc coating, conforming to ASTM B6, diameter and wall thickness/mass and all shall be
High Grade or Special High Grade, applied at an within the tolerance measurements specified by
average weight of 305 g/m2 (1.0 oz/ft2) and at a SS 316.10.01.
minimum weight of 275 g/m2 (0.9 oz/ft2), as
(c) Mass Coating: Specimens shall be tested for the mass
determined by the test method in ASTM A90.
of zinc or composite coating in accordance with
(ii) Chromate conversion coating, with a weight of SS 316.10.01 and ASTM A90.
30 micrograms/sq. in. 15 micrograms/sq.in., as
(d) Rejection and Retest: Refer to SS 316.16.
determined by a strip and weight method for the
zinc and chromate and by determining the 316.11 Gates and Hardware – Gates shall be supplied with
percentage of each by atomic absorption hardware ready for installation as specified by the Purchase
spectrophotometer. Order, Work Order or Special Provisions in accordance with
the Drawings and/or Drawings SP741-04.04, SP741-04.05,
(iii) Clear acrylic polyurethane coating with a thickness
SP741-05.03 and SP741-05.04 or as may be otherwise
of 0.100 mm  0.025 mm (0.4  0.1 mils). specified or ordered.
The combined outer coating shall have an ability to
Gates may be specified by the types as follows:
resist:
• Type I Pressed sheet steel frame, in-fill and brace
• 1000 hours of exposure to salt fog with a
members
maximum of 5% red rust when tested in
accordance with ASTM B117. • Type II Pipe frame and horizontal pipe in-fill
members
• 500 hours of exposure to 100% relative
humidity without blistering and peeling when • Type III Pipe frame, bracing and wire fabric in-fill
tested in accordance with ASTM D2247; and
• Type IV Pipe frame, bracing and chain link fabric
• 500 hours of exposure in a weatherometer in-fill
without film cracking of the clear coat when
tested in accordance with ASTM G152, • Type V Slip wire range gates barbed wire and
Type E or EH carbon arc, or ASTM G155, wood droppers
Type B or BH xenon arc. with the general requirements of material, finish, hardware
The inner surface of Category B, posts, braces and rails and quality of work specified in SS 316.11.01 through
shall have either a zinc coating as per ASTM F1043, SS 316.11.06.
Type B, applied at an average rate of 305 g/m2 and a 316.11.01 General – Gate sizes shall be the fence height or
minimum rate of 275 g/m2; or an ASTM F1043, as otherwise stipulated and the nominal width designated by
Type D zinc coating with a minimum zinc powder the clear opening width between gate posts with allowance
loading of 91% by weight and a minimum thickness of made for hinges and latches, etc.
0.075 mm (0.3 mils). The inner coating shall have an
ability to resist 650 hours of exposure to salt fog with a Gates shall be fabricated of galvanized pipe, tubing or
maximum 5% red rust when tested in accordance with formed sheet metal sections properly joined, braced and
ASTM B117. with in-fill all as specified by type below.
All pipe joints shall be cut to fit closely together and fully
welded, vertical stiles neatly capped or mitred to horizontals

BC MoTI SS 2020 316 (6 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 227 of 470
SECTION 316 STEEL AND WIRE FENCE MATERIALS

with drilled holes to vent and drain closed end pipe 316.11.04 Type III Gates (pipe and fabric) – Galvanized
members. Bends where permitted at corners shall be made pipe 33 mm OD, 2.5 kg/m mass with zinc coating minimum
without deforming tube or pipe section. 490 g/m2 (see SS 316.10.01 and SS 316.10.03) shall be
formed with even radius bent corners or neatly welded
All welds, conforming to the best commercial practice, shall
corners and vertical bracing at 1/3 points in the width of
be smooth, and with adjoining and other marred galvanized
27 mm OD, 1.7 kg/m pipe. Cleats or gussets shall be
pipe surfaces, shall be painted with two heavy coats of zinc
welded to opposite corners of gate frame/panel(s) as
rich paint selected from the Ministry’s Recognized Products
indicated on SS Drawing SP741-04.05, holed for securing
List under the category of “Additional Paint Coatings –
under tension a diagonal brace consisting of 5.0 mm
Zinc-Rich Touch-up Paints and Primers”.
nominal diameter galvanized coil spring wire (see
All hardware and required fittings and fasteners shall be of SS 316.08) with or without forged turn-buckle as and when
suitable aluminum alloy or of steel or malleable or ductile specified or ordered.
cast iron, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.
In-fill shall be wire fabric all of 3.5 mm galvanized diameter
Hinges generally shall be so designed as to permit the gate
wire with seven or more horizontal line wires, and stay
to swing back against the fence and to prevent the easy
wires not more than 600 mm apart. Fabric shall be securely
removal of gate and hinges. Hinges and other fittings shall
fixed taut without sag to gate frame all round and to vertical
all be of adequate strength for fastening securely without
brace in an approved manner.
distortion and shall be sound and free of defects. Chain
and/or latching gate catch for padlocking together with Nominal sizes:
keepers to hold the gate open and centre drop bolt and sleeve
• 3050, 3660, 4270, 4880 and 5490 mm wide; and
for double swing gates shall be provided as and where
specified or ordered. • 1070 and 1220 mm high.
All galvanizing and other finished surfaces shall be smooth Gates shall be supplied completely assembled with required
and free of sharp dangerous protrusions. hardware for wood (or metal) gate posts all as specified or
ordered.
316.11.02 Type I Gate (sheet metal members) – Formed
heavy duty galvanized sheet metal sections with rolled 316.11.05 Type IV Gates (pipe and chain link) – Gate
edges as horizontal rails and vertical stiles, braced vertically frame and required vertical bracing and/or diagonal bracing
and/or diagonally with similar members as necessary shall to cleats all welded as generally indicated on SS Drawing
be rigidly riveted together to form a rugged non-sagging SP741-05.04 for hinged swing gates shall be fabricated to
prefabricated gate. the designated size(s) complete with chain link in-fill and
hardware for fixing to metal posts all as detailed, specified
Nominal sizes:
or ordered.
• 1220, 2440, 3050, 3660, 4270 and 4880 mm wide;
Pipe shall be in accordance with SS 316.10 and welding
and
with SS 316.11.01. In-fill of chain link fabric as specified
• 1220 mm high. for fencing (see SS 316.04), shall be attached to gate frame
stiles with tension bars and bands (see SS 316.12), and to
Gates to be supplied completely assembled with required
horizontal members and vertical bracing with tie wire (see
hardware for wood (or metal) gate posts all as specified or
SS 316.08.03), all taut and sag free.
ordered.
Sliding gates may be specified for gate openings over 4.0 m
316.11.03 Type II Gates (all pipe) – Galvanized pipe
and shall be fabricated as generally indicated for swing
42 mm OD, 3.4 kg/m mass with zinc coating minimum
gates but with diagonal tension rod bracing to support centre
490 g/m2 (see SS 316.10.01 and SS 316.10.03) shall be
from both ends. The rolling hardware shall hold the gate
welded together as gate frame and horizontal pipe in-fill
vertical and parallel to the gate posts and adjoining fence at
members at 305 mm on centres. Vertical centre bracing of
all times to allow free operation from any position while not
5 mm x 19 mm flat bar on both sides of all horizontals is not
retained by latches or keepers.
required for gates 3050 mm and 3660 mm nominal widths.
Gussets shall be welded to opposite corners of the gate as Roller assembly sheaves and wheels with bearings, grease
shown on Drawing SP741-04.05. fittings, necessary clamps, supports and fasteners, and chain
and/or latching gate catch for padlocking, all of approved
Nominal sizes:
design, shall be provided as and when specified or ordered.
• 3050, 3660, 4270 and 4880 mm wide; and
316.11.06 Type V Gates (range slip wire) – Barbed wire
• 1220 mm high. continued across standard width gate opening (for possible
future farm gate) with 50 mm diameter full fence height
Gates shall be supplied completely assembled with required
treated wood droppers securely figure of eight wire tied and
hardware for wood (or metal) gate posts all as specified o
stapled to each line wire shall be provided with a galvanized
ordered.

BC MoTI SS 2020 316 (7 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 228 of 470
SECTION 316 STEEL AND WIRE FENCE MATERIALS

steel strap loop at bottom and either similar loop at top with (i) Tensioning Devices for individual in-line high-tensile
an intermediate chain (for padlocking) or, when specified, a wire will be "Hayes" or other acceptable manufacture
Princeton or other approved cinch-up lockable latch device and operation.
all for securely attaching to fence or gate posts to hold
(j) Mechanical Splices and Fasteners shall be of
open-end dropper.
"Nicopress FW2-3" or other acceptable manufacture
316.12 Accessory Material – All required fittings, applicable to the respective diameter and tensile
fasteners, hardware and accessories shall be of suitable strengths of wires.
aluminum alloy or steel, malleable or ductile cast iron, and
316.13 Packaging and Marking – Each roll of fencing
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153, or as may be
fabric or chain link mesh and spool of wire shall be tightly
otherwise specified and/or ordered.
rolled and firmly tied to prevent loosening during shipment
(a) Staples for securing wire and fabric to treated wood and handling.
fence posts shall be nominal 3.5 mm diameter steel
Posts shall be securely fastened in bundles or sets, and
wire with a driving length of at least 45 mm heavy
accessories packaged in cartons or other suitable containers,
galvanized finish.
to prevent loss or damage during shipment and handling.
(b) Hog ring clips for securing wire fabric and/or barbed
Each product, roll, bundle or container etc., shall be clearly
wire of Type A, B and C Fences to steel posts and to
marked with the name, brand and/or trade mark of the
tension wire of Type D Fences see SS 316.08.03.
manufacturer; the heat or lot number and other information
(c) Dowel, Spikes, Bolts and Nuts shall be of good sufficient to identify the style, type, class, grade, finish,
commercial quality, galvanized where specified or height and/or length, nominal or outside diameter, gauge
ordered. and the applicable Standard to which the product conforms.
(d) Metal Droppers for high-tensile fencing will be 316.14 Inspection – No material shall be shipped prior to
prefabricated "Waratah" or other acceptable galvanized inspection or until a release for shipment has been issued by
formed sheet metal droppers, 1070 mm for 5-wire and the Ministry Representative.
1170 mm long for 6-wire fences, with preformed wire
All material may be inspected before shipment to the
clips: such metal droppers or other acceptable
construction site or at the construction site, or both. The
manufacture may be specified or permitted as an
Supplier or manufacturer shall provide the necessary
alternative to the wood droppers specified by
facilities to enable the Ministry Representative to
SS 909.08 for barbed wire (Type C) fences.
expeditiously examine selected pieces from the material
Note: Galvanized twisted double wire fence stays are lot(s) clearly identified for intended supply to the Ministry.
permitted only for the extension of normal fence Identification shall be such that after inspection and testing
heights to deer height and the like. the lot(s) may be subsequently identified for acceptance or
rejection.
(e) All terminal and tensioning posts, for Type D chain link
fences, shall be provided with aluminum or galvanized Inspection of material before shipment shall not exclude its
weather tight caps to fit and fasten securely and with subsequent rejection at the construction site if found to fail
extended arms for engaging barbed wire of security any requirements of this specification.
fences.
316.15 Sampling – One roll of fabric or spool of wire, in
(f) Caps for line posts for Type D chain link fences, shall every lot of 50 or fraction thereof, in the shipment may be
carry top rail. Rail and brace end caps shall be provided selected at random for testing but in no case will less than
for securing to rails and bolting with steel bands to two samples be tested.
posts.
Specimens for testing will be required from the outside ends
(g) Tension Bars for securing chain link fencing to terminal of the selected sample roll or spool material and both ends
and tensioning posts and to vertical stiles of gates of of one post in every 500 or fraction thereof.
Type D Fences shall be merchant quality mild steel
Sufficient length of each roll, spool or pipe shall be taken to
strip 5 mm x 19 mm in minimum lengths of 50 mm less
provide the number of specimens for each of the testing
than full height of the chain link fabric, hot dip
requirements specified.
galvanized.
Wire used for knots, knuckling, twisting and wraps and wire
(h) Tension and Brace Bands for securing brace and top rail
containing welds shall be excluded from tests.
caps and tension bars to posts shall be formed of
minimum 2.5 mm x 19 mm mild steel strip, hot dip See respective material tests for pertinent sample lengths.
galvanized complete with bolt and nut.
316.16 Rejection and Retests – If any tested specimen fails
to meet the testing requirements specified above, the roll,
spool or pipe represented by the specimens shall be replaced

BC MoTI SS 2020 316 (8 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 229 of 470
SECTION 316 STEEL AND WIRE FENCE MATERIALS

with two additional rolls, spools or pipes selected by the accordance with the requirements of the BC Supplement to
Ministry Representative and both shall meet the test TAC Geometric Design Guide, the Drawings and the details
requirements in every respect, otherwise the complete lot provided on SP741-07.01 and SP741-07.02. All steelwork
represented by the samples will be subject to rejection. shall be fabricated in accordance with SS 422. All field
welded railing connections shall conform to the
In the event of complete lot rejection and prior to any further
requirements of SS 422.
testing by the Ministry, the intended replacement lot(s) shall
be satisfactorily tested by a mutually acceptable If the ‘swaged’ detail shown on SP741-07.03 is proposed as
independent testing agency at no expense to the Ministry: an alternative, the Contractor shall provide the Ministry
where the time delay for retesting is unacceptable to the Representative with satisfactory test results from an
Ministry the order or part thereof will be subject to accredited testing agency for the following test procedures:
cancellation.
• Flattening test in accordance with ASTM A370
Rejected material shall be replaced at the Supplier's or
Contractor's expense including shipping charges and • Whole body tensile test in accordance with
removal of rejected material at the construction site, if ASTM A370
applicable. • Strain age embrittlement test in accordance with
316.17 Steel Sidewalk Fence – Steel pedestrian and CSA C83 @-45ºC
bicyclist sidewalk fence material shall be installed in

BC MoTI SS 2020 316 (9 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 230 of 470
 SECTION 317

P.E. PLASTIC DRAINAGE PIPE

DESCRIPTION 317.03 Definitions: For the purpose of this specification the

following definitions apply.
317.01 Scope – This specification covers the requirements
for polyethylene plastic pipe products to be used for storm 317.03.01 Polyethylene Plastic – A plastic based on
sewers, pipe culverts, and subdrains. This specification polymers made with ethylene as essentially the sole
covers non-pressure polyethylene plastic pipe with nominal monomer.
pipe diameters of 100 mm through to 900 mm. Larger pipe
317.03.02 Corrugated Inner Wall Pipe – A single walled
from 900 mm up to 1500 mm will be engineered (type,
pipe product with a corrugated inner waterway where the
location application, backfill) as specified in the Special
wall is formed into a series of alternating ridges and
Provisions.
grooves.
317.02 Applicable Documents – This specification refers
317.03.03 Profile – A pipe wall construction that presents
to the following Standards, specifications or publications:
an essentially smooth surface in the waterway but includes
Canadian Standards Association (CSA): ribs or other shapes, which can be either solid or hollow,
that help brace the pipe against diametrical deformation.
B182.8: Profile Polyethylene (PE) Storm Sewer and
Drainage Pipe and Fittings. (For nominal pipe 317.03.04 Open Profile Pipe – A pipe product that has an
diameters of 100 mm through to 900 mm.) essentially smooth waterway braced circumferentially or
helically with outside corrugations, forming an open profile
(Available only as part of the CSA B1800
pipe.
Thermoplastic Non-Pressure Piping
Compendium) 317.03.05 Closed Profile Pipe – A pipe that has a smooth
waterway wall braced circumferentially or helically with
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):
corrugations, ribs, or other shapes that are joined integrally
D883: Standard Terminology Relating to Plastics by an essentially smooth outer wall.
D2122: Standard Test Method for Determining 317.03.06 Certification Body – An independent third party
Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings agency, accredited by the Standards Council of Canada to
confirm that a pipe manufacturer:
D2412: Standard Test Method for Determination of
External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by (a) Produces pipe products to the quality and requirements
Parallel-Plate Loading of an accepted CSA standard; and
D2444: Standard Test Method for the Determination of (b) Has the mandate to certify the pipe products produced.
Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and
317.03.07 Certified – Pipe products that have been marked
Fittings by means of a Tup (Falling Weight)
with a certification body’s logo confirming that the
D3212: Specifications for Joints for Drain and sewer production of the pipe product is in accordance with the
plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals quality and requirements of CSA B182.8.
D3350: Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic 317.04 Pipe Types and Materials – The pipe, fittings and
Pipe and Fittings Materials couplers shall be manufactured from virgin polyethylene
plastic, in accordance with the specifications listed in
F667: Standard Specification for 3 Through 24 in.
Table 317-A for the types and profiles of pipe.
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings
317.05 Joining Systems
American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 317.05.01 Flexible Subdrain Tubing – Couplings shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM F667.
M 252: Standard Specification for Corrugated
Polyethylene Drainage Pipe. For nominal pipe 317.05.02 Flexible Culvert – Couplings shall conform to
diameter from 75 mm through to 250 mm. AASHTO M 252 or AASHTO M 294 Type C or CP.
M 294: Standard Specification for Corrugated 317.05.03 Smooth Inner Wall Culvert or Storm Sewer –
Polyethylene Pipe. 300 to 1500 mm (12 to 60-in.) Joining system for open profile pipe shall conform to the
Diameter. requirements of CSA B182.8. Couplings shall be specified
as non-gasketed corrugated external split couplings, or
integral bell and gasket. Non-gasketed double bell snap

BC MoTI SS 2020 317 (1 of 3)

Vol. 1 Page 231 of 470
SECTION 317 P.E. PLASTIC DRAINAGE PIPE

type couplings are only permitted for 100 mm to 200 mm (b) Flexible Culvert – 210 kPa at 5% when tested in
diameters. accordance with ASTM D2412.
Integral bell and gasket joint shall be comprised of an (c) Smooth Inner Wall Culvert or Storm Sewer –
elastomeric vulcanized rubber gasket provided on the spigot 320 kPa at 5% when tested in accordance with ASTM
end of the pipe residing in the corrugation valley or crest of D2412. Pipe stiffness shall be documented on the Plant
the corrugation. Joint shall be certified by CSA to meet Certificate by a CSA accredited body for the
leakage requirements of ASTM D3212. appropriate pipe diameters.
Foam type gaskets shall not be permitted. 317.07 Markings – All pipes shall be clearly marked in
accordance with CSA B182.8, at intervals of no more than
Table 317-A: Polyethylene (P.E.) Plastic Drain Pipe & 1.5 m with 5 mm or larger letters with the following
Fittings Specifications information:
• Manufacturer’s name or trademark
Type Profile Specification
(See Note 1) • Nominal diameter
Flexible • Material designation and cell class: 322420C
Corrugated
Subdrain ASTM F667.
Inner Wall • The words “Drainage” or similar
Tubing
Flexible Corrugated AASHTO M 252 or • Pipe stiffness (i.e. 320 kPa)
Culvert Inner Wall AASHTO M 294. • The applicable Specification designation (i.e. CSA
Smooth Inner B182.8)
Open or CSA B182.8 for
Wall Culvert or
Closed profile pipe. • Date of manufacture and plant designation
Storm Sewer
Note (1): Clean, rework PE material generated from the • Logo of accepted CSA third party Certified
manufacturer’s own production of pipe, fittings, or Agency
accessories shall be permitted to be recycled by the For Smooth Inner Wall Culvert or Storm Sewer, the pipe
manufacturer in the respective product, provided that the shall be embossed with the CSA Trademark of accepted
pipe, fittings, or accessories produced meet all of the third party confirming the product is certified by the
requirements of the respective standards. Post-consumer Canadian Standards Council (CSC).
recycled plastic resin shall not be used as a component of
the HDPE compound during pipe manufacture. 317.08 Quality Assurance Testing
317.08.01 Supplier Quality Control – The supplier shall
develop and maintain an effective Quality Control system
317.06 Requirements to ensure that adequate inspection coverage is maintained
317.06.01 Quality of Work – The pipe shall be throughout the manufacturing process. Evidence of such
homogenous throughout and free from visible cracks, flaws, inspection shall be available to the authorized inspector of
foreign inclusions or other injurious defects. The pipe shall the Ministry prior to shipment from the place of
be uniform in colour, opacity and other physical properties manufacture or the supplier’s storage facility.
317.06.02 Pipe Diameter 317.08.02 Ministry Surveillance – The Ministry reserves
the right to maintain surveillance over the Supplier’s
(a) Nominal Diameter – The average inside diameter Quality Control system to ensure conformance with this
rounded to the nearest whole number (mm). specification.
(b) Inside Diameter – The permissible inside diameter 317.09 Physical Properties – The physical properties of
tolerances shall be +3% and –1.5%. Measurements corrugated HDPE pipe such as impact strength, pipe
shall be taken in accordance with ASTM D2122. flattening and other tests shall meet these requirements for:
317.06.03 Length – Laying length for flexible culvert; 317.09.01 Flexible Subdrain Tubing –ASTM F667
smooth inner wall culvert; or storm sewer shall be 6 m for
all diameters otherwise specified on the Purchase Order, or 317.09.02 Flexible Culvert – AASHTO M 252 or
Work Order or Drawings. A tolerance of ± 25 mm on the AASHTO M 294
nominal laying length will be permitted. 317.09.03 Smooth Inner Wall Culvert or Storm Sewer –
317.06.04 Pipe Stiffness – The minimum pipe stiffness Certified to CSA B182.8 for profile pipe.
shall be:
(a) Flexible Subdrain Tubing – 210 kPa at 5% when
tested in accordance with ASTM D2412.

BC MoTI SS 2020 317 (2 of 3)

Vol. 1 Page 232 of 470
SECTION 317 P.E. PLASTIC DRAINAGE PIPE

317.10 Certificate 317.11.02 Inspection – Inspection may include checks on

physical dimensions and general quality of work.
317.10.01 Flexible Subdrain Tubing and Flexible
Culvert – Suppliers shall provide a certificate upon request 317.11.03 Sampling – For the purpose of sampling for
from the Ministry Representative to indicate that the SS 317.06 and SS 317.09, one piece from each lot of 50
product was produced and tested according to the pipes or fraction thereof in a shipment shall be selected for
appropriate specification requirements. sampling. All test specimens shall be cut from the selected
pipe(s).
317.10.02 Smooth Inner Wall Culvert or Storm Sewer –
The supplier shall provide, upon request from the Ministry 317.11.04 Failed Sample – If the test sample fails to meet
Representative, a copy of the CSA certificate of compliance the requirements of SS 317.06 when tested in accordance
issued by a CSA accredited certification body confirming with SS 317.09, that batch will be rejected and shall be
that the manufacturer produces certified polyethylene replaced by the supplier with a new batch that conforms to
plastic pipe products and indicating plant locations, pipe this Specification at no additional cost to the Ministry.
sizes, pipe stiffness and pipe joining systems.
317.11.05 Acceptance – Pipes shall be made available for
317.11 Inspection inspection and acceptance at the point and time of
incorporation into the Work.
317.11.01 Ministry Access – The Ministry Representative
shall have access to the fabrication plant for inspection and
every facility shall be extended for this purpose.

BC MoTI SS 2020 317 (3 of 3)

Vol. 1 Page 233 of 470
 SECTION 318

PVC PLASTIC DRAINAGE PIPE

DESCRIPTION F794: Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings
318.01 Scope – This Section covers the requirements and
Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.
methods for testing for:
• Type PSM* Poly Vinyl Chloride Drainage Pipe
MATERIALS
• Profile Poly Vinyl Chloride Drainage Pipe
318.03 Materials – The pipe shall be made of PVC plastic
and the perforation requirements of type PSM pipe up to a
having a cell classification of 12454, or 12364, as defined
nominal diameter of 375 mm.
in ASTM D1784.
Note: The term PSM* is not an abbreviation but rather an arbitrary
designation for a product having certain outside dimensions. The fittings shall be made of PVC plastic and shall have a
cell classification of 12454, or 13343, as defined in ASTM
318.02 Applicable Documents – This Section refers to the D1784.
following standards, specifications and publications.
Elastomeric gaskets shall comply with the requirements of
Canadian Standards Association (CSA): ASTM F477.
B182.2 PSM Type Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe 318.04 Quality of Work – The pipe shall be homogenous
and Fittings throughout and free from visible cracks, flaws, foreign
B182.4: Profile Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and inclusion, or other injurious defects. The pipe shall be
Fittings uniform in colour, opacity and other physical properties.
(The above are available only as part of the CSA B1800 318.05 Joining System – All sizes of pipe shall be supplied
Thermoplastic Non-Pressure Piping Compendium) with Elastomeric Gasket Joints providing a watertight seal
in accordance with ASTM D3034 and ASTM D3212.
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):
318.05.01 Gasket Compression – Integral Bell Gasketed
D883: Standard Terminology Relating to Plastics Joints shall be designed so that when assembled, the gasket
D1784: Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl shall be compressed radially on the pipe spigot or in the bell
Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated to form a watertight seal.
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) 318.05.02 Gasket Displacement – The joint shall be
D2122: Standard Method of Determining Dimensions of designed to avoid displacement of the gasket, when
Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings assembled in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendation.
D2152: Standard Test Method for Adequacy of Fusion of
Extruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and 318.05.02 Joint Assembly – Joint assembly shall be in
Molded Fittings by Acetone Immersion accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations.

D2412: Standard Test Method for Determination of Note: Manufacturers wishing to supply pipe joining
External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by systems other than those listed under this specification shall
Parallel-Plate Loading submit details to the Ministry Representative for approval
prior to the awarding of the contract.
D2444: Standard Test Practice for Determination of the
Impact Resistance of Thermo-plastic Pipe and 318.06 Requirements
Fittings by Means of a Tup (Falling Weight) 318.06.01 Length – Laying length shall be 4 m or 6 m for
D3034: Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl all diameters unless otherwise specified by the Purchase
Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings Order, Work Order or Drawings. A tolerance of  25 mm
on the nominal laying length will be permitted.
D3212: Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and
Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric 318.06.02 Type PSM, PVC Drainage Pipe Dimensions –
Seals The average outside diameter and the minimum wall
thickness of Type PSM PVC drainage pipe shall be as
F412: Standard Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping specified in Table 318-A when measured in accordance
Systems with ASTM D2122.
F477: Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals
(Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

BC MoTI SS 2020 318 (1 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 234 of 470
SECTION 318 PVC PLASTIC DRAINAGE PIPE

318.06.03 Profile PVC Drainage Pipe Dimensions – The 318.06.04 Perforations – Perforated pipe up to the nominal
average inside diameter and minimum wall thickness of diameter of 37.5 mm shall be type PSM and perforated in
Profile PVC drainage pipe shall be as specified in accordance with Figure 318-1 and Table 318-C.
Table 318-B when measured in accordance with ASTM
The perforations shall be 8 mm to 10 mm in diameter,
D2122.
circular, and cleanly cut. The gasketed bell and spigot end
of the pipe shall be unperforated for a length equal to the
depth of the socket and/or shoulder.
Table 318-A: Pipe Dimensions – Type PSM

Outside Diameter (mm)

Nominal Minimum Wall
Average Tolerance Minimum Maximum
Diameter (mm) Thickness
100 107.06  0.22 106.84 107.28 3.06
150 159.38  0.28 159.10 159.66 4.55
200 213.36  0.30 213.06 213.66 6.10
250 266.70  0.38 266.32 267.08 7.62
300 317.50  0.46 317.04 317.96 9.07
375 388.62  0.58 388.04 389.20 11.10
450 475.00  0.70 474.30 475.70 13.57
525 560.00  0.85 559.15 560.85 16.00
600 630.00  0.95 629.05 630.95 18.00
675 710.00  1.05 708.95 711.05 20.29

Table 318-B: Pipe Dimensions – Profile

Inside Diameter (mm)

Minimum
Nominal
Waterway
Diameter Average Tolerance Minimum Maximum Dual Wall
Wall
(mm)
Thickness
450 448.31  1.41 446.90 449.72 2.13 3.30
525 527.05  1.50 525.55 528.55 2.41 4.06
600 596.90  1.78 595.12 598.68 2.79 4.58
675 673.10  2.00 671.10 675.10 3.05 5.20
750 749.30  2.30 747.00 751.60 3.3 5.96
900 901.70  2.70 899.00 904.40 3.94 7.36
1000 1003.30  3.00 1000.30 1006.30 5.08 8.26
1200 1206.50  3.55 1202.95 1210.95 5.08 10.16

BC MoTI SS 2020 318 (2 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 235 of 470
SECTION 318 PVC PLASTIC DRAINAGE PIPE

Table 318-C: Perforation Requirements

Nominal Diameter Minimum Rows of Horizontal Hole H* L**

(mm) Perforations Spacing (mm) (mm)* (mm)
100 2 75 ± 5 30 65
150 4 75 ± 5 70 73
200 4 75 ± 5 93 130
250 4 75 ± 5 115 163
300 6 150 ± 5 140 195
375 - 1200 6 150 ± 5 175 240
*H: maximum height of the centreline of the uppermost perforations above the Invert.
**L: minimum length of the unperforated inner surface at the bottom of the pipe.

Figure 318-1: Perforated Pipe Cross Section 318.08 Physical Properties

318.08.01 Impact Strength – The minimum drop weight
impact strength for pipe shall meet the requirements of
Table 318-D when tested in accordance with SS 318.10.01.
318.08.02 Pipe Stiffness – The minimum pipe stiffness
when tested in accordance with SS 318.10.02 and ASTM
D2412 shall be 320 kPa.
318.08.03 Pipe Flattening – There shall be no evidence of
splitting, cracking or breaking when the pipe is tested in
accordance with SS 318.10.03.
318.08.04 Extrusion Quality – The pipe shall not flake or
disintegrate when tested in accordance with ASTM D2152.

Table 318-D: Impact Strength at 0ºC

Nominal
joules ft. / lb.
Diameter (mm)
100 135 100
150 165 122
200 175 129
250 190 140
318.07 Service Connections (and or Branches)
300 205 151
318.07.01 Type PSM
375 230 170
(a) Injection Molded PVC Gasketed Fittings meeting
ASTM D3034 and certified to CSA B182.2. 450 and larger 250 184
(b) Fabricated PVC Gasketed Fittings meeting ASTM
D3034 and certified to CSA B182.2. 318.09 Marking – All pipe shall be clearly marked at
(c) Insertable Tees complete with rubber boot. intervals of no more than 1.5 m with 5 mm or larger letters
with the following information:
318.07.02 Profile
• Manufacturer's name or trademark
(a) Fabricated PVC Gasketed Fitting meeting ASTM F794
and Certified to CSA B182.4 • Nominal diameter
(b) Insertable Tees complete with rubber boot. • Material designation and cell class: PVC-12454 or
12364

BC MoTI SS 2020 318 (3 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 236 of 470
SECTION 318 PVC PLASTIC DRAINAGE PIPE

• The word "Drainage" or similar compression is completed within two to five minutes.
Remove the load and examine the specimen. All three
• The class: PS320
specimens shall meet the requirements.
• The applicable specification designation (ASTM
318.10.04 Pipe Dimensions – Measurements shall be taken
D3034 or ASTM F794)
in accordance with ASTM D2122.
• Date of manufacture and plant designation
318.11 Inspection
The marking on perforated pipe shall be 180º from a point
318.11.01Access – The Ministry shall have access to the
equidistant between the bottom row of holes as shown in
fabrication plant for inspection and every facility shall be
and Table 318-C.
extended for this purpose. For materials manufactured
318.10 Test Methods outside of British Columbia, SS 145.15.02 also applies.
318.10.01 Impact Resistance – Five specimens, each 318.11.02 Inspection – Inspection may include checks on
nominally 150 mm long for the PSM pipe and 300 mm long physical dimensions and the quality of work.
for the Profile pipe, shall be tested in accordance with
318.11.03 Sampling – For the purpose of sampling for
ASTM D2444, using a 15 kg Tup "A" and the flat plate
SS 318.08 and SS 318.10, one pipe from each lot of 50 pipes
holder "B". The height of the drop shall not be less than
or fraction thereof in a shipment shall be selected for
600 mm or more than 3 m. The test shall be performed at
sampling. All test specimens shall be cut from the selected
0ºC ( 0.5ºC), allowing no more than 15 seconds to pipe(s).
complete the test after removing the sample from the
conditioning medium. Perforated samples shall be 318.11.04 Failed Sample – If a test sample fails to meet the
positioned as shown in . requirements of SS 318.10 when tested according to
SS 318.10, that batch will be rejected and shall be replaced
Any cracking or other signs of material fatigue evident after by the Supplier with a new batch that conforms to this
the test shall constitute a failure. specification at no additional cost to the Ministry.
If all five (5) specimens pass, the lot is acceptable. 318.11.05 Acceptance – Pipes shall be made available for
If one specimen fails, five more specimens shall be tested. inspection and acceptance at the point and time of
incorporation into the Work.
If two or more specimens in the initial five (5) fail, or if any
specimen in the second five (5) fails, the entire lot is 318.12 Quality Assurance
rejected. 318.12.01 Supplier Quality Control – The Supplier shall
318.10.02 Pipe Stiffness – The pipe stiffness shall be develop and maintain an effective Quality Control system
determined at 5% deflection of the initial inside diameter in to ensure that adequate inspection coverage is maintained
accordance with ASTM D2412. Three specimens, each throughout the manufacturing process. Evidence of such
with a length equal to one pipe diameter shall be tested; all inspection shall be available to the authorized inspector of
shall meet the required stiffness. Perforated samples shall the Ministry prior to shipment from the place of
be positioned as shown in Figure 1. manufacture or from the Supplier’s storage facility.
318.10.03 Pipe Flattening – Three specimens, each 318.12.02 Ministry Surveillance – The Ministry reserves
nominally 150 mm long, shall be flattened between parallel the right to maintain surveillance over the Supplier's Quality
plates in a suitable press until the distance between the Control system to ensure conformance with this
plates is 40% of the original nominal diameter of the pipe. Specification.
The loading rate shall be uniform and such that the

BC MoTI SS 2020 318 (4 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 237 of 470
 SECTION 320

CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE

DESCRIPTION 320.02.02 Plant Certification – All CSP and SPCSP shall

be supplied from a manufacturing plant certified to
320.01 General – This Section covers the material and
CSA G401.
fabrication requirements for corrugated steel pipe, spiral rib
pipe, and structural plate corrugated steel pipe products for The certification shall be performed by a 3 rd party agency
applications such as culverts, storm sewers, sanitary sewers, accredited by the Standards Council of Canada. Certified
subdrains, ground recharge systems, well casings, CSP and SPCSP shall be marked according to CSA G401
underpasses, stream enclosures, shelters, and tunnels. markings, along with the logo of the 3rd party certification
body.
Abbreviations for the various types of steel pipe are as
follows: The manufacturer’s plant certificate documentation shall be
made available to the Ministry upon request. This
CSP Corrugated Steel Pipe means Galvanized,
specification is available from CSA.
Aluminized Type II and Polymer Laminated
corrugated steel pipe with helical corrugations, 320.06 Quality of Work
fabricated from coiled steel sheet, with continuous
320.06.01 Ministry Inspection – Products shall be made
helical seam.
available for inspection and acceptance by the Ministry at
SPCSP Structural Plate Corrugated Steel Pipe means hot- the point and time of incorporation into the Work.
rolled sheets or plates that are corrugated, curved
320.06.02 Quality Management – The manufacturer shall
to radius, custom hot-dip galvanized or has a
establish the Quality Control plan and demonstrate its
thermoplastic copolymer coating, assembled, and
implementation. The Contractor’s Quality Management
bolted together to form pipes, pipe-arches, and
Plan shall incorporate Quality Assurance testing measures
other shapes. This includes DCSP Deep
to assure the quality of the materials supplied by the
Corrugated Structural Plate (Type I, II, III).
manufacturer meet this Specification.
320.02 Supply and Fabrication
320.06.03 Contractor Quality Assurance Testing –
320.02.01 Standards – The supply and fabrication of Minimum Quality Assurance (QA) tests and inspection, to
Corrugated Steel Pipe (CSP) and Structural Plate be performed by the Contractor, shall be per Table 320-A
Corrugated Steel Pipe (SPCSP) including couplers and (next page).
appurtenances shall be in accordance with CSA G401.

BC MoTI SS 2020 320 (1 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 238 of 470
SECTION 320 CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE

Table 320-A: Contractor Quality Assurance Testing

Minimum Contractor Quality Assurance

Element Description CSA G401 Clause No.
Testing / Inspection Frequencies

Demonstration For each Designated Supplier (for over

Manufacturer’s QC 7
of effectiveness $200,000): Once per Contract
Material Mill Certificate One (1) per Contract 4.2.3; 4.3.3; 9.3; 4.1.2
One (1) per Contract and one additional per 4.5.1.2.4; 4.5.2.2.4; 4.5.3.2.4
Mill Markings
load of material delivered 4.2.3, 4.3.3
CSP: Table 3
Fabrication Thickness One (1) per Contract per product
SPCSP: Table 4
Visual each piece, plus measurements of one CSP: 5.1.1.2.1, 5.1.1.2.3,
Corrugation
(1) per Contract and one (1) additional per load Figure 4 and Table 6
profile
of material delivered SPCSP: 5.2.2.2 and Figure 12
Circumference One (1) per Contract per product CSP: Tables 6, 7, 10, 11
Lock seam For Contracts with 10 or more pieces supplied:
5.1.3.4
strength One (1) per Contract
Perforation size One (1) per shipment 5.1.5
Coating Type Visual, each pipe or plate
For each material coating specified: One (1)
Thickness per Contract and one additional per load of 4.5
material delivered
Staining or
Visual, each piece 8.2
Damage
Damage Repair Each 6
Couplers Type Visual, each piece 5.1.7
Drawing and
SPCSP Plate Each installation 5.2.7
Identification

BC MoTI SS 2020 320 (2 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 239 of 470
 SECTION 321

TRAFFIC MARKING PAINT AND SPECIAL MARKINGS

DESCRIPTION
321.01 Scope – This Section applies to the supply and 321.03 General Requirements – The composition and
application of Traffic Marking Paint and Special Markings consistency of the Paint will be at the discretion of the
on concrete or asphalt roadway surfaces under the manufacturer. Paint shall be supplied in white or yellow
jurisdiction of the Ministry within the Province of British colours accepted by the Ministry without any "pre-mix"
Columbia. Traffic Marking Paint (Paint) and Special beads. Application of Paint shall include an overlay of glass
Markings (Special Markings) shall be used with accepted reflectrorized beads.
overlay glass reflectorized beads.
Special Markings shall have reflective characteristics to
321.02 Reference Specifications – The test methods, meet Ministry requirements. Paint and Special Markings
practices, and specifications listed in Table 321-A are products shall meet Environment Canada’s Federal
applicable to the Work: Regulations on VOC’s limits.
Special Markings material and application requirements
Table 321-A: Applicable Specifications shall be identified in the Special Provisions.

ASTM Test Traffic Marking Paint shall be supplied from traffic paint
Title of Test products listed on the BC Ministry of Transportation and
Designation
Infrastructure Recognized Products List, or as identified in
Standard Test Method for Consistency the Special Provisions.
of Paints Measuring Krebs Unit (KU)
D562 Special Marking Materials shall be supplied from the BC
Viscosity Using a Stormer-Type
Viscometer Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure Recognized
Products List or as identified in the Special Provisions.
Standard Test Method for No-Pick-Up
D711 The BC Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure
Time of Traffic Paint
Recognized Product List is available on-line at:
Standard Practice for Determination of
D868 http://www.th.gov.bc.ca/publications/eng_publications/
Degree of Bleeding of Traffic Paint
geotech/Recognized_Products_Book.pdf
Standard Practice for Evaluating Degree
D913
of Traffic Marking Line Wear
Standard Test Method for Laboratory MATERIALS
D969 Determination of Degree of Bleeding of
321.04 Material Requirements – Paint and glass beads
Traffic Paint
shall comply with the following:
Standard Test Method for
D4061 321.04.01 Consistency – 85  5 Krebs units in accordance
Retroreflectance of Horizontal Coatings
with test method ASTM D562.
Standard Specification for Color of
D6628 321.04.02 Drying Time – Maximum 30 minutes at 21ºC at
Pavement Marking Materials
50-60% relative humidity in accordance with test method
Standard Practice for Evaluating ASTM D711.
Retroreflective Pavement Markings
D7585 321.04.03 Bleeding – The Paint shall have a degree of
Using Portable Hand-Operated
Instruments resistance to bleeding of seven or greater in accordance with
test method ASTM D868 or ASTM D969.
Standard Test Method for Measurement
of Retroreflective Pavement Marking 321.04.04 Road Service Life – Paint shall have acceptable
E1710 Materials with CEN-Prescribed properties for general appearance, durability and night
Geometry Using a Portable visibility. Acceptable properties are defined as being equal
Retroreflectometer to or better than those obtained by Paints currently
“Qualified or Accepted” by the Ministry through Ministry
SAE Test Title of Test product testing or other jurisdiction testing acceptable by
Designation the Ministry Representative.
SAE AMS- Standard Colors Used in U.S.
STD-595A Government Procurement

BC MoTI SS 2020 321 (1 of 5)

Vol. 1 Page 240 of 470
SECTION 321 TRAFFIC MARKING PAINT AND SPECIAL MARKINGS

321.04.05 Night-time Retroreflectance – Paint shall meet PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS

retroreflectance as per ASTM D7585 with the exceptions as
321.06 Performance Specifications
identified within this Specification and the Ministry’s
Pavement Marking Contract. Retroreflectance shall be 321.06.01 Longitudinal Pavement Markings – The
measured in accordance to ASTM E1710. Contractor shall:
321.04.06Application Characteristics (a) Layout all, with no additional payment, Longitudinal
Pavement Markings as identified on the Drawings or
(a) The degree of settling shall be such that the Paint can
existing pavement markings in accordance with the
be readily re-mixed to a uniform consistency and there
Ministry’s “Manual of Standard Traffic Signs and
shall be no skinning. Paint shall not have marked
Pavement Markings” or as instructed by the Ministry
thixotropic properties.
Representative.
(b) Paint shall be capable of being sufficiently atomized to
(b) Paint Longitudinal Pavement Markings on New
produce a uniformly applied line 100 mm in width with
Pavement Projects as follows:
absence of side splatter, overspray, or cobwebbing
within the limits imposed by the application equipment (i) Apply an initial application of Longitudinal
used on the Contractor’s line striping machines. Pavement Markings at a wet thickness of not less
than 10 mils; then after curing;
(c) Paint shall be capable of being successfully applied to
at least 2 km of dash line without the necessity of (ii) Apply a second application, with no additional
making adjustments to any machine settings and payment, in accordance with the paint
without showing any evidence of distortion of the spray manufacturer’s suggested application interval.
pattern or appreciable build up of paint in the spray gun The wet thickness shall not be less than 15 mils
tips. regardless of product used; and
321.04.07 Colour – In accordance to ASTM D6628: (iii) The wet thickness of all Longitudinal Pavement
Markings will be applied uniformly.
(a) White Paint shall comply with SAE AMS-STD-595A
White 17886. (c) Ensure all Longitudinal Pavement Markings have well
defined edges and are free of tire tracking, with no
(b) Yellow Paint shall comply with SAE AMS-STD-595A
splatter, excessive overspray or other defects;
Yellow 33538
(d) Ensure Longitudinal Pavement Markings are straight,
(c) Yellow Paint shall conform to the a-b colour box for
or of uniform curvature, and conform with the
traffic Paint using the L*a*b colour coordinate system.
alignment;
321.04.08 Retroreflectance – Retroreflectance shall be in
(e) Ensure the following dimensional criteria are met:
accordance with ASTM D4061.
(i) Longitudinal Pavement Markings do not exceed a
321.04.09 Glass Beads – Glass reflectorized beads shall be
dimensional width of 110 mm for specified
added during the spraying of Paint in accordance with the
100 mm wide line. No tolerance below 100 mm is
glass beads manufacturer’s recommended application
allowed for the specified 100 mm line;
requirements.
(ii) Longitudinal Pavement Markings do not exceed a
Glass beads shall be supplied from glass bead products
dimensional width of 210 mm for specified
listed on BC Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure
200 mm wide line. No tolerance below 200 mm is
Recognized Products List.
allowed for the specified 200 mm line;
321.05 Traffic Markings: Paint shall be applied in the
(iii) The distance between the lines for Double Solid
manner as required under the Work requirements. Types of
and Simultaneous Solid and Broken do not exceed
Paint lines shall be identified by the Ministry in accordance
a dimensional separation of 110 mm. No tolerance
to the “Manual of Standard Traffic Signs and Pavement
below 100 mm is allowed;
Markings,” Fig. 7.1. Ministry publications are available on-
line at: (iv) Longitudinal Pavement Marking Broken Lines do
not exceed a maximum dimensional length
http://www.th.gov.bc.ca/publications/eng_publications/eng
deviation of ±100 mm for the specified length; and
_pubs.htm#signing
(v) No spaces between Broken Lines exceed a
Special Markings shall be laid out and identified in the
maximum dimensional length deviation of
Special Provisions.
±100 mm from the specified length of space.
(f) Apply glass beads immediately following the final
Paint application. Glass beads are to be applied on all

BC MoTI SS 2020 321 (2 of 5)

Vol. 1 Page 241 of 470
SECTION 321 TRAFFIC MARKING PAINT AND SPECIAL MARKINGS

Longitudinal Pavement Markings at a uniform (b) Layout and Paint all new Transverse, Chevron and
application rate as required by the glass bead Crosshatch Pavement Markings in accordance with the
Manufacture. Ministry’s “Manual of Standard Traffic Signs and
Pavement Markings” or as instructed by the Ministry
(g) Ensure:
Representative;
(i) Retroreflectance properties of not less than
(c) Apply Paint to Transverse, Chevron and Crosshatch
200 millicandela·m-2·lux-1 for White Paint under
Pavement Markings at a wet thickness of not less than
dry conditions are achieved on all Longitudinal
16 mils. This may be done in several coats as long as
Pavement Markings for at least 30 days from the
underlying coats are cured prior to overcoating;
time of application;
(d) Ensure all Transverse, Chevron and Crosshatch
(ii) Retroreflectance properties of not less than
Pavement Markings are free of tire tracking, with no
150 millicandela·m-2·lux-1 for Yellow Paint under
splatter, excessive overspray or other defects;
dry conditions are achieved on all Longitudinal
Pavement Markings for at least 30 days from the (e) Ensure the ends of all Chevrons and Crosshatching are
time of application; within 50 mm of the centre of the intersecting
longitudinal line;
(iii) Retroreflectance properties of not less than
150 millicandela·m-2·lux-1 for White Paint under (f) Ensure all Transverse, Chevron and Crosshatch
dry conditions are achieved from time of Pavement Markings have well defined edges and are
application to October 15th of the calendar year in free of horizontal fluctuations;
which the line was painted;
(g) Apply glass beads immediately following the final
(iv) Retroreflectance properties of not less than Paint application. Glass beads are to be applied on all
100 millicandela·m-2·lux-1 for Yellow Paint under Transverse, Chevron and Crosshatch Pavement
dry conditions are achieved from time of Markings at a uniform application rate as required by
application to October 15th of the calendar year in the glass bead manufacturer; and
which the line was painted;
(h) Ensure:
(v) All durability testing is in accordance with ASTM
(i) Retroreflectance properties of not less than
D913;
200 millicandela·m-2·lux-1 for White Paint under
(vi) The condition of Longitudinal Pavement Markings dry conditions are achieved on all Transverse,
meet the minimum of photographic reference Chevron and Crosshatch Pavement Markings for at
standard No. 8 (Film 97 percent Intact) Chipping least 30 days from the time of application;
ASTM D913 from time of application to October
(ii) Retroreflectance properties of not less than
15th of the calendar year in which the line was
150 millicandela·m-2·lux-1 for Yellow Paint under
painted. Longitudinal Pavement Markings that do
dry conditions are achieved on all Transverse,
not meet this criteria must be repainted
Chevron and Crosshatch Pavement Markings for at
immediately upon detection or as directed by the
least 30 days from the time of application,
Ministry Representative; and
(iii) All durability testing is in accordance with
(vii) The condition of Longitudinal Pavement Markings
ASTM D913;
must meet the minimum of photographic reference
standard of No. 4 (Film 77 percent Intact) (iv) The condition of Transverse, Chevron and
Chipping ASTM D913 on January 15th of the Crosshatch Pavement Markings meet the
subsequent year to which the line was painted. minimum of photographic reference standard
No. 8 (Film 97 per cent Intact) Chipping ASTM
321.06.02 Transverse, Chevron and Crosshatch
D913 from time of application to October 15th of
Pavement Markings – The Contractor shall:
the calendar year in which the marking was
(a) Repaint the Transverse, Chevron and Crosshatch painted. Transverse, Chevron and Crosshatch
Pavement Markings, with no additional payment, as Pavement Markings that do not meet these criteria
identified on the Drawings or existing pavement must be repainted immediately upon detection or
markings to conform to the Ministry’s “Manual of as directed by the Ministry Representative; and
Standard Traffic Signs and Pavement Markings.” The
(v) The condition of Transverse, Chevron and
Ministry Representative shall be contacted about any
Crosshatch Pavement Markings meet the
existing Transverse, Chevron and Crosshatch
minimum of photographic reference standard
Pavement Markings that do not conform to the
No. 4 (Film 77 percent Intact) Chipping
Ministry’s “Manual of Standard Traffic Signs and
ASTM D913 from time of application to June 15th
Pavement Markings” prior to proceeding with the
repainting;

BC MoTI SS 2020 321 (3 of 5)

Vol. 1 Page 242 of 470
SECTION 321 TRAFFIC MARKING PAINT AND SPECIAL MARKINGS

of the subsequent year in which the marking was manufacturer’s instructions for operation and procedures
painted. and will be made only by competent staff.
321.07 Quality Assurance – This section establishes how Sampling will be made using a sample size of 20 test point
the pavement markings will be accepted or not accepted for measurements at 5 m intervals on a single line, tabulated as
conformance to the Specifications. an average with standard deviation and percent relative
standard deviation, and minimum/maximum values.
Once per day that pavement markings are being laid, a
minimum of two test sites are to be selected. The selected All measurements and related data will be retained by the
test sites must be representative of the line type sprayed on Contractor in an electronic format approved by the Ministry
the pavement surface of that day (e.g., if 90% of the Representative and will be submitted to the Ministry
accomplishment of the day was centreline, than the Representative on request.
expectation is that the test sites will be on centreline; if 50%
321.07.03 Test Report – A test report shall be produced for
of the accomplishment was on centreline and 50% was on
each checkpoint area and will include the following
lane line, then the expectation would be that there would be
information:
a test site on each line type).
(a) Test date;
321.07.01 Testing – The following tests must be performed
and recorded per test site for that day: (b) Average of the readings at each test location, expressed
as millicandelas per square metre per lux
(a) Paint Colour – Testing for conformance shall be made
(mcd·m−2·lx−1); the average of the readings will be
by visual comparison to a standard colour card
reported for each traffic direction for centrelines;
provided by the Paint manufacturer that certifies colour
compliance with this specification. (c) Geographical location of the test site, referenced by
offsets from LKI/RFI landmarks;
(b) Dimensions – Longitudinal Pavement Markings shall
be measured and documented for conformance with the (d) Identification of the pavement marking material tested:
Pavement Marking Specifications. type, colour, date painted, and transverse location on
road (line type);
(c) Night-time Retroreflectance – Retroreflectance will
be measured as per ASTM D7585 and ASTM E1710, (e) Identification of the instrument used;
notwithstanding the following exceptions contrary to
(f) Value and date of standardization of the instrument
ASTM D7585:
standard panel used;
(i) Contrary to Section 6.2.1.4 and 6.2.2.4 of the
ASTM D7585, checkpoint areas will be as per test (g) Remarks concerning the overall condition of the line,
such as rubber skid marks, carryover of asphalt, snow
sites;
plow damage, and other factors that may affect the
(ii) Contrary to Section 6.2.1.4 and 6.2.2.4 of the retroreflectance measurement;
ASTM D7585, all measurements made within a
single checkpoint area may be averaged and (h) Ambient temperature; and
recorded as an average. Any average of the (i) Operator’s name.
readings that do not meet these Pavement Marking
Specifications will be determined as unacceptable 321.07.04 Thickness and Consistency – Longitudinal,
work; and, Transverse, Chevron, and Crosshatch Pavement Markings
shall have a sufficiently thick cross section throughout their
(iii) Contrary to Section 5.1 of the ASTM D7585, entire length and width, and completely cover the intended
testing for Retroreflectance will be carried out only area being marked. Pavement markings will be tested as per
when the newly painted surface is clean, dry, free ASTM D913. Newly applied pavement markings must
of all excess beads, and after 24 hours of Paint exceed the photographic reference standard of 97%.
being applied.
321.07.05 Daytime visibility – When viewed dry or wet in
(d) Longitudinal Pavement Markings – shall have a the daytime, the pavement markings shall be readily visible
minimum initial coefficient of retroreflective for a forward distance of 150 m, or as far forward as
luminance as indicated in these Pavement Marking possible until obstructed by the road geometry if less than
Specifications. 150 m.
321.07.02 Night-time Retroreflectance Measurements – Daytime visibility will be assessed visually. Where it is not
All measurements for night-time retroreflectance will be clear that the specification is met, the distance will be
made using calibrated equipment, capable of measuring measured.
retroreflectance in accordance with the applicable
standards, as approved in writing by the Ministry. 321.07.06 Durability – Longitudinal, Transverse, Chevron,
Measurements will be made using the retroreflectometer and Crosshatch Pavement Markings shall be visually

BC MoTI SS 2020 321 (4 of 5)

Vol. 1 Page 243 of 470
SECTION 321 TRAFFIC MARKING PAINT AND SPECIAL MARKINGS

assessed for conformance with this Specification using The Ministry may conduct tests as deemed necessary to
ASTM D913. identify the Paint supplied is the same as the Paint submitted
for qualification.
321.07.07 Test Site and Acceptance or Rejection – A test
site is defined as a site where the above six tests have been PAYMENT
performed in a single location. If two or more line types are
321.08 General – Payment for Traffic Marking Paint and
applied per day that pavement markings are being laid, it
Special Markings will be made at the Traffic Marking
may be necessary to perform relevant tests for each line type
Pavement and Special Markings contract price or per line
at more than one location.
km as itemized in the Special Provisions Schedule 7,
A failure of any one of the six above components will inclusive for supply and application of Traffic Marking
constitute a failure for that site and will be considered Paint, layout of traffic lines, glass beads, and Special
unacceptable work. Markings, costs associated with quality control, material
supply, application, related material manufacturer’s
321.07.08 Quality Control – All Quality Control records
requirements and costs for surface preparation.
shall be retained by the Contractor and made available to the
Ministry Representative upon request.

BC MoTI SS 2020 321 (5 of 5)

Vol. 1 Page 244 of 470
 SECTION 407

FOUNDATION EXCAVATION

407.01 Scope – This Section covers foundation excavation as unsuitable. In the case where backfill is to be with Bridge
for structures including, but not limited to, excavation for End Fill, the provisions of SS 202.23 shall apply.
abutments, piers, walls, and bridge end fills, as specified
Drainage course material shall be installed as shown on the
herein, and shall apply generally to all structures other than
Drawings. The gradation of the drainage course materials
those where it distinctly states that the prices bid are
shall be as specified in Table 407-A.
inclusive of excavation.
Table 407-A: Drainage Course Material Gradation
407.02 Excavation – All materials shall be removed as
necessary for the construction of foundations or other SIEVE SIZE % PASSING BY MASS
works. Foundation excavations shall not be larger than is (mm) OF TOTAL SAMPLE
reasonably necessary. Excavations and adjacent highways
and other facilities shall be protected as necessary by 40 100
barricades, shoring, dykes and/or cofferdams.
Excavations shall be constructed in compliance with the 20 0 – 100
Workers Compensation Act and the Occupational Health
and Safety Regulation. 10 0
407.03 Description of Material Types – Material types
will be as defined in SS 201.11.
407.06 Measurement and Payment – Payment for
No distinction shall be made between wet and dry foundation excavation will be made at the Unit Price per
excavation. cubic meter bid for the material types as identified in
407.04 Preparation of Foundations – Care shall be taken SS 407.03. Payment shall include excavation, shoring,
not to disturb the bottom of the excavation. If the bottom of barricades, backfilling to the original ground contours with
the excavation is disturbed in material other than rock, the suitable material, compaction of the material, compaction
Contractor shall remove and dispose of all disturbed tests and Quality Control. No payment will be made for
material and shall replace it with material meeting the removal and replacement of material disturbed by the
material, placement and compaction requirements of Contractor below the required depth of excavation.
SS 201.40 Bridge End Fill. If the bottom of the excavation Payment shall cover the supply and placement of gravel
is disturbed in rock, the Contractor shall remove and dispose drainage courses, filter cloth and drain pipes, and joint
of all disturbed material and shall replace it with a concrete waterproofing membranes if shown on the Drawings. If
sub-footing, as directed by the Ministry Representative. applicable, payment shall also cover restoration of roadway
gravel and pavement damaged by the Contractor's
Where concrete is to be placed on rock, the rock surfaces operations. Where there is an excess of excavated materials
shall be clean and free from any loose materials. or excavated materials are deemed unsuitable by the
The bottom of the excavation shall be capable of providing Ministry Representative, payment shall cover loading,
a competent foundation and may require confirmation by hauling and disposal of such materials.
the Ministry Representative prior to further works. Where, Excavated materials, which the Ministry Representative
in the opinion of the Ministry Representative, the bottom of deems unsuitable for backfill, will be replaced with suitable
an excavation is not competent, the Ministry Representative material by the Contactor and paid for as Extra Work.
may direct the Contractor to excavate deeper. The Ministry
Representative may direct replacement of the incompetent Excavation volumes for footings and box culverts shall be
material with material meeting the material, placement and calculated based on the bottom of the excavations as shown
compaction requirements of SS 201.40 Bridge End Fill or on the Drawings or directed by the Ministry Representative
with a concrete sub-footing. and vertical planes 600 mm beyond the edges of the
structures. No payment will be made for material removed
Unless underwater concreting is approved by the Ministry, outside of these boundaries.
excavations for concrete structures shall be dewatered, if
necessary, so that concrete is placed in the dry. No allowance shall be made for excavation of manholes or
catch basins.
407.05 Backfilling – After the structures are sufficiently
built, excavations shall be backfilled to the original ground In the case of excavation for bridge end fill, payment will
contours with excavated material, as directed by the be made for material removed to the neat lines as shown on
Ministry Representative, unless this material is designated the Drawings and shall cover loading, hauling and disposal
of such material.

BC MoTI SS 2020 407 (1 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 245 of 470
SECTION 407 FOUNDATION EXCAVATION

Progress payments will be made as indicated in Table 407-B: Progress Payment Breakdown
Table 407-B.Table 407-B: Progress Payment Breakdown
Work Type A Type D
Excavation 80% 60%
Backfilling and
20% 40%
Disposal

BC MoTI SS 2020 407 (2 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 246 of 470
 SECTION 412

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

DESCRIPTION
Table 412-A: Requirements for Uncoated Reinforcing
412.01 Scope – This Section describes the supply, Steel
fabrication and installation of reinforcing for concrete
structures. Test
Standard Test Method / Procedure
Designation
The requirements of CSA-S6, “Canadian Highway Bridge
Design Code” and the Ministry “Bridge Standards and Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel
Procedure Manual – Supplement to CHBDC S6” shall apply ASTM
Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement,
unless specified otherwise herein or in the Contract. A1064
Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
For items not covered by CSA-S6, “Canadian Highway CSA Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete
Bridge Design Code” and the Ministry “Bridge Standards G30.18 Reinforcement
and Procedure Manual – Supplement to CHBDC S6” or the
Contract, CSA A23.1 shall apply.
412.11.02 Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel – Epoxy-
References to standards shall be to the current editions at
coated reinforcing steel bars shall conform to the
time of tendering.
requirements of ASTM A775 and D3963. Application
plants shall be certified under the Concrete Reinforcing
Steel Institute (CRSI) Voluntary Certification Program for
MATERIALS
Fusion-Bonded Epoxy-Coating Applicator Plants, and
412.11 General – All reinforcing bars shall be deformed proof of certification shall be submitted to the Ministry
unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Representative. All epoxy-coated bars shall be clearly
The type and grade required shall be as specified on the labelled with the name of the manufacturer, the primer and
Purchase Order, Work Order, Drawings or Special the coating system used and the date of production. The
Provisions. method of labelling shall be determined by the applicator
plants and test certificates of performance of epoxy coated
Unless specified otherwise, wire ties for reinforcing steel bars shall be submitted to the Ministry Representative.
shall be minimum 1.6 mm diameter.
Further to paragraph 9.2 of ASTM D3963, the identification
Two copies of mill certificates giving chemical and physical marks on all epoxy coated reinforcing bars shall be
properties of the reinforcing steel shall be furnished to the maintained from the point of delivery until they are
Ministry Representative. incorporated into the structure.
The identification of reinforcing bars shall be maintained The Ministry Representative may require samples of epoxy
throughout the fabrication, coating (if required) and resin and epoxy patching material for acceptance testing as
shipping processes to the installation on the job. called for in ASTM A775. The Ministry Representative
The Contractor shall, as part of the Quality Control may require tests of coated bars as called for in ASTM
program, have random samples (selected by the Ministry A775.
Representative) of reinforcing steel, of all material types Wire ties for epoxy coated reinforcing bars shall be epoxy
and surface treatments, tested for bending and tension. Two coated .
samples shall be taken of each material type, size and grade
of bar used in the Work. Testing shall be in accordance with 412.11.03 Galvanized Reinforcing Steel – Hot dipped
CSA G30.18 unless otherwise specified. Testing shall be galvanized reinforcing bars shall conform to the
performed by an approved testing agency. requirements of ASTM A767M – Class II Coating.

412.11.01 Uncoated Reinforcing Steel – Concrete Only CSA G30.18 Grade W bars shall be galvanized.
reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of the All bent bars shall be heat treated for stress relief prior to
ASTM and CSA Standards shown in Table 412-A, as galvanizing. Stress relief shall be at a temperature from
applicable. 480°C to 560°C for 1 hour per 25 mm of bar diameter as per
Wire ties for uncoated reinforcing steel shall be annealed ASTM A-767M.
steel wire. Galvanized reinforcing bars shall not be placed in contact
with uncoated reinforcing bars.
Wire ties for galvanized reinforcing steel shall be zinc
coated or stainless steel.

BC MoTI SS 2020 412 (1 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 247 of 470
SECTION 412 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

412.11.04 Fibre Reinforced Polymer (FRP) – FRP Table 412-B: Types of Stainless Steel
bars, grids and tendons shall be manufactured and qualified
in accordance with CSA S807. Unified Numbering
ASTM
Type System (UNS)
The FRP supplier shall provide test data from an Designation
Designation
independent third party testing lab that demonstrates the
material conforms to the specification. 316 LN A955 S31653
Ties for FRP bar shall be plastic or nylon. DUPLEX 2205 A955 S31803
412.11.05 Low-carbon, Chromium, Steel Reinforcing DUPLEX 2304 * S32304
Bar – Low carbon, chromium reinforcing bar and spirals
shall conform to ASTM A1035, Type CS, grade 100 * Chemical composition shall be within the ranges
(690 MPa). Nominal dimensions, unit masses and identified in Table 1 (Typical Composition %) of and in
deformation requirements for Imperial bar sizes shall conformance to the requirements of ASTM A276. The
conform to ASTM A1035. dimensioning and mechanical properties shall be in
conformance with ASTM A955.
Unless otherwise specified, only one type or grade of low-
carbon, chromium, reinforcing steel shall be supplied for
use throughout the project. CONSTRUCTION
Wire ties for low carbon, chromium reinforcing bar shall 412.31 Bending – Reinforcement bars shall be cut and bent
meet the requirements for tie wire for stainless steel to the shapes shown on the Drawings. Bending shall be
reinforcing bar. sufficiently accurate that the placing tolerances (specified in
412.11.06 Stainless Steel Reinforcing Bar– Stainless SS 412.33.01) can be met. All bars shall be bent cold,
steel reinforcing bars and spirals shall conform to ASTM unless otherwise permitted. Bars partially embedded in
A276 and ASTM A955, minimum Grade 420, except as concrete shall not be field bent except as shown on the
noted. Nominal dimensions, unit masses and deformation Drawings or where specifically permitted.
requirements for Imperial bar sizes shall conform to ASTM
A955. Field bending of galvanized steel reinforcing bar and fibre
reinforced polymer reinforcing bar is not allowed.
Stainless steel reinforcing bars shall be of a stainless steel
type specified in Table 412-B. Field bending of stainless steel reinforcing bar is only
Unless otherwise specified, only one type of stainless allowed upon prior written approval from the Ministry’s
reinforcing steel shall be supplied for use throughout the Representative. Stainless steel reinforcement shall only be
Work. bent using equipment specifically designed for that purpose.
Stainless steel reinforcing bars shall be hot-rolled, de-scaled 412.31.01 Hooks and Bend Dimensions – Unless
and pickled to the required mechanical properties and otherwise shown on the Drawings, hooks shall have the
dimensions. following dimensions:
Stainless steel reinforcing bars shall be free of deposits of • 180° bend plus extension of at least 4 bar diameters, but
iron and non-stainless steel. not less than 60 mm.
Fabrication of stainless steel reinforcing bars shall be such • 90° bend plus extension of at least 12 bar diameters.
that the bar surfaces are not contaminated with deposits of
iron and non stainless steel and that the surfaces are not • for stirrups and ties only, either a 90° or a 135° bend
damaged due to straightening from coil. plus extension of at least 6 bar diameters at the free end
of the bar.
Wire ties for stainless steel reinforcing bars shall be
stainless steel wire of a type listed in Table 412-B except • Minimum inside diameters of bends shall be as shown
that tie wire used to tie stainless steel reinforcing bars to in Table 412-C. For stainless steel reinforcing bars #8
epoxy coated reinforcing steel bars shall be epoxy coated and smaller, the minimum bend diameters shall be six
wire. times the bar diameter. Minimum bend diameters for
#9 through #12 stainless steel reinforcing shall be eight
412.11.07 Order Lists and Bending Diagrams – All order times the bar diameter. Minimum bend diameters for
lists and bending diagrams shall be submitted to the #13 and larger stainless steel reinforcing shall be ten
Ministry Representative for review before material is times the bar diameter.
ordered.
Exceptions:
The review of order lists and bending diagrams by the
Ministry Representative shall not relieve the Contractor or • Minimum inside diameters of bends and 90º and 135º
Suppliers, as applicable, of responsibility for the correctness hooks for stirrups and ties shall be 4 bar diameters for
thereof.

BC MoTI SS 2020 412 (2 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 248 of 470
SECTION 412 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

uncoated and stainless steel bars and 8 bar diameters for bundles when stacking is necessary. Supports shall be
epoxy-coated bars. placed sufficiently close to prevent sags in the bundles.
• Minimum inside diameters of bends in welded wire Long term storage of epoxy-coated bars shall be minimized.
fabric, plain or deformed, for stirrups and ties shall not If circumstances require storing epoxy-coated steel
be less than 4 wire diameters for deformed wire larger reinforcement outdoors for more than two months,
than 7 mm and two wire diameters for all other wires,
protective storage measures shall be implemented to protect
except that bends with an inside diameter of less than 8
the material from sunlight, salt spray and weather exposure.
wire diameters shall be not less than 4 wire diameters
Epoxy-coated steel reinforcing bars stored in corrosive
from the nearest welded intersection.
environments will require protection sooner. Epoxy-coated
Note: Galvanized reinforcing bars shall be pre-bent before steel reinforcing bars or bundles shall be covered with
galvanizing. opaque polyethylene sheeting or other suitable opaque
protective material.
Table 412-C: Minimum Inside Diameters of Bends Epoxy-coated bars shall not be cut or bent on Site without
the permission of the Ministry Representative. In any case,
Uncoated Epoxy the flame-cutting of coated bars will not be permitted.
(mm) coated, FRP, Stainless When immersion-type vibrators are used to consolidate
Bar
and Steel*
Size 400R 400W
Galvanized (mm)
concrete around epoxy-coated steel reinforcing bars, the
300R or or vibrators shall be equipped with rubber or non-metallic
500R 500W (mm)
vibrator heads.
10M 60 70 60 80 60 Any bar with coating damage exceeding 2% of the surface
15M 90 100 90 120 90 area of the coated steel reinforcing bar in any 300 mm
length, shall be rejected. When the extent of the damage
20M - 120 100 160 120 does not exceed 2% of the surface area in any 300 mm
length, all damaged coating shall be repaired with patching
25M - 150 150 200 150
material in accordance with ASTM A775, Section 12.
30M - 250 200 240 240 Patching material shall be applied in strict accordance with
the manufacturer’s written instructions. Prior to application
35M - 300 250 350 280 of the patching material, rust shall be removed from the
45M - 450 400 450 450 damaged areas. The patching material shall be allowed to
cure before placing concrete over the epoxy-coated steel
55M - 600 550 550 550 reinforcing bars.
*for imperial stainless steel bar sizes see text in Compliance with the “Guidelines for Jobsite Practices”,
SS 412.31.01 contained as an Appendix of ASTM A775 shall be
mandatory.
412.32 Handling and Storage – Reinforcing bars shall be Where on-site inspection or testing by the Ministry
stored on platforms, skids or other suitable supports clear of Representative demonstrates non-compliant coating
the ground and shall be protected as practicable from thickness or integrity, for any shipment of bars, such bars
mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by may be rejected, and in any case shall not be placed in the
exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the structure until the Ministry Representative is satisfied as to
Work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, loose rust or their acceptability.
scale, mortar, paint, grease, oil, or other materials that The Contractor shall make available to the Ministry
would reduce bond. Representative, for inspection and acceptance, all repairs
412.32.01 Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel – Epoxy- performed to protective coatings on any reinforcing steel.
coated reinforcing bars shall be handled and stored so as to Repairs of epoxy coatings shall not be performed when the
minimize damage to the coating. Equipment for handling epoxy-coated bar or ambient air temperature is 5°C or less,
the bars shall have protected contact areas. Nylon slings or or when moisture is present on the bar. Patching material
padded wire rope slings shall be used. Suitable bundling shall not be applied if precipitation is expected within four
bands shall be used to prevent damage. Bundles of coated hours of the procedure. If precipitation does occur within
bars shall be lifted at multiple pick-up points to prevent bar- four hours, the Ministry Representative shall determine as
to-bar abrasion from sags in the bundles of bars. The bars to whether the material as applied is acceptable. If the
or bundles shall not be dropped or dragged. placed epoxy-coated bars have been exposed to salt spray or
road salts, the bars shall be rinsed with fresh water to
Epoxy coated steel reinforcing bars shall be stored off the remove any chloride contamination prior to placing
ground on protective cribbing, and timbers placed between concrete.

BC MoTI SS 2020 412 (3 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 249 of 470
SECTION 412 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

412.32.02 Stainless Steel Reinforcing Bar – Stainless steel the purpose of the additional length. Such bar bend
reinforcing bars shall be stored clear of the ground on sheets or shop drawings shall have written acceptance
timbers or other suitable protective cribbing spaced to by the Ministry Representative prior to welding taking
prevent sags in the bundles. Stacks of bundles of straight place.
bars shall have adequate blocking to prevent contact
(c) with the written acceptance of the Ministry
between the layers of bundles. Stainless steel reinforcing Representative, in which case, welding shall be in
bars shall be stored separately from black reinforcing steel accordance with SS 412.34.02.
bars, with the bar tags maintained and clearly visible until
ready for placing. 412.33.01 Tolerances – Tolerances for placing
reinforcement shall, unless otherwise specified, be as shown
412.33 Placing and Fastening – Before any concrete is
in Table 412-D
placed, the placing and securing of reinforcing steel
including dowels, within the area of concrete placement Table 412-D: Tolerances for Placing Reinforcement
shall be complete. Tying in place of all dowels projecting
from the area of concrete placement shall be subject to
acceptance by the Ministry Representative before any Element Tolerance
concrete is placed. The reinforcing steel shall be free from
dirt, detrimental rust, loose scale, paint, oil or other foreign Concrete cover to top reinforcing steel in + 6 mm
material. Steel reinforcement - other than stainless steel bridge decks – 0 mm
reinforcing bars - with rust, mill scale, or a combination of
both shall be acceptable, provided the minimum physical Concrete cover to reinforcement, other than
± 8 mm
properties including height of deformations and mass of a top reinforcing steel in bridge decks
wire brushed test specimen are not less than the applicable
specification requirements. Bar location, except cover, when depth of a
flexural member, thickness of a wall or
Reinforcement shall be placed in the positions shown on the ± 8 mm
smallest dimension of a column is 200 mm or
Drawings, within the tolerances specified below, adequately less
supported and secured against displacement. All splices of
adjacent bars shall be securely tied together. Tying 100% of Bar location, except cover, when depth of a
the bar intersections is required where the bar spacing flexural member, thickness of a wall or
± 12 mm
smallest dimension of a column is larger than
centres are 300 mm or greater. Tying of 50% of the bar
200 mm but less than 600 mm
intersections is required when the bar spacing centres are
less than 300 mm. Bar location, except cover, when depth of a
The locations of the top reinforcing steel in bridge decks flexural member, thickness of a wall or
± 20 mm
smallest dimension of a column is 600 mm or
shall be checked by running a full deck-width template
larger
along the longitudinal screeds. The lower edge of the
template shall be set at the cover dimension (as specified or Longitudinal location, except cover, of bends
noted in the Drawings) plus any anticipated deflection of the ± 50 mm
and ends of bars
screed rail support system below the level of the deck
surface. No steel shall touch the template nor be more than Longitudinal location, except cover, of bends
6 mm distant from it. Any discrepancies outside of these and ends of bars at discontinuous ends of ± 20 mm
limits shall be corrected by the Contractor to the satisfaction members
of the Ministry Representative.
The location of reinforcing steel near deck joint anchors 412.33.02 Bar Supports and Spacers – Bar supports and
shall be adjusted so that there will be no interference with spacers shall be adequate to ensure concrete cover and bar
the deck joint anchors. spacings are maintained within the specified tolerances.
Tack welding of reinforcement for cage assembly or Bar supports and spacers shall be sufficient in number and
securing of reinforcement will be permitted only in the strength to support the reinforcement and prevent
following circumstances: displacement by workers or equipment before and during
(a) on bars provided by the Contractor that are additional concreting and shall be adequately spaced to ensure that any
to design requirements, except that no additional shear sagging between supports does not intrude on the specified
stirrups or tensile reinforcement bars will be permitted, concrete cover.
as they may adversely affect structural performance. Bar supports and spacers shall be of a type and material that
(b) at the ends of bars where the Contractor provides will not cause rust spots, blemishes or spalling of concrete
additional length that is in excess of design surfaces.
requirements and this additional length is detailed on
bar bend sheets or shop drawings, with notes indicating

BC MoTI SS 2020 412 (4 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 250 of 470
SECTION 412 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

Bar supports and spacers shall be precast concrete, plastic, • four spacers per loop for spirals over 800 mm in
hot-dip galvanized steel, epoxy-coated steel or stainless diameter.
steel, except that, plastic supports or plastic spacers over
For spiral rods 15M and larger, spacing shall be as follows:
200 mm in height shall not be allowed.
• three spacers per loop for spirals up to 600 mm in
Precast concrete supports shall have a compressive strength diameter.
and quality not less than that of the concrete in which they
are embedded. For finished surfaces, the face of the support • four spacers per loop for spirals over 600 mm in
in contact with the forms shall not exceed 50 mm in any diameter.
dimension and shall have a colour and texture to match that If vertical reinforcements are to serve as spacers, spirals
of the finished concrete surface. shall be securely tied to vertical reinforcement at the spacing
Bar supports and spacers for approach slabs and formed required for spacers.
horizontal slabs such as bridge decks, bridge sidewalks, and Stainless spirals shall be provided with stainless steel
top slabs of culverts shall meet the following additional spacers in conformance with ASTM A276.
requirements:
412.34 Splicing of Bars – Special requirements for
(a) Supports or spacers up to 200 mm in height shall be splicing, such as particular locations for splices, use of
either precast concrete or plastic. overlength bars or special lap lengths, shall be as shown on
the Drawings.
(b) Plastic supports or spacers shall have an individual
minimum breaking strength of 4.5 kN (1000 lbs) and Splices in bars larger than 35M shall be mechanical coupler
shall be capable of maintaining strength and splices or welded. The detail of such splices shall be subject
dimensional properties for the range of temperatures to acceptance by the Ministry Representative.
encountered on Site.
412.34.01 Lapped Splices
(c) Maximum spacing between supports, for each mat of
(a) Horizontal bars shall not be spliced unless greater than
bars, shall be 1200 mm, except that the maximum
standard mill lengths – 12 m for 10M bars and 18 m for
spacing between plastic supports, for each mat of bars,
larger bars – would otherwise be required.
shall be 1000 mm.
(b) Splices to be staggered so that no more than one third
(d) Each support shall carry the load from not more than
of the reinforcing steel in a member shall be spliced in
one mat of reinforcing steel, except as provided below:
any transverse section that is within the required lap
(i) Where a support is used that is specifically length.
designed by the manufacturer to carry two mats at
(c) If not shown on the Drawings, the length of lapped
two separate positions, or
splices shall be in accordance with CSA-S6, Clause
(ii) Where the top mat of reinforcing steel is more than 8.15.10.1.
200 mm above the slab soffit, the top mat may be
(d) Adjacent reinforcing bars shall not be spliced at the
supported by reinforcing steel spreader bars,
same locations unless shown on the Drawings or
matching the material of the top mat. Spreader bars
authorized by the Ministry Representative.
shall be secured between the top and bottom
reinforcing mats and the bottom reinforcing mat (e) Column spirals shall be spliced in accordance with
shall be supported on precast concrete chairs CSA-S6, Clause 8.14.4.2.
adequately spaced to carry the additional weight of
(f) Lap splice bars shall be of the same material as the bars
the top mat of reinforcing steel.
being connected.
412.33.03 Concrete Cover – Concrete cover for reinforcing
412.34.02 Welded Splices – Welded splices shall be used
steel shall be in accordance with the Ministry “Bridge
only if detailed on the Drawings. Welding shall conform to
Standards and Procedure Manual – Supplement to CHBDC
the requirements of CSA W186, and shall be performed by
S6”.
a company certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau to the
412.33.04 Spirals – Spirals shall be held in place and to line requirements of CSA Standard W186.
by vertical spacers.
Welded splices shall not be used on epoxy coated bars or
For spiral rods less than 15M, spacing shall be as follows: stainless steel bars, with the exception of stainless steel
• two spacers per loop for spirals less than 500 mm in spirals.
diameter. 412.34.03 Mechanical Coupler Splices – Mechanical
• three spacers per loop for spirals 500 mm to 800 mm in couplers shall be used for splices only if pre-approved or
diameter. detailed on the Drawings or authorized in writing by the
Ministry Representative. Such couplers shall develop in
tension or compression, as required, at least 120% of the

BC MoTI SS 2020 412 (5 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 251 of 470
SECTION 412 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

specified yield strength of the bars, but not less than 110% Ministry Representative will be made at the following Unit
of the mean yield strength, representative of the bars to be Prices per kilogram.
used, in the test of the mechanical connection.
• Uncoated reinforcing steel $3.00
Wedge couplers shall not be used in bars greater than 15
mm diameter. When mechanical couplers are used, the • Epoxy-coated reinforcing steel $4.00
Contractor shall ensure that the minimum concrete cover as • Galvanized reinforcing steel $5.00
specified is maintained. Where mechanical couplers are to
be used to couple stainless steel reinforcing bars, the • Stainless reinforcing steel $8.00
mechanical coupler shall be stainless steel of a type
specified in Table 412-B.
Table 412-E: Nominal Linear Mass for Reinforcing
The total slip of the reinforcing bars within the splice sleeve Steel
of the connector after loading in tension to 0.5f y and
relaxing it to 0.05fy shall not exceed the following measured Bar Designation Mass (kg/m)
displacements between gauge points straddling the splice
10M 0.785
sleeve:
15M 1.570
• Up to and including 45M bars 0.25 mm
20M 2.355
• 55M bars 0.75 mm
25M 3.925
MEASUREMENT 30M 5.495
412.81 General – When required, reinforcing steel will be 35M 7.850
measured by KILOGRAMS for the total mass in each part 45M 11.775
of the structure(s) as computed using Table 412-E. The
mass of clips, separators, tie wires, chairs and other 55M 19.625
fastening devices, and epoxy or other coating shall not be #3 (stainless steel) 0.556
added into the calculations of mass of reinforcing steel.
#4 (stainless steel) 1.011
#5 (stainless steel) 1.559
PAYMENT #6 (stainless steel) 2.225
412.91 General – Payment for REINFORCING STEEL #7 (stainless steel) 3.032
will be made at the Contract Lump Sum Prices for
reinforcing steel in each part of the structure(s), for the #8 (stainless steel) 3.995
supply, cutting, bending, coating (if required), shipping, #9 (stainless steel) 5.053
placing and securing of reinforcing steel. Payment shall
also include all costs associated with Quality Control. #10 (stainless steel) 6.416
Payment for increases or reductions in quantities of #11 (stainless steel) 7.880
uncoated and coated reinforcing steel ordered by the

BC MoTI SS 2020 412 (6 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 252 of 470
 SECTION 413

BRIDGE DECKS AND CONCRETE OVERLAYS

DESCRIPTION concrete and shall also include details of the finishing

equipment and support rails. The submittal shall
413.01 General – This Section describes requirements for
clearly demonstrate that the proposed methods,
the construction of Bridge Decks, and for the construction
equipment and personnel have the capability to carry
of Concrete Overlays on previously constructed (old) bridge
out the Work in accordance with SS 413. All review
decks and on newly constructed (new) bridge decks. The
concerns raised shall be addressed to the satisfaction of
requirements of SS 211 shall apply except as otherwise
the Ministry Representative. All equipment shall be
specified in this Section. Unless otherwise specified in this
subject to inspection and acceptance by the Ministry
Section, bridge deck concrete shall include diaphragms,
Representative. Equipment may be rejected during
deck slabs, bridge parapets and medians, bridge sidewalks,
operation if it is deemed unsatisfactory.
approach slabs and overlay concrete.
Two weeks prior to the scheduled start of deck slab
413.31 Bridge Decks
concrete placement, the Contractor shall meet with the
413.31.01 General – Deck slab construction shall be full- concrete supplier and the Ministry Representative to
width and continuous between the joints as shown on the review deck concrete operations with respect to
Drawings, and shall be placed in the sequence as shown on concrete mix design and performance, concrete
the Drawings. Any variation from this requirement shall be delivery, placing, finishing and curing equipment and
subject to acceptance by the Ministry Representative. methods.
(a) Camber Survey – Prior to commencing deck (c) Haunch Setting, Screed Rails & Reinforcing Cover
construction and subsequent to the completion of the – The Contractor shall set the deck slab soffit formwork
erection of girders, with the girders in a thermally to within 2 mm of the haunch heights as determined in
neutral condition and with no dead load other than the accordance with SS 413.31.01(a).
dead load of the girders and necessary fall protection,
After installation of the deck slab reinforcing, the
the Contractor shall profile all the girders. Camber
Contractor shall set the screed rails for the deck
elevations are to be taken at 1000 mm centres
finishing machine. Screed rails shall be installed to an
maximum (or as indicated on the Drawings or Special
accuracy of ± 2 mm and have a maximum deflection
Provisions), centrelines of all bearings and ends of
between supports of 1 mm. Allowance for dead load
girders. The camber elevation locations are to be laid
deflection of the structure shall be made in the screed
out to an accuracy of 25 mm horizontally and camber
rail setting as well as any anticipated deflection due to
elevations to 1 mm vertically. Within 14 days of the
the loading of any formwork that may be supporting the
Contractor supplying the camber elevations to the
screed rail system. The screed rails shall be adequately
Ministry Representative, the Contractor will receive
supported outside the area to be concreted and shall be
haunch heights for setting the deck slab soffit, (for
completely installed before concrete is placed, unless
suspended slab type structures only) and the design
otherwise accepted by the Ministry Representative.
finished grade elevations for the deck, complete with
anticipated dead load deflections at 1000 mm stations Prior to the placement of deck slab concrete and
along the centreline of roadway, to be used by the subsequent to the installation of deck slab reinforcing
Contractor in establishing the required screed rail and screed rails, the locations of the top reinforcing
settings. steel in bridge decks shall be checked by running a full
width deck template along the longitudinal screeds.
In the event that actual girder camber values vary
The lower edge of the template shall be set at the cover
significantly from the design values, the Contractor will
dimension (as specified or noted in the Drawings) plus
be required to modify the original design finished grade
any anticipated deflection of the screed rail support
as directed by the Ministry Representative.
system below the level of the deck surface. No steel
(b) Method, Equipment & Personnel – The Contractor shall touch the template nor be more than 6 mm distant
shall submit to the Ministry Representative for review, from it. Any discrepancies outside of these limits shall
four weeks prior to the scheduled start of deck slab be corrected by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the
concrete placement, a Deck Placement Plan which Ministry Representative.
provides a complete description of the method,
413.31.02 Concrete Placement
equipment, material and personnel, including previous
deck placement experience of the personnel to be (a) Concrete Temperature at Placement – Concrete
employed. This shall include the equipment for designed for bridge decks and overlay including any
mixing, transporting, placing, vibrating and curing the bridge deck concrete containing silica fume shall not

BC MoTI SS 2020 413 (1 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 253 of 470
SECTION 413 BRIDGE DECKS AND CONCRETE OVERLAYS

have a temperature in excess of 17C at time of (B) The use of HSA’s shall in no instance modify
placement. Concrete used in elements having a the maximum concrete temperature required
minimum section thickness greater than 1000 mm shall at time of placement.
have temperature controls as per CSA A23.1 Clause
(ii) A one-time only addition of HSA will be allowed.
5.2.5.4. Methods used for maintaining temperature
This will be during initial batching of the concrete
controls shall not diminish the quality of the concrete,
or immediately at completion of batching as
and shall not exceed the specified W/Cm ratio.
recommended by the ad mixture manufacturer.
When the atmospheric temperature is 15C or higher, Addition of HSA at any other time will be cause
SS 211.18 – Hot Weather Concreting, shall apply for rejection of the concrete.
except as modified herein. (c) Concrete Placement-Diaphragms – Unless otherwise
Concrete for bridge decks and overlays shall not have a specified, diaphragms shall be placed either:
temperature greater than 17C when placed. Prior to (i) not more than two hours before the adjacent deck
the placement of bridge deck and overlay concrete, concrete is placed. In this case, diaphragm
when the ambient air temperature is at or above 15C, concrete shall have a slump less than 40 mm and
or when there is a probability of its rising to 20C or shall be retarded so that it sets at the same time as
above during the placement period (as forecast by the the deck concrete, or
nearest official meteorological office), the Contractor
shall submit to the Ministry Representative for (ii) a sufficient length of time ahead of the deck
acceptance, the proposed placing operations complying concrete, so that the diaphragm concrete attains a
with the requirements for hot weather concreting. compressive strength of 15 MPa before the deck
slab is cast.
When the ambient air temperature is at or above 15C,
Sequence for the placing of concrete for diaphragms at
or when there is a probability of its rising to 20C or
ends of girders on continuous and integral type spans
above during the placement period (as forecast by the
shall be as shown on the Drawings.
nearest official meteorological office), bridge decks
and overlays shall be cast when daily air temperatures (d) Concrete Placement - Deck Slab – The top surfaces
are forecast to be a minimum (normally between 12:00 of concrete stringers and deck panels, if applicable,
midnight and 9:00 AM). shall be prepared in accordance with SS 211.12.03 and
the surfaces shall be in a saturated surface dry condition
(b) Time of Placement – All bridge deck and overlay immediately before the deck is cast.
concrete shall be fully discharged and placed in its final
location within 45 minutes after the water and cement Concrete shall be placed at a rate of not less than
have been combined. Under conditions contributing to 6 m/hr. The concrete front and finishing operation shall
rapid stiffening of concrete, the Contractor shall adjust be kept parallel to the substructure. Placing shall be
its placing operations to suit reduced handling time. started at such time as to permit finishing during
daylight hours, except if ambient temperatures are as
Time of placement extensions will be considered on a outlined in SS 413.31.02(a), then adequate lighting is
case-by-case basis and may require the use of to be provided in accordance with Workers
Hydration Stabilizing Admixtures (HSAs) conforming Compensation Act and the Occupational Health and
to the requirements of ASTM C494 Type B, Retarding Safety Regulation, to allow for concrete operations
or Type D, Water-Reducing and Retarding under reduced light conditions.
Admixtures. If accepted by the Ministry
Representative, guidelines for the use of HSAs shall be In the event of unexpected rain, concrete placing shall
as follows: cease and the surface shall be protected immediately.
Surface concrete which has been rained on shall
(i) HSA modified concrete for bridge decks shall be immediately be removed to the top of reinforcing steel.
fully discharged and placed within 90 minutes
after water and cement have been combined. (e) Finishing – The deck surface shall be finished by a
drum-type deck finishing machine on support rails.
(A) When HSA’s are used, these time extensions Acceptable finishing machines are Terex Bid-Well
are subject to preconstruction trials being models 2450, 3600 or 4800, Gomaco models C-450,
conducted by the Contractor, to establish the C-750, Allen Models 4836B, 6036 B 6048 B or
appropriate HSA dosage to provide suitable alternate acceptable to the Ministry Representative.
extended slump life of concrete, without
increasing the water/cementitious ratio of the There shall be no disturbance of the concrete after it has
concrete above that which would be required been consolidated and finished by the deck finishing
if HSA’s were not used. machine. Two work bridges shall be provided to carry
out the final deck finishing operations and for
preparations to cure the concrete deck surface. No

BC MoTI SS 2020 413 (2 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 254 of 470
SECTION 413 BRIDGE DECKS AND CONCRETE OVERLAYS

inserts will be permitted in the finished concrete excessive vibrations and high stresses, for the period of
roadway surface. time necessary to develop the required concrete
properties.
The surface behind the finisher shall be floated
transversely to eliminate ridges and open texture. (i) The Contractor shall submit a detailed Deck
Areas, which cannot be machine-finished, shall be hand Curing Plan for curing the deck and overlay
screeded and floated. concrete. The plan shall contain details such as
water source, the distribution system, the
Prior to final surface finishing or texturing, the deck
collection and run-off control system, person(s)
surfaces shall be repeatedly checked for accuracy of
responsible for Quality Control, and staff to
deck slab thickness and alignment. The Contractor
maintain the system. The curing system shall be
shall measure and record the deck slab thickness at a
capable of maintaining a free film of water on the
frequency of at least one measurement per interior bay
areas of concrete requiring curing, for a minimum
and overhang bay, at a maximum of 3000 mm centers
of 8 unattended hours and this capability shall be
longitudinally. Adjustments as acceptable to the
demonstrated prior to concrete placement. It shall
Ministry Representative shall be made to the deck-
be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure
finishing machine to maintain the minimum deck slab
that the system of curing and protection is properly
thickness and the required concrete cover on the deck
planned, constructed and maintained throughout
reinforcing. The thickness readings of the deck slabs
the entire curing period.
shall be supplied to the Ministry Representative at the
conclusion of each placement section. (ii) Burlap shall be pre-soaked by immersing it in
water for a period of at least 24 hours immediately
For bridge decks that will not have a waterproofing
prior to placing.
membrane, the final surface texturing shall be tined.
The tining shall create transverse grooves 3 mm wide (iii) Two layers of burlap shall be applied immediately
by 1.5 mm to 3 mm deep at 20 mm centre-to-centre after finishing of the concrete surface within 2 to
spacing. 4 m of the final surface texturing or finishing
operations (no more than 20 minutes) and shall be
For bridge decks that will have a waterproofing
maintained in a saturated condition in a manner,
membrane, the final concrete surface shall be floated
which does not damage the finished concrete
and troweled as necessary to provide a smooth surface.
surface. Strips must overlap 150 mm and must be
413.31.03 Repairs – Areas of the deck not meeting the held in place without marring the surface of the
tolerances as given in SS 211.16, shall be corrected as concrete. The burlap shall be maintained in a
follows: continuously wet condition throughout the curing
period and a continuous film of free water on the
(a) where the required alignment can be obtained with a surfaces of the areas noted herein shall be
maximum cut of 6 mm, the bumps shall be cut with a maintained by means of soaker hoses, sprinklers,
bump cutter which will provide an acceptable
etc.
longitudinal grooved texture;
(iv) Concrete for diaphragms, monolithic decks,
(b) where the required alignment cannot be obtained with
concrete overlays, approach slabs, parapets, and
a maximum cut of 6 mm, the concrete shall be broken
sidewalks shall be cured for a minimum of seven
out with vertical edges to a minimum depth of 40 mm consecutive uninterrupted twenty-four hour
and shall be replaced with new concrete of the required
periods at a minimum temperature of 10C and for
quality.
the time necessary to attain 80% of the specified
Any physical damage to the deck surface shall be cut compressive strength of the concrete. The
out and replaced. Any areas of open texture or plucked compressive strength tests for verifying
aggregates shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the completion of the curing period shall be
Ministry Representative. determined using field cured test cylinders cured in
accordance with Clause 9.3.2 of CSA A23.2-3C.
413.31.04 Interim Strength Requirements – Deck
The curing period will begin following the
concrete shall attain strength of 15 MPa before parapets are
completed placement of the concrete in the section
placed and 25 MPa before heavy loads, such as concrete
cast.
trucks are allowed on the bridge.
(v) The temperature of the concrete being cured must
413.31.05 Curing
be monitored to ensure maximum and minimum
(a) General – Freshly deposited concrete shall be temperature requirements in accordance with
protected from freezing, abnormally high temperatures SS 211.15.02 are met.
or temperature differentials, premature drying,
(vi) Regardless of ambient temperature, moist curing
excessive moisture, moisture loss, heavy shocks,
with burlap and water must be provided at all

BC MoTI SS 2020 413 (3 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 255 of 470
 SECTION 413 BRIDGE DECKS AND CONCRETE OVERLAYS

times. During cold weather, burlap must be 413.32 Concrete Overlays

prevented from freezing.
413.32.01 General – This Subsection describes
(vii) At completion of the curing period, the curing shall requirements for repair and resurfacing of existing bridge
be discontinued in a manner so as not to subject the decks (old) and newly constructed bridge decks (new) with
concrete to undue stresses due to rapid moisture a concrete overlay, describing the construction practices,
loss in the concrete. materials and equipment required to place acceptable
concrete overlay. This work is usually carried out on one-
(viii) When the air temperature is at or below 5C or half of the deck at a time, while traffic is maintained on the
when there is a probability of it falling below 5C other half. The requirements of SS 413.31 shall apply
within the next 5 days after the curing period, then except as otherwise specified in this Subsection.
the following shall apply:
413.32.02 Gradeline – The Contractor shall survey and
(A) At completion of the curing period, the reference profiles of the existing bridge deck and
addition of free water is to be discontinued and approaches prior to scarification as follows.
followed by an additional five (5) consecutive
uninterrupted twenty-four hour periods of (a) Profile Surveys
drying with the concrete temperature (i) Longitudinally the profiles shall be taken at 2 to
maintained at a minimum temperature of 5C. 3 m stations for the entire length of the structure,
(b) Additional Curing Requirements for Concrete including 21 m beyond each end, with additional
Containing Silica Fume or Fly Ash, With or shots taken at the back of ballast walls and all
Without Fibres – A fog mist shall be applied existing or proposed new joint locations.
continuously from the time of screeding until the (ii) Transversely the number of profiles required will
concrete is covered with burlap, in such a way as to be determined by:
maintain high relative humidity above the concrete and
prevent drying of the concrete surface. Water must not (A) A maximum spacing between elevation points
be allowed to drip, flow, or puddle on the concrete of 3 m.
surface during fog misting, when placing the burlap, or (B) Profiles are required 500 mm from each curb
at any time before the concrete has achieved final set. or parapet face.
Fogging equipment will consist of pressure washers (C) Profiles are required 300 mm (inside area to
(minimum output pressure of 28 MPa (4000 psi)) with be concreted) from longitudinal overlay
suitable tips for producing a fine water mist or fog. A construction joint lines requiring adjustable
minimum of two pressure washers shall be used for this screed rails. In general longitudinal overlay
process and the adequacy of the range and coverage construction joints shall be located at the
shall be demonstrated prior to placing any concrete. center of a lane or between lanes. The final
When the air temperature is at or below 5C or when location of the longitudinal construction joints
there is a probability of it falling below 5C within the is subject to the acceptance of the Ministry
next ten (10) days after the curing period, then the Representative.
following shall apply: (D) A profile is required at hinge point of crown.
(i) At completion of the curing period, the addition of free (iii) Elevation points are to be laid out in cross section
water is to be discontinued and followed by additional ninety degrees to centerline of roadway on straight
ten (10) consecutive uninterrupted twenty-four hour structures and radial to centerline of roadway on
periods of drying with the concrete temperature curved or spiraled structures.
maintained at a minimum temperature of 10C.
(iv) Profile elevation points shall be laid out to an
Modifications to the curing process may be required if accuracy of ± 25 mm horizontally and elevations
it is anticipated that the deck may be subjected to the taken to an accuracy of ± 3 mm vertically and be
application of de-icing chemicals within the first month referenced such that they can be re-established
after the curing period. within ± 25 mm from their original location.
413.31.06 Payment – for bridge deck FORMWORK and (b) The Contractor shall provide the Ministry
CONCRETE will be made as outlined in SS 211.21 01 and Representative with the gradeline profiles plotted at a
SS 211.21.02 respectively and payment for bridge deck scale of 1:10 vertical and 1:50 horizontal and a
REINFORCING STEEL will be made as outlined in spreadsheet showing actual original elevations for all
SS 412.91 unless otherwise provided for in SS 413. points surveyed.
(c) In the case of old decks, subsequent to scarifying and
cleaning of the deck surface, the Contractor shall re-

BC MoTI SS 2020 413 (4 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 256 of 470
SECTION 413 BRIDGE DECKS AND CONCRETE OVERLAYS

establish the original elevation points, take new Care must be taken not to damage the existing deck
elevations for the points to the nearest millimeter and drains. The Contractor will be required to repair or
submit these elevations along with plotted profiles to replace any damaged drains at the Contractor’s
the Ministry Representative. expense. Drains are to be plugged to insure
containment of debris.
(d) The Ministry will provide the Contractor with design
finished grade profiles and elevations for the survey All areas inaccessible to the scarification equipment
points as originally laid out by the Contractor. These shall be prepared by hydro-demolition, grinders or by
profiles and elevations shall be used by the Contractor jackhammers with weight limited to a maximum 18 kg.
to set the screed rails for the deck-finishing machine, Preparation shall minimize damage to the sound
checking of overlay thickness during the dry run of the substrate concrete. Larger jackhammers may be used if
deck machine and for calculating the volume of overlay accepted by the Ministry Representative and if
concrete required. performance acceptable to the Ministry Representative
can be demonstrated.
(e) The Contractor is responsible for properly setting the
screed rails to match the design gradeline provided by In the case of previously overlaid decks, concrete shall
the Ministry Representative. Depressions creating be removed to below the old bond line. Where the bond
ponded water, or localized high spots in the concrete line is within 10 mm of the reinforcing steel, the
surface, resulting from deficient finishing procedures remaining concrete and the old bonding material shall
shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense. be removed by hydro-demolition or pneumatic tools.
(f) At completion of the deck overlay, the Contractor shall Upon completion of scarification of the deck, prior to
re-establish the original elevation points, take as built opening the scarified deck lane to traffic and at the
elevations for the points to the nearest millimetre, and direction of the Ministry Representative, the Contractor
submit these elevations along with plotted profiles to shall place temporary asphalt tapers (minimum 40:1)
the Ministry Representative. using asphalt patch material (cold mix) with tar paper
underneath at all deck joints and bridge ends as required
(g) No specific payment shall be made for this work as all
to maintain adequate traffic movement. The asphalt
costs associated with the production of the gradelines
tapers shall be maintained until traffic is no longer
and profiles are deemed incidental.
using that lane or the final paving is complete. The
413.32.03 Removal of Existing Concrete Deck Surface – temporary tapers shall be in accordance with SS 502.
The existing concrete surface shall be removed by use of
(b) Payment – Payment for removal of the existing
scarification (roto-milling), hydro-demolition or alternate
concrete deck surface and asphalt roadway approaches
methods acceptable to the Ministry Representative, over the
will be made at the Lump Sum price bid. Payment for
full length and width of the bridge deck. If methods other
removal shall include all work for the removal of the
than scarification are proposed by the Contractor, the
concrete and asphalt roadway approaches including but
Contractor shall submit all required details of the proposed
not limited to sweeping, washing and /or blowing of
work to the Ministry Representative and shall obtain the
debris, power hand tool removal of all concrete
acceptance of the Ministry Representative at least two
inaccessible to the scarification process, containment
weeks prior to starting the work. Alternate methods shall
and the removal and disposal of all debris from the site.
meet the requirements specified for scarification.
Payment shall also include all labour, material and
(a) Scarification – If scarified, equipment shall be capable equipment for the supply, installation and maintenance
of concrete removal to an accuracy of ± 5 mm. The of temporary let downs, and disposal of all asphalt
scarifying equipment shall produce a surface that does material from the Site.
not exceed 10 mm in amplitude for roughness. The
413.32.04 Removal of Concrete for Partial and Full
maximum cut will be to within 10 mm of the
Depth Repairs – The Contractor, in the presence of the
reinforcing steel. Depth of scarification will be
Ministry Representative, shall carry out a detailed visual
specified by the Ministry.
inspection of the deck surface for patch concrete. A chain
The Contractor shall monitor the total depth of concrete drag method shall be used to examine the entire deck surface
cover to the top mat of reinforcing steel using a for evidence of additional delaminated and deteriorated
pachometer or alternate methods acceptable to the concrete. These areas of unsound concrete and patch
Ministry Representative. Readings shall be taken at concrete shall be removed to sound concrete or removed full
regular intervals ahead of the scarification. The depth when considered necessary by the Ministry
Contractor shall adjust the rate and depth of concrete Representative.
removal to ensure that the reinforcing steel is not
Removal and repair of a specific area will not be completed
damaged and the desired scarified profile is achieved.
until the Contractor and the Ministry Representative have
All reinforcing steel damaged by the Contractor’s
inspected the affected areas requiring repair, and have
operations will be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
agreed on the extent of repair required.

BC MoTI SS 2020 413 (5 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 257 of 470
SECTION 413 BRIDGE DECKS AND CONCRETE OVERLAYS

The Contractor shall supply the necessary labour and or high-pressure water blast (minimum 35 MPa /
supplies to mark out the repair areas. 5000 psi) cleaned to remove all bruised and
fractured concrete and foreign materials such as
(a) Repair Procedures – Partial and full depth concrete
dirt, dust, laitance, sand, grease, oil, concrete slurry
deck repairs shall proceed as follows:
etc. to the satisfaction of the Ministry
(i) The Contractor shall keep repair boundaries square Representative.
or rectangular and avoid abrupt changes in width
(vii) The Contractor shall collect and remove all dirt,
of a given repair area. The edge of the repair area
dust, and blasting sand from the repair areas of the
shall be maintained vertical. No debris shall be
sub deck, by vacuum or similar method, and
permitted to fall from the bridge. Saw cut the
dispose of the waste materials away from the Site.
perimeter of the repair areas to a minimum depth
Disposal shall be in accordance with all applicable
of 25 mm to prevent feather edges. Do not cut the
environmental regulations.
existing reinforcing steel.
(b) Payment – Payment for removal of Concrete for Partial
(ii) Remove deteriorated, delaminated and patch
concrete to sound concrete. Maximum jack- Depth Concrete Repair of the sub deck will be made at
hammer weight shall be 18 kg. Care shall be taken the Unit Price per square metre bid. Payment shall be
for all labour, materials and equipment to break out the
to avoid damage to the reinforcement and
concrete, including; inspections, sounding, cleaning of
remaining concrete. Jackhammers are to be
mildly corroded reinforcing, abrasive blast cleaning of
operated at angles less than 45º as measured from
the existing concrete surfaces within the repair areas,
the surface of the deck to the hand tool. The
Contractor shall use wedge type chisel bits. saw cutting, and containment and disposal of all debris.
Moyles and round point chisels are not permitted. Payment for Removal of Concrete for Full Depth
Adhering concrete shall be removed from the Concrete Repair of the sub deck will be made at the
reinforcement using hammers not larger than 7 kg. Unit Price per square metre bid. Payment shall be for
all labour, materials and equipment to break out the
(iii) Remove all concrete to allow a 25 mm space
concrete, including inspections, sounding, cleaning of
around all exposed reinforcing bar within partial
depth repairs. Expose all corroded reinforcement mildly corroded reinforcing, abrasive blast cleaning of
at edges of partial and full depth repair area. the existing concrete surfaces within the repair areas,
saw cutting, and containment and disposal of all debris.
(iv) Full depth repairs will only apply when the soffit Payment shall also include the supply, installation and
concrete is removed. For full depth repair areas, removal of all required formwork.
the Contractor shall install all necessary formwork
prior to cleaning of reinforcing and concrete 413.32.05 Reinforcing Steel – Reinforcing steel shall be
surfaces. The finished soffit repair concrete shall supplied and installed in accordance with SS 412. Welding
be flush with the surrounding soffit concrete. of reinforcing bars shall not be permitted.
Areas for full depth repair exceeding 1 m2 shall be Severely corroded reinforcing steel in the existing deck,
patched prior to placement of the overlay. Before more than 25% section loss as determined by the Ministry
placement of the concrete patch, the surface of the Representative, shall be removed and replacement bars
adjoining concrete should be saturated with water spliced to the existing reinforcement using mechanical
for 30 minutes minimum and coated with a couplers acceptable to the Ministry or lapped splices.
bonding agent immediately ahead of the fresh Mechanical couplers and lap length shall be in accordance
concrete. with CSA S6.
(v) Mildly corroded reinforcement shall be blast Reinforcing steel damaged by the Contractor’s operations
cleaned to commercial blast finish SSPC-SP6. shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
Severely corroded and damaged reinforcement
shall be replaced. Mechanical couplers acceptable (a) Payment – Payment for replacement of severely
to the Ministry Representative or laps in corroded reinforcing steel will be made at the Unit Price
accordance with CSA-S6, “Canadian Highway per kilogram shown for increases and reductions in
Bridge Design Code” Clause 8.15.10.1 shall be SS 412.91 and will be paid out of the Provisional Sum
used to attach new bars to the existing bars. Item for Site Modifications. Payment shall be for
Mechanical couplers shall develop at least 125% Quality Control, supply, cutting, bending, shipping,
of the specified yield strength of the bar and shall placing and securing of reinforcing steel.
be in accordance with CSA-S6. Payment for mechanical couplers will be made on a
(vi) Prior to the placement of the partial and full depth Force Account Basis under the Provisional Sum Item
repair area infill concrete the surfaces of the sub for Site Modifications.
deck within the repair area shall be abrasive blast

BC MoTI SS 2020 413 (6 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 258 of 470
SECTION 413 BRIDGE DECKS AND CONCRETE OVERLAYS

413.32.06 Removal and Replacement of Existing Deck 413.32.07 Preparation of the Sub Deck – The Contractor
Joints shall high pressure (minimum 110 MPa/15000 psi using a
rotating head) water blast the surface of the entire concrete
(a) Expansion joint system – The Contractor is
subdeck including both parapet and curb faces 50 mm up
responsible for demolition and removal of existing
from original deck elevation and abutment ballast walls, no
concrete and expansion joints.
earlier than 2 days before placing the overlay concrete.
The steel portions of the replacement deck joint shall
The water blasting equipment shall effectively remove
be supplied and fabricated in accordance with SS 422.
laitance, loose materials, bruised concrete, dust, slurry, oil,
The steel portions of the deck joint shall be galvanized or other contaminants (as applicable) that are detrimental to
and the joint armoring shall be installed 5 mm below the concrete overlay bond and shall leave behind a sound
the finished concrete nosing surface. Galvanized concrete surface, thoroughly cleaned and roughened to
surfaces damaged by welding shall be touched up with partially expose the coarse aggregate. The Contractor shall
two coats of an approved zinc rich coating. provide full containment and disposal of all debris,
contaminants, etc., and shall comply with all applicable
Each joint seal shall be supplied in a single length,
environmental, Workers Compensation Act, and
without splices. Before the joint seal is installed, the Occupational Health and Safety Regulation requirements.
joint shall be thoroughly cleaned with a wire brush and The Contractor shall provide adequate guards to contain
all moisture removed from the joint. The seal shall be
over spray and flying debris during the scarification, water
installed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s
blasting, deck washing and chipping process. The
recommendations and demonstrated to be watertight.
Contractor shall take all means necessary to reduce and
(i) Payment – Payment for deck joints will be made contain the amount of dust produced throughout the entire
at the Price bid for each joint. Payment shall be for project.
all Work as shown on the Drawings and Special For the period between water blasting and placement of
Provisions. Payment shall include but not be
overlay concrete, the sub-deck shall be protected from
limited to demolition and removal of the existing
contaminants.
deck and curb concrete, removal of the existing
joints seal, preparation of shop drawings; the Water blasting equipment shall travel downhill, keeping all
supply, fabrication, galvanizing, and installation of waste material ahead of the equipment and preventing the
the joint armouring, anchors, forming, reinforcing waste material from rehydrating on the previously cleaned
and supply and installation of joint seal. Payment surfaces.
shall also include the removal of the joint curb seal
(a) Payment – Payment for high pressure water blasting
section and replacement with a joint sealant within
the entire deck surface, including both parapet faces
the curbs section.
and abutment ballast walls, to clean and roughen the
(b) Preparation of Filled Joints – The Contractor shall cut sound concrete surface, will be made at the Lump Sum
a transverse line, directly above the filled joint location, price bid.
during casting of the deck overlay concrete using an
Payment shall be for all labour, materials and
edge cutter attached to a bull float. The line shall be
equipment required to produce the specified surface
neat and straight.
roughness. Payment shall also be for the containment
The Contractor shall further saw cut the filled joint and treatment of the contaminated water and the
along the transverse line within 48 hours of casting the removal and disposal of any debris from the Site.
deck. The saw cut will be achieved using a 4 mm wide
413.32.08 Concrete Overlay Placement – All concrete
diamond blade to a depth of 30 mm below the top of
works will be governed by the requirements of SS 211
the deck.
“Portland Cement Concrete” and SS 413.31, except as
The Contractor shall fill the saw-cut with Sikaflex 1C otherwise specified in this Section.
SL, a one-component, self-leveling, polyurethane
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of all
sealant or an alternate permanent filler, impervious to
concrete mixes. The Contractor shall be responsible for
water and resistant to ultra violet radiation, acceptable
Quality Control of each component of the concreting
to the Ministry Representative. Sealants shall be
operation, including aggregate and component quality,
installed in accordance with the manufacturers’
batching, mixing, transporting, placing, consolidating,
recommendations. The saw cut shall be clean and dry
finishing, curing and testing.
before placing the sealer.
The Contractor shall submit a detailed Overlay Placement
(i) Payment – Payment for preparation of filled joints
and Curing plan of equipment and manpower to be used for
will be made at the price bid for each joint.
placement and curing of the concrete overlay a minimum of
Payment shall be for all labour, materials and
14 days prior to the scheduled placement dates for the
equipment required to produce the filled joints
acceptance of the Ministry Representative. The plan shall

BC MoTI SS 2020 413 (7 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 259 of 470
SECTION 413 BRIDGE DECKS AND CONCRETE OVERLAYS

also contain details such as: water source, the distribution machine, adjusted for height and accepted by the
system, the collection and run-off control system, person(s) Ministry Representative prior to the pour as follows:
responsible for Quality Control, and staff to maintain the
(i) Screed guide rails, upon which the finished
system. All review concerns raised by the Ministry
machine will be placed outside the area to be
Representative shall be addressed to the satisfaction of the
concreted, will be horizontally and vertically
Ministry Representative.
stable. Rails shall be installed with fully adjustable
The Contractor will undertake a test placement of the supports at 350 mm maximum spacing
proposed deck mix design as indicated by the requirements
(ii) The finishing machine and guide rails will be
of SS 211.03.05.
adjusted so that the height of the screed above the
(a) Materials & Equipment – Acceptable types of existing subdeck at each point meets the Ministry
overlay are High Density concrete and Silica fume Representative’s requirements. To confirm the
modified concrete. adjustment of the machine and guide rails, the
screed will be “dry-run” and clearance
For High Density concrete overlays, acceptable
measurements taken at 3 m intervals and provided
finishing machines are Bid-Well model OF400, Bid-
to the Ministry Representative for acceptance. The
Well model OF500 or alternate (low slump pan-type
minimum overlay thickness shall be 50 mm.
overlay finishers), acceptable to the Ministry
Resetting of the machine and/or guide rails will be
Representative. Concrete shall be produced on the Site
done as necessary to obtain an acceptable “dry-
using volumetric concrete mobile mixers. All
run”. Adjustments to the machine or the rails will
equipment shall be provided in good working
not be permitted after an acceptable “dry-run” is
condition.
complete.
For High Density concrete overlays for structures over
Work bridges shall be provided to facilitate bull
50 m long or structures over 20 m long with a grade
floating, edge finishing with hand tools, correction of
greater than 3%, two finishing machines shall be used
defects in machine finished concrete and tining and fog
in tandem. The speed of the trailing machine shall be
curing.
such that its motion is continuous. Any open texture
remaining after two finishing machine passes shall be Rigid forms made of wood or steel shall be installed at
repaired by hand. longitudinal bulkheads in a manner that will maintain
the desired shape during concrete placement,
For Silica fume modified concrete overlays, acceptable
consolidation and finishing. The longitudinal bulkhead
finishing machines are Terex Bid-Well models 2450,
will be installed at the centerline or lane lines of the
3600 or 4800, Gomaco models C-A450, C-750, Allen
bridge deck. The top of the longitudinal bulkhead will
Models 4836B, 6036 B 6048 B or alternate acceptable
be set at the finished deck elevation. Any
to the Ministry Representative.
honeycombing or poorly consolidated concrete after
Concrete shall be produced either by a qualified stripping the longitudinal bulkhead will be cut back into
concrete batch plant or at the bridge site using pre- the new overlay a minimum of 150 mm.
bagged concrete mix and mixer trucks. All equipment
The overlay shall be placed in strips with longitudinal
shall be provided in good working condition.
joints near lane markings. Each strip shall be placed
Finishing machines shall be capable of forward and continuously between joints; adjacent strips shall not be
reverse motion under positive control and with cast for 24 hours.
provision for raising screeds to clear previously
screeded surfaces while traveling in reverse. (b) Bonding Agent – The Contractor shall apply a pre-
approved cementitious bonding slurry to the prepared
The Contractor shall provide steel rail mounted sub-deck and repair concrete. The prepared concrete
mechanical deck concrete finishing equipment of sub deck shall be in a saturated surface dry (SSD) state
adequate size and design to permit the complete prior to slurry placement. The Contractor shall supply
placement and finishing of a single lane section from the necessary equipment such as water hoses and
abutment to abutment with the prescribed surface vacuum or oil free compressed air.
finish, without forming any cold joints.
The cementitious bonding slurry is to consist of type
The Contractor is responsible for properly setting the GU or GUL portland cement mixed with a
screed rails to ensure longitudinal and transverse water/cement ratio not exceeding 0.38 by mass. The
drainage from the deck without ponded areas or “bird slurry must not exceed 3 mm in depth and be scrubbed
baths”. into the substrate surface with coarse brooms; in
Sufficient screed guide rails will be set out for the full particular, no pooling will be permitted. The bonding
length of the anticipated section to be cast plus 6 m slurry is to be applied immediately ahead of the overlay
length at each end for run in and run out of the deck concrete placement and in a timely fashion so as not

BC MoTI SS 2020 413 (8 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 260 of 470
SECTION 413 BRIDGE DECKS AND CONCRETE OVERLAYS

allow drying or setting up of the slurry prior to the (c) Interim Partial Strength – Overlay shall attain a
placement of overlay concrete. Any areas to which the minimum strength of at least 30 MPa before removal of
slurry has been applied, that in the opinion of the the burlap and opening to traffic. All other
Ministry Representative exhibit drying or setting shall requirements of seven day curing shall be adhered to.
be cleaned of the bonding slurry and re-coated prior to The interim strength tests shall be determined using
the placement of deck overlay concrete. field cured test cylinders cured in accordance with
Clause 9.3.2 of CSA A23.2-3C.
The vertical faces at the edge of the scarified sub-deck
surface; at construction joints; and at concrete/deck- (d) Payment – Payment for placement of the concrete
joint interfaces for old bridge decks and the vertical overlay and concrete for partial and full depth repairs
faces at sub-deck and curb or parapet interface for new will be made at the Unit Price per cubic metre bid.
decks shall be coated with an epoxy-bonding agent Payment shall be for all labour, materials and
conforming to ASTM C881, Type V, and Grade 2. The equipment for the final preparation and cleaning of the
Class of bonding agent shall be appropriate for the existing prepared concrete sub deck, supply and
temperature at the time of application. The bonding application of the cementitious bonding agent and the
agent shall be applied in accordance with the epoxy bonding agent, the supply of cement, silica fume,
manufacturer’s instructions. superplasticizer, all other constituent concrete materials
and the supply and placing and curing of the concrete
and containment and disposal of all debris.

BC MoTI SS 2020 413 (9 of 9)

Vol. 1 Page 261 of 470
 SECTION 415

MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST

AND PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

DESCRIPTION Geoscientists of the Province of British Columbia

415.01 Scope – This Section covers the manufacture and (APEGBC).
erection of precast and precast prestressed concrete Shop drawings shall be prepared and sealed by a
members. professional engineer registered with APEGBC when the
415.02 General Contractor is responsible for the design of items that are
detailed on the shop drawings.
415.02.01 General Requirements – The manufacture and
Working drawings shall be in the same system of units as
erection of precast and precast prestressed concrete
members shall conform to the requirements of these the design drawings.
specifications and details as shown on the Drawings and in Lettering for notes and dimensions shall be at least 2.5 mm
the Special Provisions. and 4 mm for headings. Drawings shall be legible when
printed on 11” x 17” sheets.
415.02.02 Plant Certification – Precast concrete elements
shall be manufactured in plants certified to the current CSA 415.04.01 Shop Drawings – Shop drawings shall show all
A23.4 requirements for the product groups corresponding to information and details needed for the fabrication of the
the element types being fabricated. Certification shall be by members including, but not limited to, such items as
the Canadian Precast Concrete Quality Assurance member shapes and dimensions, mark numbers and general
(CPCQA) Certification Program or by a certification arrangement of member locations, mass, prestressed and
organization accredited by the Standards Council of Canada non-prestressed reinforcement, embedments, openings,
(i.e. Canadian Standards Association (CSA)). Certification block outs, chamfers, recesses, finishes, concrete mix
shall be in effect prior to the beginning of Work, and design, stressing details, special tolerances, special handling
maintained throughout the period of manufacture. instructions, lifting details and lifting locations.
415.02.03 Materials and Construction – Materials and A copy of the shop drawings shall be available at all times
construction shall conform to the current CSA A23.4 and at the location where the components shown on the
the current PCI “Manual for Quality Control for Plants and drawings are being fabricated. Changes to the precast from
Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products". what is shown on the reviewed shop drawings, or repairs
Where there is a discrepancy between the requirements of made during fabrication and/or construction, shall be
these two standards, the more stringent shall apply. In cases indicated by the Contractor on a marked-up set of shop
where it may be unclear as to which standard is more drawings and submitted in digital format to the Ministry
stringent, the Ministry Representative in consultation with Representative at the completion of the Work.
the Ministry Chief Bridge Engineer will have the final say.
415.04.02 Transportation Details – Transportation details
415.03 Prefabrication Meeting – The Ministry will at its shall include such items as:
discretion, convene a prefabrication meeting with the
• Description of hauling and handling equipment,
Contractor to review issues such as, but not limited to, lines
of communication, fabricator and sub-fabricator scope of • Weight of members,
work, location of all work, procedures on Quality Control, • Length and height of loads,
plant certification, concrete source and mix designs, use of
Hydration Stabilization Admixtures (if applicable), mill • Location and method of member support, and
certificates, alternate details and procedures , and any other engineering calculations for situations where members
specific requirements of this specification as it relates to the are to be supported during transportation further from
Work. their ends than outlined in SS 415.48,
415.04 Working Drawings – Working drawings shall • Details for handling, storing, and loading of members.
consist of the following: 415.04.03 Erection Drawings – Erection drawings shall
• Shop drawings, show in detail the method of erection including, but not
limited to, the following:
• Transportation details, and
• Erection procedures
• Erection drawings
• Procedures for off-loading of members upon delivery
Transportation details and erection drawings shall be
prepared and sealed by a professional engineer registered • Details for temporary storage and support of members
with the Association of Professional Engineers and on site prior to erection

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (1 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 262 of 470
SECTION 415 MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST
AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

• Equipment to be used erection procedures must be documented and sealed by the

responsible professional engineer and must be available at
• Layout or general arrangement drawing showing the
layout of the members, equipment positioning, and the Site prior to the affected erection work being carried out.
access roads Immediately before placement of loading on falsework, the
Contractor must ensure that the falsework is inspected and
• Crane make, model, and capacity charts, boom
a sealed engineering certificate is issued by a professional
length(s) , crane placement, and access for transporting
engineer registered with APEGBC which:
of members to crane(s)
• Indicates the specific areas inspected, and
• Radii and loads for crane lifts
• Rigging details • Certifies that the falsework has been erected in
accordance with the latest approved erection drawings and
• Mass of members, rigging and special installation supplementary instructions.
equipment
Prestressed concrete stringers shall not be set on their final
• Details for installation and removal of all falsework, bearings, nor shall the bridge deck be cast, until 30 days
temporary supports, temporary bearings, bracing, guys, after the casting of the stringers. If it is necessary to erect
dead-men, and lifting devices the stringers earlier, they shall be placed on temporary
• Attachments to the bridge members and bridge supports. Prestressed concrete twin cell box stringers up to
structure for temporary support and special launching a maximum length of 20 metres may be shipped and erected
equipment after 10 days if the specified 28 day compressive strength
has been attained.
• Detailed description of sequence of operations
415.04.04 Submittals – The Contractor shall submit
• Details for special installation equipment such as a working drawings in digital format to the Ministry
launching truss, launching nose, head frames, spreader Representative at least 14 days prior to commencement of
beams and rollers fabrication. These working drawings shall have been
• Details for installation of members onto the permanent reviewed and approved by the Contractor. By this review
bearings and approval, the Contractor represents that it has
determined and verified all field measurements, field
• Traffic control plan for roadway and rail traffic construction criteria, materials, and similar data, and that it
• Details for protection of existing utilities affected by has checked and coordinated each working drawing with the
the erection procedures requirements of the work and the contract documents. The
Contractor shall indicate its review and approval by
• Layout and detail of fall protection and their sequence
including on each drawing the date and signature of a person
of installation.
designated by the Contractor as being responsible for the
The Contractor shall be responsible for the lateral stability Work. Working drawings shall be accompanied by a
of members and shall design and provide bracing as transmittal listing each of the drawings submitted. At the
necessary until completion of the Work. time of submission, the Contractor must notify the Ministry
The erection drawings shall be complete in detail for all Representative in writing of any deviations in the shop
anticipated phases and conditions during erection and drawings from the requirements of the contract documents.
during the temporary support of members. The Contractor Any Work done or materials ordered prior to the review of
shall submit calculations upon request, to the Ministry the working drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk. The
Representative that demonstrate that allowable stresses are Ministry Representative will review the drawings for
not exceeded in members, falsework, temporary bracing and general compliance with the contract requirements.
temporary supports and that member capacities and final If modifications to the drawings are required, the Ministry
geometry will be correct. The calculations shall be sealed Representative will return one set of drawings, marked up,
by the professional engineer that sealed the erection to the Contractor. The Contractor shall re-submit one
drawings. complete set of revised drawings in digital format to the
Falsework, temporary supports and temporary bracing shall Ministry Representative. Any drawing that has changed
meet the requirements of CSA S269.1, “Falsework and from the version originally submitted shall be identified as
formwork” and shall also meet all the requirements for such on a transmittal accompanying the revised drawing set.
falsework given in Clauses 20.17 to 20.26 inclusive of the If no exceptions are taken to the drawings, the Ministry
WCB Occupational Health and Safety Regulation. Representative will return one set of reviewed drawings to
A professional engineer registered with APEGBC shall be the Contractor. Shop drawings will not be reviewed without
responsible for any field designs and any changes made to the transportation and erection drawings applicable to the
the erection procedures. Field designs and changes to the members in question.

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (2 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 263 of 470
SECTION 415 MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST
AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

Any work done on materials ordered prior to the review of orientation within the PDF file set. Generally, 11” x 17”
working drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk. Erection plan sheets in landscape, 8½” x 11” note sheets in portrait,
will not be allowed to proceed without the Ministry so that the majority of text is vertical. PDF sheets shall be
Representative’s review of the method proposed.
ready to print out on appropriately sized paper sheets with
Review of working drawings shall not relieve the no additional formatting required by the viewer.
Contractor of any responsibility for dimensions or detail or
for carrying out the work in full accordance with the Drawings of large or complicated pieces, where it is not
drawings and specifications. practical to show all details on an 11” x 17” sheet, may be
If so agreed to in advance by the Ministry Representative, submitted on full size paper drawings, in which case the
working drawings may be submitted in paper format. The Contractor shall submit four copies of the drawing set.
reference to working drawing submittal copies shall be When revisions to full size paper drawings are required, the
increased to four paper copies in this case. Contractor shall supply four complete sets to the Ministry
Representative.
At least 14 days before fabrication is to commence, or as
otherwise requested by the Ministry, the fabricator shall 415.05 Alternative Details – All details shall, in general,
submit a schedule of fabrication to the Ministry conform to those shown on the Drawings. Any proposed
Representative in the form of a Gantt Chart. At the variation shall be submitted in accordance with the
discretion of the Ministry, the schedule shall be updated on provisions of SS 125 – Value Engineering Proposals. The
no less than a monthly basis. The schedule shall be provided submission of drawings showing alternative details shall be
to the Fabricator’s Quality Control organization and to the prepared and sealed by a professional engineer registered
Ministry Representative for reference and planning of with APEGBC.
inspections and progress reporting. The Contractor shall Alternative details must meet the requirements of the
report any interim variations to the schedule. Contract and shall require the acceptance of the Ministry
415.04.05 Working Drawing Format - The Contractor Representative prior to implementation.
shall transmit working drawings through attachments to e- Any consideration or implementation of a submitted VEP
mail. Unless otherwise agreed to by the Ministry by the Ministry will also be in accordance with SS 125.
Representative, electronic attachments to an email must
total no more than 7 MB and must be submitted unzipped. 415.06 Quality Control – The Contractor shall implement
Drawing files shall be submitted in PDF format to print out a quality control program to meet the Contract
on 11” x 17” size pages. PDF sets shall be created by requirements. The Quality Control plan shall be made
“distilling” CAD sheets rather than by scanning paper plan available to the Ministry Representative for review.
sets. Unless otherwise agreed to by the Ministry 415.07 Quality Assurance – The Ministry will implement
Representative, electronic attachments greater than 7 MB in a Quality Assurance program by auditing the Contractor's
size shall be sent in two parts by separate emails, denoting Quality Control program and by inspection at its discretion.
“1 of 2” and “2 of 2” in the subject lines after other required
subject-line information. The Contractor shall notify the Ministry Representative at
least 14 days before fabrication is to commence. In
If agreed to by the Ministry Representative, the Contractor addition, the Contractor shall provide a minimum of
may employ a document and data management service such 48 hours’ notice to the Ministry Representative that a
as SharePoint® to transmit working drawings. If this product will be available for inspection and/or certification
process is used, the limitation on drawing file size is waived. by the Ministry’s Inspector. If the schedule is subsequently
The Contractor shall be responsible for setting up the changed, the Contractor shall provide the 48hour notice
appropriate folders within the document and data from the time that the Ministry is notified of this change. If
management software and for providing access to these the product is not available or is not sufficiently complete
folders to the fabricator, Ministry Representative and the for inspection/certification as notified, at the sole discretion
design engineer.. Email notifications shall be sent to all of the Ministry Representative, the Contractor shall be
parties whenever updates are made. charged stand-by costs for the Ministry’s Inspector. The
The resolution of drawings shall be such that the finest detail Contractor shall allow the Ministry's representatives safe
access to all parts of work, and shall supply such
must be legible at full scale on a monitor without zooming
information and assistance as is required. When the
in (1-in. width on an 11 x 17-in. sheet is 1 in. on the Ministry requests, the Contractor shall provide samples of
monitor). any materials. Inspection by the Ministry Representative
shall not relieve the Contractor from obligation to perform
Drawings shall be black images on a white background.
the work in accordance with the Contract.
All PDF sheets within a single file shall be assembled Concrete tests shall be in accordance with the current
ensuring that all sheets are rotated to a “ready to read” CSA A23.2 and with concrete sampled as close to the point

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (3 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 264 of 470
SECTION 415 MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST
AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

of final deposit into the form as is practicable. All testing • MC low carbon, chromium steel; and
personnel shall be certified under CSA A283 or certified as • MS stainless steel.
an ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician – Grade 1
(minimum). The Contractor shall make available at the 415.11.05 Prestressing Steel – Pre-tensioning steel shall
plant a sheltered, heated space for the casting and storage of consist of seven-wire, uncoated, low relaxation strands as
test cylinders, with curing tanks and a concrete cylinder called for on the Drawings and complying with the
testing machine. requirements of ASTM A416M.
The Ministry may reject any items which, in its opinion, do All strands for each project shall be obtained from one mill,
not comply with the requirements of this specification. The and preferably strands from one heat shall be used for the
Ministry in its sole discretion may back charge all Work. Members shall use strands from one heat. When
inspection costs for the rejected material to the Contractor. multiple heats are used in a project, the modulus shall be
matched in all members. Each reel of strand shall be
Each unit shall be certified as acceptable by a Ministry identified by a secure tag showing the size of strand, CSA
Inspector before it is shipped from the shop. This or ASTM Designation number, heat number, and name or
certification shall not relieve the Contractor of mark of the manufacturer.
responsibility for subsequent damage or for defects which
become apparent before the work is finally accepted by the The Contractor shall supply to the Ministry Representative,
Ministry. The Contractor shall provide 5 days notice to the for each heat number, one set of the standard mill test
Ministry Representative regarding intent to ship a unit or reports. Strands shall be protected at all times to prevent
product and the product shall be made available for corrosion and shall be dry and clean (free from scale, rust,
inspection prior to loading and shipping. oil, soap, grease, and other deleterious materials)
immediately before the concrete is placed. No strand which
has previously been tensioned or gripped by strand chucks
MATERIALS shall be incorporated into the members.
415.11 Materials Supplied by the Contractor 415.11.06 Admixtures – Chemical admixtures shall
conform to ASTM C494. Air-entraining admixtures shall
415.11.01 Cement – Portland cement shall conform to the conform to ASTM C260.
requirements of CSA A3000.
Water reducing admixtures shall be of a lignosulfonic acid
Unless specified otherwise, the Contractor shall use Type or salt, or hydroxylated carboxylic acid or salt.
GU (General Use) or HE (High Early) Portland Cement.
GU cement shall have a C3A content of greater than 4.0% Type B, Retarding or Type D, Water-Reducing and
(by standard Bogue calculation) or 5% by mill certificate Retarding (Hydration Stabilizing) Admixtures conforming
and a Blaine Fineness of less than 480 m2/kg. to the requirements of ASTM C494 shall not be
incorporated into the mix design and/or added to the
415.11.02 Aggregates – Fine and Coarse Aggregates shall concrete without the acceptance of the Ministry
conform to CSA A23.1. Coarse aggregates shall not exceed Representative. When accepted by the Ministry
20 mm nominal size. Representative, the guidelines given in SS 415.37,
415.11.03 Water – Water shall conform to CSA A23.1. SS 415.40.01 and SS 415.42.01 shall apply.
The mortars and tests shall be made in accordance with 415.11.07 Mix Design Submittals – The Contractor shall
CSA A23.2. submit a report outlining the proposed mix design for each
415.11.04 Reinforcing Steel – All reinforcing steel shall be classification of concrete to the Ministry Representative for
in accordance with SS 412. review and acceptance in accordance with SS 211.03.04.
All reinforcing shall be of the lengths called for on the 415.12 Storage of Materials – All materials shall be stored
Drawings and all bends shall be made in accordance with in accordance with the requirements of CSA A23.1.
SS 412. Cement shipments shall be used in the order in which they
are received.
All bending schedules shall be furnished by the Contractor
for the Ministry's review and any material ordered before 415.13 Premixed Aggregates – Pre-mixed aggregates in
such review shall be at the Contractor's risk. The review of which the fine and coarse aggregates are combined in
bending diagrams by the Ministry shall in no way relieve definite proportions will be permitted provided that the
the Contractor of responsibility for the correctness thereof. aggregates are delivered in batches directly to the hopper of
the concrete mixer. Pre-mixed aggregates shall be
Reinforcing steel material/coating type is designated on the
transported and delivered in batches, each containing the
Drawings using the following abbreviations:
correct quantity for one batch of concrete. At no time after
• ME epoxy-coated; the fine and coarse aggregates are combined shall any batch
• MG galvanized; come in contact with or intermingle with any other batch.

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (4 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 265 of 470
SECTION 415 MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST
AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

415.14 Forms – All exterior forms shall be of steel and shall concrete, the placing and securing of reinforcing in the
be mortar-tight and of sufficient rigidity to prevent forms shall be inspected by the Ministry Representative.
distortion due to incidental loadings during construction. All reinforcing shall be placed in the full lengths called for
Forms for skewed ends may be of rigid steel-reinforced on the Drawings. Splicing of bars will not be permitted
plywood. unless acceptable to the Ministry Representative. Splices
Wood forms will be permitted for the side walls of ballast shall be staggered. Unless otherwise shown or called for on
wall pieces and for side walls of the deck panel pieces only. the Drawings, splices shall be made by lapping in
Wood formwork shall be designed, supplied and installed in accordance with the requirements of SS 412. The bars shall
accordance with CSA S269.1. Wood formwork shall render be placed so as to maintain the minimum specified
a true smooth surface free from fins and projections. Only clearances between bars and the concrete surface. Welding
new plywood shall be permitted for plywood formwork. of reinforcing steel shall be done only if called for on the
Forms shall produce 20 mm chamfers and fillets as shown Drawings.
on the Drawings. Tack welding of reinforcing steel, if permitted, shall be in
accordance with CSA W186-M.
415.15 Ministry's Office – Except for "on site" precasting
work, where an office is already provided under the general 415.32 Stressing – The dials of gauges shall be at least 150
contract, the Contractor shall provide at the point of mm in diameter; digital gauges are an acceptable
manufacture a suitable lock-up office for the sole use of the alternative. Gauges shall be calibrated with the hoses and
Ministry. jacks with which they are to be used, in accordance with
CSA A23.4 clause 28.2.3.2. The calibration must have been
The office shall be weatherproof and reasonably soundproof
and provided with ample window area and ventilation. performed within the previous 6 months of use or 12 months
Location of the office shall be acceptable to the Ministry maximum. Before stressing commences, certified
calibration curves shall be furnished to the Ministry
Representative. The office shall measure not less than 3 m
Representative. All strand chucks shall be cleaned and
x 4 m. In the event that the office is to be used concurrently
carefully inspected before each use.
with other inspection agencies, the minimum area required
for Ministry's use shall be 3 m x 4 m. The Contractor shall At the sole discretion of the Ministry, the stressing operation
install satisfactory heat and lights and provide a telephone, may be inspected by the Ministry Representative. The
high-speed internet access, and a draughting table 1 m x Contractor shall provide a minimum 48 hours notice to the
2.5 m in size with a plywood top, desk 0.75 m x 1 m, two Ministry Representative prior to the stressing operation to
chairs, drafting stool and one square metre of shelves. allow for inspection. If during the work any gauges give
Long distance calls made by Ministry personnel will be to erratic results, the tension system or tension device shall be
the Ministry's account. recalibrated.
The Contractor shall schedule the work so that placement of
The Contractor shall, during the life of the work, regularly
concrete follows tensioning of strands within 24 hours. In
clean and properly maintain, heat and light to the office.
cases of unavoidable delay, a maximum period of 80 hours
The office and contents shall be for the use of the Ministry will be allowed, provided that the strands do not show
Representative for the duration of the Work and may, if unacceptable corrosion (see current PCI “Manual for
necessary, be used concurrently with other inspection Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural
agencies. Precast Concrete Products”). The reason for the
unavoidable delay shall be documented in the Contractor’s
Quality Control documentation along with documentation
CONSTRUCTION that strand condition is still acceptable. This information
415.31 Reinforcing Steel – All reinforcing bars shall be shall be made available to the Ministry Representative upon
accurately placed in the positions shown on the Drawings request.
and firmly held during placing and setting of the concrete. Before tensioning, an initial force shall be applied to each
Installation shall be in accordance with SS 412 and this strand to equalize stresses and eliminate slack. This force
specification. Tolerances shall be as specified by CSA shall be between 5 and 25% of the final prestress force.
A23.4. After the initial tension forces have been applied, each
When placed in the work the reinforcing steel shall be free strand shall be marked at the outer end of each chuck as a
from dirt, rust, loose scale, paint, oil, or other foreign reference line from which the elongation of the strand can
materials. Bars shall be tied at all intersections except that be measured.
where spacing is less than 300 mm, alternate intersections The method of tensioning shall be such that the specified
shall be tied. Form clearance shall be maintained by stays, tension is maintained in the strands until the forces in the
ties, hangers or other approved supports. Before placing strands are transferred to the concrete member(s). The

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (5 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 266 of 470
SECTION 415 MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST
AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

maximum jacking load in each strand shall be 80% of the shall produce a certificate or report of inspection from a
ultimate strength of the strand. weights and measures approved, independent testing
A tensioning force shall be determined both by reading the authority, and which is not more than 6 months old. The
jacking load on the calibrated gauge and by measuring the certificate or report will be accepted as proof of accuracy for
the batching equipment. Cement in standard packages need
elongation of the strand. When the difference between the
not be weighed.
two methods is greater than 5%, the cause of the
discrepancy shall be ascertained and corrected. The surface moisture shall be determined in accordance
with CSA A23.2 and the batch weights of aggregates and
Elongations of strands shall be calculated and shown on the
water adjusted accordingly.
working drawings. Calculations for elongations shall
include appropriate allowances for possible slippage or 415.36 Mix Requirements – Minimum compressive
relaxation of the anchorages, friction at hold down points, strength at time of transfer of stress to the concrete and at
temperature difference, and strand relaxation. 28 days as determined by CSA A23.2 shall be as called for
on the Drawings. In any case, the force in the prestressing
415.33 Forms – The design of the forms shall take into
tendons shall not be transferred to the concrete until the
account the effect of vibration on concrete as it is placed.
compressive strength of the concrete is at least 25 MPa for
All exterior forms shall be set and maintained true to the pretensioned components and 20 MPa for post-tensioned
designated lines until the concrete has hardened. When components.
forms are unsatisfactory in any way, either before or during
Slump measurement shall be determined by CSA A23.2.
the placing of concrete, the Ministry Representative may
The mix design shall specify the slump and the tolerances
order the work stopped until the defects have been
corrected. in the measured slump shall be 20 mm for superplasticized
concrete. Slump shall not exceed 200 mm for
The shape, strength, rigidity, mortar-tightness and surface superplasticized concrete and shall be measured within 5
smoothness of re-used forms shall be maintained at all minutes after discharge from the mixer.
times. Any warped or bulged formwork must be realigned
before being re-used. Forms which are unsatisfactory in any In order to minimize shrinkage and creep, the
respect shall not be reused. cement/aggregate ratio shall be kept as low as is consistent
with strength requirements.
Void forms shall be of an approved product and shall be
anchored firmly by a method acceptable to the Ministry 415.36.01 Self Consolidating Concrete (SCC) – SCC
Representative to prevent displacement during the placing meeting the requirements of A23.1 may be considered for
of the concrete. Any member with a void out of position in use on a project-specific basis and its use is subject to the
excess of the specified tolerance will be rejected. Exterior approval of the Ministry Representative.
forms shall be treated in moderation with form oil before For the use of SCC to be considered, the Contractor shall
placing the concrete. Any material which will adhere to or submit the proposed mix design and detailed documentation
discolour the concrete shall not be used. for ministry review, a minimum of 28 days in advance of
Side forms and any attachments which would obstruct strain fabrication, which shall include as a minimum the
of the members shall be removed before transfer of stress. following:
415.34 Admixtures – The Contractor shall add sufficient (a) Details in accordance with CSA A23.2-24C
air-entraining agent to ensure an air-void system in documenting the proven history of successful
accordance with CSA A23.1 or as called for on the performance for the required strength, durability, and
Drawings, and as determined by an air-meter used in other performance requirements of the proposed mix
accordance with CSA A23.2. design in the fabrication of products similar to those
proposed for the use of SCC in the Work; or
The use of other admixtures, such as water-reducing agents
or superplasticizer, shall be subject to the acceptance of the (b) A full-scale test shall be used to verify the self-
Ministry Representative. consolidating characteristics for placement and for the
hardened concrete properties of the mix design for the
Type B, Retarding or Type D, Water-Reducing and
proposed application. Documentation in accordance
Retarding (Hydration Stabilizing) Admixtures shall not be
with CSA A23.2-24C shall be submitted demonstrating
incorporated into the mix design and/or added to the
that the proposed mix design will achieve the required
concrete without the acceptance of the Ministry
strength, durability, and performance requirements.
Representative. When accepted by the Ministry
Representative, the guidelines given in SS 415.37, The Ministry Representative may also request additional
SS 415.40.01 and SS 415.42.01 shall apply. documentation be submitted to assist in the ministry review.
If, in the sole discretion of the Ministry Representative, the
415.35 Measurement of Materials – Measurement of
materials shall conform to CSA A23.1. The Contractor

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (6 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 267 of 470
SECTION 415 MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST
AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

submitted documentation does not demonstrate acceptable performance concrete which shall be limited to a maximum
performance of the SCC, then SCC shall not be used. temperature of 25C.
415.37 Batching and Mixing – The batching plant and 415.38 Handling and Placing Concrete – In preparation
mixing of concrete shall conform to CSA A23.1. for the placing of concrete, all construction debris and
Mixing shall begin within 15 minutes after the cement has extraneous matter shall be removed from the interior of
been added either to the water or aggregate. forms. Struts, stays and braces inside the forms shall be kept
to a minimum and entirely removed when the concrete
Within 30 minutes after the introduction of the mixing water placing has reached an elevation rendering their service
to the cement and aggregate, or the cement to the aggregate, unnecessary.
the concrete shall be placed in its final position in the forms.
In hot weather or under other conditions contributing to Concrete shall be handled and placed in accordance with the
quick stiffening of the concrete, the maximum allowable requirements of CSA A23.1 and shall be placed in the
time may be reduced by the Ministry Representative. shortest possible time after mixing is completed. When
rectangular void forms are used, concrete under voids shall
Time of placement extensions will be considered on a case be placed and compacted before void forms are placed in
by case basis and may require the use of Hydration position.
Stabilizing Admixtures (HSA’s) conforming to the
requirements of ASTM C494 Type B, Retarding or Type D, Concrete may be deposited a maximum of 2 m without the
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixtures. If accepted by use of pipes, provided, when required, suitable measures are
the Ministry Representative, guidelines for the use of HSA’s taken to prevent segregation and premature coating of upper
shall be as follows: reinforcing steel. When pipes are used, they shall, as far as
practicable, be kept full of concrete during placing and their
• HSA modified concrete when used shall be fully lower ends shall be kept buried in the newly placed
discharged and placed in its final position within concrete.
90 minutes after the introduction of water to the cement
and aggregate. After initial set of the concrete, the forms shall not be jarred
and no stress shall be placed on projecting reinforcing bars.
• All concrete in a given precast element shall be placed
in its final position before 90 minutes. 415.39 Vibration – Concrete, during and immediately after
depositing, shall be thoroughly compacted. The compaction
• When HSA’s are used, these time extensions are shall be accomplished by mechanical vibration subject to
subject to preconstruction trials being conducted by the the following provisions:
Contractor, to establish the appropriate HSA dosage to
provide suitable extended slump life of concrete, (a) Vibration shall be internal for all accessible parts and
without increasing the water/cementitious ratio of the shall be external for inaccessible parts.
concrete above that which would be required if HSA’s (b) Vibrators shall be of a type and design acceptable to the
were not used.
Ministry. They shall be capable of transmitting
• The use of HSA’s shall in no instance modify the vibration to the concrete at frequencies recommended
maximum concrete temperature required at time of in CSA A23.1.
placement.
(c) The intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly
• A one time only addition of HSA will be allowed. This
affect a mass of concrete of 50 mm slump over a radius
will be during initial batching of the concrete or
of at least 500 mm.
immediately at completion of batching as
recommended by the admixture manufacturer. (d) The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of
Addition of HSA at any other time will be cause for vibrators to properly compact each batch immediately
rejection of the concrete. after concrete is placed in the forms.
Concrete mixing and transporting equipment shall be
(e) Vibrators shall be manipulated so as to thoroughly
capable of placing concrete in the forms at the rate of 20
work the concrete around the reinforcing and
cubic metres per hour. Batch delivery shall be uniform and
at a maximum interval of 10 minutes. embedded fixtures and into the corners and angles of
the forms.
The maximum size of each batch shall not exceed the
maximum rated capacity of the mixer as stated by the (f) Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in
manufacturer of the mixer. the area of freshly deposited concrete. The vibrators
Concrete when placed in the form shall have a temperature shall be inserted into and withdrawn from the concrete
not less than 10C nor greater than 30C, except for High- slowly. The vibration shall be of sufficient duration
and intensity to thoroughly compact the concrete, but
shall not be continued so as to cause segregation.

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (7 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 268 of 470
SECTION 415 MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST
AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

(g) Vibration shall not be continued at any one point to the prestressed girder where the release strength has been
extent that localized areas of grout are formed. determined by concrete test cylinders with similar areas on
the girder in question. If this situation occurs, extra pairs of
(h) Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly release cylinders shall be made on future casts until
spaced and not farther apart than twice the radius over confidence in determining the release strength is re-
which the vibration is visibly effective. established.
(i) Vibration shall not be applied directly or through the When HSA’s are incorporated into the mix design, pre-
reinforcement to sections or layers of concrete which construction tests shall be conducted to determine the rate
have hardened to the degree that the concrete ceases to of early strength development for the selected concrete mix
be plastic under vibration. It shall not be used to make design. Tests shall be repeated when there is a change in
concrete flow in the forms over distances so great as to the HSA dosage rate.
cause segregation, and vibrators shall not be used to 415.40.02 28 Day Strength – Two cylinders from each end
transport concrete in the forms. of the casting bed shall be identified as "acceptance
cylinders" and shall be cured in the Contractor's curing
(j) Vibration shall be supplemented by such spading as is tanks. These cylinders shall be tested by the Contractor
necessary to ensure a smooth surface and dense under the discretionary observation of the Ministry
concrete along form surfaces and in corners and Representative to determine the twenty-eight day strengths.
locations impossible to reach with the vibrators. The strength of the concrete in the member shall be taken as
the average of the compressive strength of the "acceptance
(k) Vibrator heads shall be smaller than the minimum clear
cylinders", however, no individual cylinder shall be more
distance between prestressing strands.
than 3.5 MPa below the specified strength and the average
415.40 Test Cylinders – The Contractor shall make strength shall equal or exceed the 28 day strength.
available, as may be required by the Ministry 415.40.03 Additional Cylinders – For special cases, extra
Representative, samples of the concrete used in casting the cylinders shall be made and tested if required by the
members. Ministry Representative. In the case of ready mix, and plant
Further, the Contractor shall take samples and make test mixed concrete with no established records, extra cylinders,
cylinders in the presence of the Ministry Representative and in addition to the release strength or 28 day strength
in accordance with CSA A23.2-1C, -3C and -9C. At least 8 cylinders, shall be made from each load.
cylinders per casting bed for prestressed girders, and 4 415.41 Surface Finish – Throughout the work, special
cylinders per casting bed for non-prestressed components precautions shall be employed in formwork and concrete
shall be made for testing. At the discretion of the Ministry placing to produce a smooth and dense concrete. Exposed
Representative, depending on the quantity and type of surfaces shall be as free as possible from form marks, fins,
element being cast, the number of cylinders may be reduced. honey-combing and pock marking. Only a minimum
Cylinders shall be representative of all stages of concrete amount of pointing will be allowed. Poor surface finish
placement. upon the removal of the forms shall be sufficient cause for
415.40.01 Release Strength – Two cylinders from each end the rejection of any member. All exposed edges shall be
of the casting bed shall be cured in the same manner as the chamfered unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
members and tested by the Contractor under the observation Roadway and surfaces to be bonded to shall be rough
of the Ministry Representative at the Contractor's plant to screeded by wood floating following initial strike off.
assess the strength of the concrete at the time of transfer of
force to the concrete. Only one cylinder from each end need Surfaces to be bonded to (e.g. keyways in box beams,
be tested if the average strength of the two cylinders is equal recesses at lifting devices) shall be sandblasted or exposed
to or greater than the required release strength at transfer with chemical retarder and water blasted to remove all
and no test cylinder is more than 1.4 MPa below the release laitance and foreign matter and to roughen the surface. The
strength. No transfer of force shall occur without the amplitude of the surface roughness shall be 5 mm. Loose
acceptance of the Ministry Representative. At the discretion sand and debris shall be washed or blown off. Water,
of the Ministry Representative, depending on the quantity cement or proprietary topping material shall not be added to
and type of element being cast, the number of cylinders may the surface during finishing. The surface roughness
be reduced. amplitude at keyways in box beams and recesses at the
lifting devices shall be approximately 1 mm.
If all release cylinders are tested and the release strength has
not been attained, further testing with an impact hammer Walkway surfaces shall be given a coarse transverse
shall be allowed, provided a written procedure acceptable to broomed finish following initial screeding and floating.
the Ministry Representative is provided by the Contractor. Roadway surfaces not requiring any wearing surface shall
The procedure shall correlate readings from areas of a be given a tined surface in accordance with

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (8 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 269 of 470
SECTION 415 MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST
AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

SS 413.31.02(e). Roadways receiving a membrane shall be heating elements. Pipes shall not be in contact with
finished in accordance with SS 419.33 and SS 413.31.02(e). concrete, form surfaces or test cylinders.
The outer surfaces of all outside stringers shall be given a Protection against moisture loss shall be by a continuous
Class 2 finish, and any other surfaces with a different sprinkling to a cover of burlap, cotton matting covering the
surface finish as indicated on the Drawings shall be finished surface with tarpaulins or plastic sheeting, using a water
in accordance with SS 211.17. spray, or ensuring that 100% relative humidity is present in
415.42 Curing – Precast or precast prestressed members the curing enclosure.
may be cured by steam or heat as outlined herein. An auxiliary cover in addition to the moisture retaining
cover shall be used above the entire bed to retain the heat.
415.42.01 Steam Curing – The concrete shall attain its
initial set before application of steam (generally 2 to 4 hours This cover shall be supported at a sufficient distance above
after the final placement of concrete or as justified by the member to allow circulation of the heat.
previous experience or in accordance with ASTM The cycle of application of heat, temperature limitations,
C403/C403M Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of reduction of temperatures and use of recording
Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance, all to the thermometers shall be similar to the cycle specified for
acceptance of the Ministry Representative. steam curing.
If HSA’s are used in the mix design, time to attain initial set 415.42.03 Additional Curing Requirements – Precast
after concrete has been placed may exceed that required for non-prestressed members shall be cured in accordance with
conventional concrete. the requirements of CSA A23.1 Section 7.8. Full depth and
After the placement of concrete, and until the concrete has partial depth precast deck panels, as well as precast wing
walls, parapets, abutments and pier caps, shall be cured in
attained initial set, sufficient steam shall be applied to hold
accordance with curing type 2 described in CSA A23.1
the air surrounding the member at a temperature not less
Table 19. The extended curing requirements of CSA A23.4
than 13C.
clause 23.3 shall be applied to these members. However,
Steam curing shall be done within a suitable enclosure to components containing silica fume concrete shall be cured
contain the steam and minimize moisture and heat losses. in accordance with curing type 3.
The enclosure shall allow free circulation of steam around
415.43 Draped Strands – Where called for on the
the sides and tops of members and shall not be in contact
Drawings strands shall be draped in accordance with CSA
with the member.
A23.4.
Steam at the outlets shall be at 100% relative humidity and
415.44 Transfer of Force to Concrete Members – The
low pressure, to achieve 95% relative humidity in the
transfer of the forces in the strands to the concrete
enclosure. Application of the steam shall not be directly on
member(s) shall be in accordance with CSA A23.4 (section
the concrete or test cylinders and shall be from outlets
on Detensioning).
distributed uniformly along the whole length of the member.
415.45 Protective Coating for Ends of Strands – After
Temperatures within the concrete shall be measured and
completion of concrete curing, the ends of tensile strands
recorded in accordance with CSA A23.4 clause 23.2.3.
shall be ground flush with the concrete surface. Where the
Recording of temperatures shall continue until the end of
ends of the members are to be embedded in concrete, the
the cooling-off period. If requested, temperature
ends of the strands shall be painted with two coats of an
measurement records shall be made available to the
organic zinc rich paint acceptable to the Ministry. Where
Ministry Representative. During application of the steam,
the ends of the members are not to be embedded in concrete,
the temperature within the concrete shall increase at a rate
the ends of the members shall be covered with thixotropic
not to exceed 20C per hour until an optimum temperature
epoxy to provide at least 3 mm cover for a band width of 50
of 55C is reached. In no case shall the temperature within mm on each side of all strands. This material is to be applied
the concrete exceed 70C. The maximum temperature shall in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
be held until the concrete has reached the transfer strength.
In discontinuing the steam, the concrete temperature shall 415.46 Tolerances – For bridge stringers, the tolerances
not decrease at a rate greater than 15C per hour until a specified in the PCI “Manual for Quality Control for Plants
temperature has been reached 20C above the temperature and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products"
of the air to which the concrete will be exposed.. shall be modified so that the length of each member,
measured parallel to the longitudinal axis, to extreme
415.42.02 Curing With Radiant Heat and Moisture – corners, at 20C, does not exceed the specified length by
Curing with radiant heat shall be done by heating the casting more than 10 mm / 10 m (25 mm maximum).
area in combination with measures to protect concrete
surfaces from moisture loss. Heat shall be applied by means The Contractor shall employ an adequate method of
of pipes circulating steam, hot oil or hot water or by electric checking tolerances both before and after placement of
concrete. Review of the method of checking tolerances by

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (9 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 270 of 470
SECTION 415 MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST
AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

the Ministry Representative will not limit the Contractor's • where fc = estimated strength of concrete at time of
responsibility for the accuracy of the members. shipping.
415.47 Repairs to Members – Defective areas should be Such sketch(es) shall be submitted at the time of submittal
repaired immediately following removal of forms and of the working drawings (see SS 415.04). Members
before detensioning of strands, except where observation of transported on supports further from their ends than outlined
the defect is not possible before detensioning. above, without the submittal of sketch(es) acceptable to the
If a defect is deemed to be a structural repair and meets the Ministry, will be rejected.
criteria stated in CSA A23.4 Section 33.3, notification shall Piles shall be lifted in the horizontal position at the pick-up
be provided to the Ministry Representative regarding the positions shown on the drawings and at no other points.
nature and extent of the defect. The Contactor shall follow When stacking for storage or for delivery, piles shall be
the repair procedures described in CSA A23.4 Section 33.3 supported at the pick up points. They shall be handled
and submit the proposed repair procedure to the Ministry carefully, avoiding dropping and jarring and avoiding
Representative for review and acceptance prior to any repair surface abrasions or other damage.
work being undertaken.
Any member damaged so as to be, in the opinion of the
Holes, honeycomb spots, etc., shall be treated as for Class 2 Ministry Representative, unfit for the use for which it is
finish in accordance with SS 211.17. The method of repair intended shall be replaced.
for cracks, broken corners and edges, bulges and other
415.49 Placement of Concrete in Keyways – Keyways
defects shall be submitted to the Ministry Representative for
between box stringers shall be clean and shall be pre-wet
review and acceptance. In any case, the Ministry
and saturated dry surfaces, before being filled with concrete.
Representative/Inspector shall be notified regarding all
repairs to precast and precast prestressed members. Concrete in keyways shall attain a strength of at least
15 MPa before light traffic such as one-tonne trucks are
415.48 Handling, Storing and Loading of Members –
allowed on the bridge, and at least 25 MPa before heavy
Members shall at all times be kept in their normal upright
loads such as concrete trucks are allowed on the bridge.
position during handling, storage and transportation. They
shall be picked up by means of vertical forces or forces 415.50 Post-Tensioning – All post-tensioning shall be done
inclined towards the opposite ends of the members by no in accordance with the SS 416 – "Manufacture and
more than 30º from the vertical, applied to lifting devices Installation of Post-Tensioned Concrete Members".
near the ends of the members. I-beams shall be adequately
stiffened during lifting and transportation.
QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM
Stored beams shall rest on unyielding level supports near
the ends of the beams. 415.61 Quality Control Program – These Subsections
describe the general Quality Control Program required by
When loaded for transportation, members shall be the Ministry of Transportation for any Fabricator
supported so that they will not be overstressed. In general, undertaking the fabrication of permanent precast concrete
beams with straight strands may be supported up to or precast prestressed concrete bridge components. The
one-tenth of their lengths from each end, whereas beams Quality Control Program shall be part of the overall Quality
with draped strands should be supported at their bearings. Management Plan for the project.
If the Contractor believes that it is possible to safely support
members further from their ends, the Contractor shall The term "Quality Control" defines those activities that the
submit to the Ministry Representative, sketch(es), sealed by Fabricator performs to conform to the Contract.
a registered professional engineer, showing the proposed The term "Quality Assurance" defines those activities that
support arrangement. Adequacy of support shall be based the Ministry performs to ensure conformance to the
on the following assumptions: Contract.
• l00% impact on cantilevering ends, when checking The term “Quality Audit” defines those activities that the
stresses at supports, Ministry performs to provide confidence that the QC and
• 50% negative impact on the whole member, when QA processes and resulting products satisfy the Contract
checking stress near midspan, requirements.
• 50% of prestress losses at time of shipping (unless These Subsections contain statements of the Quality
circumstances dictate otherwise), Objectives and Policies that the Ministry considers essential
for successful and economical quality management. They
• allowable tensile stress = 0.5√fc also outline the Procedures and Documentation to
• allowable compressive stress = 0.6fc implement and confirm that the Objectives are met.

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (10 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 271 of 470
SECTION 415 MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST
AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

The provisions of the Quality Control Program set forth in Any persons assigned to perform Quality Control
these Subsections shall apply to all precast concrete bridge inspections shall be other than those performing or directly
components. supervising the work and they shall not report directly to
These Subsections require the establishment of a Quality immediate supervisors responsible for producing the work.
Management Team with the responsibility for the successful The Quality Control Program is not subordinate to any
and timely implementation of all necessary Quality Control design, drafting, procurement, manufacturing and testing
and Quality Assurance activities. Some positions shown in activities, it is an essential part of them.
the Suggested Organization Chart (see Figure 1) may be
415.63 Scope of the Quality Control Programs – This
held by the same individual. For example, the General
Quality Control Program governs the fabrication of precast
Manager may also be the Contract Administrative Manager
concrete bridge components for the Work. The Suggested
and the Purchasing Manager. The Plant Superintendent
Organization Chart is shown in Figure 1.
may also be the Receiver and the Structural Supervisor.
The General Manager shall be responsible for:
415.62 Quality Objectives and Policies
• adhering to this Quality Control Program in all
415.62.01 Quality Objectives – The Quality Objectives of
respects.
the Ministry cover all precast concrete bridge components
produced under the Contract, as follows: • ensuring that completed structural components shall
conform fully to the applicable design and fabrication
(a) Completed products shall conform fully to the requirements stipulated in the Contract.
governing Codes and Specifications stipulated in the
Contract. • ensuring that all required documentation is produced
according to this Quality Control Program.
(b) The Quality Control Program shall be fully integrated
415.64 Range of Capability – Within the Company, there
into the ongoing manufacturing activities of the shall be the necessary knowledge, skill (in-house or on a
Fabricator. contract basis) and equipment to do the following work on
(c) The operations of the Quality Control Program shall precast concrete structural components:
protect the interests of the Ministry with respect to • Design of lifting and erection devices not shown on
scheduled delivery date and contracted price. drawings
415.62.02 Quality Policy – It is Ministry policy that the • Preparation of shop fabrication and working drawings
interests of the Contractor and the Ministry coincide when • Preparation of bills of material
a product meets the Quality requirements of the Contract, is
delivered on time, and is produced in a cost-effective • Preparation of material requisitions and purchase
manner. orders

The Quality Control Program is an essential part of this • Receiving, checking and storing materials for bridges
policy. It is based on the fact that the best way to do any job • Layout, form set-up, reinforcing steel, prestressing and
is to do it right the first time. This applies to all stages of post-tensioning
the design, drafting, procurement, manufacturing and
• Mix designs, batching, mixing, placing and curing of
testing of the product.
concrete
The Quality Control Program involves the Quality
• Sampling, testing, making and breaking of concrete test
Management Team, Ministry Representative and
cylinders
Fabricator personnel. Their activities must be consistent
with the Quality Objectives of the Ministry. • Dimensional checking and verification
A Quality Control Manager shall be appointed with defined • Resolution of non-conformances
responsibilities in resolving quality matters and shall report • Documentation of all stages of work with capability of
to a senior management level. At each hold point, the tracing all major components
Quality Control Manager shall:
• Finishing, patching, storing and shipping
• Document the successful completion of each stage as it
progresses through fabrication and erection. • Erection of bridge components
• Identify and report nonconforming components. 415.65 Drawings and Specifications – The Chief Design
Engineer shall be responsible for:
• Initiate or recommend disposition of nonconforming
components. • the design and location of lifting devices and the
preparation of stressing sheets for prestressing or post-
• Verify corrections.

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (11 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 272 of 470
SECTION 415 MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST
AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

tensioning; and for the design of the erection The Purchasing Manager shall deliver all documentation to
procedures and any special erection equipment needed. the Quality Control Manager for inclusion in the Quality
Control file for the Contract.
The Chief Draftsperson shall be responsible for:
415.67 Pre-Pour Inspection and Reporting – The Quality
• obtaining the latest revision of the design Drawings and
Control Manager shall ensure only documented materials
specifications for the work.
are used for the work.
• submitting working drawings, shop drawings and
Forms used in the casting of members shall be inspected
erection drawings to the Ministry for acceptance before
prior to use and shall meet all the requirements of CSA
commencement of the work.
A23.4.
• preparing material requisitions containing a full
Reinforcement shall be fabricated and placed to satisfy
description of the material sizes, material
SS 412 and CSA A23.4 and the detailed shop drawings for
specifications, and certifications required for
quantity and spacing. Any reinforcement used to anchor
conformance to the Contract.
cast in hardware by being welded to it will require the
• delivering the material requisitions to the Purchasing Fabricator to be certified to CSA W186-M.
Manager in ample time to permit ordering, delivery and
All cast in hardware shall be fabricated and placed
documentation and not delay the progress of the work.
according to CSA A23.4. Any hardware requiring welding,
• issuing requisitions for all sub-contracted drafting work including stud welding, will require the fabricator to be
and shall ensure that all conditions of the Contract are certified under CSA W47.1 Division 2 and have approved
part of such sub-contracts. procedures for each weld.
415.66 Material Control – All materials for structural All pre-tensioning operations shall be done according to
components shall be ordered by the Purchasing Manager in CSA A23.4. Care shall be taken to properly execute,
full conformance with the material requisitions provided by supervise and record the operations in a clear and legible
the Chief Draftsperson. manner.
The Purchase Orders shall contain all information necessary The Quality Control Manager shall file a written report of
to ensure that materials purchased will comply fully with verification with the General Manager and report any non-
the terms of the Contract. Where mill certificates and test conformance that may exist on any of the above items in
reports are required, it shall be so stated on the Purchase SS 415.67.
Order. Instructions shall state when the certificates and
415.68 Concrete Control – All materials used in concrete
reports are to be delivered to the Fabricator.
mixes such as cement, fine and coarse aggregates, and
If a supplier proposes a substitute for any material, the admixtures, shall have representative certificates that can
Purchasing Manager shall refer the proposed substitution to verify their quality.
the Chief Design Engineer for review. If the substitute is
Production of concrete shall be done according to the
acceptable to the Ministry, the Chief Draftsperson shall
amend all drawings and requisitions, withdraw old issues Contract. Records shall be kept of the mix type and quantity
and issue the new versions. used in each pour.
Handling, placing and vibration of freshly mixed concrete
The Receiver shall:
shall be done as per Contract specifications. Any variations
• inspect all materials on arrival for conformance with and interruptions in the process shall be recorded.
the Purchase Orders.
The sampling and testing of freshly mixed concrete shall be
• confirm that mill certificates and test reports are in accordance with the specifications and procedures laid
provided and that they correctly identify the materials out in CSA A23.2. Concrete test cylinders shall be made,
delivered. cured and tested in accordance with the Contract
• arrange with the Plant Superintendent to store all specifications.
materials for the Contract in segregated areas. Reports for all concrete testing shall be kept on file and all
• ensure all materials are clearly identified with the non-conformities reported.
Contract. 415.69 Post Pour Inspection and Reporting – Dimensions
• issue a non-conformance report covering overage, of all members shall be verified to ensure tolerances are
shortage or damage to the materials. Copies of the being maintained as per the Contract specifications.
report shall be provided to the Purchasing Manager and Verification shall be made of finishes, blockouts, keyways,
the Quality Control Manager. projecting rebar, sole plates and protection of the cut off
strands.
Camber shall be monitored at release and 28 days.

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (12 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 273 of 470
SECTION 415 MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST
AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

Members shall be stored according to the fabricator's 415.71 Welding – All welding on structural components
documented procedures. shall conform to the Welding Standards of the Contractor as
Members shall only be allowed to be shipped out for approved by the Canadian Welding Bureau.
erection after they have been approved by both Quality All welding consumables shall conform to the approved
Control and accepted by the Ministry Quality Assurance Welding Standards and shall be received, stored and
representative. A certificate of compliance may be issued conditioned according to the applicable Welding Standards.
by the Ministry Quality Assurance representative to All welders and welding operators on the Contract shall be
acknowledge acceptance. qualified under the requirements of the current CSA W47.1
Records shall be kept on file for all items in this section. division 2 or better.
415.70 Correction of Non-Conformities – When a non- All welding of reinforcing steel, when acceptable to the
conformance is encountered, the Quality Control Manager Ministry, shall be done by fabricators certified under
shall determine a recommended disposition and submit such CSA W186.
disposition to the Ministry Representative for acceptance as
415.72 Calibration of Measurement and Test
quickly as possible. Equipment – All measurement and testing equipment
If there is non-conformance to the material specification owned by the Fabricator and used in the Quality Control
stipulated in the Purchase Order, the Purchasing Manager Program shall be calibrated and re-calibrated at the intervals
shall immediately find out the reasons for the delivery of and in the manner stipulated in CSA A23.4.
non-conforming materials. If the material is of a grade When the concrete testing services are contracted to a
superior to that ordered, the Quality Control Manager and Qualified testing firm the testing firm shall meet the
the Chief Engineer shall be notified. They shall verify that
requirements of CSA A283. The testing firm shall confirm
the material is an acceptable alternative in all respects. This
in writing to the Ministry Representative that all their
verification shall include consultation with the Ministry. If
measurement and test equipment used in the testing is
the material is of a grade inferior to that ordered, it shall be
properly calibrated. If requested, they shall furnish copies
rejected and the correct material or a superior material shall of the calibration test data for inclusion in the contract
be obtained. documentation.
If there is non-conformance of material delivery that will
415.73 Records Retention – The Fabricator's Record File
delay production, the Contract Administrative Manager and
for each Contract shall contain the pertinent drawings,
Plant Superintendent shall be notified immediately. They purchase orders, bills of material, material mill certificates,
shall be given revised delivery dates for the adjustment of
test reports, Quality Control documents, and certificates of
production scheduling. The General Manager shall
compliance.
determine the alternatives available and shall notify the
Ministry. The Fabricator's Record File shall be made available to the
Ministry's Inspectors upon request.
If there are pre-pour non-conformities in form set-up,
prestressing, rebar placement, hardware and blockout size Items in the Fabricator's Record File shall be retained as per
and location, the Quality Control Manager and Structural company policy.
Supervisor shall immediately review the non-conformance The Quality Control Manager shall ensure that each file is
and notify the Chief Design Engineer who may require complete in all respects before it is placed in the Company
further investigation prior to submitting corrective action to archives.
the Ministry for acceptance. If the necessary corrective
action will result in delay to production, the General 415.74 Hold Points – In planning the work flow, it is
Manager shall be notified for adjustment to the production essential to coordinate with the Ministry Representative to
schedule. The Plant Superintendent shall inform the Quality decide "hold" points (as defined in SS 145.12) for
Control Manager when the corrective actions are being done inspection. A list of hold points shall be drawn up by the
so that conformance can be verified and the non- Fabricator and the Ministry at a prefabrication meeting. The
conformance report cancelled. Ministry should be continuously informed of progress so
that delays are minimized.
If there are post-pour non-conformities such as honeycombs
or large voids after form removal, before de-tensioning the The "hold" points will typically include, but not be limited
Quality Control Manager shall notify the Chief Design to, the following:
Engineer who will investigate and submit corrective action • verification of form size, quality and layout
to the Ministry for acceptance. Other non-conformities such
as low concrete strength, dimensional errors due to faulty • after stressing, rebar and hardware placement
forms, variations in camber from design and missing • prior to form close up
hardware shall all be reported by the Quality Control
• sampling and testing of concrete
Manager to the Ministry Representative.

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (13 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 274 of 470
SECTION 415 MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST
AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

• release cylinders PAYMENT

• after patching and finishing 415.91 Supply and Fabrication –Payment for supply and
• 28 day cylinder results fabrication of PRECAST CONCRETE MEMBERS will be
made at the lump sum price bid. Payment shall be for
• shipping arrangements. Quality Control, working drawings, supply and placing of
It must be understood that work will not proceed past a concrete, formwork, reinforcing steel, prestressing strands
"hold" point until it has been signed off by Quality Control and any required inserts. Payment shall also cover
and Quality Assurance. Reports must be completed tensioning, curing, release, stripping of forms, patching as
promptly. necessary and storage of members.
(Refer to the current edition of the PCI Manual – Publication 415.92 Shipping and Erection – Payment for shipping and
MNL-116 for "Sample Record Forms") erection of PRECAST CONCRETE MEMBERS will be
made at the lump sum price bid. Payment shall be for
Quality Control loading, shipping and unloading of
MEASUREMENT members. Payment shall also cover falsework and erection
of members. For box stringers, payment shall also cover the
415.81 Precast Concrete Members – Precast Concrete supply and placement of sealing strips between stringers.
members will be measured by EACH of the type specified.

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (14 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 275 of 470
SECTION 415 MANUFACTURE AND ERECTION OF PRECAST
AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBERS

BC MoTI SS 2020 415 (15 of 15)

Vol. 1 Page 276 of 470
 SECTION 416

MANUFACTURE AND INSTALLATION OF

POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE MEMBERS

DESCRIPTION 416.12.01 Internal Tendons – The sheaths for post-

tensioning ducts shall be made of galvanized steel or plastic.
416.01 Scope – This Section covers the manufacture and
Plastic sheaths shall meet the requirements of SS 416.12.02.
installation of post-tensioned concrete members.
The sheaths shall be corrugated, and chemically non-
416.02 General reactive with concrete, tendons, or grout. The inside cross-
sectional area of the sheaths shall be at least two times the
416.02.01 General Requirements – The requirements of
area of the prestressing steel.
CSA-S6, the Ministry Supplement to CSA-S6 and SS 415
shall apply unless specified otherwise herein or in the Rigid steel sheaths shall have a wall thickness of at least
Contract. 0.60 mm and shall be capable of bending to an inside radius
of 9 m without distress. Semi-rigid steel sheaths shall have
For items not covered in CSA-S6, the Ministry Supplement a wall thickness of at least 0.25 mm and shall be capable of
to CSA-S6 SS 415 or the Contract, then CSA A23.1,
bending to an inside radius of 3.50 m without distress.
Subsection 6.8, shall apply.
The ducts shall be spliced with telescopic sleeves. The joint
416.02.02 Post-Tensioning Procedure – Three weeks
lines between the ducts and the sleeves shall be wrapped
before post-tensioning, the Contractor shall submit to the
with tape or heat-shrink material to make the connections
Ministry Representative for review, complete details of the
mortar-tight.
proposed procedure, including jacking sequence and loads,
procedure for testing grout cubes, and a list of equipment. 416.12.02 External Tendons – Unless otherwise specified
This procedure shall be prepared and sealed by a in the Contract, sheaths for external post-tensioning shall be
professional engineer registered with the Association of made of plastic. Plastic sheaths, including their splices shall
Professional Engineers and Geoscientists of the Province of be made of high density polyethylene conforming to ASTM
British Columbia (APEGBC). D3350, cell classification 334420C. The polyethylene
sheath shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM
D2239.
MATERIALS Plastic sheaths shall not be used when the radius of
416.11 Anchorages – Anchorages tested in an unbonded curvature of the tendon is less than 10 m. Sheaths and their
state shall develop at least 95% of the minimum specified splices for external post-tensioning shall be smooth,
ultimate strength of the prestressing tendons, without seamless and capable of withstanding a grouting pressure of
exceeding anticipated set and without slippage. Test results at least 1 MPa.
or certificates meeting these requirements shall be supplied
416.13 Condition – Tendons, ducts, anchor assemblies and
by the Contractor.
other accessories shall be free of grease, oil and other
Anchorages shall be able to sustain the loads applied to foreign matter. A light coat of rust will be permissible
them without slippage, distortion or other changes that will provided any loose rust is removed and the surface of the
permit loss of prestress. steel is not pitted.
The anchorages shall be of such a nature that they will not 416.14 Epoxy – Epoxy applied to match-cast segment ends
kink, neck down or otherwise damage the prestressing steel. shall be as specified by AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specifications , Section 8.13.7.
416.12 Ducts – The ducts shall be provided with vents at all
high points and at the anchorages, so as to facilitate 416.15 Grout – Cement, water and admixtures for grout
grouting. Drains may be provided at low points. In any shall conform to the requirements of CSA A23.1, Clause
case, in cold weather, care shall be taken to prevent water 4.2. Unless otherwise specified, grout for post-tensioning
from collecting and freezing in the ducts. The locations of shall have a compressive strength of at least 20 MPa at 7
the vents and drains shall be as shown on the Drawings. days and 35 MPa at 28 days. The Contractor shall propose
a design mix for the grout and submit it for review and
Cored and external ducts shall be watertight when tested acceptance by the Ministry Representative before grouting
under an internal water pressure of 0.35 MPa. may begin.
The vents and drains shall be 13 mm minimum diameter The Contractor shall supply all materials for the grout.
flexible tubes. The connections to the ducts shall be made
with metallic structural fasteners, or an alternate approved The grout shall have a maximum water/cement ratio of 0.45.
by the Ministry Representative. The grout shall consist of a mixture of Type GU (general

BC MoTI SS 2020 416 (1 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 277 of 470
SECTION 416 MANUFACTURE AND INSTALLATION OF
POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE MEMBERS

use) cement, water and an approved admixture to control The grouting equipment shall be capable of continuously
expansion and pumpability. The admixture shall be an grouting the largest tendon on the project in 20 minutes.
aluminum powder base premixed material. Type HE (high
early strength) cement may be substituted for Type GU
during low temperature periods. The Contractor shall CONSTRUCTION
determine the dosage of the admixture by using volume
416.31 Anchorages – The spacing between anchorages
change and bleeding tests conducted before grouting
commences. The Contractor shall make test grout cubes shall be sufficient to allow the operation of the stressing
and deliver them to a testing agency acceptable to the jacks to be unimpeded by the adjacent tendons.
Ministry Representative. The axis of the tendons shall be in line with the anchorages
for a minimum of 400 mm.
The load from the anchoring devices shall be effectively
EQUIPMENT
distributed to the concrete.
416.21 Stressing Equipment
Anchorages shall be rigidly held in position when the
416.21.01 Supervision – The Contractor shall provide a concrete in the section is placed. Anchorages shall hold the
supervisor skilled in the use of the system of post-tensioning tensioned tendons without slip of more than 6 mm;
to be used. otherwise detensioning will be required.
416.21.02 Gauges and Calibration – The tensioning 416.32 Ducts – Vents and drains in the ducts shall be
system shall be equipped with analog or digital gauges that mortar-tight, taped as necessary and shall provide means for
have been calibrated for the specific jacks and controls by injection of grout and for sealing. The ends of vents and
an approved testing agency within the last 6 months. The drains shall be removed 25 mm below the concrete surfaces
dials of the analog gauges shall be at least 150 mm in after grouting has been completed. If drains are used, they
diameter. Before stressing commences, certified calibration shall be vented downward and shall remain open until
curves shall be furnished by the Contractor. grouting commences to permit the removal of any water that
may be present in the duct.
The tensioning system or tensioning devices shall be
recalibrated if during the work any gauges give erratic 416.33 Placement and Protection of the Tendons and
results. Other Accessories – The plan and profile location of the
ducts shall be as shown on the Drawings. Ducts shall be
416.22 Grout – The grout shall be mixed in a shear type
securely held at intervals of 1000 mm or less to prevent
(colloidal) mixer with sufficient capacity to guarantee a
displacement or flotation during the placement of concrete.
continuous supply of grout to the pump. The accessory
They shall be placed with a tolerance of ±6 mm in both the
equipment to batch all materials shall accurately measure all
vertical and the horizontal directions. The location of the
materials.
ducts shall permit the post-tensioning steel to follow the
The pump shall be a positive-displacement type and shall prescribed profiles.
produce an outlet pressure of at least 1 MPa. The pump
The anchorage assemblies shall be placed so that the bearing
shall have seals to prevent introduction of oil, air or other
surfaces are concentric with and perpendicular to the
foreign substance into the grout and to prevent loss of grout.
tendons within ±1°.
The grouting equipment shall utilize gravity feed to the
Immediately before concrete is placed, the post-tensioning
pump inlet from a hopper attached to and directly over it.
steel profile and alignment shall be checked and corrected
The hopper must be kept partially full of grout to prevent air
where necessary. The ducts, grout fittings, vents and drains
from being drawn into the ducts.
shall be inspected, and damage shall be repaired to prevent
The grouting equipment shall contain a screen having clear concrete from leaking into the ducts.
openings of 2.5 mm maximum to screen the grout prior to
The grout fittings and the ducts shall be adequately
its introduction into the grout pump. A screen opening of
protected from collapse and other damage. Grout openings,
5 mm is satisfactory if a grout with a thixotropic additive is
vents and drains must be securely anchored to prevent
used. This screen shall be readily accessible for inspection
displacement during concrete placing operations.
and cleaning.
The ends of the ducts shall be covered to prevent the entry
The Contractor shall have on site a pressure gauge with a
of water or debris after the installation in the forms.
full-scale of no greater than 2 MPa. The Ministry
Representative may request the Contractor to install the The ducts shall be blown out with compressed, oil-free air
gauge in the grout line between the pump outlet and the duct immediately after the completion of the concrete pour. The
inlets to confirm pumping pressures. compressed air shall be used to the extent necessary to break
up and remove any mortar in the ducts before it hardens.

BC MoTI SS 2020 416 (2 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 278 of 470
SECTION 416 MANUFACTURE AND INSTALLATION OF
POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE MEMBERS

The ducts shall be blown out clear of any water or debris The tensioning force shall be determined by the calibrated
again prior to the placing of the tendons. gauge and by the elongation of the strands. When there is a
difference of over 5% between the two means of
Duct ends at match-cast segment ends shall be fitted with
calculation, the cause of the discrepancy shall be ascertained
gaskets or other sealing devices to prevent infiltration of
and corrected.
epoxy during assembly. A uniform pressure of
approximately 0.3 MPa shall be applied to the joint during Tendons shall not be subjected to jacking forces in excess
the epoxy curing period. The pressure may be supplied by of 85% of their specified ultimate tensile strength. Any
stressing a cable to a predetermined level, or by other tendon subjected to such forces will be rejected.
means.
The required tendon elongation and jacking force shall be
Segmental section joints of 10 mm to 70 mm wide shall be computed, based on the required prestressing force and the
filled with a sand-cement mortar. Joints over 70 mm wide estimated prestress losses.
shall be filled with concrete. The strength of the mortar or
The Contractor shall mark the ends of each strand adjacent
concrete used in joints shall be at least equal to the parent
to the chuck wedge after stressing is complete.
concrete. The Contractor shall colour the mortar or concrete
to match the parent concrete. The Contractor shall submit a The safety of the stressing procedure shall be in accordance
trial mix with a proportion of white Portland cement, if with the Occupational Health and Safety Regulation.
necessary, to the Ministry Representative for review.
Stressing records shall be kept by the Contractor. Stressing
The concrete shall be vibrated with particular care at each records shall clearly identify the tendons that were stressed,
cast-in-place end block (push-through diaphragm) and the sequence, the final jacking loads, the tendon
post-tensioning anchorage location. This will ensure elongations, the times, the temperatures and the dates.
adequate consolidation in the anchorage zones. Stressing records shall be signed by the person supervising
the stressing and submitted to the Ministry Representative.
If the post-tensioning steel is installed prior to placing of
concrete in the cast in place elements, then the prestressing 416.35 Grouting – The temperature of grout shall be
steel in each tendon shall be pulled immediately after controlled by water temperature. Grout shall not be warmer
concreting, to ensure that it is free to move and is not bonded than 30°C or colder than 5°C at the pump. The grout shall
by concrete or grout leakage. be mixed for a minimum of 2 minutes. The materials shall
be batched in this order: water, cement and admixture. The
416.34 Stressing – The structure shall be stressed only after
admixture shall be added in accordance with the
the concrete has reached its transfer strength as shown on
manufacturer's instructions.
the Drawings. No tendons shall be stressed until authorized
by the Ministry Representative. The grout shall be mixed to a uniform consistency of thick
cream without lumps or undispersed cement. The grout
Tendons shall be stressed from the end as shown on the
shall be agitated continuously and shall be recirculated
Drawings.
when not injecting from the line.
The supports under the segmental sections shall be able to
Water shall not be added to the grout to increase the
accommodate horizontal movements caused by the
flowability that was decreased by delayed use of the grout.
stressing.
The grout shall be discarded when flowability has so
The multiple strands composing a tendon in a common duct decreased it cannot be pumped satisfactorily.
shall be tensioned simultaneously. Tendons shall be
The time between the tensioning and grouting of a tendon
tensioned in sequence as specified in the reviewed
shall not exceed 4 days.
procedure. The tendon force at lock-off shall be as shown
in the procedure. Cored ducts with concrete walls shall be flushed with clean
water to ensure that concrete is thoroughly wetted prior to
Before commencing the stressing operation an initial
grout injection. The ducts for external tendons shall be
tensioning force shall be applied to each tendon to equalize
checked for leakage and blockage by flushing with clean
stresses and to eliminate slack. This force shall not exceed
water under pressure followed by oil-free compressed air
20% of maximum jacking force.
immediately prior to grouting. Metal sheaths for internal
After the initial tension forces have been applied, reference ducts shall be flushed to clean out foreign materials, or oil
points shall be established for each tendon from which free compressed air shall be used to check for blockages.
elongation by final tensioning forces will be measured.
All grout and high point vent openings shall be open when
The specified tensioning force shall be maintained steady in grouting starts. Grout shall be allowed to flow from the first
the strands until they are anchored. The sequence of vent until any residual flushing water or entrapped air has
tensioning shall be such that no undue tension stresses occur been removed. The vent shall be capped or otherwise closed
in the concrete near the ends of the members.

BC MoTI SS 2020 416 (3 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 279 of 470
SECTION 416 MANUFACTURE AND INSTALLATION OF
POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE MEMBERS

at that time. The remaining vents shall be closed in The temperature of the concrete shall be 2°C or higher from
sequence in the same manner. the time of grouting until site-cured cubes of grout reach a
compressive strength of 6 MPa.
The pumping pressure at the tendon inlets shall be at least
0.7 MPa and shall not exceed 1.5 MPa. The grouted ducts may be subject to non-destructive testing
inspection by the Ministry to ensure that all ducts are fully
If the pumping pressure exceeds the maximum allowable,
grouted. The cost of the inspection will be borne by the
grout may be injected at any grouted vent, as long as a
Ministry if the inspection indicates that ducts are completely
one-way flow of grout is maintained. If this procedure is
filled with grout. Otherwise, the costs of inspection and the
used the vents that are to be used for injection shall be fitted
cost of reinspection shall borne by the Contractor.
with positive shutoffs.
416.36 Cropping – The cropping of post-tensioning strand
The grout shall be pumped through the ducts and
shall be by a cold-cutting procedure. It shall not take place
continuously wasted at the outlet pipes until no visible slugs
until authorized by the Ministry. The strand marks placed
of water or air are ejected. The efflux rate of the ejected
at end of stressing shall be inspected to ensure that no
grout shall not be less than the influx rate of the injected
slippage of strand has occurred prior to cropping. Under no
grout.
circumstances shall heat be applied to post-tensioning
To ensure that the tendons remain filled with grout, the strand from cropping or other operations. The cropped
outlets shall be closed, and the pressure held for 10 seconds. strand shall be provided with a minimum concrete cover of
The grouting ends shall then be plugged. Plugs, caps or 25 mm.
valves shall not be removed or opened until the grout has
416.37 Anchorage Recesses – The anchorage recesses shall
set. Alternatively, the outlets and inlets shall be kept under
be cleaned and sandblasted after completion of
a 1000 mm head of hydrostatic pressure. The 1000 mm
post-tensioning and grouting. The surfaces shall be coated
grout head shall be maintained until the grout has hardened.
with an epoxy bonding agent conforming to ASTM C881,
If the grouting operation is interrupted or it cannot be Type V, Grade 2. The Class of bonding agent shall be
completed due to mechanical failure or some other situation, appropriate for the temperature at time of application. The
then the grout shall be immediately flushed out of the ducts bonding agent shall be applied in accordance with the
with water when one-way flow of grout cannot be manufacturer's applications. Wire mesh acceptable to the
maintained. Standby water flushing equipment, with its Ministry representative shall be placed before concreting in
own source of power, shall be available in addition to the recesses larger than 300 mm square.
grouting equipment. It shall be capable of developing a
The Contractor shall fill the recesses flush with adjoining
pressure of 2 MPa, and sufficient capacity to flush out any
surfaces. All parts of anchorages shall have a minimum
partially grouted enclosures. After flushing, the ducts shall
cover of 25 mm. All recesses exposed to view shall be filled
be blown out with oil-free compressed air and then checked
with concrete coloured to match the parent concrete. If
for blockages. The grouting procedure shall be repeated if
requested, the Contractor shall submit a trial mix with a
there are no blockages.
proportion of white Portland cement to the Ministry
The ducts shall be completely filled with grout. The Representative for review.
presence of ungrouted lengths of duct shall be cause for
nonacceptance of the members. Members with partially
ungrouted duct(s) shall be replaced or repaired to the PAYMENT
satisfaction of the Ministry at the Contractor's expense.
416.90 Payment – Payment for Manufacture and
Great care shall be taken to prevent blockages of the ducts Installation of Post-Tensioned Concrete Members will be
due to grouting of nearby ducts or other causes. made at the Lump Sum Price bid. Payment shall include
supply and pumping of grout into the post-tensioning ducts,
All costs for investigations and for remedial measures due
patching of the anchorage recesses, supply and placing of
to blockages shall be at the Contractor's expense.
elastomeric pads and strips and grout between stringers, and
The grouting shall not be done when air temperatures are supplying, placing and tensioning of strands. Payment shall
above 32°C or below 5°C, nor when freezing temperatures also include splicing of precast segments (if required) and
are predicted within the next 24 hours. the supply of all material and labour.

BC MoTI SS 2020 416 (4 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 280 of 470
 SECTION 418

SILANE TREATMENT OF NEW CONCRETE BRIDGE SURFACES

418.01 Scope – This Section describes the treatment of new 418.05 Surface Preparation – All concrete surfaces prepared
concrete bridge surfaces with a silane protective solution. for treatment shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to application
The Specification describes surface preparation and of the silane solution. The method of cleaning shall be
application. capable of removing loose concrete, curing compounds,
laitance, dirt, dust, salt, oil, asphalt or other foreign materials.
Surfaces to be treated shall be as specified on the Drawings or
The cleaning process shall expose concrete pores and
in the Special Provisions.
capillaries to readily accommodate silane penetration.
418.02 Silane Solution – The silane solution shall be carried
The cleaning process shall not damage the concrete surface,
in a solution to meet the Canadian Environmental Protection
remove or alter the existing surface finish, or expose the
Act, Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Limits for
coarse aggregate of the concrete. The method of cleaning
Architectural Coatings Regulations, SOR/2009-264.
shall be performed in such a manner as to provide a uniform
418.02.01 Delivery and Storage of Silane Solution – The appearing surface colour.
silane solution shall be delivered to the Site in unopened,
418.05.01 Pre-Surface Cleaning – If necessary, pre-surface
sealed containers with original seals intact, also with a
cleaning preparations may include the use of solvent and hand
manufacturer's label identifying the product (including a
tools to remove materials detrimental to the silane treatment
batch number). The containers holding silane solution shall
of the concrete surface.
be stored in dry, enclosed structures to protect the contents
from misuse, weather and excessive heat. 418.05.02 Surface Cleaning – Suitable methods to clean the
concrete surface are:
418.02.02 Quality Assurance – Only silane solutions listed
in the Recognized Products List shall be permitted for use in • Sand blasting
the Work.
• Steel shotblasting
The Recognized Products List may be found on-line at:
• Hydro blasting
https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/transportation/trans
• Steam cleaning
portation-infrastructure/engineering-standards-
guidelines/recognized-products-list • Water pressure washing using a minimum of 3.5 MPa
(500 psi) nozzle pressure.
Certification shall be required for each batch shipment of
silane solution, prior to its use. The cleaning method used shall be capable of cleaning
concrete surfaces, as specified.
418.03 Contractor's Qualification – The applicator shall
have a minimum of three years of successful and documented 418.06 Silane Application – Silane application shall proceed
experience in application of liquid water repellents to only if the condition of the cleaned concrete surface is
concrete or masonry substrates, or else the applicator must accepted by the Ministry Representative.
provide documentation certifying that training approved by
the manufacturer for applying silane solution was received. 418.06.01 Surface Condition – All concrete surfaces shall be
Certification shall be provided to the Ministry Representative fully dry prior to silane solution application. Concrete
surfaces previously steam cleaned or water washed must be
upon request.
allowed to dry prior to application of silane solution for:
418.04 Site Conditions
(a) Minimum one day during windy or sunny days when air
418.04.01 Substrate Condition – Prior to silane treatment: temperatures are over 20°C.
(a) New concrete shall be cured for a minimum of 28 days. (b) Minimum two days during calm or cold days when air
temperatures are between 4°C to 20°C.
(b) All concrete surfaces shall be fully dry.
418.06.02 Silane Solution – The silane solution shall be used
418.04.02 Weather Limitations – Application of silane
as supplied by the manufacturer. It shall not be diluted or
solution shall be undertaken only during periods when rain or
altered in any way. Water shall not be allowed to contaminate
snow has not occurred during the previous two days and no
the silane solution.
rain or snow is forecast by the local weather office for the next
two days. 418.06.03 Application Equipment – The silane solution
shall be sprayed on the concrete surface by using low pressure
Application of silane solution shall proceed only when the
0.1 – 0.2 MPa (15 – 30 psi) positive displacement airless
concrete surface temperature is above 4°C and below 32°C,
spray equipment. Suitable equipment is a pressurized garden
and windspeed is less than 24 km/hr.

BC MoTI SS 2020 418 (1 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 281 of 470
SECTION 418 SILANE TREATMENT OF
NEW CONCRETE BRIDGE SURFACES
sprayer or drum mounted pump. Large deck areas over 418.06.06 Curing – Following the application, the surface of
400 m2 shall be sprayed using a spraybar type unit. silane treated concrete shall be cured by mist spraying with
water after:
All spray equipment shall be fitted with fan spray nozzles and
the spray adjusted to a "wet spray" condition (i.e., minimum (a) 4-6 hrs, during days with temperatures between 25°C to
atomization of silane solution). 32°C;
(a) Cleaning of Application Equipment – All application (b) 6-12 hrs, during days with temperatures between 15°C to
equipment must be clean and dry prior to use. If 25°C; or
equipment is wet, it shall be rinsed with a small amount
(c) 12-24 hrs, during days with temperatures between 4°C to
of methyl hydrate (methanol) prior to commencement of
15°C.
the actual application.
The traffic may be allowed on silane treated concrete one hour
418.06.04 Rate of Application
after the water wetting operation.
(a) Surfaces Subject to Traffic Wear – Bridge decks and
418.07 Safety and Health Hazards – Personnel exposed to
other surfaces subject to traffic wear shall be treated with
silane solution and methyl hydrate shall wear personal
silane solution at a rate of 0.40 L/m2.
protective equipment such as coveralls, goggles, rubber
(b) Surfaces not Subject to Traffic Wear – Surfaces not gloves and proper respirators.
subject to traffic wear (parapets, pier caps, sidewalks,
No smoking, open flames, sources of heat or ignition shall be
etc.) shall be treated with silane solution at a rate of
permitted during the construction operation.
0.23 L/m2.
Special precautions must be taken during construction to
418.06.05 Method of Application – Silane solution shall be
prevent any over spray or spillage of materials on plants and
applied at a coverage rate according to this Specification.
vegetation or into fish-habitat water bodies and work shall be
Horizontal surfaces shall be uniformly sprayed to
in accordance with SS 165, Protection of the Environment.
saturate/flood the surface. Vertical surfaces should be treated
from the bottom up and uniformly sprayed to saturate the Manufacturer's material safety data and handling instructions,
surface. including disposal of containers, shall be followed.
If it is not possible to complete the silane treatment in one 418.08 Measurement and Payment – Payment for the
application, the boundary between the treated and untreated concrete deck sealant will be made at the Unit Price bid per
areas shall be clearly marked. square metre for the preparation of the concrete surfaces and
the supply, application and curing of the deck sealant.

BC MoTI SS 2020 418 (2 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 282 of 470
 SECTION 419

CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM

PREFABRICATED MEMBRANE

DESCRIPTION MATERIALS
419.01 Scope – This Section describes the protection of 419.11 General – Materials shall be provided as follows.
concrete bridge decks with Rubberized Asphalt
419.11.01 Prefabricated Membrane
Prefabricated Membrane (Prefabricated Membrane) and an
overlay of hot applied asphalt pavement. (a) Selection – The Contractor shall use a Prefabricated
Membrane selected from the Recognized Products List
The area to be covered with Prefabricated Membrane shall
(RPL) under the category "Prefabricated Membrane for
be as shown on the Drawings or as described in the Special
Concrete Decks".
Provisions.
(b) Supplier – The Prefabricated Membrane shall be
This Section describes supply, installation, materials,
supplied by the supplier/manufacturer of the
surface preparation, application, and other related
prefabricated membrane as a complete package.
requirements.
(c) Package – The Prefabricated Membrane package shall
NOTE: Prefabricated Membrane shall not be used on
be comprised of the following materials: primer,
Ministry concrete bridge decks contaminated with acid-
prefabricated membrane detailing strip, full width
soluble chloride ion (Cl-) in excess of 0.10% by mass of
prefabricated membrane and mastic.
cement.
(d) Information Requirements – Two weeks prior to the
419.02 Applicator’s Qualification – Only applicator(s)
application of the Prefabricated Membrane, the
trained and certified by the Prefabricated Membrane
Contractor shall provide the Ministry Representative
supplier/manufacturer, whose product is used in the Work,
with a list of the supplier/manufacturer's materials for
will be permitted to install waterproofing membrane and
the selected Prefabricated Membrane and also provide
accessories. Certification documentation shall be provided
detailed specifications, installation procedures,
to the Ministry Representative upon request.
technical data sheets, safety data sheets and quality
Special Provisions may identify alternate acceptable control procedures.
documentation for remote locations and special
419.11.02 Primer – The Primer used in conjunction with
requirements.
the Prefabricated Membrane shall be a rubberized asphalt or
419.03 Quality Control – Installation and quality of the polymer dispersed in organic solvent with minimum solids
Prefabricated Membrane shall be inspected and corrected by of 45% (by mass), and maximum drying time of one hour.
the Contractor in accordance with SS 419 and the
419.11.03 Prefabricated Membrane Detailing Strip –
supplier/manufacturer's requirements. If there is a
Prefabricated Membrane Detailing Strip (Membrane
discrepancy between the two, the more stringent
Detailing Strip), shall be a self-adhering internally
requirement shall apply. In cases where it may be unclear
reinforced sheet of rubberized asphalt and shall have
as to which requirement is more stringent, the Ministry
thickness between 1.50 and 1.75 mm (60 to 70 mils) and
Representative will have the final say.
shall be supplied in rolls of 300 mm width.
The Contractor shall provide a copy of the
419.11.04 Full Width Prefabricated Membrane – Full
supplier/manufacturer's quality control certification for
Width Prefabricated Membrane shall be a self-adhering
each lot of material prior to its use in the Works.
internally reinforced sheet of rubberized asphalt.
419.04 Quality Assurance – The Ministry will implement Prefabricated Membrane shall have a minimum thickness of
a quality assurance program by auditing the Contractor's 1.5 mm (60 mils) and shall be supplied in rolls of width
quality control program and by inspection at its discretion. between 900 mm and 1500 mm.
The Contractor shall notify the Ministry Representative at 419.11.05 Mastic – Mastic shall be a single component
least 48 hours before installation of the Prefabricated material, consisting of rubberized asphalt, organic solvent
Membrane. Inspection by the Ministry shall not relieve the and fillers, supplied in caulking tubes.
Contractor from obligation to perform the work in 419.12 Delivery and Storage – Prefabricated Membrane
accordance with the Contract. and accessory materials shall be delivered to the Site in
unopened packages and containers with manufacturer's
label identifying the product and a batch number.

BC MoTI SS 2020 419 (1 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 283 of 470
SECTION 419 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
PREFABRICATED MEMBRANE

The packages and containers shall be stored in a dry secured (iv) hydro blasting using a minimum of 17.5 MPa
place protected from weather and excessive heat. Specific (2500 psi) nozzle pressure; and
manufacturer's instructions for handling and storage shall be
(v) steam cleaning.
followed.
The method used shall be capable of removing concrete
laitance and cleaning concrete surfaces as specified to
CONSTRUCTION meet the Prefabricated Membrane manufacturer’s
requirements for a clean and smooth surface.
419.31 Traffic Restrictions - All traffic, other than
construction equipment directly associated with the 419.34 Priming – All concrete deck surfaces that are to
installation of the Prefabricated Membrane and placement receive Prefabricated Membrane must be treated with a
of asphalt pavement shall be prevented from using areas of Primer. Primer shall be used as supplied by the
the deck that have received surface preparation until paving manufacturer. It shall not be diluted or altered in any way.
of that area is completed.
419.34.01 Concrete Surfaces – All concrete surfaces shall
419.32 Job Site Conditions – In addition to the be clean and fully dry prior to application of Primer.
supplier/manufacturer's specifications, the following Concrete surfaces previously steam cleaned, or water
conditions shall apply. washed must be allowed to dry prior to application of Primer
for:
419.32.01 Weather Limitations – Application of Primer
and installation of Prefabricated Membrane and pavement (a) minimum 24 hours during windy or sunny days when
overlay shall be undertaken only during stable weather air temperatures are over 20°C.
when precipitation has not occurred during the previous 48
(b) minimum 48 hours during calm or cold days when air
hours and is not imminent and when the minimum ambient
temperatures are between 5° to 20°C.
and concrete surface temperature is at least 5°C and rising.
419.34.02 Primer Application – Primer application shall
419.32.02 Substrate Conditions – Prior to the application
proceed only if the condition of cleaned and repaired
of Prefabricated Membrane, new concrete shall be cured for
concrete surfaces is approved by the Ministry
a minimum of 28 days or as otherwise required by the
Representative.
Ministry Representative to ensure the extent of substrate
moisture from the hydration process is not trapped beneath All concrete surfaces to be covered with Prefabricated
the Prefabricated Membrane nor restricting the penetration Membrane shall be uniformly treated with Primer at the rate
of the Primer. recommended by the supplier/manufacturer (typical rates
are 0.15 to 0.25 L/m², depending on the porosity of the
419.33 Surface Preparation – All concrete surfaces for
concrete).
application of a Prefabricated Membrane shall be sound,
smoothed to a profile of less than 2 mm, clean, and free from The Primer shall be uniformly applied to the concrete deck
any contamination. surface by roller or brush.
419.33.01 Preparation Conditions 419.34.03 Primer Curing – Only as much surface as will
be covered by Prefabricated Membrane in the workday shall
(a) All defects in concrete surfaces, cracks, delamination
be primed. Primed concrete surfaces not covered by
and spalled areas shall be repaired with a suitable
Prefabricated Membrane within the workday must be
patching material. All patching shall be cured to the
reprimed immediately prior to Prefabricated Membrane
acceptance of the Ministry Representative.
installation.
(b) All protrusions shall be removed, and all edges shall be
All primed areas must be tack free prior to application of the
rounded to a minimum radius of 10 mm.
Prefabricated Membrane.
(c) Concrete bridge decks and concrete-filled shear keys
419.35 Prefabricated Membrane Installation
between prestressed concrete box stringers shall have
smooth finish. Broom finishes are not acceptable. 419.35.01 Detail Work – Extra attention must be given to
all detail work which shall be performed prior to final
(d) All loose aggregates, laitance, dust, soil, oil and other
installation of the full-width membrane.
debris and contaminants shall be removed from the
concrete surface by one or more of a combination of the The work shall be completed in accordance with
following methods: SS Drawings SP 419-01 through -08, other related Special
Provisions and as follows:
(i) high pressure clean dry air sweeping;
(a) Curb or Parapet – inside corners at curbs or parapets
(ii) sand blasting;
shall be covered using a Membrane Detailing Strip.
(iii) steel shot blasting; The uppermost edge of the Membrane Detailing Strip

BC MoTI SS 2020 419 (2 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 284 of 470
SECTION 419 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
PREFABRICATED MEMBRANE

shall be placed and extended up the face of curb or Prefabricated Membrane. See SS Drawings SP419-05
parapet to 6 mm (1/4") below the finished height of the to SP419-07.
asphalt pavement overlay and terminated in a 12 mm
419.35.02 Installation of Prefabricated Membrane – The
deep saw cut in the face. The Membrane Detailing
full width Prefabricated Membrane shall be applied in a
Strip shall be installed in such a manner to ensure it is
longitudinal direction from the low point to the high point
smooth and that it adheres strongly to the face of curb
so that laps shed water. The area along the lower edge of
or parapet, and bridge deck without any visible defects
the deck shall be covered first.
("tenting", "fish mouth" or "bubbles"). The first sheet
of the full width of the Prefabricated Membrane shall The full width Prefabricated Membrane shall be laid flat,
then be applied as close as possible to the curb or avoiding wrinkles and entrapped air. Each succeeding sheet
parapet. of Prefabricated Membrane shall be applied overlapping the
side laps a minimum 65 mm and the end laps a minimum
(b) Bridge Deck Edge – on bridge decks without curbs or
150 mm. The entire surface of the Prefabricated Membrane,
parapets, the full width Prefabricated Membrane or
especially laps, and all terminations shall then be rolled with
Membrane Detailing Strip shall terminate 6 mm (1/4")
sufficient pressure to affect a bond between the
from the outer edges of the deck. The Prefabricated
Prefabricated Membrane and the concrete surface.
Membrane shall be heated at the edge of the deck with
light flame from a torch or with a hot air gun, followed 419.35.03 Mastic Application – All Prefabricated
by pressing the Prefabricated Membrane down with a Membrane terminations shall be sealed with a trowelled
roller. application of mastic 12 to 25 mm wide and 1.5 to 3.0 mm
thick. Mastic shall be applied along the edge of the
(c) Drains – areas around drains, basins and any other
Prefabricated Membrane at the face of the curb or parapet,
protrusions shall be double covered with Prefabricated
along both sides of the deck joints, around drains and weep
Membrane. First, flashing pieces of Membrane
holes and at termination of the Prefabricated Membrane on
Detailing Strip are applied, followed by the application
both ends of bridge approaches.
of the full width Prefabricated Membrane. The
Prefabricated Membrane shall be installed in such a At the end of each working day, or when application is
way as not to obstruct openings of drains and basins. interrupted by a change in construction scheduling or
weather, all Prefabricated Membrane terminations shall be
(d) Weep Holes – do not require a Membrane Detailing
sealed with the mastic.
Strip. The diameter of weep holes should be 25 mm
(1"). The Prefabricated Membrane around weep holes 419.35.04 Inspection and Repairs – Prior to paving over
shall be heated with light flame from a torch or hot air the Prefabricated Membrane, any defective areas of the
gun, and pressed down to expose the opening of the Prefabricated Membrane shall be repaired to the satisfaction
hole. Where the Drawings do not indicate weep holes, of the Ministry Representative, including:
the Ministry Representative may identify locations for
weep holes at approximately every 3m along the edge (a) tears, damaged areas and inadequately lapped seams
of the curb or deck and the work to install these shall be patched;
additional weep holes will be paid for as Extra Work. (b) fish mouth shall be slit and repaired;
(e) Shear Keys, Joints and Cracks – All shear keys, (c) large blisters shall be punctured and repaired; and
joints with a gap less than 6 mm , and all filled cracks
(d) if water migrates underneath the installed Prefabricated
wider than 3 mm shall be covered with a 300 mm wide
Membrane, then the Prefabricated Membrane covering
Membrane Detailing Strip prior to application of a full
the affected area shall be removed and replaced.
width Prefabricated Membrane. Joints wider than
6 mm shall be treated as a standard expansion joint and 419.35.05 Traffic on Prefabricated Membrane – Traffic
Prefabricated Membrane shall be terminated at the shall not be permitted on the Prefabricated Membrane prior
expansion joint assembly. to installation of the first lift of asphalt pavement with the
exception of vehicles and equipment engaged in installing
(f) Bridge Ends – A 150 mm wide Membrane Detailing
the asphalt pavement Only vehicles or equipment provided
Strip shall be installed over the joint between the
with pneumatic tires or with flat tracks with rubber bonded
existing pavement and the bridge deck. At each end of
pads, shall be permitted on the Prefabricated Membrane.
the bridge deck, a full-width Prefabricated Membrane
shall extend at least 900 mm over the paved bridge Any turning or sudden braking on the Prefabricated
approaches. In the case of Prefabricated Membrane Membrane shall be avoided. Any damage to the
application on an existing structure with gravel Prefabricated Membrane resulting from the movement of
approaches, the Membrane Detailing Strip of vehicles or equipment shall be repaired at the Contractor's
Prefabricated Membrane shall be folded 150 mm over expense.
the deck edge and covered with a full width

BC MoTI SS 2020 419 (3 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 285 of 470
SECTION 419 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
PREFABRICATED MEMBRANE

419.36 Paving – Asphalt overlay construction shall proceed (i) unloading of the asphalt mix from the hauling trucks
only when the final condition of the installed waterproofing onto the Prefabricated Membrane surface will not be
Prefabricated Membrane is accepted by the Ministry permitted;
Representative.
(j) paver screed burners shall be set in such a way as to
Prior to commencing asphalt pavement construction, the avoid any damage to the Prefabricated Membrane from
weight of equipment, including loaded trucks, paver and excessive heat;
rollers, and their maximum combined weight must be
(k) the path in front of the screed side end plate must be
accepted by the Ministry's responsible Bridge Engineer.
kept continuously free from spilled asphalt mix. The
Only this accepted equipment and equipment combination
bottom of the side end plate shall slide freely, otherwise
shall be permitted on the bridge structure at the time of
the entrapped asphalt mix could damage the underlying
construction.
Prefabricated Membrane;
Asphalt materials, mix design, mix production and hot mix
(l) screed adjustments during paving shall be made in such
asphalt pavement construction shall meet the requirements
a way as to achieve a specified thickness of mat, surface
of SS 502 and SS 952. Special Provisions will identify any
texture, smoothness and designed pavement
changes to SS 502 bonus/penalty requirements for the
geometrics;
bridge application.
(m) the bridge deck joints, drains and other openings
419.36.01 Asphalt Mix and Pavement Design – Asphalt
(except weep holes) shall be protected to avoid
mix shall meet the requirements for Pavement Class 1,
intrusion of asphalt during the paving operation; and
Medium Mix and appropriate asphalt binder. The asphalt
pavement mix shall be paver laid and compacted in two (n) during a "one lane at a time" construction method, as
nominal 50 mm lifts. on bridges partially open to traffic, the constructed
pavement mat shall terminate not less than 150 mm
419.36.02 Placing the Asphalt Mix – In addition to
from the edge of installed Prefabricated Membrane in
standard paving practice:
order to provide a sufficient area for lapping of the next
(a) paving shall only proceed over dry Prefabricated sheet of the Prefabricated Membrane.
Membrane;
419.36.03 Asphalt Pavement Compaction – In addition to
(b) no asphalt primer shall contaminate the Prefabricated standard compacting practice:
Membrane surface;
(a) drum vibration mode must not be used during
(c) paving operation shall commence as soon as possible compaction.
after the waterproofing Prefabricated Membrane is
(b) steel drum shall run as close as possible to the outer
installed;
edge, curb or parapet. Outer edge, curb or parapet areas
(d) paving shall proceed in the direction of the end laps in that are inaccessible by the steel drum shall be
the Prefabricated Membrane (i.e., from overlap to compacted by a plate compactor.
underlap); and where more than one width of pavement
(c) compaction along the end asphalt plug fillet, expansion
is to be laid the first width shall be laid starting at the
joints or concrete dams shall be performed transversely
lower edge transversely (i.e. on super elevated bridges
with a steel drum or plate compactor if access by the
the first mat of pavement is to be started at the lower
steel drum is not practicable.
edge of the deck to avoid shifting of the mat on the
membrane). (d) sudden stops or sharp turns by rollers shall be avoided.
(e) the Contractor shall take due precautions to avoid 419.36.04 Hand Work – Placing of asphalt mix in areas
damage to the waterproofing Prefabricated Membrane inaccessible to large paving equipment shall be done in
during the paving operations by the paver and hauling accordance with SS 502.
trucks;
419.37 Protection of the Environment – The Contractor
(f) the paver shall move continuously and at constant shall comply with SS 165, appropriate environmental
speed avoiding any unnecessary stopping or turning; requirements of Fisheries and Oceans Canada, the Ministry
of Environment, and any related Municipal Regulations.
(g) hauling trucks shall maintain a steady supply of asphalt
mix to the paver; Special precautions shall be taken during the construction
operations to prevent spillage of materials into water bodies.
(h) excessive accumulation of asphalt mix in the paver
hopper and auger shall be avoided; 419.38 Safety and Health Hazards – The Contractor shall
obtain all relevant Safety and Material Data information and
appropriate handling instructions on Prefabricated

BC MoTI SS 2020 419 (4 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 286 of 470
SECTION 419 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
PREFABRICATED MEMBRANE

Membrane and accessory materials from the PAYMENT

Supplier/Manufacturer to comply with required health and
419.90 General – Payment for Prefabricated Membrane
safety regulations.
will be made at the Unit Price bid per square metre. The
The Contractor shall comply with the Workers Unit Price shall include everything done and furnished for
Compensation Act, the Occupational Health and Safety the full and complete supply and installation of the
Regulation and manufacturer's requirements for handling Prefabricated Membrane including bridge deck preparation.
and installing Prefabricated Membrane and accessory Payment will include the preparation of the concrete deck
materials as these materials have flammable, toxic, hot and surface and the supply and installation of weep holes,
other potentially harmful properties to workers and the Primer, Membrane Detailing Strips, full width Prefabricated
public. The Contractor shall ensure personnel wear and use Membrane, mastic, and related work for the supply,
protective equipment. application and installation of the Prefabricated Membrane.
Payment for the Asphalt Pavement and related works to
meet the requirements for SS 502 and SS 952 will be made
MEASUREMENT
at the Unit Price bid per tonne. Payment shall include
419.80 General – Prefabricated Membrane will be pavement mix design, supply of asphalt cement and asphalt
measured in square metres installed. The area measurement mix aggregates, quality control, feeding, blending, mixing,
for payment will be based on the actual plan area covered loading, weighing, hauling, dumping, spreading,
by the Prefabricated Membrane waterproofing system, compacting and finishing of the asphalt pavement overlay
excluding laps and vertical application areas. and quality control.
Asphalt pavement will be measured in tonnes in place.

BC MoTI SS 2020 419 (5 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 287 of 470
SECTION 419 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
PREFABRICATED MEMBRANE

BC MoTI SS 2020 419 (6 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 288 of 470
SECTION 419 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
PREFABRICATED MEMBRANE

BC MoTI SS 2020 419 (7 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 289 of 470
SECTION 419 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
PREFABRICATED MEMBRANE

BC MoTI SS 2020 419 (8 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 290 of 470
SECTION 419 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
PREFABRICATED MEMBRANE

BC MoTI SS 2020 419 (9 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 291 of 470
SECTION 419 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
PREFABRICATED MEMBRANE

BC MoTI SS 2020 419 (10 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 292 of 470
SECTION 419 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
PREFABRICATED MEMBRANE

BC MoTI SS 2020 419 (11 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 293 of 470
SECTION 419 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
PREFABRICATED MEMBRANE

BC MoTI SS 2020 419 (12 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 294 of 470
SECTION 419 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
PREFABRICATED MEMBRANE

BC MoTI SS 2020 419 (13 of 13)

Vol. 1 Page 295 of 470
 SECTION 420

HOT APPLIED WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASPHALT OVERLAY

o 2020 420 1 of 1
Vol. 1 Page 296 of 470
 SECTION 421

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

DESCRIPTION Association of Professional Engineers and Geoscientists of

the Province of British Columbia (APEGBC).
421.01 Scope – This Section covers the supply, fabrication,
erection and quality control program of all major structural When the Contractor is responsible for the design of items that
steel elements. are detailed on the shop drawings, the shop drawings shall be
prepared and sealed by a professional engineer registered with
In general, all shop connections shall be welded, and all field
APEGBC.
connections high-strength bolted.
Working drawings shall be in the same system of units as the
Slip-critical bolted connection locations shall be as identified
design drawings.
on the Drawings, Special Provisions or as directed by the
Ministry Representative. Lettering for notes and dimensions shall be at least 2.5 mm
and 4 mm for headings. Drawings shall be legible when
Except as otherwise specified herein, steelwork shall be
printed on 11” x 17” sheets.
fabricated and erected in accordance with the AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications, Division II, 421.04.01 Shop Drawings – Shop drawings shall show all
Section 11. Welding and associated Work shall be in information and details needed for the fabrication of the
accordance with the current edition of CSA W59 – Welded members including, but not limited to, such items as member
Steel Construction. Fracture control requirements, welding shapes and dimensions, camber diagram, complete geometric
requirements for fracture critical members and welding information that member dimensions and shapes are based on,
requirements for primary tension members shall be in connection details, material and product standards, mark
accordance with CSA S6 and the Ministry Supplement to numbers and general arrangement of member locations,
CSA S6. details of attachments, fastener details, weld details, mass of
members, special tolerances, special handling instructions,
421.02 Prefabrication Meeting – The Ministry will at its
coating details, lifting details and lifting locations.
discretion, convene a prefabrication meeting with the
Contractor to confirm the Ministry’s requirements and to A copy of the shop drawings shall be available at all times at
review issues such as but not limited to, Schedule, lines of the location where the components shown on the drawings are
communication, fabricator and sub-fabricator scope of work, being fabricated. Changes to the steelwork from what is
location of all work, procedures on quality control, welding shown on the reviewed shop drawings, or repairs made during
procedures, procedures for non-destructive testing, mill fabrication and/or construction, shall be indicated by the
certificates and heat numbers, splices, coatings, and any other Contractor on a marked-up set of shop drawings in digital
specific requirements of this specification as it relates to the format and submitted to the Ministry Representative at the
Work. completion of the Work.
421.03 Alternative Details – All details shall, in general, 421.04.02 Transportation Details – Transportation details
conform to those shown on the Drawings. Any proposed shall include such items as:
variation shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions
• Description of hauling and handling equipment
of SS 125 – Value Engineering Proposals. The submission of
drawings showing alternative details shall be prepared and • Weight of members
sealed by a professional engineer registered with the
Association of Professional Engineers and Geoscientists of • Length and height of loads
the Province of British Columbia (APEGBC). • Location and method of member support
Any consideration or implementation of a submitted VEP by • Details for handling, storing, and loading of members.
the Ministry will also be in accordance with SS 125.
421.04.03 Erection Drawings – Erection drawings shall
421.04 Working Drawings – Working drawings shall consist show in detail the method of erection including, but not
of the following: limited to, the following:
• Shop drawings • Erection procedures
• Transportation details and • Procedures for off-loading of members upon delivery
• Erection drawings • Details for temporary storage and support of members on
site prior to erection
Transportation details and erection drawings shall be prepared
and sealed by a professional engineer registered with the • Equipment to be used

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (1 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 297 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

• Layout or general arrangement drawing showing the professional engineer and must be available at the Site prior
layout of the members, equipment positioning, and to the affected erection Work being carried out.
access roads
Immediately before placement of loading on falsework, the
• Crane make, model, and capacity charts, boom length(s), Contractor must ensure that the falsework is inspected and a
crane placement, and access for transporting of members sealed engineering certificate is issued by a professional
to crane(s) engineer registered with APEGBC which:
• Radii and loads for crane lifts • Indicates the specific areas inspected and
• Rigging details • Certifies that the falsework has been erected in
accordance with the latest approved erection drawings
• Mass of members, rigging and special installation
and supplementary instructions.
equipment
421.04.04 Submittals
• Details for installation and removal of all falsework,
temporary supports, temporary bearings, bracing, guys, The Contractor shall submit to the Ministry Representative
dead-men, and lifting devices one set of all working drawings in digital format. Prior to
submission to the Ministry Representative, working drawings
• Attachments to the bridge members and bridge structure
shall be reviewed and approved by the Contractor. By this
for temporary support and special launching equipment
review and approval, the Contractor represents that it has
• Detailed description of sequence of operations determined and verified all field measurements, field
construction criteria, materials, and similar data, and that it
• Details for special installation equipment such as a has checked and coordinated each working drawing with the
launching truss, launching nose, head frames, spreader requirements of the work and the contract documents. The
beams and rollers Contractor shall indicate its review and approval by including
• Details for installation of members onto the permanent on each drawing the date and signature of a person designated
bearings by the Contractor as being responsible for the Work. Working
drawings shall be submitted at least fourteen days prior to the
• Traffic control plan for roadway and rail traffic fabrication of the Work and shall be accompanied by a
• Details for protection of existing utilities affected by the transmittal listing each of the drawings submitted. At the time
erection procedures of submission, the Contractor must notify the Ministry
Representative in writing of any deviations in the shop
• Layout and details of fall protection and their sequence drawings from the requirements of the contract documents.
of installation. Any Work done or materials ordered prior to the review of the
The Contractor shall be responsible for the lateral stability of working drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk. The
members and shall design and provide bracing as necessary Ministry will review the drawings for general compliance
until completion of the Work. with the contract requirements.
The erection drawings shall be complete in detail for all Shop drawings will not be reviewed without the
anticipated phases and conditions during erection and during transportation details and erection drawings applicable to the
the temporary support of members. The Contractor shall members in question.
submit calculations, upon request, to the Ministry Erection will not be allowed to proceed without the Ministry
Representative that demonstrate that specified factored Representative’s review of the method proposed.
demand/capacity ratios or allowable stresses are not exceeded
in members, falsework, temporary bracing and temporary Review of working drawings shall not relieve the Contractor
supports and that member capacities and final geometry will of responsibility for carrying out the work in accordance with
be correct. These calculations shall be sealed by the the contract documents.
professional engineer who sealed the erection drawings. If so agreed to in advance by the Ministry Representative,
Falsework, temporary supports and temporary bracing shall working drawings may be submitted in paper format. The
meet the requirements of CSA Standard S269.1, “Falsework reference to working drawing submittal copies shall be
and formwork” and shall also meet all the requirements for increased to four paper copies in this case. At least 14 days
falsework given in Clauses 20.17 to 20.26 inclusive of the before fabrication is to commence, or as otherwise requested
WCB Occupational Health and Safety Regulation. by the Ministry Representative, the fabricator shall submit a
schedule of fabrication to the Ministry Representative in the
A professional engineer registered with APEGBC shall be form of a Gantt Chart. At the discretion of the Ministry, the
responsible for any field designs and any changes made to the schedule shall be updated on no less than a monthly basis. The
erection procedures. Field designs and changes to the erection schedule shall be provided to the Fabricator’s Quality Control
procedures must be documented and sealed by the responsible and to the Ministry Representative for reference and planning
of inspections and progress reporting. At the request of the

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (2 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 298 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

Ministry Representative, the Contractor shall report any 421.06 Quality Assurance – The Ministry will implement a
interim variations to the schedule. quality assurance program by auditing the Contractor's
quality control program and by inspection at its discretion.
421.04.05 Working Drawing Format – The Contractor shall
transmit working drawings through attachments to e-mail. The Contractor shall notify the Ministry Representative at
Unless otherwise agreed to by the Ministry Representative, least 14 days before fabrication has commenced. In addition,
electronic attachments to an email must total no more than the Contractor shall provide a minimum of 48 hours notice to
7 MB and must be submitted unzipped. Drawing files shall be the Ministry Representative that a product will be available
submitted in Portable Document Format (PDF) to print out on for inspection. If the schedule is subsequently changed, the
11” x 17” size pages. PDF sets shall be created by “distilling” Contractor shall provide the 48 hours notice from the time that
CAD sheets rather than by scanning paper plan sets. Unless the Ministry is notified of this change. If the product is not
otherwise agreed to by the Ministry Representative, electronic available or is not sufficiently complete for inspection as
attachments greater than 7 MB in size shall be sent in two notified, at the sole discretion of the Ministry Representative,
parts by separate emails, denoting “1 of 2” and “2 of 2” in the the Contractor shall be charged stand-by costs for the
subject lines after other required subject-line information. Ministry’s quality assurance inspector. The Contractor shall
allow the Ministry representatives safe access to all parts of
If agreed to by the Ministry Representative, the Contractor
the Work and shall supply such information and assistance as
may employ a document and data management service such
is required. The Contractor shall provide samples of any
as SharePoint® to transmit working drawings. If this process
materials requested by the Ministry Inspection by the
is used, the limitation on drawing file size is waived. The
Ministry shall not relieve the Contractor from obligation to
Contractor shall be responsible for setting up the appropriate
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract.
folders within the document and data management software
and for providing access to these folders to the fabricator, At its discretion and expense, the Ministry will test any weld
Ministry Representative and the design engineer. The by non-destructive testing methods, in accordance with CSA
Contractor and the Ministry Representative shall send e-mail W59. Generally, fillet welds will be tested by the dry powder
notification to each other whenever they post drawings to the magnetic particle method (MT) and butt joints by radiography
document and data management folders. (RT), or by any other method of testing the Ministry deems
necessary, such as die penetrant (PT), ultrasonic (UT) and
The resolution of drawings shall be such that the finest detail
phased array ultrasonic testing methods. Selection of the
must be legible at full scale on a 21 inch monitor without
appropriate testing method will be at the discretion of the
zooming in (1 in. width on an 11” x 17” sheet is 1 in. on the
Ministry.
monitor).
The Ministry will attempt to schedule non-destructive testing
Drawings shall be black images on a white background.
operations so as not to interfere with the progress of the Work.
All PDF sheets shall be assembled within a single file, subject
The extent of non-destructive testing will usually be in
to the maximum file size indicated above, ensuring that all
accordance with for each girder. Fiel
sheets are rotated to a “ready to read” orientation within the
PDF file set. Generally, 11x17 plan sheets should be in The inspection of welds shall be carried out as soon as
landscape and 8 1/2x11 note sheets in portrait, so that the possible after the completion of welding, with the exception
majority of text is vertical. PDF sheets shall be ready to print that restrained joints shall be inspected in accordance with the
out on appropriately sized paper sheets with no additional requirements of CSA W59 Clause 12. The Contractor shall
formatting required by the viewer. provide reasonable notice to the Ministry
Representative/Inspector regarding requirement for
Drawing sets that are not legible or that do not conform to
inspection of welds.
submission requirements will be returned to the Contractor
without being reviewed and the Contractor shall submit four The Contractor shall be prepared to move and support the
paper copies of the drawing set as substitutes. Drawings of pieces being inspected. In general, inspection shall be done
large or complicated pieces, where it is not practical to show on the flat and a minimum of 1.25 m of headroom shall be
all details on an 11” x 17” sheet, may be submitted on full size available.
paper drawings, in which case the Contractor shall submit
The Contractor shall bear the cost of re-inspection of welds
four copies of the drawing set. When revisions to full size
after defects are repaired. Results of re-inspection shall be
paper drawings are required, the Contractor shall supply four
provided to the Ministry Representative immediately upon
complete sets to the Ministry Representative.
completion of the re-inspection work.
421.05 Quality Control – The Contractor shall implement a
The Ministry will inspect bolted connections in accordance
quality control program to meet the Contract requirements.
with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
The quality control plan shall be made available to the
Specifications, Section 11.
Ministry Representative for review.
The Ministry Representative shall be notified of any defects
found in the Work. In general, no repair shall be made until

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (3 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 299 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

agreed to by the Ministry. In the case of minor corrections, Steel shall be supplied free of surface defects and internal
as described by CSA S6-19 Section 10.23.6.4, approval to discontinuities, with due regard for the end use of the steel in
proceed may be given either verbally by the Ministry's the Work.
Inspector, or in advance provided that written repair
procedures are submitted for Ministry acceptance prior to the
Table 421-A: Non-Destructive Testing for Girders
Work commencing. In such cases as repair of cracks, or
repairs as described by CSA S6-19 Section 10.23.6.5, or a Minimum
revised design to compensate for deficiencies, the means of Test
Element Method
Extent of
correction shall be prepared and sealed by a professional NDT
engineer registered with APEGBC. It shall be submitted in
writing, with adequate sketches, to the Ministry for review. Butt Joints
The Ministry Representative may reject any items which, in • For joints < 65 mm
RT 100%
the Ministry Representative’s opinion, do not comply with the in thickness
requirements of the Contract. The Ministry in its sole • For joints ≥ 65 mm
discretion may back charge all inspection costs for the UT 100%
in thickness
rejected material to the Contactor.
Flange/web fillet welds MT 100%
Each main member or structural component shall be audited
by a Ministry quality assurance representative before it is Flange/stiffener fillet welds MT 100%
shipped from the shop. This audit shall not relieve the Web/stiffener fillet welds
Contractor of responsibility for subsequent damage or for for ½ depth from Tension MT 100%
defects which become apparent before the Work is finally Flange
accepted by the Ministry. The Contractor shall provide 5 days
notice to the Ministry Representative regarding intent to ship Fillet welds for connection
a unit or product and the product shall be made available for plates for ½ of the depth MT 100%
inspection prior to loading and shipping. from Tension Flange
Transverse fillet welds on
Members shall only be allowed to be shipped out for erection MT 100%
tension flanges
after they have been approved by Quality Control and
accepted by the Ministry quality assurance representative. A Other fillet welds MT 25%
certificate of compliance may be issued by the Ministry Upon removal of runoff tabs
quality assurance representative to acknowledge acceptance. at the edge of a flange PT 100%
421.07 Quality and Details of Welds – The quality and member
details of welds shall be in accordance with CSA W59.
421.08 Design Specifications – CSA S6 and the Ministry Edges of all plates will be subject to inspection by the
Supplement to CSA S6 shall be used in the design of Ministry. Any discontinuities will be examined and may be
alternative details and calculating the effect of stresses accepted.
incurred in fabrication and erection.
The Ministry Representative shall be supplied with a record
No increase in allowable stresses due to vertical loads shall be of all observed discontinuities and repair methods.
used for erection conditions.
Repairs to defective plates shall not proceed until review of
the proposed repair method by the Ministry Representative is
MATERIALS completed.

421.11 Materials 421.11.02 Welding Consumables – All electrodes shall

match the base metal specified in accordance with CSA W59,
421.11.01 Structural Steel – Steel shall conform to the Table 12.1. The deposited weld metal shall provide strength,
requirements of CSA G40.20/G40.21 and shall be of the ductility, impact toughness and corrosion resistance
grades called for on the Drawings. Plates provided from coils equivalent to the base metal.
shall not be used. Prior to fabrication, the Contractor shall
supply to the Ministry Representative the manufacturer's mill Welding consumables for all processes shall be certified by
certificates giving details of all chemical and physical the Canadian Welding Bureau (CWB) as complying with the
properties of steel to be used in the Work. The boron content requirements of CSA W48.
of steel shall not exceed 0.0008%. 421.11.03 High-Strength Bolts – Unless otherwise specified
Chemical composition of steel to be galvanized shall be in on the Drawings, high-strength bolts, nuts and washers shall
accordance with SS 421.42.

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (4 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 300 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

conform to the requirements of ASTM F3125, grade A 325, The office shall be at least 2.5 m x 3 m and shall be
and as follows: weathertight and reasonably soundproof, provided with ample
window area and ventilation, furnished with a 0.75 m x 1.2 m
(a) for painted steelwork, Type 1 bolts shall be provided and
desk, a 1 m x 2 m drafting table, a two-drawer filing cabinet,
painted after installation in accordance with the field
two chairs, a drafting stool and 3 m of shelves, and equipped
painting specifications.
with a telephone, and high-speed internet access which shall
(b) for unpainted portions of weathering steel, Type 3 bolts be operational throughout the period of fabrication. All long-
shall be provided. distance telephone calls will be paid for by the Ministry.
(c) for painted portions of weathering steel, Type 3 bolts The Contractor shall clean, heat and light the office
shall be provided and painted after installation in throughout the period of fabrication.
accordance with the field painting specifications.
(d) for connections of members that are galvanized, Type 1
EQUIPMENT
bolts hot-dipped galvanized to the requirements of
ASTM A153/A153M shall be provided. 421.21 Qualifications and Equipment
421.11.04 Shear Connector Studs – Shear connector studs 421.21.01 Contractor – The Contractor shall produce
shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A108, evidence that the plant is currently fully certified by the CWB
Grades 1015, 1018 or 1020. to the requirements of CSA W47.1, Division 1 or Division 2
prior to beginning Work.
421.12 Material Storage and Care
The Fabricator shall also produce evidence of at least three
421.12.01 Steel – Structural material, either plain or
years of satisfactory experience in the fabrication of bridge
fabricated, shall be stored above the ground in an upright and
structural steelwork.
shored position upon platforms, skids, or other supports
unless otherwise permitted by the Ministry. Should The Contractor shall employ or retain a registered
permission be granted to stack the steel in a horizontal professional engineer experienced in steel bridge fabrication,
position, the Contractor shall provide sufficient support of the to provide guidance throughout the work.
steel in order to prevent bending of the plate prior to
A qualified welding supervisor shall be employed on each
incorporation into the Work. It shall be kept free from dirt
shift where welding is done on the work.
and other foreign matter and shall be protected as far as
practical from corrosion. Long members shall be supported Prior to fabrication, the Contractor shall submit to the
on skids placed near enough together to prevent overstress Ministry the names of the welding engineer, the engineer
from deflection. experienced in steel bridge fabrication, and the welding
supervisors who are to be employed on the Work.
Prior to fabrication, all steel shall be marked for identification
by heat number and specification by a marking system 421.21.02 Certification – Structural steel elements shall be
approved by the Ministry. fabricated in plants that have third party certification under
an industry recognized quality certification program specific
421.12.02 Welding Consumables – Electrodes and fluxes
to steel bridge fabrication.
shall be stored and kept in condition as required by CSA W59,
Section 5.2. Acceptable third party certifications include:
Gas for welding shall be stored in marked steel bottles and • the Canadian Institute of Steel Construction Steel Bridge
shall not be subjected to temperatures in excess of 50°C or Certification – Complex Bridges or
temperatures of less than 0°C.
• the American Institute of Steel Construction Certification
421.13 Fabrication – Prior to fabrication, the welders and Program for Steel Bridge Fabricators, in either the
welding operator’s qualifications, shop drawings, welding intermediate or advanced bridge categories, as applicable
procedures, mill certificates and welding consumable to the type of Work.
certificates shall be submitted for the Ministry's review.
Certification shall be in effect prior to the beginning of the
No fabrication, welding or coating of steelwork shall Work and shall be maintained throughout the period of
commence until permission to do so has been received from manufacture.
the Ministry.
421.21.03 Welders and Welding Operators – The
421.14 Ministry’s Plant Office – The Contractor shall Contractor shall produce evidence that all welders and
provide in the fabrication plant or nearby a suitable lock-up welding operators to be employed on the Work are currently
office for the sole use of the Ministry Representative qualified by the CWB at the time of fabrication in the
throughout the period of fabrication. processes in which they are to be employed on the Work.

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (5 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 301 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

The Contractor shall also produce evidence relative to each CONSTRUCTION

welder and welding operator, that they have been executing
421.31 Preparation of Material
satisfactory welding in the required processes within the six-
month period previous to the award of this Contract. 421.31.01 Straightening Material – Prior to being used in
fabrication, all structural steel shall be straight and free from
421.21.04 Welding Equipment – All equipment to be used
kinks or bends. The flatness tolerance of plate in excess of
in the Work shall be in good working order and shall be
900 mm wide shall be in accordance with the tolerances of the
subject to the inspection of the Ministry.
finished product as specified in CSA W59. If straightening is
For any arrangement of automatic welding, the Ministry necessary, it shall be done by methods that will not injure the
Representative may require that a preliminary test run of the metal. The steel shall not be heated unless permission is given
equipment be made, without welding, over the length of the by the Ministry Representative.
joint, to prove that the disposition of the equipment and the
In no case shall the temperature of the steel exceed 620 oC.
method and accuracy of travel are satisfactory.
After straightening, the surfaces of the metal shall be carefully
421.22 Welding Procedures – The Fabricator shall submit inspected for evidence of fracture and if necessary, the
copies of the proposed welding procedures for review by the material shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the
Ministry. Gas metal arc welding shall not be used. Where the Ministry Representative. Sharp kinks and bends will be cause
submerged arc or flux cored arc process is to be used, the for rejection of the steel.
Ministry Representative may order that each welder and
421.31.02 Camber – Girders shall be cambered as shown on
welding operator make a weld specimen not less than 1 m in
the Drawings.
length for fillet welds and 150 mm in length for butt joints.
Steel of the same specifications and thickness as that to be 421.31.03 Edge Preparation – Steel may be cut to size by
used in the work shall be used in the specimen welds. sawing, shearing, plasma cutting or flame cutting. All steel
before cutting shall be marked by a method agreed to by the
No welding shall be done on the Work until the welders’ and
Quality Manager and Ministry Representative so that its
welding operators’ qualifications are established to the
specification may be immediately identified.
satisfaction of the Ministry Representative.
All cut edges shall be smooth and regular, free from fins,
Welding procedures shall be accompanied by documentary
cracks, tears and notches. Freehand cutting shall be done only
proof that they have been qualified previously by the CWB at
where approved by the Ministry Representative. Roughness
the plant where the Work is to be carried out.
of cut surfaces shall not exceed the American National
The procedures shall include the following information: joint Standards Institute ASME B46.1 value of 1000. Roughness
type, welding process, welding position, base metal exceeding this value shall be removed by machining or
specification, welding consumable specification and size, grinding. Occasional gouges will be tolerated only at the
preheat requirements, amperage and voltage requirements, discretion of the Ministry Representative and shall be repaired
speed, polarity, and welding equipment, including a in accordance with a procedure approved by the Ministry.
description of travel for automatic welding. Additional
Sheared edges of plates more than 16 mm in thickness shall
information, as described in CSA W47.1, Annex C, shall also
be planed to a depth of 6 mm.
be included in the procedures.
Re-entrant flame cuts shall be cut to a radius of not less than
421.23 Butt Joints – Except as called for on the Drawings, or
20 mm.
as reviewed and approved by the Ministry’s design engineer,
butt joints will not be permitted. Approval must be given All exposed edges and corners of members, rolled or cut,
prior to fabrication. which are to be coated, shall be ground to a minimum radius
of 2 mm.
The Fabricator may submit an alternative butt joint design, to
that shown on the Drawings, or propose a butt joint design if All corners of oxygen cut and plasma cut edges of main
one is not shown on the Drawings, provided that all such stress-carrying members including the outside edges of flange
designs have been approved by the CWB. Acceptance of splice plates, except unpainted bearing stiffeners and girder
alternative butt joint designs shall be subject to approval by webs, shall be ground to a minimum radius of 2 mm.
the Ministry. Location and details of all butt joints shall be
Special attention shall be given to the cutting of flange plates.
explicitly shown on the shop drawings.
All flange plates prepared by flame cutting shall be preheated
421.24 Assembly and Welding Sequences – If requested by in accordance with SS 421.34.
the Ministry Representative, the Contractor shall supply full
details of the proposed assembly and welding sequence of any The Fabricator will carry out Brinell hardness testing of the
edges of flange plates and flange splice plates on fracture
particular weldment.
critical members. For flange plates, readings shall be taken
near both ends and the centre on each side of the plate for a
total of 6 readings minimum per plate. For flange splice plates

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (6 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 302 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

readings shall be taken near the centre on each side of the Reamed holes shall be cylindrical and perpendicular to the
plates for a total of two readings minimum per plate. The member. Where practicable, reamers shall be directed by
locations and readings shall be recorded for review by the mechanical means. Reaming shall be done with twist drills or
Ministry Representative. The Brinell hardness of the edges of reamers.
flange plates and flange splice plates on fracture critical
Drilling shall be done with twist drills or core drills. Burrs on
members shall not exceed 220. If greater hardness is
the outside surfaces shall be removed.
measured, the edges shall be ground by the Fabricator to
remove the hard layer. The Ministry Representative may Poor matching of holes will be cause for rejection.
conduct Quality Assurance testing of Brinell hardness once
421.31.06 Faying Surfaces – In the parts of a structure where
the flanges have been prepared to meet the hardness
steelwork is specified to be painted, faying surfaces shall meet
requirements. The Contractor shall bear all costs for re-
the requirements of SS 216.
inspection and retesting.
In the parts of a structure where steelwork is specified to be
Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust,
grease, moisture or other material that will prevent proper uncoated, the following shall apply:
welding. Mill scale that withstands vigorous wire brushing, a (a) For non-slip critical uncoated connections – faying
light film of drying oil or a thin rust inhibitive coating may surfaces shall be free from loose scale, unacceptable
remain except that all mill scale shall be removed from the burrs, dirt, oil and foreign material.
surfaces on which flange-to-web welds are to be made.
Surfaces within 100 mm of any weld location shall be free (b) For Class A uncoated slip-critical connections – faying
from any paint or other material that would prevent proper surfaces shall have a clean uncoated mill scale surface
welding or produce objectionable fumes while welding. free from loose scale, paint, lacquer, or any other coating
in all areas within the bolt pattern and for a distance
Edges of material thicker than specified in the following list beyond the edge of the bolt hole that is the greater of 25
shall be trimmed if and as required to produce a satisfactory mm or the bolt diameter.
welding edge wherever a weld along the edge is to carry
calculated stress: (c) For Class B uncoated slip-critical connections – faying
surfaces shall be blast cleaned to SSPC-SP10 / NACE
(a) Sheared edges of material thicker than 12 mm; No. 2.
(b) Rolled edges of plates (other than Universal Mill Plates) When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent
thicker than 10 mm; to bolt heads, nuts, and washers, shall be free from loose scale,
unacceptable burrs, oil, dirt, and foreign material that would
(c) Toes of angles or rolled shapes (other than wide flange
prevent the solid seating of the parts.
sections) thicker than 16 mm;
(d) Universal Mill Plates or edges of flanges of wide flange 421.32 Marking – Prior to fabrication, all steel shall be
section thicker than 25 mm. marked for identification by heat number and specification by
a marking system approved by the Ministry Representative.
421.31.04 Direction of Rolling – Steel plates for main Steel which is unidentified shall not be used in the Work.
members and splice plates for flanges and main tension
421.33 Assembly of Weldments – The shop assembly of the
members shall be cut and fabricated so that the direction of
various components of the weldments shall be executed in
rolling is parallel to the direction of the primary stresses.
accordance with CSA W59.
421.31.05 Bolt Holes – Standard holes for high tensile bolts
shall be either punched, sub-punched and reamed, or drilled, Tack welding shall be done by qualified welders, using the
smallest size weld required to hold the components of the
and shall be of a nominal diameter not more than 2 mm in
assembly together. Tack welds shall be incorporated into the
excess of the nominal bolt diameter, except that the following
final weld.
bolt/hole combinations will be permitted:
421.34 Preheat and Interpass Temperatures – No welding
(a) either 3/4 inch or M20 bolts in 22 mm holes;
shall be done when the temperature of the base metal is lower
(b) either 7/8 inch or M22 bolts in 24 mm holes; than -18oC. At temperatures below 0oC, the steel shall be
preheated to a temperature of at least 10oC in excess of that
(c) either 1 inch or M24 bolts in 27 mm holes.
stated in CSA W59, Table 5.3.
Oversize or slotted bolt holes will be allowed only in special
Preheat shall be applied to all steel to be welded so that the
circumstances or as shown on the Drawings.
steel within the greater of 75 mm of the weld, or the thickness
Punched holes shall be clean cut, without torn or ragged of the thickest part to be welded, is heated to the temperatures
edges. The diameter of the die shall not exceed the diameter shown in CSA W59, Table 5.3.
of the punch by more than 2 mm. If a punched hole must be
Preheat shall be applied in such a manner that moisture from
enlarged to admit a high tensile bolt, it shall be reamed.
the heating equipment does not penetrate the joint.

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (7 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 303 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

Preheat temperatures above the minimum shown in CSA In flux-cored arc welding the equipment shall be capable of
W59, Table 5.3 may be required for highly restrained joints if sustaining a gas flow rate of from 0.85 to 1.25 m3/h.
designated by the Ministry.
Where, in the opinion of the Ministry Representative,
Preheat and interpass temperatures for repair of fracture excessive repairs are required during the fabrication of
critical members shall be in accordance with CSA S6 components, the fabricator shall submit a plan to the Ministry
Table 10.16. Representative for review and acceptance, which shows
revisions to the fabrication process, including personnel if
Preheat temperature shall in no case exceed 200 oC.
necessary, to reduce or eliminate future fabrication non-
Preheat requirements for tack welds shall be meet the above conformances.
requirements except that where single pass tack welds are
421.36 Shear Connector Studs – Shear connector studs shall
used and are to be incorporated and consumed in a weld made
be welded in the locations shown on the Drawings, to the
by the submerged arc process, preheat is unnecessary.
requirements of CSA W59, Section 6. Shear connectors will
421.35 Welding – Welding shall be done by the shielded be inspected and shall be repaired if necessary in accordance
metal arc, metal-cored arc, flux-cored arc or submerged arc with the same standard.
processes in accordance with the reviewed procedures and
421.37 High Strength Bolts – Installation of high-strength
CSA W59, Section 5.
bolts shall be in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Any weld between the web and flange of a bending member Construction Specifications using the “turn of nut” method.
shall be made by a mechanized submerged arc process, which
Galvanized bolts shall be lubricated with beeswax or other
provides a continuous weld throughout the length of the
approved lubricant before installation.
member.
Heads of bolts shall be placed on the outsides of girders and
All welding shall be done under cover and, in the case of
box members, and generally on the more conspicuous side, if
flux-cored arc welding, shall be done in an area free from
any, of any connection.
wind or draft.
421.38 Bent Plates – When bending plates, the plates shall be
Where the submerged arc process is to be used, the Contractor
so taken from the stock plates that the bend line will be at right
shall:
angles to the direction of rolling. Before bending, the corners
(a) Carry out a preliminary test run of the procedure over the of the plate shall be rounded to a radius of 2 mm throughout
length of the joint to prove that the disposition of the that portion of the plate at which bending is to occur. Bending
equipment, the handling of hoses, and the method and shall be done by methods that will not crack, tear or otherwise
accuracy of travel are satisfactory. injure the metal.
(b) Have each operator make a weld specimen not less than Cold bending and the minimum radii for cold bending shall
1200 mm in length for fillet welds and 150 mm in length be in accordance with CSA S6.
for butt welds. Steel of the same specification and
Hot bending of plates shall not be permitted without prior
thickness as that to be used in the Work shall be used in
approval of the Ministry. Any proposed method for hot
the specimen welds. No welding shall be done on the
bending of plates shall be submitted to the Ministry for review
Work until such a specimen is satisfactory to the Ministry
and approval by the Ministry prior to proceeding with the
Representative.
work.
Welds in butt joints shall be extended beyond the edges of the
Bending of flange plates shall not be permitted without prior
parts to be joined by means of start and run-off tabs providing
approval of the Ministry. Any proposed method for bending
sufficient thickness to avoid the weld burning through and
flange plates shall be case specific and shall be submitted to
with a joint preparation similar to that on the main material.
the Ministry for review and approval by the Ministry prior to
Welds that connect run-off tabs to the main member shall be
proceeding with the work.
placed inside the joint so that they are incorporated into the
final weld. For manual shielded metal arc welding the width 421.39 Shop Assembly of Bolted Connections – Holes in
of the tabs shall be not less than the thickness of the thicker girder and truss field splices shall be drilled while assembled
part being joined or 75 mm, whichever is greater. For in the shop, or sub-punched or sub-drilled and reamed while
submerged arc, welding the width of the tabs shall be not less assembled. Unless otherwise specified, the structure shall be
than 75 mm. Each weld pass shall be carried far enough progressively assembled in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
beyond the edge of the parts being joined to ensure sound Bridge Construction Specifications. The Ministry shall be
welds in the joint. Tabs shall be removed upon completion provided sufficient notice by the Fabricator, to allow
by flame cutting and grinding. The weld shall be cooled inspection of any assembly, including camber, alignment and
without damage to the parent plate. The end of the weld shall accuracy of holes before drilling or reaming is commenced.
be made smooth and flush with the edges of the abutting parts.
Connecting parts assembled in the shop for the purpose of
reaming or drilling holes shall be match-marked by a method

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (8 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 304 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

agreed to by the Ministry to indicate the location and • Phosphorus less than 0.04%
orientation of all pieces.
• Manganese less than 1.3%
Alternatively, the Contractor may drill holes full-size using
automatic drilling equipment, as described in AASHTO • Silicon less than 0.04% or between 0.15% and 0.22%
LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications. In this case a For steel not meeting these chemical composition
check assembly will be required for the first of each major requirements, special galvanizing techniques shall be
structural type, as described in AASHTO LRFD Bridge developed by the galvanizer to ensure that the specified
Construction Specifications. Reaming of holes shall be as coating thickness and adherence is achieved. A detailed
specified in SS 421.47, if the bolt holes do not line up during description of the special techniques shall be submitted to the
field assembly. Ministry Representative for review two (2) weeks prior to
Progressive assembly in the yard may be allowed, subject to galvanizing.
approval by the Ministry Representative, provided the All steelwork to be metallized shall be identified in the
Fabricator can demonstrate that yard assembly will provide as Drawings, Special Provisions or elsewhere in the Contract.
high a quality product as shop assembly. All steelwork to be metallized shall, after complete
421.40 Dimensional Tolerances – Except as noted herein, fabrication, be treated in accordance with the current SSPC-
the dimensions of completed members shall comply with the CS23.00 / AWS C2.23M / NACE No. 12. The zinc coating
appropriate dimensional tolerances as specified in CSA W59. shall not be less than 0.3 mm in thickness.

Alignment or position of secondary members shall be within 421.43 Shop Painting – The Drawings or Special Provisions
±6 mm. shall specify whether the structure is to be painted, or what
parts of a structure are to be painted. This subsection applies
The tolerance in flange width shall be ±(b/100), where b is the to those parts of the steelwork which are to be painted.
flange width, but not less than 5 mm and not greater than
25 mm. If painting is specified on the Drawings or in the Special
Provisions, the structural steel of weathering steel bridges
The tolerance on the width of stiffeners and plates for shall be painted for the larger of the following two distances
secondary members shall be -3 mm to +10mm. from deck joint locations:
Misalignment of stiffeners on opposite faces of a web shall be • 3000 mm; or
less than one third of the web thickness for bearing stiffeners
and half the web thickness for intermediate stiffeners. • 1.5 times the superstructure depth (including girder,
haunch and slab thickness).
The maximum deviation from specified length shall be
L/1000 but not over 20 mm. Coating work shall be in accordance with SS 216 unless noted
otherwise in SS 421. For the short lengths of coating required
Warpage of box members shall be determined by taking adjacent to deck joints on weathering steel bridges, third party
measurements at any two cross-sections in a member, at Quality Control inspectors shall be qualified to at least NACE
opposite edges of one face of the member. Warpage is CIP Level 2 or SSPC BCI Level 2.
defined as the distance by which any point deviates from a
plane defined by the other three points. This warpage shall All coatings shall be applied according to their
not exceed 1/200 of the width of the member, or 3 mm, manufacturer’s product data sheet unless specified otherwise
whichever is greater. in the Contract Special Provisions.

421.41 Machined Surfaces – Machine-finished surfaces, as All steelwork which is to be painted, except as noted herein,
designated on the Drawings, shall be coated with an approved shall be given three shop coats of paint – primer, stripe coat
protective compound. and midcoat. Paint shall be chosen from SS 308 System SS1.
Paint shall be supplied by the Contractor.
421.42 Galvanizing and Metallizing – All steelwork to be
galvanized shall be identified in the Drawings, Special The topcoat may be applied in the shop or in the field. The
Provisions or elsewhere in the Contract. All steelwork to be topcoat coat shall be chosen from either SS 308 System SS1
galvanized shall be galvanized after complete fabrication to or SF2. If the topcoat is to be applied in the shop, then the
the requirements of ASTM A123M and ASTM A385. The Quality Control Program shall specifically address the
galvanizer shall safeguard against embrittlement as required integrity of the topcoat through to project completion.
in ASTM A143. Galvanized members shall be subject, at the Surfaces surrounding bolt holes at connection locations shall
discretion of the Ministry Representative, to the tests for receive the prime coat only and shall be masked off so that no
embrittlement outlined in ASTM A143. stripe coat, midcoat or topcoat paint will be under the bolt
The chemical composition of steel being galvanized shall be heads, washers or nuts. These masked off areas shall have the
as follows: stripe coat, midcoat and topcoat paint applied in the field after
installation of the bolts.
• Carbon less than 0.25%

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (9 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 305 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

Faying surfaces shall receive the prime coat only, as per are assembled. Field connections shall have one half of the
SS 216.12.01(b). holes filled with bolts and cylindrical erection pins (half bolts
and half pins) before final bolting. Fitting-up bolts shall be
Paint shall be applied in a covered area in accordance with the
the same nominal diameter as the high tensile bolts, and
manufacturer's specifications and SS 216.
cylindrical erection pins shall be 1 mm larger.
All edges, corners, crevices, bolts, nuts, protrusions and welds
421.46 Straightening Bent Material During and after
(unless ground flush) shall be stripe painted by brush for a
Fabrication – The straightening of plates and angles or other
width of 50 mm with the midcoat paint before the midcoat
shapes shall be done by methods that will not produce fracture
coat is applied. Stripe coating paint shall be applied as per
or other injury. Any proposed straightening plan, whether by
SSPC-PA1 and may be applied by spray, but shall be brushed
heating and or mechanical straightening methods shall be case
in. Stripe painting shall be allowed to cure before the midcoat
specific and shall be submitted to the Ministry Representative
coat is applied.
for review and acceptance prior to commencing with the
Unless a different coating is called for on the Drawings, the work. Generic plans may be referred to as part of the
exposed steel surfaces of bearings, and bearing assemblies, straightening plan. The heating shall not exceed the
shall be cleaned and painted as structural steelwork. requirements of CSA W59, Clause 5.15. After heating, the
metal shall be cooled as slowly as possible, typically at
Surfaces shall be cleaned to "near-white" per SSPC-SP10 /
ambient shop temperature.
NACE No. 2 and 50 to 75 µm (2 to 3 mils) sharp/angular
profile. Following the straightening of a bend or buckle, the surface
of the metal shall be carefully inspected for evidence of
The midcoat shall not be applied until the primer and stripe fracture, and if necessary, replaced or repaired to the
coat are accepted by the Ministry Representative to be
satisfaction of the Ministry. The cost of any non-visual
sufficiently cured.
inspection deemed necessary by the Ministry Representative
Any surfaces inaccessible after erection, except faying as a result of the straightening process shall be borne by the
surfaces and tops and sides of top flanges, shall be given the Contractor.
topcoat in the shop. 421.47 Misfits – For all primary connections, and secondary
If the topcoat is to be applied in the shop, then the topcoat connections having eight or more bolts, 85% of the holes shall
shall be applied after the midcoat is accepted by the Ministry accept bolts without reaming. The remaining 15% may be
Representative to be sufficiently cured. reamed to accept the designed diameter bolts. The diameter
of the reamer shall be the same as the drilled hole.
The colour of the topcoat will be selected by the Ministry. For
weathering steel, unless noted otherwise, the topcoat colour Holes in plates showing more than 5 mm of offset shall be
shall match the expected colour of the oxidized surfaces cause for rejection of that plate. New plates, if necessary,
(Federal Color 30045 unless noted otherwise). The proposed shall be field drilled using the hole pattern in the senior
colour shall be subject to the acceptance of the Ministry member as a template.
Representative.
421.48 Erection Tolerances – Unless otherwise specified,
421.44 Marking and Shipping – Each member shall be the assembly tolerances and misalignment of members after
marked by a method agreed to by the Ministry Representative erection shall be within the dimensional tolerances specified
with an erection mark, corresponding to the mark shown on in CSA W59 and AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
the erection diagram. Specifications. .
Members shall be loaded in such a manner that they can be Misalignment shall be measured from vertical lines in the case
transported to and unloaded at their destination without being of columns or towers, and from lines joining the ends of any
damaged. test length of a member.
After steelwork has been delivered to Site it shall be inspected Joints, which are required on the drawings to be milled to
by the Contractor’s quality control inspector. The Contractor bear, shall have at least 75% of the entire contact area in full
shall clean the steelwork after it has arrived at Site of any dirt, bearing. The separations of any remaining portions shall not
road salts, slush or other contaminants accumulated during exceed 0.25 mm except locally at toes of flanges where a
transport and shall carry out any other surface preparation separation of 0.60 mm is permissible.
work necessary to meet the specified surface preparation
Where joints are not milled, the opening shall not exceed
requirements.
13 mm.
421.45 Field Assembly – The parts shall be accurately 421.49 Field Painting – This section applies to those parts of
assembled as shown on the drawings and any matchmarks
the steelwork which are to be painted. Coating Work shall be
shall be followed. Hammering which will injure or distort the
in accordance with SS216 unless noted otherwise in SS 421.
members shall not be done. Bearing surfaces and surfaces to
Build the coating using coatings from the specified SS 308
be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members
System. The coating system shall be from the same

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (10 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 306 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

manufacturer as the shop coating system on the steel. After "near white" per SSPC-SP10 / NACE No. 2. All dry abrasive
the completion of all deck and overhead concrete Work, blast cleaned areas shall be metallized in accordance with
steelwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of all rust, dirt, dust, oil SSPC-CS23.00/AWS C2.23M/NACE No. 12, Specification
and other foreign materials. Non-visible salts shall be for the Application of Thermal Spray Coatings (Metallizing)
removed in accordance with SSPC-SP WJ-4 to meet the NVC of Aluminum, Zinc, and Their Alloys and Composites for the
levels per SS 216.07.02(b). The shop coats of paint shall be Corrosion Protection of Steel, to provide a zinc coating not
touched up as necessary. less than 0.3 mm in thickness.
421.49.01 Field Touch-up – Bare, rusty or damaged areas Cut metal edges may be harder and consequently have less
shall be cleaned to SSPC-SP11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare profile. If that is the case, they shall be ground back to softer
Metal. Feather edges into the existing coating and build the metal and reblasted to achieve the specified profile.
coating as per SS 216.
Otherwise, the damaged areas shall be thoroughly cleaned and
After installation, Type 3 bolts, nuts and washers in the areas painted with two coats of Ministry-approved organic zinc-rich
to be painted shall be cleaned to SSPC-SP11. These bolts, paint.
nuts and washers shall then receive the prime coat, stripe coat,
midcoat and topcoat paint.
QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM
The masked off surfaces surrounding the bolt holes at
connection locations shall be cleaned and shall receive the 421.61 Quality Control Program – These Subsections
stripe coat, midcoat and topcoat paint. describe the general Quality Control Program required by the
Ministry for any Fabricator undertaking the fabrication of
421.49.02 Topcoat – The topcoat coat shall be chosen from
permanent steel bridges and steel bridge components. The
either SS 308 System SS1 or SF2.
Quality Control Program shall be part of the overall Quality
If the topcoat has not been applied in the shop, then the Management Plan for the project.
steelwork shall be given one topcoat coat of paint applied in
The term "Quality Control" defines those activities that the
accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and
Fabricator performs to conform to the contract.
SS 216.
The term "Quality Assurance" defines those activities that the
The colour of the finish coat will be selected by the Ministry.
Ministry performs to audit the Contractor's quality control
For weathering steel, unless noted otherwise, the topcoat
program and to ensure conformance to the Contract.
colour shall match the expected colour of the oxidized
surfaces (Federal Color 30045 unless noted otherwise). The These Subsections contain statements of the Quality
proposed colour shall be subject to the acceptance of the Objectives and Policies that the Ministry considers essential
Ministry Representative. for successful and economical quality management. They
also outline the Procedures and Documentation to implement
At the completion of the Contract, all steelwork, painted or
and confirm that objectives are met.
unpainted, shall be cleaned of concrete spatter, mud, oil and
other foreign materials. The provisions of the Quality Control Program set forth in
these Subsections shall apply to all steel bridges and bridge
421.50 Unpainted Weathering Steel – In the case of
components contracted by or for the Ministry.
unpainted weathering steel, the outer faces of the girders and
stringers, which includes the exposed edge of the top flange, These Subsections require the establishment of a Quality
the underside of the top flange, the girder web, and the top, Organization with the responsibility for the successful and
bottom and outer edge of the bottom flange, and any other timely implementation of all necessary Quality Control
surfaces mentioned in the Drawings and Special Provisions, activities. Some positions shown in the Suggested
shall present a uniform surface free of mill scale and shall be Organization Chart may be held by the same individual. For
sandblasted to SSPC-SP6 prior to installation. Cleaning shall example, the General Manager may also be the Contract
also include all shop marks located on the exterior faces of the Administrative Manager and the Purchasing Manager. The
girders, and in all areas of interior girders that are readily Plant Superintendent may also be the Receiver and the
visible to the public, as determined by the Ministry Welding Supervisor.
Representative. Concrete splatter adhering to the steel
421.62 Quality Objectives and Policies
surfaces after the construction of the deck shall be removed
and the steel surfaces cleaned. 421.62.01 Quality Objectives – The Quality Objectives of
421.51 Touch-up of Galvanizing and Metallizing – All field the Ministry cover all steel bridges and steel bridge
welds and other damage in galvanized and metallized components produced under contract to the Ministry, as
coatings shall be touched up as follows: follows:
(a) Completed products shall conform fully to the governing
If the Drawings or Special Provisions call for touch-up by
Codes and Specifications stipulated in the Contract.
metallizing, the damaged areas shall be locally sandblasted to

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (11 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 307 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

(b) The Quality Control Program shall be fully integrated • Preparation of material requisitions and purchase orders;
into the ongoing manufacturing activities of the
Fabricator. • Receiving, checking and storing materials for bridges;

(c) The operations of the Quality Control Program shall • Layout, cutting, forming and fitting of parts;
protect the interests of the Ministry with respect to • Assembly, tacking and welding;
scheduled delivery date and contracted price.
• Dimensional checking and verification;
421.62.02 Quality Policy – The Quality Policy ensures that
the product meets the Quality requirements of the Contract, is • Resolution of non-conformances;
delivered on time, and is produced in a cost-effective manner.
• Documentation of all stages of work with capability of
The Quality Control Program applies to all stages of the tracking all major components;
design, drafting, procurement, manufacturing and testing of
the product. • Cleaning, painting, storing and shipping;

A Fabricator’s Quality Control Manager shall be appointed • Erection of bridges and bridge components (if
with defined responsibilities in resolving quality matters and applicable).
shall report to a senior management level. At each hold point, 421.65 Drawings and Specifications – The Fabricator’s
the Fabricator’s Quality Control Manager shall: Chief Draftsperson shall:
(a) Document the successful completion of each stage as it • obtain the latest revision of the design drawings and
progresses through fabrication and erection; specifications for the Work;
(b) Identify and report nonconforming components; • submit shop drawings and erection drawings to the
(c) Initiate or recommend disposition of nonconforming Ministry Representative for acceptance before
components; commencement of the Work;

(d) Verify corrections. • prepare material requisitions containing a full description

of the material sizes, material specifications, and
Any persons assigned to perform quality control inspections certifications required for conformance to the Contract;
shall be other than those performing or directly supervising
the Work and they shall not report directly to immediate • deliver the material requisitions to the Purchasing
supervisors responsible for producing the Work. Manager in ample time to permit ordering, delivery and
documentation without delaying the Work;
The Quality Control Program is not subordinate to any design,
drafting, procurement, manufacturing or testing activities. • issue requisitions for all sub-contracted drafting work
and shall ensure that all conditions of the Contract are
421.63 Scope of the Quality Control Program – The
part of such sub-contracts.
Quality Control Program governs the fabrication of steel
bridges and bridge components for the Ministry. The The Fabricator’s Chief Design Engineer shall be responsible
Suggested Organization Chart is shown in Figure 1. for the design of any connections or joints not shown on the
design Drawings; and for the design of the transportation
The Fabricator’s General Manager shall be responsible for:
details, erection procedures and any special erection
• adhering to the Quality Control Program in all respects. equipment needed.
• ensuring that completed bridges or bridge components 421.66 Material Control – All materials for the Work shall
shall conform fully to the applicable design and to the be ordered by the Fabricator’s Purchasing Manager in full
fabrication and welding codes stipulated in the Contract. conformance with the material requisitions provided by the
Fabricator’s Chief Draftsperson.
• ensuring that all required documentation is produced
according to the Quality Control Program. The Purchase Orders shall contain all information necessary
to ensure that materials purchased will comply fully with the
421.64 Range of Capability – The Fabricator shall provide terms of the Contract. Where mill certificates and test reports
the necessary knowledge, skill (in-house or on a contract are required, it shall be so stated on the Purchase Order.
basis) and equipment to perform the following work on steel Instructions shall state when the certificates and reports are to
bridges and bridge components: be delivered to the Fabricator.
• Design of connections and joints not shown on Drawings If a supplier proposes a substitute for any material, the
(if applicable); Fabricator’s Purchasing Manager shall refer the proposed
substitution to the Fabricator’s Chief Design Engineer for
• Preparation of shop fabrication drawings;
review. If the substitute is acceptable to the Ministry
• Preparation of bills of material; Representative, the Fabricator’s Chief Draftsperson shall

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (12 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 308 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

amend all drawings and requisitions, withdraw old issues, and They shall verify that the material is an acceptable alternative
issue the new versions. in all respects, and this verification shall include consultation
with the Ministry Representative. If the material is of a grade
The Fabricator’s Receiver shall:
inferior to that ordered, it shall be rejected and the correct
• inspect all materials on arrival for conformance with the material or a superior material shall be obtained.
Purchase Orders; If there is non-conformance of material delivery that will
• confirm that mill certificates and test reports are provided delay production, the Contract Administration Manager and
and that they correctly identify the materials delivered; Fabricator’s Plant Superintendent shall be notified
immediately. They shall be given revised delivery dates for
• arrange with the Fabricator’s Plant Superintendent to the adjustment of production scheduling. The Fabricator’s
store all materials for the Contract in segregated areas. General Manager shall determine the alternatives available
Clear identification with the Contract shall be provided; and shall notify the Ministry Representative.
• issue a non-conformance report covering overage, If there are non-conformities in material preparation,
shortage or damage to the materials, and copies of the assembly, joint edge preparation and fit-up before strength
report shall be provided to the Fabricator’s Purchasing welding, the Fabricator’s Quality Control Manager and
Manager and the Quality Control Manager. Welding Supervisor shall immediately review the non-
The Fabricator’s Purchasing Manager shall deliver all conformance and notify the Fabricator’s Chief Design
documentation to the Fabricator’s Quality Control Manager Engineer who may require further investigation prior to
for inclusion in the Quality Control file for the Contract. submitting corrective action to the Ministry Representative
for approval. If the necessary corrective action will result in
421.67 In-Progress Inspection and Reporting – The delay to production, the Fabricator’s General Manager shall
Fabricator’s Quality Control Manager shall ensure that only be notified for adjustment to the production schedule. The
documented materials are used for the Contract. Fabricator’s Plant Superintendent shall inform the
All materials intended for incorporation into the Work shall Fabricator’s Quality Control Manager when the corrective
be examined after cutting to size, forming and rolling. The actions are being done so that conformance can be verified
Fabricator’s Chief Inspector shall ensure conformance with and the non-conformance report cancelled.
the detailed shop drawings, shall report any non-conformance 421.69 Welding – All welding on structural and mechanical
to the Fabricator’s Quality Control Manager and shall order components shall be done by the company certified to CSA
all work affected by the non-conformance to stop, pending W47.1 (Division 1 or 2) and W186-M as applicable, and shall
approval of remedial action. be done in accordance with the Fabricator's CWB-approved
Before assembling any plate girders or complex parts, the welding standards.
surfaces of all materials shall be examined for imperfections The edge preparations for all groove welds shall conform to
revealed during previous fabrication operations. The joint the dimensions established in the approved welding
edge preparation for all groove welds shall be verified as standards.
conforming to the Fabricator's CWB-approved welding
standards and shall be within the acceptable tolerances. If the joint is to be welded from one side only without back-
gouging, the root gap and root face shall be checked to ensure
After assembly of any plate girders or complex parts, and conformance with the required geometry so that the root pass
before commencing the strength welding, the assembly shall can be successfully completed.
be checked for dimensional conformance. The Fabricator’s
Welding Supervisor shall ensure that the fit-up of all welded The strength level and chemical composition of all filler
joints conforms to the approved welding standards. materials used in structural and mechanical assemblies shall
conform to the approved shop drawings.
The Fabricator’s Quality Control Manager shall file a written
report of verification with the Fabricator’s General Manager All welding consumables shall conform to the approved
and report any non-conformance. welding standards and shall be received, stored and
conditioned according to the applicable welding standards.
421.68 Correction of Non-conformance – When a non-
conformance is encountered, the Fabricator’s Quality Control Any preheat required before welding shall be according to the
Manager shall determine a recommended disposition and approved welding standards.
obtain the Ministry's approval as quickly as possible. The welding procedure followed in welding any joint in a
If there is non-conformance to the material specification structural or mechanical component shall conform to the
stipulated in the Purchase Order, the Fabricator’s Purchasing applicable Data Sheet in the approved welding standards.
Manager shall immediately find out the reasons for the All welders and welding operators welding on structural or
delivery of non-conforming material. If the material is of a mechanical contracts shall be qualified under the
grade superior to that ordered, the Fabricator’s Quality requirements of the CSA Standard governing certification.
Control Manager and the Chief Engineer shall be notified.

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (13 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 309 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

421.70 Heat Treatment – This covers any post-weld heat The Fabricator’s Quality Control Manager shall ensure that
treatment necessary to conform to the approved welding each file is complete in all respects before it is placed in the
standards. Company archives.
The Fabricator’s Chief Design Engineer shall: 421.74 Hold Points – In planning the workflow, the
Fabricator shall coordinate with the Ministry Inspector to
• decide whether any structural or mechanical components decide "hold" points (as defined in SS 145.12) for inspection
shall receive post-weld heat treatment to conform to the or non-destructive testing. A list of hold points shall be drawn
contract conditions or to the applicable Codes and up by the Fabricator and the Ministry Representative at a
Standards. prefabrication meeting. The Ministry Representative shall be
• inform the Fabricator’s Chief Draftsperson of any such informed of progress so that delays are minimized.
requirements so that they may be incorporated on to the The "hold" points will typically include some of, but not be
approved shop drawings. limited to, the following:
Any heat treatment stipulated on the approved shop drawings • verification of materials
or contained in the approved welding standards shall be
carried out at the appropriate time and according to the • after plate is prepared for splicing
approved documents.
• after splicing of plates
The Fabricator’s Plant Superintendent shall ensure that any
heat treatment stipulated is done according to the established • after web to flange weld
procedures, shall obtain all documentation and reports, and • after stiffeners are applied
shall deliver them to the Fabricator’s Quality Control
Manager. • camber of girders
421.71 Non-destructive Testing – The Ministry will test any • shop assembly
weld by non-destructive testing methods, as described in
• cleaning and coating
SS 421.06.
• bearing plate attachment
The Fabricator’s Plant Superintendent shall schedule the
manufacturing operation to facilitate non-destructive testing. • shipping arrangements
If non-destructive testing of any welded joint reveals • subassemblies.
imperfections that are marginally more than the acceptance
standards, the Fabricator’s Quality Control Manager shall Work shall not proceed past a "hold" point until it has been
consult with the Ministry Representative regarding the signed off by Quality Control and Quality Assurance.
location and nature of the imperfections. The effects of Reports shall be completed promptly.
leaving minor defects in place shall be assessed in relationship 421.75 Transportation and Installation Procedures –
to the loads carried by the joint and the possible adverse Transportation and installation procedures shall be prepared
effects of making an unnecessary repair. and submitted for review before any installation takes place
Weld repairs shall conform to the approved welding on Site. The procedures shall be sealed by a professional
standards. engineer experienced in bridge erection and registered with
the APEGBC. Consideration shall be given to the following
421.72 Calibration of Measurement and Test Equipment items during the preparation of the procedures:
– All measurement and testing equipment owned by the
Fabricator and used in the Quality Control Program shall be 421.75.01 Girder Transportation
calibrated and re-calibrated at the intervals and in the manner (a) Brief description of hauling equipment;
stipulated in the Manufacturer's Instruction Manuals. Any
adjusting devices shall be sealed or otherwise protected from (b) Location of girder support points;
unauthorized adjustment or tampering. (c) Engineering backup if supports vary from specifications;
421.73 Records Retention – The Fabricator's record file for and
each Contract shall contain the pertinent drawings, purchase (d) Details of coating protection during loading transporting
orders, bills of material, material mill certificates, test reports, and erection.
Quality Control documents, NDT reports and certificates of
compliance. 421.75.02 Installation Drawings

The Fabricator's record file shall be made available to the (a) Bridge site plan showing piers, abutments and access
Ministry's Inspectors upon request. roads;

Items in the Fabricator's record file shall be retained as per (b) Crane make, crane chart, boom length(s) and crane
company policy. locations;

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (14 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 310 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

(c) Mass of girder and access to crane(s); and sum price bid. Payment shall be for quality control, working
drawings, the supply, bending, cutting, assembly and welding
(d) Special installation equipment such as a launching truss,
of steelwork, including any galvanizing or metalizing
head frames and falsework.
required. Payment shall also cover trial assembly and storage
421.75.03 Commentary – Brief point form description of as necessary.
installation sequence.
421.92 Shipping and Erection – Payment for shipping and
421.75.04 Bearings – Placement procedure for bearings to be erection of structural steelwork will be made at the lump sum
included for multiple span continuous girders. price bid. Payment shall be for quality control and the
loading, shipping and unloading of steelwork. Payment shall
421.75.05 Traffic Control – Any arrangements that will be
also cover falsework if necessary and the erection of
made for road and/or rail traffic.
steelwork.
421.75.06 Utilities – Safety and protection.
421.93 Painting – Payment for painting of structural
421.75.07 Fall Protection – Method and date of installation steelwork will be made at the lump sum price bid. Payment
as required in specifications. shall be for the surface preparation and the supply,
application and touch-up of paint as required.

PAYMENT
421.91 Supply and Fabrication – Payment for supply and
fabrication of structural steelwork will be made at the lump

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (15 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 311 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

Figure 1: Suggested Organization Chart

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (16 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 312 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

Sample Form 421-1: Receiving Report

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (17 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 313 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

Sample Form 421-2: Non-conformance Report

NON-CONFORMANCE REPORT
BRIDGE NAME:
BRIDGE NUMBER:
JOB NUMBERS:
IDENTIFICATION DETAILS:

DESCRIPTION OF NON-CONFORMITY:

20____
Date Signature

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

ACTION AGREED UPON:

Quality Control Supervisor Quality Assurance Inspector

DATE COMPLETED: 20 ___

Signature
HOLD REMOVED BY: 20___
Date
QUALITY CONTROL SUPERVISOR: 20___
Date
QUALITY ASSURANCE INSPECTOR: 20___
Date

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (18 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 314 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

Sample Form 421-3: MoTI Steel Fabrication Check List

Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure

Steel Fabrication Compliance Check List

BRIDGE NAME:
BRIDGE NO.
MARK NUMBER/S:

Q.C. Q.A.
Material: Mill Certificates
(Physicals, Chemicals, Impact Category)
Identification on materials check
Heat number transferred and recorded

Welding: Procedures approved for each process

Consumables checked

Date Completed

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (19 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 315 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

Sample Form 421-4: MoTI Steel Fabrication Compliance Check List

Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure

Steel Fabrication Compliance Check List
BRIDGE NAME: ______________________________________ BRIDGE NO. ________________
MARK NUMBER/S: ________________________________________________________________

Q.C. Q.A.
Welding: Weld preparation and fit up
Welding within parameters
Identification on materials check
Shear studs
Visual Inspection
NDT outside agency results

Q.C. Q.A.

Req'd Actual Verified

Dimensions: Flanges Top Width 1
Width 2
Flatness
Tilt
Bottom Width 1
Width 2
Flatness
Tilt
Web Depth
Section Length
Bearing Ctr. Length
Sole Plate Contract
Camber
Sweep Tolerance
(1/1000)
Splicing Camber
Alignment
Holes
Date Completed

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (20 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 316 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

Sample Form 421-5: Coating Compliance Check List

Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure

Coating Compliance Check List

BRIDGE NAME: ______________________________________ BRIDGE NO. ________________

MARK NUMBER/S: _______________________________________________________________

Q.C. Q.A.
Coating: WHMIS Safety Data Sheets ______ _____
Technical Spec. Sheets ______ _____
Surface Preparation ______ _____
Ambient Conditions – Req'd ______ _____
- Actual ______ _____
Application______ _____
Test Results ______ _____
Date Completed ______ _____

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (21 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 317 of 470
SECTION 421 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

Sample Form 421-6: Sample Tag

BC MoTI SS 2020 421 (22 of 22)

Vol. 1 Page 318 of 470
 SECTION 422

MISCELLANEOUS STEELWORK

DESCRIPTION All PDF sheets shall be assembled within a single file,

subject to the maximum file size indicated above, ensuring
422.01 Scope – This Section covers steelwork apart from
that all sheets are rotated to a “ready to read” orientation
major structural steel elements (see SS 421).
within the PDF file set. Generally, 11”x17” plan sheets
422.02 Adherence to Drawings – Steelwork items shall be should be in landscape and 8½”x11” note sheets in portrait,
fabricated in strict accordance with the Drawings. so that the majority of text is vertical. PDF sheets shall be
ready to print out on appropriately sized paper sheets with
422.03 Working Drawings – The working drawings shall
no additional formatting required by the viewer.
show all information necessary for the fabrication of the
steelwork. If agreed by the Ministry, the Contractor may submit shop
drawings in paper format, in which case four complete sets
Working drawings shall be in the same system of units as
of working drawings shall be submitted.
the design Drawings.
If agreed to by the Ministry Representative, the Contractor
Lettering for notes and dimensions shall be at least 2.5 mm
may employ a document and data management service such
and 4 mm for headings. Drawings shall be legible when
as SharePoint® to transmit working drawings. If this
printed on 11” x 17” sheets. process is used, the limitation on drawing file size is waived.
In the case of simple items, where the design Drawings are The Contractor shall be responsible for setting up the
complete enough to be used for fabrication, the Contractor appropriate folders within the document and data
may, with approval of the Ministry Representative, dispense management software and for providing access to these
with working drawings. The Contractor shall notify the folders to the fabricator, Ministry Representative and the
Ministry Representative of such intention in writing. design engineer. Email notifications shall be sent to all
parties whenever updates are made.
The Contractor shall submit to the Ministry Representative
one complete set of all working drawings in digital format, A copy of the shop drawings shall be available at all times
for the Ministry's information only, two weeks prior to the at the location where the components shown on the
fabrication of the steelwork. Prior to submission to the drawings are being fabricated. Changes to the steelwork
Ministry Representative, working drawings shall be from what is shown on the shop drawings, or repairs made
reviewed and approved by the Contractor. By this review during fabrication and/or construction, shall be indicated by
and approval, the Contractor represents that it has the Contractor on a marked-up set of shop drawings and
determined and verified all field measurements, field submitted to the Designer and Ministry Representative at
construction criteria, materials, and similar data, and that it the completion of the Work.
has checked and coordinated each working drawing with the
422.04 Quality Control – The Contractor shall implement
requirements of the Work and the contract documents. The
a quality control program to meet the Contract
Contractor shall indicate its review and approval by requirements. The quality control program shall be made
including on each drawing the date and signature of a person available to the Ministry Representative for review.
designated by the Contractor as being responsible for the
Work. 422.05 Quality Assurance – The Ministry will implement
a quality assurance program by auditing the quality control
The Contractor shall transmit working drawings through
program and by inspection and testing at its discretion.
attachments to e-mail. Unless otherwise agreed to by the
Ministry Representative, electronic attachments to an email The Contractor shall notify the Ministry Representative at
must total no more than 7 MB and must be submitted least 14 days before fabrication is to commence. In
unzipped. Drawing files shall be submitted in Portable addition, the Contractor shall provide a minimum of
Document Format (PDF) to print out on 11” x 17” size 48 hours notice to the Ministry Representative that a
pages. PDF sets shall be created by “distilling” CAD sheets product will be available for inspection. If the schedule is
rather than by scanning paper plan sets. Unless otherwise subsequently changed, the Contractor shall provide the
agreed to by the Ministry Representative, electronic 48 hours notice from the time that the Ministry is notified of
attachments greater than 7 MB in size shall be sent in two this change. If the product is not available or is not
parts by separate emails, denoting “1 of 2” and “2 of 2” in sufficiently complete for inspection as notified, at the sole
the subject lines after other required subject-line discretion of the Ministry Representative, the Contractor
information. Drawings shall be black images on a white shall be charged stand-by costs for the Ministry’s quality
background. assurance inspector. The Contractor shall allow the
Ministry Representative safe access to all parts of the Work
and shall supply such information and assistance as is

BC MoTI SS 2020 422 (1 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 319 of 470
SECTION 422 MISCELLANEOUS STEELWORK

required. The Contractor shall provide samples of any smooth by planing, chipping or grinding. The cutting flame
materials, when requested by the Ministry. Inspection by shall be so adjusted and manipulated as to avoid cutting
the Ministry shall not relieve the Contractor from obligation beyond the prescribed lines. Re-entrant flame cuts shall be
to perform the work in accordance with the Contract. filleted to a radius of not less than 20 mm. Edges of tension
members shall be ground to a radius of 2 mm.
Any welding work found to be unacceptable shall be
corrected in accordance with CSA W59, Section 5.10. All exposed corners of members which are to be painted,
shall be ground to a radius of 2 mm.
The Contractor shall provide 5 days notice to the Ministry
Representative regarding intent to ship a unit or product and 422.34 Bent Plates – When bending plates, the plates shall
the product shall be made available for inspection prior to be so taken from the stock plates such that the bend line will
loading and shipping. be at right angles to the direction of rolling. Before bending,
the corners of the plate shall be rounded to a radius of 2 mm
422.05 Rejections – The Ministry may reject any items
throughout that portion of the plate at which bending is to
which, in their opinion, do not comply with the
occur. Bending shall be done by methods that will not crack,
requirements of the Contract. The Ministry in its sole
tear or otherwise injure the metal.
discretion may back charge all inspection costs for the
rejected material to the Contractor. Cold bending and the minimum radii for cold bending
shall be in accordance with CSA S6.
Hot bending of plates shall not be permitted without prior
MATERIALS
approval of the Ministry. Any proposed method for hot
422.11 Materials – Structural steel, except where shown bending of plates shall be submitted to the Ministry for
otherwise on the Drawings, shall conform to CSA-G.40.21, review and approval by the Ministry prior to proceeding
Grade 300 W or better. The boron content of steel shall not with the work.
exceed 0.0008%.
422.35 Coating of Steelwork – This subsection applies to
Chemical composition of steel to be galvanized shall be in those parts of the steelwork which are to be coated.
accordance with SS 422.36 – Galvanizing.
All coatings shall be applied according to their
The quality and care of electrodes shall conform to the Manufacturer’s product data sheet unless specified
requirements of the latest CSA W59. otherwise in the Contract Special Provisions.
422.12 Storage of Materials – Structural material shall be Coating work shall be in accordance with SS 216 unless
stored above ground. It shall be kept free from dirt and other noted otherwise in SS 422.
foreign matter, and shall be protected as far as practicable
All exposed edges and corners of members, rolled or cut,
from corrosion. Long members shall be supported on skids
which are to be coated, shall be ground to a minimum radius
placed near enough together to prevent injury from
of 2 mm.
deflection.
All steelwork which is to be coated, shall be given three
shop coats of paint – primer, stripe coat and midcoat. Paint
CONSTRUCTION shall be chosen from SS 308 System SS1. Paint shall be
supplied by the Contractor.
422.31 Welding – All welding shall be done in accordance
with procedures approved by the Canadian Welding Bureau The topcoat may be applied in the shop or in the field. Field
(CWB) and reviewed by the Ministry. applied topcoat coat shall be chosen from either SS 308
System SS1 or SF2. If the topcoat is to be applied in the
All welded fabrication shall be done to the requirements of
shop, then the Quality Control Program shall specifically
the latest CSA W59.
address the integrity of the topcoat through to project
Welding shall be undertaken by a company approved by the completion.
CWB to the requirements of CSA W47.1, Division 2 or Faying surfaces shall receive the prime coat only, as per
better. SS 421.31.06. Faying surfaces shall not be coated with the
422.32 Welders and Welding Operators – The Contractor stripe coat, midcoat or topcoat paint. Coating thicknesses
shall produce evidence that all welders and welding and curing shall be those specified in the Manufacturer’s
operators to be employed on the work are currently qualified Class B certificate.
by CWB in the processes in which they are to be employed.
Paint shall be applied in a covered area in accordance with
422.33 Flame Cutting – Steel may be oxygen or plasma the manufacturer's specifications and SS 216.
cut, using a mechanical guide, provided a smooth surface is All edges, corners, crevices, bolts, nuts, protrusions and
secured. Flame cutting by hand shall be done only where
welds (unless ground flush) shall be stripe painted by brush
approved by the Ministry and the surface shall be made
for a width of 50 mm with the midcoat paint before the

BC MoTI SS 2020 422 (2 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 320 of 470
SECTION 422 MISCELLANEOUS STEELWORK

midcoat coat is applied. Stripe coating paint shall be applied 422.38 Installation – Steelwork shall be installed as shown
as per SSPC-PA 1 and may be applied by spray, but shall be on the Drawings.
brushed in. Stripe painting shall be allowed to cure before
Railings and fences shall be adjusted to produce uniform
the midcoat coat is applied.
height and smooth alignment.
Surfaces shall be cleaned to "near-white" per SSPC-SP10 /
Field welding will be permitted only as shown on the
NACE No. 2 and 50 µm to 75 µm (2 to 3 mils)
Drawings.
sharp/angular profile.
422.39 Field Painting (if required) – This section applies
The midcoat shall be applied to all surfaces including tops
to those parts of the steelwork which are to be painted.
and sides of the top flanges, except faying surfaces. The
midcoat shall not be applied until the primer and stripe coat Coating work shall be in accordance with SS 216 unless
are accepted by the Ministry Representative to be noted otherwise in SS 422.
sufficiently cured.
All steelwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of all rust, dirt,
Any surfaces inaccessible after erection, except faying dust, oil and other foreign materials. Non-visible salts shall
surfaces, shall be given, in addition to the three shop coats, be removed in accordance with SSPC-SP WJ-4 / NACE
one coat of the topcoat paint appropriate for the paint system WJ-4 to meet non-visible contaminant (NVC) levels per
being used. SS 216.07.02(b). The shop coats of paint shall be touched
up as necessary.
If the topcoat is to be applied in the shop, then the topcoat
shall be applied after the midcoat is accepted by the Ministry 422.39.01 Field Touch-up – Bare, rusty or damaged areas
Representative to be sufficiently cured. shall be cleaned to SSPC-SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to
Bare Metal. Feather edges into the existing coating and
The colour of the topcoat will be selected by the Ministry.
build the coating as per SS 216. Build the coating using
The proposed colour shall be subject to the acceptance of
coatings from the specified SS 308 System. Coating system
the Ministry Representative.
shall be from the same manufacturer as the shop coating
422.36 Galvanizing (if required) – All steelwork to be system on the steel.
galvanized shall be galvanized after complete fabrication to
422.39.02 Topcoat – The topcoat coat shall be chosen from
the requirements of ASTM A123 and ASTM A385. The
either SS 308 System SS1 or SF2. If the topcoat has not
galvanizer shall safeguard against embrittlement as required
been applied in the shop, then the steelwork shall be given
in ASTM A143. Galvanized members shall be subject, at
one topcoat coat of paint applied in accordance with the
the discretion of the Ministry, to the tests for embrittlement
manufacturer's specifications and SS 216.
outlined in ASTM A143.
The colour of the finish coat will be selected by the
The chemical composition of steel being galvanized shall be
Ministry. The proposed colour shall be subject to the
as follows:
acceptance of the Ministry Representative
• Carbon less than 0.25%
422.40 Touch-Up of Galvanizing and Metallizing – All
• Phosphorus less than 0.04% field welds and other damage in galvanized and metallized
coatings shall be touched up as follows:
• Manganese less than 1.3%
If the contract documents call for touch-up by metallizing,
• Silicon less than 0.04% or between 0.15% and 0.22%
the damaged areas shall be locally cleaned to the
For steel not meeting these chemical composition requirements of SSPC-SP 5 or SSPC SP 11, with an angular
requirements, special galvanizing techniques shall be profile of 50 to 100 µm. All cleaned areas shall be
developed by the galvanizer to ensure that the specified metallized in accordance with SSPC-CS23.00 / AWS
coating thickness and adherence is achieved. A detailed C2.23M / NACE No. 12, Specification for the Application
description of the special techniques shall be submitted to of Thermal Spray Coatings (Metallizing) of Aluminum,
the Ministry Representative for review 2 weeks prior to Zinc, and Their Alloys and Composites for the Corrosion
galvanizing. Protection of Steel, to provide a zinc coating not less than
0.3 mm in thickness.
422.37 Metallizing (if required) – All surfaces to be
metallized shall be treated after complete fabrication in Cut metal edges may be harder and consequently have less
accordance with SSPC-CS23.00 / AWS C2.23M / NACE profile. If that is the case, they shall be ground back to softer
No. 12, Specification for the Application of Thermal Spray metal and reblasted to achieve the specified profile.
Coatings (Metallizing) of Aluminum, Zinc, and Their
Otherwise, the damaged areas shall be thoroughly cleaned,
Alloys and Composites for the Corrosion Protection of
and painted with two coats of Ministry-approved organic
Steel. The zinc coating shall not be less than 0.3 mm in
zinc-rich paint.
thickness.

BC MoTI SS 2020 422 (3 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 321 of 470
SECTION 422 MISCELLANEOUS STEELWORK

422.41 Clean-up – At the completion of the Contract, all PAYMENT

miscellaneous steelwork shall be cleaned of concrete
422.91 Payment – Payment for miscellaneous steelwork
spatter, mud, oil, shop markings if visible to the public and
will be made at the Lump Sum price(s) bid. Payment shall
other foreign materials.
be for shop drawings and the supply, fabrication,
galvanizing and/or painting if required and installation of
the steelwork.

BC MoTI SS 2020 422 (4 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 322 of 470
 SECTION 502

ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION

END PRODUCT SPECIFICATION (EPS)

GENERAL The Contractor shall provide a paving end product

conforming in professional standard, quality and accuracy
502.01 Preliminary and General – This Section describes
of detail to the QC Plan and the dimensional and tolerance
the materials, equipment, professional standards, and end
requirements of the contract. Where no tolerances are
product requirements for the construction of hot mix asphalt
specified, the standard of workmanship shall be in
pavement and related shouldering operations.
accordance with normally accepted good practice and the
End Product Specifications (EPS) contain the acceptance provisions of this Section. Payment is subject to upward or
and payment criteria based on the results of specified downward adjustments based on quality acceptance tests
sampling and testing. Payment of the Contract Unit Prices performed by the Ministry Representative and calculations
for the asphalt pavement product is contingent on the performed by the Contractor with respect to application rate.
product meeting the Quality Control (QC) Plan,
502.03 Definitions
professional standards and quality requirements of this
Section and is subject to payment adjustments upward and 502.03.01 Actual Asphalt Content – The amount of
downward in accordance to the provisions provided in this asphalt cement in the mix as determined by the Ministry’s
Section. Quality Assurance Program.
When used in this Section and subject to the General 502.03.02 Additives – Solid or liquid materials to enhance
Conditions: the properties of the liquid asphalt cement or mix.
• “Acceptance” means agreement with past actions 502.03.03 Aggregate – The crushed or screened gravel.
or decisions made, within the scope of the
502.03.04 Asphalt Cement (AC) – A bitumen-based liquid
Contract.
binder used in asphalt pavement.
• “Authorization” means formal approval for future 502.03.05 Asphalt Content – The percentage of asphalt
actions, frequently changing the Contract cement in the mix expressed as percentage by weight of the
requirements. total dry aggregate in the mix determined by the Oven Test
502.02 General Description of the Work – Generally, the procedure.
work associated with the construction of asphalt pavement 502.03.06 Asphalt Mix (AM) – Hot plant mixture of
and shouldering by EPS consists of the following: asphalt cement and aggregate.
• Preparing a QC Plan for review before 502.03.07 Asphalt Mix Aggregate (AMA) – The
commencing the Work and providing at the processed crushed aggregate just prior to the addition of
production site a testing facility to provide the data asphalt cement.
needed to implement that plan;
502.03.08 Asphalt Mix Design (AMD) – The asphalt mix
• Supplying, screening, crushing, processing and design that is developed through the initial trials and testing
improving aggregate to produce asphalt mix to determine and optimize the Job Mix Formula for the end
aggregate; product of the asphalt mix.
• Supplying and delivering asphalt cement and spray 502.03.09 Asphalt Pavement (AP) – Compacted asphalt
primer meeting the requirements of SS 952; mix.
• Preparing mix designs which, once reviewed and 502.03.10 Cutback Asphalt – Asphalt cement which has
accepted by the Ministry Representative, become been blended with light petroleum distillates.
the basis for the accepted Job Mix Formula;
502.03.11 Design Asphalt Content – The asphalt content
• Heating the asphalt mix aggregate and mixing it upon which the Job Mix Formula is initially established.
with asphalt cement to produce asphalt mix that
meets the Job Mix Formula; 502.03.12 Driving Lane – A single lane in any area of the
pavement other than a shoulder or a barrier flare.
• Hauling, placing, compacting and finishing the
502.03.13 Emulsified Asphalt – Asphalt cement that has
asphalt mix; and
been blended with water and emulsifying agents to form
• Supplying, hauling, placing and compacting aqueous emulsions, including anionic type, cationic type
shoulder gravels. and high float type.

o 2020 502 1 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 323 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

502.03.14 End Product Specification (EPS) – A 502.03.26 Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA) – The
specification whereby the Contractor is responsible for the space available to accommodate the effective volume of
workmanship and quality control of the construction asphalt (asphalt not absorbed into the aggregate) and the
processes, and whereby the Ministry reviews the volume of air voids necessary in the mixture.
workmanship and may perform the specified quality
502.04 Quality Control
assurance sampling and testing of the end product for the
purpose of determining acceptance/rejection and payment. 502.04.01 General – Quality Control shall be performed by
the Contractor in accordance with SS 101 and the
502.03.15 Job Mix Formula (JMF) – The asphalt mix
requirements of this Section.
“recipe”, proposed by the Contractor in accordance with
SS 502.08.04 or an accepted variation in accordance with 502.04.02 Quality Control (QC) Plan – The paving
SS 502.08.10 and accepted by the Ministry, establishing the component of the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan shall
aggregate proportions, gradation, and the asphalt content to fulfill or exceed the requirements of Appendix 502-A and
be used for production of asphalt mix. function integrally with any other Quality Management
provisions of the Contract.
502.03.16 Levelling Course (LC) – Asphalt mix used to
improve crossfall, level, and strengthen existing pavements. The QC Plan shall be submitted in accordance with the
timelines established in SS 101.02.03(c).
502.03.17 Lift – A layer of asphalt mix laid in a single
application then compacted. The QC Plan must include a detailed description of the
means by which the Contractor shall use the quality control
• Top Lift The uppermost Lift, forming the final
test results to ensure that the workmanship, asphalt
running surface.
materials, aggregate, mix production, paving and pavement
• Lower Lift Any Lift below Top Lift. compaction processes will be controlled to keep the product
within the specified limits. The QC Plan must clearly show
• Bottom Lift The lowest Lift (excluding Level the flow of information from the quality control laboratory
Course), to the individuals who shall make the actual adjustments to
502.03.18 Lot and Sub-Lot – A Lot is a portion of the work the processes and equipment to affect this control. The plan
being considered for acceptance and for the determination will show time allowance for each step, the names and
of payment adjustments. For density, AC content, gradation positions of all the people involved, and a clear description
and smoothness, each Lot is comprised of a number of Sub- of the responsibilities of each.
Lots, each of which is sampled, and then aggregated to 502.04.03 Quality Control Testing and Inspection – The
determine the acceptability of the Lot. Lot and Sub-Lot Contractor shall provide and maintain equipment and
sizes are defined in the appropriate payment adjustment qualified personnel to perform all laboratory testing, field
provisions of this Section. testing and inspection necessary to determine and monitor
502.03.19 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) – Asphalt the characteristics and properties of all the materials
Pavement that has been removed and processed, for the produced and incorporated into the work. They shall also
purpose of recycling. monitor the workmanship of the final product in accordance
with the QC Plan as most recently submitted and accepted.
502.03.20 Recycled Asphalt Mix (RAM) – A carefully
controlled hot plant mix of asphalt cement, graded high The Contractor shall provide a testing facility(s) that meets
quality aggregate, and reclaimed asphalt pavement. the requirements necessary to carry out all the test
procedures listed within this Section. The facility(s) must
502.03.21 Reject Mix – Asphalt mix that is deemed have the equipment specified under the appropriate test
unacceptable for use in the project. designation to perform the tests. The Ministry shall have
502.03.22 Sample Mean – The arithmetic mean of a set of access at all times to the quality control facility(s).
test results constituting the sample. 502.04.04 Quality Control Records – Quality Control
502.03.23 Smoothness – A measure of the longitudinal inspections shall be recorded on check sheets and/or diaries
profile of the pavement surface, measured as International at the time of inspection.
Roughness Index (IRI). The results from Quality Control testing shall be reported
502.03.24 Surplus Aggregate – Aggregate surplus to the on test logs and plotted on charts immediately after each test
works, in split or un-split stockpiles which singly or is completed. The Contractor shall report all test results on
combined will meet the asphalt mix aggregate gradation. Ministry-supplied forms (available from the Ministry
Representative) or Contractor-supplied forms acceptable to
502.03.25 Random Sample – A set of test measurements the Ministry Representative.
taken, one each from a number of separate areas or Sub-Lots
within a Lot, in an unbiased way. For the purposes of confirming delivery of asphalt mix and
shouldering aggregate to the road and the calculation of

o 2020 502 2 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 324 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

material application rates, the Contractor shall provide to may be used without charge provided they are developed
the Ministry Representative a copy of the Road Checker’s and worked in accordance with SS 145.26, SS 202 Part C,
Summary and the weigh tickets for each load received at the and the pit development plan. Deviation from the pit
placement operation at the end of each shift. The Road development plan will require the authorization of the
Checker’s Summary shall include, but not be limited to, the Ministry Representative. No guarantee is given or implied
following information: that aggregate from a Ministry pit(s) will meet the
specification requirements or provide requisite quantities.
• Truck Number;
Without limitation and unless otherwise specified in the
• Weigh Ticket Number and Net Weight of load; Special Provisions, the following items shall not be left in a
• Date, time and location by station of delivery; Ministry pit:

• Material Application Rate Dimensions and • Surplus milled or rubblized asphalt pavements;
Calculations. Calculation frequency minimally • Reject mix;
shall be for every 10 loads; and
• Fuel contaminated materials; or
• Notes pertaining to the paving of any
appurtenances (letdowns, intersections, tapers, • Other waste products.
etc.).
502.06.03 Supply of Aggregates, Aggregate Production
In addition to the equipment calibration requirements of and Characteristics – The Contractor shall not produce
SS 101, for the purpose of obtaining accurate and consistent aggregate until the Contractor has received written
results between the Contractor’s Quality Control testing and notification from the Ministry Representative that their QC
the Ministry’s Quality Acceptance testing, correlation of the Plan is in accordance with SS 502.04.02, and has in place
Marshall hammer and ignition ovens to be used on the testing facilities for aggregate production that are in
project shall be performed prior to mix production. accordance with the QC Plan.
Correlation procedures to be followed for both the Marshall
For the production of aggregate within Ministry pits, the
hammer and ignition oven are included as Appendices to
Contractor shall follow the Ministry’s pit development plan,
this SS 502.
and provide crushing equipment such that all aggregate,
502.04.05 Final Quality Control Testing Reports – Prior which will pass through 375 mm x 450 mm slotted
to the issuance of a Completion Certificate, the Contractor openings, shall be used for the production of crushed
shall provide the Ministry Representative with: aggregate. Rocks, which will not pass through these
openings, shall be stockpiled safely at a location in the pit
• A summary of all aggregate quality control test as directed by the Ministry Representative. Crushing and
results; screening equipment shall be provided with adequate
• Copies of all quality control test results for asphalt facilities and capacity to be able to bleed off reject aggregate
mix properties and compaction; and and remove any excess fine aggregate, dust or objectionable
aggregate coatings, to make it generally acceptable for use.
• Copies of all quality control charts. No portion of the products from crushing or screening plants
MATERIALS that can be used shall be wasted but shall be stockpiled or
used as directed by the Ministry Representative.
502.05 Materials Testing
Where the Ministry has any available test result information
502.05.01 Test Procedures – Where a test is specified to on the properties shown in Table 502-B, for a Ministry pit
conform to an ASTM procedure, the listed corresponding or other source, the Ministry Representative will upon
AASHTO test may be used, or vice versa. See Table 502-A. request, provide that information to the Contractor.
502.05.02 Sieve Sizes – All aggregate gradation tests shall Otherwise, sampling and testing to determine and
use the following sieve sizes: 37.5 mm, 25 mm, 19 mm, demonstrate the compliance of aggregate with the
16 mm, 12.5 mm, 9.5 mm, 4.75 mm, 2.36 mm, 1.18 mm, requirements of this Section shall be the responsibility of
0.600 mm, 0.300 mm, 0.150 mm, and 0.075 mm. the Contractor.

502.06 Aggregates 502.06.04 Shouldering Aggregate – Shouldering

aggregate shall meet the following unless otherwise
502.06.01 Aggregates – The Contractor shall supply all specified in the Special Provisions or authorized by the
aggregates for the Work from sources acceptable to the Ministry Representative:
Ministry Representative.
(a) Aggregate may be AMA, 25 mm WGB, or HFSA; and
502.06.02 Work in Ministry Pits or Quarries – Ministry
pits offered in the Special Provisions as available sources

o 2020 502 3 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 325 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

Table 502-A: Standard Sampling and Testing Procedures

Test Ref. No. Standard Test Method for…

AASHTO ASTM (ASTM test title, unless otherwise noted)
Aggregates:
T 11 C117 Materials Finer than 75 μm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
T 85 C127 Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
T 84 C128 Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
T 27 C136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
T 112 C142 Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates
T 255 C566 Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying
T2 D75 Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates
Standard Test Methods for Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate (as Influenced by
T 304 C1252
Particle Shape, Surface Texture, and Grading) [Method “A”]
Standard Practice for Dry Preparation of Soil Samples for Particle-Size Analysis and
D421†
Determination of Soil Constants [aka Atterberg Limit]
T 176 D2419 Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate
D4318 Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
D5821 Determining the Percentages of Fractured Particles in Coarse Aggregate
T 327 D6928 Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus
Asphalt Cement:
T 49 D5 Penetration of Bituminous Materials
T 202 D2171 Viscosity of Asphalts by Vacuum Capillary Viscometer
T 350 Standard Method of Test for Multiple Stress Creep Recovery (MSCR) Test of Asphalt
T 350 D7405
Binder Using a Dynamic Shear Rheometer (DSR)
Asphalt Mix and Pavement:
D979 Standard Practice for Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
T 283 D1075 Effect of Water on Compressive Strength of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Paraffin Coated
D1188
Specimens
D2041 Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures
D2726 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non-Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
T 269 D3203 Percent Air Voids in Compacted Dense and Open Bituminous Paving Mixtures
D4469 Calculating Percent Asphalt Absorption by the Aggregate in an Asphalt Pavement Mixture
AASHTO Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using
T 245 D5581
Marshall Apparatus
T-308 D6307 Asphalt Content of Hot Mix Asphalt by Ignition Method
D6927 Marshall Stability and Flow of Asphalt Mixtures
Shouldering:
Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort
D698
(12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) [aka Standard Proctor]
Standard Test Methods for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Neutron Depth Probe
D5220
Method
In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil- Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (shallow
D6938
depth)
Note: † – Practice has been “withdrawn” by ASTM, but last published version D421-85(2007) is still applicable to the Work.

o 2020 502 4 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 326 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

Table 502-B: Requirements for Coarse Aggregate (b) Fine Aggregate

(i) Shall be all mineral matter passing the sieve
Test Ref. #

Superpave
designated in the test procedure(s) for each
Procedures individual test.

Class 1

Class 2
AASHTO ASTM
(ii) Shall be clean, tough, durable, moderately sharp,
and free from coatings of clay, silt, or other
Maximum deleterious material, and shall contain no clay balls
Water or other aggregations of fine material.
T 85 C127 2 2 2
Absorption,
% by mass (iii) Shall have a sand equivalent of not less than 40
(not less than 45 for Superpave mixes) when tested
Maximum
in accordance with ASTM D2419.
% by mass
T 112 C142 of clay balls 1.0 1.0 1.5 (iv) For Class 1 and Superpave mixes, shall have a
and friable minimum value of 45 when tested according to the
particles AASHTO T 304, Method “A”, - Uncompacted
2 Fractured Void Content of Fine Aggregate when determining
Faces, Fine Aggregate Angularity.
Minimum % (c) Mineral Filler and Mineral Dust
D5821 by Mass 90 85 70
retained on (i) Mineral filler shall consist of all matter passing the
the 4.75 mm 0.600 mm sieve and mineral dust shall consist of
sieve all mineral matter passing the 0.075 mm sieve.
Maximum (ii) Shall be free from organic matter.
Micro-
(iii) Mineral filler shall be non-plastic when tested in
Deval
T 327 D6928 18 18 20 accordance with ASTM D4318.
abrasion
loss (d) Superpave Aggregates – Aggregates for Superpave
factor, % mixes shall have properties and the gradation limits as
specified below and in accordance with the latest
version of the Asphalt Institute’s Superpave Series
(b) Aggregate gradations and physical properties shall Publication – Superpave Mix Design (current version).
comply with: Changes and/or variations from these limits shall be
(i) SS 502.06, if AMA is to be used; or outlined within the Special Provisions.

(ii) SS 202.04 and SS 202.05, for any other (i) 90% fractured aggregate with a 12.5 mm nominal
aggregates. maximum size, including sufficient manufactured
fines to provide fine aggregate angularity.
502.06.05 Paving Aggregates – Paving aggregates shall
meet the following requirements: (ii) The aggregates must meet all the requirements for
angularity, toughness deleterious materials, clay
(a) Coarse Aggregates content, and flat and elongated particles.
(i) Shall be all mineral matter retained on the sieve (iii) Design ESALs will be 10 – 30 million.
designated in the test procedures for each
individual test. 502.07 Supply of Asphalt Cement and Primer – The
Contractor shall supply the types and grades of asphalt
(ii) Shall consist of crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cement and primers as specified in the Special Provisions
combination thereof, or materials naturally and in accordance with SS 952. The supply of these
occurring in a fractured condition, or materials materials includes, but is not limited to, ordering,
naturally occurring of highly angular nature or scheduling delivery of, receiving, handling, storing,
rough texture. sampling, and testing of the materials and other related
(iii) Shall be free from coating of clay, silt or other work.
deleterious material. The Contractor shall supply the Ministry Representative
(iv) Shall meet the requirements listed in Table 502-B. with copies of the asphalt supplier’s weigh-bill and records
of all asphalt materials received on a daily basis.

o 2020 502 5 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 327 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

502.07.01 Asphalt Binder Testing – The Contractor shall Any subsequent change in the asphalt cement supplied
provide supplier’s Asphalt Binder testing and grade by the Contractor will require a new asphalt mix design
information upon request. unless permitted otherwise by the Ministry
Representative.
502.07.02 Testing for Viscoelastic Properties – The
Ministry may test an Asphalt cement to determine its Asphalt mix designs, Job Mix Formulas, and field
viscoelastic properties. adjustments made in accordance with SS 502.08.10
must all be based on an aggregate gradation meeting the
The selected grades of Asphalt Cement may be tested at a
requirements of Table 502-D and the criteria specified
temperature of 58°C to determine the average percent
in Table 502-E or Table 502-F, as applicable.
recover at 3.2 kPa (R3.2) according to the requirements of
ASTM D7405. (b) Marshall Mixes – The asphalt mix design for Class 1
and Class 2 pavements shall be carried out under
The minimum R3.2@58°C value for selected asphalt binder
Marshall design criteria using the designated
grades shall be determined as outlined in Table 502-C.
equipment and procedures as contained in the Asphalt
Table 502-C: MSCR – Elastic Recovery Requirements Institute’s “Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete
MS-2” (current version). Marshall hammers shall be
PGAC Minimum R3.2 @ 58°C correlated in accordance with Appendix 502-F.
(c) Superpave Mixes – The Superpave asphalt mix design
58-34
25% shall be carried out in accordance with the latest edition
64-28
of the Asphalt Institute’s “Superpave Mix Design,
58-37 Superpave Series No. 2” (current version) and this
58-40 specification.
40%
64-34
70-28 The JMF aggregate gradation shall fall under the
maximum density gradation line for the 0.300 mm to
64-37 2.36 mm sieves, inclusive.
55%
76-28
(d) Open Graded Friction Course (“OGFC”) Mixes –
The OGFC asphalt mix design shall be carried out
502.08 Asphalt Mix under the Marshall design criteria using the designated
equipment and procedures in accordance with the latest
502.08.01 Responsibility for Asphalt Mix Design –
edition of the Asphalt Institute’s “Superpave Mix
Preparation and submission of the project asphalt mix
Design, Superpave Series No. 2” (current version).
designs for Ministry review is the responsibility of the
Contractor. All costs incurred in mix design formulation are 502.08.03 Asphalt Mix Antistrip Additives –For all mix
the responsibility of the Contractor. designs, the Contractor shall determine the Tensile Strength
Ratio (TSR) of each asphalt mix in accordance with
The Contractor shall utilise a qualified registered member
AASHTO T 283.
of the Association of Professional Engineers and
Geoscientists of British Columbia or a qualified, registered An antistrip additive shall be added to the asphalt mix when:
member of the Applied Science Technologists and
Technicians of British Columbia who shall sign off the • Special Provisions so direct;
asphalt mix design. The Contractor shall utilise a CCIL • TSR is less than 80; or
certified testing laboratory for
• Ministry Representative specifically requests it.
• meeting the requirements of SS 101;
The Contractor shall select the antistrip additive from the
• assessing the aggregate material proposed for use; Ministry’s “Recognized Products List” and add it to all
and asphalt mix used in the Work, at an application rate of 0.3%
• preparing Asphalt Mix Designs as required in additive by weight of asphalt cement. The Recognized
SS 502. Products list is available on-line at:

502.08.02 Requirements for Asphalt Mix Design http://www.th.gov.bc.ca/publications/eng_publications/geo

tech/Recognized_Products_Book.pdf
(a) All Mixes – Asphalt mix designs shall be performed
using the asphalt cement grade specified in the Special 502.08.04 Asphalt Mix Design Submittals – The
Provisions and which is from the same refinery Contractor shall submit each Asphalt Mix Design to the
contracted to supply the asphalt cement for the duration Ministry Representative for review. The Ministry will
of the project. review the Asphalt Mix Design to ensure it complies with
the requirements of the Contract.

o 2020 502 6 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 328 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

Table 502-D: Asphalt Mix Aggregate Gradation Limits

Percentage Passing by Mass

Asphalt Asphalt
Sieve Size Fine Base Bound Open
Coarse Mix Medium Mix Graded Base Superpave1
(mm) Mix Course
(ABC) (ABOGB)
Nominal
37.5 mm 19 mm 16 mm 12.5 mm 25 mm 25 mm
12.5 mm
37.5 100
25.0 80 – 100 100 100
19.0 60 – 92 100 80 – 94 75 – 100 100
16.0 100
12.5 50 – 85 84 – 95 90 – 100 100 90 – 100
9.50 40 – 80 73 – 90 73 – 90 90 – 100 50 – 84 30 – 60
4.75 30 – 65 50 – 75 50 – 75 55 – 80 25 – 55 5 – 30
2.36 20 – 50 35 – 57 35 – 57 32 – 64 20 – 45 0 – 10 28 – 58
1.18 15 – 35 26 – 45 26 – 45 24 – 51 15 – 35
0.600 8 – 30 18 – 34 18 – 34 17 – 40
0.300 6 – 22 10 – 26 10 – 26 13 – 29 5 – 20 0–8
0.150 3 – 15 6 – 17 6 – 17 8 – 18
0.075 1–7 3–7 3–7 4 – 10 0-5 0-4 2 – 10
Note (1): from Appendix B in SuperPave SP-2

Table 502-E: Marshall Design and Production Criteria

Pavement Class
Property of Laboratory Compacted Paving Mixture
1 2
Number of blows each face of test specimens 75 75
Minimum % Voids in Asphalt Mix Aggregate for 19 mm Medium Asphalt Mix 14 14
Minimum % Voids in Asphalt Mix Aggregate for 16 mm Medium Asphalt Mix 14.5 14
Minimum % Voids in Asphalt Mix Aggregate for 12.5 mm Fine Asphalt Mix 15 15
% air voids in laboratory compacted mixture for 19 mm Medium Asphalt Mix 2.5 to 4.5 2.5 to 4.5
% air voids in laboratory compacted mixture for 16 mm Medium Asphalt Mix 2.5 to 4.5 2.5 to 4.5
% air voids in laboratory compacted mixture for 12.5 mm Fine Asphalt Mix 2.5 to 4.5 2.5 to 4.5
Minimum Marshall Load, N @ 60°C for 80 – 100 Pen. and 120 – 150 Pen. 9000 7000
Minimum Marshall Load, N @ 60°C for 150 – 200 Pen. and 200 – 300 Pen. 7000 6000
Flow index, units of 0.25 mm 8 to 14 8 to 16
Minimum Asphalt Film Thickness, µm (microns) (see Appendix 502-E) 8.0 8.0
Minimum Index of Retained Stability after immersion in water at 60°C for 24 hours 85% 75%

o 2020 502 7 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 329 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

Table 502-F: Superpave Design and Production Criteria

Property of Laboratory Compacted Paving Mixture

SuperPave
For Design ESALs = 10 - 30 million, at NDesign = 100 gyrations
% voids in the Mineral Aggregate, minimum 14
Required density: % of Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity in a laboratory compacted mix
at Nmax = 160 gyrations 98
at NDesign = 100 gyrations 95 – 972
at NInitial = 8 gyrations <89
% voids filled with Asphalt Cement 65 – 75
Dust to Binder ratio 3
0.6 – 1.2
2
For design Superpave density shall be 96. 3 Consideration shall be given to increasing the dust to binder ratio to 0.8 – 1.6

Paving Work shall not proceed until the Contractor receives 502.08.06 Ignition Oven Correlation – After receiving
the results of the review in writing from the Ministry acceptance of the Asphalt Mix Design, the Contractor shall
Representative. The Contractor's submissions shall include prepare blank aggregate samples (aggregate-only samples
the following information: prepared to match the mix design) for correlation of the
Contractor, Ministry and appeal laboratory ignition ovens.
• Gradation (ASTM C117) of each aggregate to be Blanks shall be prepared in accordance with
used in each mixture; Appendix 502-C Blank Aggregate Samples.
• Percentage by mass of each aggregate to be used in The Ministry Representative shall randomly select which of
each mixture; the individual blanks will be used.
• Design gradation (ASTM C117) of the combined Within 3 working days, and prior to any mix production, the
aggregate for each mixture for each of the sieve Contractor and the Ministry shall prepare and test asphalt
sizes applicable to the mix, per the first column of mix samples in accordance with Appendix 502-D Ignition
Table 502-D; Oven Correlation.
• Estimated dry sieve gradation (ASTM C136) 502.08.07 Use of Calibration Factors in Reporting
correlated to the JMF gradation; Asphalt Cement Content – Results from testing of any
• All Asphalt Mix Design data used in arriving at the asphalt mix shall report the measured AC Content and the
final mix designs; corrected AC Content after applying the applicable
laboratory calibration factor.
• Design Asphalt Content expressed as a percentage
of the dry weight of the aggregate; 502.08.08 Verification of Job Mix Formula from the
Asphalt Mix Design - Verification of the Asphalt Mix
• Design Mix Temperature, which shall be the Design will be carried out by the Contractor during the
temperature at which the kinematic viscosity of the course of production of the first 1,000 tonnes of mix using
asphalt cement is 0.17 Pa•s (170 centistokes) or as the Asphalt Mix Design.
per the Asphalt Cement supplier’s
During the first 1,000 tonnes of plant production, the
recommendations; and
Contractor may make any adjustments it chooses to the
• Recommended compaction temperature. Asphalt Mix Design, testing the mix, and refining the
Asphalt Mix Design to a state that fully complies with
502.08.05 Ministry’s Review of Asphalt Mix Design - The Table 502-D and Table 502-E (or Table 502-F as
Ministry Representative will require up to five (5) calendar applicable) and the Special Provisions.
days from the time of receipt of the Asphalt Mix Design for
review. The mix design must be reviewed and accepted by All mix of the Asphalt Mix Design laid must be tracked by
the Ministry Representative prior to commencement of the Contractor, and reported to the Ministry
pavement construction. Representative, as to lay-down location and the Asphalt
Mix Design values in effect at the time that mix was
Upon acceptance of the Asphalt Mix Design, the Contractor produced, to ensure appropriate values are used in
shall prepare the laboratory equipment calibration samples, comparing design to sampled properties.
submit them to the Ministry Representative, and participate
in the calibration and correlation process described in After production of the first 1,000 tonnes, the Contractor
Appendix 502-C Blank Aggregate Sample Preparation and shall declare their Job Mix Formula (JMF) to the Ministry
Appendix 502-D Ignition Oven Correlation Procedure. Representative and provide volumetric properties/test data

o 2020 502 8 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 330 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

on the final mix produced. Any future adjustments to the the Job Mix Formula to two from the originally derived
JMF shall comply with all requirements of SS 502. Asphalt Mix Design.
Where the JMF varies from the Asphalt Mix Design by a No field adjustment will be acceptable if it results in a
cumulative amount greater than any tolerance specified in change from the Asphalt Mix Design, for any property, in
Table 502-D, the Contractor shall do a single point excess of the maximum adjustment for that property
confirmatory Asphalt Mix Design and report the results to permitted in Table 502-G. All production Mix shall meet
the Ministry Representative. either Table 502-E or Table 502-F
502.08.09 AC Content Bump – Upon receipt of a Job Mix
Formula meeting all Contract requirements, the Ministry
EQUIPMENT AND PLANT
may direct the Contractor to increase the asphalt cement
content by a “bump” of up to 0.3% by weight of dry 502.15 All equipment and plant shall be in good mechanical
aggregate in the mix. condition and be capable of performing the Work in
accordance with this section.
502.08.10 Field Adjustment of Job Mix Formula - A field
adjustment to the Job Mix Formula is defined as a change
in the asphalt cement content of the mix, aggregate
gradation and/or proportioning of various aggregate sizes, CONSTRUCTION
within the specified limits as shown in Table 502-G without 502.20 Minimum Acceptable Construction Practices –
review and acceptance of a new Asphalt Mix Design. Professional standards in accordance with the Contractor’s
QC Plan and construction industry best practices are a core
Table 502-G: Field Adjustment of Job Mix Formula
requirement of the Work. Any construction practice or
Maximum activity that results in an obvious defect must be corrected
Cumulative by the Contractor. Construction practices shall include but
Job Mix Formula Property are not limited to the following:
Field
Adjustment 502.21 Prime Coat and Tack Coat - Applications of prime
Percentage Passing by Sieve Size: coat and tack coat are required and shall be applied unless
otherwise directed by the Ministry Representative.
• 37.5 mm, 25.0 mm, 19.0 mm,
2.0%
and 16.0 mm 502.21.01 Surface and Weather Conditions – The liquid
• 12.5 mm and 9.5 mm 2.0% asphalt for prime coat or tack coat shall be applied when
surface and weather conditions are favourable. The
• 4.75 mm and 2.36 mm 1.5% application of prime coat and tack coat shall meet
• 1.18 mm and 0.600 mm 1.5% manufacturer’s requirements.
• 0.300 mm and 0.150 mm 1.5% 502.21.02 Spray Temperature – The liquid asphalt shall
• 0.075 mm 0.5% be sprayed within the temperature range specified by the
supplier.
Asphalt Cement content 0.3%
502.21.03 Prepared Granular Bases and Old Pavements
– All prepared granular bases, old pavements, and portions
The proposed field adjustment shall be submitted in writing of all other infrastructure that will be in contact with the new
together with supporting documentation to the Ministry pavement paved shall be prime coated or tack coated at
Representative. Within four hours of receipt of the proposed specified rates.
field adjustments. The Ministry Representative will review
502.21.04 Application – The spray bars shall produce
the field adjustment for conformance with the contract
double coverage at one pass, with uniform spray and even
requirements and notify the Contractor whether or not it is
pressure with application rates controlled to within ±25% of
acceptable.
the specified application rate.
The Contractor’s field adjustment to the Job Mix Formula
Spray bar nozzles shall be of the same type and size, set to
must comply with the Asphalt Mix Design requirements of
produce uniformly fan-shaped sprays without atomization.
SS 502.08.02 through SS 502.08.04 inclusive. The
Contractor shall provide all supporting verification data. 502.21.05 Spraying Faults – Any spraying faults shall be
corrected by the Contractor.
After the Job Mix Formula has been established in
accordance with SS 502.08.10, no field adjustment to that 502.21.06 Excess Liquid Asphalt – Excess liquid asphalt
Job Mix Formula will be permitted without prior written remaining unabsorbed shall be blinded with sand or fine
authorization by the Ministry Representative. The Ministry aggregate at no expense to the Ministry.
Representative will limit the number of field adjustments of

o 2020 502 9 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 331 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

502.21.07 Surface Condition – The surface to be tack be disposed of in a manner acceptable to the environmental
coated shall be cleaned of dirt or other foreign material. agencies and the Ministry Representative.
502.21.08 Application – Tack coat shall not be applied on 502.23 Stockpiling Aggregates
sections of roadway longer than will be covered by one day
502.23.01 Stockpile Construction – Stockpiles shall be
of asphalt plant production.
constructed as specified in SS 202.21.
502.21.09 Traffic – Traffic shall not be permitted on tack
502.23.02 Stockpiles for Different Materials – Stockpiles
coat until it has cured and on prime coat until the primer has
of different types of material shall be located and
been absorbed into the granular surfacing.
constructed in such a manner as to prevent intermingling of
Where it is not possible to keep the traffic off the treated the types and to prevent segregation.
surface, the surface shall be blinded with sand or fine
502.23.03 Stockpile Requirements Prior to Mix
aggregate, at no expense to the Ministry, prior to allowing
Production – Before plant mixing commences, the
traffic on surface.
Contractor shall have in stockpile a minimum of 20,000
502.21.10 Curing – Prime coats shall be allowed to cure for tonnes of asphalt mix aggregate or 50% of the total quantity
a minimum of 24 hours or to the satisfaction of the Ministry of asphalt aggregate required for the mix, whichever
Representative prior to the placing of asphalt mix and tack quantity is greater. These quantities shall be maintained
coats shall be allowed to cure to a state that minimizes throughout the crushing period. These requirements may be
tracking prior to the placing of asphalt mix. waived by the Ministry Representative in circumstances
where such stockpiles cannot be accommodated, such as
502.21.11 Maintenance - The Contractor shall, at the
where materials are being barged in or are being hauled to
Contractor's expense, maintain the prime coat and/or tack
the plant from a remote site.
coat.
502.24 Mix Production
502.22 Adjacent Mats, Joints, Edges, and Let-downs
502.24.01 Mixing Temperature – The temperature of the
502.22.01 Longitudinal Joints – Longitudinal joints in the
asphalt mix measured at the plant discharge chute shall be
Top Lift of asphalt pavement will only be permitted where
maintained at ±15°C of the Design Mixing Temperature
lane dividing lines are to be painted. Longitudinal joints in
designated in the accepted Mix Design, with adjustments
a Lift shall be offset within 150 to 300 mm from joints in
within that range made at the Contractor’s discretion.
the underlying Lift. Joints shall be pinched as soon as
Where the Contractor plans to adjust the actual mix
practicable, using best compaction practices.
temperature to 10°C or more above the Design Mixing
502.22.02 Longitudinal Edge – Any longitudinal edge that Temperature, the Contractor shall notify the Ministry
has been damaged by traffic or equipment shall be trimmed Representative prior to making the adjustment. To optimize
to provide a vertical abutting face. Vertical surfaces of mix properties during inclement weather or to address other
roadway appurtenances shall be tack coated to the top of the specific circumstances, the Ministry Representative may
new pavement only. agree, in advance, to a higher mixing temperature.
502.22.03 Contact Edge – The contact edge of abutting Mix produced at a temperature above the upper tolerance
cooled asphalt pavement shall be thoroughly painted with a limit may be deemed Reject Mix by the Ministry
uniform coat of emulsified asphalt. Representative.
502.22.04 Paving Adjoining Mats – When paving an 502.24.02 Residual Moisture Content – The residual
adjoining parallel mat there shall be at overlap onto the moisture content of the asphalt mix prior to compaction
previously paved surface of 25 ±15 mm. This overlap shall shall not exceed 1% by mass. Should foaming or bubbling
be properly constructed to form a homogeneous bond persist, even below the allowed percentage of moisture, the
between the two mats. Contractor shall modify operations accordingly.
502.22.05 Disposal of Raking Material – Any raked 502.25 Placing the Asphalt Mix
material from the joint shall not be placed on the new mat
502.25.01 Surface Condition – Asphalt mix shall only be
or placed in or in front of the paver. The Contractor shall
placed on clean dry surfaces free from all foreign materials,
dispose of the material in a manner acceptable to the
and when weather and conditions are suitable. Normally,
environmental agencies and the Ministry Representative.
asphalt mix is only placed when the ambient air temperature
502.22.06 Discontinued Paving – When paving is is 5°C and rising and for Top Lift when the average surface
discontinued in any lane on a traffic bearing roadway, the temperature is also above 5°C.
asphalt pavement shall be tapered down at a minimum slope
502.25.02 Asphalt Levelling Course Requirements –
of 25:1. When paving resumes this letdown shall be cut
Asphalt Levelling Course shall be placed in one or more
back so as to form a vertical face that matches the required
Lifts, with a maximum thickness of 75 mm per Lift. The
depth being paved. Material removed from the taper shall
amount of Levelling Course placed shall not exceed the

o 2020 502 10 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 332 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

quantity listed in Schedule 7 unless otherwise authorized in 502.27 Shouldering

writing in advance by the Ministry Representative.
502.27.01 Shouldering Aggregate – Shouldering
All asphalt mix shall be paver laid, unless otherwise aggregate shall be conform to SS 502.06.04
authorized by the Ministry Representative.
502.27.03 Lines and Grades – The finished surface of the
Any mix laid prior to the establishment of the Job Mix granular shoulder shall be true to grade and cross section,
Formula (per SS 502.08.10) shall normally be placed in a and be free from ruts, segregation or other irregularities.
location where performance of the mix is of lower concern,
502.27.04 Aggregate Segregation – All granular shoulder
typically as level course, on a low volume side road, and/or
materials shall be handled in such a manner that segregation
in Bottom Lift. The location proposed by the Contractor
does not occur.
shall be subject to the authorization of the Ministry
Representative. 502.27.05 Moisture Adjustment – If necessary, for
compacting, the moisture content of the shoulder aggregate
502.25.03 Lay-Down Operation – Asphalt mix should be
shall be adjusted through either drying or applying water.
delivered to the paver at a constant rate sufficient to allow
Addition of water is incidental.
continuous placement.
502.27.06 Compaction – Shoulders shall be thoroughly
502.25.04 (not used)
compacted to a state that will not rut more than 5 mm under
502.25.05 Persons in the Vicinity of the Paver – When in a pick-up truck steering axle wheel load.
the vicinity of an operating paver and in front of the screed,
Where the base under the shoulder has been constructed as
workers and inspectors shall stand in full view of the paver
part of the Work, the degree of compaction of the granular
operator, clear of side arms, wings, and screed, and never
shoulder measured in accordance with ASTM D6938 shall
directly in front of the machine hopper.
be greater than 98% of the Standard Proctor maximum dry
502.25.06 Vibrating Tampers and Hand Rollers – Along density determined in accordance with ASTM D698.
curbs, manholes, headers and similar structures which are
502.27.07 Adjacent Pavement Damage – If the adjacent
not accessible to rollers, thorough compaction shall be
asphalt pavement is damaged during the shouldering
obtained, by use of vibrating tampers and hand rollers or
operation, the damage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of
other suitable methods.
the Ministry Representative, at no expense to the Ministry.
502.25.07 Traffic – Traffic will not be permitted on the
502.27.08 Interim Shouldering – For safety reasons, when
finished pavement until it has cooled to such a temperature
a roadway with gravel shoulders is used by the travelling
as to ensure that no deformation or flushing of the surface
public, an intermediate layer of shouldering aggregate shall
will occur.
be placed following final rolling of levelling course or
502.25.08 Release Agents – Hydrocarbon-based release multiple Lifts of asphalt pavement thicker than 50 mm, in
agents are not permitted. Other release agents may be used advance of the main shouldering operation.
in accordance with their manufacturer’s recommendations.
Should the Work extend past the Completion Date and be
Application rates of any release agent (including water)
carried over to the next paving season suitable interim
shall be limited to the minimum necessary, without any
drainage control measures shall be put in place, all at no cost
excess, to achieve the desired result.
to the Ministry.
502.25.09 Ponding – Areas of ponding will be noted as an
obvious defect and remedial works will be required.
PAYMENT
502.26 Shoulder Build-up – Shoulder build-up is typically
required where an existing roadway is being overlaid with 502.30 General – Payment at the Unit Prices for the supply
wider shoulders. It involves construction of base coarse of primer/tack coat materials, the application of the spray
aggregate (adjacent to a Lift of pavement) which will be primer/tack coat, the supply of paving aggregates into
overlaid by one or more Lifts of asphalt. Shoulder build-up stockpile, the construction of asphalt pavement including
shall be constructed: the supply of asphalt cement, and for shouldering shall be
full compensation for completing the supply and installation
(a) In accordance with the SS 202.26;
of asphalt pavement and shouldering on prepared surfaces
(b) To the lines and grades indicated in the Contract, in accordance with the contract requirements. Applicable
generally to a finished compacted level that matches payment adjustments (Additions or subtractions as
level and grade of the adjacent asphalt level; and applicable) shall be applied in accordance with the Payment
Adjustment section of this Section.
(c) With cross-fall that matches that of the finished asphalt
surface above the shoulder build-up area. Compensation for Quality Control shall be at the price bid
for Quality Control or, in the absence of such a bid Item in

o 2020 502 11 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 333 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

Schedule 7 – Approximate Quantities and Unit Prices, to the Ministry Representative. The Contractor shall be
incidental to the Work. responsible for all costs including materials.
502.31 Acceptance at Adjusted Payment – Acceptance of No payment will be made for work in any Lot or Sub-Lot,
any Lot at adjusted payment will occur if it complies with which has been rejected, until the defects have been
the requirements of the QC Plan and the sections on remedied.
Equipment and Plant; and Construction of this
502.33 Partial Payment for Rejected Work – In the
Specification, contains no obvious defects as per SS 502.32,
Ministry Representative’s sole discretion and without
and if:
setting precedence, where any Work is reject but the
• Test results for EPS acceptance parameters Ministry Representative determines that it may be left in
(density, gradation, asphalt content, smoothness, place, the Ministry Representative may authorize partial
segregation, and application rate) are such that the payment to the Contractor as full compensation for any
Lot meets the requirements for acceptance at a residual value the Work may have. Notwithstanding the
reduced payment; foregoing, the Ministry is under no obligation to make any
payment for such Work.
• Lot is acceptable in respect of all other
requirements; and 502.34 Primer and Tack Coat
• Contractor has not notified the Ministry 502.34.01 Supply of Primer and Tack Coat – Payment to
Representative in writing that it will exercise its Supply Primer and Tack Coat shall be at the Unit Price per
option to either repair or remove and replace the litre for the quantity of material actually sprayed onto the
work, at its own cost, with work meeting the roadway measured prior to any additional diluting by the
requirements for acceptance at full or increased Contractor where applicable. The measured quantity shall
payment. not be greater than the total of the bills of lading.
502.32 Rejection for Workmanship Defects – Work may Such payment shall be full compensation for supplying,
be rejected if it does not comply with the requirements of handling, storing, sampling and testing of the material and
the QC Plan and the Construction section of this Section. all other related work.
Additionally, the finished surface of any Asphalt Pavement 502.34.02 Application of Primer and Tack Coat –
Lift shall have a uniform texture and be free of visible signs Payment for the application of Primer and Tack Coat will
of poor workmanship. Any obvious defects as determined be at the Unit Price per litre of primer actually sprayed onto
by the Ministry Representative such as, but not limited to the roadway. In the case of an emulsion, the payment
the following, may be cause for automatic rejection of quantity shall include any water added by the Contractor
asphalt pavement regardless of the values of any other with the authorization of the Ministry Representative.
acceptance parameter: Such payment shall be full compensation for diluting the
• Individual bumps and dips that exceed 12 mm over material when required and spraying it on the surfaces to be
3 m; paved, and for all incidental costs arising from priming and
tack coating.
• Areas of excess or insufficient asphalt;
502.35 Paving Aggregate into Stockpile – Payment for
• Improper matching of longitudinal and transverse Paving Aggregate into Stockpile shall be at the Unit Price
joints; per tonne for the quantity of paving aggregate placed into
stockpile in accordance with the following.
• Roller marks or roller pick-ups;
As the aggregate is crushed into stockpile, progress
• Excess tracking of prime or tack coat;
payments will be made against the bid item, up to the
• Areas contaminated by fuel oil or other deleterious quantity shown in the “Approximate Quantity” column of
materials; the Schedule 7 - Schedule of Approximate Quantities and
Unit Prices.
• Tire marks; or
The final payment quantity for paving aggregate quantity
• Cracking or tearing. will be equal to the corresponding asphalt mix quantity
When asphalt pavement is rejected because of obvious actually laid, without any adjustment for AC or moisture
defects, the minimum area of rejection will be the actual content. As a result, the final quantities and payments may
length of the defect for the full width of the driving lane in vary from those used in prior progress payments; down if
which the defect exists. the mix quantity underruns and up if it overruns.

Rejected work shall be promptly repaired, remedied, Such payment shall be full compensation for all work
overlaid, or removed and replaced in a manner acceptable including but not limited to the production, supply and
stockpiling of all paving aggregates.

o 2020 502 12 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 334 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

502.36 Asphalt Pavement – Payment for Asphalt Equation 502-1: Payment for Asphalt "Bump"
Pavement constructed in place shall be at the Unit Price per
tonne for the quantity of mix placed in accordance with the  ACBurn   ACJMF 
$Lot n = 110%  CostAC  t Lot n    −  
Contract requirements.  100 + ACBurn   100 + ACJMF 
Subject to the exception noted below, only acceptable Where:
asphalt pavement will be included in the payment quantity.
$ Lot n = Compensation due for additional AC in Lot “n”
Where overlays are used as a corrective measure, in Cost AC = Supplier’s invoiced cost for AC, dollars per
accordance with SS 502.58: tonne
• The overlay quantity will not be included in the t Lot n = Tonnes of asphalt mix laid and accepted in Lot
payment quantity, but “n”, including AC
• The quantity of asphalt pavement covered by the AC Burn = Asphalt cement content (% dry mix) of Lot
overlay will be included in the payment quantity, determined from Ministry QA samples, to a
whether or not it was acceptable. maximum of the bumped AC content and a
minimum of AC JMF
Such payment shall be compensation in full for all work
AC JMF = Asphalt cement content (% dry mix) of
including but not limited to: loading the aggregate into the Contractor’s production Job Mix Formula before
feeders; drying the aggregate; supplying, metering, and the bump
adding the asphalt cement; mixing, loading, weighing,
hauling, dumping, spreading, compacting and finishing the Note: 110% includes the percentage markup for
asphalt pavement. materials paid on Force Account

502.37 Asphalt Mix Antistrip Additives

502.37.01 Where Specified in the Special Provisions – 502.39 Payment for Rejected Work Made Acceptable –
Where the Special Provisions direct the addition of an When defects have been remedied in Lots or Sub-Lots
antistrip additive, all costs associated with supplying, which had been rejected, payment for the original quantity
storing, and blending the additive into the asphalt mixes of material in those Lots or Sub-Lots will be made subject
shall be incidental to the prices bid for the varying classes to payment adjustments and penalty assessments and
of asphalt mix. subject to SS 502.58.

502.37.02 Where Not Specified in the Special Provisions No payment adjustment will be made for any material used
– Where the Special Provisions do not direct the addition of to replace, repair or overlay rejected work and all corrective
an antistrip additive but the need was identified in work shall be performed entirely at the Contractor's
accordance with SS 502.08.03, compensation for supplying, expense.
storing and blending the additive into the asphalt mixes shall 502.40 Shouldering – Payment for Shouldering will be at
be made at a negotiated price or on a Force Account Basis the Unit Price bid per tonne or cubic metre (to the neat
and any authorized payments will be made from the lines), whichever is specified in the Schedule 7 - Schedule
Provisional Sum for Site Modifications. of Approximate Quantities and Unit Prices. The price bid
502.38 Asphalt Cement “Bump” – The Contractor will be shall be full compensation for supplying, hauling, placing,
compensated for additional oil ordered by the Ministry moisture adjustment, and compaction of the aggregate to the
Representative in accordance with SS 502.08.09 at the AC required grades and crossfall.
cost FOB the asphalt plant, demonstrated by the AC 502.41 Surplus Aggregate
supplier’s invoice, with mark-up on a Force Account Basis
for the material only. 502.41.01 Surplus Aggregate in Private Pits – At the
discretion of the Ministry Representative, the Ministry may
Payment will be calculated in accordance with or may not purchase surplus aggregate in stockpile in a
Equation 502-1, on a Lot-by-Lot basis based on the private pit. Generally, the Ministry will provide payment
difference in asphalt cement content determined from for the processing costs of surplus aggregate in stockpile in
Ministry Quality Assurance (QA) samples and that in the Ministry Pits only, and only to a limited quantity. However,
Contractor’s production Job Mix Formula, to a maximum of should the Contractor produce surplus aggregate in a private
the bump and a minimum of the Contractor’s proposed Job pit, and the Ministry intends to purchase these surplus
Mix Formula AC content. No compensation will be made aggregates, the Contractor shall be required to provide a
for additional AC in any rejected mix. written agreement with the owner of the property. This
document shall indicate that the Ministry will have free
access to and use of the surplus aggregate in stockpile for a
period of 12 months after the completion of the contract
work. If the Contractor undertakes private work from

o 2020 502 13 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 335 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

within the private pit, measurements for surplus aggregate Where necessary, stockpile volume shall be converted to
in stockpile will not be taken until the completion of the mass using the conversion factor of 2.0 tonnes per cubic
private work, ensuring that the Ministry does not pay for metre.
aggregate used on private works. All surplus aggregate shall
be properly stockpiled.
PAYMENT ADJUSTMENTS
502.41.02 Ministry Purchase of Surplus Aggregate -
Should the Ministry proceed with the purchase of surplus 502.50 Payment Adjustment – Payment adjustments
aggregate, upon completion of the contract, the Ministry resulting from the application of this Section will be
will purchase surplus paving mix aggregate as indicated effected on each progress payment as follows.
herein.
502.50.01 Density, Asphalt Content, and Gradation –
The provisions below apply only to AMA, including AMA For each Lot paid for by the tonne (t), the applicable
used as shouldering aggregate. All other surplus payment adjustment derived from Table 502-I or
aggregates, including grading aggregates used as Table 502-J (Density), Table 502-K (Asphalt Content), and
shouldering surfacing, base and subbase aggregates will be Table 502-L (Gradation), in dollars per tonne, will be
paid in accordance with SS 202. expressed as positive in the case of increases and negative
in the case of decreases.
If the quantity of Asphalt Pavement actually incorporated
into the works is less than the estimated quantity, as stated The algebraic sum of these unit adjustments will then be
in the Schedule 7 - Schedule of Approximate Quantities and applied to the payment quantity for the Lot. The resulting
Unit Prices, the Ministry will purchase aggregate up to amount, in dollars, will be the net payment adjustment,
100% of the quantity required by the contract, to be paid positive or negative, for that Lot.
under the appropriate Unit Price Item for Aggregate in
502.50.02 Application Rate – Payment Adjustments from
Stockpile. The surplus aggregate must, when singly or
Table 502-M (Application Rate) shall be computed for the
combined, meet the gradation requirements set out in the
Lot.
Job Mix Formula.
The portion of material remaining in a stockpile eligible for The algebraic sum of the net payment adjustments for all
compensation as surplus aggregate shall be the lesser of: such Lots for which payment is authorized on the current
progress payment, computed in dollars, shall be the total
(a) The quantity of mix as stated in the Schedule 7 - payment adjustment for density, asphalt content, aggregate
Schedule of Approximate Quantities and Unit Prices gradation, and material application rate for the current
minus the quantity of aggregate actually incorporated progress payment.
in the works, and
502.50.03 Segregation and Smoothness – For each Lot
(b) The volume of the remaining stockpile as determined with payment adjustments based on kilometre (km), the
under SS 502.41.03 applicable unit adjustment derived from Table 502-O
(Segregation) and Table 502-P (Smoothness), in dollars per
No payment shall be made for any surplus shoulder and
Lot ($/lane km), will be expressed as positive in the case of
paving aggregate remaining at contract completion in
increases and negative in the case of decreases, and will be
excess of the contract requirement. Material remaining in a
the payment adjustment, positive or negative, for that Lot.
Ministry pit is the property of the Ministry.
The algebraic sum of the payment adjustments for all such
502.41.03 Measurement of Surplus Aggregate - The
Lots for which payment is authorized on the current
Ministry will determine the volume of aggregate by
progress payment, computed in dollars, shall be the total
surveying the stockpile(s) using string-line techniques, and
payment adjustment for segregation and smoothness for the
determine volume using prismoidal volumes between
current progress payment.
surfaces. Alternatively, the Ministry Representative may
elect to survey using cross-section techniques and/or 502.50.04 Total Payment Adjustment – The algebraic
determine volumes using end-area volumes. sum of the total payment adjustments for density, asphalt
content, aggregate gradation, material application rate,
The base of the pile will be determined from a pre-stockpile
segregation and smoothness, derived in accordance with
survey or, where such a survey is not available, from a
SS 502.50.01 through SS 502.50.03 above, shall be the total
surface determined by the Ministry Representative as being
payment adjustment, positive or negative, in dollars, for all
a reasonable interpolation from the intersection of the pile
attributes for the current progress payment.
sides with the adjacent ground level. Where there are two
or more stockpiles of aggregate meeting the same gradation The total payment adjustment will be made by a single entry
classification, the compensation will be based on the in computing the current progress payment.
cumulative quantity of those stockpiles.

o 2020 502 14 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 336 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

502.50.05 Progress Payments – The process set out in A change in any above criteria may require a new Lot
SS 502.50.01 through SS 502.50.04 above will be used in designation.
computing each progress payment to which it is applicable.
Where one day’s production is less than 7 hours, the
502.51 Initial 1,000 tonnes of Mix - For the first 1,000 material will be added to the next Lot that has the same
tonnes of asphalt mix produced under a Contract, the criteria, as described above, except that if a test indicates
following provisions take precedence over all other that this production is subject to a payment adjustment or to
payment and payment adjustment provisions of SS 502.52 rejection, or if no further material will be produced with the
through SS 502.57 inclusive, but do not take precedence same criteria, this production will be designated as a
over the rejection criteria. separate Lot.
502.51.01 Payment Adjustments – Unless requested A Lot shall be no more than two days total production even
otherwise by the Contractor in writing in advance of mix if the above criteria have not changed or been met.
production, the first 1,000 tonnes of asphalt mix production
502.52.02 Sub-Lot – For density, a Lot shall be divided into
and placement shall not be subject to the bonus/penalty
three equal Sub-Lots, defined by lineal metres of production
payment adjustments for AC content, density and gradation.
Payment adjustments will apply to smoothness, segregation 502.52.03 Coring – The Contractor shall be responsible for
and application rate if the mix is applied in a Top Lift providing all core samples for quality assurance and
location. payment adjustment purposes. The randomly selected
locations for the cores shall be supplied by the Ministry
502.51.02 Acceptance Limits – Contrary to any other
Representative to the Contractor. The Contractor shall
provision of SS 502, any mix produced during the initial
provide cores sized in accordance with Table 502-H.
1,000 tonnes will only be considered acceptable if:
Coring shall occur in the presence of a Ministry
(a) Asphalt Mix Design has been accepted by the Ministry representative, within two days after the Lot has been
Representative in accordance with SS 502.08.05; completed and prior to application of any subsequent lift.
The Contractor shall prepare the cores prior to the
(b) Aggregate gradation per SS 502.08.02 is within the
submission by removing all material not representative of
gradation limits specified in Table 502-D or the banana
the pavement Lift to be tested. The Contractor shall deliver
formed by applying the Table 502-L column 3 variation
all cores taken (even those damaged during extraction) to
limits to the JMF gradation;
the Ministry Representative, within 24 hours of being
(c) All other properties fall inside the allowable limits provided the locations for the coring, to a designated safe
specified, in SS 502 and the Special Provisions, for the storage location.
mix, including
Table 502-H: Test Sample Size and Source Locations
• For Marshall mixes, Table 502-E; and
Test Sample Source
• For Superpave mixes, Table 502-F.
150 mm dia. road cores for
(d) AC content of the sample is within ±0.5% of the design Superpave, Coarse Mix, and any other
value for top lift and is within ±0.55% of the design product with maximum aggregate size
value for the bottom lift. Density greater than 25 mm.
All values are measured against the Asphalt Mix Design
value at the time the sampled mix was produced. 100 mm dia. road cores for all other
mixes
Any mix with any characteristic outside the above limits is
Reject Mix. AC Content Loose Mix Samples

Additionally, rejection limits for smoothness, segregation, Smoothness Centre of the Lane
density and application rate shall apply in accordance with Aggregate
Loose Mix Samples
SS 502 and the Special Provisions. Gradation
502.52 Density Segregation Roadway Pavement
502.52.01 Lot – A Lot for density shall be one day’s
scheduled production of at least 7 hours plant production The Contractor shall fill all core holes before the roadway
where no changes have occurred to criteria such as but not is re-opened to traffic. Core holes shall be filled by the
limited to: following method:
• Accepted Job Mix Formula; • Empty the hole of water and loose material.
• The specific Lift that is being placed; and • Remove any excess moisture by wiping the inside
• The required material application rate. with a dry towel.

o 2020 502 15 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 337 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

• Tack coat the inside surfaces and the outside Should the initial test results in any Sub-Lot be lower
perimeter with an emulsified asphalt. than 97.0%, one additional core will be taken and
tested, and that result shall be averaged with the initial
• Place asphalt mix in loosely, so that the compacted result to determine the new percent density for the Sub-
Lifts do not exceed 75 mm. Lot.
• With a minimum of 20 blows per Lift, compact the In addition, the Contractor shall determine the
loose material using a minimum 2 kg individual Maximum Theoretical Densities (MTD) per
sledgehammer and tamper. ASTM D2041 for each of the Sub-Lot samples and
• For additional Lifts repeat Steps (a) to (e). average the results of them to obtain the Lot MTD. The
Contractor shall report the Lot MTD to the Ministry
• The final Lift shall be a minimum thickness of Representative prior to the provision of the coring
25 mm and finished to a level higher but not locations to the Contractor.
exceeding 6 mm, than the elevation of the
surrounding pavement. (b) Superpave Mixes – The Contractor shall determine the
individual Maximum Theoretical Densities (MTD) per
The Contractor may use an alternative method if acceptable ASTM D2041 for each of the Sub-Lot samples and
to the Ministry Representative. average the results of them to obtain the Lot MTD. The
All costs associated with obtaining the cores, including the Contractor shall report the Lot MTD to the Ministry
filling and compaction of the core holes are considered Representative prior to the provision of the coring
incidental to the Contract and are the responsibility of the locations to the Contractor.
Contractor. At the discretion of the Ministry Representative, the
502.52.04 Percent Density – The average in-place density Ministry may at any time use the same procedures to
will be determined from core samples of the completed Lift obtain the values for Maximum Theoretical Density
of pavement. which will replace the values determined by the
Contractor.
One random core sample will be obtained from each Sub-
Lot and the test results for the three Sub-Lots will be The average in-place density will be determined from
averaged to determine the percent density for the Lot. core samples of the completed Lift of pavement. Cores
shall be sized in accordance with Table 502-H.
(a) Marshall Mixes – For the determination of Marshall
Briquette Density, the Contractor shall obtain the Equation 502-3: Superpave Percent Density
samples as outlined in Appendix 502-2 for each Sub- Superpave  In-place Density of Sample 
Lot. All costs associated with sampling, shall be the =    100
Percent Density  Lot MTD (ASTM D 2041) 
Contractor’s responsibility.
From each Sub-Lot sample, the Contractor will form The Maximum Theoretical Density for a Lot is the
three briquettes as per the procedure identified in value calculated, defined as the average of the test
Table 502-A and tested, and the ASTM D2726 test results, from the three Sub-Lots. The Maximum
results will be averaged to obtain the test value for that Theoretical Density value for the Lot shall be provided
sample. to the Ministry Representative prior to the provision of
the coring locations to the Contractor.
The Marshall Briquette Density for a Lot is the average
of the test results from the three Sub-Lots. The Should the initial test results in any Sub-Lot be lower
Marshall Briquette Density value for the Lot shall be than 92.0%, one additional core will be taken and
provided to the Ministry Representative prior to the tested, and that result shall be averaged with the initial
provision of the coring locations to the Contractor. result to determine the new percent density for the Sub-
Lot.
Equation 502-2: Marshall Percent Density
502.52.05 Payment Adjustments – The payment
Marshall  In-place Density of Sample  adjustment for percent density will be the amount shown in
=   100
Percent Density  Marshall Briquette Density  Table 502-I or Table 502-J, as applicable, for the Sample
Mean of the test results for the Lot.
At the discretion of the Ministry Representative, the
Ministry may at any time, perform and use the Ministry 502.52.06 Rejection Limit – The rejection limit for percent
results in accordance with procedures as outlined density is the limiting value of the Sample Mean as shown
above, to obtain the value for Marshall Briquette in Table 502-I or Table 502-J, as applicable. If any Sub-Lot
Density which will replace the values achieved under has a value within the reject zone, the Sub-Lot is rejected
Quality Control Testing. and not paid for.

o 2020 502 16 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 338 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

Table 502-I: Payment Adjustments for Density – 502.52.06 Payment Adjustment for Density Rejected
Marshall Work Made Acceptable – The payment adjustment for
density will be based on testing of the replacement or
Marshall % Density Payment Adjustment overlay material where applicable. Where replacement or
Lot Average ($ per tonne) overlay material does not cover the entire Lot or Sub-Lot,
≥ 98.5 +$2.00 prior tests of the uncovered area will be averaged with new
tests on the corrective work.
≥ 98.0 to < 98.5 +$1.50
≥ 97.5 to <98.0 +$1.00 502.53 Asphalt Content
≥ 97.0 to <97.5 +$0.50 502.53.01 Lot – A Lot for AC content shall be one day’s
scheduled production of at least 7 hours plant production
≥ 96.5 to <97.0 -$1.00
where no changes have occurred to criteria such as but not
≥ 96.0 to <96.5 -$2.00 limited to:
<96.0 REJECT
• Accepted Job Mix Formula;
• The specific Lift that is being placed; and
Table 502-J: Payment Adjustments for Density -
Superpave • The required material application rate.
A change in any above criteria may require a new Lot
Superpave % Density Payment Adjustment
designation.
Lot Average ($ per tonne)
Where one day’s production is less than 7 hours the material
≥ 95.0 +$2.00
will be added to the next Lot that has the same criteria, as
≥ 94.0 to <95.0 +$1.50 described above, except that if a test indicates that this
≥ 93.0 to <94.0 +$1.00 production is subject to a payment adjustment or to
≥ 92.0 to <93.0 +$0.50 rejection, or if no further material will be produced with the
same criteria, this production will be designated as a
≥ 91.6 to <92.0 -$1.00 separate Lot.
≥ 91.0 to <91.6 -$2.00
A Lot shall be no more than two days total production even
<91.0 REJECT if the above criteria has not changed or been met.
502.53.02 Sub-Lot – For AC content, a Lot shall be divided
Acceptance or rejection will be determined for each Sub- into three equal Sub-Lots, defined by lineal metres of
Lot. One opportunity will be provided to the Contractor, production.
using non-destructive test methods, to isolate the area of low 502.53.03 Determination of Asphalt Content – The
density and conduct additional compaction providing no asphalt content of the asphalt mix will be determined from
damage is incurred to the new pavement. The Contractor loose mix samples obtained from each Sub-Lot (3 per Lot)
shall mark out the extents of the area identified using chalk and tested in accordance with the ASTM D6307 test
or other temporary marking acceptable to the Ministry procedures listed in Table 502-A.
Representative. One additional core will be taken randomly
in the area of low density and will replace the core with One random sample will be obtained from each Sub-Lot as
previous low density and a new value will be calculated. per Appendix 502-B. The asphalt content of the asphalt mix
The Ministry Representative shall be advised as to the will be determined using the average of the results obtained
scheduling of the re-compaction effort prior to the work from all of the Sub-Lot samples. The actual Asphalt
taking place. Content of the Lot will be compared to the Job Mix Formula
Asphalt Content and the deviation will be used for payment
Where any Marshall Mix core density is less than 96% (91% adjustment purposes.
for Superpave mixes), the Contractor shall either overlay or
remove and replace the previously placed area of reject mix. The ignition oven calibration factor will be applied to the
If the test result for density of a Sub-Lot is outside the AC Content measured by the ignition oven, and the
acceptance limits, the Sub-Lot is rejected automatically corrected AC Content used to determine acceptability of the
regardless of the values of other acceptance parameters. To mix and any payment adjustments.
minimize the cost of rejection to the Contractor, the 502.53.04 Payment Adjustments – The payment
Contractor will be provided the opportunity to isolate the adjustment for asphalt content will be the amount shown in
area of low density within the Sub-Lot. The limits of the Table 502-F, where deviation in AC Content is determined
low-density area must be verified and accepted by the by the percent difference, based on kg of AC per 100 kg of
Ministry Representative before remedial work proceeds. dry aggregate, between the JMF AC content and the actual
AC Content.

o 2020 502 17 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 339 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

502.53.05 Rejection Limit – Rejection limits for asphalt 502.54 Aggregate Gradation
content are the limiting values of the Sample Mean as
502.54.01 Lot – A Lot for aggregate gradation shall be one
shown in
day’s scheduled production of at least 7 hours plant
Table 502-K, beyond which the Lot is rejected and not paid production where no changes have occurred to the criteria
for. such as but not limited to:
If the asphalt content of a Lot is within the reject zone, the • Accepted Job Mix Formula;
Lot is rejected automatically regardless of the values of
other acceptance parameters. • The specific Lift that is being placed; and

For Top Lift deviations of more than 0.50%, the Contractor • The required material application rate.
shall either overlay or remove and replace the Lot. A change in any above criteria may require a new Lot
For lower Lift deviations of more than 0.55%, no payment designation.
will be made, and the Ministry Representative will Where one day’s production is less than 7 hours the material
determine whether removal and replacement is necessary. will be added to the next Lot that has the same criteria, as
described above, except that if a test indicates that this
production is subject to a payment adjustment or to
Table 502-K: Payment Adjustments for Deviation of rejection, or if no further material will be produced with the
Asphalt Content (AC) same criteria, this production will be designated as a
separate Lot.
Differences of Actual AC Content from Designed
AC Content Specified in JMF A Lot shall be no more than two days total production even
(AC in %) if the above criteria has not changed or been met.
Deviation from Payment Adjustment 502.54.02 Sub-Lot – For aggregate gradation, a Lot shall
Asphalt Mix $ per tonne be divided into three equal Sub-Lots, defined by lineal
Design JMF Lower metres of production.
Top Lift
Lifts 502.54.03 Determination of Aggregate Gradation –
-0.56 or less REJECT REJECT Table 502-D, Aggregate Gradation Limits, specifies the
-0.55 to -0.51 REJECT -9.00 aggregate gradation limits, which asphalt mix design, Job
Mix Formulas, and field adjustments made in accordance
-0.50 to -0.46 -8.00 -8.00 with SS 502.08.10 must be based.
-0.45 to -0.41 -7.00 -7.00
L shows the limiting values for acceptance and for the
-0.40 to -0.36 -5.00 -5.00 determination of payment adjustments. These limits are
-0.35 to -0.31 -3.00 -3.00 expressed as departures, on each specified sieve size, from
-0.30 to -0.21 -1.00 -1.00 the percentage of material passing that sieve according to
the Job Mix Formula. Aggregate gradation will be
-0.20 to -0.06 0.00 0.00 determined for each Lot from loose mix samples of the
-0.05 to +0.15 +2.00 +2.00 completed Lift of pavement. One random sample will be
+0.16 to +0.30 +1.50 +1.50 obtained from each Sub-Lot, and the aggregate gradation for
the Lot will be determined by using the average of the 3
+0.31 to +0.35 0.00 0.00 Sub-Lot tests to determine the Sample Mean.
+0.36 to +0.40 -2.00 -2.00
Although the JMF design gradation must at all times be
+0.41 to +0.45 -3.50 -3.50 maintained within the limits specified in the Aggregate
+0.46 to +0.50 -5.00 -5.00 Table 502-D, the gradation of the mix may vary outside
+0.51 to +0.55 REJECT -6.50 those limits, subject to SS 502.54.05.

+0.56 or greater REJECT REJECT 502.54.04 Payment Adjustments – Where the Sample
Mean for every specified sieve size falls within the limiting
values prescribed in a particular column of Table 502-L, the
502.53.06 Payment Adjustment for Asphalt Cement Lot will be accepted with a payment adjustment as indicated
Content Rejected Work Made Acceptable – The payment at the bottom of that column.
adjustment for Asphalt Content will be based on testing of
502.54.05 Rejection Limit – Where one or more values of
the replacement or overlay material where applicable.
the Sample Mean for the specified sieves falls outside the
Where replacement or overlay material does not cover the
limiting value specified in L, Column 3, the Lot is reject and
entire Lot or Sub-Lot, prior tests of the uncovered area will
the Contractor shall either overlay or, remove and replace
be averaged with new tests on the corrective work.
the previously placed mix. The Lot will be assessed to

o 2020 502 18 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 340 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

determine whether it may remain in place, with payment by the Lot after allowance has been made for entrance
made in accordance with SS 502.33. letdowns and/or intersections. The Contractor shall provide
the material application rate calculations to the Ministry
Table 502-L: Payment Adjustments for Aggregate Representative at the end of each shift.
Gradation
502.55.04 Payment Adjustments – The payment
Divergence from JMF Grading adjustment for material application rate will be applied as
Curve Percentage Passing by Mass shown in Table 502-M, based on the actual material
Sieve Size application rate, expressed as a percentage of the specified
(ASTM C117 and ASTM C136)
mm material application rate.
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
502.55.05 Rejection Limits – Where actual application rate
12.5 ±3.5 ±4.5 ±7.0 for the Lot is within the reject zone as shown in
Table 502-M, the Lot is reject.
4.75 ±3.0 ±4.5 ±6.0
0.600 ±2.0 ±3.5 ±4.0 A Lot rejected for application rate may be corrected by mill-
and-fill or rejected with no remedial work required, subject
0.075 ±0.75 ±1.0 ±1.5 to the authorization of the Ministry Representative.
Payment
Adjustment +$0.75 $0.00 -$1.50 Table 502-M: Payment Adjustments for Material
$ per tonne Application Rate

Payment Adjustment $ per tonne

502.55 Material Application Rate Actual of material in the Lot (unless
Application otherwise noted)
502.55.01 Lot – A Lot for material application rate shall be Rate (Percent
one day’s scheduled production of at least 7 hours plant of specified Top Lift
Bottom Lift
production where no changes have occurred to the criteria rate) of Multiple
or Single Lift
such as but not limited to: Lifts
• The specific Lift that is being placed, -$7.00 for all
material in the -$7.00 for all
• The required material application rate. Lot up to 110% material in the
A change in any above criteria may require a new Lot ≥ 110 and no payment Lot up to 106%
designation. for product in and no payment
excess of for product in
One day’s production of less than 7 hours will be dealt with 110.0% excess of
as follows: ≥ 106.0 to 106.0%
• The material will be added to the next Lot that has <110.0
-$5.00
the same criteria, as described above, except that if ≥ 105.0 to
a test indicates that this production is subject to a -$5.00
<106.0
payment adjustment or to rejection, or if no further
material will be produced with the same criteria, ≥ 104.0 to
-$1.00 -$3.00
this production will be designated as a separate <105.0
Lot. ≥ 96.0 to <104.0 +$0.50 +$0.50
A Lot shall be no more than two days total production even ≥ 94.0 to <96.0 -$2.00 -$2.00
if the above criteria has not changed or been met. ≥ 92.0 to <94.0 -$3.00 -$3.00
502.55.02 Sub-Lot – Sub-Lots are not used for material ≥ 90.0 to <92.0 -$4.00 -$4.00
application rate. ≥ 85.0 to <90.0 -$7.00 -$7.00
502.55.03 Determination of Material Application Rate – <85.0 REJECT REJECT
Asphalt mix shall be applied to the roadway at the rate or
rates specified in the Special Provisions, on the Drawings,
at a corresponding mat thickness determined by dividing the 502.56 Surface Segregation
design mix density by the specified application rate, or as 502.56.01 Lot – A Lot shall be one kilometre length of Top
otherwise directed by the Ministry Representative. Material Lift pavement for each driving lane.
Application Rates will be determined by the tonnage
delivered to the paver as recorded by weigh tickets 502.56.02 Sub-Lot – Sub-Lots are not used for segregation.
generated by automated scales, divided by the area covered

o 2020 502 19 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 341 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

502.56.03 Determination of Surface Segregation – The 502.56.04 Payment Adjustments – The payment
finished pavement shall be homogeneous, free from adjustment for Top Lift segregation will be the applicable
segregation and shall be uniform with respect to surface amount shown in Table 502-O.
texture. A segregated area is defined as an area within the
driving lanes of the pavement wherein the texture differs Table 502-O: Segregation – Top Lift Only – Payment
visually from the texture of the surrounding pavement. Adjustments
Due to the nature of variation in asphalt mixes and their Number of Segregated Areas,
compactive characteristics, the definition of degrees of Payment by Category
segregation will be established on a project by project basis. Adjustment
Slight Moderate Severe
The Contractor and the Ministry Representative shall
establish using photographs or other mutually agreed upon +$1,500 per lane km.
tools, the definition of slight, moderate and severe (Applies only if the
segregation. The Ministry Representative and the criteria in all three 0 to 3 0 0
Contractor shall evaluate the first two Lots upon completion adjacent columns are
of the second Lot, after opening to traffic, to confirm the achieved)
“agreed to” guidelines. Segregation will then be evaluated +$1000 per lane km.
only when all paving is complete. (Applies only if the
criteria in all three 4 to 6 0 0
The Ministry Representative, with the Contractor’s adjacent columns are
Representative, will observe the finished pavement to achieved)
evaluate the existence, severity and extent of segregation No payment
and other surface defects. The evaluation will be completed 7 to 9 0 to 1 0
adjustment
prior to the issuance of the Completion Certificate
-$500 per lane km.
The rating system for categorizing the severity of Top Lift (Applies if the criteria
surface segregation, and repair methodology is shown in in any one or more of 10 to 12 2 to 4 0
Table 502-N. the adjacent columns
occurs)
Table 502-N: Segregation – Top Lift Only – -$1,000 per lane km.
Remediation Methodology (Applies if the criteria
in any one or more of 13 to 16 5 or 6 0 to 2
Segregation Repair the adjacent columns
Visual Appearance occurs)
Severity Procedures
Uniform surface -$3,000 per Lane km
None N/A (Applies if the criteria
texture.
in any one or more of 17 or more 7 or more 3 or more
Matrix of asphalt the adjacent columns
binder, coarse and occurs)
fine aggregate Sand cement
Slight
exists; visually slurry.
increased presence 502.56.05 Repair – On Top Lift all segregation, including
of stone sizes. any areas outside the driving lanes assessed for the payment
adjustment, shall be repaired according to Table 502-N.
Significantly more
Seal coat or
stone than All segregation patch repairs shall be completed to a
sand cement
surrounding rectangular shape.
slurry patch or
Moderate pavement; matrix of
neat hot mix Repair shall be to the neat lines and dimensions of the
asphalt binder and
patch or mill segregated area using sand cement slurry or other product
coated sand
and fill patch. acceptable to the Ministry Representative.
particles is reduced.
Remove and Acceptable sand cement slurry can be made as follows, with
Appears as an area replace or proportions varied as needed for workability:
of very stony mix - overlay to limits • 25 litres of SS-1 (or equivalent) emulsion
Severe
stone against stone - authorized by
little or no matrix. Ministry • 4 – 5 kg (2 shovels) of ≤ 3 mm sand
Representative.
• 2 – 3 kg (1 shovel) Type GU (general use) or Type
GUL (General Use Limestone) Portland cement
• Additional water, if needed for workability.

o 2020 502 20 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 342 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

• Or other products approved 502.57.05 Auxiliary Lanes – For smoothness testing,

sections of the driving lanes that do not fall within the
After repairs, the Lot will be re-evaluated for acceptance, continuous through lanes, such as acceleration lanes,
but not for segregations payment adjustments. deceleration lanes and turning lanes, and lanes which are
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated less than 1 km in length, shall be treated as follows. The
with the repair of segregated areas. ratio of the section length to the standard Lot length of 1 km
shall be determined and the payment adjustment shall be
502.57 Smoothness pro-rated on this basis as in the following example:
502.57.01 Lot – A Lot for smoothness shall be one For a segment 565 metres long, the payment adjustment
kilometre length of Top Lift pavement for each driving lane. factor is
502.57.02 Sub-Lot – A Sub-Lot for smoothness shall be a = Length of segment / Length of standard Lot
100 metre section of a Lot, or for the last Sub-Lot within a
= 565 m/1000 m
Lot, a section of up to 100 metres.
= 0.565
502.57.03 Traffic Control for Pavement Smoothness
Testing – The Contractor shall provide traffic control for Hence the applicable payment adjustment is 0.565 times the
smoothness testing. payment adjustment for a 1 km Lot as determined from
Table 502-P.
The Ministry Representative will provide sufficient notice
to the Contractor regarding when the Ministry will perform 502.57.06 Sub-Lot and Lot Acceptance Limits – The
smoothness testing. As directed by the Ministry reject limit and payment adjustments applicable to a road
Representative, the Contractor will be responsible to for smoothness are specified in Table 502-P. The default
schedule and provide traffic control for the Ministry’s values in the “Standard” column shall apply except where
smoothness testing, including a Shadow Vehicle and all the Special Provisions specify that “Alternate” values apply.
signage necessary. The Contractor shall also be responsible The International Roughness Index (IRI) value, calculated
for sweeping and any other preparation work required for for each Sub-Lot, will be used to determine if the Sub-Lot
smoothness testing. No extra payment will be made for or Lot will be accepted, and if so whether it will be subject
sweeping or other preparation work; and the provision of to any payment adjustment.
traffic control for smoothness testing will also be considered
incidental and no extra payment will be made. The Lot IRI is the average of the individual IRI values for
the Sub-Lots within the Lot.
The Contractor may also be required to provide an
additional Shadow Vehicle or traffic control for smoothness Table 502-P: Payment Adjustments for Smoothness
testing as determined by the Ministry Representative.
Payment for the provisions of an additional Shadow Vehicle Payment Adjustment
or traffic control, if required, will be made under the Lot IRI (m/km) Per Lot
Provisional Sum Item for Site Modifications (Schedule 7). Standard Alternate
502.57.04 Determination of Pavement Smoothness – The  0.80 +$2,000 +$2,000
finished pavement surface shall be tested by the Ministry
using a Class I precision rolling profile measuring > 0.80 to  0.90 +$1,000 +$2,000
instrument, to determine the longitudinal profile and > 0.90 to  1.00 +$500 +$2,000
compute the International Roughness Index (IRI) in each
> 1.00 to  1.10 +$200 +$1,000
driving lane. Profiles shall be measured and the IRI
calculated in the centre of the lane for each Sub-Lot. > 1.10 to  1.20 0 +$500
For any Sub-Lot between 50 m and 100 m in length, the IRI > 1.20 to  1.30 -$100 +$250
value shall be considered representative of a complete Sub- > 1.30 to  1.40 -$250 0
Lot. For any Sub-Lot less than 50 m in length, the IRI value
> 1.40 to  1.50 -$600 -$300
will be combined with the proceeding Sub-Lot IRI value.
> 1.50 to  1.60 -$1,400 -$300
The profile shall be measured over the entire length of the
pavement exclusive of structures and shoulder areas. > 1.60 to  1.70 -$2,000 -$750
Acceleration, deceleration and turning lanes are considered > 1.70 to  1.80 -$3,000 -$750
part of the driving lanes and shall be tested in accordance > 1.80 to ≤ 1.90 REJECT -$1,500
with this provision. For the measuring process, the
Contractor shall provide the Ministry Representative a chalk > 1.90 to ≤ 2.00 REJECT -$2,500
guideline in the centre of the lane immediately prior to >2.00 REJECT REJECT
measurement.

o 2020 502 21 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 343 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

A Sub-Lot is rejected if: • Acceptability, and eligibility for either positive or

negative payment adjustment, will be determined
• It has an IRI within the applicable reject zone
entirely on the results of testing and observations
shown in Table 502-P, subject to SS 502.57.08;
conducted on the overlay, regardless of test results
• For Top Lift only, there are obvious defects per that have been obtained on the underlying, overlaid
SS 502.32 or it has unrepaired smoothness Lift of pavement; but
deficiencies which require remediation in
• The payment quantity, for application of the Unit
accordance with SS 502.57.09.
Prices for asphalt pavement, and the quantity, to
A Lot is rejected for Smoothness if any Sub-Lot is rejected. which any payment adjustment is to be applied,
will be derived from the tonnage of mix in the
502.57.07 Payment Adjustments – For Top Lift only, the
underlying, overlaid Lift.
payment adjustments per the applicable column of
Table 502-P shall apply to each Lot.
502.57.08 Remedial Work – If the test results on a Sub-Lot APPEAL TESTING
of pavement indicate a payment reduction or rejection
502.60 Time Limits For Appeal of Test Results – To
because of smoothness, the Contractor may propose
appeal any test results, the Contractor shall serve written
remedial work to improve the smoothness. Such proposals
notice of appeal to the Ministry Representative, within the
are subject to the acceptance of the Ministry Representative,
following period after receipt of the applicable test results:
but such acceptance does not imply that the proposed
remedy will be successful and does not reduce the • For Density, Gradation and Asphalt Content,
Contractor’s responsibility for meeting the acceptance within two (2) working days; and
requirements. Grinding may be acceptable, but an overlay
may be required. Only one attempt may be made to improve • For Segregation, Smoothness and Application
smoothness, and this must be completed within ten (10) Rate, within three (3) working days.
calendar days from the time the Contractor receives 502.61 Appeals of Density, Asphalt Content and
notification from the Ministry Representative of the original Gradation – The Contractor may appeal the results of
smoothness test results for that Sub-Lot. acceptance testing for density, asphalt content and/or
Following any attempt to improve the smoothness of a Sub- aggregate gradation for any Lot only once. Appeals will
Lot or Sub-Lots, the Ministry Representative will retest the only be considered if quality control results support an
Sub-Lot or Sub-Lots, and the new results will replace the appeal and can be presented.
previous data for the purposes of determining acceptance The Ministry Representative will arrange for an
and payment. independent testing laboratory to perform the appeal testing.
No payment will be made for any material, equipment or The personnel employed or testing laboratory retained by
manpower used to improve, or attempt to improve, the Contractor for quality control testing on the project will
smoothness. not be used for appeal testing.

502.57.09 Smoothness Deficiencies – Smoothness The appeal testing laboratory shall hold current certification
deficiencies (bumps and dips) less than 12 mm over 3 m from the Canadian Council of Independent Laboratories
will not have remedial work required. Individual (CCIL) (http://www.ccil.com/) under the Asphalt
deficiencies between 8 mm and 12 mm over 3 m will result Laboratory Certification Programs, and at least one
in a $200.00 penalty for each occurrence. Deficiencies technician in the asphalt laboratory shall hold current
exceeding 12 mm over 3 m will require remedial work. certification under the Asphalt Technician Certification
Program.
502.58 Overlays as a Corrective Measure – If an overlay
is used as a corrective measure on a defective Lot or Sub- 502.61.01 Density Appeals – For density appeals, Quality
Lot, the overlay thickness will be subject to the acceptance Control test results for density which are provided to the
of the Ministry Representative, but shall not be less than Ministry Representative subsequent to the Contractor's
40 mm. In all other respects, the whole overlay will be receipt of the quality assurance test results for that Lot will
subject to the same specifications as the pavement being not be considered (when evaluating evidence) for an appeal.
overlaid. Where an overlay is used as a corrective measure The appeal shall be for the failed sample(s) within the Lot,
in any lane, adjacent lanes shall also be overlaid whether and there will be no appeal allowed for single tests within a
acceptable or not. Sub-Lot.
Whether the overlay is applied as a corrective measure or is Any attempt to improve density on the appealed Sub-Lot
placed over otherwise acceptable pavement in order to after the Ministry Representative has tested the Sub-Lot for
match an adjacent lane, acceptability and payment will be acceptance shall void the appeal and the original test results
determined as follows: will apply.

o 2020 502 22 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 344 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

• The Contractor shall, within two (2) working days • The original test results will be discarded. A new
of filing the appeal and in the presence of the sample mean for the three (3) new test results will
Ministry Representative, take five (5) core samples be determined using the companion samples and
from random locations from a Sub-Lot; will be used for acceptance and payment
adjustments.
• The Contractor shall then deliver new core samples
to the Ministry Representative; 502.62 Smoothness Appeals – The Contractor may appeal
acceptance test results of a Lot only once.
• The Ministry Representative shall deliver the core
samples and the companion loose mix samples The Ministry Representative will perform, and the
from the appealed Sub-Lots to the appeal testing Contractor will be given the opportunity to witness, the
laboratory; appeal testing, and the new results will be binding on the
Contractor and the Ministry.
• The appeal agency shall prepare new briquette
densities from the previously taken companion 502.63 Segregation Appeals – Appeals of segregation
samples as per Appendix 502-2; ratings will be handled by a joint review with the
Contractor. If consensus cannot be reached then the
• The appeal agency shall determine the Bulk Ministry Representative shall engage the Joint Committee,
Density (BD) / Maximum Theoretical Density comprised of representatives from the Ministry and B.C.
(MTD) from the companion sample and the Road Builders, to assess the area(s) in question.
densities of the cores and report the results to the
Ministry Representative and the Contractor; 502.64 Application Rate Appeals – Appeals of application
rate will be handled by a joint review with the Contractor
• The original core test results will be discarded, and and Ministry Representative. If the issue cannot be
a new sample mean will be calculated from the five resolved, the issue will be resolved through the dispute
(5) random cores and shall be used for acceptance resolution provisions of the Contract General Conditions.
and payment adjustments for the Sub-Lot.
502.65 Application of Appeal Testing Results – The
502.61.02 Asphalt Content and Gradation Appeals – For appeal test values, thus determined, in all cases, will be
asphalt content and gradation appeals: binding on the Contractor and the Ministry.
• The party who has possession of the companion 502.66 Payment for Appeal Testing – If the new results
loose mix samples shall deliver them to the appeal indicate a change in the payment adjustment in the
testing laboratory. Contractor’s favour, then sampling and testing costs
incurred during the appeal procedures for that Lot would be
• The appeal agency shall prepare three (3) new
borne by the Ministry.
samples from the companion sample and
determine the AC contents and gradations, average If the new results verify that, any payment reduction or
the results, and report all results to the Ministry rejection remains valid for that Lot, then the costs of testing
Representative and the Contractor. (plus 10% mark-up) incurred during the appeal procedure
will be charged to the Contractor.

o 2020 502 23 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 345 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

APPENDIX 502-A
QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES
1.01 General The Quality Control Plan shall include the designation of
specific personnel to be responsible for specific quality
The Contract requirements for preparing, submitting and
control duties.
adhering to the paving components of a Quality Control
Plan are specified in SS 502.04. This Appendix 502-A • A Quality Control Manager (QCM) responsible for
titled “Quality Control Requirements and Guidelines” sets the development and management of the Quality
out the guidelines for the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan, Control Plan. This person shall be qualified as per
in addition to those set out in SS 502.04 and the Special the requirements identified in SS 502.04.03. This
Provisions. individual shall also be responsible for signing off
Quality Control Testing and Inspection records.
1.02 Quality Control Plan
This individual shall also be responsible for
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Quality Control ensuring the qualifications of quality control staff,
Plan for review. A qualified Subcontractor or an implementing and documenting any changes or
independent organization/agency may operate the Plan improvements to the Quality Control Plan.
wholly or in part. However, the Quality Control Plan,
including compliance with the Plan and its modifications, • There should be a designated Process Control
must remain the responsibility of the Contractor. Technician (PCT), with 5 years of related
experience, who will ensure that laboratory test
The Plan shall address all elements that affect the quality of results and other quality control practices used to
the hot mix, hot laid asphalt pavement, including but not control the quality of aggregates and other mix
limited to the following: components, and to adjust and control mix
proportions to meet the mix design(s). The PCT is
• Purchased Materials (asphalt cement
responsible for ensuring that testing equipment,
characteristics, additives, purchased aggregates,
utilized for proportioning and mixing are
etc.)
calibrated and in good working order. The Plan
• Aggregate production (including source quality, shall describe how the PCT’s duties, including
gradation, fracture, crushing procedures, sampling methods and responsibilities are to be
stockpiling, etc.) accomplished and documented. The Plan should
also describe the criteria to be used by the PCT to
• Calibration and Correlation of Testing Equipment correct or reject unsatisfactory materials.
(plant sensors, lab equipment, nuclear
moisture/density gauges, etc.) • There should also be a Pavement Quality Control
Technician (PQT), with five (5) years of related
• Mix Design experience, who will ensure that delivered
• Asphalt Plant Mixing procedures (cold feed materials meet the requirements of the
sampling, AC flow rate, temperature control, specifications. In addition, the PQT shall be
records, weigh scale, etc.) responsible for periodically inspecting all
equipment used in placing, finishing, and
• Product quality (volumetrics, EPS payment compacting to assure its proper operating
elements, etc.) condition and to assure that placing, application
• Professional standards (joints, placing rate, finishing, joint construction, and compaction
temperature, rolling procedures, etc.) is in conformance with this specification and the
contract requirements.
The Plan shall also include the following:
1.03 Contractor’s Record of Quality Control Testing
• The name of the Quality Control testing agency
Test results should be made on specified forms or charts
and its proven capability to provide the specific
immediately after completion of each test. These test results
services required for the project.
are to be made available to the Ministry Representative
• The list of dedicated technical staff, if available, upon request.
(including names, qualifications and relevant
Records of gradation control, both during aggregate
experience) and their proposed roles.
production and during the asphalt mixing operation, should
• The list of testing equipment available for project be kept on the form H0295 - Mechanical Analysis of
work. Aggregates (available from the Ministry Representative).

o 2020 502 24 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 346 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

1.04 Material Application Rate 1.06 Other Quality Control Procedures

The Contractor shall control the Material Application Rate The Contractor may initiate other Quality Control
by monitoring the amount of asphalt mix delivered to the procedures as necessary for ensuring production of a quality
road against the area covered by checking the application product and include them in the Quality Control Plan.
rate minimally every ten loads. Procedures may also be introduced after the start of work as
The Contractor shall advise the Ministry Representative in necessary as amendments to the Quality Control Plan .
writing on an ongoing basis of the application rate. 1.07 Quality Control Testing Frequency
1.05 Density Minimum test frequencies guidelines for Quality Control
The Contractor should take core samples to determine are described in Table 502-Q,on the following page.
actual pavement density. At the start of paving, the These are the minimum frequencies and the Contractor is
Contractor should take a minimum of two pavement cores responsible to assess the need to increase testing frequency,
from each Sub-Lot. The Contractor may employ a nuclear where aggregate source is not uniform or if any other
densitometer (or moisture/density gauge) to ensure condition exists that may warrant it. QC frequencies may
intermediate density control. Two nuclear densities may be be reduced below this level, subject to the Ministry
determined for each Sub-Lot, based on job mix densities Representative’s authorization, should the Contractor’s QC
obtained from the most recent plant briquettes. Plan be proven very effective.

o 2020 502 25 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 347 of 470
SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

Table 502-Q: Appendix 502-A - Guidelines for Minimum Test Frequencies

ASTM Test Minimum Frequency

• Split Stockpiles: 1 for each stockpile for every 2
C136, Dry Sieve Analysis of Aggregate hours of production.
Tests During • One main stockpile: for every 300 tonnes.
Aggregate C117 Sieve Analysis of Aggregates by Washing • Blend Sand: 1 for every 100 tonnes during
Production (Modified for Field Lab with drying done over a stockpiling.
hotplate or similar heating element) • Natural filler: 1 for every 50 tonnes during
stockpiling.
D5821 Determining the Percentage of Fractured
Every second coarse aggregate sieve test.
Particles in Coarse Aggregate
C117 Sieve Analysis of Aggregates by Washing One (1) per shift on reduced sample obtained from
(Modified for Field Lab) combined samples from the crusher.
Asphalt
Products Tack and Prime Contractor’s option.
Tests
One (1) of combined aggregate (off the belt) every
C136, Dry Sieve Analysis of Aggregate
300 tonnes.
• Aggregate: Two (2) tests per Lot
C566 & D2216, Moisture Content • Asphalt mix: One (1) on first Sub-Lot and every
second day.
C117 Sieve Analysis of Aggregates by Washing One (1) per shift on reduced sample obtained from
(Modified for Field Lab) combined samples from the plant cold feed.
D5581 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous
Tests During Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus
Asphalt Plant One set of three briquettes for 1,200 tonnes or Lot,
Mixing or
whichever is less.
D6927 Marshall Stability and Flow of Asphalt
Mixtures
D6307 Asphalt Extraction, Ignition Method One per Lot.
One per Manufacturer’s Batch. Samples should be
D5 Penetration of Bituminous Materials
taken for every 3000 tonnes of mix production.
D2171 Viscosity Contractor’s Option.
D2041 Maximum Theoretical Density One per Sub-Lot.
D5581 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous
Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus
One 15 kg sample for every Sub-Lot or minimum one
Test During or
(1) per day for field testing.
Asphalt
D6927 Marshall Stability and Flow of Asphalt
Paving for
Mixtures
Density
Testing At start, two cores for each Sub-Lot. After rolling
Core Samples pattern established, only one core for each Sub-Lot.
Core sizes shall be in accordance with Table 502-H.

o 2020 502 26 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 348 of 470
 SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

APPENDIX 502-B
OBTAINING AND PREPARING LOOSE MIX SAMPLES

1. Three (3) uncompacted mix samples per Sub-Lot shall sample as the Quality Control Sample. Use the
be obtained by the Contractor in accordance with Quality Control Sample for testing.
ASTM D979 and in the presence of the Ministry
(b) The Quality Control Sample shall be weighed to
Representative or a delegate thereof. Samples shall be
ensure that the sample so obtained meets the
taken from the roadway after being laid by the paver, at
minimum mass required for the ignition test. If the
locations and times chosen by the Ministry
sample does not meet the minimum mass
Representative. The first sample shall be used by the
requirements, then the additional materials will be
Contractor for Quality Control, the second sample by
obtained and added to the Quality Control Sample
the Ministry for Quality Assurance, with the third
from the Companion Sample. This will be
retained by the Ministry for potential appeal testing.
achieved by quartering the Quality Companion
2. The sizes of the samples taken shall meet the sample and adding one quarter of the Quality
requirements of ASTM D979, Table 1, Guide for Companion Sample to the Quality Control Sample.
Estimating Minimum Sample Quantity.
(c) This process is to be repeated for each sample to
3. The sample size shall be reduced to required laboratory provide the Quality Acceptance and Appeal
sample size for Marshall and Superpave gyratory Samples.
briquettes, asphalt content and hot mix gradation
4. The third sample for appeal purposes shall be set aside
determination as outlined below:
and retained in a Contractor-supplied, suitable
(a) The sample shall either be reduced using a Riffle container labeled with sample location, date sampled,
splitter or shall be quartered into four and project information.
approximately equal portions. The two diagonally,
5. The Contractor shall deliver the QA and appeal samples
opposite quarters shall be combined resulting in
to the Ministry Representative for storing.
two samples. Identify and designate one of the
samples as the Quality Companion Sample and set 6. The areas sampled shall be filled with mix immediately
aside. Identify and designate the other resulting after sampling and shall receive the same compactive
effort as the rest of the mat.

o 2020 502 27 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 349 of 470
 SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

APPENDIX 502-C
BLANK AGGREGATE SAMPLE PREPARATION

1. Blank aggregate samples replicate the Job Mix Formula 6. Masses of aggregate added shall be within the tolerances
design aggregate gradation, without asphalt cement and specified in Table 502-R.
are used to correlate the Ministry, Contractor, and appeal
7. Samples shall be sealed in cans or bagged in moisture-
lab ignition ovens.
proof heavy gauge plastic bags, and labeled with the
2. Twelve (12) blanks are required, each weighing 1900 ± 1 project number, blank number, the preparation date, and
gram. This size approximates the size of the mix samples, a JMF identification number.
less the asphalt cement, that will be used for the project’s
Table 502-R: Appendix 502-C - Cumulative Mass
daily Quality Assurance testing.
Tolerance by Sieve Size
3. The blanks shall be prepared from bulk aggregate samples
(i.e. coarse aggregates, fine aggregates, blend sand, etc.) Cumulative Mass
Sieve Size
that were produced from the same sources and are the Tolerance (g)
same materials as the aggregates that will be used for the Pan 0.1
project and have been designated in the Mix Design. The
amount of each aggregate material required will be 50 kg 0.075 0.1
to 60 kg.
0.15 0.1
4. The bulk aggregate samples shall first be dried, and then
0.30 0.1
thoroughly blended at the design proportions. The
blended material shall then be sieved into each of the 0.60 0.1
individual sieve sizes designated in the Mix Design down
to passing 0.075 mm. 1.18 0.1

5. The aggregate blanks will then be made up from the 2.36 0.1
sieved material, starting with the pan, and progressively 4.75 0.1
adding proportions from each successive individual sieve
to conform to the estimated dry aggregate JMF gradation 9.50 0.7
within the tolerances specified below. Prepare two (2) 12.5 2.0
additional dry blank samples within the tolerances
specified in Table 502-R. Run washed sieve analysis on 16.0 3.0
both samples and using the average passing on the two 19.0 6.0
samples to arrive at a “Target Adjustment”, matching the
submitted design JMF for the final blank aggregate 25.0 13.0
preparation. Masses of aggregate added shall be done
37.5 45.0
based on the average washed sieve adjustment as
described above.

o 2020 502 28 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 350 of 470
 SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

APPENDIX 502-D
IGNITION OVEN CORRELATION PROCEDURE

1. Asphalt Mix samples are prepared and burned to 5. The calibration factors determined above shall be
determine the effect each oven has on the mix. compared and the inter-laboratory correlation
determined.
2. The Contractor and the Ministry shall each prepare
three (3) Asphalt Mix calibration samples by adding 6. Correlation between the Contractor’s lab and the
AC (provided by the Contractor from the supplier and Ministry lab shall be completed, reviewed and mutually
batch that will be used on the project) to randomly acceptable to the Contractor and the Ministry
selected aggregate blanks prepared by the Contractor in Representative a minimum of one (1) working day prior
accordance with Appendix 502-C. to placement of any mix.
3. AC shall be added to the blanks at the proportion 7. In the event of an appeal on AC Content, the appeal
specified in the accepted JMF, within a tolerance of laboratory shall also prepare and burn calibration
± 0.1 gram. samples to determine their oven calibration factor.
4. Each party shall burn their mix calibration samples in 8. Results from testing of any asphalt mix shall report the
their ignition oven in accordance with ASTM D6307 to measured AC Content and the corrected AC Content
determine their calibration factor. after applying the laboratory calibration factor.

o 2020 502 29 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 351 of 470
 SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

APPENDIX 502-E
ASPHALT FILM THICKNESS IN BITUMINOUS MIXTURES
1. The following method is to be used to determine the • Percentage of Asphalt Absorption
asphalt film thickness on aggregate particles in an asphalt
mix. The results of this calculation express the asphalt • Specific gravity of aggregate
film thickness in m (microns). • Gradation of asphalt mix aggregate
2. Data Required: • Specific Gravity of the asphalt cement
• Mix Design percentage of asphalt cement by weight
of dry aggregate

Table 502-S: Appendix 502-E - Surface Area (SA) Factors

Total %
Maximu 4.75 mm 2.36 mm 1.18 mm 0.600 mm 0.300 mm 0.150 mm 0.075 mm
Passing
m Size (No. 4) (No. 8) (No. 16) (No. 30) (No. 50) (No. 100) (No. 200)
Sieve No.
S.A.
0.41 0.41 0.82 1.64 2.87 6.14 12.29 32.77
(m2/kg)
Surface Area factors shown are applicable only when all the above listed sieves are used in the sieve analysis.

This example tabulation demonstrates the calculation of surface area by this method.
Table 502-T: Appendix 502-E - Example Surface Area Calculation

Sieve Size Percent Surface Area Factor Surface Area

(mm) Passing (m2/kg) (m2/kg)
19.0 100
12.5 95 0.41 0.41
9.5 80
4.75 57 0.41 0.23
2.36 39 0.82 0.32
1.18 31 1.64 0.51
0.600 23 2.87 0.66
0.300 17 6.14 1.04
0.150 12 12.29 1.47
0.075 7.5 32.77 2.46
Surface Area of Sample (sum of the above): 7.1

2.650
𝐶𝑜𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑆𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 = x 𝑆𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑆𝑎𝑚𝑝𝑙𝑒
𝑆𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑐 𝐺𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝐴𝑔𝑔𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑎𝑡𝑒

𝐸𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝐴𝑠𝑝ℎ𝑎𝑙𝑡 𝐶𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑡 = 𝑀𝑖𝑥 𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝐴𝐶 − 𝐴𝑠𝑝ℎ𝑎𝑙𝑡 𝐴𝑏𝑠𝑜𝑟𝑝𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛

𝐸𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝐴𝑠𝑝ℎ𝑎𝑙𝑡 𝐶𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑡

𝐹𝑖𝑙𝑚 𝑇ℎ𝑖𝑐𝑘𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠 = 10 x
𝐶𝑜𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑆𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 ∗ 𝑆𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑐 𝐺𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝐴𝑠𝑝ℎ𝑎𝑙𝑡 𝐶𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡

o 2020 502 30 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 352 of 470
 SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

APPENDIX 502-F
MARSHALL HAMMER CORRELATION PROCEDURE

1. Overview: This procedure is used to correlate the (c) AC shall be added to the aggregate blanks at the trial
mechanical Marshall hammers of both the Ministry and JMF rate (±1 gram); by the Ministry to each of fifteen
the Contractor, to produce density results that would be (15) blanks and by the Contractor to each of twelve
representative of testing on the Ministry’s manual (12) blanks.
Marshall hammer.
(d) Three (3) of the aggregate blanks shall be retained by
For a given mix, this procedure gives the following the Ministry for substitute samples or additional
results: samples, if needed.
• DManual = the average density obtained from the 4. Ministry Sample Testing:
Ministry’s manual Marshall hammer at the nominal
(a) Three (3) of the Ministry’s mix samples shall be
number of blows.
compacted at NNom blows using the Ministry’s
• NMin and NCon = the respective number of blows to be manual Marshall Hammer and the average density
delivered by the Ministry’s and Contractor’s determined (“Dmanual”).
mechanical Marshall hammers. (b) Twelve (12) of the mix samples shall be compacted
• CMin and CCon = the respective density correlations using the mechanical Marshall hammer. Four (4)
for the Ministry and Contractor’s mechanical sets of three (3) samples each shall respectively
Marshall hammers, to be added to subsequent density receive:
test results to approximate the densities that would be (i) NNom minus 10 blows,
expected had the Ministry’s manual Marshall
hammer been used. (ii) NNom blows,
2. General: (iii) NNom plus 10 blows,
(a) Any Marshall hammer must be correlated for each (iv) NNom plus 20 blows.
mix used on each project and every time the hammer (c) The above numbers of blows may be varied at the
is relocated. discretion of the operator to better bracket the
(b) The Marshall hammer correlations shall be anticipated blows required to achieve DManual.
determined prior to the production of any mix. (d) The average densities for each set of three (3)
(c) Briquettes shall be prepared and tested in accordance samples shall be calculated.
with ASTM D6926. (e) The average densities calculated above will be
(d) All densities shall be determined in in accordance plotted against the number of blows received, and the
with ASTM D2726. best-fit curve drawn through them. If using
computer-assisted calculations, a second-degree
(e) The Nominal Number of Blows (“NNom”) to be polynomial curve fit is to be used.
applied using the Ministry’s manual hammer shall be
as appropriate to the pavement design requirement (f) Where the curve established above is considered to
(Typically 75 blows for heavy traffic, although either be a poor fit, a fifth set of three (3) mix samples shall
35 or 50 blows may be used for lighter traffic). be prepared and compacted at a number of blows
appropriate to best supplement the existing data.
3. Mix Sample Preparation: Typically, the number of blows used would be close
(a) The Contractor shall prepare a minimum of thirty to the number estimated to produce a density close to
1200 g (30 x 1200 g) Asphalt Mix Aggregate blanks DManual. The results shall be added to the data set and
using the Appendix 502-C procedures, supplying a revised curve fitted.
eighteen (18) to the Ministry and retaining twelve (g) Using the plotted curve or its formula, the number of
(12) for the its own use. blows of the mechanical hammer required to achieve
(b) The Contractor shall supply a minimum of 2 kg of the average Ministry manual hammer density shall be
the specified AC to the Ministry and retain a similar determined.
amount for its own use. (h) The above number shall be rounded to the nearest
whole number to establish “NMin”, the number of

o 2020 502 31 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 353 of 470
 SECTION 502 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION (EPS)

blows to be delivered by the Ministry’s mechanical (c) Using the Contractor’s best fit curve and NCon and
hammers in all subsequent testing. the average Ministry manual hammer density
determined in 4(a) determine the Contractor’s
5. Contractor Sample Testing:
mechanical Marshall hammer correlation (“CCon”).
(a) The Contractor shall repeat steps 4(b) through 4(h)
7. Subsequent Testing and Reporting:
inclusive on twelve (12) additional mix samples
using the Contractor’s mechanical hammer and (a) All subsequent testing by the Ministry and the
determine “NCon”, the number of blows to be Contractor shall be conducted on their respective
delivered by the Contractor’s mechanical hammers mechanical hammers, delivering the number of
in all subsequent testing. blows determined for their respective Marshall
Hammer Correlations (NMin or NCon).
(b) If considered necessary, the Contractor may prepare
and test a fifth set of samples to supplement their data (b) Density results determined by the mechanical
set, regardless of whether the Ministry has used a hammers shall be adjusted by adding, respectively,
fifth set. CMin or CCon and those correlated results reported
and used in all applications related to asphalt mix
6. Correlation:
density.
(a) Using the Ministry hammer’s best-fit curve
established in step 4 (or the formula for that curve)
determine the expected density at NMin blows. Note: The Ministry has developed an Excel 2016
spreadsheet to perform the calculations and plot the results
(b) Subtract the expected density above from the
of this correlation procedure. The spreadsheet is available
average Ministry manual hammer density
from the Ministry Representative.
determined in 4(a) to determine the Ministry
mechanical Marshall hammer correlation (“CMin”).

o 2020 502 32 of 32
Vol. 1 Page 354 of 470
 SECTION 503

BASE PREPARATION AND BASE PROCESSING

503.01 Base Preparation – The work shall consist of 501.01.03 Surplus Aggregate – All surplus loose aggregate
shaping and compacting the existing granular base course to arising from the base preparation shall be bladed clear into
the designated grade and cross section. windrows on the shoulder for later incorporation into the
shouldering aggregate or bladed to the side slope and
The existing base course material shall be watered, graded
trimmed, as directed by the Ministry Representative.
and compacted to provide a non-segregated, tightly-knit
surface which conforms to the line, grade and cross sections 503.02 Base Processing – Where, in the opinion of the
shown on the Drawings or staked by the Ministry Ministry Representative, the base is so deformed, rutted or
Representative to an accuracy of  10 mm. unsuitable, that it cannot be adequately prepared for priming
under the provisions for base preparation, the Ministry
If necessary, the existing surface shall be scarified and Representative shall order in writing how it shall be
bladed to achieve this. No imported materials are to be processed. This work shall be carried out on an Order for
incorporated into the work, except where failed areas have Extra Work basis.
to be backfilled.
503.03 Payment
503.01.01 Failed Areas – Where a failed area is present in
the existing base, the Contractor shall excavate and dispose 503.03.01 Base Preparation – Payment for Base
of the material, all as directed by the Ministry Preparation will be at the Unit Prices bid in the Schedule 7
Representative. The area shall be backfilled using crushed – Schedule of Approximate Quantities and Unit Prices per
granular base or surfacing aggregate or road-mix as directed square metre for the area actually prepared and shall be full
by the Ministry Representative and compacted to the same compensation for scarifying done to a maximum depth of
density as the rest of the base course. 40 mm, watering, blading, shaping, trimming, compacting,
finishing and maintaining the granular base to the required
503.01.02 Compaction – If watering is required to attain line, grade, cross section and density.
compaction or for any other reason, it shall be applied
uniformly from a distributor of the pressure type, equipped 503.03.02 Repair of Failed Areas – Payment for supply of
with a spray bar mounting nozzles similar to those used on material used for backfilling and compaction of failed areas
asphalt distributors. Splash plate type distributors or those will be at the Unit Price bid in Schedule 7 for the material
equipped with spray bars that eject fine streams of water will used. Payment for excavating and disposing of the material
not be permitted. The distributor must be provided with a from the failed areas will be at the Unit Price bid in
satisfactory means for accurately measuring the quantity of Schedule 7 for Type D or, where there is no bid price, in
water sprayed. If the Ministry Representative so requires, accordance with GC 38.00 Change to Work..
the measuring equipment shall be calibrated under the
503.03.03 No Payment for Incidental Works – Payment
Ministry Representative's inspection.
will not be made for superintendence, provision or
The final surface of the base course shall be compacted to a placement of barriers, lights or other equipment which
minimum 100% of the Standard Proctor Density obtained should normally be provided and available for the general
by ASTM D698. performance of the contract.

BC MoTI SS 2020 503 (1 of 1)

Vol. 1 Page 355 of 470
 SECTION 504

PAVEMENT DRAINAGE

DESCRIPTION defects. The asphalt concrete mix shall be handled to

provide a curb meeting the applicable density
504.01 Scope – This Section covers the provision of
requirements of SS 502 and the curbing equipment
pavement drainage with the construction of necessary
shall be operated in a manner that ensures a smooth,
asphalt curbing and drainage outlets using cast iron catch
uniform finished curb alignment. Where hand-forming
basins or asphalt spillways together with pipe or paved
of curb is required, the finished curb shall conform to
outfalls. Concrete curbs, concrete and corrugated steel
all dimensions, alignment, density and finish
catch basins, cast iron grates and frames where applicable
requirements for machine-laid curb.
are specified by SS 582.
504.32 Location of Drainage Outlets – On completion of
pavement and curb construction and in conjunction with the
MATERIALS installation of any precast concrete barriers, the Contractor
shall install or construct drainage outlets at the low point of
504.11 Materials – The Contractor shall supply all
curves in the vertical alignment and at such other locations
necessary materials required to construct the Works,
designated by the Ministry Representative.
conforming to the specifications indicated in SS 320,
SS 502, this SS 504, SS 582, and all other provisions of the The exact low point on the pavement should be determined
Contract. by allowing water to flow along the surface to the actual
lowest point on the pavement adjacent to the curb or barrier.
This low point shall be clearly marked on the pavement.
CONSTRUCTION 504.33 Excavation – At the locations designated by the
504.31 Asphalt Curbs Ministry Representative, the asphalt pavement and any
curbing shall be accurately cut away and the highway
504.31.01 Integral Asphalt Curb – Where specified in the shoulder excavated to the dimensions consistent with the
Contract Documents, asphalt concrete curb integral with the installation of Cast Iron Catch Basins (SS Drawing
asphalt concrete highway pavement shall be constructed to SP504-03) or the construction of Asphalt Spillways
the dimensions indicated on SS Drawing SP504-01. (SS Drawings SP504-02, SP504-04, and SP 504-05). The
504.31.02 Machine-Laid Asphalt Curb – Where specified, excavation shall, as nearly as possible, have vertical sides
machine laid (extruded) asphalt concrete curbs shall be and shall be so done as to cause minimum disturbance of the
constructed in accordance with SS Drawing SP504-01 and adjacent compacted base and pavement structures. The
as follows: outside dimensions of the excavation shall be the smallest
compatible with the efficient construction of the drainage
(a) The type of curb to be placed (Type "A" or Type "B") facility, as any excess or irregular excavation will be
will be as specified or as determined by the Ministry required to be repaired with asphalt mix.
Representative.
Where applicable, appropriate trench excavation shall be
(b) Prior to construction of the curb, the affected pavement performed to permit the installation and embedment of
area shall be dry and cleaned of loose or deleterious outlet pipe and associated fittings. Excavation for
materials. A tack coat of liquid or emulsified asphalt installation and embedment of outlet pipe shall be
determined by the Ministry Representative or specified considered incidental to the rate bid for pipe installation.
in the Special Provisions or Purchase Order shall be
uniformly applied at a rate of 0.25 L/m2 to 0.5 L/m2, 504.34 Drainage Outlets
and to a width 0.1 m wider than the proposed curb. 504.34.01 Cast Iron Catch Basins – Bedding and
(c) The production and transportation of asphalt mix for surrounding mortar for catch basins shall be composed of
curb construction shall be in accordance with SS 502 one part Portland cement to three parts clean well-graded
and SS 952 and shall meet the requirements for Class 1 fine aggregate mixed to proper consistency.
Fine Mix. Bedding shall be a minimum of 125 mm thick to permit
(d) The machine for constructing the curb shall be accurate setting of the catch basin in mortar at the correct
self-propelled extrusion-type equipment with a level true to alignment with curbing, barrier or pavement
material hopper, distributing screw and adjustable curb edge as shown on SS Drawing SP504-03. After securely
forming devices capable of placing and compacting the fixing the adaptor, watertight gasket and connecting pipe,
asphalt mix to the required alignment, grade and cross the catch basin shall be surrounded with mortar to the full
section in an even homogeneous manner free of surface perimeter of the excavation, and the mortar well tamped and

BC MoTI SS 2020 504 (1 of 7)

Vol. 1 Page 356 of 470
SECTION 504 PAVEMENT DRAINAGE

worked around the connecting pipe for 300 mm from the MEASUREMENT
side of the catch basin.
504.81 Pavement Drainage Outlets – Pavement drainage
The mortar shall be allowed to set prior to backfilling and outlets will be measured per EACH of the type specified.
further work.
504.82 Corrugated Metal Pipe – Corrugated metal pipe
504.34.02 Asphalt Spillways – Asphalt spillways shall be will be measured by the METRE along its centreline as
constructed to the general dimensions shown on installed.
SS Drawings SP504-02 , SP504-04, and SP 504-05, with
504.83 Asphalt Pavement – Unless otherwise specified,
the necessary hand-forming in accordance with
asphalt pavement mix used to form drainage aprons, curbs,
SS 504.31.02 (d).
spillways and outfalls will be measured by the TONNE.
504.34.03 Pipe Outfalls General – Except where paved
504.84 Asphalt Curb – Asphalt curb will be measured by
outfalls are specified, corrugated galvanized metal outlet
the METRE.
pipes of the required diameter shall be installed, as shown
generally on SS Drawing SP504-03. Should the fill material
preclude pipe embedment, the pipe shall be secured to the
slope by dual angle iron posts placed at 3 m intervals, as PAYMENT
shown. The pipe shall be similarly secured at the bend at 504.91 Pavement Drainage Outlets – Payment for the
the base of the slope and at a point approximately 150 mm installation of PAVEMENT DRAINAGE OUTLETS will
from its outlet. be at the Contract Unit Price for EACH complete outlet of
The pipe trench shall be backfilled with excavated material the type specified. The Contract Unit Price shall be full
as may be directed by the Ministry Representative and the compensation for supply of cast iron basins, boxes and
grates; excavation (see SS 504.33); provision of all
fill thoroughly compacted.
materials required for setting basins to correct grade
Class 10 riprap, per SS 205, shall be placed at the pipe outlet including cement mortar; backfill and compaction;
as shown on SS Drawing SP504-03. spreading, shaping and compaction of asphalt pavement
aprons and spillways; provision and setting of riprap at the
504.35 Dishing, Spillways and Completion – The asphalt
outfall and all labour, materials, tools, warning signs,
pavement adjacent to the drainage outlet shall be
barriers and superintendence required to complete the
constructed to the profile and cross sections indicated for
installation of the drainage outlet.
the type of outlet being installed. The asphalt pavement
surface shall be so shaped as to channel all collected water Payment for Asphalt Pavement mix used will in in
to the outlet orifice and no ridges or other obstructions shall accordance with SS 504.93
be left which may impede the flow of water to the drainage
504.92 Corrugated Metal Pipe – Payment for
outlet.
CORRUGATED METAL PIPE will be at the Contract Unit
The asphalt pavement mix shall be compacted to the density Price per metre. The Contract Unit Price shall be accepted
specified by the Ministry Representative to provide an as full compensation for supply and installation including
integral and impervious drainage area. Where the asphalt all necessary transport of components, excavation and
pavement abuts a cast iron catch basin box, the contact face backfilling; provision of posts, brackets, hoops and
of the box shall be painted with liquid or emulsified asphalt hardware; labour for connecting and securing pipe fittings,
as specified in SS 502.22.03 prior to placing the asphalt compaction, superintendence, lights, warning signs, barriers
concrete. and all other things or services necessary for the proper
installation of the pipe.
On completion, the area shall be cleared and cleaned up to
the satisfaction of the Ministry Representative. 504.93 Asphalt Pavement – Unless otherwise specified,
payment for ASPHALT PAVEMENT used to form
drainage aprons, curbs, spillways and outfalls will be at the
Contract Unit Price per tonne.
504.94 Asphalt Curb – Payment for ASPHALT CURB
will be at the Contract Unit Price per metre of the
appropriate curb type placed. The Contract Unit Price shall
include the formation of offset curb alignment at drainage
outlets in accordance with SS 504.31.

BC MoTI SS 2020 504 (2 of 7)

Vol. 1 Page 357 of 470
SECTION 504 PAVEMENT DRAINAGE

BC MoTI SS 2020 504 (3 of 7)

Vol. 1 Page 358 of 470
SECTION 504 PAVEMENT DRAINAGE

BC MoTI SS 2020 504 (4 of 7)

Vol. 1 Page 359 of 470
SECTION 504 PAVEMENT DRAINAGE

BC MoTI SS 2020 504 (5 of 7)

Vol. 1 Page 360 of 470
SECTION 504 PAVEMENT DRAINAGE

BC MoTI SS 2020 504 (6 of 7)

Vol. 1 Page 361 of 470
SECTION 504 PAVEMENT DRAINAGE

BC MoTI SS 2020 504 (7 of 7)

Vol. 1 Page 362 of 470
 SECTION 505

USE OF RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT

IN ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION

505.01 Preliminary and General – The work covered by it to the Ministry Representative 10 days in advance unless
this section covers the use of Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement the project Special Provisions state differently.
(RAP) material in hot mix asphalt construction. This
The amount of total AC replaced by AC in the RAP will be
specification allows for the use of both Classified and
calculated as follows:
Unclassified RAP.
(𝒂 𝒙 𝒃)
The Contractor’s development and processing of RAP into % 𝑨𝑪 𝑹𝒆𝒑𝒍𝒂𝒄𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒏𝒕 =
an end paving product must meet SS 502 Asphalt Pavement 𝒄
Construction (EPS) for Highway Construction. Where;
The maximum allowable percentage of RAP allowed in a = AC content of RAP
asphalt pavement will be based on the classification of the
b = RAP percent in mixture by total weight of mix
roadway and the location of the mix in the pavement
structure or as identified in the Special Provisions. c = Total Percent AC content in mixture
505.02 Roadway Categories – Roadways are divided into Inclusion of RAP into the hot mix asphalt will be as per the
the following two categories: maximum allowable percentage of AC replacement unless
otherwise noted in the Special Provisions.
• Category A – All numbered Highways.
• Category B – Other Roads. Table 505-A: Maximum Percent RAP AC Replacement
Allowed in Asphalt Mix
The roadway Category shall Category A, unless otherwise
identified in the Special Provisions. Top Lower
Road Classification
505.03 DEFINITIONS Lift Lifts
(a) Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) – Removed Category A 15% 30%
and/or reprocessed pavement materials containing
Category B 30% 30%
asphalt and aggregates. These materials are generated
when asphalt pavements are removed for
reconstruction and/or resurfacing. When properly 505.05 Materials
screened and crushed, it consists of high-quality
aggregate coated by asphalt cement. 505.05.01 RAP – The Contractor shall fulfill or exceed the
requirements of Appendix 505-A – RAP Management Best
(b) Classified RAP – RAP obtained from Ministry Practices for the management of RAP materials from the
roadways. time of collection through processing, mix design and
(c) Unclassified RAP – RAP obtained from non-Ministry quality control practices during the production of asphalt
sources or mixed with RAP from other sources. mixtures containing RAP and the Contractor shall provide
documentation to the Ministry Representative that best
(d) Rheology – The study of deformation and flow of practices have been followed in the handling, classification,
matter. For asphalt binder rheology, it refers to the and storage of RAP material, prior to being allowed to use
flow characteristics of the asphalt binder in the asphalt the RAP.
mix. Deformation and flow of the asphalt binder in
asphalt mix is important in determining asphalt 505.05.02 Asphalt Cement – When the Percent RAP AC
pavement performance. Replacement amount is greater than 15%, the blended AC
must meet the penetration and viscosity requirements of the
505.04 Allowable RAP Addition Rates – The maximum specified asphalt cement specified in the Special Provisions
RAP allowed in the asphalt mix shall be determined by the (when penetration graded asphalt cement is specified) or the
contribution of the RAP Asphalt Cement (AC) towards the temperature requirements of the specified Performance
total AC content in the mix by weight as per the percentages Graded Asphalt Cement (PGAC) when a PGAC is specified
specified in Table 505-A. or substituted for penetration graded asphalt cement.
The Contractor shall notify the Ministry Representative, 505.05.03 Use of Rejuvenators – Usage of Softening
14 days in advance of Paving if RAP is proposed to be used agents, rejuvenators or recycling agents will not be
in the project, and shall fill all fields as applicable and sign permitted.
this Appendix 505-B – RAP RECORD SHEET and submit

BC MoTI SS 2020 505 (1 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 363 of 470
SECTION 505 USE OF RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT
IN ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION

505.05.03 Use of Recycled Asphalt Shingles –Usage of 505.07.01 RAP Aggregate Testing
Recycled asphalt shingles will not be permitted.
(a) Basic Tests – The following basic properties shall be
505.06 RAP Sampling – Sampling of the RAP shall be as determined for the proposed RAP:
per Appendix 505-A – RAP Management Best Practices.
(i) Moisture Content;
505.07 Quality Control – The quality control testing
(ii) Asphalt Content;
requirements for RAP shall be based on the percent of AC
replacement in the asphalt mix and comply with the (iii) Gradation;
requirements listed in Table 505-B and Table 505-C, and
(iv) Percent Fracture; and
the corresponding tests specified in SSS 505.07.01.
(v) Specific Gravity of coarse and fine fractions (for
Table 505-B: Quality Control Testing Requirements mix design purposes).

RAP % AC Required Individual representative RAP samples shall be tested

Category Replacement Tests to determine moisture content, gradation, percent
fracture and asphalt content.
≤ 15% • Basic Tests
Tests to determine the specific gravity of the coarse and
Classified • Basic Tests fine fractions of RAP shall be completed on the
RAP • Consensus Tests combined aggregates (obtained by combining the
> 15%
• AC Rheology individual reclaimed aggregates retained after the
Testing extraction of the asphalt cement).
• Basic Tests (b) Consensus Tests – The tests for the consensus
≤ 15%
• Consensus Tests properties shall be completed on the combined
Unclassified aggregates (virgin aggregates and reclaimed
• Basic Tests
RAP aggregates) mixed in the proportions proposed for the
• Consensus Tests
> 15% mix design.
• AC Rheology
Testing The following aggregate consensus properties shall be
determined for the combined aggregate samples:
Table 505-C: Minimum Quality Control Test (i) Maximum Micro Deval Abrasion loss factor (%);
Frequencies
(ii) Standard Test Methods for un-compacted void
Test Minimum Frequency content of fine aggregate (as influenced by particle
shape, surface texture and grading) (ASTM
Asphalt Content One per 750 tonnes C1252); and
Gradation One per 750 tonnes (iii) Percentage of flat and elongated particles (for
Percent Fracture (%) One per 750 tonnes Superpave mixes only).
Specific Gravity of Minimum of one per 3000 505.07.02 AC Rheology Testing – When AC rheology
coarse fraction of RAP tonnes or three per stockpile testing and design is required, the blended AC must meet
the penetration and viscosity requirements of the specified
Specific Gravity of Minimum of one per 3000
AC type. For penetration graded asphalt, rheology is
fine fraction of RAP tonnes or three per stockpile
measured in terms of penetration at 25°C and viscosity at
Maximum Micro 60°C. For performance grade asphalt cements (PGAC),
Minimum of one per 3000
Deval Abrasion loss rheology is tested as per the procedures outlined in
tonnes or three per stockpile
factor (%) AASHTO R 29 Standard Practice for Grading or Verifying
Fine aggregate Minimum of one per 3000 the Performance Grade (PG) of an Asphalt Binder and
angularity tonnes or three per stockpile reported in terms of high and low temperature service
ratings, i.e. PG 58-34.
Flat and elongated
Minimum of one per 3000 Since the rheological properties of asphalt binder vary with
particles (For
tonnes or three per stockpile temperature, rheological characterization involves two key
Superpave Only)
considerations:
Minimum of one per 3000
AC Rheology tonnes of RAP or a minimum • To compare different asphalt binders, their rheological
of three tests per project. properties must be measured at some common
reference temperature.

BC MoTI SS 2020 505 (2 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 364 of 470
SECTION 505 USE OF RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT
IN ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION

• To fully characterize an asphalt binder, its rheological shall be provided in the mix design submittal for the asphalt
properties must be examined over the range of mixes containing RAP:
temperatures that it may encounter during its life.
• All RAP aggregate gradations for each RAP product;
For mixes specified to use PGAC, the blended AC must
meet the temperature requirements of the specified PGAC. • Asphalt Content for RAP;
For asphalt mixtures containing RAP and specified to use • Results for Consensus properties of combined
Performance Graded (PG) asphalts, the RAP rheology and aggregates as specified in Section 505.07.01 (when
the grade of virgin asphalt to be used shall be determined applicable);
according to AASHTO R 35 Standard Practice for
Superpave Volumetric Design for Asphalt Mixtures. • Design RAP Rheology test results; and

505.08 Asphalt Mix Design – RAP shall be included at the • Blending Charts for the virgin and reclaimed AC.
proposed addition rates during the mix design. The (when applicable)
Contractor shall submit a mix design to the Ministry Should a change in the source or addition rate of RAP be
Representative for review at least five (5) business days made after the mix design has been approved, a new mix
prior to the start of asphalt mix production. design and/or job mix formula shall be submitted to the
In addition to the information required in SS 502.08.04 Ministry Representative for review.
Asphalt Mix Design Submittals, the following information 505.09 Payment Adjustments – SS 502 – PAYMENT
ADJUSTMENTS (SS 502.50 through SS 502.58 inclusive)
shall apply to all work utilizing reclaimed asphalt pavement
in the asphalt mix unless otherwise specified in the
Contract.

BC MoTI SS 2020 505 (3 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 365 of 470
SECTION 505 USE OF RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT
IN ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION

APPENDIX 505-A
RAP MANAGEMENT BEST PRACTICES

A best practice in the context of this Standard Specification The plant QC personnel and the loader operators should
is a method or technique that has consistently shown results continuously monitor processed and unprocessed RAP
superior to those achieved with other means, and that is used stockpiles to make sure that they do not contain deleterious
as a benchmark. A "best" practice may evolve to become materials. If any contaminants are found, they should be
better as improvements are discovered. Best practice is removed immediately so that they are not covered up with
considered to describe the process of developing and other RAP brought on to the yard.
following a standard way of doing things that are commonly
RAP Categories – RAP is categorized as:
achieved in the industry.
RAP Sources – RAP may be obtained from several sources. • Classified RAP: RAP obtained from Ministry sources.
The common sources of RAP are: • Unclassified RAP : RAP obtained from non-Ministry
• Cold Milling – This is the most common source of sources or mixed with RAP from other projects.
RAP. The milling process should be closely examined RAP Processing – Best practice for RAP processing
to make sure that the milled material is not involves one or more steps to create consistent materials.
contaminated with soil, base materials, paving Screening is used to separate sizes. In some cases, it may be
geotextiles or other foreign material (sulphur, asbestos, desirable to screen or fractionate RAP to coarse and fine
rubber etc.). The milled material that becomes fractions. RAP separation based on sizes increases quality
contaminated should be stockpiled separately from and reduces variability in the RAP properties.
RAP to be used in asphalt mix.
For stockpiles of RAP from multiple sources, particularly
A special milling operation may also be beneficial stockpiles containing oversize fragments of RAP or
when it is desirable to mill the surface layer in one pass pavement slabs, the material should be processed to produce
and the underlying layers in a second pass because the RAP with a maximum size of 37.5 mm for use in hot mix
surface course millings may contain aggregates with asphalt.
higher fractured aggregates that could be incorporated
in the new surface layers. Further processing of RAP may include both screening and
crushing to produce a uniform gradation, AC content and
• Full Depth Pavement Removal – RAP can also be other properties. Since crushing RAP will create more
obtained from the removal of the existing pavement aggregate fines, it is best to set up the crushing operation so
using a bulldozer or a backhoe. This process typically that the RAP is screened before it enters the crusher.
results in large chunks of pavement that may be
RAP processing shall occur as early as possible in the
contaminated with underlying soils. This contaminated
construction planning process.
material should be stored in a separate stockpile and not
to be used in the hot mix asphalt. RAP Stockpiling – The best practice to minimize the
• Asphalt Plant Waste – This includes the waste accumulation of moisture in stockpiles is to cover the
generated during plant start-up, transition between stockpile with a shelter, tarp or building to prevent
mixes, plant clean out, mix rejected from projects and precipitation from getting to the RAP.
excess mix produced that could not be placed.
RAP stockpiles should be placed on a base with adequate
This material usually has fewer fines than the typical drainage and constructed with minimal segregation. Arc-
RAP since it wasn’t milled or broken up during shaped, conical, uniform stockpiles are preferred for storing
pavement removal and the AC is less aged than RAP processed or unprocessed RAP. No contamination of the
since it hasn’t been subjected to environmental aging. RAP from the stockpile base materials should occur.
This material should be stockpiled and tested separately Use of heavy equipment on top of the RAP stockpile should
from the other RAP. be minimized to avoid compaction of the RAP. It is also
recommended that the RAP stockpiles be limited to 4 m in
RAP Contamination – Best practice for RAP stockpiles is
height to reduce the potential for self-consolidation of the
to keep them free from contaminants. RAP stockpiles
stockpile.
should be treated as a valuable material. Truck drivers
bringing the material on the site should ensure that RAP Sampling – Best practice is for representative RAP
unwanted debris or contaminated material does not end up samples to be collected from the stockpile prepared for the
in the RAP stockpile. project. At least one sample per 750 tonnes of RAP in the

BC MoTI SS 2020 505 (1 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 366 of 470
SECTION 505 USE OF RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT
IN ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION

stockpile or a minimum of ten samples per stockpile should Minimum Test Frequencies – The quality control tests on
be taken and retained for testing. the RAP and the extracted aggregates should be completed
at the minimum frequencies specified in Table 505-C.
If the asphalt mix from an existing pavement is to be used
as RAP, 150 mm diameter cores should be extracted at a All RAP aggregates retained after extraction should be
frequency of at least one core every 1.5 kilometre in each combined together into one sample. The combined sample
lane prior to the start of the project. The asphalt mix from should then be sieved and split into coarse and fine fractions
the pavement lift to be recycled should be tested to and used to determine the specific gravity of the recycled
determine the properties of the aggregates and the asphalt aggregates.
cement in the pavement.
Stockpile Management – When a stockpile reaches the
Sampling Method – Best practice for sampling aggregates desired quantity and has been sampled and characterized, no
applies to the sampling of RAP as well. RAP stockpiles additional RAP material should be added to it. Subsequent
should be sampled as they are being built at the location RAP material should be stockpiled in a separate stockpile
where they will be fed into the asphalt plant. Sampling at and characterized in the same manner. This process should
the time the stockpile is built is the best practice and will be continue such that characterized stockpiles are not
easier and more representative of the stockpile compared to compromised by new RAP materials.
samples taken later after the formation of the crust on the
Samples from the RAP stockpile should be taken and the
face of the RAP stockpile.
testing completed as per the minimum test frequencies
ASTM D75 or AASHTO R 90 sampling procedures, specified in Table 505-C.
normally used for virgin aggregates, should also be used to
sample RAP aggregates.

BC MoTI SS 2020 505 (2 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 367 of 470
SECTION 505 USE OF RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT
IN ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION

APPENDIX 505-B
RAP RECORD SHEET

The Contractor shall notify the Ministry Representative this Appendix 505-B – RAP RECORD SHEET and submit
fourteen (14) days in advance of paving, if RAP will be used it to the Ministry Representative 10 days in advance.
in the project, and shall fill all fields as applicable and sign

RAP RECORD SHEET

Contractor:

Project Name per Signed Contract:

Project Number:

Numbered Highway Name: (If Applicable):

Road Name: (If Applicable):

Segment RAP Classified Unclassified Top Lift Bottom LKI

Tonnage
No. % RAP RAP % Lift % Left/Right Start Finish

Filled by (Name and Date):

Address and Contacts:

Submitted by:

Name:

Signature and Date:

BC MoTI SS 2020 505 (3 of 6)

Vol. 1 Page 368 of 470
 SECTION 507

PRODUCTION AND STOCKPILING OF ASPHALT MIX

507.01 General – This Section covers the supply of fillers. It shall consist of natural and/or manufactured
aggregate, mixing it with a specified asphalt material in a material derived by crushing stone, slag or gravel.
central plant and placing the produced mix in a stockpile.
(f) Mineral filler shall:
507.02 Aggregate
(i) Consist of all mineral matter passing the 0.425 mm
(a) The Contractor shall supply aggregate with gradation sieve.
wholly within the limits listed in Table 507-A when
(ii) Be dry, free from organic matter, clay particles or
tested in accordance with ASTM C136 and ASTM
lumps.
C117 (wash test).
(iii) Be non-plastic when tested in accordance with
Once a crushed aggregate gradation has been accepted,
ASTM D4318.
the maximum permissible variation of the mean of any
four consecutive tests from the accepted gradation (g) Mineral dust shall consist of all mineral matter passing
curve shall be within the limits specified in the 0.075 mm sieve.
Table 507-B.
Should there be a substantial change in the type of Table 507-A: Gradation Requirements for Aggregate
aggregate exposed as the work proceeds, the Ministry
Representative may authorize a change in the mean Sieve Size Percent Passing (By Mass)
gradation. (mm)
Patch Mix Paving Mix
(b) A minimum of 85% by count of all aggregate particles
retained on the 4.75 mm sieve shall have at least two 19.0 --- 100
fractured faces or shall be naturally angular with sharp
edges (ASTM D5821). If this requirement cannot be 16.0 --- 100 – 92
met for a specified crushed aggregate type then the
Contractor shall, at no additional charge, crush 13.2 --- 100 – 80
aggregate to the next smaller size or such intermediate
9.5 100 90 – 65
size as the Ministry Representative may direct, to meet
the requirements. 4.75 85 – 55 75 – 45
(c) All aggregates shall be free from coatings of clay, silt
or other objectionable matter and shall contain no clay 2.36 65 – 40 60 – 30
lumps or other aggregations of fine-grained materials. 1.18 50 – 25 45 – 20
(d) Crushed aggregate shall conform to the following
requirements: 0.300 30 – 15 25 – 10

(i) The sand equivalent value in accordance with 0.150 18 – 8 17 – 5

ASTM D2419 shall not be less than 40.
0.075 12 – 5 9–2
(ii) The degradation factor in accordance with ASTM
D6928 shall be not more than 20.
(iii) In the absence of satisfactory performance records Table 507-B: Maximum Permissible Variation of
for a particular source of aggregate, its soundness Crushed Aggregate Gradation from the Gradation
shall be tested according to ASTM C88. Curve
Aggregate so tested shall be considered Variation Limit
unsatisfactory if the loss after five cycles exceeds Sieve Size
(% Passing)
20% for coarse aggregate or 25% for fine
aggregate. 4.75 mm and larger  5.0
(iv) Micro Deval maximum abrasion loss shall not be 1.18 mm to 4.75 mm  3.5
greater than 17% as tested under ASTM D6928.
0.300 mm to 1.18 mm  2.0
(e) For testing purposes, fine aggregate shall be all mineral
matter passing the 4.75 mm sieve including mineral 0.075 mm to 0.300 mm  1.0

BC MoTI SS 2020 507 (1 of 3)

Vol. 1 Page 369 of 470
SECTION 507 PRODUCTION AND STOCKPILING OF ASPHALT MIX

507.03 Asphalt Material Asphalts or High Float Emulsified Asphalts used on a

Force Account Basis..
(a) The type of asphalt material to be used will be specified
in the Contract's Special Provisions.
Table 507-C: Mix Temperatures
(b) The Contractor shall supply the Liquid Asphalts or
High Float Emulsified Asphalts, as specified in the Asphalt Storage Mix
Contract, to meet the requirements of SS 951 Temperature Temperature
Type of Asphalt
507.04 Mix Design Range Range
(°C) (°C)
(a) The Contractor will carry out the Asphalt Mix design,
in accordance with specifications provided in the SC – 250 65 – 80 60 – 80
Contract and to for approval by the Ministry.
(b) At least seven days prior to commencement of mixing, MC – 250 65 – 80 60 – 80
the Contractor shall submit the following to the
Ministry Representative: HF – 500M 55 – 65 100 – 120*

(i) A 50 kg sample of aggregate which is HF – 1000M 55 – 65 100 – 120*

representative of the aggregate to be used on the
project. * High temperatures are used when the mix is hauled
(ii) If available, a 30 kg sample of plant produced directly to the road and when dictated by high moisture in
asphalt mix whose gradation is deemed to be the aggregate.
representative of the gradation of the aggregate to
be used on the project.
507.06 Hauling – When the haul distance from the mixing
(iii) A 5 L sample of the type of asphalt to be used on site to the stockpile is greater than 1 km, the hauling
the project. vehicles shall be equipped with and use a tarpaulin of such
(c) Once the design grading curve is established, the size as to completely protect the asphalt mix from the
maximum permissible variation will be as specified weather and inhibit premature curing of the mix by aeration.
under SS 507.02(a). The tarpaulin shall be double quilted canvas or other
507.05 Mixing Requirements approved material treated to prevent absorption of the
asphalt.
(a) Mixing operations shall be performed in a mixing plant
capable of producing the asphalt mix within the 507.07 Stockpiling
required specifications. (a) The exact location of the stockpile site will be
(b) The maximum moisture content of the aggregate determined by the Ministry. The Contractor shall place
immediately prior to mixing with a liquid asphalt (MC the cold mix within the boundaries of the designated
or SC) shall not be over 2% by mass of dry aggregate. stockpile site.

(c) Temperatures of the mix shall be generally in (b) The Contractor shall prepare the stockpile site, which
accordance with the limits specified in Table 507-C. shall be shaped to a uniform smooth surface and graded
Mix temperatures may be lowered to reduce the to ensure good drainage.
emission of "blue smoke" from the discharge chute. (c) Temporary stockpiling of the mix on the ground or in
(d) The asphalt content in the mix shall not vary from the storage bins will be allowed, however, the Contractor
design asphalt content by more than 0.3 by mass of total will be required to minimize the handling of the mix to
aggregate. prevent premature curing of the mix.

(e) The asphalt mix shall not contain more than 1% (d) If conveyor belts are used for temporary stockpiling or
moisture by mass at the discharge from the plant. final stockpile construction, the free fall distance from
the conveyor belt to the stockpile shall not exceed 2 m.
(f) The asphalt mix shall be uniform in appearance with all
particles thoroughly coated. The mixing time will be (e) If the stockpile is constructed using a front end loader
increased if the mix is not completely coated with or end dumping by truck, the mix shall be deposited in
asphalt. layers of approximately 1 m in depth.

(g) The Ministry reserves the right to increase the asphalt (f) Plank or protected runways shall be provided for
content in the mix. The Contractor shall be operating equipment on stockpiles, when the Ministry
compensated for the additional quantity of Liquid Representative deems them necessary, to prevent

BC MoTI SS 2020 507 (2 of 3)

Vol. 1 Page 370 of 470
SECTION 507 PRODUCTION AND STOCKPILING OF ASPHALT MIX

contaminants being tracked onto the stockpile and to 507.08 Measurement – The asphalt mix will be measured
minimize consolidation of the mix. in TONNES and the asphalt material(s) in LITRES,
corrected to 15°C.
(g) The final stockpile shall be constructed in such a
manner that height is not more than 4 m. 507.09 Payment – Payment for ASPHALT MIX in
stockpile will be at the contract Unit Price per tonne.
(h) Mixing, hauling or stockpiling will not be permitted
during periods of precipitation. The unit price will be full compensation for preparing the
stockpile site; supplying and heating the aggregate;
supplying, heating and storing the asphalt material; mixing,
hauling and stockpiling the mix.

BC MoTI SS 2020 507 (3 of 3)

Vol. 1 Page 371 of 470
 SECTION 508

GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

GENERAL Asphalt(s) to be used on surface seals may be standard rapid

curing cutback asphalt; medium curing cutback asphalts; or
508.01 Preliminary and General – This section describes
anionic or cationic emulsions including high float
the materials, equipment, professional standards and the end
emulsified asphalts. Types and grades of asphalt binder
product requirements for the construction of graded
proposed for use on the Project will be specified in the
aggregate seal coats. This section shall be read and
Special Provisions.
construed together with all applicable Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction. Should this The Ministry Representative may require the use of
Section conflict with any other Section, this Section shall anti-stripping additives or any other materials formulated to
take precedence unless otherwise stated in the Special improve the coating and adhesive properties of the asphalt
Provisions. binder to the cover aggregate. Instructions concerning the
type of additive to be supplied and the method of
508.02 General Description of Work – Surface seals shall
incorporation with the asphalt binder will be specified in the
consist of the application of a selected asphalt emulsion and
Special Provisions.
embedment of the selected aggregate to provide a new,
uniformly textured surface. This surface shall be 508.12 Aggregates
impervious to moisture, be skid-resistant and have good
508.12.01 Mineral Aggregate Supply – The Contractor
riding qualities.
shall supply mineral cover aggregate meeting the
508.03 Classes of Graded Aggregate Seals – There are six requirements described hereunder unless specifically
classes of Graded Aggregate Seal, including but are not described otherwise in the Special Provisions.
limited to graded aggregate seals, a coarse or fine sand seal
The Ministry may supply the aggregates. If the Ministry
or any other graded aggregate surface treatment outlined in
does supply aggregates, then the Ministry will supply
the Special Provisions.
quality control information, if available, to the Contractor.
The Classes and their common applications are: The Contractor must verify and be satisfied that the Ministry
supplied aggregates will meet the quantity and quality
• Class A – Double seals on gravel highways requirements prior to submitting a bid.
• Class B – Double seals on gravel highways, and single 508.12.02 Mineral Aggregate: Test Methods – Mineral
seals low traffic paved roads Aggregate will be sampled and tested in accordance with
• Class C and Mod C – Major Highways the standard ASTM procedures and tests listed in
Table 508-A.
• Class D – Major Highways
508.12.03 Test Requirements – Mineral cover aggregate
• Class E – Residential areas and second seals shall consist of clean, sound, hard, durable particles or
508.04 Definitions fragments of sand, gravel or crushed stones or combination
thereof, containing a minimum of thin elongated or flaky
(a) Coarse Aggregate – Coarse aggregate is defined as all pieces. It shall be substantially free from loosely bonded
material retained on or above the 4.75 mm sieve. aggregations, clay lumps or other objectionable matter and
shall not be markedly hydrophilic in character.
(b) Fine Aggregate – Fine aggregate is defined as all
materials passing the 4.75 mm sieve. The mineral cover aggregate, when tested by the methods
listed in Table 508-A, shall meet the following criteria:
(c) Mineral Filler and Mineral Dust – Mineral filler shall
consist of all mineral matter passing the 0.600 mm (a) Clay Lumps – Coarse aggregate shall not contain more
sieve and the mineral dust shall consist of all mineral than 0.5% by mass of clay lumps or other aggregation
matter passing the 0.075 mm sieve. of fine material.
(d) Blinding Sand – Fine aggregate used as large (b) Micro-Deval – No individual test shall have a loss
aggregate support. factor of more than 20%.
(c) Flat and Elongated Particles – The percent flat and or
elongated particles must be less than 10% using 4:1
MATERIALS
ratio.
508.11 Asphalt Materials – The Contractor shall supply
(d) Fracture – Contrary to ASTM D5821, only those
the asphalt emulsion as specified in the Special Provisions,
particles retained on or above the 4.75 mm sieve with
which shall meet the requirements of SS 952.

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (1 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 372 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

two or more fractured faces shall be measured. The (b) Variation Limits – For all Classes of seal except
minimum % by mass, for coarse aggregate shall be as Class E, once the grading curve is established within
follows: the above limits, the maximum permissible variation of
the mean of any four consecutive tests from the grading
• Classes A & B = 75%
curve shall be within the tolerances specified in
• Classes C, Mod C, & D = 85% Table 508-C.
• Class E = not applicable These tolerances do not waive the requirement that the
running average of four consecutive tests must be
maintained at all times inside the limits specified in
Table 508-A: Test Methods for Mineral Aggregate Table 508-B. Should the Contractor not be able to
maintain the grading within the variation limits
ASTM Test Name of Test
specified above they shall be required to construct a
Standard Test Method for Materials second stockpile. This does not alleviate the Contractor
Finer than 75-μm (No. 200) Sieve in from consistently maintaining the grading curve within
C117 the tolerances indicated in the gradation curves.
Mineral Aggregates by WashingWash
Test of Aggregates.
Bulk Relative Density and Absorption of Table 508-B: Gradation Limits for Graded Aggregate
C127
Coarse Aggregates Seal

Bulk Relative Density and Absorption of Sieve

C128 % Passing by Mass by Class
Fine Aggregates size

Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis (mm) A B C Mod C D E

C136 of Fine and Coarse AggregatesSieve 19 100 - - - - -
Analysis of Aggregates.
16 - 100 100 100 - -
Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps
C142 12.5 1
60-90 60-90 - - 100 -
and Friable Particles in Aggregates.
9.5 40-80 35-75 30-70 25 -55 30-80 100
Moisture Content of Aggregate by
C566 4.75 20-60 15-50 25-45 7 – 30 25-45 0-30
Drying
0.600 0-25 0-15 5-20 0 -10 5-20 0-10
Standard Practice for Sampling
D75 0.075 0-7 0-5 0-3 0–3 0-3 0-3
Aggregates.
Ratio 2
D4318 Liquid Plastic Limit Determination - - - 1 – 1.5 - -
(9.5/4.75)

Standard Test Method for Flat Particles, Notes:

Elongated Particles, or Flat and 1
The Contractor may use either the 12.5 mm or the
D4791
Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate 13.2 mm sieve, at the Contractor’s option.
Flat and Elongated Particles.
2
The “Ratio” is the ratio of the mass of material retained
Standard Test Method for Determining on the 9.5 mm sieve, divided by the mass of material
the Percentage of Fractured Particles in retained on the 4.75 mm sieve.
D5821
Coarse AggregateFracture Count on
Coarse Aggregate.
Table 508-C: Variation Limits
Standard Test Method for Resistance of
Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by Maximum Permissible
D6928 Sieve Size (mm)
Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Tolerance % Passing by Mass
ApparatusMicro-Deval.
4.75 to 19.0  5.0

508.12.04 Graded Aggregate Seal 0.600  3.5

(a) Aggregate Gradation – Gradations shall meet the 0.075  1.0

requirements stated in Table 508-B for each Class of
graded aggregate seal.

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (2 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 373 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

508.12.05 Aggregate Characteristics use on the project. These samples shall be supplied at least
three (3) days prior to the commencement of the work.
(a) Coarse Aggregate – Coarse aggregate shall consist of
crushed stone or gravel, or a combination thereof; or
materials naturally occurring in a fractured condition;
EQUIPMENT
or materials naturally occurring of highly angular
nature or rough texture. 508.20 General – The Contractor shall supply plant and
equipment necessary for the proper and efficient completion
(b) Fine Aggregate – Fine aggregate shall be clean, hard,
of the work, including clear and effective means of
durable, moderately sharp, and free from coatings of
calibration.
clay, silt or other deleterious material and shall contain
no clay balls or other aggregations of fine material. All 508.20.01 Access – The Ministry Representative shall have
aggregate passing the 4.75 mm sieve shall be access at all times to any plant, equipment or machinery to
non-plastic when tested in accordance with ASTM be used on the Project.
D4318.
508.20.02 Adjustment – If plant or equipment adjustment
(c) Mineral Filler and Mineral Dust – Mineral filler and is necessary, it shall be done by a competent operator or
mineral dust shall be free from organic matter. Mineral mechanic or instrument repair technician, as required.
filler shall be non-plastic.
508.21 Equipment Characteristics – The following
508.12.06 Blinding Sand – The Contractor shall be SS 508.21 provisions are the Ministry’s preferred
responsible for the supply of blinding material meeting the equipment characteristics but are not mandatory.
requirements of Table 508-D. That portion of blinding sand
508.21.01 Pressure Distributor – The pressure distributor
aggregate passing the 4.75 mm sieve shall be non-plastic
used for applying asphalt materials is to consist of a fully
when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318.
insulated tank with a minimum capacity of 5000 L,
permanently and rigidly mounted on a truck or fifth wheel
Table 508-D: Gradation for Blinding Sand
trailer provided with pneumatic tires and propelled by a
Sieve Size (mm) Percentage Passing power unit capable of maintaining a constant and uniform
speed.
4.75 100
The pressure distributor should be provided with the
2.36 50 – 100 following equipment:
1.18 30 – 80 (a) A quick opening gate in the dome.
0.300 10 – 55 (b) A dipstick calibrated in 20 mm increments and a
0.150 3 – 20 calibration chart showing the volume for each 20 mm
of depth or provided the manufacturer dipstick and
0.075 0–3 chart. Readily visible external depth gauge indicating
the quantity of asphalt in the tank to the nearest 50 L.
508.13 Graded Aggregate Seal Design – The contractor (c) A means of heating the asphalt material uniformly to
shall provide a graded aggregate seal coat design, any temperature up to 125°C and maintaining the
professionally prepared by qualified and experienced contents constantly at any selected temperature without
personnel. For this purpose, the Contractor shall use a any local overheating.
qualified registered member of the Association of
(d) A heavy duty, industrial-type thermometer and a
Professional Engineers and Geoscientists of British
remote reading dial thermometer.
Columbia or a qualified registered member of the Applied
Science Technologists and Technicians of British (e) Rear-mounted spray bars and nozzles set parallel to the
Columbia. surface to be sprayed and capable of vertical and lateral
adjustment. The spray bars to be capable of adjustment
This design shall include application rate of the asphalt
to provide a uniformly sprayed surface from a
emulsion, in litres per square metre, spray temperature and
minimum of 0.6 m to at least 4 m width.
the aggregate spread rate in kilograms per square metre.
The design shall be presented to the Ministry Representative (f) The spray bars to be capable of producing up to triple
for review, at least three (3) days prior to the coverage at one pass. The feed to the spray bars must
commencement of work and at any time subsequent be arranged so that there is a constant circulation of hot
changes are made to these rates. asphalt material to the bars to ensure a uniform
viscosity and constant pressure of the liquid asphalt at
The Contractor shall submit to the Ministry Representative
each nozzle both before and during spraying
four litres of a representative sample of the emulsion(s) and
operations.
a twenty-kilogram sample of the aggregate(s) intended for

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (3 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 374 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

(g) The feed manifolds to the spray bars are to be provided sharply defined, straight edges and without any lateral
with positive filtration to prevent clogging of bars and movement of the aggregate after initial application.
nozzles.
The spreader is to be designed to apply aggregate at any
(h) Rotary adjustable spray bar nozzles to be of the same application width between 2 m and 4.12 m. A 4.26 m
type, correct size and manufacture; and set to produce hopper is required.
uniformly fan-shaped sprays without atomization.
508.21.03 Rollers – Self-propelled pneumatic tired rollers
Nozzles to be inspected daily and any nozzle having
(minimum mass of 11,000 kg) to be used on the work.
nicked, or damaged edges should be replaced.
All rollers shall be provided with equipment for spraying
(i) Spray nozzles to be provided with valves capable of
water continuously on all tires or wheels, while rolling is in
instant full opening and positive cut-off.
progress, and be provided with such means as may be
(j) A connection to a circulating pressure manifold to required to keep the tires clean and free of adhering
which a hose may be attached for a single nozzle asphaltic binder.
hand-operated outlet.
508.21.04 Power Brooms – Brooming work to be carried
(k) A pressure pump capable of applying the asphalt out using rotary power brooms. The brooms are to have
material at a minimum rate of 180 L per minute, per sufficient width, power and brushing capacity to completely
metre of spray bar. clean the surface of the standard lane to be treated or which
has been treated within three coverages.
(l) A pressure gauge accurate to within 15 kPa and a metre
calibrated in litres per minute should be readily visible. 508.21.05 Water Truck – Water trucks to have a minimum
capacity of 9000 L. Water to be applied from a distributor
(m) A fifth-wheel tachometer, calibrated in metres per
of the pressure type, equipped with spray bar mounting
minute and readily visible to the operator of the
nozzles similar to those used on asphalt distributors and
distributor.
capable of applying the water accurately and uniformly.
(n) Vehicle spring "tie-downs" to prevent the change in
Splash plate type of distributors or those equipped with
height of the spray bars due to the reduction of the
spray bars that eject fine streams of water will not be
asphalt load during spraying.
permitted.
(o) Electronic distance measuring device, with print out
The distributor to be provided with a satisfactory means for
connected to the transmission, that is capable of
accurately measuring the quantity of water sprayed.
measuring each spray length and the total length
Measuring equipment is to be calibrated. The Contractor
sprayed during the day.
shall make all necessary arrangements for obtaining water.
508.21.02 Mechanical Spreader – Cover aggregate to be
508.21.06 Tanks, Mobile Asphalt Heating, & Storage –
spread by means of an efficient, self-propelled spreader
Insulated liquid asphalt storage tanks should meet the
mounted on pneumatic tires and capable of continuously
following minimum criteria:
and uniformly spreading closely regulated quantities of
crushed aggregates at the application rates selected. The (a) A heating system, capable to heat from 10°C to 200°C.
loading hopper should be of such a capacity as to ensure
(b) An automated heating and control system with safety
continuous operation between dumps of aggregate.
shutdown.
Aggregate to be transferred from the loading hopper to the
front spreading device in such a manner as to ensure a
uniform flow and prevent segregation of particles.
CONSTRUCTION
The spreading mechanism to be so designed as to distribute
and spread aggregate across the selected width without 508.31 Daylight Hours Only – Construction shall be
segregation. Aggregate to be applied to the freshly sprayed carried out during daylight hours only.
surface by use of a comb screen for Class A and B Graded 508.32 Traffic Control and Signing – The Contractor shall
Aggregate Seals so that the largest particles are first placed submit, for the approval of the Ministry Representative, a
on the road with the smaller fractions falling on top. The Traffic Control Plan at least seven days prior to the pre-
comb screen is to be mounted beneath the discharge construction meeting.
openings of the spreader mechanism in such a manner that
the angle of the comb screen relative to the road surface can Traffic Control on Seal Coat projects shall be in accordance
be easily and quickly changed. Reverse flow aggregate with SS 194 as well as the Ministry’s publication “Traffic
spreaders are exempt from this clause. Control Manual for Work on Roadways”.

Suitable provision to be made to prevent aggregate from The Traffic Control shall be maintained at all times when in
rolling on the freshly sprayed surface. The cover aggregate the opinion of the Ministry Representative, the risk of
should be applied ahead of the spreader wheels, with damage to the mat is likely to become a safety issue or to

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (4 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 375 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

result in unnecessary vehicular damage from loosened rock. on all surface treated and paved surfaces to the
Additional traffic control to protect the quality of the satisfaction of the Ministry Representative. The
product is also the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor will provide a minimum of 72 hours’ notice
of when the removal of loose aggregate will be
Traffic through the work zone shall be limited to 50 km per
complete and ready for inspection. The Ministry
hour, or as directed by the District Manager Transportation,
Representative will provide written acceptance that the
until completion of final sweeping.
removal of loose aggregate from all surface treated and
Extending traffic control beyond the end of the shift, in paved areas has been satisfactorily been completed.
order to maintain safety and reduce vehicular damage risks,
508.38 Repair – Any patching or repair work required, in
will not preclude the Contractor from providing and
the opinion of the Ministry Representative, before sealing
applying blinding material to reduce these risks.
operations begin, may be done by the Contractor as directed
The Contractor shall continue to maintain flag-person by the Ministry Representative and paid for under Extra
assisted traffic control over the extent of the day’s Work.
production, for a minimum of 24 hours for work on
508.39 Double Seal, Second Pass – Where the design calls
numbered routes, 2 hours on other routes, or as specified in
for a double seal, the second pass of the surface treatment
the Special Provisions.
shall commence not less than 24 hours after completion of
508.33 Temperature and Weather – Air temperature shall the first pass, subject to acceptable weather conditions as
be a minimum of 6°C for application of graded aggregate detailed in SS 508.33, and as the Ministry Representative
seals, and application shall cease when the temperature falls may direct.
below that level.
No application shall take place when the weather is misty or
QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
rainy.
508.41 Quality Control by the Contractor – The
508.34 Grade Preparation – Immediately prior to the
Contractor shall be responsible for providing all resources
application of the graded aggregate seal coat on a previously
required to carry out the quality control on all the constituent
constructed granular surface, the surface shall be watered,
materials, processes and products, their testing and
graded and compacted and/or broomed to provide a non-
inspection, within the construction of the seal coat and the
segregated, tightly knit surface free from loose rock. Cross-
quality of the end product (See SS 508 Appendix E –
fall will be at 3% or as directed by the Ministry
Quality Control Requirements and Guidelines).
Representative and super-elevations developed uniformly
and carried consistently through each curve. 508.41.01 Quality Control Plan – The Contractor shall
prepare and submit a Quality Control Plan, in accordance
508.35 Joints – All joints between adjacent passes of seal
with the Contract requirements, at least 7 days prior to the
shall be at centreline or lane lines.
pre-construction meeting.
508.36 Communications – The flag people, pilot car or
508.41.02 Sampling, Testing and Observing – The
cars, sign truck, spreader and supervisor's vehicle shall have
contractor shall provide properly maintained equipment,
an effective electronic means of communication to relay
qualified personnel and shall maintain access to a qualified
instructions and information accurately and quickly over the
laboratory so that quality control tests and observations are
total length of the control area.
performed and the results must be reported to the Ministry
508.37 Sweeping – Sweeping shall meet the requirements Representative within 48 hours. For asphalt emulsions, the
of SS 145, SS 165 and the following: test results must be received within 21 days of sampling.
(a) Immediately prior to the commencement of the sealing The Contractor’s Quality Control Plan shall provide details
operations, all loose aggregates, dust, dirt, caked clay of the equipment provided, its calibration, and application
or foreign materials shall be removed from the width of methodology to meet the Contract requirements.
the surface to be treated by brushing with power
508.42 Quality and Quantity Control Records
brooms supplemented by hand push brooms, shovels or
the use of a power grader, and where necessary by 508.42.01 Emulsion Quality – For each batch of emulsion
flushing. supplied to the job Site, the Contractor shall obtain from the
supplier certified results for each test specified in
(b) Particular care shall be taken to thoroughly clean to
Table 508-E (Appendix 508-A), and provide those results to
outside edges of the strips to be treated and to ensure
the Ministry Representative prior to incorporating the
that the sweepings are not so deposited on the shoulder
emulsion into the Work.
as to permit subsequent contamination of the treated
surface. When certified batch results are not yet available, the
Contractor may elect, at its own risk, to use the uncertified
(c) Following completion of sealing operations. the
material. If the material is subsequently determined to be
Contractor shall remove all loose aggregate remaining

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (5 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 376 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

non-compliant with the specifications or certified batch graded aggregate seal aggregate used on the project, and the
results are not provided, remediation of any Work using volume of unused emulsion remaining in the tank(s).
such material will be to the Contractor’s account.
508.42.02 Aggregate Quality– The Contractor shall assess
END PRODUCT ASSESSMENT
the supplied aggregate to determine and ensure the quantity
and quality for the intended application. Any modifications 508.51 General – The Contractor shall provide a product
deemed necessary to ensure a quality product shall be made conforming in accuracy and detail as specified by the
at the Contractor’s expense. contract. Payment is based on end product assessment by
the Ministry Representative.
508.42.03 Emulsion Usage – Daily emulsion usage shall be
made available to the Ministry Representative on the Form 508.52 Surface Deficiency Definitions – See
“Emulsion Usage” (Appendix 508-C). Information shall be Appendix 508-F for examples of surface conditions, photos
made available to the Ministry Representative within 48 and details of the conditions listed below.
hours and prior to demobilization of the storage tanks and
508.52.01 Blackening – Blackening is the emergence of
pressure distributor from the Site.
excess asphalt onto the finished surface whereby the
Emulsion usage will be reconciled against initial tank finished surface becomes discoloured, but the coarse
volume, delivery records and remaining volume prior to the surface texture remains. Under this condition, the effective
Contractor demobilizing from the Site. cover stone can still be seen to protrude above the level of
the asphalt binder’s upward migration
508.42.04 Aggregate Usage – The Contractor shall monitor
the aggregate spread rate on a production day basis and 508.52.03 Flushing and Bleeding – Flushing and bleeding
make the results available, in an acceptable format, to the is the emergence of excess asphalt and fines onto the
Ministry Representative within 48 hours. finished surface and the significant loss of coarse surface
texture, leaving little or no effective cover aggregate visible.
508.42.05 Daily Activity Log – The Contractors'
Superintendent or designate shall complete and make 508.52.04 Pock Marks – Pock Marks are indentations in
available to the Ministry Representative the “Daily Activity the mat texture, normally less than the thickness of the
Log” (Appendix 508-D) within 48 hours. This form shall graded seal layer, evidenced by the absence of effective
be completed and submitted for all calendar days from the cover aggregate in a small area (No photograph available).
first day of mobilization to the last day of demobilization,
508.52.05 Pot Holes – Pot Holes are the loss of all cover
for any day on which work was performed on-site.
aggregate and base material(s) into the underlying asphalt
508.42.06 Emulsion Sampling or gravel base. Pot Holes may develop because of seal
and/or base weakness.
(a) The Contractor shall, procure and store a four litre
sample of the emulsion from each tanker for use by the 508.52.06 Raveling – Raveling is a general term for loss of
Ministry and/or Contractor. cover aggregate, which can include numerous pock marks.
(b) These samples shall be obtained, handled and stored in 508.52.07 Streaking – Streaking is a continuous visible
accordance with ASTM D140 and also with the absence of effective cover aggregate often seen paralleling
manufacturer’s recommendations. a ‘ridge’ of excess cover aggregate, characterized by the
narrowness of its width and the significant extent of its
(c) The samples shall be identified and retained by the
length. Where streaking displays an absence of effective
Contractor until demobilization at which time
cover aggregate, the condition is unlike raveling in that
permission may be granted by the Ministry
there was originally little or no effective aggregate in the
Representative to discard the samples in an
area.
environmentally friendly manner.
508.52.08 Washboard – Washboard is a condition of non-
(d) The Ministry Representative may provide the
uniform surface texture caused by the buildup of transverse
Contractor with a copy of the test results from the
ridges within the graded seal layer itself, and characterized
Ministry’s Quality Management program. The
by a very rough, vibratory or chattering ride (No photograph
Contractor shall not utilize these tests in place of their
available).
own Quality Control Program.
508.53 End Product Evaluation
(e) The absence of Ministry test results shall not relieve the
Contractor’s obligation to remedy any defect in 508.53.01 Lot Definition – A Lot shall be one lane
materials or construction. kilometre of highway sealed. Sections of any road/highway
remaining which are less than one-half (0.5) kilometres in
508.42.07 Final Quantity Report – The Contractor shall
length, will be included in the previous Lot. Sections
supply to the Ministry Representative, prior to final
remaining which are 0.5 kilometres or greater, but less than
acceptance of the work, the total amount of emulsion and

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (6 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 377 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

one kilometre will receive a Lot designation unique for the No extra payment will be made for any additional
road/highway. equipment, tools or labour employed to satisfy special
brooming requirements.
508.53.02 Rating Time Criteria – The Ministry
Representative will rate each Lot, within thirty (30) days of 508.62 Asphalt Emulsion – Asphalt emulsion will be
final brooming. measured and paid in litres of emulsion actually sprayed on
the road, including supply, storage, heating and handling.
508.53.03 Performance Rating Criteria – Performance
rating will be in accordance with Appendix 508-F, 508.63 Aggregates – Aggregates will be measured by the
Table 508-G, Table 508-H, and the photographs. cubic metre in stockpile. The volume will be determined by
surveying and surface-to-surface volume calculations.
508.54 Deficiency Repair and Replacement – Any Lot of
Measurement shall be performed by the Contractor at the
sealed surface that is found unacceptable shall be remedied
Contractor’s expense using an independent surveying
in accordance with Table 508-G (Appendix 508-F ), until
company. Survey results must be verified and signed off by
the whole project has been repaired or replaced as necessary
the independent surveying company and survey results must
and accepted by the Ministry Representative.
be supplied to the Ministry.
On double seal applications both the lower and upper lifts
Payment for aggregates will be at the Contract Unit Price
must be free of deficiencies prior to being accepted.
per cubic metre in stockpile. Payment for aggregate will be
The sealing Contractor will not be responsible for only up to 100% of the Approximate Quantity as stated in
deficiencies attributed to base, base failures and base work Schedule 7.
done by others. These may be repaired under a Provisional
No payment will be made for the supplying, hauling and
Sum Item provided for that purpose, or as ordered by the
placing of blinding sand.
Ministry Representative.
The supply of extra aggregate, required to repair or overlay
For any defects being repaired through re-seal, the repair
Unacceptable Work, will be the Contractor’s responsibility.
must cover the entire width of the highway (or to a
Where sufficient aggregate quantities are remaining in
centerline barrier), unless the Contractor can demonstrate
stockpile, the Ministry will make these available at no cost
that a compliant repair can be achieved at a narrower width
to the Contractor.
without any longitudinal ridging which may adversely
affect driver control or trap water adjacent to the edge of the 508.64 Stockpile Bases – The stockpile base must be
repair. prepared prior to surveying and stockpiling. No payment
will be made for stockpile base preparation work and no
508.55 Attention to Potential Safety Hazards – If, in the
payment will be made for materials required for the
opinion of the Ministry Representative, remedial Work is
preparation of stockpile bases.
required to correct a potential safety hazard it shall be
undertaken immediately. 509.65 Claims for Vehicular Damage – Without in any
way limiting the Contractor’s obligations or liabilities
herein, during construction and up until final acceptance of
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT the whole project by the Ministry Representative, the
Contractor shall be fully responsible for all claims for
508.61 Surface Seals – Surface Seal will be measured and
damages caused by the work and shall address and deal with
paid by the square metre.
each claim submitted.
Payment in a double pass application will be for final top
508.66 Partial Payment for Rejected Work – In the
lift surface area only.
Ministry Representative’s sole discretion and without
Payment will be full compensation for pre-cleaning the setting precedence, where any work is reject but the
surface; loading, hauling, placing the asphalt emulsion and Ministry Representative determines that it may be left in
aggregate; compaction; brooming the finished surface; place, the Ministry Representative may authorize partial
quality control and traffic control. payment to the Contractor as full compensation for any
residual value the work may have. Notwithstanding the
No extra payment will be made for any additional foregoing, the Ministry is under no obligation to make any
equipment, tools, labour or material used to replace, repair payment for reject work.
or overlay Unacceptable Work.

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (7 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 378 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

APPENDIX 508-A
QUALITY CONTROL TESTS FOR HIGH FLOAT EMULSIONS

Quality Control Tests, to be obtained by the Contractor from the Supplier, for High Float Emulsified Asphalts.

Table 508-E: Quality Control Tests for High Float Emulsified Asphalts

Designation ASTM Test Title

D5
Standard Test Method for Penetration of Bituminous Materials
(CAN2-16.5-M84)
D88 Standard Test Method for Saybolt Viscosity
Standard Test Method for Ductility of Asphalt Materials [Ductility Test for Polymer Modified
D113
Emulsions]
D139
Standard Test Method for Float Test for Bituminous Materials
(CAN2-16.5-M84)
D140 Standard Practice for Sampling Asphalt Materials
D244
Standard Test Methods and Practices for Emulsified Asphalts [Residue by Distillation]
(CAN2-16.5-M84)
D4957 Standard Test Method for Apparent Viscosity of Asphalt Emulsion Residues and Non-Newtonian
(CAN2-16.5-M84) Asphalts by Vacuum Capillary Viscometer [Absolute Viscosity of Asphalts]

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (8 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 379 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

APPENDIX 508-B
HIGH FLOAT EMULSIFIED ASPHALT REPORT (H-539)

Project No: Refinery: _______________________

Contract: Asphalt Grade: __________________

Location: Batch No: _______________________

Sampling Date: Testing Date: ____________________

Specifications
Requirements Results
Maximum Minimum

Residue by Distillation, % by
mass

Oil Distillation, % by volume

Saybolt Furol Viscosity (SFS),

50C

Penetration, 5 s/100 g/25C

Viscosity, mK or CM (Pa•s), at
60C

Ductility, at 4°C

Float Test (s), at 60C

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (9 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 380 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

APPENDIX 508-C
EMULSION USAGE REPORT

Project No.: Product:

Date: Supplier:
Contractor: Supplier Lading No.

EMULSION SPRAY COVERAGE APPL.

Emulsion QUANTITIES (litres) (m or m2) LOCATION†
RATE
Temp. (Sta. to Sta. or LKI,
Start Finish Used Width Length Area (L/m2)
(°C) and lane being sealed)
[A] [B] [L=A-B] [D] [E] [F=DxE] [L/F]

TOTALS: = Sums for “Used” and “Area”

AVERAGE: = Total Used / Total Area

The Undersigned certifies that the quantities placed are as indicated in the information above.

Name (Contractor Operator): Date:

Checked by (Ministry Representative): Date:

† Example location description: Sta. 3+500 to 5+100, WBSL (where WBSL = Westbound slow lane)

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (10 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 381 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

APPENDIX 508-D
DAILY ACTIVITY LOG

Location:
Emulsion Supplier:
Emulsion Product:
Contractor: Aggregate Source:
Superintendent: Aggregate Class:
(Note: Enter all time in a 24 hour clock format, e.g 3:00 PM →15:00)

Equipment Aggregate Haul: Startup Shutdown

Type Unit # Make Year # of Haul Units:
Total Loads Today:

Weather Startup Shutdown

Air Temp:
Road Surface Temp:

Traffic Control Startup Shutdown

Shift 1 (Morning) Time:
# of Pilot Vehicles:
# of TCP's:

Shift 2 (Afternoon) Time:

# of Pilot Vehicles:
# of TCP's:

Production Shift 3 (Night) Time:

Start up Time: Total m2 # of Pilot Vehicles:
Shutdown Time: # of TCP's:

Emulsion: Load # Time In: Litres Invoice # Notes

Total Litres In: Litres at Shutdown:

Delays: Time
From: To: Cause

Notes

Contractor Representative Signature:

Quality Control Manager Signature:

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (11 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 382 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

APPENDIX 508-E
QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES

1.01 GENERAL 1.03 CONTRACTOR’S RECORD OF QUALITY

CONTROL TESTING
The Contractor’s guidelines for preparing, submitting and
adhering to a Quality Control Plan are specified in SS 101, Test results should be made on specified forms or charts
SS 508, the Special Provisions and this Appendix 508-E. immediately after completion of each test. These test results
are to be made available to the Ministry Representative
The QC Manager shall have at a minimum 5 years related
upon request.
experience in Quality Management.
Records of gradation control during aggregate production
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
should be kept on the form H-295 – Mechanical Analysis of
The Plan shall address all elements that affect the quality of Aggregates (available from the Ministry Representative) or
the materials, end product seal coat, including but not on a similar gradation analysis form acceptable to the
limited to the following: Ministry Representative.
• Supply of Asphalt Materials 1.04 MATERIAL APPLICATION RATE
• Identification of source and proof of quality of The Contractor shall control the Material Application Rate
aggregates to be supplied by monitoring the amount of emulsion and aggregate
delivered to the road against the area covered by checking
• Aggregates production and its gradation control the application rates of the distributors and spreader.
• Quality of aggregate components during 1.05 OTHER QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES
production
The Contractor may initiate other Quality Control
• Stockpile management procedures as necessary for ensuring production of a quality
product and include them in a Quality Control Plan.
• Sealcoat Design(s)
Procedures may also be introduced after the start of work as
• Distributor and spreader calibration amendments to the Quality Control Plan.
• Process temperature controls 1.06 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING FREQUENCY
• Material application rates Recommended test frequency requirements for Quality
Control are described in Table 508-F.
• Joints and tapers
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING
FREQUENCY
Quality Assurance Testing shall be approximately 10% of
that described for Quality Control and may vary in
accordance with the Quality Control Plan and the observed
effectiveness of Quality Control.

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (12 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 383 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

Table 508-F: Test Frequency Guidelines

Activity ASTM Test Designation *Minimum Frequency

D75, Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates.
Sampling Stone, slag, gravel, sand and stone block When Required
for use as Highway Materials
C117, Test for Materials Finer than 75 µm (No.200)
One (1) test (Representative Sample)
Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
Tests Before
Aggregate C142, Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable
One (1) test (Representative Sample)
Production Particles in Aggregates
D6928, Micro Deval One (1) test (Representative Sample)
D5821, Fracture Count on Coarse Aggregate One (1) test (Representative Sample)
D4791, Test Method for Flat Particles, or Flat and
One (1) test (Representative Sample)
Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate
C136, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Main Stockpile – One (1) per each 1.5 hours
Fine and Coarse Aggregates production.
Tests During
D5821, Determining the Percentage of Fractured Main Stockpile – One (1) per each 1.5 hours
Aggregate
Particles in Coarse Aggregate production.
Production
C117, Test for Materials Finer than 75 µm (No 200) One (1) per shift on reduced sample obtained
Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing from combined samples from the crusher.
D244, Residue by Distillation Minimum one (1) per batch
D244, Saybolt Furol Viscosity Minimum one (1) per batch
Tests on D5, Penetration of Bituminous Materials Minimum one (1) per batch
Emulsified
Asphalt D139, Float Test Minimum one (1) per batch
Products D4957, Apparent Viscosity on Residue Minimum one (1) per batch
Minimum one (1) per batch on polymer
D113, Ductility
modified emulsions.
Three (3) per distributor/day. Test
procedure, variation limits and actions
Emulsion Pan Test
Tests on should be outlined in Contractor’s Quality
Application of Control Plan.
Sealcoat Two (2) per spreader/day. Test procedure,
Materials variation limits and actions should be
Aggregate Pan Test
outlined in Contractor’s Quality Control
Plan.
* These are the recommended minimum frequencies and the Contractor is responsible to assess the need to increase testing when required.

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (13 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 384 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

APPENDIX 508-F
SURFACE DEFECTS

Table 508-G: Surface Defect and Treatment Repair / Replacement Criteria

Surface
Severity Rating Parameters Repair/Replacement Method
Defects
Very good No noticeable aggregate loss None
Good A few pock marks, less than 5 per 0.1 m 2
None
Loss of
cover Frequent pock marks closely spaced, more
Fair Reseal of affected area***
aggregate than 5 per 0.1 m2

(Raveling) Extensive pock marks or few surface

Poor Reseal of affected area***
disintegrations
Very poor Disintegration with potholes Reseal of affected area***
Few minor potholes, only involves graded All potholes to be filled with asphaltic
Very good
aggregate seal patching material at contractor's expense
All potholes to be filled with asphaltic
Good Few deep potholes, involves granular base
patching material. (see SS 508.54)

Potholes Patch potholes and reseal affected area***

Fair Intermittent potholes
(see SS 508.54)

Poor Frequent potholes Patch potholes and reseal affected area***

(see SS 508.54)
Patch potholes and reseal affected area***
Very poor Extensive or potholes throughout
(see SS 508.54)
Very good No/very faint colour change in wheel path None
Good Few sections with asphalt on surface None
Fair Intermittent sections with asphalt on surface Application of sand blotter
Flushing /
bleeding Frequent sections with asphalt on surface, Reseal of affected area. Removal of initial
Poor
has wet look or asphalt on surface throughout surface treatment at Contractor’s option***
Reseal of affected area. Removal of initial
Very poor Wet look with noise like a wet pavement
surface treatment at Contractor’s option***
Any condition where the asphalt material
Remove and dispose of failed surface
softens or disintegrates under traffic and
Total failure Any treatment in its entirety and apply new
aggregate is picked up or “kicked off” by
surface treatment
traffic
Streaking Absence of cover aggregate caused by too
(see Any little binder – characterized by long, narrow Reseal of affected area
raveling) sections of little or no stone cover
Any condition of repetitive build-up across
Washboard Any Remove and reseal affected area
the travel lane
NOTE: *** Reseal for these defects shall consist of a new graded aggregate surface treatment, single pass application. Area of the reseal repair/replacement
shall not be less than one lane width, 10 metres in length. If there is less than 10 metres between two sections in the application pass designated for
repair/replacement, the repair/replacement shall be continuous.

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (14 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 385 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

Table 508-H: Surface Defects Frequency Definitions

Density of Surface Defects**

Raveling Potholes Flushing/Bleeding
Severity
(% Length) (Number) (% Length)
Very Good <5% 0–1 <5%
Good 5% – 20% 2 – 15 5% – 20%
Fair 21% – 50% 16 – 30 21% – 50%
Poor 51% – 80% 31 – 50 51% – 80%
Very Poor >80% >50 >80%
Note:** Based on number of surface defects or percent of surface affected by defect, per Lot as defined in SS 508.53.01.

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (15 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 386 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

Blackening

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (16 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 387 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

Flushing or Bleeding

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (17 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 388 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

Pot Hole

Streaking

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (18 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 389 of 470
SECTION 508 GRADED AGGREGATE SEAL COAT (EPS)

Raveling or Stripping

BC MoTI SS 2020 508 (19 of 19)

Vol. 1 Page 390 of 470
 SECTION 511

COLD MILLING

DESCRIPTION At the end of the milling shift or at the end of each section
to be milled, prior to reopening the road to traffic, the
511.01 Scope – This work consists of preparing a pavement shall be cleaned and swept so that all loose
foundation for placement of new surfacing by cold milling material is removed. In addition, the transition from the
the existing pavement surface to the depth and width as milled surface to the existing paved surface shall be tapered
indicated on the Drawings. at a maximum slope of 50:1, or as directed by the Ministry
Representative. The Ministry Representative shall indicate
whether the taper is to be milled or a tar paper letdown shall
EQUIPMENT be constructed using asphalt mix.
511.21 Milling Machine – The milling machine shall be At the end of each shift, all travelled lanes shall be milled to
self-propelled and shall be equipped with automatic the same point to eliminate any uneven edge between lanes.
longitudinal and transverse grade control, which shall be Where median barrier is present, lanes in the same direction
used when directed by the Ministry Representative. A of travel shall be milled to the same point; lanes in the
profiling ski or boom of a recommended minimum 4 m opposing direction may be milled to a different point. When
length, approved by the Ministry Representative, shall be the milling operation traverses intersecting roads or on and
used. No substitute equipment will be permitted. The off ramps, the transition from the milled surface to the
cutting drum shall be a minimum of 1.8 m in width, totally existing pavement shall be at a maximum slope of 50:1 or
enclosed and with replaceable cutting teeth. There shall be as directed by the Ministry Representative. This transition
an effective means of removing the loosened material from can be done with the milling machine or by using tar paper
the surface and for preventing dust from escaping into the letdowns as approved by the Ministry Representative.
air.
If, due to delays between the milling and paving operations,
511.22 “Kill" Switch – All pavement milling machines the milled surface starts to pothole or deteriorate, repairs
shall be equipped with a "kill" switch installed or approved shall be carried out at once using asphalt mix.
by the manufacturer of the milling machine. This "kill"
switch shall be automatically actuated whenever the At those locations where milling is conducted, the
operation of the machine is so impeded that a hazardous Contractor shall cut drainage channels as required to
situation, such as "kick back", would result were that prevent water from collecting in the milled area.
operation to continue. When so actuated the "kill" switch If washouts occur at any time during the milling operations,
shall instantly shut down the operation of the milling they shall be immediately repaired by the Contractor, at the
machine. Contractor's own expense, with approved materials and as
511.23 Audible Back Up Warning Device – See directed by the Ministry Representative.
SS 145.30.04.
511.33 Disposal of Materials – The disposal of materials
removed under this section, which are not recycled and used
on the project, shall become the property of the Contractor
CONSTRUCTION at the point of removal, unless otherwise specified.
511.31 Running Surface for Lanes Open to Traffic – The Materials shall be disposed of outside the limits of the
Contractor shall ensure that a suitable running surface is project in a manner satisfactory to the Ministry
maintained on any portion of the highway that is open to Representative and shall meet all environmental
traffic during construction. requirements. The procurement of a disposal site, if
required, shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
At all times, during the milling operation, the traveled
roadway shall be kept clean of all loose materials. 511.34 Existing Structures – Care must be taken not to
disturb or damage any structures or devices such as
511.32 Pavement Removal – The existing pavement shall manholes, catch basins, valves, boxes and other utilities.
be removed to the depth and width as specified in the All metal and concrete faces must be cleaned of old
Special Provisions, on the drawings or as directed by the pavement.
Ministry Representative to provide a surface that is free of
longitudinal and transverse irregularities. Milling may be The Contractor shall repair, at its own expense, any damage
specified as a nominal uniform depth, or as variable depth to visible, referenced, or plan-indicated manholes, catch
profile milling to achieve design lines and grades. basins, valves, valve covers and concrete/asphalt curb, or
any other infrastructure.
The use of a heating device to soften the pavement will not
be permitted.

BC MoTI SS 2020 511 (1 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 391 of 470
SECTION 511 COLD MILLING

MEASUREMENT PAYMENT
511.81 General – Cold Milling will be measured by the 511.91 General – Payment for COLD MILLING will be at
SQUARE METRE or the TONNE as specified in the the Unit Price bid per square metre or tonne as specified in
Contract. The area quantities will be determined by the Contract. The unit price shall be for all things furnished
measurement of the actual surface area from which the and done including servicing all equipment, replacing teeth
materials have been removed and computed to the nearest on the cutting drum, and performing all work to remove the
square metres. Measurement of material by mass shall be existing pavement by milling, loading, hauling and placing
done in accordance with SS 145.18.04 and SS 145.19 the material in stockpile .
before moving to stockpile. 511.92 Asphalt Mix – Asphalt mix required to repair the
milled surface as set out in SS 511.32 shall be paid at the
Unit Price bid for top lift asphalt, except where, in the
opinion of the Ministry Representative, the milled surface
damage occurred during a delay that was the Contractor’s
responsibility, in which case there will be no payment.

BC MoTI SS 2020 511 (2 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 392 of 470
 SECTION 515

HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

GENERAL • Supplying and delivering asphalt cement meeting the

requirement of SS 952.
515.01 General – This Section describes the materials,
equipment, professional standards, and end product • Rejuvenating Agent Requirements: The Contractor
requirements for the construction of Hot-In-Place Recycled shall supply a rejuvenating agent from the Ministry’s
Asphalt Pavement (HIP). Recognized Product List and meeting the requirements
End Product Specifications (EPS) contain the acceptance shown in Table 515-A.
and payment criteria based on the results of specified The Ministry’s Recognized Product List can be found
sampling and testing. Payment of the contract Unit Prices on-line at:
for the Hot-In-Place asphalt pavement product is subject to
adjustments upward and downward in accordance to the https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/driving-and-
provisions provided in EPS. transportation/transportation-
infrastructure/engineering-standards-and-
Standards applicable to this Section are listed in guidelines/recognized-products-
Table 515-A. list/recognized_products_list.pdf?forcedownload=
true
515.02 General Description of Work – The Contractor
will be responsible for the following work associated with Rejuvenating agents that contain water will not be
the construction of Hot-In-Place asphalt pavement by EPS: permitted.

• Preparing a Quality Control Plan for evaluation before • Heating the virgin asphalt mix aggregate and mixing it
commencing the Work and providing at the production with asphalt cement to produce asphalt admix that
site a testing facility to provide the data needed to meets the Job Mix Formula.
implement that plan. • Hauling, and adding the asphalt admix into the
• Supplying, screening, crushing, processing and recycling process.
improving aggregate to produce virgin asphalt mix • Recycling the existing highway pavement by heating,
aggregate. milling, reprocessing, with or without the addition of
• Producing or supplying, and testing, all materials in rejuvenating agents or admix (virgin mix) as specified,
accordance with Table 515-B through Table 515-E re-mixing, replacing and compacting using a multi-
inclusive, and ensuring compliance with Contract stage, hot milling process and rollers.
specifications.

Table 515-A: Specifications

ASTM Test Title of Test Specification

Bulk Relative Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Saturated Surface
D2726
Dry Method
D1188 Bulk Relative Density of Compacted Mixes Using Paraffin Coated Method
D1559 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus
Kinematic Viscosity @ 60oC 200 – 500
D2170
mm2/s
D70 Specific Gravity 0.98 – 1.02
D92 Flash Point by Cleveland Open Cup 204oC (Min)
Volatility – IPB 150oC (min)
D116
• 2% v. 190oC (min)
(10 mm Hg)
• 6% v. 210oC (min)
D2007 Saturates, %w 28 (max)
D2006 – 70 Asphaltenes, %w 1.5 (max)
D2006 – 70 Chemical Composition (PC+A1)/(S+A2) 0.4 – 0.8

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (1 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 393 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

Table 515-B: Standard Sampling and Testing Table 515-D: Standard Sampling and Testing
Procedures for Virgin Aggregates Procedures for Asphalt Cement

ASTM Test ASTM Test

Item Procedure Item Procedure
Reference Reference
Sieve Analysis of Fine and Penetration of Bituminous
1 C136 1 D5
Coarse Aggregates Materials
Materials Finer Than 0.075 mm Viscosity of Asphalt by Vacuum
2 D2171
2 (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral C117 Capillary Viscometer
Aggregate by Washing
Specific Gravity and Absorption
3 C127 Table 515-E: Test Sample Source Locations
of Coarse Aggregate
Specific Gravity and Absorption Test Sample Source
4 C128
of Fine Aggregate
Density 150 mm diameter road cores
Determining the Percentage of
Smoothness Centre of Lane
5 Fractured Particles in Coarse D5821
Aggregate
Total Moisture Content of • Heating shall be regulated so no overheating of the
6 C566
Aggregate by Drying existing asphalt cement will occur. This will generally
All virgin aggregate tests shall use the following sieve sizes: require the existing surface to be radiantly heated and
no open flame directed at the pavement will be
37.5 mm, 25 mm, 19 mm, 16 mm, 12.5 mm, 9.5 mm, 4.75 mm, 2.36 mm,
permitted.
1.18 mm, 0.600 mm, 0.300 mm, 0.150 mm, and 0.075 mm.
• The cutting drum(s) shall mill to the specified cross
section and shall be set to produce a fully homogenous
recycled mixture free of lumps.
Table 515-C: Standard Sampling and Testing • The activated heated screed shall be complete with
Procedures for Virgin Asphalt Admix and Hot-In-Place augers and strike-off device in accordance with SS 502
Recycled Pavement and be capable of distributing and placing the
reprocessed mix to the full width of the pavement being
ASTM Test recycled.
Item Procedure
Reference
Bulk Specific Gravity and Production shall have a minimum rate of 500 m2 per
hour except between June 1st and September 8th when
Density of Non-Absorptive
1 D2726 the minimum rate shall be 700 m2 per hour.
Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures • Hot recycling unit shall be equipped, capable to add and
Theoretical Maximum homogeneously blend any specified proportion of
Specific Gravity and Density virgin Asphalt Mix into the reclaimed material and
2 D2041 shall be equipped with a means to introduce a
of Bituminous Paving
Mixtures rejuvenating agent homogeneously into the reclaimed
mixture.
Sampling Compacted
3 Bituminous Mixtures for D5361 • Individual pre-heating and reprocessing units shall be
Laboratory Testing equipped in such a way that the operator and other
Resistance to Plastic Flow of D1559 or workers are not exposed to any hazardous fumes or
4 Bituminous Mixtures Using AASHTO gases produced from the equipment operation, the
Marshall Apparatus T 245 heated pavement or from the addition of the
rejuvenating agent, in accordance with all applicable
Determining Asphalt Content
regulations.
5 by Ignition Methods for D6307
Admix The Contractor shall provide an end product conforming in
quality and accuracy of detail to the dimensional and
tolerance requirements of the contract. Where no tolerances
are specified, the standard of workmanship shall be in
accordance with normally accepted good practice.

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (2 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 394 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

Payment is subject to adjustments based on quality (a) Density: A Lot shall be one day’s scheduled production
assurance tests performed by the Ministry Representative. of at least 7 hours of pavement recycling where no
changes have occurred to criteria such as but not limited
The Ministry shall provide information pertaining to the
to:
gradation of the admix, asphalt content, addition rates for
rejuvenating agents, and the percentage of admix to be • Approved Job Mix Formula;
incorporated.
• Specific thickness to be processed;
515-03 Definitions Relevant to End Product
Specification • Required materials addition rate;

515.03.01 End Product Specification (EPS) – A • Change in the ratio of the components making up
specification whereby the Contractor is entirely responsible the Hot-In-Place Recycled Pavement.
for quality control of the construction processes, and A change in any above criteria may require a new Lot
whereby the Ministry performs the specified quality designation.
assurance sampling and testing of the end product for the
purpose of determining acceptance/rejection and payment. One day’s production of less than 7 hours will be dealt
with as follows:
515.03.02 Job Mix Formula – Establishes the virgin
aggregate proportions, gradation, the asphalt content and • The material will be added to the next Lot that has
type of asphalt to be used for production of asphalt admix. the same criteria, as described above, except that
The Job Mix Formula is based on an asphalt mix design, in
• If a test indicates that this production is subject to
accordance with SS 515.05.06, or on a variation in
a payment adjustment or to rejection, or if no
accordance with SS 515.05.07.
further material will be produced with the same
515.03.03 Asphalt Admix – Virgin asphalt mix added to criteria, this production will be designated as a
the recycled mix. The Asphalt Admix is project specific separate Lot.
designed and is blended homogeneously within the
A Lot shall be no more than two days total production
recycling process. The Asphalt Admix becomes an integral
even if the above criteria has not changed or been met.
component of the recycled pavement structure.
(b) Smoothness: A Lot shall be one kilometre length of
515.03.04 Asphalt Content –The quantity of asphalt
recycled pavement for each driving lane.
cement in the virgin admix expressed as a percentage by
weight of the total dry aggregate in the mix. 515.03.12 Sub-Lots for Density and Smoothness – For the
application of the contract requirements of:
515.03.05 Design Asphalt Content – The asphalt content
upon which the Job Mix Formula is initially established. (a) Density: Each Lot shall be divided into three equal
Sub-Lots.
515.03.06 Approved Asphalt Content – The design
asphalt content or subsequent adjustment to it, embodied in (b) Smoothness: Each Lot shall be divided into 100 metre
a Job Mix Formula or revised Job Mix Formula. Sub-Lots.
515.03.07 Actual Asphalt Content – The amount of 515.03.13 Driving Lane – A single lane in any area of the
asphalt cement in the admix as determined by the pavement other than a shoulder or a barrier flare.
Contractor’s Quality Control Testing.
515.03.14 Surplus Aggregate – Aggregate surplus to the
515.03.08 Smoothness – A measure of the longitudinal Works, in split or un-split stockpiles which singly or
profile of the pavement surface. The unit for measurement combined will meet the virgin asphalt mix aggregate mix
is the International Roughness Index (IRI). gradation. Surplus aggregate will be paid for as indicated in
SS 515.32.01. There will be no payment for reject
515.03.09 Sample Mean – The arithmetic mean of a set of
aggregate.
test results constituting the sample.
515.03.15 Hot-In-Place Recycled Pavement – Shall be the
515.03.10 Stratified Random Sample – A set of test
results of the process where recycling, the addition of admix
measurements taken one each from a number of separate
and/or rejuvenating agents, the spreading, compacting and
(stratified) areas or Sub-Lots within a Lot in an unbiased
finishing of the asphalt pavement have taken place to form
way.
a quality finished product. The Hot-In-Place Recycled
515.03.11 Lot – A portion of the work being considered for Pavement may be comprised of the following components:
acceptance and for the determination of payment. A Lot is existing asphalt pavement, admix, and/or rejuvenating
defined as follows for the application of the contract agents.
requirements for:

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (3 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 395 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

515.04 Quality Control people involved, and a clear description of the

responsibilities of each.
515.04.01 General – Quality Control, by the Contractor is
the sum total of activities by the Contractor to ensure that a 515.04.03 Quality Control Testing and Inspection – The
product meets contract specification requirements. Quality Contractor shall provide and maintain equipment and
Control includes material handling and construction qualified personnel to perform all laboratory testing, field
procedures, calibration and maintenance of equipment, testing and inspection necessary to determine and monitor
production process control and any sampling, testing and the characteristics and properties of all the materials
inspection that is done for these purposes. produced and incorporated into the Work. They shall also
monitor the workmanship of the final product in accordance
The Contractor is responsible for all Quality Control under
with the Quality Control Plan as most recently submitted
this Section. The Ministry Representative will audit and
and accepted.
monitor the Contractor’s operations and the implementation
of the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan. The Contractor shall use a qualified registered member of
the Association of Professional Engineers and Geoscientists
The Ministry will not take samples for quality control
of British Columbia or a qualified registered member of the
testing and will in no manner assist in any degree or in any
Applied Technologists and Technicians of British
aspect of the Contractor’s operation in the production of
Columbia. This person shall be designated as the Quality
asphalt pavement, beginning from the production of
Control Manager for the purposes of these specifications.
aggregate through the compaction of asphalt mix. The only
The Quality Control Manager shall be responsible for
exception shall be in accordance with the provisions of SS
preparation and sign off of the Quality Control Plan, shall
515.05.07, where the Ministry shall have the ability to adjust
be responsible for all Quality Control testing and
the ratio of the components of the Hot-In-Place Recycled
inspections and shall be responsible for the signing of all
Pavement based upon the Contractor’s Quality Control
Quality Control testing and inspection records and
results and visual inspections.
submissions to the Ministry.
The Ministry Representative may issue a Stop Work Order
The Contractor shall provide a testing facility(s) that meets
to the Contractor if the Contractor fails to adhere to the
the requirements necessary to carry out all the test
Quality Control Plan. The Ministry Representative will not
procedures listed within this Section. The facility(s) must
issue a Resume Work Order until the Contractor has given
have the equipment specified under the appropriate test
the Ministry Representative satisfactory assurance that it
designation to perform the tests.
has in place adequate capacity to fulfill the requirements of
the Quality Control Plan. All equipment and the laboratory shall be well maintained
and in good working condition. All testing equipment shall
515.04.02 Quality Control Plan – The Contractor shall
be calibrated, and evidence of the calibration shall be
prepare a detailed, written Quality Control Plan, based on
provided when requested by the Ministry Representative.
the guidelines as shown in Appendix 515-A and functions
integrally with any other Quality Management provisions of 515.04.04 Quality Control Records – The results from
the Contract. The Contractor’s Quality Control Plan shall quality control testing shall be reported on test logs and
be submitted to the Ministry Representative not less than plotted on charts immediately after each test is completed.
five working days before starting the production of paving These test results, reports and charts shall be available
aggregate. The Ministry Representative will evaluate the within 24 hours of the end of each shift, to the Ministry
Contractor’s Quality Control Plan and will respond, in Representative and at all times during the progress of the
writing, within five days. Any subsequent changes to the Work.
Contractor’s Quality Control Plan must also be submitted to
For the purposes of confirming delivery of asphalt mix to
the Ministry Representative for evaluation.
the road and the calculation of material application rates, the
The Contractor’s Quality Control Plan shall include a Contractor shall prepare and provide to the Ministry
description and schedule of the intended sampling, testing Representative, a copy of the Road Checker’s Summary and
and reporting. The Quality Control Plan must also include the weigh tickets for each load received at the recycling
a detailed description of the means by which the Contractor operation at the end of each shift. The Road Checker’s
shall use the quality control test results to ensure that the Summary shall include, but not be limited to, the following
asphalt materials, aggregate, mix production, recycling and information:
pavement compaction processes will be controlled to keep
the end product within the specified limits. The Quality • Truck Number
Control Plan must clearly show the flow of information • Weigh Ticket Number and Net Weight of Load
from the quality control laboratory to the individuals who
shall make the actual adjustments to the processes and • Time and location by station of delivery
equipment to this control. The plan will show time • Admix and Rejuvenator Material Application Rate
allowance for each step, the names and positions of all the Calculations

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (4 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 396 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

• Processed Depth, Lengths, and Widths with an insulating tarpaulin of such size as to
completely protect the asphalt mix.
• Temperatures (behind screed, windrow, ambient and
admix) (h) Existing Paved Surfaces – Existing paved surfaces
shall be clean to avoid contamination of the recycled
• Notes pertaining to the paving of the appurtenances pavement. The existing surfaces shall be swept back at
(intersections, tapers, etc.) least 20 cm wider than the area to be processed.
515.04.05 Final Quality Control Testing Reports – Prior (i) Existing Utility Structures – The Contractor shall
to issuing a Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall ensure all catch basins and manholes, which are within
provide the Ministry Representative with: the operating area of the heating units, are clear of any
(a) A summary of all virgin aggregate quality control test flammable liquids or otherwise hazardous fumes/gases.
results; (j) Heating of Recycled Material – The recycled material
(b) Copies of all quality control test results for asphalt shall not be heated over an average of 150°C in order
admix properties, Hot-In-Place Recycled Pavement and to avoid excessive oxidation and hardening of the
compaction; and recycled Asphalt Cement.

(c) Copies of all quality control charts. (k) Minimum Admix Temperatures – Based on the most
recent Temperature Viscosity Curve supplied by the
515.04.06 Minimum Acceptable Construction Practices Asphalt Cement Supplier. This information will be
– Good construction practices shall be considered as used to set minimum and maximum mixing
standard construction procedures to be followed and shall temperatures.
include but be limited to the procedures described below.
(l) Longitudinal Joints – Longitudinal joints in the top lift
(a) Recycling – The existing highway pavement shall be of asphalt pavement will generally only be permitted
heated, milled, reprocessed, with or without the where lane dividing lines are to be painted.
addition of a rejuvenating agent or virgin mix as
specified. (m) Transition Joints – At the locations where recycling
operations begin and end, the Contractor shall ensure
(b) Finished Cross Fall Drainage – Contractor shall transition joints between the processed and
ensure that the appropriate cross slopes for safety and unprocessed surface are smooth and without
positive drainage are maintained or improved after the irregularities. If any bumps or irregularities occur
recycling process. resulting from the reprocessing operation, the
(c) Longitudinal Edges – Contractor shall ensure that the Contractor shall repair these areas with fresh asphalt
longitudinal edges of the recycled pavement are mix and/or additional reprocessing, at the Contractor’s
blended to conform in elevation with the adjacent own expense, as directed by the Ministry
pavement unless this surface is scheduled to be Representative.
recycled. (n) PG Asphalt Cement – Shall meet requirements set out
(d) Excess Materials – Excess materials shall be removed in Special Provisions and SS 952.
and deposited in a location such that they can be (o) Minimum Temperature – Minimum Temperature
reincorporated into the recycled mixture. At no time behind the paver screed of the recycled material shall
shall excess material be cast across the newly processed not be less than 110°C, unless the Ministry
surface or incorporated into the granular shoulders. Representative accepts that the circumstances limit the
(e) Compaction and Finishing – The Contractor shall reasonably achievable temperature to a lower value.
supply roller compaction behind the reprocessing (p) Rejuvenating Agent Application –To accurately
operation to achieve densities and smoothness. The proportion the rejuvenating agent into the milled
recycled mat shall have a uniform appearance and mixture the equipment shall comply with the following
uniform surface. Any deficiencies shall be corrected at requirements:
the Contractor’s expense, to the satisfaction of the
Ministry Representative. (i) Positive feed and shut off of the rejuvenating
agent, governed by the movement of the
(f) Stockpiles – Stockpiles of different types of material reprocessing machine;
shall be located and constructed in such a manner as to
prevent intermingling of the types and segregation of (ii) Mechanically or electronically controlled
material. application of the rejuvenating agent relative to
and variable with the processing rate of the
(g) Haul Vehicles – Lubrication of the truck boxes with equipment;
diesel fuel will not be permitted. All vehicles shall have
adequately insulated truck boxes and shall be equipped (iii) A mechanical or electronic metering device
capable of supplying an accurate indication of the

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (5 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 397 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

quantity of rejuvenating agent being applied per 515.05 Supply of Virgin Aggregates, Asphalt Materials,
square metre; and Asphalt Admix Design and Job Mix Formula
(iv) A mechanical, electronic or manual method of 515.05.01 Work in Ministry Pits or Quarries – When
measuring quantity of rejuvenating agent in the operating in a Ministry pit or quarry, the Contractor shall
tank. comply with all provisions of SS 145.26.
(q) Metering of Rejuvenating Agents – To accurately 515.05.02 Supply of Virgin Aggregates, Aggregate
proportion the rejuvenating agent into the hot milled Production and Characteristics – The Contractor shall not
material, the equipment shall control the quantity of the produce paving aggregate until the Contractor has received
rejuvenating agent to ± 0.05 L/m2 of surfaced written notification that the Quality Control Plan is in
reprocessed with an agent application range of 0.0 L/m2 accordance with SS 515.04.02, and has in place testing
to 1.0 L/m2. facilities for aggregate production that are in accordance
with the Quality Control Plan.
The measurement of the rejuvenating agent applied by
means of a metering device shall be capable of For the production of virgin Asphalt Mix Aggregate, within
recording accumulated litres to the accuracy of ± 2% Ministry pits, the Contractor shall provide crushing
and be fully visible to both the operator and the equipment that will permit all aggregate, that passes through
Ministry Representative. 375 mm x 450 mm slotted openings, to be used for the
production of crushed aggregate. Rocks, which will not
Heating of Rejuvenating Agent shall be kept to within
pass through these openings, shall be stockpiled or disposed
± 5°C of the application temperature established by the
of as directed by the Ministry Representative. Crushing and
manufacturer and/or the Ministry Representative.
screening equipment shall be provided with adequate
(r) Outer Edges – The outer edge of each lane shall facilities and capacity to be able to bleed off reject aggregate
generally be tapered to a 12:1 slope. and remove any excess fine aggregate, dust or objectionable
aggregate coatings, to make it acceptable for use. All
(s) Recycling Adjoining Mats – When recycling an products from crushing or screening plants, that can be used
adjoining parallel mat there shall be at least a 50 mm
shall not be wasted, and shall be stockpiled or used as
overlap onto the previously recycled surface. This
directed by the Ministry Representative.
overlap shall be properly “raked” to form a
homogeneous bond between the two mats. Where the Ministry has available any test results
information on the properties shown in , for a Ministry pit
(t) Raking – Any material that is raked from the joint shall or other source, the Ministry Representative will upon
not be placed on the new mat or placed on or in front of request, provide that information to the Contractor.
the paver. This material may be introduced at a point
Otherwise, sampling and testing to determine and
of the operation where the material shall be reheated
demonstrate the compliance of paving aggregate with the
and remixed with the Hot-In-Place Recycled Pavement.
requirements of this Section shall be the responsibility of the
(u) Discontinued Paving – At locations where Contractor.
reprocessing operations begin and end, the Contractor Paving aggregate shall meet the requirements of
shall ensure that the transition between the processed Table 502-D for medium mix asphalt aggregates, be within
and unprocessed surface is not smooth and without
the variations limits specified in Appendix 515-B,
irregularities. If any irregularities occur resulting from
Table 515-J, as well as the following requirements:
the reprocessing operation, the Contractor shall repair
these areas with fresh asphalt mix and/or additional (a) Virgin Coarse Aggregate:
reprocessing, at the Contractor’s own expense.
(i) Shall be all mineral matter retained on the sieve
designated in the test procedures for each
(v) Pavement Drainage – The Contractor shall at all times individual test.
ensure that the appropriate cross slopes for safety and (ii) Shall consist of crushed stone, crushed gravel, or
positive pavement drainage are maintained. combination thereof, or materials naturally
(w) Rollers – Rollers shall normally operate with the drive occurring in a fractured condition, or materials
wheel nearest the paver and at a speed not in excess of naturally occurring of highly angular nature or
8 km/h. They shall not be allowed to park on the mat rough texture.
prior to complete cooling. (iii) Shall be free from coating of clay, silt or other
deleterious material, and shall meet the
requirements listed in Table 515-B and
Table 515-F.

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (6 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 398 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

Table 515-F: Requirements for Virgin Coarse The supply of asphalt cement and rejuvenating agents shall
Aggregates be at the Unit Price bid for asphalt cement and rejuvenating
materials.
ASTM Test
Requirements 515.05.04 Responsibility for Asphalt Admix Design –
Reference
The Ministry will provide to the Contractor information
Maximum Water Absorption; % related to the Asphalt Admix and rejuvenating ratios in the
C127 2
by Mass Special Provisions, but all admix design and formulation
Soundness of Aggregate costs are the responsibility of the Contractor.
C88 20
Maximum Loss After 5 Cycles
515.05.05 Evaluation of Asphalt Admix Materials – The
Maximum % by Mass of Clay Ministry Representative will require up to five (5) calendar
C142 1.5
Lumps and Friable Particles days upon notification from the Contractor to evaluate the
D6928 Minimum Degradation Factor 35 Contractor’s Asphalt Admix materials.
Two (2) Fractured Faces: 515.05.06 Samples Required for Asphalt Admix
D5821 Minimum % by Mass Retained 85 Evaluation – At the discretion of the Ministry
on the 4.75 mm sieve Representative, the Ministry may request samples of the
Admix materials and Quality Control results and
(b) Virgin Fine Aggregate: documentation for evaluation. Shipping costs for samples
delivered to the Ministry Representative are the
(i) Shall be clean, tough, durable, moderately sharp, responsibility of the Contractor.
and free from coatings of clay, silt, or other
deleterious material, and shall contain no clay balls 515.05.07 Field Adjustment of the Job Mix Formula
or other aggregations of fine material. and/or Recycled Pavement – During construction, the
Ministry may require field adjustments to the job mix
(ii) Shall have a maximum mass loss after five cycles formula and/or recycled pavement. A field adjustment to
of not more than 23% when tested in accordance the Job Mix Formula is defined as a change in the asphalt
with ASTM C88. cement content of admix, aggregate gradation, rejuvenating
(iii) Shall have a sand equivalent of not less than 40 agent and/or proportioning of various aggregate sizes.
when tested in accordance with ASTM D2419.
(iv) Shall have a minimum value of 45 when tested PAYMENT ADJUSTMENTS
according to AASHTO T 304, Method “A”, –
Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate 515.11 Density
when determining Fine Aggregate Angularity. 515.11.01 Coring – The Contractor shall be responsible for
(c) Virgin Mineral Filler and Mineral Dust: providing all core samples for quality assurance and
payment adjustment purposes. The location of the cores
(i) Mineral filler shall consist of all matter passing the shall be randomly selected and provided to the Contractor
0.600 mm sieve and mineral dust shall consist of by the Ministry Representative. The cores shall be taken
all mineral matter passing the 0.075 mm sieve. within a 300 mm radius of that location unless otherwise
(ii) Mineral filler and mineral dust shall be free from agreed to by the Ministry Representative. The Contractor
organic matter. shall provide 150 mm diameter cores for these purposes.
The minimum core thickness shall be 37 mm. The
(iii) Mineral filler shall be non-plastic when tested in Contractor shall prepare the cores prior to submission by
accordance with ASTM D4318. removing all material not representative of the pavement lift
515.05.03 Supply of Asphalt Cement and Rejuvenating to be tested. The Contractor shall deliver these cores to the
Agents – The Contractor shall supply the types and grades Ministry Representative on-site, within 24 hours of being
of asphalt cement and rejuvenating agents as specified in the provided the locations for the coring.
Special Provisions. The supply of these materials includes, In the case of a core sample location falling in an obvious
but is not limited to, ordering, scheduling delivery of, supply non representative area, such as a previously patched area,
of Temperature Viscosity Curve information, receiving, at the sole discretion of the Ministry Representative, a new
handling, storing, heating, blending, sampling, and testing random location will be chosen for that sample.
of the materials and other related work.
All costs associated with obtaining the cores, including the
The Contractor shall supply the Ministry Representative filling and compaction of the core holes are considered
with copies of the supplier’s weigh-bill and records of all incidental to the contract and are the responsibility of the
asphalt and rejuvenating materials received on a daily basis. Contractor.
The amount of asphalt cement used will be calculated based
on the Contractor’s Quality Control testing results.

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (7 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 399 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

515.11.02 Percent Density – One random core sample will instrument or a non-contact Inertial Profiling measuring
be obtained from each Sub-Lot and tested. The test results instrument, to determine the longitudinal profile and
for three Sub-Lots will be averaged to determine the percent compute the International Roughness Index (IRI) in each
density for the Lot. driving lane. Profiles shall be measured and the IRI
Hot-In-Place In Place Density of Sample calculated in the centre of the lane for each Sub-Lot. IRI
% Density
=
Maximum Theoretical Density
x 100 values will be recorded to a precision of 0.01 m/km for each
(ASTM D 2041) Sub-Lot. The Lot IRI value is the average of the IRI values
calculated for the Sub-Lots within the Lot.
The Maximum Theoretical Density for the Lot will be
determined by combining the Sub-Lot cores. The cores For any Sub-Lot between 50 m and 100 m in length, the IRI
shall be prepared in accordance with the procedures outlined value shall be considered representative of a complete Sub-
in Appendix 515-3 to enable the testing to determine the Lot. For any Sub-Lot less than 50 m in length, the IRI value
maximum theoretical density. will be combined with the proceeding Sub-Lot IRI value.
515.11.03 Payment Adjustments – The payment The profile shall be measured over the entire length of the
adjustment for percent density will be the amount shown in pavement exclusive of structures and shoulder areas.
Table 515-G for the Sample Mean of the test results for the Acceleration, deceleration and turning lanes are considered
Lot. part of the driving lanes and shall be testing in accordance
with this provision. For the measuring process, the
515.11.04 Rejection Limit – The rejection limit for percent Contractor shall provide the Ministry Representative a chalk
density is the limiting value of the Sample Mean as shown guide line in the centre of the lane immediately prior to
in Table 515-G. measurement with a Class I precision rolling profile
If the test result for the density of a Sub-Lot is outside the measuring instrument. Payment for providing a chalk line
acceptance limits, the Sub-Lot is rejected automatically for a Class I precision rolling profiler will be paid upon
regardless of the values of other acceptance parameters. To acceptance by the Ministry Representative under the
minimize the cost of rejection to the Contractor, the Provisional Sum Item.
Contractor shall isolate the area of low density within the 515.12.02 Auxiliary Lanes – For smoothness testing,
Sub-Lot and perform the necessary corrective measures to sections of the driving lanes that do not fall within the
ensure specifications are met. The limits of the low density continuous through lanes, such as acceleration lanes,
area must be verified and approved by the Ministry deceleration lanes and turning lanes, and lanes which are
Representative before remedial work proceeds. less than 1 km in length, shall be treated as follows. The
515.11.05 Payment for Rejected Work Made Acceptable ratio of the section length to the standard Lot length of 1 km
– The payment adjustment for density will be based on shall be determined and the payment adjustment shall be
testing of the reprocessed, replaced or overlaid material pro-rated on this basis as in the following example:
where applicable. Where replacement or overlay material Length of segment 0.565 times the Standard Lot
does not cover the entire Lot or Sub-Lot, prior tests of the =
uncovered area will be averaged with new tests on the i.e. 565 m Length of 1000 m
corrective work. Hence the applicable payment adjustment is 0.565 times the
Table 515-G: Payment Adjustments for Density payment adjustment for a 1 km Lot as determined from
Table 515-H.
% Maximum Table 515-H: Lot Assessment and Payment
Payment Adjustment
Theoretical Density (Lot Adjustments for Smoothness
($ per m2) per Lot
Average)
≥ 95.6 + $0.50 Lot IRI (m/km) Payment Adjustment
95.0 – 95.5 + $0.30 ≤1.00 +$2,500
94.0 – 94.9 + $0.20 >1.00 and ≤1.10 +$1,200
93.0 – 93.9 $0.00 >1.10 and ≤1.20 +$700
92.6 – 92.9 - $0.20 >1.20 and ≤1.30 +$400
92.0 – 92.5 - $0.50 >1.30 and ≤1.40 0
≤ 91.9 REJECT >1.40 and ≤1.60 -$500
>1.60 and ≤1.80 -$900
515.12 Smoothness >1.80 and ≤1.90 -$2,000
515.12.01 Determination of Pavement Smoothness – The >1.90 and ≤2.00 -$2,500
finished pavement surface shall be tested by the Ministry >2.00 REJECT
using either a Class I precision rolling profile measuring

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (8 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 400 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

(a) The test results for acceptance parameters are such that
515.12.03 Acceptance Limits – The acceptance limit for the Lot or Sub-Lot meets the requirements for
smoothness is the limiting value as shown in Table 515-H, acceptance at a reduced payment;
beyond which corrective work is required. Payment (b) The Lot and Sub-Lot is approved in respect of all other
adjustments are shown in Table 515-H. The International requirements; and
Roughness Index (IRI) value, calculated for each Sub-Lot,
will be used to determine if the Lot will be accepted, and if (c) The Contractor has not notified the Ministry
so whether it will be subject to any payment adjustments. Representative in writing that it will exercise its option
to either repair or remove and replace the work, at its
515.12.04 Payment Adjustments for Full or Increased own cost, with work meeting the requirements for
Payment – Acceptance of any Lot at full or increased acceptance at full or increased payment.
payment will occur if it contains no obvious defects as per
SS 515.22 and in the case of top lift pavement only, the 515.22 Rejection for Workmanship Defects – The
pavement smoothness, as reported by the International finished surface of any lift shall have a uniform “closed”
Roughness Index (IRI) meets the following requirements: texture and be free of visible signs of poor workmanship.
Any obvious defects as determined by the Ministry
• All Sub-Lots shall have an IRI value ≤ 2.0 Representative such as, but not limited to the following, will
515.12.05 Rejection Limit – If a Sub-Lot has an IRI >2.0, cause for automatic rejection of asphalt pavement regardless
the Sub-Lot is rejected. of the values of any other acceptance parameter:

515.12.06 Remedial Work – If the test results on a Sub-Lot (a) Individual bumps and dips that exceed 12 mm over
of pavement indicate a payment reduction or rejection 3 m;
because of smoothness, the Contractor may propose (b) Areas of excess or insufficient asphalt;
remedial work to improve the smoothness. Such proposals
are subject to the approval of the Ministry Representative, (c) Improper matching of longitudinal and transverse
but such approval does not imply that the proposed remedy joints;
will be successful and does not reduce the Contractor’s (d) Roller marks;
responsibility for meeting the acceptance requirements.
Reprocessing may be acceptable, but cold milling and (e) Tire marks;
repaving may be required. Only one attempt to remediate (f) Segregation; or
the reject area (remediation method chosen by the
Contractor) may be made to improve smoothness, and this (g) Cracking or tearing
must be completed within ten (10) calendar days from the
When asphalt pavement is rejected by reason of obvious
time the Contractor receives notification from the Ministry
defects, the minimum area of rejection will be the actual
Representative of the original smoothness test results for the
length of the defect for the full width of the driving lane in
Sub-Lot. Should a product still be in reject the Ministry
which the defect exists.
Representative will determine the final remediation method
at the Contractor’s expense. Rejected work shall be promptly repaired, remedied, or
removed and replaced in a manner acceptable to the
No payment will be made for any material, equipment or
Ministry Representative. The Contractor shall be
manpower used to improve, or attempt to improve,
responsible for all costs including materials.
smoothness.
No payment will be made for work in any Lot or Sub-Lot,
515.12.07 Smoothness Deficiency Report – Smoothness
which has been rejected, until the defects have been
deficiencies (bumps and dips) less than 8 mm over 3 m will
remedied.
not have a fix or remedial work requirement. Individual
smoothness deficiencies between 8 mm and 12 mm over 515.23 Appeal Testing
3 m will result in a $400.00 penalty per deficiency and
515.23.01 Density – The Contractor may appeal the results
smoothness deficiencies over 12 mm over 3 m will require
of acceptance testing for density for any Lot only once.
remedial work (see SS 515.22).
Appeals will only be considered if quality control results
can be presented to support the appeal.
ACCEPTANCE AND REJECTION Quality control test results for density which are provided to
the Ministry Representative subsequent to the Contractors
515.21 Acceptance at Reduced or Adjusted Payment –
receipt of the quality assurance test results for that Lot will
Acceptance of any Lot at reduced payment will occur if it
not be considered (when evaluating evidence) for an appeal.
contains no obvious defects as per SS 515.22, and if:
The appeal shall be for all tests within the Lots, and there
will be no appeal allowed for single test within the Lot.

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (9 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 401 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

The following procedures will apply for the appeal: respects, the re-paving will be subject to the same
specifications as the pavement being replaced.
(a) The Ministry Representative will arrange for an
independent testing laboratory to perform the appeal Whether the cold milling and re-paving is applied as a
testing. The personnel employed or testing laboratory corrective measure, acceptability and payment will be
retained by the Contractor for quality control testing on determined as follows:
the project will not be used for appeal testing.
(a) Acceptability, and eligibility for either positive or
(b) The original quality assurance results will not be negative payment adjustment, will be determined
considered in the appeal. The Contractor will sample entirely on the results of testing and observations
the pavement at locations randomly re-selected by the conducted on the re-paving, regardless of test results
Ministry within five (5) days following receipt of the that have been obtained on the Hot-In-Place recycled
appeal such that a total of five (5) new core specimens pavement;
are extracted throughout the Lot. The Ministry
(b) The payment quantity, for application of the Unit Prices
Representative will observe the sampling process. The
for asphalt pavement, and the quantity, to which any
procedures used to determine the test results shall be
payment adjustment is to be applied, will be derived
consistent with the original acceptance testing methods.
from the square metres of recycled pavement affected
515.23.02 Smoothness – The Contractor may appeal by the re-paving.
smoothness acceptance test results of any rejected or
penalized Lot, once. The appeal shall be in writing and
submitted within the next five (5) days following receipt of PAYMENT
the test results.
515.31 General – Payment for Hot-In-Place Recycle of
Any attempt to improve smoothness on the appealed Sub- asphalt pavement will be at the Contract Unit Price per
Lot after the Ministry Representative has tested the Lot for Square Metre. The Contract Unit Price shall be for all things
acceptance shall void the appeal and the original test results furnished and done including sweeping, processing,
will apply. compacting, patching and any hand work as necessary to
complete the work. Payment at Unit Prices for supply of
The Ministry Representative will perform, and the
virgin aggregates, the supply of asphalt cement, the supply
Contractor will be given the opportunity to witness, the
of rejuvenating agents, the supply of virgin asphalt mix and
appeal testing and the new results will be binding on the
the Hot-In-Place recycling construction of asphalt
Contractor and the Ministry.
pavement, shall be full compensation for completing the
515.23.03 Application of Appeal Testing Results – For supply and installation of Hot-In-Place asphalt pavement on
density appeals, the original test will be discarded. A new prepared surfaces in accordance with the contract
Sample Mean for the five (5) new test results will be requirements. Applicable payment adjustments (additions
determined and used for acceptance and payment or subtractions as applicable) shall be applied in accordance
adjustment. with the PAYMENT ADJUSTMENT Section.
The new values, thus determined, in all cases, will be The first 4,000 m2 on Hot-In-Place asphalt pavement
binding on the Contractor and the Ministry. recycling production will not be subject to bonus/penalty
payment adjustments but will be required to meet minimum
515.23.04 Payment for Appeal Testing – If the new results
specification requirements for quality and workmanship.
indicate a change in the payment adjustment in the
Contractor’s favour, then sampling and testing costs 515.31.01 Rejuvenating Agent and Asphalt Cement
incurred during appeal procedures for that Lot will be borne
(a) Rejuvenating Agent – Payment to Supply
by the Ministry.
Rejuvenating Agent shall be at the Unit Price per litre
If the new results verify that any payment reduction or for the quantity of material actually metered into the
rejection remains valid for that Lot, then the costs of recycling process. The Contract Unit Price shall be to
sampling and testing (plus 10% mark-up) incurred during supply, store, heat, apply and proportioning of the agent
the appeal procedure will be charged to the Contractor. with the asphalt pavement mixture reclaimed from the
roadway.
515.23.05 Time Limits for Appeals of Test Results – All
appeals shall be in writing and submitted within the next (b) Asphalt Cement – Payment for Supply of Asphalt
three (3) site occupancy days of receipt of the test results. Cement for admix shall be at the Unit Price per tonne
for the payment quantity determined from
515.24 Cold Milling and Re-Paving as a Corrective
Measure – If cold milling and re-paving is used as a Payment Quantity of
Av. Actual Asphalt Content X Payment
Quantity of Asphalt Admix
corrective measure on a defective Lot or Sub-Lot, the Asphalt Cement
=
Average Actual Asphalt Content + 100
thickness will be subject to the approval of the Ministry
Representative, but shall not be less than 40 mm. In all other

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (10 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 402 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

Where: (b) The admix used in quantity of recycled pavement

Payment Quantity of Asphalt Admix = quantity removed by the cold milling and re-paving will be
determined in accordance with SS 515.31.03, included in the admix payment quantity, whether or not
it was acceptable.
Actual Asphalt Content = defined in SS 515.03.04,
Such payment shall be compensation in full for all work
The actual asphalt content shall be determined on a Lot including but not limited to: loading the aggregate into the
by Lot basis by averaging the value obtained from the feeders, drying the aggregate, metering and adding the
Quality Control tests from each Lot. This average will asphalt cement, mixing, loading, weighing, hauling,
be used to determine the tonnage of Asphalt Cement dumping, spreading, compacting and finishing the asphalt
used for payment purposes for the Asphalt Cement for pavement, and shall also include all costs of quality control.
the Lot.
515.31.04 Hot-In-Place Recycled Asphalt Pavement
The quantity of asphalt cement so determined shall be (EPS) – Payment for Hot-In-Place Recycled Asphalt
used for payment purposes regardless of any Pavement (EPS) constructed in place shall be at the Unit
discrepancy that may be noted between it and any Price per square meter for the quantity of recycled pavement
quantity calculated using delivery quantities, tank dips, in accordance with the Contract requirements.
or other data. No payment will be made for asphalt
cement used in reject mix. Subject to the exception noted below, only acceptable
recycled asphalt pavement will be included in the payment
Such payment shall be full compensation for supplying quantity.
the material to the project, handling, storing, heating,
sampling, and testing of the material, and other related Where cold milling and re-paving is used as a corrective
work. measure, in accordance with SS 515.24;
515.31.02 Paving Aggregate into Stockpile (EPS) – (a) The overlay quantity will not be included in the admix
Payment for Paving Aggregate into stockpile (EPS) shall be payment quantity; but
at the Unit Price per tonne for the quantity of paving (b) The admix used in quantity of recycled pavement
aggregate placed into stockpile in accordance with the removed by the cold milling and re-paving will be
following: included in the admix payment quantity, whether or not
(a) The paving aggregate quantity will be identical to it was acceptable.
100% of the asphalt admixture quantity. Such payment shall be compensation in full for all work
(b) As the aggregate is crushed into stockpile, progress including, but not limited to: recycling, metering, adding the
payments will be made against the bid item, up to the rejuvenating agent, adding, spreading, compacting and
quantity shown in the “Approximate Quantity” column finishing the asphalt pavement and shall also include all
of the Schedule 7. costs of quality control.
(c) At contract completion, the final payment quantity for 515.31.05 Payment for Acceptable Work – The following
asphalt admix aggregate will be in accordance with the end product properties of recycled asphalt pavement will be
following calculation: measured for acceptance:
Tonnes of Asphalt tonnes of mix X 100 • Density
= 100 + actual calculated asphalt
Admix Aggregate
content as per SS 515.03.04 • Smoothness
Such payment shall be full compensation for all work 515.31.06 Payment for Rejected Work Made Acceptable
include, but not limited to, the production, supply and – When defects have been remedied in Lots or Sub-Lots
stockpiling of all paving aggregates, and shall include all which had been rejected, payment for the original quantity
costs of quality control. of material in those Lots or Sub-Lots will be made subject
515.31.03 Asphalt Admix (EPS) – Payment for Asphalt to payment adjustments and penalty assessments and
Admix (EPS) constructed in place shall be at the Unit Price subject to SS 515.24.
per tonne for the quantity of admix placed in accordance No payment will be made for any material used to replace,
with the Contract requirements. repair or overlay rejected work and all corrective work shall
Subject to the exception noted below, only acceptable be performed entirely at the Contractor’s expense.
asphalt admix will be included in the payment quantity. 515.31.07 Payment Adjustment – Payment adjustments
Where cold milling and re-paving is used as a corrective resulting from the application of this Section will be
measure, in accordance with SS 514.24; affected on each progress payment as follows:

(a) The overlay quantity will not be included in the admix (a) For each Lot paid for by the square metre (m2), the
payment quantity; but applicable payment adjustment derived from

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (11 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 403 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

Table 515-G (Density), in dollars per square metre will ensuring that the Ministry does not pay for aggregate used
be expressed as positive in the case of increases and on private works.
negative in the case of decreases. The algebraic sum of
All surplus aggregate shall be properly stockpiled.
these unit adjustments will then be applied to the
payment quantity for the Lot. The resulting amount, in 515.32.02 Ministry Purchase of Surplus Aggregate –
dollars, will be the net payment adjustment, positive or Should the Ministry proceed with the purchase of surplus
negative, for that Lot. aggregate, upon completion of the contract, the Ministry
will purchase surplus paving mix aggregate as indicated
The algebraic sum of the net payment adjustments for
herein.
all such Lots for which payment is authorized on the
current progress payment, computed in dollars, shall be If the quantity of Asphalt pavement actually incorporated
the total payment adjustment for density for the current into the works is less than the estimated quantity, as stated
process payment. in the Schedule 7, the Ministry will purchase aggregate up
to 100% of the quantity required by the contract, to be paid
(b) For each Lot, the applicable payment adjustment
under the appropriate Unit Price Item for Aggregate in
derived from Table 515-H (Smoothness), in dollars per
Stockpile.
Lot, will be expressed as positive in the case of
increases and negative in the case of decreases, and will The surplus aggregate must, when singly or combined, meet
be the payment adjustment, positive or negative, for the gradation requirements set out in the Job Mix Formula.
that Lot.
The portion of material remaining in a stockpile eligible for
The algebraic sum of the payment adjustment for all compensation as surplus aggregate shall be the lesser of:
such Lots for which payment is authorized on the
(a) The quantity of mix as stated in the Schedule 7 minus
current progress payment, computed in dollars, shall be
the quantity of aggregate actually incorporated in the
the total payment adjustment for smoothness for the
works; and
current progress payments.
(c) The algebraic sum of the total payment of the total (b) The volume of the remaining stockpile as determined
payment adjustments for density and smoothness, under SS 502.41.03.
derived in accordance with a) and b) above, shall be the No payment shall be made for any surplus shoulder and
total payment adjustment, positive or negative, in paving aggregate remaining at contract completion in
dollars, for all attributes for the current progress excess of the contract requirement. Material remaining in a
payment. This amount shall be added, if positive, or Ministry pit is the property of the Ministry.
subtracted, if negative, by a single entry in computing
the current progress payment. 515.32.03 Measurement of Surplus Aggregate – The
Ministry will determine the volume of aggregate by
(d) The process set out in a) to c) above will be used in surveying the stockpile(s) using string-line techniques, and
computing each progress payment to which it is determine volume using prismoidal volumes between
applicable. surfaces. Alternatively, the Ministry Representative may
515.32 Ministry Purchase of Surplus Aggregate in elect to survey using cross section techniques and/or
Stockpile determine volumes using end-area volumes.
The base of the pile will be determined from a pre-stockpile
515.32.01 Surplus in Private Pits – At the discretion of the
survey or, where such a survey is not available, from a
Ministry Representative, the Ministry may or may not
surface determined by the Ministry Representative as being
purchase surplus aggregate in stockpile in a private pit.
a reasonable interpolation from the intersection of the pile
Generally, the Ministry will provide payment for the sides with the adjacent ground level. Where there are two
processing costs of surplus aggregate stockpile in Ministry or more stockpiles of aggregate meeting the same gradation
pits only, and only to a limited quantity. classification, the compensation will be based on the
cumulative quantity of those stockpiles.
However, should the Contractor produce surplus aggregate
in a private pit, and the Ministry intends to purchase these Where necessary, stockpile volume shall be converted to
surplus aggregates, the Contractor shall be required to mass using the conversion factor of 2.0 tonnes per cubic
provide a written agreement with the owner of the property. metre.
This document shall indicate that the Ministry will have free
No payment shall be made for any surplus aggregate
access to and use of the surplus aggregate in stockpile for a
remaining at contract completion in excess of the contract
period of 12 months after the completion of the contract
requirement. Material remaining in the pit is the property
work.
of the Ministry.
If the Contractor undertakes private work from within the
private pit, measurements for surplus aggregate in stockpile Surplus shouldering, surfacing, crushed base and subbase
will not be taken until the completion of the private work, aggregates will be paid in accordance with SS 202.

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (12 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 404 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

APPENDIX 515-A
QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES

1.01 GENERAL • The list of testing equipment available for project

work.
The Contractor’s responsibility for preparing submitting
and adhering to a Quality Control Plan are specified in The Quality Control Plan shall include the designation of
SS 514.04. This Appendix provides requirements and specific personnel responsible for specific quality control
guidelines for the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan, in duties.
addition to those set out in SS 515.04.
• There shall be a designated Quality Control Manager,
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN as per SS 515.04.03. The Quality Control Manager
As a requirement, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a shall be qualified as per SS 515.04.03. The Quality
Quality Control Plan for evaluation. The Plan may be Control Manager shall be responsible for the
operated wholly, or in part by a qualified Subcontractor or preparation and sign off of the Quality Control Plan,
an independent organization/agency. However, the Quality responsible for all Quality Control testing, and
Control Plan, including compliance with the Plan and its inspections, responsible for the sign off of all quality
modifications, is the responsibility of the Contractor. control testing and inspection records and responsible
for all quality control submissions to the Ministry. The
The Plan shall address all elements that affect the quality of individual shall be identified and named in the Quality
the Hot-In-Place recycled asphalt pavement including, but Control Plan submission. If the Contractor requests a
not limited to, the following: change in the Quality Control Manager, then a formal
request to the Ministry Representative shall be made
(a) Supply of Asphalt Materials;
and the Ministry will review the request for approval.
(b) Supply of rejuvenating agents;
• There may be a designated Process Control Technician
(c) Identification of source and proof of quality of (PCT) who would be responsible to ensure the
virgin aggregates to be supplied; laboratory test results and other quality control
(d) Virgin aggregate production and its gradation practices are used to control the quality of aggregates
control; and other mix components and to adjust and control
mix proportions to meet the mix design(s). The PCT
(e) Quality of virgin aggregate components; is responsible for ensuring that testing equipment,
utilized for proportioning and mixing are calibrated
(f) Stockpile management;
and in good working order. The Plan may describe
(g) Asphalt plant calibration and proportioning of how the PCT’s duties, including sampling methods
aggregate components; and responsibilities are to be accomplished and
documented. The Plan should also describe the criteria
(h) Mixing including asphalt cement content control;
to be used by the PCT to correct or reject
(i) Process temperature controls; unsatisfactory materials.
(j) Admix Material and Rejuvenating Agent • There may also be a Pavement Quality Control
application rates and processed dimensions, Technician (PQT) who would be responsible to ensure
placing and finishing; that delivered materials meet the requirements of the
specifications. In addition, the PQT shall be
(k) Joints;
responsible for periodically inspecting all equipment
(l) Density; used in recycling, placing, finishing, and compacting
to assure its proper operating condition and to assure
(m) Smoothness; and
that recycling, placing, application rate, finishing, joint
(n) Segregation construction, and compaction is in conformance with
this specification and the contract requirements.
The Plan shall also include the following:
1.03 CONTRACTOR’S RECORD OF QUALITY
• The name of the Quality Control testing agency and its CONTROL TESTING
proven capability to provide the specific services
required for the project. Test results shall be made on specified forms or charts
immediately after completion of each test. These test results
• The list of dedicated technical staff, if available, are to be made available to the Ministry Representative
(including names, qualifications and relevant upon request.
experience) and their proposed roles.

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (13 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 405 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

Records of gradation control, both during aggregate 1.05 DENSITY

production and also during the asphalt mixing operation,
The Contractor shall take core samples to determine actual
should be kept on the form H0295.
pavement density. At the start of paving, the Contractor
1.04 MATERIALS APPLICATION RATE may take a minimum of two pavement cores from each Sub-
Lot. The Contractor may employ a nuclear moisture-
The Contractor shall control the Material Application Rate
density guage to ensure intermediate density control.
by monitoring the amount of asphalt admix delivered to the
road against the area covered by checking the application 1.06 OTHER QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES
rate every five loads.
The Contractor may initiate other Quality Control
The Contractor shall monitor the addition of rejuvenating procedures as necessary for ensuring production of a quality
agents by calculating the application rate, through product and include them in the Quality Control Plan.
comparing the metered amount with the total area processes Procedures may also be introduced after the start of work as
every one-half hour. necessary as amendments to the Quality Control Plan.
The Contractor is to advise the Ministry Representative on 1.07 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING FREQUENCY
an ongoing basis of the application rate.
Test frequency guidelines for Quality Control are described
in Appendix 515-A, Table 515-A-I.
Table 515-A-I: Test Frequency Guidelines
Activity Test Minimum Frequency
• Split Stockpiles – One (1) for each stockpile for
every Two (2) hours of production.
• One main stockpile – Every 300 tonnes.
ASTM C136: Dry Sieve Analysis of Aggregate • Blend Sand – One (1) for every 100 tonnes during
Test During
stockpiling.
Crushing
• Natural filler – One (1) for every 50 tonnes during
(Virgin
stockpiling.
Aggregate)
ASTM D5821: Determining the Percentage of
• Every second coarse aggregate sieve test.
Fractured Particles
ASTM C117: Sieve Analysis of Aggregates by • One (1) per day on reduced sample obtained from
Washing (Field Lab) combined samples from the crusher.
ASTM C136: Dry Sieve Analysis of Aggregate • One of combined aggregate every 100 tonnes.
• Aggregate – Two (2) tests per Lot.
ASTM C566 & ASTM D2216: Moisture
• Asphalt mix – One (1) on first Sub-Lot and every
Content
second day.
Tests During
ASTM C117: Sieve Analysis of Aggregates by • One (1) per shift on reduced sample obtained from
Asphalt Plant
Washing (Field Lab) combined samples from the plant cold feed.
Mixing
(Admix) ASTM D6307: Asphalt Extraction Test –
• Two (2) per Lot.
Ignition Method
ASTM D5: Penetration of Bituminous
• One (1) per Manufacturer’s Batch.
Materials
ASTM D2171: Viscosity • Contractor’s Option.
Rejuvenating
Rejuvenating Agent • Contractor’s Option.
Agents Tests
ASTM D1559 or AASHTO T245: Resistance
Test During to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using • Contractor’s Option.
Asphalt Marshall Apparatus
Paving for ASTM D2726: Bulk Specific Gravity and
Density Density of Non-Absorptive Compacted • One (1) per Sub-Lot.
Testing (Hot- Bituminous Mixtures (Briquette or Cores)
In-Place ASTM D2041: Theoretical Maximum Specific • One (1) – see Appendix 515-C for Combining
Recycled Gravity of Bituminous Paving Mixtures Cores.
Pavement) • One (1) core for each Sub-Lot. All cores to be
Core Samples
150 mm diameter.

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (14 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 406 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

APPENDIX 515-B
REQUIREMENT FOR PRODUCTION OF ADMIX AGGREGATES

2.01 GRADATION MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE Table 515-J: Maximum Permissible Variation Limits
VARIATION LIMIT
Sieve Size Maximum
The variation limits specified in Table 515-J, when applied (mm) Variation
to the Ministry specified design Admix gradation, shall not
19.0 or 16.0 0%
results in a gradation that is outside of the limits as specified
by the Ministry. 12.5 ± 3.5%
9.5 ± 3.5%
4.75 ± 3.0%
2.36 ± 3.0%
1.18 ± 2.0%
0.600 ± 2.0%
0.300 ± 1.5%
0.150 ± 1.0%
0.075 ± 0.75%

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (15 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 407 of 470
SECTION 515 HOT-IN-PLACE RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (EPS)

APPENDIX 515-C
METHOD TO COMBINE ROAD CORES INTO A SINGLE COMBINED SAMPLE
FOR THE DETERMINATION OF MAXIMUM THEORETICAL DENSITY

3.01 INTRODUCTION Select a core trimmer to attain the minimum combined

sample size. Heat the base of the trimmer by placing on a
After the individual Density for each core has been
burner for a few minutes.
determined, the Sub-Lot road cores shall be combined into
one single sample for the determination of maximum Centre the heated trimmer on the heated cores. Allow equal
theoretical density. clearance on all sides of the core.
3.02 SAMPLE PREPARATION Hold the trimmer vertically by its handle, then press it down
through the core until it reaches the bottom of the pan.
The upper recycled portion of the cores shall be separated
Apply a slight twist if the heated core(s) are difficult to
from other pavement layers by sawing or other effective
penetrate.
methods.
Remove the outside cut rock mix by means of a spatula
The minimum combined sample size required shall be 2,000
spoon and discard.
grams and 2,500 grams for 19.0 mm and 25.0 mm
maximum aggregate size, respectively. Thoroughly mix the resultant combined sample prior to
testing to ensure uniform aggregate coating.
Select a core trimmer to ensure that the minimum sample
size is obtained depending on the thickness of the samples; The complete combined sample must be tested. If the
100 mm, 114 mm, or 127 mm core trimmers may be used. resultant sample size exceeds the available capacity of the
container used for vacuum saturation, it may be tested a
Place the core samples in a pan and heat to 130 oC ± 5oC for
portion at a time.
about 20 minutes to allow the specimens to be easily
trimmed, do not overheat. The cores can be stacked on top
of each other and trimmed together or individually.

BC MoTI SS 2020 515 (16 of 16)

Vol. 1 Page 408 of 470
 SECTION 521

ASPHALT STABILIZED BASE COURSE MIXED IN PLACE

DESCRIPTION provided with pneumatic tires and propelled by a power unit

capable of maintaining a constant and uniform speed.
521.01 Scope – This Section describes the materials, plant,
equipment and work practice required for the in-place 521.22.01 Minimum Equipment – In order to be
stabilization of granular base course material mixed with acceptable, the distributor shall be provided with the
selected bituminous binder. following minimum equipment:
(a) Quick opening gate in the dome.
EQUIPMENT (b) A measuring dipstick calibrated in 100 L increments or
in 20 mm gradations and provided with a calibration
521.21 General Condition of Plant and Equipment
chart indicating the number of litres for each 20 mm in
521.21.01 The Contractor shall, prior to commencing depth of contained bituminous material for accurate
construction, submit a list of equipment available and ready checking of the distributor contents. In addition, an
for use on the Contract, and shall further certify that the external and readily visible depth gauge or levelometer
equipment listed meets the requirement of this Section in indicating the asphalt content of the tank to the nearest
every respect. 100 L and having an accuracy of  50 L.
521.21.02 Before any work is permitted to commence, the (c) An efficient and positive means of heating the
Contractor's equipment and plant will be carefully bituminous contents uniformly to any temperature up
inspected; should any of it fail to meet the required to 175°C and maintaining the contents constantly at any
standards, work will not be permitted to commence until selected temperature without any local overheating.
such deficiency is corrected.
(d) An approved industrial type thermometer so situated
521.21.03 All equipment and plant shall be in good that its face shall always be readily visible to the spray
mechanical condition and adjustment and be capable of bar operator. The sensing element of the thermometer
efficiently performing the work required of it. shall be placed either directly in contact with the hot
bituminous material or enclosed in a thin walled well
521.21.04 Once the Contractor's equipment list has been
of approved manufacture, so placed as to accurately
accepted, provision and maintenance of all equipment listed
measure the temperature of the material in the tank.
shall become an essential part of the contract and no
The thermometer shall have a minimum range of 10°C
equipment or plant may be released from the Contract work
to 175°C subdivided into 1°C graduations and be
for use elsewhere until completion, except by the express
accurate to  0.5°C.
written permission of the Ministry Representative.
(e) Rear mounted spray bars and nozzles set parallel to the
521.21.05 The Ministry Representative shall have access at
surface to be sprayed and capable of vertical and lateral
all times to any plant, equipment or machinery to be used
adjustment. The spray bars shall be capable of
on this contract in order to check calibration, control or
operating adjustments. Where adjustment appears adjustment to provide a minimum spraying width of
necessary, a competent technician or instrument repair 1.8 m and a maximum spraying width of 7.5 m.
laboratory shall do it. The feed to the spray bars must be so arranged that there
shall be a constant circulation of hot bituminous
521.21.06 Plant, machinery and equipment specified
material to the bars such as will ensure a uniform
hereafter shall represent a minimum requirement for the
viscosity and constant pressure of the bituminous
type of machine described and does not represent a
comprehensive list of equipment to be supplied by the material at each nozzle, both before and during
Contractor, who shall supply whatever plant and equipment spraying operations. Feed manifolds to spray bars shall
be provided with strainers to prevent clogging of bars
may be necessary to the proper and efficient completion of
and nozzles.
the work.
(f) Rotary adjustable, spray bar nozzles which shall be so
521.21.07 All plant and equipment shall be under the
designed and set as to ensure a uniformly fan shaped
control of experienced and skilled operators.
spray without atomization, overlapping on the surface
521.22 Pressure Distributor – The pressure distributor to be sprayed, such that there shall be produced a
used for applying bituminous materials shall consist of a uniformly sprayed surface to clearly defined edges of
fully insulated tank with a minimum capacity of 5000 L the sprayed lane without any reduction of the rate of
permanently and rigidly mounted on a truck or trailer application adjacent to the edges of the lane. Spray

BC MoTI SS 2020 521 (1 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 409 of 470
SECTION 521 ASPHALT STABILIZED BASE COURSE
MIXED IN PLACE

nozzles shall be provided with valves capable of instant 521.25 Compaction Equipment – Compaction equipment
full opening or positive cut-off. shall consist of approved steel wheel rollers, pneumatic tired
rollers, vibrating rollers or tampers.
(g) A connection to a circulating pressure manifold to
which a hose may be attached for a single nozzle, hand 521.25.01 Self-Propelled Steel Rollers – Self-propelled
operated outlet. steel rollers may be three-wheel rollers or tandem rollers.
These rollers shall be equipped with power units of not less
(h) A pressure gauge accurate to 15 kPa and calibrated
than four cylinders, unless otherwise approved by the
pressure pump, equipped with a tachometer registering
Ministry Representative, and under working conditions
litres per minute and driven by an independent
shall be capable of developing a compression in the rear
mechanically governed power unit, so designed as to be
wheels of not less than 4.0 kg/mm² over a minimum roller
capable of applying through the spray nozzles fitted,
width of 500 mm. At least one roller on each job shall be
and accurately measuring quantities of bituminous
capable of developing a roll pressure of 4.5 kg/mm² of
material at a minimum rate of 900 L per minute.
width. Rollers shall be in good working condition and free
(i) Both pressure gauge and tachometer shall be mounted from backlash, faulty steering mechanism or worn parts.
to be readily visible to the operator. Rollers shall be equipped with adjustable scrapers to keep
the rolls clean and with an efficient means of keeping the
(j) A fifth wheel tachometer, registering metres per minute
wheels wet to prevent mixes from sticking to the rolls. Rolls
and so calibrated and mounted as to be readily visible shall be free of flat areas, dents, openings or projections,
to the driver of the distributor, to enable the operator to which will mar the surface of the pavement.
maintain the constant speed required for application of
bituminous material to the road at the specified rate. 521.25.02 Pneumatic Tire Rollers – Pneumatic tire rollers
shall be either self-propelled or towed type, single or double
521.23 Blade Graders – Self-propelled blade graders
axle, having a minimum effective rolling width of 1.2 m.
mounted on pneumatic tires shall be of approved modern
The rollers shall be equipped with smooth tread pneumatic
type, either four wheel drive or tandem type having tires of equal size and diameter. The wheels of the roller
sufficient capacity to efficiently perform all work that may shall be so spaced that two passes of a single axle roller or
be required on the contract. Unless otherwise approved by
one pass of a two-axle roller will accomplish one complete
the Ministry Representative, all graders shall meet the
coverage equal to the rolling width of the machine. There
criteria listed in Table 521-A.
shall be a minimum 6 mm overlap of the tracking wheels of
a double axle roller. The wheels of towed rollers to be used
Table 521-A: Criteria for Blade Graders on granular base preparation may wobble. The roller shall
be so constructed that the contact pressure shall be uniform
Minimum Weight 7.25 t for all wheels and the tire pressure of the several tires shall
not vary more than 35 kPa. Pneumatic tire rollers shall be
constructed with ample ballast space to provide an operating
Minimum Blade Length 3.6 m weight of 4.5 to 8 kg/mm² of tire track width. The total
operating weight of the roller may be varied by the Ministry
Minimum Wheelbase 5.5 m Representative. The towing vehicle for towed type roller
shall be equipped with smooth tread pneumatic tires.
Minimum Cubic Displacement of Pistons:
7.0 L
4 Cycle Motors 521.25.03 Vibrating Tampers – Vibrating tampers to be
Minimum Cubic Displacement of Pistons: used for the compaction of bituminous base in places
4.0 L inaccessible to rollers, shall be of a type suitable for the
2 Cycle Motors
work to be performed and shall be subject to the approval of
the Ministry Representative.
521.24 Pulverizing and Rotary Mixing Machines – 521.25.04 Vibrating Compaction Equipment – The
Pulverizing and rotary mixing machines to be used on the Contractor may use vibrating compaction equipment to
work shall be standard machines, factory produced by a compact the stabilized base, provided that such equipment
reputable manufacturer, so designed and constructed as to produces compaction and surface finish equal to that
satisfactorily break up all base aggregations into constituent obtainable by using a steel wheel finish roller having a
particles and capable of thoroughly and uniformly mixing minimum compression roll pressure of 4.5 kg/mm².
the granular base material and applied asphaltic binder so as
to produce a uniformly coated mix free from lumps, balls or
segregation. The Contractor may use any machine of the
Contractor's choice, subject to the approval of the Ministry
Representative.

BC MoTI SS 2020 521 (2 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 410 of 470
SECTION 521 ASPHALT STABILIZED BASE COURSE
MIXED IN PLACE

CONSTRUCTION kinematic viscosity of 150 mm2/s to 200 mm²/s in the

binder.
521.31 Methods – Based on whether the granular base has
been completed by others or by the Contractor, the A disc harrow or rotary type mixer shall immediately
applicable construction method specified below shall be follow the distributor after the application of the
followed. bituminous binder and shall continue to operate on the
treated strip until all free bituminous material has been
521.31.01 Method I –Where the granular base has been
mixed into the mineral aggregate. The treated mixture
previously completed by others, Method I shall apply as
shall then be further mixed with a blade grader until a
follows
uniform mixture results.
(a) The granular base shall be regraded to true line, grade
The mixture shall then be spread uniformly across the
and cross section; the top 65 mm of the base shall be
road once more, a second uniform application of
loosened by means of scarifying. The lumps of bonded
bituminous binder at a rate of 0.9 L/m2 to 1.8 L/m² as
material are to be broken to constituent gravel by
may be directed by the Ministry Representative shall be
harrowing, blading or rotary tilling. The loose material
sprayed at an application temperature to give a final
is to be bladed into a windrow, approximately 10 cm in
asphalt content of 4% to 6% of the mix. The second
height on both sides of the road. This windrow will act
application of bituminous binder shall be mixed with
as a dam in case of spillage or the occurrence of rain
the mineral aggregate in a similar manner to the first
after the spraying has taken place.
application, taking care that during the blade mixing
(b) The prepared gravel surface shall be primed on the side none of the untreated base below the prime or shoulder
not obstructed by the windrow, to the outside width material is brought into the mix. Blade mixing shall be
required at a rate of 1 L/m2 to 1.5 L/m² or as may be continued until the bituminous binder and mineral
ordered, employing the bituminous binder selected by aggregates are thoroughly mixed to uniform colour,
the Ministry Representative within a spraying free from fat spots, balls and uncoated particles. If the
temperature range which corresponds to a kinematic mixture should become wet before the mixing process
viscosity of 150 mm2/s to 200 mm²/s in the binder. is complete, the mixing operations shall be continued
until it has dried out. After final mixing, the mixture
Priming shall be applied only when the surface is dry
shall be brought to a single windrow.
or slightly damp, and unless otherwise permitted by the
Ministry Representative, when the air temperature in (d) Before the finished mixture is finally spread for
the shade is not less than 10°C rising or 12°C falling. compaction, a triangular cut shall be made with a blade
When the prime has been completely absorbed by the at each edge of the base course to provide for a
prepared surface, blade the windrow of loose surface thickened edge of bituminous mixture. The cut shall be
course onto the primed half of the road and prime the approximately 50 mm deep at the outer edge and slope
untreated half of the surface in a like manner. to zero, 0.6 m in toward the centre. In making the cut,
the excavated material shall be thrown to the shoulder
Generally, the applicable provisions of SS 502.21 shall
in a small windrow against which the mixture shall be
govern this work. spread. The bituminous mixture shall be spread for
(c) Immediately prior to the application of bituminous compaction from the large windrow. It shall be bladed
binder, the windrow of loose gravel shall be bladed from this windrow in a succession of thin layers to
across the road to a full width uniform cross section. If correct thickness and a uniform cross section with a
wet or damp, it shall be first bladed back and forth until camber of 1 in 45 (except at curves, where the correct
dry unless an emulsion is to be used. Cutback super-elevation originally set for base shall be
bituminous binder shall not be applied until the followed).
moisture content has been reduced to 1.5%. In the case
After the mixture has been spread as specified, it shall
of emulsions, mixing may commence when the
be compacted by means of rollers, the operation shall
moisture content of the gravel has been reduced to 4%.
begin at the edges of the course and progress toward the
No asphaltic binder shall be sprayed on the granular centre parallel to the centerline of the roadway,
aggregate unless the average temperature of the overlapping in successive passes by at least one-half the
aggregate on the road is 13°C or higher and such width of the roller. Initial breakdown compaction may
temperature can be maintained in the aggregate until be obtained by use of steel or rubber tired rollers until
the full mixing cycle has been completed. no appreciable surface movement or roller marks are
visible and the surface has been satisfactorily sealed.
Upon the layer of graded aggregate, the bituminous Final rolling to eliminate rubber tire or other marks and
binder shall be applied uniformly at a rate of 1.35 L/m², irregularities shall be carried out using an approved
at an application temperature required to produce a steel wheel finish roller or steel wheel vibrating rollers
or other satisfactory equipment.

BC MoTI SS 2020 521 (3 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 411 of 470
SECTION 521 ASPHALT STABILIZED BASE COURSE
MIXED IN PLACE

Compaction shall be carried out to the satisfaction of PAYMENT

the Ministry Representative.
521.91 Payment – Payment for asphalt stabilizing granular
Should unsatisfactory areas develop during base course in place will be made as follows:
compaction, they shall be corrected as directed by the
(a) Spray Asphalt – Payment for Spray Asphalt will be at
Ministry Representative.
the Contract Unit Price per litre for the actual number
521.31.02 Method II – When the granular base and base of litres sprayed on the road converted to its volume at
stabilization are included in the Contract, Method II shall 15.6°C. The rate for spraying asphalt shall cover
apply as described hereunder: acceptance of asphalt at points of delivery, storing,
heating, transport, spraying, traffic control, labour
(a) The first lift of granular base, 90 mm, shall be hauled
superintendence, equipment and machinery required to
to the roadway, spread, graded to line, grade and cross
carry out all asphalt spraying work including priming
section, and compacted to 100% of the Standard
described in this Section.
Proctor Maximum Dry Density as obtained in the
laboratory following ASTM D698. (b) Process Base Gravel – Payment for Process Base
Gravel will be at the Contract Unit Price per square
(b) On completion of the above roadways, as described in
metre of measured completed surface, constructed to
the foregoing, priming may be commenced.
dimensions ordered. Payment will not be made for
(c) On completion of priming and curing the second lift, extra width of surface mixed or compacted beyond the
60 mm of granular base may be hauled to the primed limits specified.
roadway and spread in a uniform windrow and mixing
The rate for processing base gravel shall cover
commenced as described in SS 521.31(c).
provision of all tools, labour, equipment and services
(d) On completion of base stabilization, the remaining required to cut, shape, dry, pulverize, mix and lay out
granular base may be applied, i.e., from the edge of the the base; all compaction; warning signs, barriers, lights,
stabilized base to the shoulder. traffic control and superintendence required to
thoroughly mix and compact the asphalt and aggregate
in place on the road.
MEASUREMENT Payment of measured quantities at the bid rates for the
521.81 Spray Asphalt – Spray Asphalt will be measured by above two items shall be full compensation for all work and
the LITRE sprayed on the road. services performed and materials and equipment supplied to
complete asphalt stabilization of granular base course
521.82 Process Base Gravel – Process Base Gravel will be material according to the description and intent of this
measured by the SQUARE METRE of completed surface, Section.
constructed to dimensions ordered.

BC MoTI SS 2020 521 (4 of 4)

Vol. 1 Page 412 of 470
 SECTION 531

ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS

DESCRIPTION 531.13 Mineral Aggregate Supply – Mineral cover

aggregate meeting the requirements described hereunder
531.01 Scope – This Section specifies the materials, plant,
shall be supplied by the Contractor unless specifically
equipment and quality of work required for the construction
described otherwise in the Special Provisions.
of asphalt surface treatments with cover aggregates.
531.14 Mineral Aggregate – Method of Test – Mineral
531.02 Description of Work – Surface treatment shall
Aggregate will be tested in accordance with the ASTM tests
consist of the application of a selected asphalt binder
listed in Table 531-A.
material to a previously constructed bituminous pavement,
or a well compacted crushed granular surface followed by
Table 531-A: Test Methods for Mineral Aggregates
the application and embedment of a course(s) of selected
aggregate to provide a new surface which shall be ASTM Test Name of Test
impervious to moisture, have a non-skid texture, high
luminosity and good riding qualities. This normally would Standard Test Method for Soundness of
be a graded aggregate seal or a coarse sand seal or any other C88 Aggregates by use of Sodium Sulfate or
surface treatment outlined in the Special Provisions for the Magnesium Sulphate
Project work of the Contract. Standard Test Method for Materials
531.03 Types of Graded Aggregate Seals – There are six Finer than 75-μm (No. 200) Sieve in
C117
types of graded aggregate seals as characterized by the Mineral Aggregates by WashingWash
maximum and minimum gradations of the cover aggregate Test of Aggregates.
as defined in SS 531.17. Standard Test Method for Relative
C127 Density (Specific Gravity) and
The Classes and their common applications are: Absorption of Coarse Aggregates
(a) Class A – Double seals on gravel highways Standard Test Method for Relative
(b) Class B – Double seals on gravel highways, and C128 Density (Specific Gravity) and
single seals low traffic paved roads Absorption of Fine Aggregates
Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis
(c) Class C and Mod C – Major Highways
C136 of Fine and Coarse Aggregates Sieve
(d) Class D – Major Highways Analysis of Aggregates.
(e) Class E – Residential areas and second seals Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps
C142
and Friable Particles in Aggregates.
Standard Test Method for Total
MATERIALS C566 Evaporable Moisture Content of
Aggregate by Drying
531.11 Asphalt Materials – Asphalt(s) to be used on
surface treatment may be standard rapid curing cutback Standard Practice for Sampling
D75
asphalt; medium curing cutback asphalts; or anionic or Aggregates.
cationic emulsions including high float emulsified asphalts Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit,
meeting the requirements of SS 952. Types and grades of D4318 Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of
asphalt binder proposed for use on the Project will be Soils
specified in the Special Provisions.
Standard Test Method for Flat Particles,
531.12 Coating and Anti-Stripping Additives – For D4791 Elongated Particles, or Flat and
general use or for experimental or trial purposes, the Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate
Ministry Representative may direct the use of surface active Standard Test Method for Determining
"coating and anti-stripping additives" or any other materials D5821 the Percentage of Fractured Particles in
formulated to improve the coating and adhesive properties Coarse Aggregate
of the asphalt binder to the selected cover aggregate. In such
Standard Test Method for Resistance of
cases, instructions concerning the type of additive to be
supplied and the method of incorporation with the asphalt D6928 Coarse Aggregate to Degradation by
binder will be specified in the Special Provisions or, if the Abrasion in the Micro-Deval Apparatus.
work has commenced, will be the subject of supplementary
written instructions to the Contractor.

BC MoTI SS 2020 531 (1 of 10)

Vol. 1 Page 413 of 470
SECTION 531 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS

531.15 Mineral Aggregate – Physical Requirements This does not alleviate the Contractor from consistently
maintaining the grading curve within the tolerances
531.15.01 Composition – Mineral cover aggregate shall
indicated in the Gradation Limits below.
consist of clean, sound, hard, durable particles or fragments
of sand, gravel or crushed stones or combination thereof;
Table 531-B: Gradation Limits for Graded Aggregate
containing a minimum of thin elongated or flaky pieces such
Seal
as may cause the height constant of the particles to be less
than 0.6. It shall be substantially free from loosely bonded Sieve
aggregations, clay lumps or other objectionable matter and % Passing by Mass by Class
size
shall not, in the Ministry Representative's opinion, be
markedly hydrophilic in character. (mm) A B C Mod C D E
531.15.02 Test Requirements – For the purpose of testing, 19 100 - - - - -
the mineral cover aggregate shall be considered to be 16 - 100 100 100 - -
divided into coarse and fine (sand) fractions. Fine
aggregates shall consist of all material passing through a 12.5 1
60-90 60-90 - - 100 -
4.75 mm standard sieve, unless some other boundary shall 9.5 40-80 35-75 30-70 25 -55 30-80 100
be specifically described under the respective Method of
Test. 4.75 20-60 15-50 25-45 7 – 30 25-45 0-30

The mineral cover aggregate, when tested by the methods 0.600 0-25 0-15 5-20 0 -10 5-20 0-10
listed in SS 531.14, shall meet the following criteria: 0.075 0-7 0-5 0-3 0–3 0-3 0-3
(a) Clay Lumps – Coarse aggregate shall not contain more Ratio 2
- - - 1 – 1.5 - -
than 0.5% by mass of clay lumps or other aggregation (9.5/4.75)
of fine material. Notes:
(b) Absorption – maximum 1.0% by mass for coarse 1
The Contractor may use either the 12.5 mm or the
aggregate; maximum 1.5% by mass for fine aggregate. 13.2 mm sieve, at the Contractor’s option.
(c) Soundness – When tested for soundness by 2
The “Ratio” is the ratio of the mass of material
ASTM C 88, the aggregate shall not show a weighted retained on the 9.5 mm sieve, divided by the mass
loss for five cycles in excess of 12% when Magnesium of material retained on the 4.75 mm sieve.
Sulphate is used (or have a satisfactory record of
service). Table 531-C: Variation Limits
(d) Degradation – No individual test shall have more than
20 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 6928. Maximum Permissible Tolerance
Sieve Size
% Passing by Mass
(mm)
531.17 Graded Aggregate Seal – Requirements (ASTM C117 & ASTM C136)

531.17.01 Gradation – Gradations shall meet the limit 4.75 to 19.0  4.5
stated in Table 531-B for each Class of graded aggregate 0.600  3.5
seal.
0.075  1.0
(a) Fracture – When tested according to SS 202,
Appendix 1 fractured faces, the minimum % by mass
on coarse aggregate shall be as follows: 531.17.02 Coarse Aggregate
• Classes A & B: 70% (a) Defined as all material retained on the 4.75 mm sieve.
• Classes C, D, & E: 85% (b) Consist of crushed stone or gravel, or a combination
(b) Variation Limits – Once the grading curve is thereof; or materials naturally occurring in a fractured
established within the above limits, the maximum condition; or materials naturally occurring of highly
permissible variation of the mean of any five angular nature or rough texture with a maximum result
consecutive tests from the grading curve shall be within of 20 when tested in accordance with ASTM D6928.
the tolerance specified in Table 531-C. (c) Free from coating of clay, silt or other deleterious
These tolerances do not waive the requirement that the material and shall meet the applicable test requirements
running average of five consecutive tests must be of SS 531.14 and SS 531.15.
maintained at all times inside the limits specified in
SS 531.17.01. Should the Contractor not be able to
maintain the grading within the variation limits
specified above they shall construct a second stockpile.

BC MoTI SS 2020 531 (2 of 10)

Vol. 1 Page 414 of 470
SECTION 531 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS

531.17.03 Fine Aggregate completion, except by the express written permission of the
Ministry Representative.
(a) Defined as all materials passing the 4.75 mm sieve and
shall meet the applicable test requirements of 531.21.04 The Ministry inspectors shall have access at all
SS 531.14 and SS 531.15. times to any plant, equipment or machinery to be used on
the Project in order to check calibration, control or operating
(b) Clean, hard, durable, moderately sharp, and free from
adjustments. Where adjustment appears necessary, it shall
coatings of clay, silt or other deleterious material and
be done by a competent operator or mechanic or instrument
shall contain no clay balls or other aggregations of fine
repair technician, as required.
material.
531.21.05 Plant, machinery and equipment specified
531.17.04 Mineral Filler and Mineral Dust
hereafter shall represent a minimum requirement for the
(a) Mineral filler shall consist of all mineral matter passing type of machine described and does not represent a
the 0.600 mm sieve and the mineral dust shall consist comprehensive list of equipment to be supplied by the
of all mineral matter passing the 0.075 mm sieve. Contractor who shall supply whatever plant and equipment
may be necessary to the proper and efficient completion of
(b) Mineral filler and mineral dust shall be free from
the work
organic matter.
531.21.06 All plant and equipment shall be under the
(c) Mineral filler shall be non-plastic when tested in control of experienced and skilled operators.
accordance with ASTM D4318.
531.22 Pressure Distributor – The pressure distributor
531.18 Presealing Sand – Sand required for use as a fine
used for applying asphalt materials shall consist of a fully
aggregate in connection with presealing operations
insulated tank with a minimum capacity of 5000 L,
conducted under SS 531.36 shall meet the physical
permanently and rigidly mounted on a truck or fifth wheel
requirements of SS 531.15, but unless otherwise specified trailer provided with pneumatic tires and propelled by a
by the Ministry Representative, shall have a grading as power unit capable of maintaining a constant and uniform
specified in Table 531 D. speed.
Table 531 D: Physical Requirements for Sand in a Fine The pressure distributor, to be acceptable, shall be provided
Aggregate with at least the following equipment:

SIEVE SIZE (mm) PERCENTAGE PASSING (a) A quick opening gate in the dome.

4.75 100 (b) A dipstick calibrated in 20 mm increments and a

calibration chart showing the volume for each 20 mm
2.36 80 – 100 of depth, or provide the manufacturer dipstick and
1.18 60 – 90 chart. Readily visible external depth gauge indicating
0.300 25 – 70 the quantity of asphalt in the tank to the nearest 50 L.
0.150 10 – 40 (c) A means of heating the asphalt material uniformly to
any temperature up to 175°C and maintaining the
0.075 2 – 12
contents constantly at any selected temperature without
Note: All aggregate passing the 0.425 mm sieve shall be non-plastic. any local overheating.
(d) A heavy duty, industrial-type thermometer and a
EQUIPMENT remote reading dial thermometer.
531.21 General (e) Rear-mounted spray bars and nozzles set parallel to the
surface to be sprayed and capable of vertical and lateral
531.21.01 A minimum of fourteen (14) days before adjustment. The spray bars shall be capable of
commencing work under the Contract, the Contractor shall adjustment to provide a uniformly sprayed surface from
submit a list of equipment available and ready for use on the a minimum of 0.6 m to at least 4 m width.
Project.
The spray bars shall be capable of producing up to triple
531.21.02 Before any work is permitted to commence, the coverage at one pass. The feed to the spray bars must
Contractor's equipment and plant will be carefully inspected be arranged so that there is a constant circulation of hot
and should any of it fail to meet the required standards, work asphalt material to the bars to ensure a uniform
will not be permitted to commence until such deficiency is viscosity and constant pressure of the liquid asphalt at
corrected. each nozzle both before and during spraying
531.21.03 Provision of all equipment listed shall become an operations.
essential part of the contract and no equipment or plant may
be released from the Project work for use elsewhere until

BC MoTI SS 2020 531 (3 of 10)

Vol. 1 Page 415 of 470
SECTION 531 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS

(f) The feed manifolds to the spray bars shall be provided defined, straight edges and without any lateral movement of
with positive filtration to prevent clogging of bars and the aggregate after initial application.
nozzles.
A walkway with protective railings, conforming to the
(g) Rotary adjustable spray bar nozzles shall be of the same applicable WorksafeBC Regulations, shall be provided at
type, correct size and manufacture; and set to produce the front of the spreader so that the hopper operator has safe
uniformly fan-shaped sprays without atomization. access to the individual gate control levers.
Nozzles shall be inspected daily and any nozzle having
The spreader shall be designed to apply aggregate at any
nicked or damaged edges shall be replaced.
application width between 2 m and 4.12 m. Note: A 4.26 m
(h) Spray nozzles shall be provided with valves capable of hopper is required.
instant full opening and positive cut-off.
531.24 Rollers – Self-propelled pneumatic tired rollers
(i) A connection to a circulating pressure manifold to (mass range from 13 600 kg to 19 000 kg) shall be used on
which a hose may be attached for a single nozzle the work. The rollers shall have a minimum effective
hand-operated outlet. rolling width of 1.83 m. The rollers shall be equipped with
smooth, wide-tread compaction tires of equal size and
(j) A pressure pump capable of applying the asphalt
diameter. The wheels of the roller shall be spaced so that
material at a minimum rate of 180 L per minute, per
one pass of the roller shall accomplish one complete
metre of spray bar.
coverage equal to the rolling width of the machine. There
(k) A pressure gauge accurate to within 15 kPa and a metre shall be a minimum overlap of 6 mm of the tracking wheels
calibrated in litres per minute, shall be readily visible. of the roller. The wheels shall be so mounted as to oscillate
in pairs. The roller shall be provided with ample ballast
(l) A fifth-wheel tachometer, calibrated in metres per
space and be so constructed that the specified wheel load
minute and readily visible to the operator of the can be uniformly applied to all the wheels, to provide
distributor. similar contact pressure under all wheels when rolling on a
(m) Vehicle spring "tie-downs" to prevent the change in level pavement.
height of the spray bars due to the reduction of the
The tires shall have a minimum of 16 ply and their inflation
asphalt load during spraying.
pressure shall not normally exceed the specified pressure by
(n) Electronic distance measuring device, with print out more than 35 kPa and shall at no time be less than specified.
connected to the transmission, that is capable of Inflation pressure of all of the tires shall be controlled from
measuring each spray length and the total length a central location while the machine is in motion and
sprayed during the day. capable of varying the tire pressure from 206 kPa to
827 kPa. Rollers shall be ballasted and operated to the
531.23 Mechanical Spreader – Cover aggregate shall be manufacturers recommended specifications.
spread by means of an efficient, self-propelled spreader
mounted on pneumatic tires and capable of continuously The Ministry Representative may approve the use of
and uniformly spreading closely regulated quantities of compactors equal to but differing from the above
crushed aggregates at the application rates selected. The requirements provided the Ministry Representative is
loading hopper shall be of such a capacity as to ensure satisfied that equally effective compaction will be obtained
continuous operation between dumps of aggregate. by use of the alternative equipment.
Aggregate shall be transferred from the loading hopper to
The Ministry Representative may approve the use of
the front spreading device in such a manner as to ensure a rubber-covered, vibrating drum rollers (minimum width of
uniform flow and prevent segregation of particles. 1.52 m and mass of 3000 kg) or tandem steel wheel rollers
The spreading mechanism shall be so designed as to in the static mode provided the drum or drums can contact
distribute and spread aggregate across the selected width the road surface over the entire width of the drums (no
without segregation. Aggregate shall be applied to the bridging). On shoulder seals, the use of pulled wobbly
freshly sprayed surface by use of a screen so that the largest wheel rollers may be used at the discretion of the Ministry
particles are first placed on the road with the smaller Representative. They also may be used on graded aggregate
fractions falling on top. The approved screen is to be seal on gravel surfaces, where the road is wide enough to
mounted beneath the discharge openings of the spreader permit units to turn without damage to the road surface,
mechanism in such a manner that the angle of the screen sealed or otherwise.
relative to the road surface can be easily and quickly
All rollers shall be provided with equipment for spraying
changed. water continuously on all tires or wheels, while rolling is in
Suitable provision shall be made to prevent aggregate from progress, and also be provided with such means as may be
rolling on the freshly sprayed surface. The cover aggregate required to keep the tires clean and free of adhering
shall be applied ahead of the spreader wheels, with sharply asphaltic binder.

BC MoTI SS 2020 531 (4 of 10)

Vol. 1 Page 416 of 470
SECTION 531 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS

531.25 Power Brooms – Brooming work shall be carried (b) Automated heating and control system with safety
out using rotary power brooms mounted on self-propelled, shutdown.
pneumatic tired tractor units. The brooms shall be capable
(c) Intake/Outlet, two, each with screens installed.
of vertical and horizontal angular adjustment and must be
provided with equipment for spraying water, as required, on (d) Positive locking valve on discharge line.
the surface to be broomed while the equipment is in
operation. The brooms shall have sufficient power and (e) Sampling valve or spigot.
brushing capacity to completely clean the surface of the (f) Pyrometer; Multi point 20°C – 200°C.
standard lane to be treated or which has been treated within
three coverages. (g) Direct reading levelometer.

To be read in conjunction with SS 145.17 and SS 165. (h) Manholes, at each end, with ladders.

531.26 Blade Graders – Self-propelled blade graders (i) Tank(s) with sufficient capacity to hold one day's
mounted on pneumatic tires shall be of approved modern production requirements.
type, either four wheel drive or tandem type, having
sufficient capacity to efficiently perform all work that may
be required on the contract. CONSTRUCTION

531.27 Water Truck – Water trucks shall have a minimum 531.31 Temperature and Weather – Asphalt binder and
capacity of 9000 L. Water shall be applied from a distributor aggregate shall be applied only during the hours of daylight
of the pressure type, equipped with spray bar mounting when the shade air temperature is at least 10°C for graded
nozzles similar to those used on asphalt distributors and aggregate seals and is rising; and when the surface of the
capable of applying the water accurately and uniformly. road is dry and at a minimum temperature of 20°C and
Splash plate type of distributors or those equipped with rising. Operations shall cease when the road temperature
spray bars that eject fine streams of water will not be falls below 20°C for chip seals and 15°C for graded
permitted. aggregate seals. No application shall take place when, in
the opinion of the Ministry Representative, the weather or
The distributor must be provided with a satisfactory means roadbed conditions are unfavourable, i.e., weather is misty
for accurately measuring the quantity of water sprayed. If or rainy, precipitation is predicted for the construction area
the Ministry Representative so requires, measuring within 12 hours or the atmospheric temperature at the
equipment shall be calibrated under the Ministry construction area of less than 12°C is predicted within
Representative's inspection. The Contractor shall make all 24 hours. No chip seal shall be applied before June 1 or
necessary arrangements for obtaining water at the after August 15.
Contractor's own expense. In addition, the water truck shall
be equipped so that it may be used as a flush truck with 531.32 Traffic Control – Traffic control shall meet the
front-mounted, adjustable spray nozzles that produce a requirements of SS 194, the Special Provisions and the
fan-shaped spray in the horizontal mode and can be adjusted following subsections.
in vertical or horizontal direction (ball-mounted). The 531.32.01 Signs and Barriers – The Contractor shall
delivery of water should be variable to single or multiple provide all warning and instructional signs, barriers, lights,
nozzles so that the desired flushing can be achieved. The electronic communicating devices and flagpersons required
water truck shall be equipped with a loading pump capable to properly and safely control all traffic around or through
of pumping 1360 L or more of water per minute. the work in accordance with SS 194, and as may be
The spraying and flushing controls must be in the cab and specially required below.
accessible to the driver while the unit is in motion. The 531.32.02 Detours – Where conditions indicate that traffic
minimum spray bar width will be 2.40 m. Gravity single jet may be detoured, the Contractor shall arrange to close off
or drip bar equipment unit will not be permitted. the section of road to be sealed and erect detour and route
531.28 Sign Truck – Truck(s) of sufficient capacity to store signs. After the completion of the sealing operations traffic
and transport all necessary signs, stands, barriers, flashing shall not be allowed onto the closed sections, for the periods
lights, batteries, flood lights, generators, high-level warning specified in SS 531.32.04, SS 531.36.06 and SS 531.37.04,
devices, project signs, etc., is required. unless otherwise directed by the Ministry Representative.

531.29 Tanks, Mobile Asphalt Heating, & Storage – 531.32.03 Shoulder Detours – Where shoulders are wide
Insulated liquid asphalt storage tanks should meet the and firm enough to accommodate traffic that cannot be
following minimum criteria: detoured along an alternative route, the Ministry
Representative may direct that traffic be detoured onto the
(a) A positive high-low heating system, 10°C to 200°C, shoulder. If required, and approved by the Ministry
with a hot oil/steam circulation system. Representative, the shoulder shall be made up, rolled and
graded on a force account basis. A designated liquid asphalt
shall be sprayed from the edge of the road to the edge of the

BC MoTI SS 2020 531 (5 of 10)

Vol. 1 Page 417 of 470
SECTION 531 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS

shoulder, as required, and allowed to cure before traffic is 531.34 Sweeping – Sweeping shall meet the requirements
detoured off the road to be sealed and onto the shoulders. of SS 145, SS 165, and SS 531.27 regarding equipment for
watering and the following:
The Contractor shall provide sufficient pilot cars and
barriers to maintain traffic movement at a maximum speed (a) Immediately prior to the commencement of the sealing
of 40 km/h solely on the shoulders, during the course of operations, all loose aggregates, dust, dirt, caked clay
work. Once a section has been sealed, traffic will be or foreign materials shall be removed from the width of
regulated as indicated in SS 531.32.04. the surface to be treated by brushing with power
brooms supplemented by hand push brooms, shovels or
531.32.04 Traffic Through Work – Where it is not
the use of a power grader, and where necessary by
possible to detour traffic, sealing work shall normally be
flushing.
carried out in lane widths and traffic shall be regulated by
pilot cars on the opposite traffic lane to that on which (b) Particular care shall be taken to thoroughly clean to the
construction is in progress. Traffic travelling on the old outside edges of the strips to be treated and to ensure
road surface may be permitted to travel up to a maximum that the sweepings are not so deposited on the shoulder
speed of 50 km/h consistent with safety requirements. as to permit subsequent contamination of the treated
Traffic shall only be allowed to travel on the newly-sealed surface.
lane under control of pilot car(s) which shall enforce a
531.35 Patching – In order to avoid delays to the
20 km/h speed limit up to 4 hours and a 30 km/h speed limit
Contractor, any patching not done, and in the opinion of the
for a period of up to 24 hours, as determined by the Ministry
Ministry Representative required before sealing operations
Representative, after completion of the sealing operations;
begin, may be done by the Contractor as directed by the
except in the case of pre-seal construction when the period
Ministry Representative with materials supplied by the
of control shall be up to 4 hours after completion of the
Ministry and paid for under an Order for Extra Work.
pre-sealing operation.
531.36 Pre-Seal Treatment
In the event of prolonged inclement weather, traffic control
will be maintained as long as the Ministry Representative 531.36.01 Description – Wherever the pavement is in a
deems necessary to protect newly laid surface seals. worn, open, dry or porous condition, or on gravel surfaces
which, in the opinion of the Ministry Representative, would
531.32.05 Pilot Cars – Sufficient pilot cars shall be
result in high absorption of the asphalt binder, the surface
provided so that the delay to traffic shall be no greater than
shall be pre-sealed. All pre-sealing work on a Contract
20 minutes. They shall be equipped in accordance with
shall, unless otherwise ordered by the Ministry
SS 194.
Representative, be fully completed prior to the
531.32.06 Communications – The flag people, pilot car(s), commencement of seal coat work.
sign truck, spreader and supervisor's vehicle shall have an
531.36.02 Application of Asphalt Pre-Seal – After the
effective electronic means of communication so that
surface has been prepared in accordance with SS 531.33 and
instructions and information can be quickly and accurately
SS 531.34, a selected asphalt binder shall be sprayed, at
relayed over the total length of the control area.
such application rates as directed, so that just sufficient
531.32.07 Flood Lights – During periods when headlights asphalt material shall be applied to the most absorptive
must be used, including during daytime periods of poor sections of the mat, avoiding an excess elsewhere. The
visibility and high dust conditions, two self-contained asphalt binder shall be applied at the temperature at which
floodlights shall be used to illuminate each of the flagging the Saybolt-Furol Viscosity of the material is in the range of
stations. These floodlights shall be of at least 1000 watts 50 to 75 seconds.
and be complete with reflector, lens and adjustable stand at
531.36.03 Application of Sand Cover
least 2.15 m high. The light, reflector and lens must be
mounted so that they are capable of both vertical and Application of sand in sufficient quantity to completely blot
horizontal adjustment. The stands are to be sufficiently up all excess unabsorbed asphalt material shall follow
sturdy so that they can withstand a 30 km/h wind without within five minutes or as may be directed by the Ministry
the use of ballast. The generators shall have sufficient Representative.
capacity to enable them to run one shift under full load.
At the time of spreading, the sand shall not contain more
531.32.08 Flag Personnel – Flag personnel shall be than 5% moisture by mass.
equipped in accordance with SS 194 and provided as
531.36.04 Rolling – Rolling shall commence immediately
required to safely control and conduct traffic through the
after the application of cover sand and shall be completed
job.
within 15 minutes. Sufficient pneumatic tired rollers shall
531.33 Preparation of Roadway – The patching and be used to ensure that the entire surface of the treated road
levelling of the pavement to be sealed may be part of a receives complete coverage within the specified time, at a
sealcoating contract or may be effected by others. rolling speed not in excess of 8 km/h.

BC MoTI SS 2020 531 (6 of 10)

Vol. 1 Page 418 of 470
SECTION 531 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS

531.36.05 Bleeding – Bleeding spots or areas shall receive seal-coating can normally be completed to the full width of
a further application of sand blotter and be re-rolled. This the road surface each day.
process shall be repeated until no further bleeding occurs.
531.37.02 Application of Cover Aggregate
531.36.06 Traffic – No traffic shall be permitted on
(a) Application – The uniform application of the specified
pre-sealed sections for up to four (4) hours or as the Ministry
cover aggregate, at the spread rate set by the Ministry
Representative may direct.
Representative, shall immediately follow the
531.36.07 Curing Time – No seal coating work shall be application of the asphalt material, before the emulsion
carried out on the pre-sealed surface until 24 hours after breaks or within 2 minutes if a cutback asphalt is
completion of the pre-seal or as the Ministry Representative sprayed. An approved screen shall be used to place the
may direct. larger chips or particles of aggregate onto the sprayed
asphalt first so that maximum embedment of the larger
531.36.08 Sweeping – Prior to commencement of the main
material is obtained. Any segregation shall be
seal-coat treatment all loose, unbonded sand shall be swept
corrected immediately.
from the pre-sealed surface in accordance with SS 531.34.
(b) Moisture Content Graded Seal Aggregates – At the
531.37 Single Pass Surface Treatment
time of spreading, the moisture content of the
531.37.01 Application of Asphalt Material – The selected aggregates shall be such that the material will flow
asphalt material shall be uniformly sprayed on the properly freely in the hopper without segregation and/or a build-
prepared surface at a rate of 0.5 to 2.75 L/m2, or as may be up of material on the screen and shall be less than the
directed, and at such temperature as shall cause the Sayholt maximum allowable in Table 531-E.
Furol Viscosity of the material to be within 50 to
(c) Correction of Non-Uniformity – Prior to and during
75 seconds.
the rolling operation, any non-uniformity in the
Wherever it is possible to detour traffic, the surface may be distribution of the cover aggregate shall be corrected by
sprayed full width at one pass of the distributor. Two spreading additional aggregate and/or by light raking or
spreaders must be used. hand brooming over such sections of the road as the
Ministry Representative directs.
Normally, where it is not possible to detour traffic only one
half of the roadway shall be sprayed at one time, permitting
Table 531-E: Maximum Mass Percentage for Moisture
one-way controlled traffic on the other half. In no case shall
Content of Cover Aggregate
a longitudinal joint be so placed that it is in a wheel path,
the exception being when a double graded seal is being Maximum Allowable
applied. Moisture Content
Aggregate Types
In order to ensure a uniform distribution of asphalt material for Liquid Cut Back
and avoid the formation of a lap or ridge at the transverse and Asphalt Emulsions
junction of two successive applications, building paper shall Fine Cover Sand
be spread over the treated surface for a sufficient length 5%
(≤ 4.5 mm)
back so that the spray jets are operating properly (fully
open) when the uncovered surface is reached. The building Coarse Cover Sand
4%
paper shall then be removed and disposed of prior to the (>4.5 mm)
application of aggregate (Refer to SS 165). There shall be a Small Cover Aggregate
maximum 100 mm overlap of sprayed material at the 3%
(< 9 mm)
longitudinal joint between sprayed lanes.
Medium Cover
The spray shall be cut off before the distributor tank has Aggregate 2%
been completely emptied to ensure that a full application of (9 mm – 12 mm)
asphalt material is made up to the point of cut off. Pressure
hand sprays shall be used to properly treat small patches or Large Cover Aggregate
1%
inaccessible places that have been missed by the distributor. (> 12 mm)
Care shall be taken and building paper shall be used, if
necessary, to ensure against staining any curbs, guardrails
or faces of any improvements near the work. 531.37.03 Rolling – Immediately after the aggregate has
been uniformly spread, the road surface shall be rolled
The progress of the application of the asphalt material shall sufficiently to embed the aggregate into the asphalt material
be governed by the weather, the curing rate of the asphalt to the satisfaction of the Ministry Representative.
and the rate at which the cover aggregate is applied and
rolled. No traffic shall be permitted on the uncovered Sufficient pneumatic tired rollers shall be used to ensure that
asphalt material. The Contractor shall organize work so that the entire surface of the aggregate receives at least five
complete coverages within 15 minutes of the application of

BC MoTI SS 2020 531 (7 of 10)

Vol. 1 Page 419 of 470
SECTION 531 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS

asphalt material; or when asphalt emulsion is used, five aggregate is being disturbed, brooming will cease until
complete coverages shall be completed before the emulsion curing is complete and the cover aggregate is firmly
starts to break. The speed of the rollers shall be such that held in place. Water shall be used in sufficient quantity
the suction of the tires shall not displace the aggregate from to reduce dust hazard and to meet pollution control
the road surface or a maximum of 8 km/h, whichever is less. requirements.
The completed surface shall present a uniform appearance. (b) Alongside barriers and curbs and where catch basins or
Any segregation or non-uniformity in the distribution of the drainage outlets are encountered, the Contractor shall
aggregate shall be corrected by spreading additional pick up and dispose of the surplus aggregate, including
material over the area and re-rolling with five coverages of any pertinent cleaning of catch basins, behind the
the rollers. barriers or curbs or within the right-of-way, in any
manner the Contractor elects, subject to the approval of
531.37.04 Protection of the Surface
the Ministry Representative.
(a) No traffic shall be permitted on the sealed surface until
531.38 Double Pass Surface Treatment
after the rolling has been completed and when the
Ministry Representative is satisfied that the applied 531.38.01 Preparation of Existing Surface – Existing
aggregate will not be picked up or be displaced under surface preparation shall be performed in accordance with
traffic. Generally, traffic shall not be permitted on the SS 531.33 through SS 531.36 as applicable and as detailed
sealed roadway until at least 2 hours after the rolling is in the Special Provisions.
completed. If traffic must be passed over a sealed
531.38.02 Surface Treatment – First Pass – The first pass
surface before 2 hours have passed then they will be
of the surface treatment shall be performed in accordance
kept to a speed of 20 km/h or less. After 2 hours, then
with SS 531.37.01 and SS 531.37.02, using the graded seal
the speed may be increased to 30 km/h up to 4 hours
cover aggregate specified in the Special Provisions.
and not more than 50 km/h for 24 hours or until the
Rolling, Surface Protection and Removal of Loose
surface has been swept. The curing period shall be
Aggregate shall conform to SS 531.37.03 through
increased if so directed by the Ministry Representative.
SS 531.37.05.
(b) From the completion of rubber tired rolling on any
531.38.03 Surface Treatment – Second Pass – The second
section of sealed surface and for a further continuous
pass of the surface treatment shall commence not less than
period of 3 days or more including weekends and public
24 hours after completion of the first pass, subject to
holidays, the Contractor shall have a vehicle(s) and
acceptable weather conditions as detailed in SS 531.31, and
maintenance crew (a minimum of three employees)
as the Ministry Representative may direct. Asphalt material
immediately available to arrest any tendency of the
shall be applied in accordance with SS 531.37.01, followed
asphalt binder to bleed through the surface of the cover
by an application of graded seal aggregate as specified in
aggregate and to prevent pickup and blackening of the
the Special Provisions and detailed in SS 531.37.02, and
surface by the action of traffic. All bleeding spots shall
rolling, surface protection and removal of loose aggregate
be blotted with a sufficient quantity of blinding sand
per SS 531.37.03 through SS 531.37.05.
necessary to correct the defect and in such a manner as
the Ministry Representative shall direct. No payment
will be made for the supplying and placing of the sand.
MEASUREMENT
(c) Blinding Sand – In the event of rain, traffic will be kept
off a newly sealed surface until sand, provided by the 531.81 Surface Treatment – Surface treatment will be
Contractor, has been applied in sufficient quantity to measured by the SQUARE METRE.
protect the surface of the road from damage. Sanding 531.82 Asphalt Binder – Asphalt binder will be measured by
will continue as long as necessary to protect the freshly the LITRE.
laid seal. Payment for the supply and application of this
531.83 Aggregates – The aggregate will be measured by the
sand will be by Order for Extra Work.
CUBIC METRE in stockpile. The volume will be
531.37.05 Removal of Loose Aggregate – To be read in determined in accordance with SS 145.21.01.
conjunction with SS 145 and SS 165.
531.84 Stockpile Bases – No measurement will be made for
(a) The Contractor shall, when directed by the Ministry work and materials required for the preparation of stockpile
Representative, sweep off all surplus aggregate and bases, as directed by the Ministry Representative.
spread it neatly along the gravel shoulders. Sweeping
of the road surface will normally be completed within
48 hours for graded aggregate seals. This operation PAYMENT
shall be done while the road surface is cool and care
531.91 Surface Treatment – Payment for SURFACE
should be exercised not to disturb the aggregate that has
TREATMENT will be at the Contract Unit Price per square
been retained in the asphalt. In the event that cover
metre. The Unit Price shall cover everything done and

BC MoTI SS 2020 531 (8 of 10)

Vol. 1 Page 420 of 470
SECTION 531 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS

supplied including ordering, receiving, storing and heating additional payment will be made for washing when needed
of asphalt materials, traffic control equipment, and all in order to meet gradation requirements.
equipment and labour required to complete the work.
531.94 Stockpile Bases – All work and materials required
531.92 Asphalt Binder – Payment for ASPHALT BINDER for the PREPARATION OF STOCKPILE BASES, as
will be at the Contract Unit Price per litre actually sprayed. directed by the Ministry Representative, will be paid for, on
an Order for Extra Work basis from the Provisional Sum
531.93 Aggregates – Payment for AGGREGATE will be at
included in the Schedule 7.
the Contract Unit Price per cubic metre in stockpile. No

BC MoTI SS 2020 531 (9 of 10)

Vol. 1 Page 421 of 470
SECTION 531 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS

BC MoTI SS 2020 531 (10 of 10)

Vol. 1 Page 422 of 470
 SECTION 536

PAVEMENT CRACK SEALING

DESCRIPTION
Table 536-B: Blinding Sand Gradation Requirements
536.01 Scope – This work consists of restoring the asphalt
concrete pavement surface to a less permeable condition.
The work includes routing when requested, cleaning and Sieve Size (mm) % Passing
filling the crack with sealant, and dusting or sanding. 6.3 100
536.02 Purpose – The purpose of crack sealing shall be to 4.75 95 - 100
prevent moisture from penetrating into the road base 2.36 50 - 100
through surface cracks and to extend pavement life. This
shall be carried out by effectively sealing the cracked 0.600 20 - 70
surface with a highly rubberized and elasticized or high float 0.300 5 - 25
asphalt sealant product. 0.075 0-3

MATERIALS EQUIPMENT
536.11 Asphaltic – The rubberized asphaltic and/or 536.21 Router – Where the cracks require routing, the
elasticized asphalt sealant products shall meet the Contractor shall provide a vertical router capable of routing
requirements listed in Table 536-A. asphaltic pavements to a depth of 25 mm and a width of
It shall be noted that ASTM D6690 requirements are not 16 mm. It shall be capable of a minimum production of
mandatory in the Lower Mainland, Vancouver Island or the 200 metres per hour, even when following meandering
Sunshine Coast. cracks without unnecessary pavement cutting.

As specified in the Special Provisions the Contractor shall 536.22 Cleaner – The cleaner unit shall be a hot
use a Rubberized or High Float Emulsified Asphalt HF150S compressed air fed propane fired device capable of
or, with the approval of the Ministry Representative, either cleaning, heating and drying routed cracks with not less than
HF 150P (hot pour) or HF 250S (cold pour). 1.7 m3/min of compressed air at 690 kPa. It shall have
valving/hoses and fittings for the mixture of liquid propane
gas and compressed air. The hot air exhaust shall not exceed
Table 536-A: Sealant Requirement 315°C.
536.23 Melter – The melting kettle shall be of the double
ASTM
Description boiler type supplying indirect heating to slowly heat the
Test
asphaltic material with heat transfer oil. It shall have built
Specification for joint and crack sealants, hot in calibrated thermometers for both transfer oil and the
D6690 sealing compound. The heating of the sealant shall be
applied, for concrete and asphalt pavements
efficient and thermostatically controlled so as not to exceed
the manufacturer's maximum safe heating temperature and
536.12 Sand – On pavements that require the use of High shall be such as to maintain a constant temperature once the
Float Emulsified Asphalt, the Contractor shall supply sealant is heated. The melter shall be capable of constantly
"blinding sand." The sand, when tested according to ASTM agitating the asphaltic material as it is being heated and shall
C117, shall meet the gradation requirements shown in have a pump circulating the sealant from the bottom to the
Table 536-B and shall be approved by the Ministry top of the kettle.
Representative. The melter must comply with the Gas Safety Act
536.13 Dust Cover – Pavements that are sealed with Regulations and Codes and any other applicable acts and
rubberized or elasticized sealant shall receive a dust coating regulations.
with a material such as Portland Cement, talc, lime or the 536.24 Filler Tools – Crack filler devices and strike off
equivalent material approved by the Ministry tools must be such that successful forming of the bead of
Representative. sealant over the prepared crack is as specified in this
Section.

BC MoTI SS 2020 536 (1 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 423 of 470
SECTION 536 PAVEMENT CRACK SEALING

CONSTRUCTION The sealant shall be applied to cracks that have been routed
to a uniform depth and width.
536.31 General – Crack sealing shall only be performed
when the pavement surfaces are dry, and the crack and road Cracks having a width greater than 16 mm need not be
base are dry or nearly dry (no visible moisture), and the routed but shall be cleaned to a minimum depth of 25 mm.
surface temperature shall be 10°C or higher.
Within two minutes of the completion of the cleaning
The Ministry Representative shall select a random sample operation, the crack shall be filled with sealant from a melter
of virgin sealant from each Lot for testing purposes. using a connecting wand or manual applicator (pouring
cone) which ensures minimum pour application
Where required by the Contract, cracks up to 16 mm in
temperatures for the product are maintained.
width shall be widened by using a router to form a sealant
reservoir 16 mm in width and from 19 mm to 25 mm in Upon completion of the pouring, the sealant shall be dusted
depth. All routing shall be performed keeping the crack to prevent the asphalt from tracking. Excess dusting
centreline within  8 mm of the centre of the rout and shall material shall be removed.
be cleaned with a hot compressed air lance. Material
536.33 High Float Emulsified Asphalt – High Float
removed from the cracks shall be disposed of in an
Emulsified Asphalt shall be used on pavement where there
environmentally compliant and sound manner as approved
are depressions or lipping at the cracks, or majority of
by the Ministry Representative.
cracks are 5 mm to 35 mm in width.
The routing speed shall be such that the pavement is
The cracks shall be cleaned as close to the actual depth as
carefully cut, not broken or torn out, and the sides of the rout
possible and the removed material shall be disposed of in an
are smooth and uniform. The surface of the pavement and
environmentally compliant and sound manner as approved
routed crack shall be cleaned of all dust and routing debris.
by the Ministry Representative. Immediately after cleaning,
Routing should not be carried out on pavements that are of they shall be filled with sealant from a distributor truck or
such an age that pavement fractures or spalls occur along melter. The distributor truck or melter shall have an
the edge of the freshly routed crack. Normally pavement efficient means of heating the sealant to any temperature up
fractures or spalls should not occur unless pavements are in to 100°C and maintaining it constantly at the manufacturer's
excess of ten (10) years old. The decision to forgo routing prescribed temperature without overheating.
shall be made by the Ministry Representative.
Upon completion of the sealing of the crack, the sealant
The crack shall be filled with sealant from the bottom to the shall be sanded to prevent the asphalt from tracking. Excess
surface level in such a manner that the sealant does not sand shall be removed and disposed of, by the Contractor,
bridge entrapped air pockets. Material shall be placed to in an environmentally compliant and sound manner as
overfill the crack. It will then be struck off to leave a approved by the Ministry Representative.
uniform amount of sealant directly over the crack, with the
536.34 Warranty – The Contractor shall rectify any defects
edges of the spread evenly feathered to overlap on the
identified during the Warranty Period within twenty-one
pavement surface from a minimum of 25 mm to a maximum
(21) days from the time first detected by or reported to the
of 40 mm on each side of the crack. The sealant overband
Contractor to the satisfaction of the Ministry
shall not be so thick that it can be removed during snow
Representative.
plowing or produce a noticeable bump when traversed by
traffic.
The Contractor shall repair any damage done to the sealant MEASUREMENT
by stones or any other deleterious material being embedded
536.81 General – Pavement Crack Sealing will be
in the sealing compound.
measured by the LITRE using weight slips.
The Contractor shall ensure that traffic is kept off the sealed
cracks until the sealant has properly set up and will not be
damaged or pulled out by the passage of traffic. PAYMENT
536.32 Rubberized and Elasticized Asphalt Sealants – 536.91 General – Payment for PAVEMENT CRACK
These shall be used on pavements that are less than seven SEALING will be at the Contract Unit Price bid per litre.
(7) years old and where the majority of cracks are less than The Unit Price shall be full compensation for all labour,
25 mm in width. equipment and materials supplied as required to rout or
clean with compressed air and seal the pavement cracks, as
specified.

BC MoTI SS 2020 536 (2 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 424 of 470
 SECTION 537

SPRAY PATCHING
DESCRIPTION
Table 537-B: Test Methods for Mineral Aggregate
537.01 Scope – This specification describes the materials
and the professional standards required for supplying and ASTM
applying tack coat and a mixture of asphalt emulsion and Name of Test
Designation
aggregate or a pre-mixed ‘spray patch’ material for
repairing pavement cracks and other defective locations on Standard Practice for Sampling
D75
the pavement surface as applicable. Aggregates
537.02 Purpose – The purpose of spray patching is to repair C117 Standard Test Method for Materials
potholes, depressed pavements and cracks wider than Finer than 75-μm (No. 200) Sieve in
35 mm. Mineral Aggregates by Washing
Standard Test Method for Sieve
MATERIALS C136 Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
537.10 Asphalt Materials – The asphalt emulsion products
shall meet the requirements listed in Table 537-A. the Standard Test Method for Clay
Contractor shall ensure that the asphalt emulsion is C142 Lumps and Friable Particles in
compatible with the aggregates used for spray patching. Aggregates
Standard Test Methods for Liquid
D4318 Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Table 537-A:Emulsion Requirement for Spray
Index of Soils
Patching
Standard Test Method for
Emulsion Resistance of Coarse Aggregate to
D6928
Property Limits Degradation by Abrasion in the
ASHTO Test
Micro-Deval Apparatus
RS-2 WSPE1
T 49: 537.11.02 Test Requirements – The aggregate shall be
100 - 200 90 - 150
Penetration, 100 g, 5 s clean, hard, durable, moderately sharp, and free from
T 50: coatings of clay, silt or other deleterious material and shall
- ≥ 1200 contain no clay balls or other aggregations of fine material.
Float test, 60°C, seconds
The aggregates shall not be markedly hydrophilic in
T 59: character.
Viscosity, Saybolt Furol, The aggregate, when tested by the methods listed in
75-400 ≥ 50
50°C, seconds Table 537-B, shall meet the following criteria:
Demulsibility, 0.02 N (a) Clay Lumps – The aggregate shall not contain more
60 min ≤ 65 max
CaCl2, % than 0.5% by mass of clay lumps or other aggregation
Sieve Test, %. ≤ 0.1 ≤ 0.1 of fine material.

Residue by Distillation, % ≥ 65 min ≥ 68 (b) Micro-Deval – No individual test shall have a loss
factor of more than 20%.
Oil Distillate, Volume % - ≤7
(c) Plasticity – All aggregate shall be non-plastic when
Note 1: Winter Grade Spray Patch Emulsion tested in accordance with ASTM D4318.
537.12 Aggregate Gradation – The aggregates shall meet
537.11 Aggregate – The Contractor shall supply the the gradation requirements of Table 537-C.
aggregate necessary to produce a dense, stable and durable 537.13 Spray Patching Mix – The spray patching mix used
patch. The aggregates shall meet the requirements specified shall exhibit uniform coating, good cohesion, stability and
herein. workability.
537.11.01 Test Methods – The aggregate will be sampled
and tested in accordance with the standard ASTM
procedures and tests listed in Table 537-B.

o 2020 537 1 of 3
Vol. 1 Page 425 of 470
SECTION 537 PAVEMENT SPRAY PATCHING

Table 537-C: Gradation Requirements for Spray QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
Patching
537.41 Quality Control by the Contractor – The
Contractor shall be responsible for providing all resources
Sieve Size (mm) % Passing required to carry out the quality control on all the constituent
materials, processes and products, their testing and
9.5 100
inspection, within the construction of the spray patch and
4.75 75-100 the quality of the end product.
2.36 0-30 537.42 Sampling and Testing – The Ministry may request
the Contractor to provide test results showing that the
1.18 0-10 materials used for spray patching meet the requirements of
0.075 0-5 this specification as determined by the applicable tests.
The Contractor shall be responsible to provide
EQUIPMENT representative samples for the aggregate, emulsion and
patching mixture as required when requested by the
537.21 Patching Unit - The Contractor shall supply all Ministry. These samples shall be taken in presence of the
equipment necessary to complete the Work including a Ministry Representative.
patching unit of a design currently accepted by the Ministry
and in use for highway maintenance. The above samples may be tested by the Ministry to ensure
that they meet the requirements of this specification.
The machine shall:
537.43 Acceptance – Spray patches shall be accepted based
(a) provide a minimum of 5.0 m3/min of compressed air on following.
to clean cracks and the surface to be patched; and
(a) visual observation of the patching material,
(b) be capable of:
(b) surface appearance of the patch at the time of patching,
(i) spraying the asphalt emulsion to provide a tack
coat; (c) continuity with adjacent surfaces, and

(ii) blending aggregate and emulsion; (d) conformance of the patching materials to the
requirements of this specification.
(iii) applying the resulting mix to provide a high-
density patch; and At the request of the Contractor, the Ministry
Representative will attend on-Site to observe the initial
(iv) covering the repaired area with dry aggregate spray patching and advise on its acceptability, before the
The Contractor shall also supply appropriate compaction Contractor proceeds with the balance of the Work.
equipment, suitable for the mix, that is acceptable to the Prior to issuance of the Completion Certificate, all finished
Ministry Representative. patches shall be free of defective areas, as determined by the
Ministry Representative, including but not limited to, wheel
CONSTRUCTION track marking, ravelling, uneven surface, and fat spots.

537.31 General – Spray patching shall only be performed Areas showing defects shall be deemed Unacceptable Work
when the pavement surfaces are dry, and the crack and road and shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the
base are dry or nearly dry (no visible moisture), and the Ministry.
pavement surface temperature shall not be lower than 10°C.
The cracks and surface on which the spray patching material MEASUREMENT
to be placed shall be free of dirt, sand, foreign matter, and 537.81 General – Pavement Spray Patching will be
loose material, and be lightly tack coated with emulsion. measured by the volume of emulsion actually sprayed in
All cracks, potholes and depressions shall be filled to the LITRES.
level of surrounding surface, producing a level, rideable
patch, free of excess asphalt and, when swept, free of PAYMENT
loosening rock.
537.91 General – Payment for spray patching shall be made
The repaired area shall be compacted to ensure adequate at the Contract Unit Price per LITRE.
embedment of the asphalt aggregate mixture into and over
the crack or depression. The supply and application of aggregate is incidental to the
Work and will not be paid separately.
Where the in-place mix exhibits ravelling or excessive
tracking, the patch shall be covered with dry aggregate.

o 2020 537 2 of 3
Vol. 1 Page 426 of 470
SECTION 537 PAVEMENT SPRAY PATCHING

Payment at the Contract price for the above items shall be

full compensation for all labour, equipment, and material to
do the Work.

o 2020 537 3 of 3
Vol. 1 Page 427 of 470
 SECTION 541

STONE PAVING

DESCRIPTION on the Drawings and to the approval of the Ministry

Representative.
541.01 Scope – This Section covers the construction of stone
paving for grouted traffic island and median capping, dry-laid Edges of paving shall be constructed of thicker stones to form
and grouted slope protection, culvert and spillway aprons, a stable foundation and protection against any undercutting in
ditches and other like uses. waterways.
A minimum thickness of 100 to 225 mm will be specified for All paved areas shall receive a minimum 150 mm layer of
paving rock depending upon location, use and setting gravel base, well consolidated.
requirements. Requirements for rock exceeding 200 mm
Gravel level inside curbs shall permit the surface of the
thickness are specified by SS 205 for hand-laid and grouted
jointing mortar to be flush with the top of the curb.
riprap.
541.32 Construction – Construction shall be carried out with
all material, labour, tools, equipment and incidentals supplied
MATERIALS by the Contractor as necessary to complete all stone paving
work in accordance with good work practice.
541.11 Materials
A gravel base of grouted stone paving shall be well saturated
541.11.01 Rock – Rock for stone paving shall generally be
with bedding mortar slurry.
obtained from the roadway excavation, stockpiled where
designated and selected as necessary for use at the locations All rock shall be firmly embedded into the base material so
indicated on the Drawings, unless the supply of off-site rock that the voids between stones are of minimal width with the
is specified. rock surfaces relatively even as indicated on SS Drawing
SP541-01.
Rock will be required as either:
Voids of grouted paving rock shall be filled with setting and
(a) Angular rock as found or blasted; or
jointing mortar, 75 mm thick and, after consolidation and any
(b) Rounded rock. necessary chinking of the larger voids, the mortar surface
shall be smooth finished and sloped to drain freely.
All rock shall be sound, durable and clean, relatively flat on
the face to be exposed, reasonably consistent in colour tone, Finished stone paving shall show a clean even appearance,
of acceptable size (200 mm to 450 mm across) and of the free of disfiguring spalls and, where grouted, cleaned of
required thickness range. mortar staining.
541.11.02 Gravel Base – Gravel base shall be 25 mm well-
graded crushed granular aggregate.
MEASUREMENT
541.11.03 Bedding Mortar – Bedding mortar shall consist of
541.81 General – Stone Paving work will be measured by the
one part Portland cement to three parts clean, well-graded fine
SQUARE METRE of stone in place.
aggregate or coarse sand mixed with water to give a 150 mm
slump.
541.11.04 Setting and Jointing Mortar – Setting and PAYMENT
jointing mortar shall consist of one part Portland cement to
541.91 General – Payment for STONE PAVING work will
three parts clean, well-graded fine aggregate mixed with
be at the Contract Unit Price per square metre of stone in
water to give a 75 mm slump.
place.
The Contract Unit Price shall be accepted as full
CONSTRUCTION compensation for the supply of the gravel base, stone and
mortar, for complete installation, including trimming and
541.31 Preparation – Graded surfaces to receive paving shall
incidental excavation, compaction, finishing, and for all
be trimmed and well tamped to the lines and grades indicated
subsidiary work not required to be separately paid for.

BC MoTI SS 2020 541 (1 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 428 of 470
SECTION 541 STONE PAVING

BC MoTI SS 2020 541 (2 of 2)

Vol. 1 Page 429 of 470
 SECTION 582

CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

DESCRIPTION Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and
Sewers
582.01 Scope – This Section describes the requirements for
construction of roadside curb and gutter and associated C1677 Standard Specification for Joints for
underground drainage systems. Such work shall consist of Concrete Box, Using Rubber Gaskets
constructing and/or installing appurtenances shown or
CSA:
indicated on the drawings and Schedule of Approximate
Quantities and Unit Prices. A23.2 Test Methods and standard practices for
concrete
582.02 Referenced Specifications – Unless otherwise
specified, the most recent published metric edition applies. A23.4 Precast Concrete – Materials and
Construction
AASHTO:
A257 Standards for concrete pipe and manhole
M 306 Standard Specification for Drainage,
sections
Sewer, Utility, and Related Casting
A3000 Cementitious Materials Compendium
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
S6 Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code
Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
(CHBDC)
ASTM:
A48 Standard Specification for Gray Iron
MATERIALS
Castings
582.10 Design of Underground Drainage System
A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron
Castings 582.10.01 Products – Underground drainage system
products shall be designed in accordance with the applicable
C14 Standard Specification for Nonreinforced
design codes, standards and referenced specifications, and
Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert
the following:
Pipe
(a) Highway Live Load – Underground drainage system
C76 Standard Specification for Reinforced
products shall be designed for highway design live load
Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer
as follows unless otherwise specified herein:
Pipe
The design live load in accordance with the
C309 Standard Specification for Liquid
Ministry Supplement to the CHBDC S6, or
Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
HL-93 live load, or
C443 Standard Specification for Joints for
Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway
Gaskets Bridges H-20 or HS-20 live load
C478 Standard Specification for Circular Precast (b) Direct Contact Loading – The highway design live
Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections load for components that may be subjected to direct
contact with traffic wheels shall also include dynamic
C506 Standard Specification for Reinforced
impact effects. The dynamic impact allowances shall
Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain and
be in accordance with the applicable design codes and
Sewer Pipe
standards.
C507 Standard Specification for Reinforced
582.11 Drain Pipe – All drain pipe shall be of first quality,
Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain,
sound, true in form and free from defects of all kinds.
and Sewer Pipe
582.12 Manufacture of Precast Concrete Storm
C1218 Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble
Drainage Products – For all contracts awarded after
Chloride in Mortar and Concrete
December 31, 2021, all concrete pipe, box culverts,
C1433 Standard Specification for Precast manholes, catch basins, precast concrete endwalls and
Reinforced Concrete Monolithic Box associated precast concrete products shall be supplied from
a manufacturer that is certified by an independent third party

o 2020 582 1 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 430 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

certification agency to produce these products according to 582.14 Corrugated Steel Pipe – Corrugated steel pipe shall
applicable CSA and ASTM manufacturing standards. conform to the requirements of SS 320.
582.12.01 Certified Manufacturer – For all contracts 582.15 Catch Basins and Manholes
awarded after December 31, 2021, the manufacturer shall
582.15.01 Precast Reinforced Concrete – Precast
be certified under at least one for the following quality
reinforced concrete catch basin and manhole products,
assurance programs:
including but not limited to, barrels (risers), grade rings, flat
(a) The Canadian Precast Concrete Quality Assurance slab tops (lids), conical sections, base sections, steps and
(CPCQA) Certification Program. ladders shall meet the requirements of ASTM C478 or CSA
A257, and shall be gasketed or grouted to prevent
(b) The CSA Group Testing & Certification Inc. (CSA)
infiltration and exfiltration.
Certification Program
582.15.02 Corrugated Metal – Corrugated metal barrels
(c) QCAST Certification Program by the American
shall be in accordance with SS 320.
Concrete Pipe Association for Precast Products.
582.15.03 Covers and Frames – Catch basin and manhole
(d) National Precast Concrete Association (NPCA) Plant
covers and frames shall be cast iron and meet the
Certification.
requirements of ASTM A48. Catch basin and manhole
(e) Other certification organizations acceptable to the covers and frames shall be designed for highway loading in
Ministry Representative that are accredited by the accordance with either of the following:
Standards Council of Canada for the certification of
(a) AASHTO M 306 using the H-20 or HS-20 proof load
manufacturers for these products.
testing with the proof load of 178 kN; or
582.12.01 Product Markings – All products shall be
(b) The design live load in accordance with the Ministry
marked with the certification body’s logo confirming that
Supplement to the CHBDC S6, including the dynamic
the production of the product is in accordance with the
impact allowance, with the wheel load application
quality and requirements of the specified standards for the
distributed over an area of 250 mm x 250 mm.
products.
582.16 Detectable Warning Mats
582.13 Concrete Pipe and Boxes
582.16.01 General – Detectable warnings shall consist of a
582.13.01 Reinforced Concrete Pipe – Reinforced
surface of truncated domes, sized and spaced as specified
concrete pipe shall be designed for flexible rubber gaskets
below and as shown in Figure 582-1.
and shall meet the requirements of CSA A257, ASTM C76,
ASTM C506, ASTM C507, or ASTM C655. Figure 582-1:Detectable Warning Mats – Dome Size
and Spacing
582.13.02 Plain Concrete Pipe – Plain concrete pipe shall
be designed for flexible rubber gaskets and shall meet the
requirements of CSA A257 or ASTM C14.
582.13.03 Concrete Box Culverts – Concrete box culverts
shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C1433 or
ASTM C1577.
582.13.04 Gaskets – Gaskets shall be supplied with all
concrete pipe and boxes and shall meet the requirements of
CSA A257, ASTM C443, or ASTM C1677, all as
appropriate to the application.
582.13.05 Requirements – Pipe and boxes shall be legibly
marked with the date of manufacture, the name or trademark
of the manufacturer and by marks denoting plain concrete
pipe, reinforced concrete pipe or extra strength reinforced
concrete pipe, as the case may be. Pipe containing elliptical
reinforcement or otherwise requiring special placement
shall be marked on the inside of the pipe with the words
"Top" or "Bottom" at the correct place to indicate the proper
position when installed.
Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish at the
Contractor's expense such test and other information as may
be required regarding the concrete pipe proposed to be used.

o 2020 582 2 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 431 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

582.16.02 Dome Size – Truncated domes in a detectable

(b) Mix Design – The Contractor shall submit the mix
warning mat surface shall have a base diameter of 2 mm
design documentation in accordance with SS 218,
minimum and 36 mm maximum, a top diameter of
Concrete for Minor Works.
50 percent (50%) of the base diameter minimum to
65 percent (65%) of the base diameter maximum, and a (c) Trial Mixes – Contrary to SS 211.03.05, trial mixes are
height of 5.1 mm. not required.
582.16.03 Dome Spacing – Truncated domes in a 582.17.03 Sulphate Exposure – The Ministry shall notify
detectable warning mat surface shall have a center-to-center the Contractor if S-1 and/or S-2 exposure conditions exist
spacing of 41 mm minimum and 61 mm maximum, and a for the soils present on-Site. If no information is provided
base-to-base spacing of 17 mm minimum, measured by the Ministry, S-3 shall be assumed.
between the most adjacent domes on a square grid. For imported bedding material, the aggregate supplier shall
582.16.04 Contrast – Detectable warning mat surfaces shall perform the sulphate and chloride exposure assessment of
contrast visually with adjacent walking surfaces either light- its aggregate in accordance with testing requirements
on-dark, or dark-on-light. provided in Table 582-B.
582.17 Cast-in-Place Concrete – All cast-in-place The test results will be used to determine the site-specific
[CIP] concrete shall be in accordance with SS 211 exposure level as defined in Table 3 of CSA A23.1, and the
except as modified herein. concrete mix component materials modified accordingly.
Supplementary cementitious materials (SCM) shall comply
582.17.01 CIP Concrete Materials – Concrete material with the restrictions as per Table 582-C.
properties shall be as shown on the SS 582 SP Drawings.
(a) Cement Type – Types GU or GUL, except where Table 582-B: Testing Requirements for Sulphate
precluded as a result of Sulphate Exposure Class per Exposure
SS 582.17.03.
Test Applicable Test
(b) Aggregate Testing – Contrary to SS 211.03.04 Bedding Material
Parameter Methods
Aggregate testing is required for Coarse and Fine
aggregate only. Tests CSA A23.2-14A and CSA Recycled Concrete Sulphate CSA
A23.2-25A are not required. Aggregate content A23.2-8B
Sulphate CSA
(c) Slag – Further to SS 211.04.02.03, slag shall conform
to the physical and chemical requirements of content A23.2-3B
Other Aggregates
CSA A3000 for ground granulated blast furnace Chloride ASTM
Type S. Content C1218*
582.17.02 Concrete Mixes * Note: Typically used for mortar or concrete but can be
adapted for soil.
(a) CIP Concrete Mix Specifications – All cast-in-place
concrete used under this SS 582 shall have the Table 582-C: SCM Restrictions by Cement Type
properties specified in Table 582-A:
Sulphate Exposure
Table 582-A:Cast-in-Place Concrete Mix Properties GU Cement GUL Cement
Class

Placement Method GUL Cement

Criteria S-1: shall not be used
With Ministry
Hand Extruded Type F Fly ash if concrete is in
approval only
and Type S Slag contact with S1
Minimum 28-Day soils or bedding
32 MPa
Compressive Strength
S-2:
Min. 0% Min. 25%
Minimum Cement Content 335 kg/m3 Type F Fly ash
Max. 40% Max. 40%
and Type S Slag
Nominal Maximum Size of
Coarse Aggregate 20 mm 10 mm S-3:
Min. 0% Min. 15%
Type F Fly ash
Max. 40% Max. 40%
Entrained Air 5 to 8 % 6 to 9% and Type S Slag
Maximum Slump 80 mm 25 mm

o 2020 582 3 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 432 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

582.18 Self-Consolidating Concrete – Self-Consolidating CONSTRUCTION

Concrete (SCC) may be used in the manufacture of precast
582.31 Concrete Construction – All concrete work
concrete pipe (reinforced or plain), box culverts, manhole
performed under this SS 582 shall meet the requirements of
and catch basin barrels, grade rings, flat slab tops, risers,
SS 211 except as modified herein and be constructed to the
conical sections, and base sections only under the following
line and grade shown on the Drawings or as otherwise
conditions:
directed by the Ministry Representative. Combined
582.18.01 SCC Limitations – SCC may only be used for concrete curb and gutter will include returns at the
products limited to the following sizes and specifications intersections if so directed.
(a) pipes and barrels smaller than 3.0 m in any internal The combined curb and gutter shall be constructed to the
cross-sectional dimension manufactured in accordance standard cross-section shown on SS Drawing SP582-01.01
with CSA A257, ASTM C14, C76, C478, C506, C507 and to such layout plans as are attached, except where the
or C655, face of the curb varies and at lanes and driveways where
drop curbs are ordered.
(b) boxes with both internal spans and rise less than 3.0 m
manufactured in accordance with ASTM C1433 or Expansion joints 13 mm in thickness cut to the cross-section
C1577, of the concrete curb and sidewalk, composed of premoulded
(c) with written approval from the Ministry joint filler shall be installed at approximately 15 m intervals
Representative, culvert endwalls manufactured in for sidewalks and 9 m intervals for concrete curb. They will
accordance with CSA A23.4 also be installed when the sidewalk abuts a rigid structure
or changes direction as well as at curb returns, either side of
(i) less than 2.0 m in exposed height; or
driveways, and other locations as directed by the Ministry
(ii) where Ministry unique structure numbers are Representative. Expansion and isolation joints shall be
precast in, up to 3.5 m of exposed height. constructed to the full depth of the slab. Contraction joints
582.18.02 SCC Documentation – The Contractor shall shall be placed to a maximum of 3 m intervals, across both
provide the following for review upon request by the sidewalk and concrete curb and be tooled or saw-cut into the
Ministry Representative: concrete to a depth of 1/3 the thickness of the concrete.

(a) a full copy of the applicable concrete mix design Concrete Curb horizontal and vertical alignment shall be in
utilized in the manufacture of any product(s) intended accordance with the Drawings within ±10 mm, and such
to be incorporated into Ministry works; and that there is no gap greater than 6 mm under a 3 m straight
edge.
(b) Documentation in accordance with either of the
following: Ambient temperature forecasts used to trigger hot weather
or cold weather concreting procedures shall be as provided
(i) Details in accordance with CSA A23.2-24C by Environment Canada or another source acceptable to the
documenting the proven history of successful Ministry Representative.
performance for the required strength, durability,
and other performance requirements of the 582.31.01 Delivery – Contrary to SS 211.08.03, the
proposed mix design for the manufacture of any temperature of all concrete, from time of batching to
product(s) intended to be incorporated into complete discharge shall remain between 10°C and 32°C.
Ministry works, or 582.31.02 Sidewalk Finishing – All cast-in-place concrete
(ii) A full-scale test shall be used to verify the self- shall be finished with a magnesium or wood float, to a
consolidating characteristics for placement and for closed, uniform surface. Sidewalks shall be textured
the hardened concrete properties of the mix design transversely with a medium broom finish.
for the manufacture of any product(s) intended to
be incorporated into Ministry works. 582.31.03 Curing – When ambient temperatures are, or are
Documentation in accordance with CSA forecast to be, greater than 35°C at any time during the
A23.2-24C shall be submitted demonstrating that seven (7) days after placement, curing shall be done in
the proposed mix design will achieve the required accordance with SS 211.15.02.
strength, durability, and performance requirements At temperatures below 35°C, the Contractor shall provide
(c) The self-consolidating concrete mix shall conform to concrete curing using:
the requirements of CSA A23.1, including Clause 8.6 (a) Moist curing per SS 211.15.02; or
and Table 22, and the appropriate CSA and ASTM
(b) Poly-Alpha methyl-styrene (PAMS), Type 2, Class B,
standards listed in SS 582.18.01 above.
or Acrylic Cure and Seal, ASTM C309 based curing
compound to all exposed concrete surfaces at rate

o 2020 582 4 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 433 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

recommended by manufacturer in two (2) applications 582.34 Storm Drains – Storm drains shall be constructed
within 12 hours of placing concrete. where shown on Drawings, or as directed by the Ministry
Representative, and in accordance with the Drawings and
Resin- and wax-based curing compounds shall not be used.
specifications covering the various types and as attached
582.31.04 Hot Weather Concreting – Hot Weather herewith. The trench and other preparatory work shall be
Concreting procedures shall be done in accordance with approved by the Ministry Representative before actual
SS 211.18 (except as modified herein) when ambient air placing starts.
temperature is, or is forecast to be, 35°C or higher during
582.35 Placing
the placing period.
582.35.01 Spigot and Bell Pipe – Spigot and bell pipe shall
Concrete shall not have a temperature greater than 25°C at
be laid beginning at the lower end with the bell end pointing
any time between batching and placement. Concrete shall
up-grade. Suitable excavation or bedding must be provided
not be placed against any material/surface which is at a
to accommodate the bell so that the pipe is supported along
temperature above 35°C.
its full length and not at the ends alone.
Curing shall be in accordance with SS 582.31.03 and
582.35.02 Concrete Pipe – Concrete pipe shall be laid
commence as soon as possible.
beginning at the lower end with the groove end pointing up-
582.31.05 Cold Weather Concreting – Cold Weather grade. Pipe with elliptical reinforcement shall be laid with
Concreting procedures shall be done in accordance with the minor axis of the reinforcement as marked by the
SS 211.19 (except as modified herein) when ambient air manufacturer in a vertical position.
temperature is, or is forecast to be, below 5°C during
Concrete pipe joints shall be sealed using a rubber gasket,
placement, and/or is forecast to fall below 5°C during the
installed in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s
first seven (7) days after placing.
recommendations.
Concrete shall not be placed against any material/surfaces
582.35.03 Corrugated Steel Pipe – Corrugated steel pipe
which is at a temperature below 0°C.
shall be laid beginning at the lower end and, where
Contrary to SS 211.19(a), the temperature of the concrete applicable, with the outside laps pointing up-grade and the
shall be between 15°C and 30°C, from the time of batching longitudinal joint on the side. The separate sections shall be
until placement. firmly jointed together and any metal in joints which is not
thoroughly protected by galvanizing shall be coated with
Contrary to SS 211.19(e), the Contractor shall provide
two heavy coats of zinc rich paint selected from the
protection and heating if required, to:
Ministry’s Recognized Products List under the category of
(a) maintain a uniform curing temperature, at a minimum “Additional Paint Coatings – Zinc-Rich Touch-up Paints
10°C, for at least three (3) days; and and Primers”.
(b) protect the concrete from freezing for another four (4) 582.35.04 General – Pipes shall be accurately set and laid
days. to even gradients, concentric and in straight lines between
582.31.06 Repairs – Contrary to SS 211, superficial manholes.
defects, including minor cracking and scaling, shall be 582.36 Bedding and Backfilling – The bedding of all
repaired: concrete pipes shall consist of 19 mm or 25 mm crushed
(a) using materials from the Recognized Product List; gravel to a minimum depth of 150 mm below the pipe. The
bedding below the middle 1/3 of the pipe shall be left
(b) in accordance with the repair product manufacturer’s uncompacted for a depth 75 mm or 1/24th of the pipe
recommendations; and diameter, whichever is greater.
(c) to the satisfaction of the Ministry Representative. The bedding for corrugated steel pipe shall be in accordance
582.32 Catch Basins – Catch basins shall be constructed, with SS 303.
where shown and as required in the Drawings or as the The backfill shall consist of 19 mm or 25 mm crushed
Ministry Representative may direct, in accordance with the gravel with a minimum cover of 150 mm and in the
intent of SS Drawings SP582-02.01 through SP582-02.05. remainder of the trench shall consist of the natural
582.33 Manholes – Manholes shall be constructed at the excavated material unless such material is considered
locations and to invert levels shown in Drawings or as the unsuitable by the Ministry Representative. Such natural
Ministry Representative may direct in accordance with the material shall have a maximum size of 75 mm. All
intent of SS Drawings SP582-03.01 through SP582-03.08. materials shall be compacted in horizontal layers not more
than 200 mm.
582.37 Concrete End Walls – See SS 303.23.

o 2020 582 5 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 434 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

582.38 Detectable Warning Mats – Detectable warning furnished and done in connection with form setting, supply
mats shall be constructed where shown on Drawings, or as and placing of air entrained concrete; supply and installation
directed by the Ministry Representative, and in strict of expansion joints; finishing, curing, protection and
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. superintendence.
582.92 Catch Basins – Payment for CATCH BASINS will
be at the Contact Unit Price per each. The Contract Unit
MEASUREMENT
Price shall include everything furnished and done;
582.81 Portland Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter – excavation, backfilling and tamping around catch basins,
Portland Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter will be formwork, concreting, setting in of pipe drains, setting and
measured by the METRE. securing of cast iron catch basin frames and gratings, steel
baffles, reinstatement of surface, cleaning out, protection
582.82 Catch Basins – Catch Basins will be measured per
and superintendence and, all other things necessary.
EACH.
582.93 Manholes – Payment for MANHOLES will be at the
582.83 Manholes – Manholes will be measured per EACH.
Contract Unit Price per standard 2 m manhole with
The Contractor shall allow in the bid price for the appropriate depth correction as described in SS 582.83. The
construction of manholes having an overall depth of Contract Unit Price shall include everything furnished and
concrete section of 2 m (see dimensions marked "variable"). done; formwork, concreting, setting in of storm drains,
In addition, the Contractor shall bid a price per 0.3 m of construction of smooth invert sections, cement mortar
depth of manhole, which shall be added to or subtracted settings, steel ladder rungs, brick construction, setting of
from the bid price for the manhole depending on the actual manhole frames and covers, cleaning out, protection and
depth of the manhole to be constructed. superintendence, and all other things necessary.
582.84 Storm Drains – Storm drains, including box 582.94 Storm Drains – Payment for STORM DRAINS will
culverts, will be measured by the LINEAR METRE in be at the Contract Unit Price per linear metre in place. The
place. Contract Unit Price shall be accepted as full compensation
582.85 Bedding and Backfill – Bedding and backfill will for everything furnished and everything done in connection
be measured by the CUBIC METRE in place. herewith, but shall not include payment for excavation,
riprap, paving, concrete cradles, end walls, bedding and
582.86 Concrete End Walls – See SS 303.81. backfill. These shall be paid for at their respective prices in
582.87 Detectable Warning Mats – Detectable warning the Schedule of Approximate Quantities and Unit Prices.
mats will be measured by the SQUARE METRE in place. 582.95 Bedding and Backfill – Payment for BEDDING
and BACKFILL will be at the Contract Unit Price per cubic
metre in place.
PAYMENT
582.96 Concrete End Walls – See SS 303.91.
582.91 Portland Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter –
Payment for combined Portland cement CONCRETE 582.97 Detectable Warning Mats – Payment for
CURB AND GUTTER will be at the Contract Unit Price DETECTABLE WARNING MATS will be at the Contract
per metre. The Contract Unit Price shall include everything Unit Price per square metre in place.

o 2020 582 6 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 435 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 7 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 436 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 8 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 437 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 9 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 438 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 10 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 439 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 11 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 440 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 12 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 441 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 13 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 442 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 14 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 443 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 15 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 444 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 16 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 445 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 17 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 446 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 18 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 447 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 19 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 448 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 20 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 449 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 21 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 450 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 22 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 451 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 23 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 452 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 24 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 453 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 25 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 454 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 26 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 455 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 27 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 456 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 28 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 457 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 29 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 458 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 30 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 459 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 31 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 460 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 32 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 461 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 33 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 462 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 34 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 463 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 35 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 464 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 36 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 465 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 37 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 466 of 470
SECTION 582 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND STORM DRAINAGE

o 2020 582 38 of 38
Vol. 1 Page 467 of 470
 SECTION 586

PLANT MIXED
PORTLAND CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSE

DESCRIPTION EQUIPMENT
586.01 Preliminary and General – This Section describes 586.21 Mixing Plant – The Portland Cement treated base
the materials, plant equipment and quality of work required course shall be mixed in a stationary plant employing either
for the stabilization of base course material with Portland continuous or batch type equipment.
cement.
The plant shall be equipped with interlocked feeding and
586.02 General Description of Work – The cement treated metering devices which will add the cement, water and
base shall consist of prepared aggregate, Portland cement aggregates in proportions established by the Ministry
and water uniformly mixed to meet the criteria specified, in Representative to a tolerance of  3% by weight. The plant
a central mixing plant of satisfactory type, hauled out and shall be capable of mixing the ingredients uniformly.
laid on the prepared subgrade and compacted to established Suitable storage shall be provided for bulk cement, and if
line and grade. The Contractor shall supply all materials. required, bulk mineral filler. The capacity of the mixing
plant shall be such that a minimum of 0.4 km of full width
cement treated base can be laid per daily shift, i.e., sustained
MATERIALS mixing capacity shall normally be not less than 250 tonnes
per hour.
586.11 Cement – Portland Cement to be supplied for the
work will comply with the requirements of SS 211 and tests Details of the plant and its operation shall be submitted to
of the CSA A3000 “Cementitious Materials Compendium". the Ministry Representative for approval a minimum of
seven (7) days prior to commencing construction.
586.12 Water – The water shall be clean and free from
substances deleterious to the hardening of the cement 586.22 Cement Treated Base Spreader – The spreading
stabilized base course. device may be self-propelled, pushed, or towed; and shall
be so constructed and operated as to produce without
586.13 Aggregate – The aggregate supplied shall be
segregation or surface tearing, a layer of material which is
composed of inert durable material uniform in quality and
uniform in thickness and surface contour, either
free from organic impurities and soft or disintegrated
longitudinal or transverse, and free from irregularities in
particles. When tested according to ASTM C117, the
density. Whichever type of spreader may be used, it is
aggregate shall meet the gradation requirements for 25 mm
mandatory that it be provided with a positive mechanical
WGB as listed in Section 202.
means for distributing the cement treated base transversely
The material shall also be tested in accordance with ASTM across the front of the cut-off blade or screed.
D4318 and shall have:
Spreading equipment which rides on the freshly spread
• a liquid limit not greater than twenty-five (≤ 25); material and produces tracks or partially compacted areas
and behind the cut-off blade or screed will be acceptable
provided no displacement of material or filling of the tracks
• a plasticity index not greater than six (≤ 6). occurs, and provided further that the tracks are not of such
All aggregate shall be stockpiled in horizontal layers spread depth as to be visible after compaction is completed. The
and levelled to not more than 1.0 m in thickness. The use of a motor grader or any other spreading device, which
stockpile area shall be cleared of all vegetation, trees, brush, requires repeated trips over the same area, will not be
rock and other debris and a uniform ground surface prepared permitted for spreading.
before the aggregate is deposited on the site. 586.23 Water Distributors – Water distributors shall be the
The material shall be loaded from the stockpile into the plant pressure type, equipped with spray bar mounting nozzles
in such a manner as to ensure that a uniform cut of the pile similar to those used on asphalt distributors and capable of
is obtained. applying the water in accurate quantities and as a uniform
spray. Splash plate type distributors or those equipped with
Mixing may not commence until a minimum of 30% of the spray bars that eject fine streams of water will not be
total quantities of aggregate required is in the stockpile. permitted. The distributor must be provided with a
Subsequent addition of prepared aggregate to the pile shall satisfactorily accurate means of measuring the quantity of
be organized to ensure continued uniformity of the aggregate water sprayed.
supply to the mixing plant.

BC MoTI SS 2020 586 (1 of 3)

Vol. 1 Page 468 of 470
SECTION 586 PLANT MIXED PORTLAND CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSE

CONSTRUCTION and recompacted, to the satisfaction of the Ministry

Representative.
586.31 Mixing – The mix proportions shall be determined
by the Contractor, from samples taken at the 586.32.05 Water – Water shall be incidental to the Work
commencement of aggregate production and in accordance and shall be applied as required.
with the mix design criteria provided in the Contract, and
The surface of the uncompacted, partially compacted, and
shall be subject to approval by the Ministry Representative.
completely compacted material shall always be kept moist.
The aggregate, mineral filler and cement shall be fed into An adequate water supply shall be maintained at the point
the pugmill accurately, according to the proportions of compacting.
required, and shall be thoroughly dry mixed. Water shall
586.32.06 Speed – The speed of operations shall be such
then be added in the required amount and mixing continued
that not more than forty-five minutes shall elapse between
until uniformity is achieved.
the time of starting mixing and the time of starting
586.32 Spreading and Compaction compaction. Shaping and final compaction shall be
completed within two hours of commencement of mixing at
586.32.01 Surface – The surface of the subgrade shall be
the plant.
thoroughly moistened just prior to placing the cement
treated base mixture thereon and shall be kept moist but not 586.32.07 Finished Surface – The finished surface of the
excessively wet until covered by the mixture. compacted base shall at all points be accurate to  15 mm
of the grade and shall not, at any point, deviate by more than
586.32.02 Cement Treated Base Mixture – The cement
10 mm from the bottom of a 3 m straight edge laid in any
treated base mixture shall be hauled to the roadbed in trucks
direction on the surface on either side of the crown of the
equipped with protective covers and shall then be laid using
roadway.
a spreading device as per SS 586.22 to produce a layer of
uniform density and cross section and in sufficient quantity 586.32.08 Temperature – No construction shall be
to provide a compacted base conforming to the grade and undertaken when the temperature is below 4.0°C or when
cross section set by the Ministry Representative. the conditions indicate that the temperature will fall below
4.0°C in the next 24 hours or if the subgrade is frozen.
End dumping on the roadway followed by spreading will
not be permitted. 586.33 Protection and Cover
Depositing and spreading the material on the roadway shall 586.33.01 General – Protection and cover shall be provided
progress continuously without breaks, except as otherwise by one of the methods, A or B, given below and as directed
directed by the Ministry Representative. in the Special Provisions.
At any break, including the end of each day's full width (a) Method A: Crushed Gravel Course – A 25 mm
construction, a straight transverse construction joint shall be crushed gravel shall be laid not more than 24 hours
formed by cutting back into the completed work to form a after the treated base is laid. The surface of the treated
true vertical face and by installing a temporary wooden base and the overlying gravel shall be kept moist by the
header, if required by the Ministry Representative. application of water as directed by the Ministry
Representative.
586.32.03 Compaction – Immediately following spreading,
the material shall be compacted to a minimum 100% of the (b) Method B: Bituminous Seal – As soon as possible
Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density obtained by after the cement treated base course has been finished,
ASTM D698. in accordance with preceding subsections, a bituminous
seal shall be applied to the surface and sanded to protect
586.32.04 Compaction Equipment – The Contractor shall
the cement treated base course from drying out during
supply compacting equipment having sufficient capacity to
the seven day curing period. The finished base course
produce the specified degree of compaction within the time
shall be kept continuously moist until the seal has been
limits specified. The use of compacting equipment which
applied.
marks, ruts, cracks or otherwise loosens or damages the
surface of the cement treated base will not be permitted. The bituminous sealing material shall be applied at a
rate between 0.7 L/m2 to 1.0 L/m² or as directed by the
Wherever compaction planes are formed in the cement
Ministry Representative in order to give complete
treated base during spreading, shaping or compaction, they
surface coverage without excessive runoff.
shall be removed by scarifying or tilling the surface to the
required depth to completely remove the compaction plane Generally, this work shall be governed by the
and in such a manner as to thoroughly break up the applicable provisions of SS 502.21. At the time of
compaction planes. Scarifying and pulverization may be sealing, the surface of the cement treated base must be
performed by any suitable equipment – nail drag, weeder, dense, free from all loose and extraneous material and
disk harrow or rotary tiller that will satisfactorily perform shall contain sufficient moisture to prevent penetration
the work required. The scarified material will be regraded of the bituminous material. If needed, water shall be

BC MoTI SS 2020 586 (2 of 3)

Vol. 1 Page 469 of 470
SECTION 586 PLANT MIXED PORTLAND CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSE

applied in sufficient quantity to fill the surface voids of MEASUREMENT

the soil cement immediately before the bituminous
586.81 Cement Treated Base – Cement treated base in
material is applied. The seal cover shall be effectively
place will be measured by the TONNE for the total mass
maintained by the Contractor during the seven day
actually accepted and incorporated in the base of the road.
curing period.
586.33.02 Protection – Any finished portion of the base
course adjacent to construction, which is travelled by PAYMENT
equipment used in constructing an adjoining section, shall
be protected in such a manner as to prevent equipment from 586.91 Cement Treated Base – Payment for CEMENT
TREATED BASE will be at the Contract Unit Price per
marring or damaging the completed work.
tonne for the total mass actually accepted and incorporated
586.33.03 Temperature – At any time when the air in the base of the road. Payment shall provide full
temperature may be expected to fall to the freezing point, compensation for supply or production of aggregate;
during the day or the night, sufficient above protection shall supply, handling, hauling and storage of bulk cement and
be given to the cement treated base to prevent its freezing filler; provision of mixing water and plant mixing of cement
for seven days after placement and until the soil cement has treated base; haulage, spreading, watering, grading and
hardened. compaction of the base material in place; and for all labour,
equipment, plant, tools, superintendence, traffic control and
586.34 Maintenance – The Contractor shall maintain the
all other incidentals necessary to complete the work in
entire base course in good condition satisfactory to the
accordance with the specifications.
Ministry Representative from commencement of
construction until it has been paved with asphalt concrete.
Maintenance shall include immediate repairs to any defects
that may occur and shall be repeated at the Contractor's
expense as often as may be necessary to keep the section
continuously intact.

BC MoTI SS 2020 586 (3 of 3)

Vol. 1 Page 470 of 470